Total

Eclipse
Version 5.0 User Manual

(800)800-1759 (772)288-3266
www.eclipsecat.com

Copyright 2010 by Advantage Software, Inc. All Rights Reserved Worldwide This manual contains information and trade secrets proprietary to Advantage Software, Inc. It is intended for use by Advantage Software customers only. No part of this manual may be copied or distributed, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any human or computer language, in any form or by any means, whether electronic, mechanical, magnetic, manual or otherwise, or disclosed to third parties without the express written permission of Advantage Software, Inc.

Total Eclipse Manual contents at-a-glance

Chapter 1 Introduction to the User Manual.......................................................................19 Chapter 2 Installation of Total Eclipse...............................................................................21 Chapter 3 Getting Started with Total Eclipse....................................................................23 Chapter 4 User Profiles ........................................................................................................55 Chapter 5 Setting the Display the Way you Want .............................................................65 Chapter 6 Working with Dictionaries ................................................................................75 Chapter 7 Notes and Translating.......................................................................................117 Chapter 8 Editing ...............................................................................................................147 Chapter 9 Formatting Transcripts....................................................................................213 Chapter 10 Block Files........................................................................................................245 Chapter 11 Hyperkeys, Macros, and Keyboard Shortcuts.............................................255 Chapter 12 Automatic indexing.........................................................................................265 Chapter 13 Realtime...........................................................................................................293 Appendices...........................................................................................................................323
Appendix Appendix Appendix Appendix Appendix Appendix Appendix Appendix Appendix Appendix A: Keyboard shortcuts............................................................................................323 B: Hyperkeys........................................................................................................329 C: Toolbars............................................................................................................333 D: Table of Standard Dictionary Commands.............................................................335 E: Cursor Movement...............................................................................................339 F: Windows tips.....................................................................................................341 G: International Options.........................................................................................363 H: Regular expression table....................................................................................367 I: Visualizer Topics.................................................................................................369 J: Steno writer emulator.........................................................................................379

Chapter 14 Reference Guide..............................................................................................383 Chapter 15 Index.................................................................................................................521

TOTAL ECLIPSE TABLE

OF

CONTENTS

Chapter 1 Introduction to the User Manual.......................................................................19

Getting Started............................................................................................................................19 Total Eclipse Basics.......................................................................................................................19 Reference ...................................................................................................................................19 Using Acrobat Reader to access the manual...................................................................................19 Links.........................................................................................................................................20 Bookmarks.................................................................................................................................20 Thumbnails................................................................................................................................20 Updates ......................................................................................................................................20

Chapter 2 Installation of Total Eclipse...............................................................................21

Installation........................................................................................................................................21 Help.................................................................................................................................................21 Context-sensitive help..................................................................................................................21 Tutorial.............................................................................................................................................21 Network Installation.........................................................................................................................22 Convenience Key...............................................................................................................................22

Chapter 3 Getting Started with Total Eclipse....................................................................23

Running Total Eclipse.........................................................................................................................23 Main View Icon Bar....................................................................................................................23 The main program window.........................................................................................................24 Status bar..................................................................................................................................25 Info bar ...........................................................................................................................................25 AutoMagic...................................................................................................................................26 Size...........................................................................................................................................28 Info bar settings.........................................................................................................................28 Font..........................................................................................................................................30 Translation statistics...................................................................................................................30 Auto-briefs ...............................................................................................................................31 Waveform display.......................................................................................................................31 Dialog boxes and windows, and Edit boxes..........................................................................................31 Resizing.......................................................................................................................................31 Zooming......................................................................................................................................31 Transparency...............................................................................................................................32 Anchoring....................................................................................................................................32 Simplification...............................................................................................................................32 Customize menu..........................................................................................................................33 Font selection..............................................................................................................................33 Edit boxes....................................................................................................................................34 File types..........................................................................................................................................34 Note files.....................................................................................................................................34 Eclipse text files...........................................................................................................................34 Dictionary files.............................................................................................................................35 Closing and Saving files................................................................................................................35 File Manager................................................................................................................................35 Ways to Issue Total Eclipse Commands...............................................................................................35 Key combinations (keyboard shortcuts).........................................................................................35 Main Menus.................................................................................................................................36 Toolbars......................................................................................................................................38 Moving toolbars..........................................................................................................................38 Help Using Total Eclipse ....................................................................................................................39 Context-sensitive help..................................................................................................................39 Help topics..................................................................................................................................39 Visualizer topics...........................................................................................................................39

Eclipse documentation..................................................................................................................39 Internet support...........................................................................................................................40 Lesson Player...............................................................................................................................40 About Eclipse...............................................................................................................................40 New Version changes...................................................................................................................40 Where Do I Start?.............................................................................................................................41 Setting up a user..........................................................................................................................41 First-time User...........................................................................................................................41 Transferring from another CAT System?.......................................................................................41 User Settings.............................................................................................................................41 Converting dictionaries.................................................................................................................41 To convert a dictionary with the conversion wizard.......................................................................42 To import a dictionary directly.....................................................................................................42 Document setup wizard..............................................................................................................43 Creating a Transcript .........................................................................................................................44 Reading notes..............................................................................................................................44 Translating notes..........................................................................................................................45 Opening a Translated Text File......................................................................................................46 Fixing Mistakes: Undo (known as the Oops key).............................................................................47 Moving the Cursor........................................................................................................................47 Go to a specific page....................................................................................................................48 Go to a specific timecode..............................................................................................................48 Moving among trouble spots (Scanning)........................................................................................48 Globals.............................................................................................................................................49 Marking text......................................................................................................................................49 Formatting........................................................................................................................................49 Additional Transcript Elements ...........................................................................................................50 Block files....................................................................................................................................50 To create a block file...................................................................................................................51 Print Commands..........................................................................................................................51 Document formatting...................................................................................................................52 Printing and other output..............................................................................................................52 Other Output options..................................................................................................................53 WYSIWYG?.......................................................................................................................................53

Chapter 4 User Profiles ........................................................................................................55

Overview..........................................................................................................................................55 User Settings | User tab.....................................................................................................................57 Automatically load last settings used.............................................................................................57 Settings management - Use to create and use different format files.................................................57 Load settings button...................................................................................................................57 Save settings button...................................................................................................................58 Settings migration - Use to move settings from one place to another...............................................58 Exporting and Importing User Settings.........................................................................................58 Global settings.............................................................................................................................60 The Dictionaries button................................................................................................................60 Indicating current dictionaries.....................................................................................................60 Advanced User Settings ....................................................................................................................61 Directories...................................................................................................................................61 Password Protecting User Settings.................................................................................................62 Re-enable Alerts...........................................................................................................................63 Document journaling (and the Rebuild from journal button)............................................................63 Serial port log..............................................................................................................................63 Create New User...............................................................................................................................63

Chapter 5 Setting the Display the Way you Want .............................................................65

Getting Maximum Screen Space.........................................................................................................65 View Toggles.....................................................................................................................................66 Arranging document windows............................................................................................................66 Toolbar customization........................................................................................................................68 Adjusting Display Characteristics.........................................................................................................68

Zoom in / Zoom out ........................................................................................................................68 Cursor Display...................................................................................................................................69 Lines below cursor.......................................................................................................................70 Text display.......................................................................................................................................70 Editing font..................................................................................................................................70 Color selections............................................................................................................................71 To set text colors........................................................................................................................71 Viewing Margins, Line Numbers, and White Space...............................................................................72 Left margin display.....................................................................................................................72 Line number display...................................................................................................................72 Line spacing display....................................................................................................................72 Miscellaneous display options........................................................................................................72 Print commands.........................................................................................................................72 Smooth scrolling........................................................................................................................72 All caps .....................................................................................................................................72 Font Width.................................................................................................................................73 Notebar Options button..............................................................................................................73 Page boundaries .........................................................................................................................74 WYSIWYG...................................................................................................................................74

Chapter 6 Working with Dictionaries ................................................................................75

Overview..........................................................................................................................................75 Opening Dictionaries....................................................................................................................76 Viewing and Editing dictionary files.....................................................................................................77 Display properties........................................................................................................................79 Moving around in a dictionary.......................................................................................................80 Temporary markers....................................................................................................................81 Making and Editing Dictionaries..........................................................................................................81 Creating a New Dictionary File......................................................................................................81 Building a Dictionary from Scratch.................................................................................................82 Entering strokes in realtime ........................................................................................................82 To build a dictionary...................................................................................................................82 Building a dictionary from a word list.............................................................................................84 Adding individual entries to a dictionary.........................................................................................84 To add individual entries to a dictionary.......................................................................................85 Formatting codes and dictionary commands ................................................................................85 Adding, Copying, and Moving Dictionary Entries to Other Dictionaries...................................................85 Marking entries............................................................................................................................86 Marking entries Using F7.............................................................................................................86 Selecting Entries for modification..................................................................................................86 Modifying entries..........................................................................................................................87 Adding a comment to an entry....................................................................................................88 Copying/writing entries.................................................................................................................88 Using the Write command...........................................................................................................88 Using the Windows Copy command.............................................................................................89 Moving entries from one dictionary to another...............................................................................89 Using the Separate (Transfer) command......................................................................................89 Using the Windows Cut command...............................................................................................89 Importing, Merging, and Unmerging...................................................................................................90 Importing a dictionary into Total Eclipse.......................................................................................90 Trimming redundant entries........................................................................................................91 Unmerging dictionaries.................................................................................................................91 AutoMagic in Dictionaries...................................................................................................................91 Exporting & Converting Total Eclipse Dictionaries.................................................................................92 Spell Checking a Dictionary................................................................................................................94 Specifying Current Dictionaries ..........................................................................................................94 Types of dictionaries.....................................................................................................................94 Setting default dictionaries............................................................................................................95 Searching Dictionaries.......................................................................................................................96 Search Overview..........................................................................................................................96 Search for an entry by number....................................................................................................97

Text and steno search without filtering........................................................................................97 Search and Replace .....................................................................................................................97 Replacing found text entries........................................................................................................98 Steno searching...........................................................................................................................98 Using search criteria and limiting searches...................................................................................98 Searching by Number of Strokes.................................................................................................99 Searching for Steno plus text......................................................................................................99 Searching for Macro strokes in steno...........................................................................................99 More specific Text searches:.........................................................................................................99 Custom Searches.............................................................................................................................100 Editing Dictionary Entries (text or steno)...........................................................................................101 To change the steno outline........................................................................................................102 To change the text definition.......................................................................................................102 Dictionary statistics..........................................................................................................................102 Printing your Dictionary....................................................................................................................103 Printing marked entries...............................................................................................................104 Taking Care of Your Dictionary..........................................................................................................104 Auto-backup of your Main dictionary............................................................................................104 Backing up dictionaries...............................................................................................................104 Backing up and restoring from within Total Eclipse ......................................................................104 Backing Up...............................................................................................................................104 Restoring.................................................................................................................................105 Backing up with File Manager......................................................................................................105 Backing up and restoring with Windows Explorer..........................................................................106 Overview of backup procedure using Windows Explorer..............................................................106 Restoring.................................................................................................................................107 Editing your dictionary................................................................................................................107 Dictionary Syntax............................................................................................................................108 Conflicts....................................................................................................................................108 Examples.................................................................................................................................108 AutoMagic and conflicts............................................................................................................109 General Commands....................................................................................................................109 Comments in Dictionary Entries...................................................................................................110 Number Conversion Command Codes..........................................................................................111 Punctuating conditional text........................................................................................................111 Virtual untranslates...................................................................................................................115 Font Changes in Dictionary Entries....................................................................................................115 Font command examples:.........................................................................................................116 Font Color ...............................................................................................................................116

Chapter 7 Notes and Translating.......................................................................................117

About the Translation Process...........................................................................................................117 Reading Notes.................................................................................................................................117 Setting up Total Eclipse to read your notes...................................................................................117 To setup (or configure) Total Eclipse to read your notes ..........................................................118 Reading Notes to a File...............................................................................................................119 Appending notes to other note files...........................................................................................120 Translating from the open notes window....................................................................................120 Opening and Displaying Note Files....................................................................................................120 AutoMagic in Note files....................................................................................................................120 Moving the Cursor in Note files.........................................................................................................121 Jump to a stroke or fold..............................................................................................................121 Searching for steno and repeating searches.................................................................................122 Repeating the search................................................................................................................122 Keyboard layouts for languages other than English.......................................................................122 Extracting and Copying Portions of Note Files ...................................................................................122 To combine parts of note files....................................................................................................122 To combine note files................................................................................................................122 Printing a note file...........................................................................................................................123 Exporting a Note file........................................................................................................................123 Importing note files.........................................................................................................................123

Importing a note file from ASCII ................................................................................................123 Importing a note file from an RTF file..........................................................................................124 Globaling in a Note File...............................................................................................................124 Translating Notes.............................................................................................................................125 User Settings | Translate tab: Before you translate........................................................................125 Phonetic untranslates ..............................................................................................................125 Untran borders: Enclosing untranslates within characters ........................................................126 Suppress Untrans.....................................................................................................................126 Integral pre/suf........................................................................................................................126 Making Translation More Accurate.....................................................................................................126 Misstroke setup..........................................................................................................................126 Fix misstrokes during translation ...............................................................................................127 Dragged keys ..........................................................................................................................127 Dropped keys...........................................................................................................................127 Translation Magic.......................................................................................................................127 Translation magic weight setting................................................................................................128 Other Translation tab options......................................................................................................128 Tie related items......................................................................................................................128 Convert ANSWER to:................................................................................................................128 Insert missing BY lines..............................................................................................................128 Tuck punctuation inside quotes..................................................................................................128 Pick 1st conflict choice by default..............................................................................................129 Suppress double paragraphs......................................................................................................129 Non-capping words ..................................................................................................................129 Speaker list................................................................................................................................129 Using the Speaker list during translation or editing......................................................................130 The Speaker list prompt box......................................................................................................131 Other Speaker list options.........................................................................................................131 Changing Dictionaries ..............................................................................................................132 Loading from dictionaries..........................................................................................................132 Using the Speaker List with the Find function.............................................................................133 Seating Chart............................................................................................................................133 Setting Number Formats..................................................................................................................135 AutoMagic and numbers.............................................................................................................135 Ignore written numbers - Writing out numbers.............................................................................136 Ignore written numbers and decimals........................................................................................136 Process and as a number.........................................................................................................136 Force measurements to digits......................................................................................................136 Force separators in currency.......................................................................................................136 Minimum quantity size................................................................................................................137 Adding commas and other number delimiters.............................................................................137 Extra ordinal formatting..............................................................................................................137 Glue numbers............................................................................................................................137 Time format...............................................................................................................................137 digits= ......................................................................................................................................137 Applying templates to specific strings of numbers .....................................................................137 Default number type...................................................................................................................138 Creating and editing user templates.............................................................................................139 Template syntax.......................................................................................................................139 Optional Portions in Number Templates......................................................................................139 Numeric Classes.........................................................................................................................140 Controlling the writing out of numbers.......................................................................................140 Write out.................................................................................................................................140 At start....................................................................................................................................140 Clarify......................................................................................................................................140 Vocabulary setup: Changing the written word for a number .......................................................140 Translating the File..........................................................................................................................141 Setting dictionaries for the job....................................................................................................142 Job Dictionary .........................................................................................................................142 Edit Dictionary .........................................................................................................................143 Benefiting from the Scopist's conflict selections..........................................................................143

Additional Translation Options.....................................................................................................144 Phonetic Untranslates...............................................................................................................144 Make edit station info ..............................................................................................................144 Record Audio...........................................................................................................................144 Enable output ..........................................................................................................................144 Including block files when translating.........................................................................................144 Tran and edit............................................................................................................................144 Quick tran ...............................................................................................................................144 Other Translation Modes...........................................................................................................144 Translation Statistics.................................................................................................................145 Stopping a translation.................................................................................................................146

Chapter 8 Editing ...............................................................................................................147

Hyperkeys.......................................................................................................................................147 To print a list of Hyperkey and standard keyboard assignments:..................................................147 Type in text or inserting text when in Hyperkeys...........................................................................147 Using Hyperkeys and AutoMagic..................................................................................................148 Insert and Overtype Modes..............................................................................................................148 Typeover tracking............................................................................................................................148 Lock in typeover tracking............................................................................................................149 Transposing (flipping) words.............................................................................................................149 Changing case...........................................................................................................................150 Auto Capitalization...........................................................................................................................150 Fixing Untranslates and Mistranslates Globaling and Scanning..........................................................150 Scanning.........................................................................................................................................151 Scan Types................................................................................................................................151 Continuing the Scan Multi-scan................................................................................................151 Globaling........................................................................................................................................152 AutoMagic and Globaling............................................................................................................152 Globaling options.......................................................................................................................154 Global after scan: Combining Globaling and Scanning.................................................................154 Automatic spelling and Spellchecking while globaling..................................................................154 Detect conflicts automatically....................................................................................................155 Global magic..............................................................................................................................155 Unglobal....................................................................................................................................156 Capitalizing globals.....................................................................................................................156 Lock..........................................................................................................................................156 Review dictionaries.....................................................................................................................157 Delete.......................................................................................................................................157 Suggestions...............................................................................................................................157 Normalize strokes.....................................................................................................................158 Integral prefix/suffix: Suffix and Prefix Suggestions....................................................................158 Misstrokes................................................................................................................................159 Dictionaries for the global...........................................................................................................159 Applying globals.........................................................................................................................160 Globaling backwards.................................................................................................................161 Adding and removing strokes in the globaling window..................................................................161 Special entries list......................................................................................................................162 Slop Strokes.............................................................................................................................162 Shortcuts while globaling............................................................................................................163 Autoreplacements and globaling................................................................................................163 Selecting Conflicts...........................................................................................................................163 Selecting Text..................................................................................................................................164 Selecting text with the mouse: Clicking-and-dragging...................................................................164 Selecting text with keyboard.......................................................................................................164 Selecting with Keyboard Shortcuts.............................................................................................165 Shift-clicking............................................................................................................................165 Marking Text Using F7................................................................................................................166 AutoMagic with Blocks of text.....................................................................................................166 Copying/Writing/Separating/Transferring marked text...................................................................167 Using the Write command.........................................................................................................167

10

Using the Separate (Transfer) command....................................................................................167 Using the Block Read Command................................................................................................167 Text Globals...............................................................................................................................168 Using Windows Commands to Delete, Cut, Copy, Paste .....................................................................169 Delete.......................................................................................................................................169 Cut, copy, and paste...................................................................................................................169 Special Editing on Blocks of Text.......................................................................................................170 Setting text type.........................................................................................................................170 Redacted text.............................................................................................................................170 Stitching....................................................................................................................................171 Enclosing in punctuation.............................................................................................................172 Removing spaces.......................................................................................................................172 Separating Composite words.......................................................................................................172 Text Attributes............................................................................................................................172 Inserting Symbols and Non-English Characters..................................................................................173 Internationalizing a word............................................................................................................174 Inserting Prefixes and Suffixes..........................................................................................................174 Adding and deleting entries to the Prefix/Suffix list.....................................................................174 Time and Date................................................................................................................................174 Editing Timecodes...........................................................................................................................175 Timecoding a section of the transcript........................................................................................176 Nonbreaking Space (lockspace)........................................................................................................176 punctuation.....................................................................................................................................176 Allow punctuation toggle............................................................................................................177 Using a Single Keystroke to Insert and Delete Punctuation..........................................................177 How punctuation toggle works..................................................................................................177 Additional Punctuation options..........................................................................................................177 Placing punctuation at the end of sentences................................................................................177 Automatic punctuation................................................................................................................177 Soft commas in automatic punctuation......................................................................................178 Apostrophes...............................................................................................................................178 Flip apostrophe (Alt+A) and contractions.....................................................................................178 Reverse ? and / .........................................................................................................................179 Jump punctuation left.................................................................................................................179 Editing Paragraphs in a Document....................................................................................................179 Assigning a different format to a paragraph..................................................................................179 Inserting paragraphs..................................................................................................................180 To insert a new paragraph.........................................................................................................180 To insert or change paragraph type............................................................................................180 To insert a Question paragraph..................................................................................................181 To insert an Answer paragraph..................................................................................................181 To insert a continuation paragraph.............................................................................................181 Inserting a new speaker paragraph..............................................................................................181 Combining two paragraphs.........................................................................................................182 AutoMagic suggestions while editing.................................................................................................182 Finding & Replacing.........................................................................................................................184 Upper and lower case searches ..................................................................................................186 Searching for digits....................................................................................................................186 Searching within words...............................................................................................................186 Searching within a specified paragraph format.............................................................................186 Searching within a specified print command.................................................................................186 Searching within a paragraph label..............................................................................................186 Searching for steno within macros and deleted strokes.................................................................187 Repeating searches....................................................................................................................187 Inserting and Changing Speaker Labels.............................................................................................187 Speaker label for existing speaker paragraph................................................................................187 Changing a speaker label throughout a document........................................................................188 Quoted text...............................................................................................................................189 Changing Number Formats...............................................................................................................189 Autoreplacements............................................................................................................................190 Creating autoreplacements.........................................................................................................190

11

Checking Spelling............................................................................................................................191 Checking a single word...............................................................................................................193 Watchwords list..........................................................................................................................194 Checking a marked block of words..............................................................................................194 Adding words to the spellcheck dictionary....................................................................................194 Selecting dictionaries to use for spell checking.............................................................................194 Spellcheck Options.....................................................................................................................195 List Errors.......................................................................................................................................195 Proofreading on an eBook reader......................................................................................................196 Incorrect stroke boundaries..............................................................................................................197 Document statistics.........................................................................................................................197 Delivering your transcript.................................................................................................................197 Creating an ASCII file.................................................................................................................198 HTML index..............................................................................................................................198 Creating RTF/CRE, RTF, Raw Text and Bridge files......................................................................200 Printing...........................................................................................................................................201 Dictionaries ...............................................................................................................................201 Note files ..................................................................................................................................201 Print Options..............................................................................................................................201 Transcripts.................................................................................................................................201 Output Options.........................................................................................................................201 Print to file...............................................................................................................................202 Draft .......................................................................................................................................202 Printing a range........................................................................................................................203 Printing excerpts......................................................................................................................203 Printing volumes.......................................................................................................................204 Timecodesprinting or not printing...........................................................................................204 Multi-page Printing...................................................................................................................204 Multi-page settings file .............................................................................................................208 Multi-page index options...........................................................................................................208 Headers and footers in multi-page printing.................................................................................209 Headers and footers for the index..............................................................................................210

Chapter 9 Formatting Transcripts....................................................................................213

Master Format and Current Document .............................................................................................213 Copying Formats........................................................................................................................213 Applying formats from the Master format to the Current document:.............................................213 Applying formats from the Current document to the Master format:.............................................214 Formatting Paragraphs.....................................................................................................................214 Setting up and Changing Paragraph formats.................................................................................214 Creating a new paragraph...........................................................................................................215 Changing paragraph format settings............................................................................................215 Margins.....................................................................................................................................216 Advanced paragraph settings............................................................................................................218 Default label..............................................................................................................................218 Label font and Text font..............................................................................................................219 Behaves as:...............................................................................................................................219 Default spacing .........................................................................................................................219 Alignment..................................................................................................................................220 Continuation paragraphs.............................................................................................................220 Tab Stops..................................................................................................................................220 Default Paragraph Type...............................................................................................................221 Timecoded.................................................................................................................................221 Numbered paragraphs................................................................................................................222 Text Capitalized..........................................................................................................................222 Auto-punctuate..........................................................................................................................222 Document options...........................................................................................................................222 All Caps.....................................................................................................................................224 By formats....................................................................................................................................225 Answer By lines..........................................................................................................................226 Setting page breaks with speaker labels.......................................................................................226

12

Automatically resume by-line insertion.........................................................................................226 Paragraph numbers..........................................................................................................................227 Numbering selected paragraphs..................................................................................................227 Special formatting for paragraph numbers..................................................................................228 Resetting paragraph numbers.....................................................................................................228 Numbered Lines per Page.................................................................................................................229 Printing Line Numbers......................................................................................................................229 Parliamentary formats......................................................................................................................229 Timecodes.................................................................................................................................229 Headers and Footers........................................................................................................................231 Headers.....................................................................................................................................231 Numbering header lines............................................................................................................231 Putting the current speaker name in the header.........................................................................231 Putting the current timecode in the header................................................................................232 Putting page, line and/or volume numbers in the header.............................................................232 Footers......................................................................................................................................232 Speaker separators .........................................................................................................................232 Blank lines......................................................................................................................................232 Page and Volume Number................................................................................................................232 Page number font ......................................................................................................................232 Line number font .......................................................................................................................232 Page number format...................................................................................................................233 Replacing padding spaces with characters..................................................................................233 Changing page number format for selected pages.....................................................................234 Controlling page numbering........................................................................................................234 Volume numbers........................................................................................................................234 Graphics....................................................................................................................................235 Suppressing the printing of various document elements................................................................236 Page Breaks....................................................................................................................................237 Forced page break......................................................................................................................237 Conditional page break...............................................................................................................237 Fonts..............................................................................................................................................237 About fonts and font size............................................................................................................237 Setting font, size, and style.........................................................................................................237 Selecting a Font Size.................................................................................................................237 Subscripts and Superscripts.......................................................................................................237 Setting the font for an entire document.......................................................................................238 Setting the character width.........................................................................................................238 Setting font for a paragraph format.............................................................................................238 Setting font for selected text.......................................................................................................239 Setting fonts for special parts of paragraphs.................................................................................239 Setting fonts for individual paragraph labels.................................................................................239 Setting font for one paragraph....................................................................................................239 Striking out and underlining .......................................................................................................240 Setting text colors for printing.....................................................................................................240 Setting text for confidentiality ...................................................................................................240 Non-English language scripts .....................................................................................................240 Text Boxes......................................................................................................................................240 Creating a default text box..........................................................................................................240 Reformatting the text box in the document window......................................................................241 Repositioning a text box............................................................................................................241 Adding and Deleting Lines to Boxes..........................................................................................241 Line width................................................................................................................................241 Double line space.....................................................................................................................242 Changing a line without affecting the other lines.........................................................................242 Moving a line without affecting the rest of the box......................................................................243 Text box graphics and the WYSIWYG display................................................................................243

Chapter 10 Block Files........................................................................................................245

Creating Block Files..........................................................................................................................245 Forms (form fields)..........................................................................................................................246

13

Creating blanks..........................................................................................................................246 Form field size..........................................................................................................................246 Variables..................................................................................................................................246 Prompting for variables when filling in blanks.............................................................................247 The NUM variable.....................................................................................................................247 Empty fields.............................................................................................................................248 Capitalizing form fields..............................................................................................................248 Marking the last form field........................................................................................................248 Formatting contents as right flush..............................................................................................248 Mathematical formula...............................................................................................................248 Using list files...........................................................................................................................249 List Files.........................................................................................................................................249 To create a list file .....................................................................................................................249 List items that require more than one field...................................................................................250 Creating shortcuts for the list items.............................................................................................250 Sorting your list file....................................................................................................................250 Using a dictionary entry to create a form field on the fly...............................................................250 Inserting Block Files.........................................................................................................................251 Reading in block files..................................................................................................................251 Filling in Blanks................................................................................................................................251 Inserting Special Characters, Time and Date..............................................................................252 The List file dialog box................................................................................................................252 Autoincluding Block Files..................................................................................................................253

Chapter 11 Hyperkeys, Macros, and Keyboard Shortcuts.............................................255

Assigning functions and macros to the keyboard..........................................................................255 Changing Hyperkey and standard key assignments.......................................................................256 To remove an item from the lists of standard keyboard or Hyperkey assignments:........................257 Printing a list of Standard keyboard and Hyperkey assignments.....................................................257 Creating and editing macros........................................................................................................257 To create a new macro: ...........................................................................................................258 Edit a macro............................................................................................................................259 Macro Import/Export................................................................................................................259 Printing a list of macros..............................................................................................................260 Toolbar Icons and Menu Items for User-Defined Macros................................................................260 Sharable macros........................................................................................................................260 Macros in Autoreplacements.......................................................................................................261 Macros using dialogs..................................................................................................................261 Macro Groups............................................................................................................................262 Macro Variables..........................................................................................................................263

Chapter 12 Automatic indexing.........................................................................................265

What You Need To Know..................................................................................................................265 Setting Up The Index Paragraph Type...............................................................................................265 Create And Name Your Custom Paragraph....................................................................................266 Set Tabs....................................................................................................................................266 Set Margins................................................................................................................................266 Creating Individual Index Lines.........................................................................................................268 Components Of An Index Line.....................................................................................................268 Inserting An Index Line..............................................................................................................268 Inserting an index line using the wizard.....................................................................................268 Index Name.............................................................................................................................269 Index Item...............................................................................................................................270 Paragraph Type........................................................................................................................271 Body Text (Description).............................................................................................................272 Location Format.......................................................................................................................272 Regular Expression index lines....................................................................................................273 Example regular expression index line:.......................................................................................273 Single character commands.......................................................................................................275 Number commands..................................................................................................................275 Special commands....................................................................................................................276

14

Backreferences in regular expressions........................................................................................276 Header Files...............................................................................................................................277 Continuation Headers.................................................................................................................277 Putting Index Lines in Block Files.................................................................................................278 Creating Automatic Index Lines Using Variable Fields.................................................................279 Making it Automatic.................................................................................................................279 Wildcard Indexing............................................................................................................................279 Limiting Wildcards....................................................................................................................280 Where to Use Wildcards............................................................................................................282 Speaker Name Wildcard..............................................................................................................282 Adding text................................................................................................................................282 Separator Character...................................................................................................................283 Multiple Instances of an Item......................................................................................................283 Multi-column Indexing................................................................................................................283 Generating an Index...................................................................................................................284 Sorting the Exams Index by Deponent.........................................................................................285 Frequently Asked Questions.............................................................................................................287 Do I have to use all five components of the index line?.................................................................287 How do I determine the placement and order of my indexes?.......................................................287 How do I change the way my index sorts?...................................................................................288 How do I insert a blank line into the index?..................................................................................288 How do I get two different page numbers to appear in one index line?..........................................289 How come my paragraph type, or {TR:1}{P} showed up in the text of my index?..........................290 How do I create a master index?.................................................................................................290 When I change the paragraph margins, it does not take effect in the preview................................290 Im getting strange characters in the index when I generate.........................................................290 Can I use scan fields in my index lines instead of wildcards?.........................................................290 My paragraph style doesnt seem to be taking an effect................................................................290 My header file isnt being used....................................................................................................290 Text is running over the page number..........................................................................................290 How do I insert an index line at the bottom of a file (such as the Direct Examination blurb to use M:*)?........................................................................................................................................291 I generated and accepted an index, and its not there...................................................................291 Can I edit an index after generating it?........................................................................................291

Chapter 13 Realtime...........................................................................................................293
Starting a Realtime Job....................................................................................................................293 One-Button Realtime..................................................................................................................293 Setting Up Realtime.........................................................................................................................293 User Settings Realtime setup.......................................................................................................294 Flush delay - Setting delay for your writing speed.......................................................................294 Pending translation display........................................................................................................294 Follow always...........................................................................................................................294 Stop follow on unresolved.........................................................................................................294 Hide cursor when following.......................................................................................................294 Auto-rename realtime jobs........................................................................................................295 Realtime job name formats.......................................................................................................295 Edit word buffer.......................................................................................................................295 Wait for cursor ........................................................................................................................295 Division Interval.......................................................................................................................296 Audio.......................................................................................................................................296 Auto-brief................................................................................................................................296 Auto-brief settings....................................................................................................................299 Eclipse is top window................................................................................................................303 Split Window............................................................................................................................303 Realtime Settings in the Translate notes dialog.............................................................................303 Output formats..........................................................................................................................303 Cart window.............................................................................................................................304 Comm. device..........................................................................................................................305 Eclipse steno link output format.................................................................................................305 Incremental Ascii output format................................................................................................307

15

Output format defaults..............................................................................................................307 Changing the output filename ..................................................................................................307 Changing options in Edit Toggles...............................................................................................308 Output through a modem.........................................................................................................308 The Phone Number List.............................................................................................................309 To manage your phone books:..................................................................................................309 Output characteristics.................................................................................................................310 Apply edits...............................................................................................................................310 Force margins..........................................................................................................................310 All caps....................................................................................................................................311 Auto-dial..................................................................................................................................311 Allow backspaces......................................................................................................................311 Flush word delay......................................................................................................................311 Timeout to Blank .....................................................................................................................311 Wait time to Blank....................................................................................................................311 Starting row.............................................................................................................................312 Total rows ...............................................................................................................................312 Foreground and Background ....................................................................................................312 Mode and Hangup mode...........................................................................................................312 Maximum WPM .......................................................................................................................312 Header ...................................................................................................................................312 Uniform boxes..........................................................................................................................312 Attribute..................................................................................................................................312 Text replacement dictionary entries.............................................................................................312 Lines below cursor.....................................................................................................................313 Closed Captioning Preview ..............................................................................................................313 Realtime Status Window..................................................................................................................314 Setting Up Audio for Realtime...........................................................................................................314 Setting Audio Compression.........................................................................................................314 Audio recordings synchronized with a realtime transcript.............................................................314 Select Audio Playback Device....................................................................................................316 Audio files and sound quality.......................................................................................................316 Choosing audio compression options...........................................................................................317 Select the Compression Format.................................................................................................317 Playback.........................................................................................................................................318 Playing the Synchronized Recording ............................................................................................318 Using the Multimedia Control Panel..............................................................................................318 Playing Specific Sections of the Audio..........................................................................................319 Playing back audio in an excerpt................................................................................................319 Skipping over Silent (dead) Spots ...........................................................................................320 Playback Speed..........................................................................................................................320 Troubleshooting Audio................................................................................................................320 Volume control.........................................................................................................................320 Processing errors......................................................................................................................321 Using FTR Gold..........................................................................................................................321 Sharing a Realtime job.....................................................................................................................321 How can I share a realtime job outputting to LawBridge or Bridge with another reporter?.............321

Appendices...........................................................................................................................323
Appendix A: Keyboard shortcuts............................................................................................323 Appendix B: Hyperkeys........................................................................................................329 Appendix C: Toolbars............................................................................................................333 Appendix D: Table of Standard Dictionary Commands.............................................................335 Appendix E: Cursor Movement...............................................................................................339 Appendix F: Windows tips.....................................................................................................341
What are windows?.........................................................................................................................341 Number Conversion Command Codes..................................................................338 Default Toolbars:.............................................................................................................................333 Additional Toolbar Buttons:..............................................................................................................334 Customizing your Keyboard..............................................................................................................329

16

Appendix G: International Options.........................................................................................363

Setting Up Total Eclipse for use with other languages.........................................................................363 French............................................................................................................................................364 German..........................................................................................................................................366 Italian.............................................................................................................................................366

The mouse......................................................................................................................................341 Mouse buttons...........................................................................................................................342 The pointer................................................................................................................................343 Menus.............................................................................................................................................343 Main menus and submenus.........................................................................................................343 Special menus............................................................................................................................344 System menus..........................................................................................................................344 Context-sensitive menus...........................................................................................................345 Types of Windows in Total Eclipse.....................................................................................................345 Working with windows.....................................................................................................................347 Maximize, minimize, restore and close.........................................................................................347 Resizing windows with the mouse...............................................................................................348 Moving windows with the mouse.................................................................................................349 Resizing windows with the keyboard arrows.................................................................................349 Moving windows with the keyboard arrows..................................................................................349 Bars in windows: toolbars, status bars, title bars and splitter bars.......................................................349 Title bars...................................................................................................................................350 Status bars................................................................................................................................350 Toolbars....................................................................................................................................352 Working with Total Eclipse toolbars..............................................................................................352 Splitter bars...............................................................................................................................353 Working with multiple documents.....................................................................................................354 Working with dialog windows...........................................................................................................355 Navigating dialog windows with the keyboard..............................................................................357 File dialog windows..........................................................................................................................358 How Windows organizes documents............................................................................................359 Structure of the file dialog window..............................................................................................360 Shortcut menus in file dialogs.....................................................................................................361

Appendix H: Regular expression table....................................................................................367 Appendix I: Visualizer Topics.................................................................................................369 Appendix J: Steno writer emulator.........................................................................................379

Chapter 14 Reference Guide..............................................................................................383

Audio Synchronization......................................................................................................................384 File Manager...................................................................................................................................404 Glue entries.....................................................................................................................................414 Hidden Text.....................................................................................................................................416 Hyperkey and standard key assignments...........................................................................................418 Lesson Player..................................................................................................................................420 Metadictionary Syntax and Codes.....................................................................................................424 Network Installation.........................................................................................................................439 Normalization Entries.......................................................................................................................443 Number Vocabulary.........................................................................................................................445 Paragraphs: Behaves as.. and Automated Punctuation.......................................................................448 Phonetics Table...............................................................................................................................453 Phonetics, Multi-layered...................................................................................................................455 Programming tab - User Settings......................................................................................................457 Realtime, advanced features.............................................................................................................478 Searches: Custom Searches: Creating Regular Expressions, and Backreferences .................................480 Suffixes and Prefixes........................................................................................................................498 Suffix Spelling Rules........................................................................................................................508 Template dictionary.........................................................................................................................511 Timekeeper.....................................................................................................................................513 Toolbar customization......................................................................................................................514 User settings transfer: Exporting and Importing Settings....................................................................516 Version 3 to Version 4 Changes in Dictionary Management.................................................................517

17

Version 4.3 to Version 5.0 Changes ..................................................................................................518 Writers............................................................................................................................................519

Chapter 15 Index.................................................................................................................521

18

CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION TO THE USER MANUAL

The information in this manual is designed to meet your needs, whether you are a student of court reporting, a new user of Eclipse, or a seasoned user looking for detailed help or new features. The manual contains three main sections:

Getting Started
Part One, Getting Started (Chapters One through Three) includes the basic information you need to get up and running with Eclipse. Topics include file types; commands: keystrokes, menus, and toolbars; sources of help; setting up a user; creating or converting a dictionary; and creating and editing a transcript.

Total Eclipse Basics

Part Two (Chapters Four through Thirteen) includes instruction covering the day-to-day use of Eclipse. Chapters include: User Profiles; Setting the Display the Way You Want; Working with Dictionaries; Notes and Translating; Editing; Formatting Transcripts; Block Files; Automatic Indexing; and Realtime.

Reference
Part Three (Chapter Fourteen to the Index) is the Reference section, which includes several Appendices, the Reference Guide (an alphabetical guide to advanced features in more detail), and Index.

Using Acrobat Reader to access the manual

When you install Total Eclipse, the user manuals associated with it are copied onto your computer. Clicking on the menu item Help | Eclipse documentation will take you to the folder, Documentation, that contains the manuals and other support documentation.

The manual is in the Adobe Portable Document Format (filename.pdf). When you open a pdf file, it opens in Acrobat Reader, software which is included on your Total Eclipse CD.

Introduction to the User Manual 19

Note: Acrobat Reader needs to be on your computer in order for you to read the manuals. If you do not already have Acrobat Reader, you can install it from your Total Eclipse software installation CD. In addition to standard tools, such as the Find and Go To Page features, Acrobat Reader has several features that facilitate navigation through the manual. They include links, bookmarks, and thumbnails. Links Whenever a page number is referenced in the manual, the page number is an active link that you can click on to jump to the page. Bookmarks On the left side of the screen is a frame you can open (using Window | Bookmarks or hotkey F5) to show the table of contents as a series of active links to the various sections of the manual.

Thumbnails Clicking Window | Thumbnails (or F4) opens Large or Small Thumbnails representing each page of the manual. Clicking on a thumbnail takes you to the page pictured.

Updates
Updates to the manual are posted on the Advantage Software website (www.eclipsecat.com) in the Updates area whenever a major upgrade to the software is available. Users with a current support agreement can download both software files and manuals from the website, or request a disk.

Introduction to the User Manual 20

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION OF TOTAL ECLIPSE

INSTALLATION
1. Attach your HASP key to your computers parallel or USB port, depending on which type of key you received. 2. Insert the Total Eclipse installation disk into your computers CD-ROM drive. The disk will automatically start (if Autorun is set to ON on your system), and the Advantage install window will open. 3. Press E or click the Total Eclipse button near the top of the window. 4. Installation will begin. Follow the on-screen instructions to proceed. 5. When the installation is complete, a dialog box saying Click OK to continue after installing Eclipse will appear. Click the OK button to proceed. You can then either exit the Install program or install more software. You should install Adobe Acrobat Reader unless it is already on your computer

HELP
Total Eclipse has several options for help: the F1 key; Help button dialogs; Help topics; and the Manuals, Visualizer files, and Internet support commands on the Help menu.
Command Speed Key Menu Toolbar Icon Help F1 F10/Help

Context-sensitive help
The F1 key and the Help buttons that appear in some dialog windows open context-sensitive helpa window that displays information about the current item or dialog window. Press F1 when you highlight a menu item or open a dialog window to access help for that item.

Also on the Help menu is a choice labeled About Eclipse. Here you can find the version number, other information about your installation (which you may be asked about when you call Advantage Software tech support), and a description of your version of Windows.

TUTORIAL
A tutorial is provided with your Total Eclipse software. It is a Total Eclipse text file that takes you through the basic tasks necessary for producing a transcript using Total Eclipse. To use the tutorial, start Total Eclipse. For an introduction and instructions on running the Tutorial, go to Help | Visualizer topics and select How to Run the Efficient Editing Tutorial. Then install and run a lesson using Help | Install lesson and Help | Lesson player.

Installation of Total Eclipse 21

You will also find links to more than 200 Visualizer movies, which offer a multimedia help system for Total Eclipse. See Appendix J, page 369. Note: For this to work, you must have the Visualizer files and the Speex Audio codec installed on your computer. If you've used a Total Eclipse disk to install the program, you should have no problem. If not, you need to request a program disk in order to have access to these files.

NETWORK INSTALLATION
For installation on a network, see the Reference Guide, page 439.

CONVENIENCE KEY
If you plan to use one computer for realtime or editing, and another computer at home or at the office, you can purchase a Total Eclipse convenience key. The convenience key is not designed to be your primary key, and should not be used at the same time as your primary key. When you are using a convenience key, about once every 90 days Eclipse will prompt you to insert an Authorization Disk. To create the authorization disk, on your main computer, go to User settings | Input | Read from and click Setup to choose your flash drive or whatever drive you want to use. Then go to the Tools menu | Convenience key media.. to open the dialog. Press OK and the dialog will close when the procedure is finished. Take the drive or disk to the computer with the convenience key attached and when it prompts you for the Authorization disk, press OK to be reauthorized for another 90 days. Note: always keep the date and time correct on both computers.

Installation of Total Eclipse 22

CHAPTER 3 GETTING STARTED WITH TOTAL ECLIPSE

RUNNING TOTAL ECLIPSE
NOTE: The first time you run Total Eclipse, you may be prompted to update your hardware key. Make sure your computer has access to the Internet and follow the on-screen instructions to receive your keycode by email. 1. On your Windows taskbar (which usually extends across the bottom of your screen), select Start, point to Programs, and select Total Eclipse. An alternate way to open the Start menu is to press the Windows key (the one with the Windows logo) if you have one on your keyboard, or to press Ctrl+Esc. You can also open Total Eclipse by double clicking the Total Eclipse icon on your desktop. KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS:
Most commands can be issued either by using the mouse to pull down the menu and select the command, or by using a keyboard shortcut. For key combinations such as Ctrl+Esc, press and hold down the Ctrl key and press the Esc key, and then release both keys. In some cases, such as accessing the main menu items, press the first key, release it, and then press the second key. For example, to pull down the File menu, press and release Alt, then press F.

2. Total Eclipses main program window opens. The first time you run the program, the New user setup wizard appears and guides you through the process of setting up a user. Users are fully described in the User Settings section, and briefly described below in this section. Main View Icon Bar

The first time you run Total Eclipse, an icon bar will appear which offers easy access to nine basic functions of your work: 1. Help opens Total Eclipses online help system. 2. Settings takes you to User Settings where you can enter the basic information Total Eclipse needs before you start working. 3. Read notes from your steno machine. 4. Translate the notes into English. 5. Realtime begin writing and translating in Realtime. 6. Notes open a note file. 7. Transcript open an Eclipse text file. 8. Dictionary open a dictionary file. 9. Hyperkeys toggle hyperkeys on or off. Note that functions not currently available are grayed out.

Getting Started with Total Eclipse 23

The main program window When you start Total Eclipse, the main program window appears with a selection window (Users) that lists the users on the system. The program will default to the last user working on the software. Select the user desired and click OK or press Enter. Note: Total Eclipse dialog boxes, including this selection window, have several unique controls which are described below. The five major parts of the main program window are the Title bar, the main menus, the Toolbars, the document display area, and the status bar. You can resize the main program window just as you would any other window. Move your cursor to any of the windows borders, and when the mouse pointer becomes a two-pointed arrow you can click and drag the border to where you want it. To expand the main program window to the full size of your screen, click the maximize button (upper right corner of your window). When the window is maximized, it will fill the screen and cannot be repositioned or manually resized. To make a maximized window movable and resizable, click the restore button.
Title bar Main menus Tool bars

Status bar

Note that one of the toolbars is pictured docked at the bottom of the page. This is an option; the default positions are all at the top. You can re-position the toolbars by undocking them and placing anywhere on the page, the same way you would in other Windows programs. For details on positioning toolbars, see page 38. You will find several useful commands for adjusting the appearance of the main document window on the Window menu. For details, see page 65.

Getting Started with Total Eclipse 24

Along the left side of the window is the Info bar. It displays AutoMagic, which offers up to 10 suggestions, with their hotkeys, for the actions you are most likely to want to perform at any given time. For details on using and customizing your Info bar, see page 25. Status bar The status bar is the horizontal bar at the very bottom of your main program window (do not confuse this with the Task bar at the very bottom of the screen). Status bar task bar

Some document windows, such as note files, also have status bars. The status bar is a valuable (but often overlooked) aid that can help you avoid apparently strange problems that have simple solutions (like accidentally turning Eclipse Hyperkeys on or off). The main program status bar indicates the volume, page, line, column, and timecodes of the current document (based on the position of the cursor in the document). The outlined rectangles on the right side of the status bar work like indicator lights. One- to four-letter abbreviations appear in the rectangle and show which modes are active: MLT - Multi-scan is turned on HYP - Hyperkeys is turned on Current realtime mode: KEY key mode COR - correction mode SPL spelling mode STC stitch mode Task currently being performed: M modem on-line T translating O outputting to external programs (LawBridge, etc.) E editing I realtime input from the writer V voice input from a speech engine These indicators may appear in groups, such as TE for translating and editing.
Current/Active Document? You can have more than one document open at a time, but only one document can be active which means it is the one in which you are working. The active document will be the one that has the darkened title bar (the colored bar across the top of the active window). Inactive windows have grayed-out title bars. To make a window or document the active one, just click anywhere inside that window or document, or click on the document's name at the bottom of the document display area.

INFO BAR
When you open Total Eclipse for the first time, you will see a window along the left side of the screen. This Info bar can be turned on and off using the Window menu | View | view Info bar checkbox. You can right-click anywhere inside the Info bar to adjust the settings.

Getting Started with Total Eclipse 25

AutoMagic
In the Info bar, listed from 1 to 0 (10), you will find the most likely commands or options that you might want to use, depending on where you are located. For example, when you open Eclipse, you can press 1 to Reopen the job you were working on when you last were in Eclipse. Or you can press 2 for User settings, 3 to Read notes, etc. You will be able to select one of the options or execute one of the commands by pressing the number key on your keyboard, or using the Speed key (or Hyperkey) shown on the right, or by clicking on the selection. You will notice that different options are offered when you are:

At the opening screen (no document open) In a note file In a note file with strokes marked In a dictionary In an empty dictionary In a text file In a marked block of text At the end of a paragraph At the beginning of a paragraph On a conflict On an untranslate On a misspelled word On a form field etc.

When the suggested operation is an actual command that also appears on the menus, the toolbar icon will appear next to the command, and the Speed key or Hyperkey for that command will appear on the right, just like a menu item, which can help you learn the keystrokes for these functions.

Getting Started with Total Eclipse 26

AutoMagic options with no document open

An example of AutoMagic options with a transcript open

In some cases, the AutoMagic display will show the results instead of the command. For example, when putting the cursor on do you instead of saying Word flip it will show the icon, the keystroke, and you do instead.

The Window | View Toggles dialog includes a toggle to turn the Info bar off and on, and an Info bar settings area where you can customize its functions.

Getting Started with Total Eclipse 27

The View toggles dialog can be opened several ways: use the Window menu | View toggles, or User settings | Display | View toggles, or right-click inside the Info bar itself. Each user settings file will separately remember if the Info bar is on or off, so you can have it on for some settings and off for others. Size With the info bar on, you may want to decrease your zoom level in the editing display, or resize the info bar by clicking and dragging the right side of the bar. You can also shrink the info bar font if you want to fit more text in less space. Be aware that the text that appears in the info bar changes depending on the context, so you will want to be careful about making it too small. Certain items, such as the auto-briefs, will word-wrap, but others will display text with the ... to indicate that there is more text than there's room for. Info bar settings In the Info bar settings area, you can customize the way you want your information to display.

The AutoMagic check box turns AutoMagic on or off. Use numbers is on by default. With this option on, you simply type the number (1, 2, 3, ...or 0) to select the option.

Note that with Use numbers turned on, the number keys can be used to select options, but you will have to use the Type text function (Ctrl+N or Hyperkey N) to actually type numbers. In many case Type text is one of the numbered choices in AutoMagic, so you would just type, for example, 3 followed by the number you need to add to the transcript. Turning off the Use numbers option disables the use of numbers to activate commands, although they remain visible in the Info bar. It is recommended that you leave the Use numbers option on. If you turn Use numbers off, you will be able to select most options using their hotkeys, but you will only be able to select an option that is NOT a command (such

Getting Started with Total Eclipse 28

as Convert in the graphic on page 26) by clicking it, or by using the AutoMagic hotkeys, Alt+1, Alt+2 Alt+0.

The 10 AutoMagic hotkeys are all available in new installations, but if you have an existing .ini file, and want to use them, you will have to go to User settings | Edit tab | Keyboard, and modify the keystrokes. For details on how to do this, see page 256.

If you use hyperkeys, you can set up the number keys as AutoMagic hotkeys. You would then use Type text (N) when you need to type in a number.

Getting Started with Total Eclipse 29

Hotkeys - you can turn off the AutoMagic hotkeys to save space. This option is good for experienced users who already know all the hotkeys and just like the time-saving suggestions. Check Pop-up if you want a Pop-up box with the Info bar choices appearing in your document area. This will be especially useful if you want to turn the info bar off entirely to save screen space. As you move the cursor through the job, the AutoMagic items do not appear immediately. Instead, it will wait until you stop moving the cursor for at least half a second. Once that time has elapsed, you'll see the suggestions. Also, because the suggestions might not be useful, after several seconds the pop-up window will disappear in order to get out of your way.

The pop-up AutoMagic window is dramatically abbreviated. There are no icons and no hotkeys. It just shows numbers and guesses. It also only shows a maximum of 8 options instead of ten in order to avoid cluttering up the screen too much.

The Delay time setting allows you to adjust the amount of time in milliseconds before the information appears in the Info bar.

Font In the view toggles dialog, the info bar font setting will change the font used for all items displayed in the bar except for the auto-briefs, which have their own font setting. Translation statistics In View toggles there is an option to have your translation statistics displayed in the Info bar. Note the Setup.. button next to the Translation stats checkbox. This opens a dialog that allows you to select what items are displayed. This is the same dialog that you get when you right-click on the realtime statistics window.

Getting Started with Total Eclipse 30

If you put the statistics in the info bar, you can permanently close the statistics window and make more space available on your screen. Auto-briefs In View toggles, there is an option to display the auto-briefs in the info bar. If you click on the auto-briefs in the info bar, it will open the auto-brief dictionary. This same option also appears in the User settings | Realtime | Auto-brief | Settings dialog, where there is also an option to turn OFF the pop-up auto-brief window that appears over the document. Since the info bar is so long, if you're using the info bar instead of the pop-up window, you can boost the maximum number of briefs shown quite a bit, using the settings in the User settings | Realtime | Auto-brief | Settings dialog. For details on the Auto-brief settings dialog, see page 300. Waveform display When you're recording audio, if you have Translation stats turned on in the info bar, with audio checked, normally you'll get a level indicator, just as you would on the realtime statistics window. If you would prefer a waveform display, you can select Waveform display, and on the bottom of the Info window, in a re-sizable box, you'll get a visual display of the actual audio waveform with peaks and valleys. This type of display makes it easier to see if you're getting a faint signal, or if you're getting a very loud signal that's causing distortion. It will show either the waveform or VU meter only when there is a recording in progress. The audio display will not appear in the info bar if you are not showing the translation statistics, or if you are, but have the audio selection turned off.

DIALOG BOXES AND WINDOWS, AND EDIT BOXES

Nearly all the dialog boxes in Total Eclipse are controllable with the following functions:

Resizing
You can resize a dialog to see more information. For example, if you resize the spell check dialog, you can see more words on the alternates list at once. You can also resize horizontally, for example, to be able to see longer words in text boxes that contain only one line. Some controls will stretch vertically, some horizontally, and some will simply move out of the way. For dialogs that don't have long lists or multi-line edit boxes, some single-line edit boxes will expand vertically and the font within that box will grow larger.

Zooming

Getting Started with Total Eclipse 31

Zooming makes the dialog larger and easier to read. If you see a magnifying glass on the title bar of any dialog, move the mouse over it. You will note that the mouse turns into a left/right arrow, meaning that you can click and drag it left or right. When you click and drag left or right, the entire dialog changes size and scales every control in it, changing the font size if applicable. Every dialog preserves its own unique scaling setting, because you might want to make some dialogs small but stretched out with lots of information (such as the macro editor) and other dialogs large with a small amount of easy-to-read information (such as the globaling dialog.) On some dialogs, if the cursor is on an edit box (such as globaling and find/replace) you can press Ctrl+plus and Ctrl+minus to zoom in and out.

Transparency
If you see an eye icon on the title bar of a dialog, note that you can move the mouse over it and it will turn to a left/right arrow. You can click and drag left or right. If you move to the left, the dialog will become more transparent. If you move to the right, it will become more opaque. The dialog will preserve this setting permanently. On some dialogs, if the cursor is on an edit box (such as globaling and find/replace) you can press Ctrl+F to toggle the fading on and off. The transparency level you have selected for that dialog will still be stored permanently. This allows you to leave the dialog opaque most of the time but to easily peek under it if you need to without having to close the entire dialog and then re-select the command.

Anchoring
Many dialogs are pre-programmed to appear in certain locations. Others simply default to the middle of the screen. Others will automatically move out of the way of the cursor if they're frequent editing commands such as globaling or filling in blanks. However, if you have a particular spot you wish for a dialog to appear every time it appears, you can move the dialog to that location and anchor it. If an anchor icon appears on the title bar of a dialog, this dialog can be anchored to a particular spot on the display.

Simplification
Some dialogs are fairly frequently used but contain a lot of controls that are rarely used, or controls that many users have already memorized. For example, on the globaling dialog, most users remember Alt+C to capitalize, or Ctrl+J for the job dictionary; or that you can hit [enter] for OK or [esc] for Cancel and really

Getting Started with Total Eclipse 32

doesn't need the OK and Cancel buttons taking up space. You can hide the seldom-used buttons on a dialog box to gain more uncovered screen space.

If a small blue left or right arrow appears on the title bar of a dialog with the << or >> symbols on it, this is a less/more arrow and allows you to indicate whether you want the dialog to contain fewer controls or more controls.

For the globaling dialog, for example, this hides all the controls but the text box where you type in the entry.

Customize menu
As an alternative to using the icons on the title bar, you can make the same adjustments using the Customize.. menu. Open the menu by clicking on the icon in the upper left corner of any dialog box, or using Alt + Spacebar, and selecting Customize... The Customize dialog contains controls to set the Zoom and Transparency using sliders or spin controls. There are check boxes to turn on or off the Anchor, and Show all to show more or fewer elements of the dialog. The Reset button returns all controls to the default settings. Note: If you are using the Windows Vista operating system, the Customize menu is the only way to control these settings, as the title bar icons are not available.

Font selection
In the User settings | Display tab there is a UI font button (short for User Interface.) If you change the font selection in this dialog, it will affect the fonts on every control on the extended dialogs. This will change the font on buttons, lists, edit boxes, etc. You can select bold fonts, italics, whatever you like. The size, however, will ultimately be determined by the zoom level for the dialog, so pay no attention to the size selector. Important note: Some fonts are unusually wide for their height and may be too wide. If you pick a font that's too wide, you may see words on the right side of some controls get cut off, such as a checkbox being labeled Print comman instead of Print commands. If you

Getting Started with Total Eclipse 33

select an incorrect ui font (or editing font too), you can get the default back by selecting the font button then canceling out.

Edit boxes
Some dialogs, such as the globaling dialog, the Speaker boxes, the Find/replace dialog box, and dictionary entry editing, include edit boxes which have special characteristics. When your cursor is in the box, in addition to the Ctrl+ and Ctrl- functions to zoom in and out, you can use Ctrl+K to cycle through three states of capitalization (all caps, initial cap, and all lower case).

FILE TYPES
Total Eclipse uses three main types of files: notes, text, and dictionary files. Each of these types has its own three-letter file extension (three letters that appear after a period at the end of a file name):
.not .ecl .dix notes (steno) text files (such as transcript or other documents) dictionaries

These extensions make it easy to distinguish the various file types. You will probably encounter other file types when converting, importing, or exporting documents, such as text or ASCII (.txt), Rich-Text Format (.rtf), or Bridge (.brg) files. When working with multimedia files, Total Eclipse can use sound files (.wav), and video plus sound (Audio-Video Integrated) files, (.avi).

Note files
Command Speed Key Menu Open Notes Shift+F7 F10/File/Open notes

Note files use the .not file extension. They are the raw files from which Total Eclipse creates a text translation.

Note files contain steno notes and timecodes (if your steno machine has timecode capability, and it is enabled). If there are Toolbar Icon no time codes provided by the writer, there will be no valid time codes within the note file although there will be numbers where the timecodes would be. They reflect the time the job was read in rather than the time the job was taken. You create note files when you read in steno to Total Eclipse from a writer using the cable, a diskette, or a RAM card. A note file is also created when you translate in realtime. To open a note file, press Shift+F7.

Eclipse text files

Command Speed Key Menu Toolbar Icon Open text Alt+E F10/Production /Open text

Total Eclipse text files use the .ecl file extension. In addition to storing text, Eclipse text files store steno notes, steno writer time codes, and text and document formatting information. This enables you to transport text files from one Total Eclipse user to another without the loss of this information. To open a text file in Total Eclipse, press Alt+E .

Getting Started with Total Eclipse 34

Dictionary files
Command Speed Key Menu Toolbar Icon Open dictionary F9 F10/File/Open Dictionary

Dictionary files have .dix file extensions. Dictionary files contain steno outlines and their definitions, which Total Eclipse uses when translating a job. You automatically have a main dictionary, and each job has its own dictionary (for job-specific entries). You can also have other specialized dictionaries, such as one for medical or engineering related work.

To open a dictionary in Total Eclipse, press F9.

Closing and Saving files

Command Speed Key Menu Toolbar Icon Close file Ctrl+Q F10/File/Close

As you work, Eclipse automatically saves your files, so when you close a note file, text file, or dictionary file there is no need to save it. You can close any file using File menu | Close, or Ctrl+Q.

File Manager
Command Menu Speed Key Toolbar icon File Management F10/Tools/File manager Ctrl+F

Total Eclipse utilizes a custom File Manager that enables you to perform many functions including Copy/move, rename, delete, zip/unzip, backup/restore, translate, open, print, ascii, and revert. It includes an Info box that lists statistics and other information (such as speaker names, and the name of the last person who edited it) about each file. For a detailed description of the File manager, see the Reference Guide, page 404.

To open File Manager in Total Eclipse, press Ctrl+F.

WAYS TO ISSUE TOTAL ECLIPSE COMMANDS

Key combinations (keyboard shortcuts)
Eclipse shortcuts are one or more keystrokes that issue a command. They are generally the fastest way to accomplish a desired taskyour hands dont have to leave the keyboard to reach for the mouse. The catch is that you need to know the shortcut to use it. To find the keyboard shortcut, look to the right of the command on the pull-down menu. Most keyboard shortcuts require a combination of keys, the Shift, Alt, Tip - You can open any of the main menus by or Ctrl key plus another key. For example, the shortcut for translating a pressing and releasing the note file is Alt+T, which means press and hold down the Alt key and Alt key and then pressing press the T key, and then release them at the same time. An exception to the underlined letter in the this rule is that when accessing the main menus, you should press the menus name. Alt key, release it, and then press the key of the underlined letter in the menus name. For example, the keyboard shortcut to open the Edit menu in Total Eclipse is Alt then Epress the Alt key, release it, and then press E. The function keys (designated as (F1, F2, F3, etc.) are usually located across the top of the keyboard, and can be used alone or in conjunction with the Shift, Alt, or Ctrl keys. Do not confuse them with the letter F key. Getting Started with Total Eclipse 35

Many reporters like to further streamline the giving of commands by using single-key editing, called Hyperkeys in Total Eclipse. When you turn on Hyperkeys, the character keys on the keyboard no longer represent letters but trigger Total Eclipse commands and macros. For example, G is the Hyperkey for a one-stroke global. Customizing the keyboard You can customize both the standard keyboard and Hyperkeys. That is, you can change the default assignment of any key or key combination. Because Total Eclipse also allows you to record series of keystrokes as macros, you have a limitless ability to fine-tune your editing efficiency. Keyboard customization is described more fully in the Hyperkeys, Macros, and Keyboard Shortcuts section of this manual, page 255. The User Manual appendices list the default keyboard shortcuts for both the standard keyboard and Hyperkeys. Printable keyboard templates are also available on the Total Eclipse disk and are installed along with the Total Eclipse manuals in the Documentation folder. These templates show the shortcuts on a keyboard layout. The files are in PDF format and require Adobes Acrobat Reader to view and print. Note that these documents are for viewing only and cannot be edited.
Command Speed Key Hyperkey Menu Toolbar Icon

Trying to memorize all the shortcuts at one time is not an effective way to work. Rather, note the shortcut for your most-used commands when you select them from Undo menus. With a few repetitive uses you will remember the commands as Ctrl+Z you use them. Z
F10/Edit/Undo

Throughout this manual, we will refer to the shortcut (or Speed key) in the text, and provide the command's Hyperkey (when available), Menu item, and Toolbar icon in a callout. For example, To undo a series of editing steps, use the Undo function, Ctrl+Z.

Main Menus
Total Eclipses menu bar is always at the top of the main program window. The menus are File, Recent, Production, Move, Edit, Block, Format, Tools, Window and Help. To view a menu, press and release the Alt key, then press the letter that is underlined in the menu title. For example, to open the File menu you would press Alt then F. When the items on a menu are displayed, you can select an item by pressing the letter that is underlined on its label. So, to run the conversion wizard, press Alt then T to open the Tools menu, and then press C to select Convert, which opens the wizard. You can also use the F10 key in place of the Alt key to access the menus, but not both at the same time. To learn about a specific menu item, highlight the item and press F1. (To highlight a menu item using the keyboard, open the menu, and then use the down arrow key to move to the desired item. If the item indicates a submenu, press the right arrow key to move to the items on the submenu.) Toolbar icons appear to the left of each menu item that matches a toolbar function. If a menu item has no icon, there is no toolbar button to execute that function. A menu item that is disabled will show the icon using dimmed colors. If you execute a function that has a corresponding toolbar button, the dialog will have that icon graphic placed in the upper left corner to help you intuitively identify commands with toolbar buttons, just as the icons on the menus do.

Getting Started with Total Eclipse 36

Icons on the Recent menu items help you tell at a glance between recently used text files, dictionaries, and notes, making it easier to find the job you were working on previously.
Menu name File Recent Description Functions that affect an entire document file. Use the File menu to open, print, import, export, and perform similar document operations. Lists recently opened dictionary, note or text files, up to the last 18 files openeda handy shortcut for getting to frequently used files. To open a recently opened file, simply click on the filename appearing on the recent-documents list. If a file has been deleted it may still be listed under the Recent menu, but if you try to open the file under the Recent menu and it no longer exists, Eclipse will create it on the fly but it will be a blank file. (Note: the recently used documents on the Start button/My Recent Documents submenu in Windows also works with Total Eclipse documents and will automatically open the Total Eclipse program if necessary.) Transcript creation functions. In addition to commands for opening specific types of documents (dictionary, text, or note files), this menu allows you to read notes, start and stop translation of notes, and perform several production-related tasks, such as spell checking. User settings are also accessed from this menu. Provides commands for navigating the active document and positioning the cursor, scanning functions (which automatically move the cursor to problem areas in a transcript), and Find command. Editing related commands specific to the type of file currently open (text, dictionary, or notes). Mark sections of a document and then perform operations on that section. Blocking is an efficient method of joining or separating documents. You can, for example, block a section of transcript and create a new file containing only that section. This menu provides commands for altering the appearance of the transcript, such as fonts, line spacing, and paragraph formats. File management utilities, including wizards that simplify file backups, restorations, and conversions from other formats. Contains submenus for Realtime, Multimedia and Voice settings. Controls the appearance of the Total Eclipse window, arranging and organizing open document windows. You can also display or hide the status bar and toolbars. When a transcript window is active, choose whether to display steno notes, paragraph bar, ruler, and realtime status. You can also turn on the Script list window, and toggle on or off the Closed Captioning Preview screen. Total Eclipses online help system. When Total Eclipse is running, the online help is the fastest way to find information to help you use the program. You can review entire topics (e.g. creating a dictionary), connect to Advantage Softwares website, use Visualizer files, or read the manual.

Production

Move

Edit Block

Format Tools

Window

Help

Getting Started with Total Eclipse 37

Toolbars
Total Eclipse has six toolbars, each of which is completely customizable. The first toolbar initially contains buttons for common commands found throughout the menus. The toolbars are accessed through the Window menu | Customize toolbars command, which is described in detail in the Reference Guide, 514 The Window | View toggles command includes checkboxes to turn on or off each of the toolbar views. Like menu items, the availability of toolbar buttons depends on the context within which you are working. For example, when you are working in a note file, the toolbar button for Multiscan is inactive (the Multi-scan feature is not applicable in a note file). In the example below, which shows a portion of a toolbar without a document open, the Fill form and Spellcheck buttons are not available. Inactive toolbar buttons are gray.

To use an active toolbar button, position the mouse pointer over the button and click. Moving toolbars Eclipse toolbars can be repositioned anywhere on your screen, even outside of the main program window. Use this feature to put toolbars where they are most convenient for your needs. When a toolbar is locked to a window border, it appears as a single TIP: row or column of buttons. You can click-and-drag to reposition the toolbar along a If you want to position a border. When a toolbar is not locked to a border, it has its own title-bar and can be floating toolbar near the sides of a window, hold the reshaped into a grid of buttons with more than one row or column. These toolbars Ctrl key down while moving are called floating because you cannot hide them under other windowsthey the toolbar. This prevents the toolbar from locking to always float on top. the border. If you want to reposition a toolbar, position your mouse pointer within this border, but not over a button, and then click-and-drag the toolbar. To reshape a floating toolbar, click-and-drag the borders. Total Eclipse remembers your toolbars positions and docking state, and re-loads the last used positions when you open the program or load your user settings. Your customized toolbars are saved in your current .ini file, so you can have different arrangements of toolbars for all of the different ways you work, for example, one arrangement for realtime and one for editing.

Getting Started with Total Eclipse 38

HELP USING TOTAL ECLIPSE

Total Eclipses online help system can provide immediate information when you need answers quickly. You have several options for online help: F1 key, Help button dialogs, Help topics, Manuals, Visualizer files, and Internet support commands on the Help menu.

Context-sensitive help
The F1 key and the Help buttons that appear in some dialog windows open context-sensitive helpa window that displays information about the current item or dialog window. Press F1 when you highlight a menu item or open a dialog window to access help for that item.

Help topics
To browse or search for help topics, select Help topics from the Help menu. This opens the help system. The Contents tab contains a list of help categories and specific topics. Categories have a book icon next to their label. When you double-click a book, topics within that book appear. Double-click a topic to view it. The Index tab contains an alphabetical list of keywords. You can type a word in the top field to find whether it is referenced in the index. To view topics, click on an index item and select the Display button. The Search tab allows you to type in a keyword to find all the topics that contain the keyword.

Visualizer topics
Command Menu Toolbar icon Visualizer topics F10/Help/Visualizer topics

Opens a list of Visualizer files. The Visualizer movies are brief audio/video presentations that demonstrate some aspect of the Total Eclipse software. They can also be accessed from within related topics in the help system.

To play a Visualizer file, simply left-click the name of the file. After a moment the presentation will begin. These movies are independent .EXE files; there is no extra software to install. The files are on the install disk, and install when you install Total Eclipse.

Eclipse documentation
Command Menu Toolbar icon Eclipse documentation F10/Help/ Eclipse documentation

Goes to the Documentation folder. You will need to have Adobe Acrobat Reader (PDF reader) to read the documents. (The Acrobat Reader is on the Total Eclipse install disk. You can also download new versions of Acrobat Reader from the Adobe website: www.adobe.com.)

Getting Started with Total Eclipse 39

Internet support
Command Speed key Menu Toolbar icon Internet support Alt+Shift+U F10/Help/Internet support

Allows you to go to the Total Eclipse (or other) web site. It opens a dialog window that by default launches your web browser and takes you to the Total Eclipse web site when you hit Enter or click OK. In addition, you can also type in any URL and the system will execute it. Note that this can be combined with macros.

Special Note: This feature is actually useful for more than just Internet webpages. If you leave off the http:// part, you can type in ANY URL for any document or program available to your computer and it will be executed or opened. For example, using this function and typing in \files\MyLetter.txt will go to the files folder and open the MyLetter.txt file in notepad. Typing in \Program Files\Advantage Software\Bridge\Bridge.exe will run our Bridge program (provided that's where it's installed.) Typing \programs\MyProgram.exe MyDocument.doc will open the MyDocument.doc file using the \programs\MyProgram.exe software (provided it takes parameters.) You need to have Internet access, and be connected, in order to access the Advantage Software support site or other Internet webpages.

Lesson Player
Command Menu Toolbar icon Lesson Player F10/Help/Lesson player

This function is designed for teachers in schools to help teach steno theory to students. The lesson player will ask you to choose from previously installed lessons and loads you into a tutorial user. For detailed instructions, see the Reference Guide, page 420.

Command Menu Toolbar icon

Install Lesson F10/Help/Install Lesson player

The Help menu/Install lesson option installs a text file as a lesson. It can then be played, using the Lesson Player. For a fuller discussion of how lessons work, see page 420.

About Eclipse
Help | About Eclipse lists the serial number and version information. In addition, if you are using a convenience key, you will find a K followed by a number in parens such as K(35). You have that many days before you must produce a spare key disk made from your main system.

New Version changes

Opens the changes.txt file, which lists all the changes introduced in the version of Total Eclipse you are using.

Getting Started with Total Eclipse 40

WHERE DO I START?
This section gives a brief overview of the steps involved in creating a transcript with Total Eclipse and is not intended to provide a thorough description of all the functions. See the individual sections of the User Manual for more thorough discussion of these topics.

Setting up a user
First-time User When you start Total Eclipse for the first time, the New user setup wizard appears and guides you through the process of setting up a Total Eclipse user. The user file that is created contains default settings that control the behavior of the program. You can use the default user settings, and make changes while you work. Transferring from another CAT System? If you are transferring from another CAT system, you can start off using the default user settings, and make changes as you become familiar with the program. User Settings The User Settings dialog window provides access to all of your user settings. To access the User settings dialog window, press Alt+U. The online help system contains extensive information on working with these user settings. To access the online help for user settings, after opening User settings press F1 or click the Help button. You can also access User settings via buttons in dialogs including the Translate, Print, Create ASCII, Insert index item, and the Number conversion dialogs.
Command Speed Key Menu Settings Alt+U F10/Production /User settings

Press the button or hit Alt+U to go directly to the appropriate tab in the user settings without having to first exit the function.

When you change any of the User settings values or options, the new setting is automatically saved, although there is also a Save settings button that may be used to save the settings as well. Most user settings Toolbar Icon are stored in a file with the extension .ini (often referred to as an inny or dot INI. file). If you create more than one user, you will have an .ini file for each user. You can then load a different user by selecting the appropriate .ini file. Your current .ini file will be automatically backed up whenever you save the settings or exit the program. These backups will go in the Backup folder as filename.ub0, .ub1, .ub2, etc. up to ub9. You can access them using File manager, described on page 404.

Converting dictionaries
Command Menu Toolbar icon Convert F10/Tools/Convert

When you create a new user, a main dictionary file is automatically created. This dictionary is named username.dix and contains no entries. To get the entries from your old dictionaries into your main Total Eclipse dictionary, you can run the conversion wizard.

Getting Started with Total Eclipse 41

If the conversion wizard does not support your CAT system, you must convert the dictionary to an intermediate, universal format (e.g. RTF-CRE), convert that to a new Total Eclipse dictionary, and import the converted entries. In some cases, you may need the assistance of Advantage Software technical support to successfully convert a dictionary. Note: After upgrading from Total Eclipse Version 3 to Version 4, any time you attempt to open a 3.X dictionary, it will ask if you wish to convert it. If you answer yes, the old dictionary will be placed in a backup folder and the new one will take its place. For more on this process, see page 517. To convert a dictionary with the conversion wizard 1. Select Convert from the Tools menu. 2. In the Conversion wizard window, select From another CAT system 2. Select the Next button. 3. Follow the directions in subsequent wizard windows to complete the process. 4. The converted dictionary entries are placed in your main Total Eclipse dictionary. If you want to view this dictionary, press F9 and then Enter.

To import a dictionary directly 1. Convert the dictionary to a universal format, such as RTF-CRE (use the dictionarys native program, or a conversion utility, to convert the dictionary). 2. Create a new dictionary in Total Eclipse. (Press F9, type a filename for the dictionary, press Enter, then press Enter again.) 3. Select Import from the File menu. Use the file dialog window to select the dictionary you want to import. 4. The dialog in which you select you file(s) has a button to Select/de-select all the files listed.

Note that you can also use the Conversion Wizard to import text files (including RTF and ASCII files) and note

Getting Started with Total Eclipse 42

files from another CAT system. The wizard allows you to browse for a folder, and you can select and convert multiple files at one time. Note also that AI data will import, but this is only compatible with dictionaries created with EclipseNT or Total Eclipse. You can also use the Conversion Wizard to convert one or more of your dictionaries (or text or note files) to a different version, such as a Passport file, or an rtf. Document setup wizard Under User Settings | User, there is a Document setup wizard button, which starts up a wizard that will walk you through setting up the document settings in Eclipse, including setting up page margins, headers, footers, the text box, timecodes, page numbers, line numbers, and paragraph margins for questions, answers, colloquy, parentheticals and default paragraph types. As you are answering questions and making changes, a preview window on the right side shows you exactly what the document will look like when it's printed. The wizard automates many of the processes. For example, when you set a top and bottom margin and a number of lines, it figures out the line height from that. As you make adjustments to margins, the text box resizes. You can define many of the measurements, such as the header margin, in terms of inches, centimeters, points or lines; and if you select lines, it factors that into the calculation of the total height of the page when determining the line height. You can try out the wizard, and cancel out of the process and your changes will be discarded. If you click Done! the wizard will display a warning screen about your changes being applied to all future documents.

Getting Started with Total Eclipse 43

CREATING A TRANSCRIPT
This section covers the five essential steps for producing a basic transcript from a set of notes: 1. Reading notes (Creating a Total Eclipse note file). 2. Translating notes (Creating a Total Eclipse text file). 3. Editing the transcript. 4. Adding supplementary transcript parts. 5. Printing and creating other output.

Reading notes
Reading notes is the process you use to get your steno notes into Total Eclipse. When you read your notes into Total Eclipse, the notes are saved in a file with a .not file extension (e.g., newjob.not). When you translate note files on your computer, you select the .not file that you want to translate.
Command Speed Key Menu Toolbar Icon Read Notes Alt+I F10/Production /Read notes

Prior to reading notes for the first time, check your User settings | Input to specify the source of your raw notes and the manner in which they are transferred from your writer to Total Eclipse. For details on setting up your Input settings, see page 118 in this manual. To read notes, press Alt+I to open the Read notes dialog.

The display area on the left side of the window shows a list of raw note files available on the disk (or other source), along with each job files size (in bytes) and creation date. When a raw

Getting Started with Total Eclipse 44

note file in this area is highlighted, the first few folds of notes in that file appear in the display area on the right side of the dialog window (the preview area). In the Note file name field, type a name for the Total Eclipse note file that you want to create from the file on the disk. If you choose an existing note file name, the raw notes are appended to the end of the existing note file. Use the Browse button to look in other folders. If you do not enter a name in this field, a prompt will appear, requiring you to enter a name before proceeding. If you back up your notes directly from the writer drive to archive folders or drives, you can use the New source.. button on the read notes dialog to select a different location where your notes are stored. Click the Read button to start the read process. The stroke count appears to the right of the Read button during this process. If you have checked the Open option, when the job has been read or transferred to the computer, the note file just created or appended to will open. The Read notes dialog remains open so you can continue to read jobs if necessary.
Command Speed Key Menu Toolbar Icon Open Notes Shift+F7 F10/File/Open notes

To open and review the contents of a Total Eclipse note file, press Shift+F7. A standard Windows file dialog displays the available note files in your jobs folder. To open a file, double-click it. (Keyboard command--If you prefer to leave your hands on the keyboard, press Shift+Tab, press the first letter of the file you want until it is highlighted, then press Enter.) You can select and open multiple files.

Translating notes
When you translate notes, Total Eclipse uses your main dictionary and any other dictionaries you specify to generate a text file from a note file. The resulting Total Eclipse text file has the extension .ecl (e.g. newjob.ecl), and is placed in your Jobs folder, setup in User Settings | User | Advanced. To translate a note file, 1. Press Alt+T to open the Translate notes dialog. Be sure that the Realtime and Virtual Realtime option boxes in the Translation dialog screen are not checked. Getting Started with Total Eclipse 45

2. Click the Notes button to specify the note file you want to translate. Once you select a file for translation, the filename appears to the right of the Notes button. (If a note file is active when you select the translate command, the Translate notes window will automatically specify the active note file.)
Command Speed Key Menu Toolbar Icon Translate notes Alt+T F10/Production /Translate

3. By default, Total Eclipse will create a text file with the same name as the note file (e.g., translating newjob.not will create a text file with the name newjob.ecl). The text file is also placed in the same folder as the note file. To specify a different name for the text file, or to change its location, click the Text button.

4. The Dictionaries area lists the dictionaries that will be used to translate the note file. Click on the Dictionaries button, and use the Add, Remove and Change buttons to specify translation dictionaries. See page 142 for details on the Job Dictionary and user defined Dictionaries. 5. To maximize translation speed, check the Quick tran option. If you want to begin editing the document while it is still being translated, check the Tran and edit option. (Translation in the Tran & edit mode proceeds more slowly because it is displaying screens of the text while translating in the background.) 6. If you want to see your translation statistics while any job translates, place a check in the Show statistics box. 7. Press Enter or Click OK to begin the translation.

Opening a Translated Text File

Command Speed Key Menu Toolbar Icon Open text Alt+E F10/Production /Open text

To open a text file, press Alt+E. As with note files, you can select and open multiple text files. Editing represents the bulk of producing a transcript and Total Eclipse has many features to streamline editing and make it as efficient as possible. The Editing section of this manual, page 147, provides detailed information on editing.

You can perform any editing task from the keyboard using standard keyboard shortcuts, or you can use HyperkeysTotal Eclipses single-key editing mode (when using the default set of Hyperkeys that comes with your software you can turn Hyperkeys on and off by pressing Alt+Z).
Command Speed Key Menu Toolbar Icon Hyperkeys Alt+Z F10/Edit /Hyperkeys

Complete tables of keyboard shortcuts and Hyperkeys are located in Appendix A & B, page 323 of this manual. After installing Eclipse, you can go to the documentation folder and open the Total Eclipse Quick Guide.pdf, which contains a printable keyboard layout.

Total Eclipse automatically saves changes to a document , doing a quick-save every 5 seconds, and a full save every 30 minutes (or however often you have set in User settings | Edit | Timed auto-backup). So you will not find a separate Save command.

Getting Started with Total Eclipse 46

Fixing Mistakes: Undo (known as the Oops key)

One of the most important commands to know might be undoit undoes, one by one, the last editing steps you entered in a paragraph. For example, if you deleted two words (at and then when), then realized you shouldnt have, give the undo command twicethe first time it will undo the deletion of when (the most Toolbar Icon recent editing step) and the second will undo the deletion of at (the second most recent edit). Total Eclipse can undo up to ten editing steps except commands that add or remove paragraphs. The Speed key is Ctrl+Z.
Command Speed Key Hyperkey Menu Undo Ctrl+Z Z F10/Edit/Undo

Moving the Cursor

When editing documents, the cursor position is indicated by a blinking cursor. You can customize the cursors width, so depending on the width you select, it can appear as a vertical line or a rectangle. When using the standard keyboard setup, the arrow keys are used to perform most cursor movements. In Hyperkeys, basic cursor movements are located on the right side of the keyboard. You can also move the cursor via the Move menu, but it is far quicker to use keyboard shortcuts, which allow you to keep your hands on the keyboard. The Move menu lists the shortcuts next to the corresponding menu item and can serve as an online reference card until you know the commands. When editing a text file with the steno window open, you can left-click anywhere in the steno window, and the cursor will jump to the position that would track to that stroke. Text files are the only documents in Eclipse in which a cursor appears. Dictionary and note files do not have a text cursor. Instead, highlighted entries indicate the current position. However, many cursor movement keystrokes result in analogous movements in these document types. For example, pressing Alt+Home moves the cursor to the top of the page in text documents, and highlights the top stroke of the fold in note files. When a dictionary or note file is active, the Move menu lists only those movement commands that are available for the active file type.
Movement Left one word Right one word Up one line Down one line Left one character Right one character Up one paragraph Down one paragraph Page up/ Backward 1 page Page down/ Forward 1 page Home (start of line) End (of line) Go to page/line no. Standard keys Ctrl+ Ctrl+ Ctrl+ Ctrl+ Page Up Page Down Home End Alt+G Hyperkeys J L I K Shift+J Shift+L Y H Shift+Y Shift+H [ ] Shift+G

Getting Started with Total Eclipse 47

Movement Beginning of previous sentence Beginning of next sentence Previous occurrence of punctuation Next occurrence of punctuation top of the visible screen bottom of the visible screen beginning of current transcript page beginning of transcript end of transcript

Standard keys Alt+B Alt+F Ctrl+, (comma) Ctrl+. (period) Ctrl+Home Ctrl+End Alt+Home Ctrl+Page Up Ctrl+Page Down

Hyperkeys

Go to a specific page
Command Speed Key Menu Toolbar Icon Go to Alt+G F10/Move/ Advanced/Go to

To move to a specific page and line number, press Alt+G. The Go to.. dialog appears.

1. Enter the page number in the Page field. 2. If you want to go to a particular line on the page, enter the line number in the Line field. 3. Press Enter or click OK. The cursor will move to the beginning of the selected page and line if a line number has been entered.

Go to a specific timecode
In addition to the page and line number, you can type in and jump to a specific timecode. You can omit as much of the right side of the timecode as you like. For example, you can type in 14:30. You do not have to type in 14:30:00:00. You can even just type in 9, for example, to go to 9 o'clock even.

Moving among trouble spots (Scanning)

Command Speed Key Hyperkey Menu Toolbar Icon Scan Ctrl+T T F10/Move/Scan /non-resolved Translation

You can also move the cursor using a scan, which moves the cursor to the next occurrence of a specific type of editing trouble spot, such as a conflict or untranslate. Various types of scans are listed on the Move menu, under the Scan and Reverse scan items. The most common is scanning to a trouble spot (Ctrl+T). To learn more about a particular type of scan, highlight it on the menu, then press F1 (Help). Scanning is described in Editing, page 147.

Getting Started with Total Eclipse 48

GLOBALS
Command Speed Key Hyperkey Menu Toolbar Icon

Globals allow you to define or redefine steno from within the transcript. To perform a simple one-stroke global, issue the Global command (Ctrl+G), type the text definition for the selected stroke, and press Enter. The change is applied throughout Global Ctrl+G the document and the entry is added to your main dictionary. (This G is the default setting but you can change the default dictionary F10/Edit/Global location for globals in your User settings.) When you issue the Global command, you can also select options in the Globaling dialog window that allow you to perform more complex globals. For example, you can select additional strokes to create a multi-stroke entry, and you can specify alternate dictionaries. For more information, see Editing, page 147 in this manual, or highlight Global on the Edit menu and press F1.

MARKING TEXT
You can highlight a selection of text (sometimes called block marking) and then apply editing commands that affect the entire marked area. For example, you could mark a section of text and then press the hyphen key (-) to stitch the selection of words with hyphens (e.g. run-ofthe-mill). You can also cut (Ctrl+X), copy (Ctrl+C), and paste (Ctrl+V) marked text (standard Windows functions). For more information on working with marked blocks of text, see Editing, page 147 of this manual. To mark a selection of text, position your text cursor at the beginning or end of the selection you want to mark, then press F7. This turns on the block-marking feature. Any cursor movement keys that you subsequently press will mark text (e.g., press the right arrow key to mark text from the current position to the beginning of the next word). You can also mark text using standard Windows methods, such as clicking-and-dragging over text with your mouse, or holding the Shift key and pressing any cursor-movement key (known as Shift-click).

FORMATTING
In Total Eclipse, every paragraph is associated with a particular format type. The format includes information on margins, font, labels (e.g., Q. and A.), automatic punctuation, and other characteristics. All these characteristics are set in User settings | Command Paragraph data Paragraphs tab Speed Key F8 (Alt+U). Each F10/Format/ Menu Insert/modify paragraph format listed in the Paragraph field Toolbar Icon contains its own settings on this tab. When you edit Getting Started with Total Eclipse 49

these settings, you may apply them to just the current document or to your permanent user settings (Master format). If you apply them to your permanent user settings any future documents you create will use the new settings. You can also define paragraph formats in your dictionary, so that formats are automatically applied during translation. When you edit a document, you can change a paragraph from one format to another (e.g., change a question paragraph to an answer paragraph) and insert a format to split a paragraph or start a new paragraph. You can do this by clicking on the paragraph-type button (or pressing the F8 key) on the left side of the screen and selecting the paragraph type desired from the Paragraph data dialog. You can determine the current format of a paragraph from the square buttons that appear down the left side of a text document window. The letters on these buttons correspond to the first letter of the paragraph format. For example, Q indicates a question paragraph, A indicates an answer paragraph, and S indicates a speaker paragraph. You can also change or edit paragraph features by clicking this button. To access the same dialog using the keyboard, place your cursor in the paragraph and press F8. Additional paragraph commands are located on the Format menu. The effect of these commands depends on your cursor location. If your cursor is located anywhere within the body of the paragraph when you select a paragraph format, a new paragraph of the selected type is created at the cursor position. Text preceding the cursor position remains with the current paragraph. If your cursor is located on the paragraphs label when you select a format, the entire paragraph is changed to the selected format. (To move the cursor to a paragraph label, click on the label or hit the Home key twice.) See the Formatting section, beginning on page 214, for more information on paragraph formats. Hitting the Enter key when the cursor is at the end of the document will make a new paragraph of the type you have designated as the default paragraph.

ADDITIONAL TRANSCRIPT ELEMENTS

In addition to the body of the transcript, transcripts often contain many elements such as title and certificate pages, headers and footers, line and page numbers, indexes, and graphic boxes. You control many of these elements through block files, print commands, and User settings on the Document tab.

Block files
Block files are Total Eclipse text files such as title and certificate pages that contain reusable information, and which you can automatically insert into a transcript. You may be more familiar with these files when they are called includes, merge documents, or standard pages. Total Eclipse allows you to increase the efficiency of using these documents by allowing you to insert fill-in-the-blank lines (form fields) in these block files to indicate information that changes in an otherwise consistently similar document. Examples are attorney and deponent names, dates, locations, and jurisdictions. You can also create block files containing lists of information, and then use these files as shortcuts when filling in blanks.

Getting Started with Total Eclipse 50

To create a block file Confirm your blocks path (check at User settings/Advanced /Blocks) and browse to that folder if it is not your jobs folder. Open a file (Alt+E). An Open file dialog opens. (See page 45)
Command Speed Key Menu Toolbar Icon Open text file Alt+E F10/Production/ Open text

Type a name for the block file in the File name field. Press Enter or click Open. An alert box will appear, stating the file name you typed does not exist and asking if you want to create the file. Click Yes.

A text file is created and opened in Total Eclipse. You can create the files content using any of the available text editing methods. You create the content of the block file using the same editing techniques for transcripts type the text you want and apply formatting commands to achieve the desired appearance. You can manually insert a block file into a transcript, or you can insert block files during translation.
Command Speed Key Menu Toolbar Icon Read Alt+R F10/Block/Read

To manually insert a block file, position the cursor at the point where you want to insert the file and press Alt+R. This opens a file dialog window, in which you can select the file you want to insert. To insert a block file into the document during translation using a dictionary entry (called an autoinclude), use the following syntax {<filename}. When you translate your notes, the file is automatically included.

Print Commands
Print commands are hidden commands or messages that you insert into your document to control various aspects of your transcript, such as page numbering, automatic indexing, REDI lines and even comments for yourself or a scopist. The commands themselves dont appear on your printout (except for comment lines which print when using draft mode) and they appear in your display only if you turn on Print commands in the Display options, either in your User settings | Display tab (mark the Print commands checkbox) or with the Display toolbar button. Print commands do not appear when you display a transcript in WYSIWYG mode except when the cursor is on a print command (see WYSIWYG? below). To insert a print command use Alt+N. The Insert Print Command dialog opens, which contains a list of available print commands and an Additional info area that provides information on the specific command selected. For example, the area may instruct you to Fill in information after inserting print command, or it may provide a Value field for entering data about the selected command. Getting Started with Total Eclipse 51

When you click OK, the selected print command is inserted in the document, immediately before the current paragraph. The individual print commands are discussed in this manual where their function is relevant.

Document formatting
Command Speed Key Menu Toolbar Icon User Settings Alt+U F10/Production/Usersettings

The Document tab is located in User settings (Alt+U) and contains settings for document elements such as page number format and position, page and line dimensions, and text box options. You can apply changes either to the current document only (select the Current document radio button) or save them to the Master format so that you can apply them to future documents.

Printing and other output

Once you have completed the editing process you can create several types of output, including hard copy printing, ASCII files, and RTF Command Print (Rich Text Format) files. To create any of these Speed Key Alt+O F10/File/Print or output types, the document must be open and active. Menu
F10/Production/Output to Printer Toolbar Icon

To print a document, use Alt+O. From the Print dialog, select the number of copies to print and a page range to print. Before printing, in File menu | Print setup you can select your printer, adjust its properties, and chose network settings.

To create an ASCII file, select Output to ASCII from the Production menu (Shift+Alt+O).
Command Speed Key Menu Toolbar Icon Output to ASCII Shift+Alt+O F10/Production/ Output to ASCII

From the Create ASCII dialog, you can use the Style presets to select among various ASCII styles (including Standard (page image) and Summation) and a page range.

Getting Started with Total Eclipse 52

Other Output options Other output options include RTF/CRE, Raw Text, and Bridge. For details, see the Editing section, page 197.

WYSIWYG?
The Display properties toolbar button

You can view documents exactly as they will print using the option called WYSIWYG mode (pronounced wizzywigwhat-you-see-is-what-you-get). You can also view nonprinting elements, such as print commands in a transcript. To view or hide various elements of a document, click the Display properties toolbar button. This opens the Display dialog (which also appears in User settings | Display).

To view the document the way it will print, click WYSIWYG. Eclipse will first display a warning message, This will change your display settings to match your printout and will undo any changes you have made to these settings. Continue? You can choose not to display the message in the future. To view a document in a font other than the one in which you will print it, click the Editing Font button. This opens the Font dialog box in which you can select a different font or font attributes (such as bold, underscore or italics) for the display. This is called the editing font because it only affects the screen display and does not show what the document will actually print like. If you have a different font selected for editing than will be used for printing, when you press the WYSIWYG button the editing font will be disabled. The WYSIWYG mode allows you to adjust paragraph margins, boxes, tabs, and other formatting elements for the file. The rulers at the top of a document window contain margin and tab buttons that you can click-and-drag with the mouse. You can alternately adjust many page elements (e.g., page number position) from the Document tab of the User settings dialog box, Alt+U. If you move the User settings dialog box so that your document is visible in the background, you can watch the document change as you make your adjustments. Note that if you select certain options on the Display tab, you will no longer be in the WYSIWYG mode.

Getting Started with Total Eclipse 53

Getting Started with Total Eclipse 54

CHAPTER 4 USER PROFILES

OVERVIEW
You can setup any number of unique format types to accommodate different types of work in which you may be involved (i.e., different settings for different firms with whom you work or for federal, state or other court requirements, CART, or other types of applications). You can save time by saving each group of settings in a user settings file. This file contains information about job file locations, hardware (e.g., your writer) descriptions, translation rules, paragraph formats, document appearance, editing preferences (including customized prefixes and suffixes), and much more. Before you start a new job in Total Eclipse, you can select which of the user settings files to use, and save yourself the time of creating all those individual formats and requirements for each job. (You might want to think of the settings file as being something like a template that you can apply to different files.) A user, on the other hand, refers to a specific person. Each different user in Total Eclipse can have his or her own user settings stored in a separate user settings file. A user can have, and usually does have, more than one settings file.
Command Speed Key Menu Toolbar Icon User settings Alt+U F10/Production /User settings

To view the User Settings use the shortcut Alt+U . The User settings dialog box controls are divided into ten general topics, each of which has a labeled tab (User, Paragraphs, Document, Edit, Display, Input, Realtime, Translate, Numbers, and Programming).

The User name field displays the name given when the user was created with the New User wizard. The User file field shows the name of the user-settings file that is currently loaded for the job. The default user file has the nickname you selected in the New User Wizard, and has the extension .ini (e.g., thomas.ini ).

TIP
You can press Ctrl+Tab to move from one tab to another in the User settings dialog.

Following is a description of the options you can control with User settings. These options are described in detail in the relevant sections of this manual.

User Profiles 55

User: Select main and user dictionaries, including master job dictionary; set paths for jobs and blocks folders; create new user formats and settings files; import other settings; create new user. Paragraphs: Paragraph format settings for question, answer, speaker, by line, and other paragraph styles that you have created. Settings include margins, spacing, alignment, paragraph labels, label and text fonts. Document: the characteristics of the printed document such as page length, width, and margins, redacted text options, line number, text, header, footer, paragraph number, font, textbox and timecode settings, character spacing. Edit options: such as setting By formats, specifying spelling dictionaries, globaling options (including which dictionary to use as the main one for saving globals), detecting conflicts, word-stitch method, timed auto-backup, audio playback, keyboard customization and macros. Display options that control how the job looks to you on the computer screen while youre editing, not how it will appear when printed (unless you use the WYSIWYG option). These settings include hiding line numbers and leftmargin white space (so you can get more of the text on your screen), font for editing, zooming in and out (magnifying or shrinking the view), steno and cursor width, cursor width when using Hyperkeys, colors for various editing elements. It also contains the notebar options where you can select whether or not to have dictionary definitions displayed at the bottom of the notebar, the font that is used in the notebar, whether phonetic or steno notes are displayed, and notebar timestamps. Input settings tell Total Eclipse how the notes are input, including what writer you use and to what port it connects, the drive letter of your diskette drive, and keyboard options. It includes the writer specialty strokes and capitalize options for spell and stitch mode. Realtime settings include flush delay, Pending translation display, Follow always, audio settings, turning Auto-brief on and off, and output formats. Translation options include the speaker list, misstroke setup, phonetic untranslates, and Translation Magic options. Number processing options allow you to select the rules and options for how you want your numbers to translate and appear. Using this very powerful and sophisticated option greatly simplifies your numbers writing. Programming settings allow you to access your prefix and suffix table; edit or view your phonetic table, the autoreplacement table, steno or text regular expressions, typeover tracking, spelling expressions, common words list, auto-brief theory rules, and file locations. See Reference Guide page 457 for details.

User Profiles 56

USER SETTINGS | USER TAB

Whenever you start Total Eclipse youll be prompted to indicate which user settings (user information format) you want to use (unless you have chosen Automatically load last settings used see below). The Users dialog box will show the available user settings formats (with .ini extensions). Select the file name of the settings file you want to use, then click OK. Those settings will be loaded.

Automatically load last settings used

You can have Total Eclipse automatically use the last settings file you used. To do so, go to User settings | User tab, and click the Advanced button in the bottom right of the dialog box. In the Advanced User Settings dialog that appears, mark the checkbox to the left of Automatically load last settings used.

Settings management - Use to create and use different format files

Load settings button Even though you need to pick a user settings file to use whenever you start Total Eclipse, you can change to different settings after youve started the program. To use a settings file other than the one that is currently in use, go to User settings | User, which shows the basic information about the current user.

Click the Load settings button; you will get the same dialog box as when you first start Total Eclipse. Select a user settings file and click OK, or double click the file name. The user settings file will then be active for your session.

User Profiles 57

Save settings button When you change settings in the User settings dialog, you can immediately save the altered settings by clicking the Save button. This opens a dialog, in which the current user settings file is listed in the Enter a filename field. If you want to save these settings to that file, press Enter (or click OK). If you want to save these settings to a new file, type a file name in the space and press Enter. This new user file is saved as an .ini file and becomes the active one. If you make a mistake in your user settings and you haven't saved them yet, you can go to User settings | User | Advanced and hit the Revert settings button, which will reload your last .ini file without saving the changes.

Settings migration - Use to move settings from one place to another

Exporting and Importing User Settings Using the User settings | User | Export settings.. button, you can create files that contain portions of your user settings. You can use these files to exchange selected settings among users without disrupting other settings. For example, a firm could distribute its standard paragraph and document format settings among its reporters, without changing the number conversion and translation settings that vary from one reporter to another. For details on what is exported to the .set file, see User Settings Transfer: Exporting and Importing settings in the Reference Guide, page 516. Exporting selected user settings: Select the Export button to open the User settings transfer dialog. This window contains checkboxes for ten elements of User settings.

Mark the checkboxes of those elements you want to export. Click OK. A Save as file dialog appears. Type a name for this settings file and select Save. The exported settings are saved as a Total Eclipse Portable settings file, which uses a .set file extension. User Profiles 58

The file can be provided to other Total Eclipse users, who can then import all or some of the user settings contained in the file. The file can also serve as a backup, from which the selected user settings can be restored. Importing User Settings: You can import user settings from other Total Eclipse users. Hyperkeys that are assigned to macros are not converted; Hyperkeys that are assigned to standard commands will be imported. The following procedure overwrites the user settings that are currently loaded in Total Eclipse. 1. Press Alt+U to open the User settings dialog. 2. Press the Save settings button and enter a new name if you want to create a new user format to receive the settings. 3. On the User tab, click the Import button. 4. A file dialog appears. In the Files of type field, select Total Eclipse Portable settings (*.set). 5. Use the navigational controls in the file dialog window to open the folder containing the settings file. 6. Select the user file you want in the file display area and click Open. (You can also doubleclick the file name.) 7. The User settings transfer dialog opens.

8. If you want the option to keep entries you already have for items in the Programming tab (like the Metadictionary), you can turn on the Merge settings where possible option, and it will merge the settings you're importing, rather than simply replacing one with the other. If it detects that a new entry would overwrite an old one, you will be prompted with a ... Replace this instance? message. You can choose Yes to replace the old entry with the new one or No to keep the old one. User Profiles 59

9. When you click OK, the selected files settings are imported into the current Total Eclipse user file (*.ini file), replacing the current settings.

Global settings
If you export some settings into a file in your JOBS folder called GLOBAL.SET, then those settings will be loaded every time you load any .ini file that uses that jobs folder. This is useful if you have created a group of settings that you wish to be applied to all of your various .ini files and you don't want to have to go in and manually import them into each one. For example, if you frequently edit macros or keystrokes, you may wish to create a global.set file that contains ONLY your keyboard settings. If you did that, then you would be assured that no matter which .ini file you loaded, it would always use the keyboard set from the global.set file. Caution: If you accidentally create a global.set file that contains document settings, for example, then any differences in the document settings of your .ini files will be wiped out as soon as you load them up. The global.set file can be deleted or moved or given to a friend just as any other file can.

The Dictionaries button

Indicating current dictionaries To specify current dictionaries, go to User Settings | User and click the Dictionaries button. The Dictionaries dialog box opens.

By default, the main dictionary for the user (JSmith in the example above) will be set. You can select a different Main translation dictionary, a Job dictionary (which takes precedence over jobname.dix dictionaries), and as many supplemental user dictionaries as you like (if you have dictionaries for specific fields, such as medical or engineering terms). To indicate whether a dictionary should be applied in translation, highlight the dictionary's name, and mark the Use in translation checkbox above the OK button, by either clicking on the box with your mouse, or using the tab/shift-tab keys and the spacebar to select it. In the example, the Job dictionary is activated, and the medical dictionary is not. (The Main dictionary is always active by default.) Dictionaries not selected for translation are available for globaling entries into, but will not be used in translation. User Profiles 60

To change a dictionary, highlight the name of the dictionary you want to change and click Change. You will get a standard Open file dialog that you can use to browse your folders and choose the file you want. By default, the window shows the dictionary files in your job folder. Use the window to browse your folders; when you find the dictionary file you want to use, you can either select it and then click OK, or double-click on it. Note that dictionaries are stored with the path name, so you do not need to keep them in your jobs folder. For example, you could make a folder called Dict in your jobs folder and put your dictionaries there, and a dictionary will show up on this list as Dict\DixName. In situations where the system is unable to find a dictionary (for example, if you use an unusual path and you send a job and dictionary to a scopist who doesn't have the same setup) the software will look in the same folder as the document, then it will look in the jobs folder. Once you specify a dictionary, its name will appear in the field. Be sure to activate those dictionaries you want Total Eclipse to use automatically when translating a note file. Click OK and you will be back at the User tab. Save the settings with the Save settings button.

ADVANCED USER SETTINGS

In User Settings | User | Advanced you will be able to set additional user options and select folders for file storage.

Directories
When you first use or create a user for Total Eclipse, default folders are set for your Eclipse files. If you need to set a different location for your folders, you can make the change in your User settings (Alt+U) | User tab | Advanced, or in User settings (Alt+U) | Programming tab | File Locations (details below and in the Reference Guide section of this manual, page 472). The Advanced dialog has five fields for specifying file folders. These folders serve as default file locations for various operations. The New user setup wizard automatically sets the Users, Jobs, and Blocks locations. (The Network and Auxiliary folders are not needed by all users and can be left blank.) To specify where you want particular files stored, click the button corresponding to the type of folder you need to specify. Note that folders named Jobs, etc. arent automatically created; these terms are used here just to designate the type of file to be stored. You will get the Browse for folder dialog. You can navigate the folder list that appears just as you would if you were using the Windows Explorer: a plus sign indicates a folder that you can open; a minus sign means the folder is open. The folder with an open folder icon is the folder that is currently selected. (In the example, the HCap folder has an open folder icon.) Click OK to designate that folder. If you want to create a separate folder for jobs or other types of files, use Windows Explorer to create the folders. Note that it is a matter of preference whether or not to have separate folders for various file types. For advanced folder option, see User settings (Alt+U) | Programming tab | File Locations in the Reference Guide section of this manual, page 472.

User Profiles 61

Folder Users

Whats stored there

User settings. (User settings files have an .ini extension.) Other Total Eclipse folders (e.g., your jobs folder) are typically nested within this folder. Total Eclipse text files, note files, and dictionaries. For file management purposes, you may want to create additional folders in your jobs folder. Block files, such as title pages and pick lists. Files that other people can access. For example, you can generate a LawBridge output file and send it to this folder. Others can then use their LawBridge software to view the file on the network. If your computer is linked to a network, certain folders may already be configured for access by multiple users. You can also share files on your hard drive with others who can link to your computer. You should have write privileges to the folder that you specify, meaning that you can create and save files in the folder. Others who want to access files in this folder will need read privileges in order to open and view the files.

Jobs

Blocks Network

Auxiliary

A convenient alternate location for backing up files, and as an alternative storage location for playing back multimedia files such as WAV and AVI files.

Password Protecting User Settings

You can create a password to protect your user settings; the password prevents anyone without the password from changing your settings. In order for the settings to be loaded, the person running Total Eclipse will need to know and enter the password. If other people use your computer, and you want to make sure that the user settings dont get changed, password protecting the file might be a good idea. To password-protect a user settings file, go into the User settings | User tab | Advanced. In the Advanced user settings dialog box is a Password field near the upper left corner. Type whatever you want to be your password in the Password field. As you type, asterisks will appear for each character you type, but you wont see the actual password (see the Advanced user settings example above). Keep in mind that although the password should be something you will remember easily, it should not be something that someone would be able to guess (such as the name of your spouse, children, parents or pets). After you enter the password, click OK, and save the settings. The user is then password protected. To remove the password protection, reverse the process: go into the User settings | User tab | Advanced, and delete the asterisks in the Password field. Again you will need to click OK and save the settings for the change to take effect. NOTE: a password will not protect your dictionary, transcripts, or any job files. It only prevents people from loading your user format.

User Profiles 62

Re-enable Alerts
The Re-enable alerts button will restore all of the alert and warning messages that have a Don't show this message again checkbox. It unchecks all of them and all of the messages come back. The status of the various alert messages is stored in the editing settings, so if you export/import settings to another user, the same warnings will be enabled or disabled as the original.

Document journaling (and the Rebuild from journal button)

Advantage Software support personnel use this feature to trace specific problems. Do not turn it on unless instructed to do so.

Serial port log

Under User settings | User | Advanced is a button called Port log. If you check it on, Eclipse will log every transmission to and from every currently open COM port by placing a description of the communications in the TEST.DAT file. This is only for diagnosing serial communications problems, and should NEVER be turned on unless you are instructed to do so specifically by a support technician.

CREATE NEW USER

A user refers to a person, and not a group of settings; so once you have created a user for yourself you probably wont ever need to create a new user. However, if you do need a new user (perhaps so someone else can use your computer and have his or her own settings files), then use User Settings | User tab | Create New User. This button starts the New User Setup Wizard, which walks you through the process. The wizard creates a new user file, a new (empty) main dictionary, and a folder for storing job-related files. The wizard will prompt you to enter identifying information and select a nickname. Note that while the wizard asks for a first and last name, you can enter any two words to identify the user, such as John Smith When you click the Finish button on the wizard window, the new user settings file, dictionary, and file folder are created, each having the nickname you selected in the wizard (for example, if the nickname used for John Smith were JS, the folder would be named JS, the dictionary would be JS.dix, and the settings file would be JS.ini). The folder created is the default folder for storing jobs and blocks and also contains the new dictionary. The dictionary is an empty file into which you can import another dictionary, if desired, or build from scratch. The new users settings file (the .ini file) has Total Eclipses default settings. Once the new user is successfully created, it becomes the current user. To switch to a different user, go to User settings (Alt+U) and load a different user settings file.

User Profiles 63

User Profiles 64

CHAPTER 5 SETTING THE DISPLAY THE WAY YOU WANT

GETTING MAXIMUM SCREEN SPACE
Often when youre editing a transcript youll want to be able to see as much of the text as possible on the screen. (Screen area, in fact, is so valuable to most computer users that its often called real estate.) One way to increase your usable real estate, without necessarily changing font sizes and margin displays, is to use Full screen mode, F11 (or Window menu | Full screen). (F11 is a toggle that will turn Full screen on and off.) This will let the Total Eclipse program, toolbars, and document window fill your screen space, and will remove the status, paragraph, and scroll bars from view.
Window menu/View submenu

You can also turn off the notes window if you dont need to see them and want the added space. If notes are displayed, go to the Window menu | View, and select the view Notebar item. (Note that View menu items work as toggles). If you turn off the notebar, the display will get larger to fit the window. When you turn it back on, the display will shrink back down again. Note that the Auto-zoom feature in the Notebar options on the Display tab has an impact on what will happen if the notebar is turned off. If Auto-zoom has been checked, the same amount of text will be displayed, but the font will be larger. If Auto-zoom has not been checked, more text will be visible and the font will remain the same size.

The Notebar on or off state is recorded separately for realtime and non-realtime sessions. In other words, if you turn it off during a realtime session, the next realtime session will open with the Notebar off. A document being edited not in realtime will record whether the steno window should be on or off while editing normally. For added screen space, you can also turn off the Statusbar, the Paragraph bar, and the Ruler. It is important to note that the size of the transcript window and of your monitor, the zoom factor you are using, and your monitors resolution affect how much of a document page you can see. Standard monitors cannot display an entire 8.5 by 11 page at actual size. To see an entire page, use the zoom-out feature. Default settings for the screen resolution you want are determined in Windows under Start | Settings | Control Panel | Appearance and Themes (or Display | Settings). The higher the resolution the more of your page youll see but it will also be smaller. Ordinarily, youll want to select the highest resolution possible. If you go into the Windows display settings and go to Settings/Advanced and change the font size to scale your display, the fonts get large on all Windows programs, and the dialog box controls all expand to fit the new text. Total Eclipse takes the screen scaling in Windows into account in all phases of the program, so if you have a laptop with a 1600 X 1200 resolution screen, you can boost the resolution all the way up and set the font size to 150% or even 200% and Eclipse will be readableeven the menus and dialog controls. Setting the Display the Way you Want 65

Note that if you lower the resolution while running Eclipse with windows like the Realtime status window open, the windows may go off the screen. If you change the screen resolution and then run the program, the windows will reposition onscreen, but if you change resolution while the program is running, the windows will not come back until the program is restarted or another user is loaded.

VIEW TOGGLES
The Window menu | View toggles function (and corresponding toolbar button) allows you to turn on and off the Status bar, Document tab bar, Paragraph bar, Command Views toggles Ruler bar, Note bar, Realtime statistics, Closed captioning preview, Menu F10/Window/ and Script list. View toggles
Toolbar Icon

The Document tab bar appears in the lower left corner of your screen, and allows you to switch quickly between open files.

Icons appear next to file names, so you can find notes, text files, and dictionaries. When you right click on a tab, you can close, minimize, maximize, or restore the documents.

The View toggles function also allows you to turn on or off any of the six available toolbar configurations. You can create macros that will create specific toolbar configurations in a single keystroke by turning them all off and then turning selected ones on

ARRANGING DOCUMENT WINDOWS

The Window menu gives you several options for how you organize and view multiple open files. Among other options, the Window menu lists the filenames of every document open in Setting the Display the Way you Want 66

the program. A checkmark appears to the left of the active document. To make another document active, you can select it from the menu or type the number that appears to the left of the documents name. (You can open the Window menu by pressing Alt then W.) You can also use the Window menu to maximize, or bring back, a minimized file; open the Window menu and type the number of the document you want. Four other options on the Window menu relate to working with multiple documents: New Window creates a duplicate window for the active document. Any changes made to the document in one window are reflected in the other(s). This feature allows you to view one area of a document while you work on another area. You can have numerous windows open for the same document. Each new window can be sized independently of the others, and each has its own title bar and control buttons (close, maximize, restore, minimize). When new windows are created for a document, sequential numbers are added to the end of the document title, indicating the order in which each was created. This command does not create a duplicate file, only multiple viewings of the same file. Cascade resizes each open window to the same dimensions and then arranges the windows in an offset stack so that the title bar and a portion of each windows left side remains visible. This option quickly organizes a cluttered desktop. To access any of the documents in the stack, click on any visible portion of the window. Tile resizes all open windows to identical dimensions and arranges them top-to-bottom or side-by-side (like tiles). The tiles are sized such that the entire group will fill the main program window. This option is useful when you need to work in more than one document at the same time (e.g. copying information from one document to another). Arrange Icons organizes the title-bar icons for all minimized windows. (When you minimize an open window, it becomes a title-bar icon.) The icons are lined up along the bottom of the Eclipse program window.

Setting the Display the Way you Want 67

TOOLBAR CUSTOMIZATION

All six of Total Eclipses toolbars can be completely customized using the Window menu | Customize toolbars command. The six default toolbars and the additional toolbar buttons are pictured in Appendix C: Toolbars, page 333. Details on how to customize your toolbars are in the Reference Guide, 514 Customized toolbars will be saved in your current .ini file, so be aware that you can have different arrangements of toolbars for all of the different ways you work; for example, you could have one arrangement for realtime and one for editing. Using the Window menu | View Toggles command, you have the option of turning each individual toolbar on and off.

ADJUSTING DISPLAY CHARACTERISTICS

The appearance of your transcript in the window, things such as how large the font is, how much white space the window has, can greatly affect your efficiency. Eclipse can display your document exactly the way it will print (known as WYSIWYGwhat you see is what you get, pronounced wizzywig). Additional controls can speed your editing, help you fine-tune document layout, and increase your comfort level. Three buttons that influence document display are zoom-in and zoom-out, and display properties.

ZOOM IN / ZOOM OUT

You can Zoom in and Zoom out, which works similarly to using successively stronger (Zoom in) or weaker (Zoom out) magnifying glasses. The Zoom Command Zoom in in (Ctrl+Shift+F7) and Zoom out (Ctrl+Shift+F8) functions Speed Key Ctrl+Shift+F7 are on the Window menu, and are buttons on the Small edit Menu F10/Window/Zoom in tools toolbar.
Toolbar Icon

Both buttons use a magnifying glass icon; the difference is that zoom in has a plus sign (+) on it and zoom out has a minus sign.

Setting the Display the Way you Want 68

The zoom-in magnifies the display to show the document in greater detail. The zoom-out reduces the display to show more of the document in the available display area. Neither button affects the documents fonts or margins, only the display of the document. Each click of a zoom button changes the display incrementally.
Zoom out Ctrl+Shift+F8 F10/Window/Zoom out

Command Speed Key Menu

You can also set how you want the file opened by default do you always want it to open at 100% of its size? 50%? To set this, go to User settings (Alt+U) | Display. You can use Toolbar Icon the Zoom: drop-down menu to select a zoom percentage, or click the in button or the out button to zoom in or out by 10%. You can also click in the Zoom field and type in a number, whether or not it is available in the drop list. The next time you open the file it will open at this level of magnification. You can also use the Display properties button on the toolbar to make the same kind of change. Unlike changes you make through User settings | Display, which are saved and become a part of your settings, Toolbar Icon changes you make through the toolbar button will not automatically be saved. A dialog box will open asking Would you like to make those display changes permanent? To make the changes part of your settings, click the Yes button.
Command Speed Key Menu Display properties Ctrl+Shift+F11 F10/Window/ Display properties

Note: The zoom in and out functions will also increase and decrease the font size in the note files and dictionary windows. In note files, this DOES affect the printing.

CURSOR DISPLAY
You can set separate display widths and heights for the cursor for when you are in regular edit mode and for when you are in Hyperkeys. Setting the width of the cursor can make it easier for you to find the cursor in a document and also can help you visually distinguish when you are in Hyperkeys. The cursor width that you set is relative to the size of the display (not printed) font. If you set the height to zero, the height will automatically be set to an appropriate height for the lines of text. You can use these settings to create a horizontal cursor instead of a vertical one by setting the height very small and the width as large as a single character (usually 150.)

Setting the Display the Way you Want 69

To set the cursor size, go to the display properties by either the User settings | Display (if you want to change to become a part of your settings) or the Display toolbar button (if you want the option to change only the current editing sessions). To set the Width (W) or Height (H), enter a number in the Cursor size W: or H: fields, or the Hyperkey size W: or H: fields. A value of 10 creates a thin cursor. For a medium-width cursor, enter 100. Because the cursor width is relative to the display size of text, the cursor width changes as you zoom in and out of a document.

Lines below cursor

The Lines below cursor field controls the number of lines of text that will always appear below the cursor when you scroll down in the document. For example, at a value of 5, when you press and hold the down-arrow key, the cursor holds a position five lines above the bottom line of visible text and scrolls the text up past it. There is no upper limit to the value you can set this, but it will stop the cursor at the top of the screen as an upper limit.

TEXT DISPLAY
Editing font
If you want to view a document in a font other than the one in which you will print, go to User Settings | Display | Editing Font button. This opens the Font dialog in which you can select a font name or font attribute for the display (editing) font. Note that this change affects only the display of the text, not how it will be printed. If they select a proportional font instead of a fixed font, it will affect how things line up and will make it difficult to line up text on administrative pages, headers, footers, etc. Also, that if you have the ruler turned on, the text in a proportional font may not extend to the ruler marking indicated by the right margin setting for that paragraph. For example, if the right margin is set at 52, a line of text that is all i's will only extend to about 24 on the ruler. A line Setting the Display the Way you Want 70

of text that is all W's will extend past the edge of the page to about 56 on the ruler. With a Fixed font, both lines will extend to 52 on the ruler. An easy way to find the fixed fonts that are available on the computer is to go to Notebar options on the Display tab and click the Font button. Only fixed fonts will be listed in that section.

Color selections
You can color-code the display of foreground or background of various types of text, such as question and answer paragraphs and untranslates. These colors do not appear on printed output and are used only to visually distinguish text during editing. You can control text foreground and background colors for 28 text types. To set text colors 1. Go to User settings (Alt+U) | Display. 2. The Color selections area is in the bottom left corner of the window. Click on the drop-down menu to select the type of text you want to color-code. 3. Once the type of text shows in the field, click on either the Foreground or Background button. You will get a colorpicker window; the color that is currently used for that text type will have a faint outline around it. Click on the square that is the color you want to use. 4. After selecting the color, click OK. The display will change accordingly. Note that you need to select foreground and background colors separately. 5. You can select other text types to color-code or, if you are finished selecting colors, click OK. If the color you want does not appear in the color picker, click the Define Custom Colors button. For more information on using specific controls in the Color dialog box, use the question mark button on the dialog boxs title barclick the button, and then click the control you want help on. To change the page color or background, select Text box and page background and click the background button to select the desired color. The cursor will be the inverse color of the page background. You can also check the Display all text in one color checkbox to make all text colors , including filled-in form fields, match translated text.
WYSIWIG Tip
If all you want is to see how the document will look when printed (but not actually work in WYSIWIG mode), set WYSIWIG via the Display button, (rather than User settings where changes are more permanent).

Setting the Display the Way you Want 71

VIEWING MARGINS, LINE NUMBERS, AND WHITE SPACE

One way to view as much text as possible in the window, without changing the font size, is to hide the left margin, line numbers, and/or line spacing. Keep in mind that these changes affect only the display and not the actual printed transcript Left margin display Go to User settings (Alt+U) | Display (or use the Display toolbar button). If the Left Margin checkbox is marked, white space corresponding to the width of the documents left margin will be displayed. To hide the margin, unmark the checkbox (click in the box to remove the mark). Line number display Go to User settings (Alt+U) | Display tab (or use the Display toolbar button). If the Line Numbers checkbox is marked, the line numbers will be displayed. To hide the line numbers, unmark the checkbox (click in the box to remove the mark). Line spacing display Go to User settings (Alt+U) | Display tab (or use the Display toolbar button). To display the text as single-spaced, remove the mark in the Spacing checkbox. To display text with line spacing relevant to the paragraph formats (as set in User Settings | Paragraph formats), mark the checkbox. Note that when changing these settings, in addition to clicking in the checkboxes, you can also use Alt+option number or Alt+underlined letter to check or uncheck the options.

Miscellaneous display options

The following options are all found in User Settings | Display (or via the Display toolbar button). Print commands Mark the Print Commands checkbox to display print commands. (Print commands control various transcript elements such as headers, comment lines, and index entries.) When this checkbox is marked, a transcripts text box, as well as inserted graphics, cannot be displayed. Clear this checkbox to hide print commands. Lockspaces will display as tildes ( ~ ) when print commands are displayed. Smooth scrolling This option smooth-scrolls the screen data to allow the viewers of CART to read the scrolling text more easily. All caps Mark the All Caps checkbox to display all text in upper case (but only on the display, not the printed document).

Setting the Display the Way you Want 72

Font Width Allows you to control the size of the displayed font. For the display font to be rendered in its default appearance, set this to 0. The screen will update as you change it. Notebar Options button The Notebar options button opens a dialog window. The Notebar options dialog window can also be opened by right-clicking anywhere in the Notebar. The Steno width field controls the width of the steno area in a transcript window by changing the number of steno characters. Type a value from 5 to 22 in this field. In this dialog window, you can also set the Timecodes to display, and choose a Font for the Notebar display. If you turn on Auto-zoom, the text will zoom out or zoom in as the notebar is turned on or off. If you turn on the Dictionary entries option, you will be able to see any dictionary entries for the currently highlighted steno in the steno window. If a particular piece of steno exists in multiple dictionaries, you will see each of them listed on a separate line, much like the Review dictionaries function in the globaling window. If you turn this on, any time the cursor is on any dictionary entry the steno window will draw a divider at the bottom with enough room to show the dictionary entries. Each entry will be preceded by a single letter indicating which dictionary it's in, i.e. (M)ain, (J)ob, or 1 through 9. For example, if you have TOPL = Tom in your main dictionary and TOPL = Thom in your user 3 dictionary, when you place your cursor on TOPL the steno window will show this at the bottom: M:Tom 3:Thom If the entry you're on is a slop stroke, it will show you the slop stroke itself, followed by the text for the entry that the slop stroke points to. If the entry contains a comment, the comment text will appear on a line below that.

Setting the Display the Way you Want 73

If the entry is a conflict, the conflict choices will fan out on separate lines with the appropriate numbers by them, making it much easier to read what the choices are, particularly for long conflicts. If you want to see the dictionary that contains a particular entry, hit F9, Alt+Letter, [enter], (using whatever letter appears to the left of the entry in the steno window), Or you can left-click on the dictionary entry and Eclipse will open the dictionary containing that entry and jump directly to the entry. If you have the Phonetic strokes turned on, the strokes in the dictionary info bar will also appear phonetically.

Page boundaries
You can control how distinctly the boundaries between pages are displayed. For example, if you are still editing the transcript you might not care where the page boundaries are, so you would want to minimize the space they take on the screen. However, if you are getting ready to print you might want to see where the boundaries are, thus emphasize them on the screen. In Total Eclipse you have three options for displaying the page boundaries: none, compact, full. To set the page boundaries, go to User settings (Alt+U) | Display (or use the Display toolbar button); page boundaries options are in the bottom right corner of the window. For true What You See Is What You Get display, the Full option must be selected. This option creates a noticeable space between pages and allows Total Eclipse to display graphical text boxes on a page. The Compact option shows page breaks as a narrow line. The None option does not show page breaksthe only way to determine where page breaks occur is by viewing line numbers. Page numbers are displayed when the page boundaries are set to Full or Compact. When using no page boundaries, the page numbers could be in the way of the text, and are not displayed.

WYSIWYG
To see how the document will look when printed, use WYSIWYG (What You See Is What You Get, pronounced wizzywig) mode: User Settings | Display (or Display toolbar button) and click the WYSIWYG button. This button automatically selects those display options necessary for WYSIWYG mode. Deselecting those options will take you out of WYSIWYG mode.

Setting the Display the Way you Want 74

CHAPTER 6 WORKING WITH DICTIONARIES

OVERVIEW
To translate your steno notes, Total Eclipse uses a dictionary that defines strokes. Each user setup in Total Eclipse has a main dictionary that is by default used for translation. In addition to the main dictionary, you can have a dictionary for each job as well as other specialized dictionaries. For example, if you work often with medical and engineering cases, you might have a dictionary for medical terms and another for engineering. These dictionaries can be added to a translation along with a main dictionary to translate a note file. Dictionary files have their own format and a .dix file extension. You can look at your dictionary and see the steno stroke and its corresponding translations and also edit the dictionary. A translation for any given outline could be a single word, a phrase, a Total Eclipse editing command, prefix or suffix, conflict, or other formatting code.

You can import dictionaries from other CAT systems, create dictionaries from scratch, or extract a set of entries from one dictionary into another. Dictionary maintenance is critical. You should make one (or more) copies, backups, of your dictionaries on a regular basis (see page 104).
Version 3 Users Note: Total Eclipse Version 4's FileName.dix files use an entirely different data structure, file format, and editor from earlier versions. When you run Version 4, any time you attempt to open a 3.X dictionary, it will ask if you wish to convert it. If you answer yes, the old dictionary will be placed in a backup folder and the new one will take its place. Attempting to open V4 dictionaries in 3.X will result in a "This is not an Eclipse dictionary" error. If it's a main dictionary, the 3.X program will not let you into that user at all after that error appears. The V4 dictionary works much like the V3. The dictionary syntax is the same, globals are still done the same way, selecting dictionaries for translation is still done the same way. The main differences are in the file size (dictionaries are half the size) and in the dictionary editor. For more information, see the Reference Guide page 517.

Working with Dictionaries 75

Opening Dictionaries
When you have no document open, the Open dictionary function (usually F9) displays a file dialog allowing you to pick a dictionary to open.

If you have a text document open and active, the Dictionaries dialog will display the dictionaries that were used to translate the job, including the current main dictionary.

The main dictionary is selected by default so that you can open the main dictionary by hitting F9 [Enter]. If you open an old document, this feature may only show the main dictionary. If you pick a job dictionary from this list, it will check the same folder as the text file (the .ecl file) and if it doesn't find the dictionary there it will then try the jobs folder as defined in User settings | User | Advanced... If the job dictionary does not physically exist and you select it to open, Eclipse will create one on the fly but it will be blank. The same thing will happen if you global into a dictionary that doesn't exist (Eclipse will create the dictionary and add the entry). If you wish to open a dictionary that is not on the list, use the Browse button to display the open file dialog. Working with Dictionaries 76

If you hit the Open all button, it will open ALL the dictionaries. Once all of the dictionaries are open, you can work in the job and all of the dictionaries will track your cursor. There are also Add and Remove buttons to allow you to add or remove items from this list. You can also reorder the dictionaries by selecting one and using the Move up or Move down buttons to move it or use Ctrl+up or Ctrl+down. If you are currently in a translation and you Add, Remove or change the order of the dictionaries in this list, it will change how the dictionaries are being used in the current translation.

VIEWING AND EDITING DICTIONARY FILES

Total Eclipse dictionaries, like other Total Eclipse files, can be displayed within the main program window, with the name of the dictionary file in the title bar of its document window. When a dictionary is the active document in Total Eclipse, the dictionary name also appears in the title bar of the main program window, after the users name. When you look at a dictionary, youll see the individual entries, one entry per line (an entry can consist of more than one word or steno stroke), with detailed information available in columns.

The columns in default order are:

Steno: The steno for the dictionary entry or the text for a text replacement entry in quotes. For example, if you have a job dictionary speaker list text replacement of ATTY1 to Mr. Smith, it will appear as ATTY1 in the steno column to differentiate it from a normal steno entry. Text: The text of the dictionary entry. Created: The date and time the entry was first created. Modified: The date and time the entry was last modified by the user. This does NOT get updated if the program automatically modifies an entry for any reason. Used: The date and time the entry was last used in a translation. #: The number of times the entry has been used in translations. Comment: A user-supplied comment. You can attach a comment to any dictionary entry if there is additional information you would like stored about the entry. AI: The number of AI contexts the entry has collected if it is a conflict. Strokes: The number of strokes in the dictionary entry. Working with Dictionaries 77

Words: The number of words in the dictionary entry. (Note: this is an approximation based only on the number of spaces in the entry. For example, the dog is considered two words. {A}Yes is considered one word. Mr.{~}Jones is also considered one word.)

If any information on any of the columns exceeds the width of the column, the text will trail off with ... at the end of it, indicating that there's not enough room to show the entire contents. The date/time columns (Created, Modified, Used) will be blank if the software is unable to determine when an event occurred, or if it has never occurred. For example, if an entry was created but has never been modified, the modified field will be blank for that entry. Likewise, if it has never been used in a translation, the used field will be blank. You can resize any of the columns by clicking and dragging the border between the labels at the top of the display. You can reduce a column's size all the way to zero if you wish. You can change the order of the columns to display the information in any order you like by clicking and dragging the column header left or right. You can sort the contents of the dictionary by any of the columns by left-clicking on the column header. If you wish to sort the dictionary by text instead of steno, for example, simply left-click on the text column header. If you wish to reverse the sort order, click on the same column header again. An arrow will indicate which column is currently being used to sort the entries and which direction it is being sorted. In the example below, the entries are sorted by Text.

When your dictionary is sorted by text, as you move through a document, it will track to the text of the main dictionary entry for that steno, showing you all of the ways that you write that entry. If you have a different dictionary open, it will show you the ways that same word can be written in the other dictionary. That can be a helpful tool if you're working on alternate ways of writing things and you have a resource such as a standard dictionary from another writing theory or a copy of a friend's dictionary. You can have that resource dictionary open, even though you're not using it to translate against, sorted by text, and it will track to show you alternate ways to write the word your cursor is on.

Working with Dictionaries 78

When you click on a column, the system will preserve your location; it will find the entry that your highlight bar was on originally, and move to its new location in the new sort order. It will also scroll the window to make the highlighted item visible.

When you view a dictionary, spread-out steno appears on the right side of the dictionary view as a steno window that can be toggled on and off using the Window | View | view Notebar toggle. It will show all of the strokes of the currently highlighted entry, and all the information for that entry.

Display properties
You can modify the font used by the dictionary display. Note that this will affect the text in all of the columns; you cannot have some columns be a font different from others. You can also modify several the display properties using the Dictionary display dialog. You can get to this by right clicking in the dictionary and selecting Display.., or by selecting Window | Display properties from the pull-down menus. This dialog allows you to set the width of each column by selecting the column title from a list and typing the width or using the arrow keys or buttons to set the width. The column changes on the fly as you modify the number to show you what the result will be. You may find this easier than clicking and dragging, particularly if you have resized a column down to zero, making it tricky to get back without this feature. You can use the Move up and Move down buttons to change the order of the columns without using the mouse. The Hide button will hide a column, by changing the column width to zero. The Sync with editing checkbox indicates whether dictionaries are synchronized with other documents. If this is turned on, as you move in any document, the currently open dictionaries jump to the same entry as the cursor. If you turn it off, dictionaries will stay where they were. To use the Sort setting, select the column you wish to sort by, then select Forward or Backward in the sort selector, and hit OK. Working with Dictionaries 79

The Number entries checkbox determines whether or not the entries are numbered on the left side. You can also set the date/time format used by the date/time columns. Pressing the Date/time format button brings up the date/time dialog that allows you to control how the information is displayed. See page 174 for the Insert time/date editing feature for further details. Alternately, if you want to have the information about how old entries are in a way that takes up much, much less space, simply press the Date offset button instead, and the columns will show you how old all of the entries are in days. The steno window option in the dictionary display can be turned on or off using the Window | View Toggles | Note bar (steno) menu (or Ctrl+Shift+3). This window shows complete details of the currently selected entry, including steno in paper format, the text, all of the dates, etc., no matter which columns are displayed. One of the advantages of this window is that if you have a long piece of text, steno, or a comment, it will wrap to multiple lines so that you can see all of it, even if it's truncated in the column display. The font size and the steno size affect the width of the dictionary steno window. The Notebar button opens the Notebar options dialog, where you can adjust the characteristics of the dictionary steno window. If you have User settings | Display | Notebar options | Phonetic strokes turned on, it will affect the dictionary steno display as well as the display in the documents.

Moving around in a dictionary

If you are in a dictionary and you press a letter, you will jump to the first entry that uses that letter's steno equivalent. It prefers left-side phonetics, so when you hit L you will get the entries starting with HR, not the entries starting with the right-side -L key. There are a relatively small number of right-side-only entries in a dictionary, and they all appear at the top, so it makes sense to skip those. If you have sorted the dictionary by text, you will jump to the first entry that starts with that text. It is case-sensitive, and you can type multiple letters to jump to the first entries that start with those letters as a sequence. After a one-second pause, any new letter hit will be considered the start of a new word. Note that this will not work if you have hyperkeys turned on.

Working with Dictionaries 80

Temporary markers The Move menu | Advanced | Markers function works in dictionaries, allowing you to create bookmarks that you can jump to later. These are Command Markers temporary and will not be remembered once the Speed Key Ctrl+M dictionary is closed. The dialog indicates where the F10/Move/Advanced Menu marker is by showing the steno of the entry marked. Markers
Toolbar Icon

MAKING AND EDITING DICTIONARIES

Before you can begin making, building, or importing a dictionary, you need to create a dictionary file to hold the entries. With a dictionary window active, you can add entries using several methods:

Use the Tools menu | Build Dictionary command to generate a dictionary from scratch, based on outlines you enter for a standard set of entries. Your input writer realtime settings should be configured (see Entering Stroke in Realtime, page 82) before using the Build dictionary command, so you can use your writer to create the entries. Use the File menu | Import command to convert and insert entries from another dictionary file format (such as RTF-CRE). When using File | Import from within a dictionary, you can select multiple files to import.

Indirect methods for placing entries in the dictionary include globals, the block write and block separate commands, and pasting entries that have been copied or cut from other Total Eclipse dictionaries. You can also use the Edit menu | Add dictionary entry command (shortcut: Ctrl+D) to add new entries one at a time. You do not have to have a dictionary active to add entries with these indirect methods.

Creating a New Dictionary File

Use the Open Dictionary command (F9).
Command Speed Key Menu Toolbar Icon Open dictionary F9 F10/File/Open Dictionary

The Open file dialog window appears. Type a name for the new dictionary in the File name field. You do not have to type the .dix extension; it will be added automatically. By default it will go to the folder you specified for your job files. Although you can store your dictionaries anywhere on your computer, its usually a good idea to store them in your

Working with Dictionaries 81

jobs folder. If necessary, use the controls in the file dialog window to select an alternate folder in which to store the dictionary.

Click Open. An alert box will appear, stating the file does not exist and asking whether you want to create the file. Click Yes. The dictionary file is then created and opened within your Total Eclipse main program window. The title bar of the dictionary window shows the filename you gave it.

Building a Dictionary from Scratch

If youre new to reporting you might have to build your dictionary from scratch. Total Eclipse helps you do that by providing a standard word list to which you assign your stroke outlines. You can enter the strokes either by using a writer set for realtime or by using your keyboard and mouse to select outlines in the steno writer emulator. Entering strokes in realtime If you want to use your writer to enter the stroke outlines for each entry, make sure you have selected the correct realtime settings for your writer: 1. Go to User Settings (Alt+U) | Input tab. 2. Check that the correct writer is selected. Use the Setup button to check that the COM port or other input settings are correct.
Command Menu Toolbar Icon Build a dictionary F10/Tools/Build Dictionary

3. In the Specialty strokes area of the Input tab, define an Automark and a Division stroke for your writer. To build a dictionary 1. Open a Dictionary (F9) and either create a new dictionary file, as described above, or open an existing dictionary.

Working with Dictionaries 82

2. Once the dictionary file is open, use the Tools menu | Build Dictionary command (this item is available only when a dictionary file is active). Total Eclipse will automatically begin to look for a connected writer; this step might take a few seconds, so dont worry if it looks as if nothing is happening Total Eclipse is working. If the program cannot find a writer, an alert box will appear stating Unable to connect to steno machine. If you in fact dont have a writer connected, select OK to continue. (If you are using a flash, there will be no error message and the Build dictionary window will open as if Eclipse detects a writer.) If Total Eclipse finds a writer, it will proceed to the next step on its own. Total Eclipse cant find your writer? - If you do have a writer connected but Total Eclipse cant find it, return to User Settings | Input and double check that you have indicated the correct writer and Comm Setup, and also double check your cables. 3. The Build dictionary dialog appears. 4. The first item in the word list appears in the upper left corner of the dialog, (next to the label Word:), and a list of suggested strokes appears in a numbered list below it. Total Eclipses word list begins with formatting entries (e.g. {A} for an answer paragraph), then has single word entries, and ends with common phrases. 5. If you are using a writer, use your machine to stroke the outline you use for the word list item. Each stroke you write appears on a separate line in the display area. When the outline is complete, write the automark to go to the next item. If you want to change the stroke you just wrote, write the division/partition stroke to clear the most recent stroke in the display area; then enter the new stroke. 6. If you are using the keyboard or mouse, and one of the suggested stroke outlines is appropriate for you, click or type the corresponding numbered button. The window will automatically advance to the next word in the list. If none of the suggestions is appropriate, click the 5 (Enter manually). The steno emulator windows will open, and you can use your mouse to form the stroke outline you want to use for the corresponding word. After making the stroke, click OK to move on to the next word in the list. The steno emulator windows will disappear. (See Appendix H page 379 for details on using the Steno emulator.) 7. The Browse.. button allows you to pick a text file, which should be a word list (an ASCII file with one word on each line.) It will then allow you to build a dictionary using the words in that text file. This is intended for quick vocabulary preparation from short word lists such as case-specific or show-specific words. Note: You can create a word list from an associate's job dictionary by opening the dictionary and using File/Export. 8. To skip an entry on the word list, click Next. To return to the previous entry on the word list, click Back. Regardless of the method you are using, you can continue through the entire word list or stop at any point in the list (you dont have to build the entire dictionary in one sitting!). When you are ready to stop, click OK in the Build dictionary dialog. Each word list item that you Working with Dictionaries 83

defined with steno, and its corresponding outline, is added to the active dictionary and appears in the dictionarys window. Conflicts - If the same steno stroke(s) are used for multiple word list items, Total Eclipse automatically creates conflicts. Double strokes To create a double-stroke entry in the steno emulator, hit one stroke, then hit Alt+C or the Copy button to duplicate it. Additional entries for the same word - If you set up a stitch mode stroke, you can use that stroke during dictionary building instead of hitting the back button to return to the previous entry. This allows you to enter additional steno for the same word, if you wish to have several ways of writing it.

Building a dictionary from a word list

You can create or add to your Main dictionary, or a Job dictionary using a word list. You can either use the list that comes with Eclipse, which includes several thousand common words, and suffixes and prefixes. Or you can prepare a word list, consisting of an ascii file with one word or phrase per line. Open a dictionary (F9). Using the Tools menu | Build dictionary, Browse and open the file you created. Eclipse suggests up to four ways of writing the first word, or you can enter the steno strokes manually using the Steno emulator or your steno machine. Press enter or click OK, and it moves on to the next word on the list. If you are using your steno machine, before you begin you should set up your Automark (which you can use to accept an entry) and your Division stroke (which you can use to clear out a false start). Go to User settings | Input and enter your Automark and Division strokes in the Specialty strokes area. The Additional word lists available button will take you to the Dictionary Jumpstart website.

Adding individual entries to a dictionary

When a dictionary is open and active, you can add entries, one at a time, with Add dictionary entry command (Ctrl+D). This command lets you manually enter steno strokes Working with Dictionaries 84

and their translation(s). You can also mark a block of text with F7 and use the add dictionary entry function to add an entry with the existing steno. You may make modifications if you wish before pressing [enter] and it will also default to using the marked text as the text for the new dictionary entry. To add individual entries to a dictionary You can add dictionary entries while you are editing or while you have a dictionary open and active:
Command Menu Speed key Toolbar Icon Add dictionary entry F10/Edit/Add Dictionary entry Ctrl+D

1. After opening a dictionary or while editing a transcript, use the Add Dictionary Entry command (Ctrl+D). The steno emulation windows appear on your screen. 2. Enter the steno stroke. (See Appendix K page 379 for details on using the Steno emulator.)

3. Click OK after completing the steno entry. A text definition window will appear; the steno you just entered will appear in the title bar. (This window is very similar to what you use when globaling. If you are in a dictionary, it lacks the drop-down list of dictionaries which is present if you global while editing a transcript.)

4. Enter the definition in the top text-entry field. If the field has text in it, the stroke outline you entered already had a definition in the dictionary. You can delete, edit, or add to that definition. 5. Select OK to complete the entry and add it to the dictionary. Formatting codes and dictionary commands In the text definition dialog, the field to the right of the Suggestions box contains a drop down list of basic formatting codes for dictionary entries, each with a descriptive label. To add a code to the definition you are creating, select it from the list. The formatting code is inserted at the cursors current position in the definition field. For more information on how to write definitions, see the section Dictionary Syntax (page 108) and the online help for more information on dictionary commands.

ADDING, COPYING, AND MOVING DICTIONARY ENTRIES TO OTHER DICTIONARIES

To add dictionary entries to your dictionary in realtime, you can use the steno dialog in keymode. If you are toggled into Keymode in realtime, then strokes on the writer will be transferred directly into the on-screen steno emulator. (See Appendix K page 379 for details on using the Steno emulator.) When used in combination with the Edit | Add Dictionary Working with Dictionaries 85

Entry command in the editor, you can add dictionary entries from your writer in realtime without having to write the stroke in your job first. Create a macro to activate keymode and then execute the Add Dictionary Entry function in one stroke. Another stroke would press the Enter key for you in order to accept the steno. Since you are in keymode, you can fingerspell the entry and then use your accept global macro to put it into whatever dictionary you like. Add entry will disable keymode and correction mode when you complete the entry or escape from the process. Selected dictionary entries can be copied or separated/transferred to other dictionaries. Copying (or writing) an entry to another dictionary leaves the entry in the original dictionary and places a duplicate entry in the other, or target, dictionary. Separating or transferring an entry is essentially the same as a cut-and-paste operation in a word processor; the entry is removed from the original dictionary and placed in the target dictionary. For either operation, you first need to mark the entries you want to copy or move.

Marking entries
An entry or selection of dictionary entries can be marked for modification by using Windows standards, using Shift+Click or Ctrl+Click to select ranges or individual entries, or Shift+cursor movement keys to select ranges with the keyboard. You can also use the space bar to tag entries individually. Pressing the spacebar puts you into a tagging mode, and your cursor position is represented by a light outline. Select entries using the spacebar, noting that the only entries that are highlighted are the ones you have actually selected. While in this mode the only way you can select entries is with the spacebar, and you have to hit the [escape] key to get out of it. Note, also, that if you click on an entry with the mouse without hitting the Ctrl key that all of your selections will be undone and you will have to start over. Marking entries Using F7 The F7 marking feature lets you mark a block of dictionary entries using any movement command. Command Mark Speed Key F7 To use this method, press F7 to turn on the blocking feature Hyperkey M and mark entries from the current entry up or down through Menu F10/Block/Mark the entries. As long as the feature is on, any subsequent movement you make with a cursor key will behave as Toolbar icon though you are holding the Shift key. This means that you can block lines by using the up and down arrow keys, or the page up or page down keys. To deselect the text and turn off marking, press Esc.
Command Speed Key Hyperkey Menu Toolbar Icon Find dictionary entries F5 F F10/Move/Find

Selecting Entries for modification

With a dictionary open and active, open the Find dictionary entries window (F5). Select your criteria and click OK to see a list of matching entries. (See Searching Dictionaries, page 96 for more information on finding dictionary entries.)

Working with Dictionaries 86

Modifying entries
If you right click on a entry and select Properties.., or highlight an entry and hit Enter, it will open the Entry properties dialog, which includes all of the information in the dictionary entry. If you press the Steno.. button to change the steno, you have the option of replacing the original entry or making a new entry. If you hit OK, the default behavior, the steno you enter will replace the original. If you hit the Add button instead, it will add the current entry to the dictionary with the new steno, but the original one will remain. You can use this to add multiple steno variations for one dictionary entry. The Advanced.. button allows you to perform editing functions unique to the type of entry you are working with. If it is a conflict, that button will allow you to edit the AI data. If you are on a Speaker entry, it will open the Master Speaker Table. There are buttons to Add new data, Modify existing data or Delete the conflict. The add and modify buttons will prompt for the grammar before the entry, the selection, and the grammar after the entry, using separate dialogs for selecting the parts of speech from a menu and the conflict choices from a list.

Working with Dictionaries 87

The grammar selection dialog contains a series of checkboxes for the parts of speech that can be combined together in a single word (such as words that can be either a noun or a verb.) It also contains a list box for special categories of words that are mutually exclusive. You can select from either the checkboxes or the list, but not both. (If you have check marks and a list selection, Eclipse will default to the list selection and ignore the checks.)

If it is a macro, it will open the macro itself and allow you to edit it.

If the current dictionary entry is an autoinclude, the system will open the include file and exit the dictionary entry properties dialog.

Adding a comment to an entry If you go into the text of a dictionary entry using the Text button in the Entry properties dialog, you can use the EntryText~~CommentText format to type in a comment in lieu of typing the comment into the comment field.

Copying/writing entries
Using the Write command You can copy the entries to an existing dictionary or to a new one. To create a new dictionary with the Write command, enter a new file name in the file dialog window (Step 3 below). A prompt will ask you to confirm the new files creation. 1. Open the dictionary that has the entries you want to copy. Working with Dictionaries 88

Command Speed Key Menu Toolbar Icon

Write Alt+W F10/Block/Write

2. Highlight the entries you want to copy. 3. Use the Write command (Alt+W). A file dialog opens. 4. Select the target dictionary (the dictionary to receive the entries) or type the name of a new dictionary. 5. Click OK. The marked entries are copied to the target dictionary.

Using the Windows Copy command 1. Highlight the dictionary entries you want to copy. 2. With the entries still selected, use the Windows Copy command (Ctrl+C). A copy of the selection is placed on the Windows clipboard. 3. Open the target dictionary if it isnt already opened. 4. Use the Windows Paste command (Ctrl+V) to paste the selection in the dictionary. Note that the selection that was copied remains on the Windows Clipboard until something else is cut or copied; until then, the same selection can be pasted multiple times.

Moving entries from one dictionary to another

Using the Separate (Transfer) command
Command Speed Key Menu Toolbar Icon Separate (Transfer) Ctrl+Shift+X F10/Block/Separate

The Separate (Transfer) command (Ctrl+Shift+X) removes marked entries from the dictionary and places them in another dictionary. It opens a file dialog window and places the marked entries in the selected target dictionary. This command differs from the Write command in that the selected entries are deleted from the original dictionary.

1. Open the dictionary that has the entries you want to move. 2. Highlight the entries to be moved. 3. Use the Separate (Transfer) command (Ctrl+Shift+X). A file dialog opens. 4. Select the target dictionary (the dictionary to receive the entries) or type the name of a new dictionary. 5. Click OK. The marked entries are moved to the target dictionary. Using the Windows Cut command
Command Speed Key Menu Toolbar Icon Cut Shift+Delete or Ctrl+X F10/Block/Cut

The Windows Cut command, Ctrl+X is another method for moving entries from one dictionary to another. Cut removes the entry from the current dictionary and places the selection on the clipboard. You can use the Windows Paste command (Ctrl+V) to paste the entry to another dictionary or to another file.

1. Highlight the dictionary entries you want to move. Working with Dictionaries 89

2. With the entries still selected, use the Windows Cut command Ctrl+X. The selection is placed on the Windows clipboard. 3. Open the target dictionary if it isnt already opened. 4. Use the Windows Paste command Ctrl+V to paste the selection in the dictionary. Note that the selection that was cut remains on the Windows Clipboard until something else is cut or copied; until then, the same selection can be pasted multiple times. NOTE: If an outline is in both the current and imported dictionary, the definition of the copied entry overwrites the one in the target dictionary (the dictionary in which you paste or write the entry), unless you have set the Detect conflicts option in User Settings | Edit tab | Globaling section. If a conflict is detected, a prompt window offers choices, and you have to select one.

IMPORTING, MERGING, AND UNMERGING

Total Eclipse can import dictionaries from Eclipse V.8 format. Dictionaries from other CAT programs can be imported, but they must first be converted to RTF (Rich Text Format), SDF (Standard Dictionary Format), or ASCII before being converted to a Total Eclipse dictionary. (RTF, SDF, and ASCII are often referred to as intermediate formats because they represent an intermediate step in the import process.) You can also combine, or merge, dictionaries. Whether you are importing or merging, the process is the same. NOTE: When an outline is in both the current and imported dictionary, the definition in the imported file overwrites the one in the current dictionary (the merged dictionary). If you later unmerge the dictionary, unmerging does not restore entries that were overwritten during the import. To avoid the overwriting, and to create a conflict instead, set the Detect conflicts option in the Globaling section in the User Settings | Edit tab.

Importing a dictionary into Total Eclipse

Open the Total Eclipse dictionary into which you want to import the converted dictionary. This can be a new dictionary (use F9 and give the dictionary a file name) or an existing Command Open dictionary dictionary whose entries you want to merge with the imported Speed Key F9 one.
Menu Toolbar Icon F10/File/Open Dictionary

Once the dictionary is open, use the File menu | Import command. A file dialog appears. Use the file dialog to locate the drive and folder with the dictionary or dictionaries you want to import.

Tip File menu | Import is identical to Block menu | Read (merge) command. You can use the keyboard shortcut Alt+R to import a dictionary.

In the Files of type field, select the file format of the dictionary you want to import. The display area will list only those files that are in the selected format. In the display area, double-click on a files name, or select one or more files you want to import, then click Open. A prompt appears asking whether you want to trim redundant entries. (Redundant entries are explained below). After you answer the prompt, Total Eclipse begins the dictionary import. You can also merge dictionaries with the Block menu | Read command (Alt+R).

Working with Dictionaries 90

Trimming redundant entries Redundant entries are multi-word, multi-stroke entries that Total Eclipse would translate correctly using smaller entries and conflict logic. For example, a two-stroke outline for the dog that is simply the combined strokes for the and dog is a redundant entry. (Such entries were necessary in earlier CAT systems to resolve conflicts such as \it\the.) Trimming redundant entries can result in much smaller dictionaries and increased performance.

Unmerging dictionaries
The Edit menu | Unglobal command removes entries from a dictionary that were placed there via a merge command. Typically this procedure is performed to remove a job or special dictionary that was merged with a main dictionary for a particular job. To unmerge dictionaries,
Command Menu Toolbar icon Unglobal F10/Edit/Unglobal

1. Select Edit | Unglobal. 2. Select the dictionary you want to unmerge from the Open file dialog (see page 45). NOTE: Remember that unmerging does not restore entries that were overwritten during an import.

AUTOMAGIC IN DICTIONARIES
When you are in a dictionary, AutoMagic offers a number of context-appropriate choices. For example, if you have several entries marked, Automagic suggests deleting, cutting, copying, writing, separating, or printing the entries.

Working with Dictionaries 91

If your cursor is on an entry, AutoMagic allows you to find entries, add an entry, delete or modify the entry, or print, among others.

If you choose 1 Find entries, AutoMagic suggests the most common search types. Pressing 1 again will filter to show all the capitalized entries. In case what you want is not listed, the last choice (in this example, number 8) opens the search dialog.

To return to viewing all the entries, press 1 again.

EXPORTING & CONVERTING TOTAL ECLIPSE DICTIONARIES

The File | Export command allows you to convert a complete dictionary or part of a dictionary to several file formats. If you have filtered your dictionary, only the filtered entries will be exported. Converted dictionaries serve as intermediate files that can be imported by Working with Dictionaries 92

other programs or writers. This command is also useful for creating a dictionary backup in an alternate format. Dictionaries can even be converted to word lists (uses only the definitions), useful for instruction, research, archival, and other purposes. The file format options are explained below:

RTF/CRE preserves the most information from the Total Eclipse dictionary and is the recommended format for exporting to other systems. ASCII is a text file that consists of each entrys steno outline and text definition. The output is in the same order as shown on the display SDIF is an older, universal format suitable for creating dictionaries that are compatible with Eclipse version 8.x (known as backward compatible). Stentura dictionary is the format used by Stentura writers that are capable of displaying realtime translation. Word list is an ASCII text file that contains only the text definitions of the dictionary, in the same order as shown on the display. ASCII (text first) is an ASCII file that has the text on the left. The output is in the same order as shown on the display

To export a dictionary, 1. Open the dictionary you want to export.

2. Use the File menu | Export command (or the Production | Output to Ascii command). The Export dictionary dialog opens with a list of file formats. 3. Select (click once on) a file format for the exported dictionary. 4. To export only part of the dictionary, click the Start at button. A steno writer emulation window appears. (See Appendix K page 379 for details on using the Steno emulator.) Enter the stroke outline at which you wish to start the exported file and then click OK. The exported file will contain only those entries from the selected outline to the last dictionary entry. 5. The export to Ascii or Word list will output the dictionary in the display order. 6. Click OK after setting the options in the Export Dictionary window. A Save As file dialog appears.

Working with Dictionaries 93

7. Type a file name for the new exported dictionary (be sure to give it a name you havent used for a dictionary) and select a location for it. 8. Click Save to complete the process. Note that the dictionary will export in whatever order it is sorted in at the time the exported file is created.

SPELL CHECKING A DICTIONARY

Command Speed Key Menu Toolbar Icon Spell check Shift+Alt+S F10/Production Check spelling

You can check the spelling of your dictionary entries by using the regular spell checker in Total Eclipse, Shift+Alt+S (See page 191 for details). Note that the spell checker will ignore the steno outlines and look only at the definitions. The dictionary spelling checker moves to errors as it advances through the dictionary checking spelling, so that the top entry in the window is the one with the invalid spelling.

Dictionary searches are not case sensitive. If a dictionary search contains no capital letters, the search will not be case insensitive. Any capital letters will cause it to do a case-sensitive search. For example, if you do a dictionary search for bank it will find both banker and Mr. Banks but if you search for Bank it will only find Mr. Banks. You can use Alt+S to spell check a single dictionary entry. Note that this only works for entries that consist of one word. Anything else will be met with a that is not a word message in the status bar. Correctly spelled words show word is correctly spelled in the status bar, and incorrectly spelled words will bring up the spell check suggestions dialog.

SPECIFYING CURRENT DICTIONARIES

When you prepare to translate a job you can indicate to which dictionaries globals will be added. You can also set in advance which dictionaries should be used by default.

Types of dictionaries
There are several types of dictionaries, categorized by when and how they are used: Main, Job, and user-defined dictionaries.

Working with Dictionaries 94

The Main dictionary is your core translation dictionary. The main dictionary is used in every translation. A Job dictionary is automatically created at the time of translation; its purpose is to contain steno and terms that are specific or unique to that job and unlikely to be needed elsewhere. If a Job dictionary is specified, it is used; if not, a Job dictionary with a file name in the form jobname.dix is created. During translation, Total Eclipse gives preference to job dictionary entries over those in a main dictionary. Jobs remember what job dictionary they are associated with, even if it is not the dictionary with the same name as the job. User dictionaries are usually dictionaries specific to an industry or a category of terms (such as medical, engineering, marine).

Setting default dictionaries

1. Open the User Settings (Alt+U) | User tab. 2. Click the Dictionaries button. The Dictionaries dialog appears.

3. Highlight the dictionary you want to work with, and use the buttons to arrange them, setting the Main dictionary and any additional dictionaries you want to use by default. 4. To add a dictionary to the list, highlight an empty space and click Add... An open file dialog appears, listing your dictionaries. 5. Select the dictionary you want to add by clicking on the name, and clicking Open or pressing Enter. Once selected, the dictionarys filename appears in the list. You can add multiple dictionaries by Shift+clicking or Ctrl+clicking several filenames. The dictionaries will be added in alphabetical order, so to control the order you will either have to add them one at a time or move them around after they're added.

Working with Dictionaries 95

SEARCHING DICTIONARIES
Search Overview
Command Speed Key Hyperkey Menu Toolbar Icon

Total Eclipses dictionary search allows you to find specific entries or a group of entries with the properties that you specify, according to a variety of criteria. After search, you can copy (Write) or transfer (Separate or Move) found entries to another Find F5 dictionary file. To search a dictionary, open it and then press F5 (this is the same way a search is initiated in a text document). The Find dictionary entries dialog window opens with your cursor in the Text box. Whatever you type in the text box will filter any entries matching that text. To search for an entry by text definition, begin the search using F5. When you get the Find dictionary entries Dialog, enter the text you want to find in the Text field. When you click on OK, Total Eclipse will search for an exact match to the entered text. For example, if you type the and hit [enter] it will find any dictionary entries containing the in them. Note that this is looking for a match anywhere in the dictionary, so it will not only match "the" but "the dog" or "on-the-job" or "there" or "other" or "bathe or any other entry containing that sequence of letters. The text search is only case sensitive when the search contains capital letters. Otherwise, it is not case sensitive For example, if you do a dictionary search for bank it will find both banker and Mr. Banks but if you search for Bank it will only find Mr. Banks. You can use Ctrl+W to add foreign and special characters to the search string. The Find dictionary entries dialog window gives you many options for your search. There are two lists containing Steno shortcuts and Text shortcuts to different types of searches you might want to do. Select an item from either one or both of those lists. Some of the searches require no additional input, such as Conflicts which simply shows you all of your
F F10/Move/Find

Working with Dictionaries 96

conflicts. Some of them, such as Starts with will require you to type in some text. Select the item on the list, hit enter or OK, then type the text when it asks you to and hit enter. The text will now be entered in the find dialog, and you can hit enter or OK to complete the search. When filtering or sorting a dictionary, the mouse pointer will turn to an hourglass to indicate that the software is working. These parameters can be searched individually or in a combination of one text filter and one steno filter. You can do find and replace searches on text and/or steno. The steno and text each have separate replace fields in which you can type a replacement for the original text. These options are described individually below, with more detailed information on custom searches in the Reference Guide, page 480. If only the text or only the steno has content typed into both the search and replace, the other part of the entry is ignored. For example, if you tell it to replace the text {A:bold} with {b} it will do so for all entries, regardless of their steno. If BOTH search boxes contain text, then only entries that match BOTH of the search criteria will be considered. In this case, if EITHER of the replace boxes contains text, then that text will be used to replace the appropriate matching portion of the entry. If BOTH replace boxes contain text, then that text will be replaced in BOTH of the portions of the entry. For examples, see the Reference Guide, page 495. When you issue a find command, the dictionary display changes by filtering out only those entries that match the criteria you specify and displaying them exclusively. When you do this, the Steno or Text column headers will change to Steno (filtered) or Text (filtered) to let you know you're not looking at your entire dictionary, but at a subset of the entries in it. You can use the up and down arrows to move among the filtered entries, and use the column sorting capability to re-sort the filtered entries in any order you like. For example, you could display all of your conflicts in alphabetical order. To return to viewing the complete dictionary, press F5 and enter without choosing any parameters. Search for an entry by number You can hit the Entry No. button at the bottom of the Find dictionary entries dialog and supply an entry number, and the dictionary will jump to that entry number. Text and steno search without filtering If you have the dictionary sorted by text, the go to function, Alt+G, will ask you for a piece of text and will jump to the first entry containing the text you type in. If the dictionary is sorted by steno, the go to command, Alt+G, will go to the first instance of the steno without using the Find commands at all. The entries will not be filtered.

Search and Replace

If any information is typed in the replace box in the find dialog it will execute a find/replace. Note that unlike the find, this does not filter the dictionary display. Instead, it will find all matches and ask you for each one if you want to replace it. It will show you the original entry Working with Dictionaries 97

and what the replacement will look like to give you a chance to make sure you are finding and replacing the right thing. Replacing found text entries To replace found text, in addition to entering the text to find in the Text field, enter what you want to replace that text in the Replace field. If you leave the replace string blank, it will do a simple find. However, if you type a literal character command (the _ character) it will consider that as a request to replace the text with, literally, nothing. Once you start the search, a prompt will appear when the text is found and give you the options of replacing the found text for that instance, or All instances. If you select All, it will perform all of the replacements and then stop and tell you how many it replaced.

Steno searching
For the most basic steno search: 1. Press F5. 2. In the Find Dictionary Entries dialog, click on Contains keys in the Steno shortcuts window. 3. Click OK and the Steno strokes steno emulation dialog appears. (See Appendix K page 379 for details on using the Steno emulator.) Enter the stroke or strokes you want to find. 4. Click OK. The entries that contain that sequence of steno keys anywhere in them will be displayed with the column heading Steno (filtered). You can further refine your search by using the columns to re-sort the filtered entries in any order you like. Note: The difference between keys and strokes is whether or not youre searching for an entire stroke in that location or only part of a stroke. Here are some examples: Search provided: Ends with keys AL Matches: TAL, TPAL, TPORPL AL, PRAOEUPL AL Search provided : Ends with stroke(s) AL Matches: TPORPL AL, PRAOEUPL AL Non-matches: TAL, TPAL (it must have AL as an entire stroke at the end) Using search criteria and limiting searches You can limit, or fine-tune, your searches with the following criteria: Steno shortcuts: Any steno Contains keys Contains stroke(s) Starts with keys Starts with stroke(s) Ends with keys Ends with stroke(s) Two strokes At least two strokes Working with Dictionaries 98

Three strokes At least three strokes Eight strokes At least eight strokes Custom steno search Searching by Number of Strokes To find entries containing a certain number of strokes, in the Find dictionary entries dialog window, in the Steno shortcuts window, select the number of strokes you want. Searching for Steno plus text If you type something in BOTH the steno and the text fields, it will only display entries that match BOTH the steno and text filters. For example, if you put in AEU and ay in the steno and text fields you would get the following results: Matches: PAEU = pay PWAEU ER = Bayer TKAEUS = days Non-matches: RAEUPB = rain HAE = hay TKOG = dog A good example of a useful search: Select Ends with Stroke(s) and Ends with and hit OK. Put in the final -G stroke, then type ing when asked for text. That will show you all of the entries in your dictionary that end with the -G stroke and also end in ing in the text, allowing you to find old, redundant entries that are unnecessary if you have -G defined as the {^ing} suffix. Searching for Macro strokes in steno

More specific Text searches:

Here is a list of the text shortcuts provided for doing more specific text searches:

Working with Dictionaries 99

Text shortcuts
Any text Contains Starts with Ends with Exact match Capitalized Conflicts Phrases Commands Prefixes and suffixes Internal capitalization Macros Digits Written numbers All caps Punctuation Autoincludes Capitalized phrases Paragraphs Number triggers Speakers Lockspaces Hyphens Defined slop strokes Glue entries One letter (alphabets) Two-choice conflicts Three-choice conflicts Four-choice conflicts Conflicts with commands Conflicts with capitalization Conflicts with prefixes or suffixes Conflicts with number triggers Conflicts with hyphens Conflicts with paragraphs Conflicts with punctuation Custom text search

If there are any searches that do not appear on the previous lists that you would like to accomplish, simply e-mail your request to [email protected] and a new search will be put on the list to accomplish what you want to do.

CUSTOM SEARCHES
At the bottom of the Steno shortcuts and Text shortcuts lists, you will find Custom steno search and Custom text search. If you choose this option, the Custom search builder dialog opens. See Reference Guide, page 480 for details on creating a custom search.

Working with Dictionaries 100

EDITING DICTIONARY ENTRIES (TEXT OR STENO)

To edit a dictionary entry, either the definition or the steno, select the entry and press Enter. This opens the Entry properties dialog window, which provides editing functions and also gives you information about the entry. You can also double-click on an entry to get its properties (or use Alt+L).

The steno outline of the entry appears next to the Steno button, and the text definition of the entry appears next to the Text button in an entry field.
Command Menu Speed key Toolbar icon View properties F10/Format/ View properties Alt+L

If you view the entry properties of a dictionary entry such as HR*EFT = {M:Left one word - RT} then the Advanced button will be activated and pressing it will go straight to the macro editor to allow you to modify the macro for that entry. If the macro described in the dictionary does not exist, the button will do nothing. It will not add an empty macro to the macro list.

In the case of a conflict, the Advanced button provides access to the entrys conflict logicthe information that Total Eclipse collects to select conflicts automatically. This information is sometimes used by Advantage Softwares technical support staff.

Working with Dictionaries 101

To change the steno outline

1. In the Dictionary properties dialog window, click the Steno button. A steno emulator dialog appears, with the existing steno. (See Appendix K page 379 for details on using the Steno emulator.) 2. Use the emulator and your mouse pointer to edit the steno or enter new steno. 3. When you are satisfied with the steno you entered, click OK. The emulator window disappears and the steno outline you just entered should appear in the Dictionary properties dialog window next to the Steno button. 4. Click OK to replace the steno in the selected entry. 5. If you want to insert a new entry into the dictionary instead of replacing the existing entry, click the Add button, then click OK. The original entry will remain in the dictionary, and a new entry with the edited steno will be added.

To change the text definition

To edit a definition, you can type directly in the text field or click the Text button. Clicking the Text button opens a Text definition dialog window, which is similar to the globaling window. The current definition appears in the field at the top of the window. You can add dictionary commands either directly (by typing them) or by selecting the command from the drop-down list near the bottom right side of the window.

DICTIONARY STATISTICS
If you go to the Tools menu | Statistics while in a dictionary, or right-click on a dictionary entry and choose Statistics, you will get a Please wait dialog for a moment, and then a Dictionary statistics window will appear with detailed information about the dictionary. This window is zoomable, resizable, and scrollable so that you can see all of the information. It will display how many entries in your dictionary match ALL of the search filters that exist in the programming tab for both steno and text, including any filters that you have personally added or modified, making the statistics extremely customizable Next to each of the descriptions it will show the actual number of entries in the dictionary that match that filter, followed by a bar representing the percentage of the entire dictionary. The bar graph grows and shrinks to fit the size of the window. There is a print function that will print the statistics report. The printouts will use the document top and left margin, and will include the name and date at the top of the first page.

Working with Dictionaries 102

PRINTING YOUR DICTIONARY

When you right-click in a dictionary, and choose Print, you will be presented with a Print options dialog before the system asks for details about the printing device. The options on this dialog are Columns, Steno, Number entries, Comments, and Dates.

The Columns item describes how many columns of dictionary entries you want printed, not how many columns of information. If you select 2, for example, then there will be two columns of dictionary entries, each of which could have a separate column of steno and text. The Steno item allows you to decide whether you want no steno, steno in compressed format (as on the display) or steno spread out in paper format. If you choose the paper format, each stroke will be on a separate line. Number entries allows you to decide if you want a column for the entry number as shown on the display. Comments selects whether you want a column for the entry comments. If you turn on Dates, you will get one date column which will put each available date on a separate line, if applicable. Since many entries may not have a modified or used date, this usually will not result in extra lines. Note that the contents of the printout and the sizes and orders of the columns are dictated entirely by how you have arranged the display. For example, if your text column is twice as large as the steno column, that's how the printout will appear. Some columns will automatically become a certain size based on the contents. For example, the numbered column will be exactly as large as necessary to hold the largest possible entry number. If you choose paper-style steno, the steno column will be exactly as large as a steno stroke. The dates and times will appear exactly as you have them selected in the display, and if you have a search filter or sorting order established, that's what will print. The font size is also chosen automatically, based on how many columns you have selected. Each time you increase the number of columns, the printing font decreases in size. The printout will use the document top and left margin, and will include the name and date at the top of the first page. Working with Dictionaries 103

Printing marked entries

If you mark entries before you select the print function, it will print only the marked entries.

TAKING CARE OF YOUR DICTIONARY

If you take good care of your dictionary, it will take good care of you. Remember to create backups of your dictionary(ies) regularly.

Auto-backup of your Main dictionary

Your main dictionary gets saved and backed up each time you exit the program. The files are named .db0, .db1, .db2, etc. up to .db9, and are saved in the Backup folder. You can access them using File Manager (see page 404 for details).

Backing up dictionaries
It is impossible to overemphasize the importance of keeping current backups of dictionaries (main, job, and special dictionaries) as well as your user settings and job files. Backups are basically just copies of files that you save in a location other than where the original is. They can be created simply and can save you incredible amounts of time and frustration. While Eclipse makes auto-backups of your main dictionary, current user settings, and job files, you should periodically make backups of all your dictionaries, settings, and job files from either within Total Eclipse, using the Tools menu | Backup, or File Manager (Ctrl+F), or Windows Explorer, the file management program that is part of the Windows operating system. Windows Explorer provides additional functions that are useful for backups. All three methods are described below.

Backing up and restoring from within Total Eclipse

Total Eclipse provides a backup wizard to make backing up files especially easy. It will ask you which dictionaries and which user files you want to back up, and then where you want the backup files to go (hard drive, writer drive, auxiliary folder). Another wizard will guide you through the restore process. Backing Up To start the Backup wizard, have no dictionaries open, pull down the Tools menu and select Backup.
Command Menu Toolbar icon Backup F10/Tools/Backup

1. The wizard asks what type of files you would like to back up. 2. Select the file types and click Next.

3. A new wizard dialog opens asking you to select the files you want to backup. Select the file(s) and click Next. 4. A new wizard dialog opens asking you to select the location in which to place your backup files. Select the location and click Finish. 5. The files will be backed up to the selected location.

Working with Dictionaries 104

Restoring The restore wizard is similar to the backup wizard. To start the restore wizard, have no dictionaries open, pull down the Tools menu and select Restore.
Command Menu Toolbar icon Restore F10/Tools/Restore

1. The wizard asks where the files are that you want to restore (floppy, hard drive, and auxiliary directory). You can also select browse from the restore wizard and select any available file location as the location where the backup files were originally stored. 2. Select the location and click Next. A new wizard dialog opens asking you to select the file you want to restore. Select the file and click

Finish. The file will be restored to where your Total Eclipse files are. If the file already exists, Eclipse will prompt before overwriting. If you are restoring your main dictionary, be absolutely certain you are deleting (overwriting) the correct file.

Backing up with File Manager

File Manager is the file management program built into Total Eclipse. It allows you to open, copy, move, rename, delete, zip & unzip, Backup & restore, translate, open, and print files in your user folder or other folders on your computer.
File Manager F10/Tools/File manager Ctrl+F

Command Menu Speed Key

To Backup a file or files, select the files in File Manager by clicking in the box beside the file name(s). In the example below, all the HW files and the HWilson Dictionary are Toolbar icon marked to be backed up. Click the Backup button, choose a location for the backup files from the Pick one dialog, and Click OK. A File operation complete message will appear. You will receive a warning if a backup of the same name already exists: filename.zip already exists. Are you sure you want to overwrite it?

Working with Dictionaries 105

Note: If you have Windows XP, you can copy files to a disk directly from the file manager as easily as you would to a floppy disk. Select the files you want to burn and use the Copy function. Select Burn to CD as your destination and the files will be burned. For more formation on using File Manager to backup and restore files, see the Reference Guide, page 411.

Backing up and restoring with Windows Explorer

Windows Explorer is the file management program built into your computers operating system. It allows you to open, copy, move, rename, and delete files and folders on your computer, so you can also use it to create backups of your Total Eclipse files. When you back up a dictionary in Windows Explorer, you make a copy of the dictionary and place the copy in another location. This location may be another folder on your hard drive, a shared folder on a network, or a disk (or similar removable media). You do this by rightclicking-and-dragging the file to the backup location; right-clicking gives you the option of copying and moving the copy at the same time. Some dictionary backups might not fit on a single 1.4 MB floppy disk. One solution is to use a file compression program, such as WinZip, which makes it possible to compress and backup files all at once. WinZip is a registered trademark of Nico Mac, Inc. You can install WinZip from the Total Eclipse installation CD, or download it at www.winzip.com. Before you can create a backup with Windows Explorer, you must close the dictionary you want to back up. If you are backing up the main dictionary for your active User folder through Windows Explorer, you must close Total Eclipse because the main dictionary for any active User folder is always open while the program is running. Overview of backup procedure using Windows Explorer 1. In Total Eclipse, close your dictionaries. If you are backing up the main dictionary, close Total Eclipse. 2. If you are backing up another dictionary, make sure that dictionary is not open. Working with Dictionaries 106

3. Press Ctrl+F to open File Manager 4. Press Explore to open Windows Explorer. 5. Make sure Windows Explorer is active by clicking in its window. 6. Open the folder containing the dictionary file you want to back up (the contents of that folder will be displayed in the right pane of the Explorer window). 7. In the left pane of Windows Explorer, locate the drive and folder where you want to place the backup file. 8. Right-click-and-drag the dictionary file to the folder where you want to put the backup (the target folder). When the target folder is highlighted, release the mouse button. 9. When you release the right mouse button, a shortcut menu appears. Select Copy Here. OPTIONS: Open the folder containing the backup and edit the backups filename. Renaming your backups allows you to create multiple backups for the same dictionary. For example, you might want to add the date to the dictionary file so you can see easily when it was created. If your file compression/archive program is integrated with Windows (e.g. WinZip), you can right-click on the dictionary file and view a menu that includes options for that program (such as Add to Zip). This is an excellent method for backing up large dictionaries to multiple floppy disks. Refer to the documentation for your compression program for additional information (in WinZip, creating a zip file on multiple disks is called, spanning). Restoring 1. Copy the backup to the original dictionarys folder by dragging the file from the right Explorer pane to the left. 2. If your backup has the same filename as the current dictionary, a prompt asks whether you want to replace the current file. Select Yes. 3. If your backup has a filename different from that of the dictionary, delete the dictionary (click on it and press Delete), then rename the backup to the original dictionarys name. Once the dictionary is copied and renamed as necessary, you can use it.

Editing your dictionary

You may wish to edit you dictionary to trim unused entries, or those older than a certain date, or after sorting by any of the available parameters (columns). Always create a backup of your dictionary before performing major changes. You can sort, mark, and move or delete dictionary entries in a great variety of ways. For example, if you sort by Date Used, you can mark and delete all the entries you haven't used in a period of time. You can sort by AI, or Find the \ character in the text to see and edit all your conflicts. Note: This feature replaces the Optimize function found in previous versions.

Working with Dictionaries 107

DICTIONARY SYNTAX
Conflicts
Conflicts are represented in your dictionary by backslashes (\), which precede the conflict entry and separate the alternate definitions. As you edit your jobs and select conflicts, Total Eclipse learns from your choices and eventually selects the correct conflict for you. Examples \their\there \site\sight\cite \go\{^ing} simple conflict simple conflict conflict including a suffix as an alternate definition (between the word go and the suffix ing) will pick choice 2 when it sees "Exhibit 5" (or "Exhibit A")

\exhibit\Exhibit{#N}

To view information about conflicts in your dictionary, right-click any conflict entry, and choose Properties. In the Entry properties dialog, click the Advanced button to open a window with details about rules used in the conflict process. You can remove a rule by highlighting it and clicking Delete.

You can have conflicts in any dictionary on the dictionary list for the current job and the original choices will be accessible. Note that it is only the main dictionary that collects AI data.

Working with Dictionaries 108

AutoMagic and conflicts You can create conflicts to improve your translation and reduce editing time, and those conflicts will appear in the AutoMagic window to really speed up your editing. In the example below, AutoMagic recognizes that you might need to capitalize State Street, and if you choose to capitalize street, it will automatically capitalize the previous word as well.

AutoMagic and Conflicts can also help with punctuation. In the following example, AutoMagic offers several ways of punctuating the word, yes.

AutoMagic will also list conflicts to help with hyphenation (eg. Up-to-date), numbers, and number words (number vs. No.). It will also offer additional choices, such as removing the conflict, or globaling the steno.

General Commands
Dictionary commands can be used during globaling and when you are adding or editing definitions. All command entries are enclosed in braces (also known as curly brackets) { and }. Entries NOT enclosed in braces are treated literally and will appear in text documents exactly as they are entered in the dictionary. Ordinal number suffixes (th, st, nd, rd) are an exception to this rule; they are preceded by the caret and are not within braces^th, ^st, ^nd, ^rd. You can also combine commands and text to create more complex definitions. Working with Dictionaries 109

DICTIONARY ENTRY {Q} Q {^ing} ^ing {^}ing {Q}ok

TYPE command text command text command + text command + text

{A}yes{,}I did{.}

command + text

\volume\Volume{#R} Command + text

TRANSLATION RESULT translated as a question paragraph (e.g. Q.) Q suffix applied using suffix logic * ^ing suffix applied, but without suffix logic (no automatic spelling correction). Q. Ok Note: Capitalization is automatically applied. A. Yes, I did. Note: Capitalization is automatically applied. The {A} command also applies a question mark to end of the last sentence in the preceding paragraph .compound definition that assigns a command for displaying a number (as a Roman numeral in this case) after the word selection

* See Reference Guide page 498 for explanation of suffix logic

Comments in Dictionary Entries

If you put two tildes in a dictionary entry, they and everything after them will be ignored during translation or globaling. For example: 50D = 50{}dollars~~ the double-braces allow the number conversion to process them separately. This entry will simply translate the 50{}dollars (as $50, most likely) and ignore the rest. If you go into the text of a dictionary entry using the Text.. button in the Entry properties, you can use the EntryText~~CommentText format to type in a comment in lieu of typing the comment into the comment field. You can use the ~~ as a shortcut to add comments to entries that you offer to other users or to remind yourself of what the entry is for, but it doesn't actually leave the ~~ in the text. It separates out the comment and puts it in the separate Comment column. Note that you can also include special items that you could search for to identify certain classes of entries.

Working with Dictionaries 110

Number Conversion Command Codes

These commands trigger proper formatting of a string of numbers in translation. For these triggers to work, you must turn on automatic number conversion (go to User settings, (Alt+U) and select the Numbers tab).
{#Q} {#M} {#G} {#R} {#r} {#O} {#P} Quantity Money Generic Roman numerals Lowercase Roman numerals (i) Ordinal Phone number (###) ###-#### Social Security no. ###-##-#### Zip code #####-#### Time ##:## or ##:##:## Date Note that this can handle 4-digit years (5272000 can result in 5/27/2000) (#DM) Date in month/day format (eg. 9/8) {#1}-{#9} User-defined formats {#W} Written out numbers {#N} Digits {#S} {#Z} {#T} {#D}

{#M?} Money type ({#MY}=Yen, for example)

These triggers can be written anywhere inside a number and apply only to a single number. Two exceptions are {#W} & {#N} which determine whether or not a number is written out in digits, as they apply to a whole list of numbers. Eclipse determines what is part of a list by whether the numbers are separated by prepositions, conjunctions, or punctuation. Whenever you use {#N} or {#W}, it remembers that as the write-out rule default for all of the numbers that follow until the translator sees one of the following: 1. Any non-noise word (User settings | Translate | non-capping words) or non-conjunction. 2. Any new paragraph/print command/autoinclude 3. Any entry that capitalizes the next entry (terminal punctuation, etc.) Any of the above items cause the write-out rule to reset to the default behavior of following the settings in the number conversion tab (see page 189). One final note: Don't expect this to make lists consistent when you dont use a trigger. For example, if you've told it only to write out from 1-10 and if someone says I have three kids. They're five, eight and 14. that's exactly what you'll get. If you write {#N} before the five, however, they'll all come out in digits.

Punctuating conditional text

Conditional text applies when you have a punctuation that is not supposed to apply if there is already an appropriate punctuation mark there. For example, the {.} entry will not add an extra period after Inc. or a.m. This feature works if the punctuation being added is part of a conflict selection or a global replacement during editing, as well as during translation.

Working with Dictionaries 111

Table of Standard Dictionary Commands Command entry

{^} {|} or {-|} {|-} {>} {>-} {~} {&text}

Note that opening and closing braces are necessary.

Description
delete space, can be used with text (e.g. prefixes and suffixes) capitalize the next word capitalize the previous word lower case next word lower case previous word insert a lock-space (nonbreaking space) glue entry - Glue entries stick to each other and not anything else (except an option for sticking to numbers see page 137.) glue entry, using a hyphen as divider ({&A} would mean no divider) glue mode on glue mode off glue mode toggle question paragraph answer paragraph, use ? as terminal punctuation for previous paragraph. speaker with name label paragraph start a new paragraph using the continuation paragraph format that is defined for the previous paragraph centered paragraph parenthetical paragraph fixed line paragraph new paragraph with label named paragraph type templatable name user paragraph style x. Substitute a number for x. Styles 0-9 can be defined on the Paragraphs tab of the User settings window. insert the print command type indicated by name change to all caps translation turn off the ALLCAPS function switch all caps translation on and off turn on capitalize each word mode turn off capitalize each word mode switch capitalize each word mode on and off decimal point font number x verbose font name attribute begin bold begin underscore begin italics bold and underscore (or any other combination

Example
Entry: {^ing}, {re^} Translation: running, replace If you write what {>} University you will get what university Mr.{~}Brown (&A}{&B}{&C} will translate as ABC See Reference Guide page 414 for details on Glue entries and templates (&-A}{&-B}{&-C} will translate as A-B-C

{&-A} {GLUEON} {GLUEOFF} {SLOWDOWN} {Q} {A} {S:name} {N} {C} {P} {F} {N:label} {PGH:paragraph name} {s:name} {Ux} {PRT:name} {ALLCAPS} {ALLCAPSOFF} {ALLCAPSTOGGLE} {CAPON} {CAPOFF} {CAPTOGGLE} {DECIMAL} {FN:x} {F:name} {A:attribute} {b} {u} {i} {bu}

{S:MR. BROWN}

{U3} {PRT:End excerpt}

{FN:0} (default font) {FN:14} (font number 14) {F:Times Roman} {F:Courier New/0/700/0/0} (numbers specify font characteristics) {b}boldtext{n} {u}underscoredtext{n} {i}italicizedtext{n} {bu}boldandunderscoredtext{n}

Working with Dictionaries 112

{n} {p} {Tx:y}

Note that opening and closing braces are necessary. such as {bi} for bold italics back to normal text attributes {n}normaltext plain attributes (same as normal but removes spaces) Tab {T:2} x = L or nothing (left), C (centered), R (right), N (numeric) y = tab number (nothing for next tab) number conversion method x (See number conversion codes in the preceding section currency Include the file specified For the following, DO NOT specify the spaces or capitalization as that is specified and adjustable through the metadictionary period (no space to the left, two to the right, capitalize the following word) question mark (no space to the left, two to the right, capitalize the following word) comma (no space to the left, one to the right) exclamation point (no space to the left, two to the right, cap the following word) colon (no space to the left, two to the right) hyphen (no spaces on either side) dash (user-definable format. Usually a lock-space to the left) quote (alternates left and right) parentheses (alternates left and right) apostrophe s (s) initial quote -- leaves spacing/capitalization alone period/quote with spacing/capitalization final quote -- leaves spacing/capitalization alone exclamation point/quote exclamation point quote/exclamation point quote/period quote/question mark comma/openquote comma/close quote period/quote soft comma questions mark/quote period/paren paren/period paren/exclamation point exclamation point/paren paren/question mark question mark/paren slash soft semicolon semicolon quoted answer quoted question quoted speaker {TN:3} {TC} {#R} {C:Euros} {<exhibit.ecl}

Table of Standard Dictionary Commands

{#x} {C:currencytype} {<filename}

{.} {?} {,} {!} {:} {-} {--} {"} {(} {'s} { "} {.}{ "} {" } {!"} {!} {"!} {".} {"?} {, "} {,"} {."} {,?} {?"} {.)} {).} {)!} {!)} {)?} {?)} {/} {;?} {;} {"A} {"Q} {"S:speaker}

this{ "}that --> this "that this{.}{ "}that --> this. "That this{" }that --> this" that

Working with Dictionaries 113

{$:label} {$} {>.} {>?} {[} {^^} {TM:time} {U:text} {W:soundfile} {NULL} {DELETE} {BLANK} {FLUSH} {l1} {l0} {lT} {d1} {d0} {dt} {H} {L} {suboff} {subon} {superoff} {superon} {>>} {>>>} {CR:filename} {H:position} {POS:position} {L1} {L3} {R1} {R3} {WHITE} {BLACK} {RED} {GREEN} {YELLOW} {BLUE} {MAGENTA) {CYAN}

Note that opening and closing braces are necessary. non-punctuation paragraph with label non-punctuating paragraph enforce automatic period enforce automatic question mark toggle open/close bracket force space insert time/date uses time syntax, eg.{TM:%#I:%M %p} insert untranslate text play wave sound do nothing removes the previous stroke from the translation; can be hit multiple times to remove more than one stroke; blank display flush pending realtime data literal case on-- used to put literal-case text into an otherwise all-caps document literal case off literal case toggle Downcap mode on forces text to lower case Downcap mode off Downcap toggle superscript subscript subscript off subscript on superscript off superscript on new speaker paragraph (for captioning) new story paragraph (for captioning) credit file (for captioning) horizontal position (for captioning) vertical position (for captioning) left 1 3 pgh (for captioning) right 1 3 pgh (for captioning) Changes the text printing color to white Changes the text printing color to black Changes the text printing color to red Changes the text printing color to green Changes the text printing color to yellow Changes the text printing color to blue Changes the text printing color to magenta Changes the text printing color to cyan

Table of Standard Dictionary Commands

Working with Dictionaries 114

Virtual untranslates You can use virtual untranslates such as {U:CHECK SPELLING} to indicate a problem, which allows you to scan to a trouble spot and identify why you marked it. It acts like an untranslate, but it doesn't count against you as an untranslate in your untran percentage in the realtime status dialog.

FONT CHANGES IN DICTIONARY ENTRIES

You can put commands in your dictionary for changing fonts, for example, to mark where italicizing of text should start and stop. The easiest way to do this is to preset your master font list (User settings | Document | Advanced | Master font table) with the fonts you use all the time. For example, use a

standard Courier along with underscored, bold, and italicized versionsperhaps also a fancy proportional font for headers or footers. Remember that any new documents will be created with these default fonts. In the example below, Courier New has been set as the master font. With these default fonts set, you can create dictionary entries that refer to them by number. For example, heres an entry that would put the words The New York Times in italic Courier New (font #3 in the Available Fonts dialog shown above), and then return to font 0 (the default) when done: {FN:3}The New York Times{FN:0} An alternate, and more complicated, way to use fonts in dictionary entries is to specify the full font information in the dictionary entry using F: instead of FN (which allows you to refer to fonts in the Master Fonts list by number): {F:name,size[,weight[,offset[,underscore][,italic][,strikeout]]]} For example, {F: Courier New,13,400,0,italic} The name must match an existing font name; if it doesnt, Total Eclipse will approximate a font and the results might not be what you expected or want. Items in the brackets are optional items. Note that the nesting of the brackets indicates when you must use a prior optional setting in order to use an additional one (for example, to use offset you must first specify weight). Working with Dictionaries 115

Height numbers refer to points; for example 13 point Courier New is 10-pitch. Weight determines boldness; 400 is normal, 700 is bold, and you can use any value, larger or smaller (1000 for super-bold or 100 for very thin, etc.). Not every font supports every value, but scalable true-type fonts tend to support quite a few. Offset is for subscripts and superscripts and is the number of twips that the text is raised or lowered from the base line of text. Positive numbers create superscript (the number of twips the text is raised above the line) and negative numbers create subscript (number of twips below the line). Note that even though size, etc. is optional, you MUST put in all values leading up to the value you want to change. You cannot skip items. (The exception to this rule is that underscore, italics, and strikeout can be placed arbitrarily in any combination at the end as long as all of the numeric attributes are in place.) Font command examples: {F:Courier New,16} is allowed. {F:Courier New,10,700,-80} is allowed (bold subscript). {F:Courier New,10,underscore} is not allowed because to use underscore you must also indicate the weight and offset. So, to use a normal weight and no offset with the underscore, you would use {F:Courier New,10,400,0, underscore} for the entry. Font Color If you change the color for any of the font selections, that color will be used during the printing process if you have a color printer. Note that this does NOT mean that it will print out the colors defined in the User Settings | Display settings.

Working with Dictionaries 116

CHAPTER 7 NOTES
ABOUT THE TRANSLATION PROCESS

AND

TRANSLATING

The process of translating your steno notes into a transcript begins with transferring your notes from your writer to a computer file that Total Eclipse can read. This process is generally called reading notes. The resulting computer file has a .not file extension and is called a notes or note file. Once youve read your notes into a file, you can look at it and see your steno strokes, just as if you were looking at the steno tape. When Total Eclipse translates the note file, it doesnt change any of the steno; it writes the translation to a different file (sometimes known as an English file, text file, or transcript) which has .ecl as its file extension. To do the translation, Total Eclipse uses one or more dictionaries to determine how to translate your outlines to text. You can do the translation concurrently with the reading process (as in the case of realtime writing), or you can store the note files and postpone translation indefinitely. You can also work directly in note files and perform operations that may improve subsequent translation. For example, before translating a file you can use its outlines to create dictionary entries; defining entries before you translate might not only speed translation but also make the translation more accurate, thus more efficient.

READING NOTES
Your writer and the transcription environment play a large role in determining how Total Eclipse reads your notes. If your writer is realtime-capable, your notes can be sent directly to your computer through a cable. Many writers also store notes on a variety of storage media, such as floppy disks, PCMCIA cards, SD cards, USB drives, or even cassettes. To read such notes, you might be able to transfer the storage media itself from the writer to the computer (put the floppy disk or PCMCIA card in your computer and read the notes from it), or you might need to dump the notes to the computer via a cable.

Setting up Total Eclipse to read your notes

Setting up Total Eclipse to read notes is usually a simple task and one youll need to do only once unless you change writers. The necessary settings are saved as part of your user settings, so unless you change writers or the way notes are stored, you wont need to change those settings. If your work requires you to read notes in more than one way (such as over a cable for realtime jobs and from a disk for conventional jobs), you can create a separate user setting (called a user profile) for each situation. Note: Your writer may have additional controls that need to be set when reading notes check your writers documentation for such information.

Notes and Translating 117

To setup (or configure) Total Eclipse to read your notes 1. Go to User Settings | Input (or Production menu| User settings | Input.) 2. In the Writer: field, select your writer from the drop-down list of steno writers. In the example shown, the Passport is selected. Some of the available writers are shown here, and additional writers are frequently added. For additional information on writers, see the Reference Guide, page 519. 3. In the Keyboard layout field, select the language you are using. The available keyboard layouts are English, Continental, German, Italian, Portuguese, Michela, Hebrew, Russian, Palantype, Palantype (std), Extended English, Ext. German, Ext. French, Spanish, Ext. Spanish, and Ext. Magyar. For more on Foreign language keyboards and translation options, see Appendix H, Additional Language Options, Page 363 . Next you need to tell Total Eclipse where the notes will be coming from. There are two settings, Read from: and Realtime from:, since you could use a different input method for each process. If you intend to read notes from a removable storage medium, such as a disk or a PCMCIA card, go to the Read from: field and select Drive or folder, which allows you to select a disk drive, RAM drive, or backup repository in a folder anywhere that's accessible through the file system. Click the Setup button, and browse to the drive and/or folder from which you will read the notes. Notes and Translating 118

If you read notes through a COM port: 1. Attach the writers cable to a COM port on your computer. COM Ports COM ports are also known as RS232 or Serial ports. Your computer mayl have one or two COM ports. Each port is assigned a number from 1-255 (COM1, COM2, COM3, etc.). You must know your COM port number(s) to correctly configure Total Eclipse. If your COM ports are not labeled, contact the manufacturer of your system or use trial-and-error to determine the COM port numbers. (If you only have one COM port, it's a good bet that it will be COM1.) If you have no COM ports, you will have to use a USB adapter or purchase a card with a COM port.

2. If you arent already in User Settings, open it (Alt+U), then click the Input tab. 3. Select COM port in the Read from: field. 4. Click the Setup button to the right of the Read from: field. The Com port setup dialog window appears. 5. In the Port field, select the number of the COM port you are using. Baud rate
Baud rate reflects the speed with which data can be sent over the cable. When you read notes with a cable, your writer determines the baud rate.

6. If you have already selected your writer type, the Baud Rate field will contain the correct baud rate for your writer. 7. Click OK. The COM port setup dialog disappears and you will again see the User Settings | Input tab. In addition to Drive or Folder and COM port options, you can choose USB port, which works with the Elan Mira/Cybra/Stentura Fusion writers; and TCP-IP, which allows data to be received directly through the Internet. No writers currently support this, but it is used by the Eclipse Steno Link feature. If you want to check what COM port number your USB-Serial device is, click the Device manager button.

For Realtime Writers: Use the Realtime from: field to select your input source. The choices are COM port, USB port, and TCP-IP. Test the setupclick the Test.. button to check the connection between Total Eclipse and your writer. If a connection cannot be established, a warning appears. The Adjust writer dialog window appears shortly thereafter. This gives you the opportunity to change your settings.

Reading Notes to a File

When you are ready to read notes, 1. Press Alt+I. The Read notes dialog appears. Previewing notesThe left side of the dialog has a window that shows a list of jobs available on the disk or writer, along with each files size (in bytes) Command Read Notes and creation date. You can see the first few folds of a jobs notes by Speed Key Alt+I highlighting the jobs listing. The folds will appear in the display F10/Production Menu (preview) area on the right side of the dialog window. /Read notes
Toolbar Icon

2. In the Note File Name field, type a name for the note file you are creating. If the name you type already exists, the job notes will be appended to (added to the end of) the existing file. Total Notes and Translating 119

Eclipse will give you a warning if you are about to append a file. Use the Browse button to see a file list of existing Total Eclipse note files. 3. If you do not enter a name in this field, a prompt will appear, notifying you to do so. You cant proceed with reading notes until youve entered a file name. ( Total Eclipse needs to know where to put the notes.) 4. After entering the file name, click the Read button. Total Eclipse starts reading the notes into the designated Total Eclipse note file. During this process, the stroke count appears to the right of the Read button. 5. If you want the note file to open as soon as it is read, mark the Open Notes checkbox. Otherwise, after the note file is read you can use Shift+F7 to open the notes. 6. After the job has been read and the note file is created, the Read Notes dialog remains open. You can read additional note files, or click Close to end the read notes session. Appending notes to other note files Follow the above procedure for reading notes, but select an existing Total Eclipse note file instead of entering a new file name. The read notes procedure will append the new notes to the end of the file you selected. Translating from the open notes window You can go directly into translating from the open notes window by pressing Alt+T. Total Eclipse will assume you want to translate the note file that is currently open and active.

OPENING AND DISPLAYING NOTE FILES

Total Eclipse note files can be displayed in their own document window. To open a note file, press Shift+F7. A file dialog opens, showing the available Command Open Notes note files (other file types wont be displayed in the list). If Speed Key Shift+F7 necessary, use the navigation controls in this dialog to find Menu F10/File/Open notes the folder containing the note file you want to open. Once you Toolbar Icon see the file you want, you can open it by either doubleclicking on it, or selecting it and clicking Open or pressing the Enter key on your keyboard. The notes window displays the steno, and the absolute and relative timecodes. It also displays either the phonetics or the main dictionary entry for each outline. You can toggle which you see with the Edit menu | Miscellaneous | Translate Mode command (or Alt+M). When this option is checked, dictionary entries are displayed. When it isnt, the phonetics are displayed.

AUTOMAGIC IN NOTE FILES

With a note file open, the choices in AutoMagic include Find (search for steno), Go to (a stroke or fold), Append note file, Global, Print, and others. If you choose 0 for Notes and Translating 120

Block mark, a new list of choices appears that are all functions you might need to perform on marked strokes. Note that after marking a stroke, you can choose a definition for that stroke, open the Global dialog, Write the block to a new file, hit 9 to Mark more strokes, or 0 to escape and return to the basic functions. Many of the AutoMagic choices are functions which are detailed in the rest of this chapter on working with note files.

MOVING THE CURSOR IN NOTE FILES

The cursors position in a note file is indicated by the stroke that is highlighted. Total Eclipse tracks the steno as if each steno stroke were sequentially numbered. Likewise each fold is numbered. The status bar at the bottom of a note file shows the stroke and fold number for the cursors location. You can use these numbers to jump to a specific place in the steno. You can also use the Find command to find specific strokes.

Jump to a stroke or fold

Open the Go to window (Alt+G).
Command Speed Key Menu Go to.. Alt+G F10/Move/ Advanced/Go to

To move to a specific stroke, type the strokes number (or your best approximation of its number) in the Stroke Number field.

To move to the first stroke of a fold, type the folds number in Toolbar Icon the Fold number field. Note that when you enter a number in the Fold number field, the number in the Stroke number field automatically changes to the first stroke in that fold. Use the Fold Size field to set the number of strokes that each fold contains. Notes and Translating 121

Searching for steno and repeating searches

Use the Find command F5.
Command Speed Key Hyperkey Menu Toolbar Icon Find F5 F F10/Move/Find

1. A steno writer emulation dialog opens. (See Appendix K page 379 for details on using the Steno emulator.) 2. After youve entered the stroke(s) to find, click OK. 3. Total Eclipse begins the search at the cursors position in the notes and moves forward until it either finds the steno or reaches the end of the document. When Total Eclipse finds the steno, the stroke is highlighted.

4. Note that you can use the shortcuts Alt+A and Alt+V to search for the Automark or Division stroke in note files or text documents, as long as these strokes have been set up on the User settings | Input tab. So, searching for a division stroke in the notes can be done by simply hitting F5, Alt+V, [enter]. Similarly, Alt+L can be used to search for delete strokes. Repeating the search To repeat the search forward or backward through the note file, use the Move menus Locate Next (Ctrl+L) or Locate Previous (Ctrl+Shift+L) commands.

Keyboard layouts for languages other than English

The Keys field in the Find dialog contains a drop down list from which you can select keyboard layouts for other languages.

EXTRACTING AND COPYING PORTIONS OF NOTE FILES

To divide sections of notes into separate files, use the Block menu | Write (extract) command (Alt+W). It lets you add a marked block of notes to another file. When you write a block to another file, the selected block remains in the original document and is also copied to the other file. To combine parts of note files Mark the section of the notes you want to extract. You can mark a block of notes by holding down Shift while using the cursor arrow keys (or Hyperkey cursor control keys); use the F7 marking function; or click-and-drag. Command Write Speed Key Alt+W When the relevant part of the file is marked, give the Write command Menu F10/Block/Write (Alt+W). A file dialog appears.
Toolbar Icon

To create a new note file, type a new file name in the file name field. If the file already exists, Eclipse will append the block to the existing notes.

To combine note files Open the file into which you want to insert your note file, use the Block menu | Read function (Alt+R), and choose the note file to insert.

Notes and Translating 122

PRINTING A NOTE FILE

Command Speed Key Menu Print Alt+O F10/File/Print or F10/Production /Output to Printer

Toolbar Icon

You can print a note file using Alt+O. If you print a note file, the font size on the printout will reflect the font size selected in the note viewer. You adjust the print size using Ctrl+Shift+F7 (larger) or Ctrl+Shift+F8 (smaller). It will automatically determine how many rows and columns it can fit on a page. When printing notes in a multi-column format there will be border lines between the columns to make them easier to read.

When printing a note file, Eclipse will create a binding margin by shifting the notes to the right as far as you have specified your transcript left print offset. It will also print the document name on the top line, followed by Page ### where ### is the page number of the notes printout. Note that this has no relationship to the transcript page numbers. If you live in an area that requires you to save your notes on paper, you can print them quite small in order to meet that legal requirement without taking up huge amounts of paper and storage space. The best way to store notes, of course, is on disk - CD or DVD. Keep the paper just for the legal requirement. And even if you printed it microfiche-small, you could scan them in if anything ever happened to the disks.

EXPORTING A NOTE FILE

You can use the File | Export function to create ASCII versions of your notes. The Notes to ASCII dialog will open, with checkboxes for whether or not you want absolute or relative timecodes, and the translation. Whether the translation is phonetic or from your dictionary will be determined by the status of the display at the time that you issue the export command. You can also export notes to an RTF format file using the File | Export function and choosing Rich text format/CRE (*.rtf) from the Save as type drop-down list in the Save as dialog box. The system will remember the path you last used to export, and will go there the next time you export a file.

IMPORTING NOTE FILES

Importing a note file from ASCII
If you make ASCII backups of your note files for archiving purposes, and some disaster occurs and you lose your personal backups of your .not files, you can import the notes from an ASCII file. You open an empty note file, select File | Import, and pick ASCII (*.txt) as the file type.

Notes and Translating 123

Importing a note file from an RTF file

You can import a note file from an RTF file even if that RTF file is an export of a document. That's helpful not only to recover notes if you have a document but no note file, but it's also a good way to get notes from ProCAT's Stylus writer which makes an RTF file on its SD card.

Globaling in a Note File

As mentioned in the introduction to this chapter, before translating a file you can use its outlines to create dictionary entries; defining entries before you translate might not only speed translation but also make the translation more accurate, thus more efficient. You might want to set up Speaker names, or special terminology and global those items in your notes, adding them to your dictionary before you translate. When you do, you can select a dictionary using the drop-down list, or browsing for any dictionary you want to use.

Notes and Translating 124

TRANSLATING NOTES
User Settings | Translate tab: Before you translate
Before you begin translating notes you should set the dictionaries that you want to use; for example, do you want to use the job dictionary, or any user dictionaries? There also are many options you can set to tell Total Eclipse how to translate specific things and how to handle translation problems (conflicts and untranslates). Setting these options can make the translation and editing process faster and more efficient. You can set many of these options in your User Settings (Alt+U), which you can also access by clicking the User settings button ( ) in the Translate notes dialog. These settings are saved and used, by default, whenever you translate in Total Eclipse, until you change them. In other words, you need to set them only once. The dictionaries can be changed in the Translate notes dialog, overriding the User Settings for just that job. If, however, you change the Main dictionary in the Translate notes dialog, you will make that same main dictionary change in User Settings. To create settings for translations, go to User settings (Alt+U) | Translate.

Phonetic untranslates If you want untranslates to appear in the transcript in phonetic equivalents, mark the Phonetic Untranslates checkbox. (Note: You can also set this in the Translate Notes dialog.) An example of a phonetic equivalent is man for the steno PHAPB. In the Phonetic type field, select Basic or Intelligent phonetics. Basic phonetics would translate PHAEUBG Notes and Translating 125

as mayk. When intelligent phonetics is selected, Total Eclipse uses the phonetics and the spelling dictionary to guess the correct translation. Using intelligent phonetics would translate PHAEUBG as make. Basic and intelligent phonetics use the phonetics list on the User settings | Programming tab to display untranslates. See Reference Guide page 453 for details. Untran borders: Enclosing untranslates within characters If you want to enclose untranslates in parentheses or another character, type the desired character in the two Untran borders fields. Type the opening character in the field to the left of KPH-PL and the closing character in the field to the right of it. Type only one character in each field. Suppress Untrans If you turn on Suppress untran, it will cause untranslates to act like translated text. Check this, before translating the file, if you do not want to scan to untrans. When it is off, untranslates will continue to appear in untranslate text, no matter what the color, so that you can still detect and scan to them. Integral pre/suf This feature, which is on by default, will cause the translator to attempt to apply the integral prefixes and suffixes during translation rather than only using them during globaling or adding a dictionary entry. For example, if you have EBGS PERT = expert in your main dictionary, you can write EBGS PERTS and get experts even if that definition is not in your dictionary. However, it will only apply during translation if the resulting word is in the spelling dictionary. Keep in mind that this follows precisely the same rules as the integral prefixes and suffixes used during globaling. The system assumes that if you write TPHROB REUPB ARGD and you only have TPHROB REUPB ARG = flobrinarg in your dictionary, you were probably trying to write flobrinarged. For details on Prefixes and Suffixes, see the Reference Guide, page 504.

MAKING TRANSLATION MORE ACCURATE

Misstroke setup
In your User settings | Translate tab you can enter the keys you most often misstroke by dragging or dropping. When you turn on a misstroke correction feature, Total Eclipse can automatically corrects some of these errors. All these options are on the Translate tab in the Misstroke Setup section (bottom half of the dialog). When evaluating a misstroke, Eclipse will sort by frequency, by (internally) making a list of all of the entries that the current untranslate could be a misstroke for and choosing the one that is used with the highest frequency, based on information in the dictionary.

Notes and Translating 126

Fix misstrokes during translation You can have your misstrokes corrected when globaling and/or during translation. To have misstrokes corrected during translation, mark the Fix misstrokes during translation checkbox. Total Eclipse will then compare each untranslate against your list of dragged and dropped keys, trying one key at a time until a valid dictionary entry is found. These corrections are displayed in the color you designate for untranslates (on the User Settings | Display tab), so that you can check them during the editing process. Dragged keys To enter the keys you drag, click the Dragged keys button. A steno emulator dialog appears so you can enter the keys that you tend to hit unintentionally during a stroke. Note: If you do not use the number bar normally and generally hit it only by accident, you can turn on the number bar in your dragged keys, and any untran that contains the number bar will attempt to translate without the number bar regardless of what other keys have been pressed (as long as the stroke is not all numbers, which will still translate as a number). Dropped keys To enter the keys you miss, click the Dropped keys button. A steno emulator dialog appears so you can enter those keys you tend to drop.

Translation Magic
If you turn on Translation magic in the User settings | Translate tab, you can write long words that you do not have defined in your dictionary. Just write words phonetically and they'll translate correctly. Even if you don't have a long word like "lipofibroma" in your dictionary, Translation magic will apply Intelligent phonetics to the multiple steno strokes and translate the word correctly. It can be used in either Realtime or deferred translations. Using Translation magic will give you reliable translations for multi-stroke words containing misstrokes. Without Translation magic turned on, Fix misstrokes... is limited to one-stroke words, and can only contain one error. Translation Magic will apply Dragged and Dropped keys to multiple steno strokes and allows as many errors as you are capable of making as long as the word is still even marginally recognizable. For example, Eclipse can figure out that when you wrote TPKAOE/SEPBLS/TKAOEUZ/ AEUGSZ you were trying to write desensitization, by recognizing that you wrote an extra P, L K and Z. When Translation Magic finds an alternate translation, it will put that translation in untranslate color so you can scan to it and find it easily. In order for this phonetic translation to work, Eclipse will install the necessary default phonetics. If your phonetic translation is not working, you should import the default phonetics. The phonetics table is organized like this:
STENO=pronunciation1,pronunciation2,pronunciation3|spelling1,spelling2,spelling3...

For example, -GS is -GS=gs,ings,tion,tial|sion,cial. Everything to the right of the | sign is an alternate spelling for one of the possible pronunciations.

Notes and Translating 127

If Translation Magic recognizes a series of misstrokes as a dictionary entry containing multiple words, it will allow those words to translate individually. Translation magic weight setting Next to the Translation magic checkbox there is a number box with a spin control that can be set from 0 to 100. Setting the weight to zero will ensure that it will only make a replacement where there is an untranslate. Setting it to 100 will allow it to make a replacement almost anywhere. The ideal setting will vary depending on your workload and the maturity of your dictionary. If you have a heavily developed dictionary, you will want to set it higher to give Translation Magic permission to replace words that it would normally leave alone. If you write very cleanly, you will want to make it lower in order to prevent it from making unnecessary guesses in places where you have written correctly.

Other Translation tab options

Tie related items To ensure that certain word combinations, such as titles and names, print on the same line, mark the Tie related items checkbox. This feature automatically places a lock space between titles and names (e.g. Dr. Smith), before large number words (e.g. million), and between numbers and measurements (e.g. 37 feet). Convert ANSWER to: Often, reporters will write Answer when THE WITNESS is needed transitioning from colloquy to Q & A. To have Total Eclipse automatically correct this, go to User Settings | Translate, and check the Convert ANSWER to: box making sure that what you want it to change to is correctly displayed in the box to the right. If a paragraph translates which is set to behave as Question then the next answer will be translated as an answer. If a paragraph translates which is set to behave as Colloquy then the next answer will translate as THE WITNESS or whatever you have typed in the Convert ANSWER to: box. Insert missing BY lines As long as you write the first by-whom indication, {S:MR. SMITH}{Q} for example, from that point forward any {Q} that is written that doesn't follow an answer or answer paragraph will automatically have a by format applied to it. Note that it will default to using the QS by format, typically defined as Q (By Mr. Smith) but if you would prefer that it use the SQ by format, simply leave blank the QS by format template in the settings under User settings | Edit | By formats. Tuck punctuation inside quotes This option automatically tucks commas and periods inside quote marks. It also tucks suffixes and 's. For example, if you write widget followed by {^ize} you will get widgetize or if you write Newsweek followed by {^'s} you will get Newsweek's.

Notes and Translating 128

Note that the 's suffix can be written as {^'s} like any other suffix rather than having to define it differently as 's or {'s}. In fact, in order to have it work for the tuck function, it must be defined as a suffix. Tuck punctuation is disabled following a digit. So if someone says [he was about five feet eight inches] it would translate as [He was about 5'8"] and not [He was about 5'8."]. Pick 1st conflict choice by default Total Eclipse uses sophisticated artificial intelligence to determine which conflict option to use during translation. In the rare instances when the correct selection cannot be determined, you can set it to use the first of the conflict choices by default (other choices can always be made when editing the document if the first one is not appropriate). To activate this function, mark the Pick 1st conflict choice by default checkbox. Conflicts chosen in this way will appear in unselected conflict color. Note that the scan for unresolved items will stop on these conflicts, even though it skips over the ones selected by the AI. Remember when creating conflicts to always insert the most commonly appearing conflict first to get the greatest benefit from this feature. Suppress double paragraphs This will convert any double paragraph label into a simple continuation paragraph. In other words, if you are already in a Question or question continuation paragraph, then hitting a {Q} will change it into {N} automatically. Likewise, hitting {A} will be changed to {N} if you're already within an answer, and hitting {S:Name} will change to {N} if you write a {S:Name} entry with exactly the same name in it. Non-capping words Edit the Non-capping words field to add or delete words that should not be capitalized when title case is used (e.g., in as in Alice in Wonderland).

Speaker list
Under User settings | Translate there is a button that reads Speaker list.

You can use this list to set up standard speaker designations in such a way that you will be automatically prompted at the beginning of each translation for how those speakers should Notes and Translating 129

translate. If you set up the Speaker list on the Translate tab so that there is a Master column entry with no Current entry, you will be prompted at the beginning of your translation. If the Load from job dictionary option is selected, the current column will be filled in automatically at the start of a job, as long as steno is defined in the main dictionary as a master column speaker, and that same steno is defined as a speaker in the job dictionary. In this case, every entry in the Master column would have a corresponding entry in the Current column at the start of the job. When each Master entry has a Current entry at the start of a job, you will not be prompted to add speakers at the beginning of the job. Using the Speaker list during translation or editing To open the Speaker list while translating or editing, hit F2. If you first hit Home twice, and then F2, the name of the Speaker your cursor is on will be highlighted.

This dialog has several columns of information: Current -- The current speaker name text that the master will be changed into, such as Mr. Jones or Mr. Smith. Master -- The master speaker name text for those who use standardized tokens for their speaker names, such as SPEAKER1, SNOO or MR. LEFT. Group -- The group to which the speaker belongs. It's an arbitrary assignment that will be useful for things like the timekeeper report (see page 513) and the search function. For example, you could put all of your plaintiff's attorneys in group 1 and your defendant's attorneys in group 2. You can then enter a name for the Group number, and the name will appear in the Group column. Shortcut -- The unmarked first column in the table is the shortcut. Normally, the first ten speakers have shortcuts of 0 through 9, which are user- definable, so you can change them to Notes and Translating 130

letters, use multiple digits or letters, or whatever you like. You will notice that the shortcut column also has a box in it. That's the speaker color. If you define it as anything other than black, that will be that particular speaker's display color, allowing you to make each individual speaker name a different color. (Note: if you have set paragraph font colors, they will override speaker colors.) The Speaker list prompt box When you first enter this dialog, your cursor is in a prompt box at the top of the dialog. As you type letters or other characters into this box, the dialog attempts to match it with the shortcut text. If it matches the shortcut text, and there are no other longer shortcuts starting with the same text, it will select that speaker immediately, and close the dialog. If you type text that does not match any shortcut, but does match a speaker name, the highlight bar will move to the speaker that matches what you have typed so far. You can hit [enter] to select the highlighted speaker. If you continue to type so that what you are typing no longer matches any of the speakers on the list, the highlight bar will move to the first available empty CURRENT speaker, the intention being to fill the new name into that slot once you hit [enter]. If you do want to type a new speaker but you do not want it to go into the first available slot, after you're finished typing the speaker name you can use the down arrow to move the highlight bar to the row where you do want the speaker to be assigned. Other Speaker list options The prompt box is the fastest way to use the most common parts of this dialog, but in order to access the other details, you may select an item and hit the Change button or you may use the Insert button to add a new speaker to the list. Using the Insert or Change button brings up the Speaker data dialog containing detailed information for a single speaker. Here you can change the Shortcut or Color (which are always global user settings) or you may change the Master name, Current name, or the Group number and name (which can be document local settings.)

Notes and Translating 131

The Move up and Move down buttons can be used to reorder the speakers in the Speaker list. You can also use Ctrl+up and Ctrl+down as with many other list dialogs in Eclipse. In addition to the abilities to change the color and shortcuts, this dialog also offers the ability to change the master-to-current speaker assignments in realtime by hitting F2 and using the Change function. Any changes you make manually in the speaker list will be saved in your job dictionary immediately upon exiting the speaker list dialog. NOTE: This dialog is not a temporary holding place for what will eventually become job dictionary text globals. Speaker assignments get stored in the job dictionary with some special encoding for use with future translations. However, the job dictionary entries are not used by the translator directly. This speaker list is a translation element. The translator actually looks into the speaker list as it's translating to determine how to assign speakers, so any change you make to this table will be reflected in the translation directly, rather than having to do so through manipulation of dictionary text entries. Note that if you do not pre-configure the speaker list, when a speaker from the main dictionary such as {S:MR. LEFT} first translates, it will be filled into both the Current and the Master columns. That is so that when you change the current speaker column MR. LEFT to MR. JONES, for example, the system will be able to use the table to change MR. LEFT to MR. JONES automatically from that point forward without your having to enter the master speaker manually. Changing Dictionaries The speaker list will change on the fly when you change the dictionaries currently loaded, turn certain dictionaries on or off, or add or remove dictionaries from the list of dictionaries in the job during realtime, that change is reflected in the speaker list. For example, if you have SPEAKER1 = MR. JONES in your job dictionary and you switch to a different dictionary that contains SPEAKER1 = MR. SMITH, then not only will it affect translation, but when you hit F2 to view the speaker list you will see that SPEAKER1 is now assigned as MR. SMITH. Loading from dictionaries The Job dict | Load from checkbox is used when you already have a speaker definition in your job dictionary that creates a standard designation replacement for your main dictionary. For example, take the following entries: Main dictionary: STPHAO = {S:SPEAKER1} Job dictionary: STPHAO = {S:MR. JONES} If you have these entries prepared BEFORE you start translation, then the translator will automatically create a SPEAKER1=MR. JONES replacement, requiring no further work on your part. This is the way that Eclipse users have historically dealt with the issue of standard speaker designations. Using the dictionary entry method works hand-in-hand with the speaker list method. For example, if you had a table with SPEAKER1, 2 and 3 on it and had the dictionary entries listed above, then when you started translation, the speaker list dialog would appear as follows: Notes and Translating 132

MR. JONES

SPEAKER1 SPEAKER2 SPEAKER3

The dialog box would open with the cursor in the edit box, and whatever you type would be entered in SPEAKER2 when you hit enter, and the cursor returns to the edit box allowing you to type in the next speaker name. It already knows what SPEAKER1 should be. If you leave part of the speaker list blank when translating, it will be ignored. It will not make SPEAKER1=(nothing) as part of the translation rules. Escaping from the speaker list will ignore it entirely. It will not add a blank entry as the first item in the F2 speaker box. You can fill data into the speaker list in advance of a translation, and the speaker list will then load the SPEAKER1=MR. SMITH text replacements into the job dictionary being used in translation so that that job dictionary can be used in future translations without having to reenter the speaker replacements. After typing in the last speaker name, hitting the escape key will exit the speaker list. Job dict | Load from is turned on (checked) by default. If you do not want to use automatic text replacement for speakers, uncheck the box to turn this feature off. Using the Speaker List with the Find function You can search for a speaker belonging to a particular group by using the find function.

Select Paragraphs and Speaker, and instead of typing the speaker name as the search text, type the group number. The system will then find the next speaker name belonging to that group. While editing, you can use the Find function and hit F2 to pick a name from the speaker list. After selecting the speaker name, hit enter to automatically select the Paragraph option and the speaker paragraph type.

Seating Chart
If you check the Seating checkbox, a Seating chart dialog will appear. Clicking in the box again will uncheck it, and cause the Seating chart to disappear.

Notes and Translating 133

The seating chart dialog can be moved, resized, anchored, zoomed (to make the fonts bigger or smaller) and made more transparent (see graphic for an example of 30% transparency.) Though it will remember its location if anchored, because it would tend to get in the way of everything other than writing realtime, you will have to open it each session if you wish to use it (which can be done in the Speaker list, or by checking the Seating chart box in the Window menu | View Toggles dialog.) The seating chart dialog will contain blocks for each speaker in the list in which the Current speaker name is not blank. When you first open the Seating chart, the names are in cascading formation. The blocks can be rearranged by clicking and dragging them with the left mouse button. Each individual job remembers the speaker's locations, though they do NOT remember the size/zoom/location of the chart dialog individually. The blocks will contain the current speaker name, the shortcut number/letter, and the master speaker name. If you wish to be reminded of the steno used to write these speaker names, it is necessary to use master speaker names that contain the steno as part of the text of the entry. For example, if you use STPHAO and SKWRAO for speakers 1 and 2, then instead of naming the master speakers {S:SPEAKER01} and {S:SPEAKER02}, name them {S:MR. STPHAO} and {S:MR. SKWRAO} or {S:STPHAO} and {S:SKWRAO} or something like that. Because main and job dictionaries will often have several entries for the same speaker name, such as STPHAO = {S:SPEAKER01} and STKPHAO = {S:SPEAKER01}, Eclipse cannot name them automatically. The colors of the blocks on the seating chart will be determined by using the colors indicated in the speaker table. Select a speaker and hit Change to change the color for that speaker number. The text of the speaker name itself will be black or white depending on which one shows up better on the particular background color you have selected. You can also turn the Seating chart on and off using the Window menu | View Toggles (Ctrl+Shift+F3).

Notes and Translating 134

SETTING NUMBER FORMATS

Use the User Settings | Numbers tab to set various options for translating numbers.

Once you have entered your preferences for number handling, you can stroke numbers the way you hear them and Total Eclipse will apply the appropriate rules. These options let you avoid many cumbersome dictionary entries. To make use of the number conversion options, make sure that the Number conversion checkbox is marked.

AutoMagic and numbers

When you write a number or number word, AutoMagic will offer the most likely choices for the formatting you want.

Notes and Translating 135

If your cursor is on any part of a number word, AutoMagic will offer the most likely choices. In the example below, the cursor is on thirty, and AutoMagic offers 2:30 as one of the choices.

Ignore written numbers - Writing out numbers

If you use strokes for Arabic numerals different from those you use for written numbers (1 vs. one), then mark the Ignore written numbers checkbox. By doing so, you will keep Total Eclipse from converting your written numbers to numerals and applying the automatic number conversion rules. However, if you use the same stroke for an Arabic numeral and its written counterpart, leave this checkbox blank. Ignore written numbers and decimals With Ignore written numbers turned off, writing 5 hundred second will result in 502nd. However, writing 4 point three miles will translate 4.3 miles.

Process and as a number

People frequently use and when saying numbers, as in one hundred and forty-eight. The Grouping word refers to the word used to join the numbers in a compound number. By letting Total Eclipse know what word is used to combine numbers, you can control how such numbers are translated. For example, one hundred and forty eight can be translated as 148 rather than 100 and 48. If you dont want to have numbers combined in this fashion, uncheck the Process and as a number field in User Settings | Numbers.

Force measurements to digits

An option in the number conversions called Force measurements to digits defaults to on, but can be turned off. When off, singular measurements will still hyphenate, but will appear as phrases like a three-mile walk.

Force separators in currency

An option in the number conversions called Force separators in currency handles currency values of exactly four digits a bit differently from the way they would normally be handled. If you turn this option off, then currency will only have commas in it if you write more than four digits, or if you write a {#Q} trigger during the number, or if you use the word thousand to indicate an order of magnitude. All other ways of writing four-digit currency will omit the comma. Examples of what happens when you turn Force commas in currency off:

Notes and Translating 136

12345 dollars = $12,345 1234 dollars = $1234 12 hundred dollars = $1200 1 thousand 2 hundred dollars = $1,200

Minimum quantity size

Adding commas and other number delimiters The value in the Minimum quantity size field determines the point at which a comma (or another delimiter) is inserted in a long number. For example, some styles do not include a comma in a four-digit number (1000 vs. 1,000). To set this preference, type the highest number of digits that you want represented without a delimiter. For example, to not have the delimiter in 1000 but to have it in 10,000, you would enter a 4 in the field. To have a comma after every 3 digits (1,000, or 1,000,000, etc.) enter a 0.

Extra ordinal formatting

A prefix/suffix on ordinal suffixes allows superscripting and literal case output. Under User settings | Numbers there is a checkbox option for Extra ordinal formatting. If you turn this on, the numbers like 327th will come out with the th (or st,nd,rd as appropriate) in superscript. It will also force the system into literal case mode so the ordinal suffix will appear in lower case even if you have all caps output selected. The default is off.

Glue numbers
If you don't like the fact that numbers glue to glue symbols like Exhibit 27B or Ford F350, you can now turn it off under User settings | Numbers | Glue numbers. Note: If you have number conversion off, you probably won't want to do this, because you will get F 3 5 0. If you have number conversion on, you will get F 350.

Time format
Use the Time drop-down list to specify a format for whole-hour time values, such as 9:00, 9:00 a.m., and 9 oclock a.m. Select the format you want to use from the Time dropdown list.

digits=
Applying templates to specific strings of numbers Some strings of numbers almost always signify a specific kind of number, such as a 7-digit number almost always is a local U.S. phone number, which is usually represented in a specific format (###-####). Based on the number of digits in a string of numbers, Total Eclipse recognizes the number and applies the appropriate template for its format. Some common number types are predefined: quantity, money, ordinal, Roman, generic, phone, Social Security, Zip code, time, and date. You can also define up to 9 templates of your own, for specific kinds of numbers you encounter.

Notes and Translating 137

Use the fields to the left and right of digits= to specify the translation of strings of digits. For example, in the sentence He told me to call him at five five five four three two one, the string of 7 numbers is a phone number. To have Total Eclipse translate a 7-digit as a phone number (555-4321) you would enter a 7 in the field to the left of digits= and select phone number from the drop-down list in the field to the right (7 digits = phone number). The predefined number formats are described below. Quantity - Treats the string of digits as a quantity. Money - Uses the currency format you set in the Number vocabulary dialog (accessed from the Vocabulary setup button). Ordinal - 1st, 2nd, 3rd, etc. Roman - Roman numerals. Note that if there are more than four digits, a Roman numeral trigger cannot be calculated, and it will leave the digits, such as 43682. Generic - Arabic numerals (four five six = 456) displays numbers without commas. Phone - Places a hyphen after the first three digits in a string of seven digits. In a string of ten digits, encloses the first three digits in parentheses and places a hyphen after the sixth, as in (###)###-####. Social Security - Places a hyphen after the third and fifth digits in a nine-digit number. Time - Places a colon after the second digit in a string of four digits, or after the first digit in a string of three digits. Zip Code - Places a hyphen after the first five digits in a nine-digit string. Date - The default format for date places a slash after the appropriate digits in a three- to eight-digit number. This format handles dates as follows: (1 digit) (2 digits) (3 digits) (4 digits) (5 digits) (6 digits) (7 digits) (8 digits) 0 = '0 00 = '00 000 = 0/00 0000 = 0/0/00 00000 = 0/00/00 or 00/0/00 000000 = 00/00/00 0000000 = 0/00/0000 or 00/0/0000 00000000 = 00/00/0000

To change the date format, edit the template labeled 0 in the Templates area. For example, to use hyphens in place of slashes, type the format ##-##-##.

Default number type

This feature allows numbers of a specified size to default to a particular number type. You can specify translations for strings up to 20-digits long by following these steps: In User Settings | Numbers type the length of the string (or use the spin controls) in the field to the left of digits =. Notes and Translating 138

The default translation template appears in the field to the right of digits = (for example, the default for 7 digits is Phone). To specify a different translation template, click the template field and select a user template (User 1 through User 9) from the drop-down list.

Creating and editing user templates

1. In the Templates box, select an undefined User template (User 1User 9) by clicking once on the name. 2. Once youve selected the User template name, click in the empty field at the top of the templates area. 3. Enter the format that you want the number to take. 4. Press Enter to save the format. To edit a template, select the template from the list in the Templates area and enter the new format in the entry field at the top of the list, as described above. You can delete what is already in the field or edit it by deleting and typing. Template syntax Use the number sign (#) to represent a digit on the template and type other characters or symbols as you want them to appear in the formatted number. For example, if you want 8digit numbers to be formatted with 5 digits in parentheses followed by a dash and the last 3 digits, you would enter (#####)-### in the template field. If a number template starts with < it will fill it from right-to-left instead of the normal behavior, which is left-to-right. For example: 12345 -- ###-### becomes 123-45 and <###### becomes 12-345. Optional Portions in Number Templates Sometimes, parts of a number template should not be used if the number isn't long enough. For example, with the phone number (###)###-####, the parens around the area code should be removed if there are no area code digits. Processing for the phone number happens automatically, but you can make user-defined templates to remove non-digit parts of a number template. For any part of a number template that is optional, put the entire portion in brackets. For example, for the phone number, the equivalent user-defined template would be <[(###)]###### (note the < meaning the field is filled in from right to left.) Another example would be a nine-digit zip code: #####[-####] If you write 34994, you get 34994. If you write 349940625 you get 34994-0625 This is also useful for a money template that fills in the decimal point and only puts in commas where necessary: <$[###,][###,][###,]###.## Let's say that was template 5. So, for example, if you write 725{#5} you get $7.25. If you write 436782{#5} you get $4,367.82, etc.

Notes and Translating 139

This number template is integral to the Phoenix theory of number writing. Keep in mind that if you use this template, you MUST write the cents amounts, even if they're zeros, and you MUST write any filler zeros, so if you needed to indicate five dollars you would need to write 5/0/0/{#5} to get $5.00 and to indicate two dollars and seven cents you would have to write 2/0/7/{#5} to get $2.07. If you wanted a dollar amount without any cents at all, you would need a different template or just use {#M}. Most Eclipse users use the word dollars which will interpret dollar amounts correctly in all circumstances without requiring extra strokes or filler zeros.

Numeric Classes
Controlling the writing out of numbers There are times when you want numbers to be displayed as written-out numbers, such as when they are at the beginning of a sentence or when they are small numbers. Use the User Settings | Numbers | Numeric classes area to specify these basic rules for quantities, currency, and ordinal numbers; you can set different rules for each of these classes of number. The radio buttons along the top of the area specify the class of number (quantities, currency, and ordinals) to which the rule applies. For example, when Quantity is marked, the selections made in the Write out, At start, and Clarify sections are applied only to quantities (143 eggs). Thus, you can mark Currency to make rule selections for currency, and then mark Ordinal and make another set of rule selections. Write out The Write out field controls the groups of numbers that will be written out, such as numbers one through nine (19), 1-12, 1-10 and even 10s or 1-100 and even 100s. The numbers that you select will always be written out. For example if you want all numbers from one to ten to be written out, and also all multiples of ten to ninety (twenty, thirty, ... ninety), select, 1-10, 20, 30 from the drop-down menu. At start Numbers at beginning of sentences - The At start field controls what numbers are written out at the beginning of sentences. For example, to have all numbers written out at the start of sentences, select All values from the drop-down menu. Clarify Very large numbers, such as 13,000,000,000 are often written with a combination of number and word (13 billion). Use Clarify to refine the rule set for the Write out field by controlling which large numbers are written out. When Clarify is set at million+, Total Eclipse translates eleven thousand as 11,000, and if its set to thousand+ it will translate eleven thousand as 11 thousand. If set to none, the clarification is disabled, and numbers of high magnitude appear as 000,000,000,000,000,000 etc. Vocabulary setup: Changing the written word for a number In User Settings | Numbers | Vocabulary setup, you can set the words used to represent numbers. Use the Value and Word fields to do this. The Value field contains a drop-down menu of numerals with a corresponding menu of words for numerals. When an item is Notes and Translating 140

selected from this list, its corresponding written form appears in the Word field. Edit the entry in the Word field to change the translation of the written form of the number.

For details on the Number Vocabulary dialog, see the Reference Guide, page 445.

TRANSLATING THE FILE

Most of the work involved in translating notes actually takes place before you enter the Translate command: establishing the dictionary, setting up number formats, etc.
Command Speed Key Menu Toolbar Icon Translate Alt+T F10/Production /Translate

To translate notes, use (Alt+T) to get the Translate notes dialog where you indicate the file you want to translate and also set some translation options.

Also in the Translate notes dialog box you can click the settings icon (or hit Alt+U) to open the User Settings dialog and go directly to the Realtime tab without having to exit the Translate notes dialog. To specify the note file you want to translate, click the Notes button. If you gave the Translate command while a note file was open and active, the name of that note file will appear next to the Notes button. A list of note files in your jobs folder is displayed in a file dialog. Notes and Translating 141

Double-click a file to select it, or use the controls in the file dialog to browse for a note file stored in another location. After you choose a note file, its name and folder location are listed to the right of the Notes button. By default, Total Eclipse will use the name of the note file for the translated text file, changing the file extension from .not to .ecl. The note file will remain unchanged. To use a different name for the translated file, or to append the translation to an existing text file, click the Text button. A file dialog appears, listing the text files in your jobs folder. To create a new text file, type a name in the File name field. (If necessary, use the controls to select a different location for the text file.) Also the resulting .cic and .wav files will have the same name as the text file. To append the translation to an existing file, select the text file from the list. The name of the text file is listed to the right of the Text button.

Setting dictionaries for the job

The Dictionaries area of the Translate Notes dialog shows which dictionaries you have currently set to be used for translation, and provides options for changing these settings. Clicking the Dictionaries button opens the Dictionaries dialog. The name of your main dictionary is listed in the Main field. To select a different main dictionary, highlight the name and click the Change button. A file dialog opens allowing you to select a different main dictionary. The display area also lists any additional dictionaries that were specified in your user settings. To remove a dictionary from this list, select it (click once on it) and then click Remove. The Remove button removes a dictionary from this list; it does not delete the actual dictionary. To add a dictionary, click Add. A file dialog window appears, from which you can browse and select one or more dictionaries. You can use Shift+click or Ctrl+click to select multiple dictionaries to use in a translation. Job Dictionary By default, a job dictionary (eg., newjob.dix) appears below the Main dictionary on this list. If you have specified a Job dictionary in User Settings | User | Dictionaries | Job, that dictionary will appear here (eg. medical in the Translate Notes dialog illustrated above.) If not, a dictionary is created at the time of translation, which contains no entries, but can be used during editing to store job-specific entries (participants names, case-specific terminology, etc.). Then, when editing, whenever you make a global and hit Ctrl+J, it will place the entry into the job dictionary featured in the dictionary list that is accessible when you hit the Open dictionary function from within a job. That means if you select a job dictionary for a job, that dictionary will then be considered the job dictionary for that job for all future functions, EVEN IF (and this is key) EVEN IF you change the job dictionary in the user settings at a future date. So jobs remember what job dictionary they are associated with, even if it's not the dictionary with the same name as the job.

Notes and Translating 142

When opening a job dictionary, Eclipse looks for the .dix file in the following locations, in this order: 1. The same folder as the .ecl file. 2. The current folder. 3. The current jobs folder. Job dictionaries are also used to convey conflict resolution information from the reporter to the scopist. Scopists should keep job-specific items in the Job dictionary, which will help the reporter have a cleaner main dictionary. Edit Dictionary The Edit Dictionary exists on an Edit Station, and is a repository for globals. Any Main globals performed by the scopist will go into this dictionary; and if the reporter and scopist are communicating via Eclipse steno-link, the globals will go to the Reporter's computer for inclusion in their dictionary. By default the Edit Dictionary will have the same name as the Eclipse user you created it under, e.g. FRED.DIX, SALLY.DIX, etc. To integrate the entire Edit dictionary into your main dictionary, you need to do the following: 1. Open the Main dictionary. 2. Press Alt+R. 3. Select the Edit dictionary. To integrate only selected items from the Edit dictionary into the main dictionary, you can open the Edit dictionary, and delete the unwanted entries before merging via Alt+R. NOTE: If you are concerned about overwriting an existing entry, you can turn on the Detect Conflicts in User Settings | Edit. With this item on, you will be prompted before any entry is overwritten. Benefiting from the Scopist's conflict selections Total Eclipse has an artificial intelligence feature whereby the program will learn from the conflict choices made during editing, and use this information to resolve conflicts automatically. In a reporter-scopist situation, the reporter needs to follow a series of steps to benefit from the scopists choices: 1. When translating the job, Make Edit Station Info needs to be checked on the Translate notes window. 2. When you give the job to the scopist for editing, you must include the dictionary which has the same name as the job (even if the job dictionary has a different name). 3. When the scopist selects the conflicts, the conflict selection information will go into the Edit dictionary. This is indicated with the text (AI:1) which will appear after any conflict for which the scopist has made a selection. 4. When you get the Edit Dictionary back, you can transfer that entry into your main dictionary using Block | Read. Notes and Translating 143

The job dictionary is used to convey conflict information from the reporter to the scopist; the Edit dictionary is used to convey it back. Furthermore, the job dictionary is used by both reporter and scopist for job-specific dictionary entries.

Additional Translation Options

Phonetic Untranslates If you want untranslates to appear in the transcript in phonetic equivalents, mark the Phonetic untranslates checkbox. (In User Settings | Translate you can set the Phonetic typeBasic or Intelligent.) Make edit station info If you have a scopist with a Total Eclipse Edit Station, mark the Make edit station info checkbox when you are using a scopist with an Eclipse editing station. When this option is marked, Total Eclipse inserts additional information into the job dictionary that allows scopists to reselect conflicts. Record Audio Check this box to record and synchronize audio during a realtime translation. (This option is not available unless the Realtime input checkbox is marked.) Enable output Enable output determines whether or not to use the output formats when doing realtime. With this checkbox you can disable the output formats for this particular translation without having to change your User settings. Including block files when translating If you have block files that you want inserted at the beginning and/or end of your transcript, you can have them included during translation. In the Translate Notes dialog, mark the Initial block or Final block checkbox, as relevant. To indicate which file to use for the initial or final block, click the relevant button. You will then get a file dialog from which you can specify the Eclipse text file. The current block file selections are listed to the right of the Initial block and Final block buttons. Initial block files will be sent along with your document to your output system, such as LiveNote, CaseView or Bridge. Tran and edit To edit during translation, mark the Tran and edit checkbox. When editing while translating, the text document (translation) opens when the translation begins, and you can immediately begin editing it. Note that although Tran and edit mode is convenient, it will slow the translation process. Quick tran If you dont want or need to edit during translation, mark the Quick tran checkbox. Other Translation Modes Realtime and Virtual Realtime are two other Translation Mode options. Notes and Translating 144

Check the Realtime box to translate notes as you enter them on a writer. Details on Realtime translation can be found in the Realtime section of this manual. Virtual Realtime is an option that includes a control panel that allows you to step through a translation, by using a Stop button, a Pause button, and a Next stroke button.

You can step through a translation one stroke at a time by pressing the Next stroke button, or you can let it roll by unpausing it. You can pause it at any time if you want to go back to viewing the translation one stroke at a time, and you can use the Stop button at any time to stop the translation altogether. Translation Statistics The Show statistics option will open the Realtime Status window, which displays the number of Entries, Untranslates, Conflicts, A/I Selections, and the Audio Levels as the Translation proceeds. The realtime status window shows an actual audio input level display. If it does not, see page 394 in the Reference Guide for additional audio options. You can also activate the statistics from the Window menu | View | view Realtime status. You can right-click in the Realtime status window, and use the Configuration menu to customize how it looks. Each item in the window can be selected or deselected by clicking on the appropriate checkbox. The window will resize to fit the remaining indicators. You can also choose to arrange the items vertically (the default) or horizontally.

When the translation is complete, a window pops up displaying the statistics for the completed translation, including the approximate number of pages.

Notes and Translating 145

The translation statistics that appear in the Info bar and in the realtime status window are permanent and will be remembered for each job.

Note that the stenomark is not counted as an untranslate in your statistics. Also, when translating realtime, if you experiment on your writer during breaks, and write untrans and global them, these untrans will not count against your percentage if you have suspended the output to the CIC system. If you are in a realtime job and you have done a certain amount of editing, you can recalculate post-editing stats. Use the Tools | Statistics function and after it shows you the current file's statistics for numbers of pages, lines, words, etc., once you start writing again, the realtime status window's untranslates, conflicts, etc., will be updated to reflect the editing that has been done, so if you have globaled five untranslates the untrans will decrease by five.

Stopping a translation
To stop a translation, go to Stop translation (Shift+Alt+T).
Command Speed Key Menu Toolbar icon Stop translation Shift+Alt+T F10/Production /Stop translation

If you have multiple windows open when you stop a translation, the Stop Translation command will jump to the translating window and terminate the translation on it. If you close a document or exit Total Eclipse during a translation, you will get a message reading Translation in progress with the option to stop the translation before closing.

Notes and Translating 146

CHAPTER 8 EDITING
You will find many of the functions you use while editing are available as AutoMagic choices in the Info bar. For examples and more information about using AutoMagic while editing, go to page 182.

HYPERKEYS
Command Speed Key Menu Toolbar Icon

The Hyperkeys command (Alt+Z) is a toggle switch that turns the feature on and off. Hyperkeys are a special set of shortcut keys designed to maximize editing speed. Hyperkeys come preprogrammed in Eclipse, but can be changed by the user. When the Hyperkeys feature is turned on, a single key specifies a shortcut. In other words, keystrokes no longer result in standard text entry. If you are unfamiliar with Total Eclipse Hyperkeys and begin seeing unexpected editing actions while you are editing, you may have accidentally turned on the Hyperkeys feature. This can quickly be determined by checking the status bar. The HYP abbreviation appears in the status bar of the main window when Hyperkeys are on. A checkmark also appears next to the Hyperkeys menu item when the feature is on. To turn Hyperkeys off, simply select the menu item, press Alt+Z or click the Hyperkeys toolbar button.
Hyperkeys Alt+Z F10/Edit/Hyperkeys

To print a list of Hyperkey and standard keyboard assignments: 1. Go to User settings (Alt+U). 2. Select the Edit tab. 3. Click the Keyboard button. The Keyboard definitions dialog appears. 4. Click the Print button. The Print dialog appears. Make any necessary selections in this window, and then select OK. Two lists are printed: one for user-defined assignments on the standard keyboard, the other for Hyperkey assignments. Appendix A, page 323, contains the default standard keyboard assignments, arranged according to function; and Appendix B, page 329 list the default Hyperkeys. Printable keyboard layout templates are included on the Total Eclipse disk.

Type in text or inserting text when in Hyperkeys

To type in or insert text in a document when your Hyperkeys are turned on (with the standard set of Hyperkeys) simply press N, insert your text, and then press Enter to return to Hyperkeys. Another shortcutShift+Alt+Nwill accomplish the same thing. When you are in Type Text mode, TYP will appear in the status bar. This command is used to suspend Hyperkeys temporarily so that text can be entered from the keyboard. Otherwise, you would have to turn Hyperkeys off, enter text, and then turn Hyperkeys back on. When the Hyperkeys suspend command is selected, Hyperkeys stops functioning. Type the desired text and press Enter. Hyperkeys resume functioning. Editing 147

The functions that apply automatic punctuation rules and typing a number to choose a conflict are disabled when you have suspended hyperkeys to type in text.

Using Hyperkeys and AutoMagic

If you wish to use the default Hyperkeys for 7, 8, 9 and 0, you can use Shift+7, or Ctrl+7, etc., whatever number key combinations are not already in use, to select numbered items from the AutoMagic list.

INSERT AND OVERTYPE MODES

When you type text into a document, you can choose between insert and overtype mode.
Command Speed Key Menu Toolbar icon Insert/Overtype Insert F10/Edit/Insert /Insert/overtype mode

In insert mode, text entered from the keyboard is added at the current cursor position, so existing text to the right of the cursor is pushed to the right as new text is entered. In overtype mode, each new character that is entered replaces the existing character to the right of the cursor, until the end of a word is reached.

Total Eclipse will then insert spaces as you type until you reach the end of the new word. Overtype can be an easy way to replace a single word without having to select the word first. You can remove the original word (in insert mode) or the remainder of the existing word (in overtype mode) by pressing enter when you've finished typing. To switch modes, press the Insert key, or click the Insert/Overtype toolbar button. The current keyboard mode is indicated on the status bar (bottom of Total Eclipse window) by the letters INS for insert and OVR for overtype. On the toolbar, the Insert/ Overtype button appears to be down (pressed in) when you are in insert mode.

TYPEOVER TRACKING
The typeover tracking feature will remember words you replace during editing, and build a list of suggestions from it. If you press N, type over a word, and hit enter, the system will remember the word you typed over and the new word you typed. (Note that this only works for single words. Phrases will be ignored.) Whenever you use the Type text (hyperkey N) command to replace an existing word, an entry is created in the Typeover Tracking list, found in User settings | Programming. The syntax for an entry in the list is: word to be replaced=replacement.

Whenever you attempt to type over the word to be replaced using hyperkey N, the replacement word will appear automatically, marked as a block. To accept the replacement, press Enter. If you want a different word, just type it as normal, and the replacement word will disappear.

This function will work whether in Hyperkeys or not, though most non-Hyperkey users never use it. While use of hyperkey N will automatically create entries in the Typeover Tracking list, you can create manual entries by editing the list. Editing 148

For a list of the words that have been stored, go to User settings | Programming and choose to Modify the Typeover tracking list. You can edit the list all you like.

Lock in typeover tracking

It is possible to lock in typeover suggestions for particular words. For example, if you ALWAYS want it to suggest too for to you can do so. Normally, if you typed over to with do it would replace the previous suggestion, but you can lock in a particular suggestion permanently. The way you do this is by going to User settings | Programming | Typeover tracking | Modify. Add an exclamation point to the line that you wish to lock in. The syntax is: word to be replaced=replacement! To lock in the suggestion of too for to the suggestion on the Typeover tracking list would be: to=too! That suggestion will never be overwritten by a future typeover. Note that you can use this feature to create a quick method for fixing common mistakes, so you will know for a fact that the typeover suggestion will be what you expect because you have locked it in. You can use Type in text/enter/enter to switch easily between locked-in items. This quick fix function can be used to toggle between two possibilities or cycle between multiples by having the typeover tracking items for these words refer to each other cyclically: to=too! too=two! two=to! there=their! their=there!

TRANSPOSING (FLIPPING) WORDS

Command Speed Key Hyperkey Menu Toolbar Icon Transpose/flip words Ctrl+R Shift+R F10/Edit/Miscellaneous /Word flip

To transpose two words (change dog the to the dog) use the Transpose/Flip words command (Ctrl+R). Position the cursor at the beginning of the first word in the pair, and then give the command. The word on which the cursor is positioned switches places with the following word. Note that AutoMagic will offer a word flip as a choice in the Info bar. In the following example, the cursor is on he, and AutoMagic suggests had he.

Editing 149

Changing case
To change case of just one letter, place the cursor before the letter then press the appropriate keyboard shortcut. After the case is changed, the cursor jumps to the first letter of the next word. To change case of a group of characters, select the text then press the keyboard shortcut. To toggle the case, use F6. To change all selected text to upper case, use Shift+F6; to change all selected text to lower case, use Ctrl+F6.
Command Speed key Hyperkey Menu Toggle case F6 A Menu F10/Edit/ Miscellaneous / Toggle case Toolbar Icon Menu F10/Edit/ Miscellaneous / Upper case Toolbar Icon F10/Edit/ Miscellaneou s/ Lower case Command Speed key Upper case Shift+F6 Command Speed key Lower case Ctrl+F6

Toolbar Icon

AUTO CAPITALIZATION
Auto capitalization will capitalize the word at the beginning of a sentence as you type, or when you add terminal punctuation. To turn off this feature, go to User settings | Edit tab | Editing, and unmark the checkbox for Auto capitalization.

FIXING UNTRANSLATES AND MISTRANSLATES GLOBALING AND SCANNING

When youre editing the transcript youll need to fix words and phrases that may not have translated. By globaling definitions and corrections, you can simultaneously fix the occurrence and future occurrences and, at the same time, place the definition and steno into one of your dictionaries. You can also use scans, which allow you to search through the document for particular kinds of translation problems.

Editing 150

SCANNING
Command Speed Key Hyperkey Menu Toolbar Icon Scan Ctrl+T T F10/Move/Scan /Non-resolved translation

To move through the transcript finding and fixing untranslates, conflicts, or any combination of them, use the Scan command (Ctrl+T). You can scan forward or backward from the cursor position. Backward scans are called Reverse scans. You can also do one scan automatically after another, called a Multi-scan (Ctrl+Shift+M) (see below for more on Multi-scan).

Scan Types
Scan type Nonresolved translation Description untranslates, conflicts that havent been resolved, or unfilled form fields resolved as well as unresolved conflicts unresolved conflicts a combination of translation problems which you choose Forward scan Ctrl+T Reverse scan Ctrl+Shift+T Ctrl+Shift+U Ctrl+Shift+O Ctrl+Shift+\ Ctrl+Shift+S

Untranslate untranslates Conflict Unresolved conflict Any

Ctrl+U Ctrl+O Ctrl+\ Ctrl+S

When you scan for Any, you will get the Scan for.. dialog, which gives you a choice of text types in a checkbox list. You can select as many of these types as you need. When you click OK, the cursor moves forward in the document to the first occurrence of any of the text types that you specified. Note that the selections from the last time you used Scan Any will still be marked, useful if you frequently scan for the same types.

Continuing the Scan Multi-scan

Multi-scan works in concert with any scans. When Multi-scan is turned on and one of the scan types is selected, the cursor jumps to the first occurrence of the problem type. When the problem is resolved (i.e. the conflict resolved or the untranslate defined), the cursor Command Multi-scan automatically jumps to the next occurrence of the Speed Key Ctrl+Shift+M specified problem type. The cursor continues to jump to Menu F10/Move/Multi-scan the next conflict or untranslate until every occurrence has been resolved, or until Multi-scan is turned off. Toolbar Icon Editing 151

To turn on Multi-scan, press Ctrl+Shift+M. When Multi-scan is on, the letters MLT appear on the status bar, and the Multi-scan toolbar button appears pressed.

GLOBALING
Command Speed Key Hyperkey Menu Toolbar Icon Global Ctrl+G G F10/Edit/Global

Global corrections are typically performed on untranslatessteno for which no dictionary definition exists. You can also global a mistranslation. For a mistranslation, you might change a definition, create a conflict (shorthand stroke(s) with multiple text definitions), or create an alternate definition that is placed in a different dictionary.

1. Position the cursor at the beginning of the translation problem. 2. Press Ctrl+G to open the Globaling dialog.

3. You can click on the anchor symbol in the upper-right corner of these windows and then move the window where you want it to stay. When the dialog box is not anchored, the system will move it around to avoid covering the cursor. 4. The title bar of the Globaling dialog shows the steno that is currently selected. If the steno does not have a definition in the dictionary, the steno will be in the text entry field as well as on the title bar. 5. In the text entry field enter the dictionary entry or edit the one that is already there. 6. Press Enter. The entry is added to your main dictionary (if that is what you have selected for Dictionary on the Edit tab. If a different dictionary has been selected on the Edit tab, that is the dictionary that the global will be added to when you press Enter), and the correction is applied from the current cursor position to the end of the document. To apply the global but not add it to your dictionary, choose Trash global (Ctrl+T). To apply the global and add it to your job dictionary, choose Job Dictionary (Ctrl+J). To apply the change to only the current occurrence, choose Local replace (Ctrl+L).

AutoMagic and Globaling

AutoMagic will offer up to 10 of the most likely things you will want to do or select while editing.

Editing 152

When you are editing a transcript, if you have the Info bar on, and have checked Global magic in User settings | Edit, you will see that the same suggestions appear in the Info bar as the first few that are listed by Global magic when you do a global. You also have the option to Global, which opens the Global dialog, or mark the text. If you choose to mark the text, you will then have the option to mark more text, either previous or following the text the cursor is on.

If you select one of the suggestions, for example, choose department by pressing 1, AutoMagic will then list dictionaries for this global to go into, and will also list options to undo the global, or escape. AutoMagic is able to offer suggestions for multi-stroke globals without marking the text. For example, you might write the word editing as EUD TKEUT -G, and AutoMagic suggests a 3-

Editing 153

stroke global as in this example (the number 3 in parentheses shows that it is a 3-stroke global): If you select 9, it will then ask which dictionary you would like the global to go into:

In this example, you would have used only two keystrokes to make a 3-stroke global and enter it in your dictionary. Without AutoMagic, you would need 6 strokes. Remember that after selecting one of the Global Magic suggestions, you can select Undo from the list if you didn't really want that global, even before you decide which dictionary it should go into. Or you can select Never mind (Esc) to to make a local replacement.

Globaling options
In the User settings | Edit tab, under Globaling, you can set a number of options. Global after scan: Combining Globaling and Scanning You can set Total Eclipse to open automatically a globaling window when a scan stops on an untranslate. To set this option, go to User Settings | Edit tab and mark the Global after Scan checkbox. Automatic spelling and Spellchecking while globaling To check the spelling of text in the text entry field of the Globaling dialog, click the Spelling button. This opens the spellchecker window, which provides a list of recognized words similar to the selected text. At the top of the window is the misspelled word (under Original). Scroll through the list, find the correct word and click the Change button to change the words spelling. If you always want Total Eclipse to check the spelling of what is entered in the text field, go to User Settings | Edit tab, and mark the Automatic spelling checkbox under the Globaling section (right side of the window). Editing 154

Detect conflicts automatically You have an option to create a conflict whenever you global a new entry for which the steno has already been defined. To do so, go to User Settings (Alt+U) | Edit tab. In the Globaling section, mark the checkbox for Detect conflicts. Note that this option also affects when you add an entry to a dictionary in which the steno already exists or when you merge dictionaries that each have the same steno assigned to different definitions. If you make a dictionary entry that conflicts with an existing one, it will show exactly what the text is for the new entry vs. the old entry, and there is an option for Keep existing which will not add the new entry at all and will leave the existing entry alone. It will also check for conflicts during block write/separate functions if writing into an existing dictionary.

Global magic
If Eclipse can figure out what you might be trying to global, when you global a word it will create a list of possible choices in a small yellow tool window directly beneath the text box in the globaling window.

This window will contain a series of up to 10 underlined numbers. You can select the item that matches what you were trying to global by simply typing that number, or clicking on the item. If what you want is not on the list, type it and the list will disappear. (Hitting any key will remove the list.) Note that Global magic will suggest multi-stroke words, but not more than one word per global. The exception is that it will suggest phrases if the entire phrase itself is defined as a whole dictionary entry. For example, if you write SEURBGTD STAOE and you have SEURBGT = circuit STAOE = city in your dictionary, Global magic will NOT suggest circuit city as one of the ten choices, because it is ONLY looking for complete matches in the dictionary or in the spelling checker. It doesn't divide up the strokes and check them against the dictionary individually. However, if you have SEURBGT STAOE = Circuit City Editing 155

in your dictionary, it WILL be included in the choices (probably as #1) because it's a complete match for the misstroked steno being globaled in the job. This also applies for briefs like STAUPL = state your name, etc. When adding a dictionary entry, Global Magic will offer suggestions based on existing dictionary entries and spelling dictionary contents. It will also work when globaling in entries from a raw note file based on the same principles. If you use a Hyperkey such as 7 or 8 to global two or three strokes, Global Magic will wait for all the strokes to be highlighted before looking for replacements. Global magic uses Intelligent phonetics, and understands dragged and dropped keys, and steno stacking to decide what words to suggest. To turn on this feature, go to User settings | Edit tab | Globaling and select Global magic. It is turned on by default.

Unglobal
Command Speed Key Menu Toolbar Icon Unglobal Ctrl+Shift+G F10/Edit/Unglobal

While you are in a document, Eclipse will keep track of all of the globals you've made and what the original entry was for that global. Selecting Edit menu | Unglobal will bring up a list of these globals, with the most recent

global first. You can select any of the globals on the list and that global will be undone, restoring the original text for each instance of that steno in the document, and restoring the appropriate dictionary to its original state, by putting the original entry back or deleting the new one.

Capitalizing globals
When you enter text for a global, capitalize the entry only if it should always be capitalized. In other words, if you are globaling a common word at the beginning of a sentence, do not capitalize it. If you want the word to be capitalized initially, or all caps, or all lowercase, select the appropriate option by clicking the Capitalize button, a three-way switch for capitalizing the defined text. Each time the button is selected, it switches among initial cap, all caps, and all lowercase options. In place of clicking the button, you can also use keystrokes Ctrl+K or Alt+C.

Lock
Using the Lock button will cycle between three choices: Lockspaces (need{~}to{~}know}), hyphens (need-to-know), and back to spaces (need to know).

Editing 156

Review dictionaries
The Review button in the Globaling dialog brings up the Review dictionaries dialog, which will display a list of all of the places where that steno is defined in all of the dictionaries used to translate that job. It works both in and out of realtime. It will look for the dictionaries in the same folder as the job (the .ecl file) and in the jobs folder. If it does not find them there, it will not see them at all. Once the Review dictionaries dialog box appears, you can hit several buttons (each of which have Alt+Letter key combinations) to perform any of the following tasks:

Delete current entry Delete all of the entries. Delete others all but the highlighted entry (maybe you want to keep the main dictionary one, for example.) Search all dictionaries (goes through every single .dix file in your jobs area looking for that entry and repopulates the list on the screen.)

After you're done deleting one or more of the entries, if there are any left, you can select one and hit OK to go back to the globaling dialog with the text of the entry that you selected filled into the globaling window. You can then go ahead and make a global or just escape out. Entries will often appear with (Temporary) before them, which indicates that that entry is in the temporary $tranjob dictionary. This will help identify if you have an undesired translation coming up as the result of a Trash global during realtime. Keep in mind, however, that job dictionary entries will also appear in the temporary dictionary since that's the dictionary the system uses for translation. You can remove an entry from the temporary dictionary and it will be removed from the current translation, even if it still remains in the job dictionary, which could be very helpful.

Delete
To remove the current instance of the entry for the text in the document, click the Delete button. Its roughly equivalent to using the Delete word function but removes everything that is currently highlighted for globaling.

Suggestions
When the Suggestions box is checked (Alt+U while globaling), Total Eclipse checks each entry for possible alternate outlines (other ways you may have written the word or words) and suggests additional outlines during globaling. The Additional entry suggestions window appears and you can choose to add some, all, or none of the additional outlines to the dictionary. The Suggestions box will stay checked for the duration of the session, unless you

Editing 157

turn it off. To accept an option from the Additional entry suggestions dialog, select it in the window and click OK. To accept all of the suggestions, click All. You can also use the Shift+Click method of selecting more than one entry at a time. The Additional entry suggestions dialog also allows you to turn on or off three other globaling features: Normalize strokes When the globaling and dictionary entry adding routines suggest additional entries, it will suggest them according to your own personalized steno theory. Some reporters double consonants; others don't. Some will regularly move certain consonants across stroke boundaries but not others. Some will substitute -F for -S in some situations, some won't. For example, if you global PHABG/ROE = macro, it will also suggest PHA/KROE and PHABG/KROE. In other words, you put in the steno characters that can appear at the end of one stroke and the beginning of the next stroke, and you list all of the different variations that the system should consider equivalent. For more information on Normalization, see the Reference Guide, page 443. Integral prefix/suffix: Suffix and Prefix Suggestions Total Eclipse can check a new dictionary entry or global for one-stroke prefixes and suffixes (such as ed and ing) that could be added to the entry without an additional stroke. For example, if you add TPHRAOEU = fly to your dictionary, Total Eclipse would suggest, for example, the entries: TPHRAOEUS = flies, and TPHRAOEUG = flying To accept an option, select it in the window and click OK. To accept all the suggestions, click All. You can also use the Shift+Click method of selecting more than one entry at a time. An integral prefix/suffix will only apply during translation if the resulting word is in the spelling dictionary. You can also use tucked in keys for suffixes in your one-stroke endings. For example, you might write PHRORT for plotter, so globaling in PHROT would automatically suggest plots, plotted and plotter. Total Eclipse can also add integral prefixes and suffixes to the same word. For example, if you add a word such as ARPL = arm, you will get the following suggestions: ARPLG = arming ARPLS = arms ARPLD = armed STKARPL = disarm Editing 158

STKARPLG = disarming STKARPLS = disarms STKARPLD = disarmed Note that if this feature finds a slop stroke, it will first convert it to the appropriate text before applying the prefix or suffix. With this feature turned on, Total Eclipse will check new dictionary entries or globals and list possibilities in the Additional entry suggestions dialog. An integral prefix/suffix will only apply during translation if the resulting word is in the spelling dictionary. For more information, consult the Reference Guide, page 498. Misstrokes With Misstrokes turned on, when you do a global, Eclipse will figure out every possible misstroke for the entry that you just created based on the misstroke keys that you have specified in the dragged/dropped list, and list them. Note that no matter how many strokes the entry is, it will not suggest any more than two fingerslips per entry. Also, as with the automatic misstroke fixer, it will only suggest keys within a finger's-width from the keys you're actually supposed to be trying to press. Note: turning on all three features will give you every possible misstroke multiplied by every possible suffix multiplied by every possible prefix multiplied by every possible normalization shift. If you have too many indiscriminate misstroke keys selected, you can end up with a single global that offers thousands of misstroke suggestions, which could add thousands of entries to your main dictionary that you may never use. These three features are individually turned on and off in the suggestions dialog, and will be stored permanently.

Dictionaries for the global

To change the default dictionaries for globaling, go to your User Settings | Edit tab. For default globals, select an item in the Dictionary: field under Globaling. Under Capped: select a dictionary for entries that contain capitalized letters. (The Capped feature will not trigger if the entry contains any braces, since entries like {Q}ok or {A}yes contain capital letters but clearly belong in the main dictionary.) If you do not want to take advantage of this feature, simply set both items to the same dictionary. As you are globaling, if you press Enter or click OK after typing the text for a global, the definition is placed in your default dictionary (typically your main dictionary). To select another dictionary, use the dictionary field at the bottom of the Globaling dialog.

Editing 159

This field contains a drop-down list of choices. You can open the list and select an item, or use the shortcut keystroke for the item you want (shortcuts are listed next to each item on the list). The Main dictionary, Job dictionary, and user-defined dictionaries are specified in your User Settings. | User tab | Dictionaries. If you want to put the entry in a particular dictionary but you haven't yet selected that dictionary as one of your eight user-definable dictionaries, you can select Browse from the dictionary list. The hotkey for this is Ctrl+B. Once you select browse, you will get a file dialog that will allow you to choose a dictionary. The global will then be placed in that dictionary. It also places a copy of it in the temporary ($tranjob.dix) dictionary so it will be available for the rest of the job. To be prompted for the dictionary when you apply a global, choose (Prompt for type) from the dropdown list. With this option, when you press Enter to apply a global, a dictionary drop-down list appears, from which you select a dictionary.

Applying globals
You can use the Apply globals command, found on the Tools menu, to apply globals from another dictionary to the current document. This command is useful when multiple jobs are being edited concurrently and you want to apply the job globals from Command Apply Globals one transcript to another. F10/Tools/
Menu Toolbar Icon

Choose Tools | Apply globals to open a file dialog in which you select the dictionaries that contain the globals you want to apply to the current job. Globals are added to the current temporary dictionary as well as the current text. If you are working in Realtime, this is one way to add a job dictionary to the translation if you forgot to add it when you started the translation.

Apply globals

Editing 160

Globaling backwards When you apply a global, you can have it affect only the current and future instances (from the current point in the document forward to the end) or all instances (those behind the cursors current position as well as those in front of it). To apply the global only from this point forward (the current and future instances), click the OK button. To apply the global to all preceding and all subsequent instances, mark the All checkbox and then click OK. The global definition will be applied to the entire document.

Adding and removing strokes in the globaling window

To include additional strokes in the global, you can use the cursor arrow keys. To include steno that is to the left of the selection, press the up arrow key . To remove a stroke to the left of the selection, press the down arrow key . To remove strokes to the right of the selection, press Ctrl+, and to include strokes to the right of the selection, press Ctrl+. The spin controls on the left and right of the text field can also be used to add strokes to or remove strokes from the selection.

Editing 161

Special entries list

To add or edit a dictionary entry while you are globaling, enter the dictionary entry for the selected steno in the text entry field near the top of the globaling dialog. You can enter any dictionary syntax in this field, including formatting commands, macros, and autoinclude files. Common dictionary commands are provided in a drop-down list (the Special entries list). To enter one of those commands in the text entry field, select it from the list; you dont have to type it. Ctrl+E causes the menu to drop down. If text in the field is highlighted, the selected syntax will replace the highlighted text. When you choose an entry from the Special entries list, if it requires you to enter text, for example, a prefix or suffix, the cursor will automatically be positioned where the text is needed. When you choose Autoinclude, if you do not currently have a block file open, it will open the file dialog in your block files folder. Once you pick the file, it will create the autoinclude entry to load in that block file. Slop Strokes If you write an untranslate, for example TPHUBZ instead of TPHUBS, which is in your dictionary as a conflict which has learned many context rules, you can use the last entry on the Special entries list, Slop stroke={=x}, and use the steno emulator to type the steno you were trying to write. The entry will go into your Main dictionary, and when you pick the conflict choice, it will resolve as well as the conflict that has been in your dictionary for a while. If it is a new rule, it will go into your master entry. Slop strokes can also help with Speakers. You can have one master entry for a speaker (KROERT KROERT in the example below), and a number of slop stroke entries, so you can change the text for the speaker entry, without having to change any of the slop stroke entries.

Editing 162

Shortcuts while globaling

While in the globaling window, you can use the shortcut Ctrl+N to eNclose what you have typed with braces. Other shortcuts you can use include: F2 F3 F4 will open the Speaker list will type in {Q} will type in {A}

Ctrl+, will type in {,} Ctrl+. will type in {.} Ctrl+/ will type in {?} Ctrl+; will type in{;} Ctrl+Shift+; will type in{:} Ctrl+~ will type in{~} Ctrl+S will open the Prefix/suffix dialog Note: You can use the Ctrl+S key to invoke the insert prefix/suffix dialog inside any extended edit box, including the edit box used for globaling, find/replace, etc. (The default Speed key for this function in editing is Ctrl+K, but in edit boxes that's already used for the capitalize function.) This will add a prefix to the beginning of the text or a suffix to the end. It's the same dialog that appears when editing a transcript.

Autoreplacements and globaling

You can also create autoreplacements when you are globaling. To do so, type the autoreplacement in the text field. For example, if you type fl=Florida as the text for a global, youll get a prompt asking if you want to make fl=Florida an autoreplacement. Answering Yes will cause Florida to be globaled and also add fl=Florida to your autoreplacements. For more on autoreplacements, see page 190.

SELECTING CONFLICTS
When the cursor is on a conflict, the conflict choices appear on the status bar (at the bottom of the Total Eclipse program window). To select a conflict, press the number that corresponds to the correct conflict choice. To select the next conflict, press the zero key (0). Even after a conflict has been selected, conflict choices appear on the status bar when the cursor is on the conflict. Thus, if a conflict has been incorrectly selected, you can still change the selection by pressing the number of the conflict choice you want. (This is also true for conflicts that have been resolved by the program.) If you want to pick a conflict choice and not teach a context rule, hold down the Shift key along with the choice #, and it will not become part of the AI data for that dictionary entry.

Editing 163

SELECTING TEXT
When you select text you can select a block consisting of just a single letter or word, several words, a paragraph, several pages, or an entire document. You use blocks to indicate a section of text to be acted on by a command, such as copying, cutting, deleting, formatting, etc. When a block of text is marked, any character key that you press may replace the entire block. In other words, the block is deleted and the character is inserted where the block of text had been. There are several ways to select text: 1. Clicking-and-dragging over the desired text with the mouse. 2. Holding down Shift while pressing any of the cursor- keys. 3. Moving the cursor to the starting point of a block, left-clicking to mark the starting spot, then pressing Shift while clicking the mouse at the ending point of a block (while doing this you can also use the scroll bars to get to the end of the section). 4. Double-clicking on a word selects the word. 5. Total Eclipses blocking feature: F7 activates the blocking feature. Then press cursor movement keys to mark the block. (Note that in this case, pressing a character key does NOT replace the marked text.) To deselect text (if you select text then decide not to do anything with it), press Esc or click once outside the selection.

Selecting text with the mouse: Clicking-and-dragging

To mark a block of text with the mouse 1. Position the cursor at the start of the text you want to mark. 2. Press and hold the mouse button down and move the pointer to the end of the desired text block. You can drag the pointer up, down, left, right, diagonal. You dont have to drag to the end of a line and then follow the line around back to the beginning. As you perform this click-and-drag, the text is highlighted. 3. Once you have selected all the text you wanted, release the mouse button and issue whatever command you wanted. You can also mark a block in reverse. Simply click at the end of the text you wish to mark, then click-and-drag to the beginning of the text. Note that if you reverse the direction in which you are selecting (if youve been moving to the right and then reverse and move to the left) you will deselect text until you reach the starting point of the selection. If you continue beyond the starting point, you will start selecting text again to the left of the starting point rather than to the right. It is impossible to mark text on both sides of the starting point of a block. Clicking and dragging is a standard Windows operation (it works in many other applications).

Selecting text with keyboard

To select specific amounts of text (including small amount such as a few characters),

Editing 164

1. Press and hold down Shift. 2. While the Shift key is down, press any of the cursor keys. Text will be marked from the initial position of the cursor to its new position. 3. As long as the Shift key is held down, you can press additional cursor keys to select more text. If you select too much, just use the opposite direction key (if you were moving to the right, use the left arrow key). Selecting with Keyboard Shortcuts one character left one character right one word left one word right line up line down to beginning of line to end of line one screen page up one screen page down to beginning of document to end of document Ctrl+Shift+ Ctrl+Shift+ Shift+ Shift Shift Shift Shift Home Shift End Shift Page up Shift Page down Ctrl Shift Page up Ctrl Shift Page down

Shift-clicking Shift-clicking (common computing term) combines the mouse and keyboard, and is an excellent way to precisely mark text that spans multiple pages. If you click the left pointer or mouse button, release it while you reposition the pointing device, and then, while holding down the Shift key, click at the end-point of the text, a block will be marked from the previous cursor position to the point of the click. To mark a large block (e.g., spanning multiple pages), 1. Place the cursor at the starting point of the block, 2. Use the scroll bar to navigate to the ending point of the block. 3. Hold down Shift. 4. While keeping the Shift down, position the cursor at the end of the block and click. (Unlike when you use the cursor keys, when you use the scroll bar to move through a document, the cursor is not affected.) This is a standard Windows operation (it works in many other applications).

Editing 165

Marking Text Using F7

The F7 marking feature lets you mark a selection by using any movement command.
Command Speed Key Hyperkey Menu Toolbar icon Mark F7 M F10/Block/Mark

To use this method, press F7 to turn on the blocking feature and mark text from the current cursor position to the next occurrence of a space. Pressing F7 again will mark additional words. As long as the feature is on, any subsequent movement you make with a cursor key will behave as though you are holding the Shift key. This means that you can block lines by using the up and down arrow keys, the Go To function, Find, Scan, etc.

To deselect the text and turn off marking, press Esc. If a text block has been marked using standard Windows methods like Shift+move or Shift+click, or Click+drag, F7 will first clear the existing block before marking. If you Shift+click to mark or unmark additional text when block marking is on, it will remain on and the cursor movement keys will continue to mark or unmark text. Pressing the Esc key will turn off block marking, and unmark the selected text. Selecting one of the equivalent commands from the Block menu | Move submenu will also turn off block marking.

AutoMagic with Blocks of text

As soon as you mark text, AutoMagic offers to mark more or prior text.

In addition to marking more or prior text, you can Copy the text, open the Text attributes dialog, or surround the marked text with Punctuation.

Editing 166

You also can Google unknown words. If you select this, your default browser will open and perform a search for the marked text.

Copying/Writing/Separating/Transferring marked text

Using the Write command You can copy the marked text to an existing file or to a new one. To create a new file with the Write command, enter a new file name in the file dialog window (Step 3 below). A prompt will ask you to confirm the new files creation.
Command Speed Key Menu Toolbar Icon Write Alt+W F10/Block/Write

1. Highlight the text you want to copy. 2. Use the Write command (Alt+W). A file dialog opens. 3. Select the file to receive the text or type the name of a new dictionary. 4. Click OK. The marked text is copied to the target file.

When you block write a text file or note file into an existing file, it will be appended (added to the end) of that file. If you want to insert the file at a specific location, use Block Read instead. Block from a note file to a new file will always create a file of the .not type. When doing a Block Write, it does not matter if the target file is open or not. When you do a Block/Write or Block/Separate, it will copy all the job variables, as well as all the Speaker names (and speaker table shortcut numbers) present in the whole file. Using the Separate (Transfer) command
Command Speed Key Menu Toolbar Icon Separate (Transfer) Ctrl+Shift+X F10/Block/Separate

The Separate (Transfer) command (Ctrl+Shift+X) removes marked text from the transcript and places them in another file. It opens a file dialog window and places the marked text in the selected target file. This command differs from the Write command in that the selected entries are deleted from the original file.

1. Highlight the text to be moved. 2. Use the Separate (Transfer) command (Ctrl+Shift+X). A file dialog opens. 3. Select the target file (the file to receive the text) or type the name of a new file. 4. Click OK. The marked text is moved to the target file. Using the Block Read Command The Block Read command (Alt+R) inserts a copy of another file into the current file at the cursor location. 1. Use the Block Read command (Alt-R). A file dialog opens. 2. Select the file you wish to insert into the current file. Editing 167

3. Click OK. The selected file is inserted into the target file. This command is commonly used to insert block files into a transcript. It can also be used to merge two files of the same type, such as two separate transcripts. Unlike other block operations, Block Read does not require you to mark anything first. Simply place the cursor at the location where you want the selected file to be inserted, press Alt+R, and select the file. When merging text files, the file that is read in will be inserted at the cursor location. Be sure that the cursor is in the correct location before beginning the block read. If you are reading in a transcript that contains steno tracking, the tracking will be copied over as well (allowing you to perform globals on that section).

Text Globals
Most globals you perform will be steno globals: you assign a definition to a piece of steno. In a text global, you will assign a definition to another piece of text. For example, if you text-global the surname Smith as Smythe, all instances of Smith will be changed to Smythe, no matter how you write them. To create a text global from within a transcript: 1. Mark the text. 2. Use Edit | Global (Ctrl+G) to initiate the global command. 3. The globaling window will appear. Check the Text box in the Global window (the default is always off). 4. Enter your desired definition, and select a destination (Main, Job, Trash, Local, User, or Browse). The default is Trash global. Another way to create a text global is to start a global without first marking the text, use the global dialog to highlight the text you wish to replace, and then check the Text box in the dialog after making the selection. You can also add a text global to a dictionary via the Add Dictionary Entry (Ctrl-D) command: 1. Open the dictionary to which you wish to add the text global. 2. Chose Edit | Add dictionary entry (Ctrl+D). 3. When the steno emulator appears, press Escape without entering any steno. 4. You will be asked to enter a Text Entry Search String. Enter the text you wish to be replaced (Smith in the above example). 5. You will be asked to enter a Text Entry Replace String. Enter the text you wish to replace it with (Smythe in the above example). 6. The entry will be added to the dictionary. Text globals will always appear at the bottom of the dictionary. In the Steno column, they are surrounded by quotation marks.

Editing 168

By default, a text global will be a Trash global, meaning that it will take effect in the current job only. However, you can add text globals to dictionaries by doing a Main, Job, or User global. Note: If you have Apply edits checked in your User settings | Realtime | Output format, Eclipse will send your text globals to Bridge stations.

USING WINDOWS COMMANDS TO DELETE, CUT, COPY, PASTE

Command Menu Toolbar icon

Delete
Delete Delete or Backspace F10/Edit/Delete/Character

Speed Key

To delete a marked block, press the Delete or Backspace keys. Deletions done within one paragraph can be restored by the undo function.

Cut, copy, and paste

Command Speed Key Menu Toolbar icon Command Speed Key Menu Toolbar icon Command Speed Key Menu Toolbar icon Paste Ctrl+V F10/Block/Paste Copy Ctrl+C F10/Block/Copy Cut Ctrl+X or Shift+Delete F10/Block/Cut

Cutting text removes it from the file and places it on the clipboard, so it can be pasted/inserted in a different location. The cut text will remain on the clipboard until you cut or copy another block; the newly cut or copied text will then replace the previously cut text on the clipboard. To remove text, first select it and then press Ctrl+X to cut the selection, or Ctrl+C to copy it to the clipboard. Copying text leaves the selected text where it is and places a copy of it on the clipboard. You can then paste that text anywhere in the document. As with cut text, the copied text will remain on the clipboard until you cut or copy another block; the newly cut or copied text will then replace the previously copied text. To paste cut or copied text into a document, place the cursor where you want to place the text, then press Ctrl+V.

Editing 169

SPECIAL EDITING ON BLOCKS OF TEXT

Setting text type
Command Speed Key Menu Set text type Ctrl+Shift+D F10/Format/Text type

If you mark a block of text and select Format | Text type, a menu opens that lists every different type of text that Eclipse supports. For example, you can use this feature, to cause the software to treat a piece of text differently from the way it would normally be treated. For example, you could block mark a piece of text and set it to Edit station text and it will look as though it was typed in by a scopist, even though you actually translated it. You could block mark a piece of typed-in text and change it to Normal and it would be eligible for inclusion in a steno global (provided there was some steno tracking to it from the previous text.) This feature also gives you the ability to mark spots in the document so that scans will stop on them. If you mark a word and set it to Untranslate text, the untranslate scan will stop on it. This is equivalent to the {U:text} translation command. This can be used even on text which has been typed-in and doesn't have any steno associated with it at all.

Redacted text
If you have text that should be confidential, you can mark it and set the marked text to redacted text using Format | Text type | Redacted to set it to redacted text. You can do this for a large block of text if you need to, but be aware that paragraph labels are not represented by text types and will not change. If you need to redact everything, including the Q and A symbols and Colloquy names, it is necessary to use the white foreground font color technique. You can set the Display colors in User settings | Display | Color selections | Redacted text so that the information in the redacted text will be protected on your screen. The background color is always used for the screen. The foreground color is used for the screen AND for the printout. For example, if you have your foreground color set to black, then redacted text will show up as a black box, as though it were blacked out with a thick marker. If you set your foreground text to white, it will print blank as though it were whited out. The background color should be set to a contrasting color so that you will still be able to read and edit it on the screen. For example, if you want your redacted text to be white, you should set your redacted text background color to be something other than white, such as gray. Secondly, you can set User settings | Document | Advanced to Hide redacted text. When Hide redacted text is on, all redacted text will be eliminated from the printout, PDF, ASCII and Bridge exports. If you turn this option off, redacted text will appear as normal. Each individual document will remember this setting separately.

Editing 170

Also in User settings | Document | Advanced you can choose a redacted text character so that you can have redacted text appear as XXXX or **** or whatever you like. There is also a button here to set your color for the redacted text. It is the same function as in User Settings | Display described above. Note: You can use a dictionary entry to have confidential information translate as redacted text. The three-letter metadictionary code for redacted text is /?TXR. The recommended metadictionary entry for redacted text is: {R:*}={/"%/?TXR}. This will allow you to do {R:text} and text will appear redacted. For example, if you have a person's name that should be confidential, you could enter it as Mr.{R:Jones} or {R:Mr. Jones}.

Stitching
To stitch, mark text using the F7 command, then press either the hyphen or period, depending on which character you want to use for stitching the letters or words. Stitching is controlled by whether you have marked a single word or a group of words. If one word is marked, the letters within the word are stitched. If a group of words is marked, then the words are stitched (the individual letters are not stitched): letter stitch word stitch stitch with periods S-T-I-T-C-H run-of-the-mill money.about.com or D.A.R.E. To unstitch a group of words, mark the group and press (hyphen) and the stitching will be removed (run-of-the-mill will become run of the mill). If you unstitch a word, Eclipse will lower-case the stitched word, so that marking S-M-I-T-H and pressing (hyphen) will change it to smith. - + (one-word selection) - + ( multi-word selection) . (period) + (word or words)

Editing 171

Stitch type S-M-I-T-H S-m-i-t-h s-m-i-t-h

Capitalization result capitalize all letters capitalize the first letter, remaining letters appear as typed lowercase all letters

You can control capitalization within the User Settings | Edit tab.

Enclosing in punctuation
Using the same marking features, you can enclose text in punctuation. Total Eclipse will automatically use the open and closed versions of the punctuation where relevant. Punctuation double quotes single quotes [ or ] open or closed braces -- dashes Example run of the mill run of the mill [run of the mill] -- run of the mill --

( or ) open or closed parentheses (run of the mill) The Stitching and Enclosing in punctuation features can be executed as toggles. For example, Marking the word [hello] and hitting the quote key will remove the quotes, leaving [hello]. Marking S-m-i-t-h and hitting the hyphen key will remove the stitching, leaving Smith. The toggle will also work with words surrounded with parentheses, brackets or braces, commas, dashes (shift+hyphen), or stitched with periods or lockspaces.

Removing spaces
To remove space from a group of words or characters, mark the text as described above and then press the space bar: run of the mill + spacebar = runofthemill

Separating Composite words

If you block mark a single composite word with F7 and hit the space bar, the word will be separated into two words. Eclipse scans the word for all possible ways to break it up into two words and stops when it finds a spot where the spelling checker recognizes both words. For example, stairway becomes stair way, floormat becomes floor mat, headroom becomes head room, etc. This function is case-sensitive, to prevent stairway being split into st airway, for example.

Text Attributes
Command Speed Key Menu Toolbar Icon Text attribute Ctrl+F10/Format/Text attributes

When you mark a block and press Ctrl+- (Hyphen), the Text attribute window opens. (If no text is marked, the change applies to the paragraph containing the cursor.) Selections you make on the Text attribute window will affect the entire marked block. By selecting Underscore,

Editing 172

Bold, Italics, Superscript, or Subscript, you will apply that effect to the marked block. Press Enter or click OK when finished. This window turns text attributes off as well. For example, if you boldface something by mistake, simply mark that text, press Ctrl+-, uncheck Bold, and press Enter. You can also customize the effect that Bold, Superscript or Subscript have on the marked block by editing the numbers in the spin controls. Block attribute changes remove existing commands within the block, so you can mark a block and issue an attribute change command and all of the attribute change commands in the existing text will be removed first.

INSERTING SYMBOLS AND NON-ENGLISH CHARACTERS

Command Speed Key Menu Toolbar icon Special Characters Ctrl+W F10/Edit/Insert//Special Character

To insert a special character (anything not represented on the keyboard keys), position the cursor at the relevant location, then either press Ctrl+W to get the Special Characters dialog, with a table of foreign characters and symbols. The dialog uses your current font so that you can see what you're actually

going to get. 1. To select a character, either click on it using the mouse or use the arrow keys to navigate in the table. To use the arrow keys, press any arrow key twice to move the cursor into the table. Then use the keys to navigate. 2. Once the character is selected, click OK to place it at the insertion point in the document (or double-click on the character). 3. If text in the document is selected when you select a character, the character will be placed after the selected text. You can use the Pick field to select some items on the table. Accented letters can be selected by typing the base letter and then a number that corresponds to the characters row position. For example, to pick the character, type A5 in the Pick field. Press Enter to accept the marked selection. (The Pick field is case-sensitive. So, if you wanted the lowercase A, you would type a5 in the Pick field.) The Normal characters checkbox accesses the page of standard typing characters in case you want to find a particular character from a symbol set like Wingdings or a foreign character set. Also, you can hit Ctrl+W and then - to get to the en-dash and the em-dash easily.

Editing 173

Internationalizing a word
If you are in an edit box and you type a word, you can use Ctrl+I to internationalize the wordEclipse will insert the appropriate accent marks, if applicable. For example, you can type "jalapeno" and hit Ctrl+I and it will become "jalapeo." Note that this function relies on the correctly accented version of the word being in the spelling dictionary.

INSERTING PREFIXES AND SUFFIXES

Command Speed Key Menu Toolbar icon Prefix/Suffix Ctrl+K F10/Edit/Insert /Prefix/Suffix

Instead of manually adding prefixes and suffixes, you can use Total Eclipse to get a list of prefixes and suffixes, apply them, and have the spelling changed accordingly. Use the Prefix/Suffix command (Ctrl+K).

For example, adding the prefix ing to the word take results in the word taking. Shortcut keys allow a single keystroke to select the prefix or suffix. The cursor can be positioned anywhere on a word when the command is issued. When the command is issued, the Prefix/suffix dialog appears. The display area of this window contains a list of prefixes and suffixes and a shortcut key for each. To select and insert an entry, type its shortcut key (the letter preceding the :) and press Enter.

Adding and deleting entries to the Prefix/Suffix list To add an entry to the list of suffixes and prefixes, 1. Type the key you want to use for a shortcut in the Shortcut field. 2. Type the prefix or suffix in the Text fieldinclude a carat (^: Shift+6) before a suffix and after a prefix (the carat takes the place of the word). For example, ^ing and re^. 3. To add the entry click Add. To delete an entry, select it in the list and then click Delete.

TIME AND DATE

Command Speed Key Menu Toolbar icon Time/date Shift+Alt+I F10/Edit/Insert/Time/Date

To insert the time and/or date in a document use the Time/date command (Shift+Alt+I). You will get the Insert time/date dialog window, which allows you to select various time and date formats. The dialog has preset formats in a drop-down menu (Preset field). 1. Select one of the formats by typing the letter or number that precedes each formats description.

Editing 174

2. Press Enter to confirm the selection. 3. Press Enter again to insert the selection at the current cursor position. You can also click on a format selection, then click OK to make the insertion. Fields at the top of the window list the hour, minute, second, month, day, and year. Each of these can be edited. The Output area provides a preview of the current format selection. The Format field shows the formatting codes that result in the format you see.

You can edit the Format field to create a custom format. All formatting codes are available from the Advanced drop down list. Choose a code and click Add to place it in the Format field. You can also add text entries to the Format field. The format preference you enter will be remembered; they are saved, so if you use the same format the next time you enter a date, you wont need to reset the format.

EDITING TIMECODES
Command Speed Key Menu Toolbar icon Edit timecodes Alt+Shift+C F10/Edit/Miscellaneous /Edit timecodes

The Edit Timecodes command, Alt+Shift+C, allows you to change different parts of the timecodes, depending on where the cursor is. The spin controls can be executed using the up/down arrows of the keyboard. For example, if you place the cursor in the seconds portion of the timecode, the spin control will add or subtract from the seconds. The spin control to the left of the times apply either to the

Absolute or the Relative timecodes, while the control to the right apply to both simultaneously. You can use this feature for timecoding a file not in realtime by listening to the

Editing 175

audio and pressing a key for each line. You can use the Capture button to capture the current timecode. In order to manually timecode a file, go to the beginning of the current line, select the timecode editing function, Alt+Shift+C, capture the timecode and hit Enter. Note that this will assign a relative and an absolute timecode. The absolute timecode is the current time of day. The relative timecode will be calculated from the current start time of the document (User settings | Document | Timecodes | Starting timecode.) If the starting timecode is zero, then the first time you capture a timecode, that instance will be used as the starting timecode.

Timecoding a section of the transcript If you first mark a block, you can change the timecodes for the entire block.

NONBREAKING SPACE (LOCKSPACE)

The tilde key (~) inserts a non-breaking space (lockspace) in the document at the current cursor position. The lockspace is invisible in the document unless you have print commands visible (when print commands are visible, lockspaces appear as tildes). To determine if a space is a lockspace, position the cursor on the space and look at the left side of the status bar, where an indicator is displayed, or view print commands (User settings | Display tab | check Print commands.). Because the default keystroke for the lockspace is the tilde character, you cannot type the tilde in a document unless you change the keyboard assignment (keyboard assignments are controlled in the User Settings | Edit tab).

PUNCTUATION
By default, when you place the cursor at the beginning of a word and type a terminal punctuation mark (period, question mark, colon or exclamation point) Eclipse automatically uppercases the word, inserts the punctuation after the previous word, and inserts a space. For example, to insert an exclamation mark after well in the sentence below, place the cursor before the f and press the exclamation mark key: Well for instance, I have Well! For instance, I have When you type a new word at the start of a sentence, Eclipse will uncap the next word, as long as the lower-case version of that word is considered correctly spelled (which prevents names from being changed to lower case). For example, typing well before the For in the sentence below will lower-case the word For. For instance, I have Well for instance, I have

Editing 176

Allow punctuation toggle

Using a Single Keystroke to Insert and Delete Punctuation To remove or insert the most common punctuation (commas, periods, semicolons, colons, open paren, quotes, question marks and exclamation points) with a single keystroke, you can set a toggle function. This toggle function is set in User Settings | Edit. Under the Editing section, mark the checkbox for Allow punctuation toggle. To turn the function off, just click in the checkbox to remove the mark. How punctuation toggle works When the toggle is on, to remove punctuation, place the cursor at the beginning of the word immediately following the punctuation. For example, if you had the following sentence Well, for instance, I have and you wanted to remove the comma after well, you would place the cursor immediately before the f in for. To remove the comma, press the comma key. You would then have Well for instance, I have The punctuation toggle is smart enough to be able to work with punctuation within quotation marks. For example, in the sentence He said Hey, out the window. if you put the cursor on the o and pressed the comma key, the comma would be removed but the quotation mark would not be disturbed: He said Hey out the window.

ADDITIONAL PUNCTUATION OPTIONS

Placing punctuation at the end of sentences
The following commands will place the punctuation mark at the end of the sentence, replacing any other terminal punctuation mark: To place Period Question mark Double dash (- -) Command Alt+P Alt+Q Alt+D

Automatic punctuation
The following punctuation marks apply automatically to the previous word: comma, period, question mark, colon, semicolon, dash, hyphen, double-quote and single quote. The double and single quotes cycle between applying to the current word (begin quote) and the previous word (end quote).

Editing 177

Soft commas in automatic punctuation If an entry ends in a soft comma and the next thing you write is a paragraph entry, the automatic punctuation for that paragraph entry will erase the comma before applying to the paragraph. For example, you can write a single entry {,?}okay{,?} and it will work in all of the following situations, where none of the following commas was written by the reporter: Q. A. Q. A. Q. A. Q. State your name. Well, okay, it's John. Okay, and what's your last name? Do I have to tell you? Yes you do, okay? Okay. So what is it? To convert a word to its possessive form, place the cursor in the word and press Alt+A. This is a 3-way toggle. The first Alt+A will add s. If the word ends in s, the first Alt+A will make it into s. The second Alt+A will change it to s and the third will remove the apostrophe altogether. If the word is already in possessive form, this command will open a menu (see discussion below).

Apostrophes
Command Speed Key Hyperkey Menu Toolbar icon Flip apostrophe Alt+A ' F10/Edit/Miscellaneous /Flip apostrophe

Flip apostrophe (Alt+A) and contractions

Any common contraction can be toggled to its expanded form by putting the cursor on it and hitting Alt+A. For example: don't --> do not Note that the cursor will be left on the n in not when you do this. That's because any two-word phrase that can be contracted can be converted to its contraction by putting the cursor on the second or contracted word. For example: he will --> he'll (the cursor must be on the w in will). Because some contractions could be several forms of phrases (where'd he go yesterday where'd you like to go tomorrow she'd have to go she'd better go), when hitting Alt+A on a word ending in 'd you will get a menu containing ed/had/would/did so that you can select which Editing 178

one it should be. You can select the correct choice by highlighting and hitting Enter or clicking OK, or by typing the number of the choice. For words ending in s, hitting Alt+A will cycle from s to s, then s, then s again. Because s can either be a possessive or a contraction of is or has, the second time cycling through s will bring up an alternates menu similar to the illustration based on doctors. It will include xxxxs's in the cycle for items such as Jones's and witness's. The Alt+A contractions feature gives two options when executed on a word ending in ing. It will bring up a menu to change it to in or to add s as this feature does with most words. Unconventional spellings are included in the list of possible choices for some words. For example, if you try to contract should have you will now get a menu containing should've or shoulda.

Reverse ? and /
Most reporters need to type a question mark more often than they do the slash, so many prefer to switch the slash and question mark keys. That way they dont have to use the Shift and slash key to get a question mark. To set your keyboard to use the slash for the question mark (and Shift / to enter a slash) go to User settings | Edit tab | Editing, and mark the checkbox for Reverse ? and /.

Jump punctuation left

When this checkbox is marked, typed punctuation marks are inserted to the left of the word where the cursor is located. In other words, the cursor can be positioned anywhere within the word that follows the desired location of the mark. When you type a punctuation mark, Total Eclipse automatically places it to the left of the word.

EDITING PARAGRAPHS IN A DOCUMENT

You can easily change a paragraph from one format to another, or insert (start) a new paragraph. Notice that, along the left side of the document window, a lettered button appears adjacent to each paragraph. The letter on the button indicates the paragraphs format (e.g. Q=Question paragraph). Clicking a paragraph button opens the Paragraph Data dialog, which you can use to assign a different format to the paragraph or to change characteristics of that single paragraph. Note that if the top of the screen is the middle of a paragraph, the paragraph button in the margin will still appear to let you know what sort of paragraph it is (and to allow you to change it, if desired.)

Assigning a different format to a paragraph

1. Click the paragraph button to the left of the paragraph you want to change. An alternative method is to press Home twice (moves the cursor to the speaker label) then press F8. The Paragraph data dialog opens. Editing 179

2. From the list of formats in the Paragraph Data dialog, select the desired format. 3. Click OK to apply the format to the paragraph.

Click a paragraph button in the document window to open the Paragraph Data dialog.

Inserting paragraphs
When you insert a new paragraph, it is inserted at the location of the cursor in your text, and all text following it is assigned the new paragraph format. To insert a new paragraph
Command Speed Key Menu Toolbar icon Paragraph F8 F10/Format /Insert/modify paragraph

1. Position the cursor at the intended starting point of the new paragraph. 2. Press F8 and select a format for the new paragraph from the list of formats in the Paragraph Data dialog.

3. Click OK. A paragraph break is inserted, and the selected format is applied to the text between the cursor position and the end of the paragraph.

To insert or change paragraph type If you do not hit Home twice, then when you hit F8 you get a simplified dialog that lists the paragraphs and allows you to choose one. Editing 180

You can escape from this dialog by clicking Cancel. Also, if you mark a block of paragraphs first, then when you select a paragraph in this dialog ALL of the paragraphs in the marked block will be changed to match the paragraph type selected.

To insert a Question paragraph

Command Speed key Menu Toolbar icon Insert Question paragraph F3 F10/Format/Question

This command formats the text from the cursor to the end of the paragraph as a new question paragraph.

To insert an Answer paragraph

Command Speed key Menu Toolbar icon Insert Answer paragraph F4 F10/Format/Answer

This command formats the text from the cursor to the end of the paragraph as a new answer paragraph.

To insert a continuation paragraph Position the cursor at the intended starting point of the new paragraph and press Ctrl+P.
Command Speed key Menu Toolbar icon New paragraph Ctrl+P F10/Format/New paragraph

A continuation format can be designated for any paragraph format. In User Settings | Paragraphs tab, under Paragraph format settings, the Advanced button includes a drop-down list of paragraph formats. Select one to designate it as the continuation paragraph for the selected Paragraph type.

For example, for a Question paragraph, the default continuation paragraph is a question Paragraph. Therefore a new paragraph within a Question will have the question Paragraph format.

Inserting a new speaker paragraph

You can simultaneously insert a new speaker paragraph and select the speaker label. 1. Position the cursor at the point in the text where you want to begin the speaker paragraph. 2. Press F2. The speaker list appears. 3. If the speaker label you want is on the list, press the number adjacent to that speaker. (You can also select the label with your mouse and then click OK.) 4. If the speaker is not on the list, type the speakers label in the editing field at the bottom of the list (by default the editing field is active, so you can just start typing without first moving the cursor there). Press Enter after typing the speaker label. The new speaker label will now be in the list and the paragraph will use that label. Editing 181

5. The new speaker paragraph, with the selected label, is inserted in the document.

Combining two paragraphs

Command Speed key Menu Toolbar icon Join paragraph Ctrl+J F10/Edit/Miscellaneous/ Join paragraph

Use the Join paragraph command (Ctrl+J) to combine two paragraphs. This command attaches the paragraph in which the cursor is located to the paragraph immediately preceding it. The joined paragraph takes the formatting of the first paragraph, including the speaker label. (If the first paragraph is an answer and the second is a question, the joined paragraph will be an answer.)

You can also join paragraphs using the Backspace key. Place the cursor at the beginning of a paragraph, and the first time you hit backspace it will place the cursor on the paragraph label; the second time it will join the paragraphs.

AUTOMAGIC SUGGESTIONS WHILE EDITING

When you are editing a document, there are innumerable possibilities for what you might want to do at any given moment. AutoMagic suggests 10 of the most likely, so you can just hit a number (or click the option) to select that action, and go on. If your cursor is on a paragraph label, the choices include joining paragraphs, or changing the type.

If the cursor is at the end of a paragraph, the choices include different forms of punctuation:

Editing 182

If your cursor is on a conflict, it will list the conflict choices, as well as giving you the option to delete the conflict, or global the word.

Here are some samples showing different types of edits that would be suggested depending on the cursor position. In these examples, if the cursor is resting on the text on the left, the text on the right will be suggested. theretical --> theoretical or heretical is she --> she is they're --> they are he is --> he's forming --> form are throw SKOPic --> arthroscopic (4) they they --> they or they -- they to --> do three car --> three-car look over --> look-over did yes --> did, yes MR. SMITH (speaker 1) --> MR. JONES (speaker 2) Editing 183

Q --> Q (By Mr. Smith) abiding --> a bid in (undoing a Translation Magic error) correct? --> correct. winchester --> Winchester JOHN --> J-O-H-N varnish --> SRAR TPHEURB good-night --> goodnight chair man --> chairman wherein --> where in there, is --> there is yes, he --> yes. He 7 --> seven twenty three --> $23 one fifteen --> 1:15 Note that the samples here containing numbers are only a fraction of the AutoMagic edits that take advantage of the number conversion capabilities.

FINDING & REPLACING

You can use Total Eclipses Find command to find a specific occurrence of a string of text, or you can find text and automatically replace it with a different text string. (A string is simply a continuous group of text or characters and can include a single letter, a word, or multiple words.)
Command Menu Speed Key Hyperkey Toolbar icon Find F10/Move/Find F5 F

To use the Find command, use the shortcut F5, which opens the Find/replace dialog.

In the Find text dialog box enter the text you want to find. To replace the found text with new text, enter the replacement text in the Replace field. If you do not want to replace the found text, leave the Replace field blank. Note that if you type a literal character command (the _ character), it will consider that as a request to replace the text with, literally, nothing. If, however, you want to include a literal underscore in your replacement, put a double-underscore in your replace string. For example, you could search for joe green at url.com and replace it with [email protected] to get [email protected]. Editing 184

Click OK to start the search. The search begins at the current cursor position, progressing forward until the end of the document is reached. The search does not return to the top of the document and start over. To move backward through the document from the current cursor position, mark the Reverse checkbox. If the item is not found, you will get a not found message, and the cursor returns to the last edited spot. The find dialog offers a choice, Cursor left, Cursor mark, or Cursor right, so when the item is found (and the Reverse checkbox is blank) your cursor will land at the beginning of the found text, the end of the found text, or will block mark the found text. Your selection will be remembered permanently. The Regex checkbox in the lower-right hand corner allows the system to do the search and replace using regular expressions, including backreferences in the replace string. Note that this will only work when doing text searches (not steno) and will only work for forward searches (not reverse.) For details on Regular Expressions, see the Reference Guide, page 480 You can also use the Find Steno.. button to open the Steno emulator, and find specific steno strokes. Find Steno.. will also use the option for Cursor left, Cursor mark, or Cursor right when it finds the steno in question. While in the Find/replace dialog, you can hit F2 to open the Speaker list and pick a speaker name. After selecting the speaker name, you can hit Enter to select automatically the Paragraph option and the speaker paragraph type. When the Find/replace function has finished, it will display a message box showing how many items were replaced The message displaying the total number of replacements does allow you to disable the message in the future if you don't want it coming up. After completing the Find/replace function, the cursor will return to its original position where the command was originally executed. You can use the Locate next (Ctrl+L) or Locate previous )Ctrl+Shift+L) features to find the next or previous instances of the text or steno for which you are searching. You can use the asterisk (*)wildcardto represent unspecified continuous characters. Wildcards are handy when you arent sure of the spelling of what youre looking for, or you want to find plural and singular forms of a word, or the base form of verbs. For example, entering tire* would find tire as well as tires and tiresome. Note that you CANNOT use the * character to represent any number of any characters. You CANNOT, for example, search for b*t and find both bat and boat. The asterisk can represent any number of unspecified, continuous characters only at the beginning and/or end of the text string. The question mark can be used in the find string to represent one character. For example, a search for b?t would find bit and bat but would NOT find boat. You could search for b??t and find boat or blot. You can search for the ? character by putting an underscore before it: _? (Note: The underscore is used for literal character searches.) If you search for text and you specify a lockspace, it must match exactly and will not find a result containing a space in its place. However, if you search for a phrase such as "Mr. Jones," you will find the phrase even if there is a lockspace in place of the space, such as "Mr.~Jones."

Editing 185

Upper and lower case searches

You can limit your searches by case by marking the Case sensitive checkbox. When that checkbox is marked, Total Eclipse will find only those occurrences that match the case of what you entered in the Find text field. If you type a capital letter in the Find text field, the Case sensitive checkbox is automatically marked.

Searching for digits

If you include a # in the find command in a text document, it will represent any digit. For example, $# would find $5 or $947, but $## would only find $947 because it is looking for at least two digits. You can search for the # character by putting an underscore before it: _#

Searching within words

You can limit your search to finding the text string in specific parts of a word. Select Anywhere if it doesnt matter where in the word the string is found. For example, with Anywhere selected, a search for act would find on retroactive as well as actor and react. Beginning - To limit the search to only the beginning of a word, select at Beginning. If you use a wildcard (*) at the end of a search string, at Beginning is automatically marked. End - To limit the search to only the end of a word, select at End. If you use a wildcard (*) at the beginning of a search string, at End is automatically selected. When using at End, a search for is would find this and is, but not list. Whole Word - To find the text string only when it is a whole word (to find the text string as you entered it), select Whole Word. A Whole Word search for cat would find only cat and not cats.

Searching within a specified paragraph format

You can limit a text search to a specific paragraph format by selecting Paragraph in the Find/replace dialog. Paragraph has a drop-down list of the paragraph types found in your document. Select the format to which you want to limit your search. If you leave the text field blank, the cursor stops on the next occurrence of that paragraph type.

Searching within a specified print command

You can limit a text search to a specific print command by selecting Print command in the Find/replace dialog. When this button is selected, the field below it has a drop-down list of print commands. The search will be limited to the print command you select from the list.

Searching within a paragraph label

You can search and replace all or part of a paragraph label such as a speaker name, as long as you specify a search for a paragraph type. For example, if you search for MR. SMITH and replace it with MR. SMYTHE and you also check Paragraph: and select Speaker as the paragraph type, it will stop on any paragraph label that matches MR. SMITH and you will be given an opportunity to decide if you want to replace it, using the same yes/no/all/cancel options you have for replacing text in the body of the paragraph. Editing 186

Searching for steno within macros and deleted strokes

Macro strokes are invisible in the document, though you can see them in the steno window. When doing a steno search, the system will attempt to find the strokes in the visible portion, but if that fails, it will make a second pass to look for invisible strokes. Note that this will find deleted strokes and macros strokes, both of which are invisible. Also note that the cursor cannot land on these strokes, so the cursor will simply get as close as it can if it finds a match.

Repeating searches
Command Menu Speed key Toolbar icon Find next F10/Move/Locate next Ctrl+L

Use the Locate Next and Locate Previous commands to repeat a search. Locate Next (Ctrl+L) automatically repeats the last search, searching from the current cursor position forward through the document, until the text string is found or the end of the document is reached. Locate Previous (Ctrl+Shift+L) automatically repeats the last search, searching from the current cursor position backward through the document, until the text string is found or the beginning of the document is reached.

Command Menu Speed key Toolbar icon

Find previous F10/Move/Locate previous Ctrl+Shift+L

INSERTING AND CHANGING SPEAKER LABELS

You can insert and change a speaker label using Total Eclipses speaker list. When you translate and edit a job, Total Eclipse automatically adds any translated or globaled speaker definitions to the speaker list. For example, if you have a dictionary entry for {S:ATTORNEY1} that you use in a job, the speaker list for that document will automatically include ATTORNEY1. You can then edit the ATTORNEY1 entry on the speaker list to reflect the attorneys actual name. You can also identify the speaker in a generic speaker paragraph by adding names to the speaker list.

Speaker label for existing speaker paragraph

For paragraphs that are already formatted as speaker paragraphs, 1. Position the text cursor on the first line of the speaker paragraph. 2. Press Home twice to move to the speaker label. 3. Press F2, or double-click on the speaker label, to open the Speaker list. The list will open with the speaker name that the cursor is on highlighted. 4. If the speaker label you want is on the list, press the number adjacent to that speaker, and hit Enter or OK. When the speaker list contains more than twelve items, a scroll bar appears and you can use the arrow keys or the Page Up and Page Down keys to find items.

Editing 187

5. If the speaker is not on the list, type the speakers label in the prompt box, and the label will be added at the bottom of the list. Hit Enter or OK.

6. The Speaker list closes and the selected speaker label appears in the paragraph.

Changing a speaker label throughout a document

You can change all occurrences of a speaker label by editing the label in the speaker list. Note that the following method also changes by-lines that use the selected label. 1. Position the text cursor on the first line of a speaker paragraph that contains the label you want to change. 2. Press Home twice to move to the speaker label. 3. Press F2 or double-click to open the speaker list. 4. Select the label you want to change (click on it, or use the arrow keys to highlight). 5. Click the Change button, or press Enter. 6. The Speaker data dialog opens, with the Current Speaker label highlighted.. 7. Type the new label and hit Enter or OK. 8. Youll receive a prompt asking you to if you want to make the change throughout the document or just from this point forward. Click All, Forward or Cancel. If you choose All, the new label appears in place of the previous label on the speaker list. If you choose from the cursor position Forward, it will create a text global that will apply forward in the file, and it will keep both speakers on the list. 9. Click OK to close the speaker list. The new speaker label replaces the previous label throughout the document (including by-lines). Editing 188

Note: Another way to change the Speaker label from the current position forward (or backward), see Search and Replace, page 186.

Quoted text
In the Format menu you will find two options, Quote and Unquote, which you can use to change paragraphs to their quoted or unquoted equivalent. It finds the format you define under the paragraph name in the Quoted text paragraph map in User settings | Programming. (See page 468 for details.) It can also add a symbol sequence, such as ", to the beginning of speaker names when they are quoted and automatically remove it when they're unquoted. If you block mark several paragraphs, all of the paragraphs will be affected. Otherwise, it will just affect the paragraph that the cursor is on.

CHANGING NUMBER FORMATS

Command Speed Key Menu Toolbar icon Numbers Ctrl+Shift+3 F10/Edit/Miscellaneous/ Numbers

To format a series of numbers quickly, even when the numbers are written out, use the Numbers command (Ctrl+Shift+3). You can also use this command to convert a number from one format to another (e.g. Arabic numerals to Roman numerals).

To use the command, select the numbers you want to edit, then press Ctrl+Shift+3 to open the Number conversion dialog. If you haven't marked a block, the system will automatically look for any string of digits or number-related words on either side of the cursor and will mark them all.

The selected text appears in the Input area at the top of the dialog (in the example above one is the selected text and appears next to Input). The Output area shows how this selection will appear using the option chosen in the dialog. In the example above, Ordinal is selected as is Numerals so the output is 1st. When selecting Roman numerals you can also select lowercase (i, ii, iv, etc.) by selecting marking the checkbox that follows Roman and precedes i. If you leave the checkbox unmarked, the Roman numerals will be uppercase (I, II, IV, etc.). You can also select one of ten predefined templates, or select the user Template option, which activates a drop-down list of templates. Editing 189

You can preview the effect of the formatting options in the Output field at the top of the dialog; it reflects the options as you select them. When you have the number format you want, press Enter or click OK to select it and insert the converted number into the transcript.

AUTOREPLACEMENTS
An autoreplacement is a text string that is automatically substituted for another text string. For example, an autoreplacement could change the typographical error hte to the. They can also be used to create shortcuts for typing long words or titles that youre likely to encounter often. For example, you can set DOJ to be replaced automatically with Department of Justice; then when you need to have Department of Justice in your text, all you need to type is DOJ. Autoreplacements are stored in your User Settings and are applied in text documents and in the edit boxes of many dialogs, including the Global and Add Dictionary Entry dialogs.

Creating autoreplacements
1. Press Alt+U to open your User Settings. 2. Select the Programming tab. 3. Select Autoreplacements from the list. 4. Press the Modify button or double-click Autoreplacements to open the Autoreplacements list. 5. Press Enter to create an empty line, place your cursor on the empty line, and then type the autoreplacement. 6. You can also click the Add button to open a Text substitution window that has fields for original and replacement text. Just enter the text in each field and click OK to add the entry to the list. 7. You can also select an existing entry and press the Modify button to open the Text substitution window where changes can be made to either the original or the replacement text.

The format for an autoreplacement is

typed text=autoreplacement

where typed text refers to the text you would type (either a misspelling or a shortened version, such as DOJ) and autoreplacement refers to what you want to replace the typed text. Typing any non-letter key will trigger the autoreplacement. The next time you access the list, your entry will be placed in alphabetical order, with upper case entries listed first. As with the other lists on the Programming tab, you can resize and zoom the window to view the list; Editing 190

and you can search for text within the list using F5 or the Find button, and Ctrl+L to move to the next instance. Create autoreplacement allows you to add an entry to your autoreplacements list. When you come across a word for which you want to create an autoreplacement, type the replacement word after that item, then press Alt+7. Total Eclipse creates the autoreplacement and deletes the original word.

CHECKING SPELLING
Command Speed Key Menu Toolbar Icon Spell check Shift+Alt+S F10/Production Check spelling

The spellchecker (Shift+Alt+S) scans a document for spelling and punctuation errors, including misspelled words, double words, double paragraph labels, and improper punctuation. It starts from the cursor position and moves forward until it finds a word or punctuation that may be in error or reaches the end of the document. Once the spelling is resolved, the checker scans to the next questionable word or mark. The process continues until the end of the document is reached, or the checker is closed.

When you begin the spellchecker, the Spell check controls window will open in the upper left corner, very near the toolbar (you might not notice it right away). The controls let you pause and also change the pace of the spell checker. ( Total Eclipse will remember the last speed you set and use it the next time you check spelling. You can, of course, change it again.) When you are spell checking, the Spell check window will jump around between searches as it moves out of the way, so you can see the next misspelled word. If you prefer, you can anchor the window by clicking the anchor icon in the upper right-hand corner, and the window will stay where you place it. When the checker finds a potential problem, the Spelling alternatives dialog opens. The problem word or punctuation is displayed in the Original field near the top of the dialog. If the entry is correct, you can press Enter if you want to skip any other occurrences of the word (Ignore All is the default button). To skip this occurrence, but stop at future ones, click the Ignore button. If the word is misspelled, you can change it by typing the correction in the field that has the misspelled word. Once you start typing the Change button becomes active, so you can press Enter after typing. If you want all occurrences of the misspelled word to be changed, click the Change All button instead of pressing Enter.

Editing 191

Alternatively, you can select a correction from the Change to: list. When an item in this list is selected, it appears in the Original field. To accept the change, either press Enter or click the Change or Change All button. You can also select from among the first nine choices by hitting the number key for that choice. Many words not recognized by the spelling checker are names, special technical terms, etc., so AutoMagic will offer to Google a misspelled word as a low-priority option. You can add words by using the Add button in the spelling dialog, and you delete words from the Spelling checker by pressing the Delete button. To see a definition, click the Definition button when the spellchecker is on the word. If a definition for the word is found, it will be displayed. If the dictionary does not have a definition for the word, the next closest word will appear in the definition window. Click OK to return to spell checking.

If a misspelled word is the result of an incorrect dictionary entry, use the Global button to open a globaling window and redefine the steno outline for the word. Once the global is completed, the spellchecker returns. When you type a corrected spelling, the spellchecker will check it before going on. If the word you typed is not in the dictionary, the spellchecker will present it as a misspelled word. If you want the word to stay as is, click the Ignore button. You can click Ignore at any time to leave the questioned word as it is, and scan to the next problem. If you use the Ignore all button, it places the word in an ignored words list, and the next time you run the spellchecker on the document it will not stop on the word. Note that the Ignore all button is disabled for double words, punctuation or paragraphing errors. The words in the ignored words list will stay ignored indefinitely. To clear the list, go to User Settings | Edit tab, Spell Options and click on Purge ignored words. If the spell checker finds a double paragraph error, hitting Delete will join the paragraphs. Alternately, you can choose Join paragraphs from the list of options in the Change to: window. Editing 192

If the Spell checker encounters a punctuation error, the Incorrect punctuation dialog opens, with a list of replacement options. Any time you come across a punctuation error that is definitely not an error, tell the software to Add it and it will never stop on that error again. Similarly, acceptable double words, such as had had can be added to spelling checker. When you add a double word or punctuation string to the spelling checker, it is remembered permanently in your user settings. The User settings | Programming tab | Spelling exceptions lists all punctuation strings and all permissible double words (the double words will appear in all caps, such as THAT.) NOTE: If you edit these entries, be careful about being deliberate about spaces. For example, there might be an entry for dash that would have [space]--[space][space] and those spaces will appear in the editor as you move the cursor around, but they won't be immediately apparent just looking at the list. A double-paragraph error will offer a Join paragraphs option which will join the current paragraph with the previous one, which is the same thing that the Delete button does. If the spell checker encounters a paragraph that contains no text, and is not a paragraph that behaves as a Fixed line, and is not the paragraph type used as the Speaker/Question BY line it will create an Empty paragraph error and you will have the option of changing the paragraph type or deleting/joining the paragraph. Literal case characters are entirely ignored by the spelling checker.

Checking a single word

To check the spelling of a single word, 1. Position your cursor immediately before the first letter of the word.
Command Speed Key Menu Toolbar Icon Check word Alt+S F10/Edit/Miscellaneous /Check word

2. Press Alt+S 3. If the word is spelled correctly, it will look as if nothing happened; however, the word followed by is correct will be displayed in left corner of the status bar.

To see alternate words (words similar to the correctly spelled word) or get a definition, press Alt+S again. The Spelling alternates dialog will open as described above. Click the Definition button to bring up the View definition dialog. Editing 193

This dialog shows your original word at the top in an editable box. It then shows the closest match in a list on the left side of the dialog, along with a definition for the closest match. If it does not find an exact match, the definition you are looking for may appear in the list. You can use the mouse or arrow keys to select a different definition. You can also type a whole new word in the box at the top of the window and the definition for the word will be found as you type.

Watchwords list
The Watchwords list allows you to specify a particular set of words that you know will be problematic in the current job. The spelling checker will ALWAYS stop when it hits one of these watchwords so that you can review it to make sure it's really the word you meant. Once it's on the watch list, the spell checker will always stop on it, and will not ignore it, or add it to the dictionary. Also, once you do the spell check at least once, those words will be underlined in red on the display.
Command Speed Key Menu Toolbar icon Job variables Shift+Alt+V F10/Tools /Job variables

The way you add watchwords to the current document is to go into Tools | Job variables and add WATCH=word,word,word, etc. For example, if you had a job containing both a Thom and a Tom, you might want to watch those, and you would add the following to your job variables: WATCH=Tom,Thom

Checking a marked block of words

Marking a series of words and using Check word will tell you if the composite is valid. For example, if you marked down trodden as a block and hit Alt+S it will tell you on the status bar that downtrodden is correct. If it is not correct, nothing will happen. It saves having to delete the space, check the word and add the space again.

Adding words to the spellcheck dictionary

If the spellchecker considers a word misspelled and you know that it isnt (for example, names and other proper nouns might not be in the spellcheckers dictionary, so they will be considered misspelled), click either the Ignore button, to skip over this instance of the word, or the Ignore all button to skip over remaining instances in the document. To have the spellchecker permanently skip a word, add the word to the dictionary. To do so, when the word is in the Original field, click the Add button. If you add a lower-case word when an upper-case version is already in the dictionary, it will replace the upper-case version, and both forms of the word will be seen as spelled correctly.

Selecting dictionaries to use for spell checking

The main spelling dictionary is English-Large.esp. To select a different main dictionary, go to User settings | Edit tab, Spell options, click on the Spellings button and select the dictionary you prefer.

Editing 194

Spellcheck Options
User settings | Edit | Spell options opens the Spelling checker options dialog, where you can turn on or off several different categories of error checking including: 1 Misspelled words 2 Double-words 3 Punctuation 4 Double Q 5 Double A 6 Double Speaker 7 Check non-transcribed text The << button will import an ASCII file word list into your spelling dictionary. The Purge ignored words button will delete the words in your ignored words list. If Include Job dictionaries is checked, any entry that appears in a job dictionary will be considered a correctly-spelled word. This saves you having to manually confirm every item in your job dictionaries when you spell check the transcript. Note that if you have a job dictionary with over 1000 entries, Eclipse will ask you if you really want to use that dictionary in your spell check, as it may take a long time to add the entries into the spell checker. Select Read along with spell check if you prefer to proofread a document as the spellchecker runs. In this mode, the cursor moves from word to word as spelling is checked. Hitting the spell-check hotkey (Shift+Alt+S) while in read-along mode will pause the spelling checker without having to use the mouse. Turn on Display errors while editing to put a red underscore under all misspelled words. The Check non-transcribed text option is off by default. If you turn it on, the system will check all spelling, punctuation and double word errors everywhere in the document, even in fixed lines, caption box paragraphs, print commands such as comment lines/headers/footers, and other text in the document that is typically not created by transcribing what a person actually said. Normally, the system skips punctuation checking on fixed lines (since the punctuation on form pages is stylistic and not grammatical) and on print commands (since they normally contain little to no substantive text).

LIST ERRORS
Command Speed Key Menu Toolbar Icon List errors Ctrl+Shift+E F10/Production/List errors

List errors, (Ctrl+Shift+E) checks for and displays all types of errors and has appropriate responses for each. The misspellings will be alphabetized. If there are multiples of the same error they will be listed as badword, badword[0002], badword[0003], etc. As you move through them, the editing window will jump to Editing 195

and highlight the error. After reading it in context, you have several buttons that will allow you to perform the following operations:

Ignore all instances of the current word (all of the matching lines in the list will be deleted) Change the one the cursor is on (the current line in the list will be deleted) Change all instances to something else (all of the matching lines in the list will be deleted) Add the word to the spelling dictionary (all of the matching lines in the list will be deleted) Delete the word from the transcript Suggest alternates. From here you can do a change or a change all, as well. Get a Definition (some obscure words may be in the larger definitions dictionary but not in the spelling dictionary.) Global the word (all of the matching lines in the list will be deleted)

List errors will check for invalid punctuation, double Q, double A, double speaker, and double word in addition to spelling errors. In order to have these additional errors appear at the bottom of the alphabetically sorted list, the letters zz will appear before each of them. For each of these errors, items such as the Change or Suggest buttons may perform different tasks. For example, if you hit Change for a double Q, you will be given an opportunity to change the paragraph type rather than a box to type in the new text. For paragraph errors, the Delete button has the same effect as the Join paragraphs command. Also, note that the Add function has the same effect for punctuation and double words as it does in the regular spell check.

PROOFREADING ON AN EBOOK READER

If you have a Kindle or other eBook reader that uses the MOBI file format, you can use it to proofread your documents. To set up Eclipse, plug in your e-book reader and find the folder where it stores documents using Windows explorer. then in User settings | Programming | File locations, add EBOOK=etc. to point to that path. (For details on File Locations, see the Reference Guide section of this manual, page 472.) For example, if your Kindle is I:\documents, you will add the following: EBOOK=I:\documents Then, when you want to proofread documents, go to Tools | Convert | To another system | Text files | e-book proofreading. Select the files and hit Next. Editing 196

Disconnect your e-book reader and start proofreading. On a Kindle, you can move the cursor through the document and mark text and/or start typing on the keyboard to make a note to yourself. When finished proofreading, reconnect the reader and use Tools | Convert | From another system |Text files | e-book proofreading. Select the .mbp files for the jobs that you've proofread and hit Next. Having done that, when you re-open the documents in Eclipse you'll find that each mark has turned to Scopist text color, which you can scan to using the Scan function. Also, anywhere you wrote a note, you'll have the text color change and the note will appear at the top of the paragraph inside a comment line. IMPORTANT: Once you have done the file | to | e-book, don't make any changes in the document in Eclipse before you re-import the marks and notes or they might not end up in the right places.

INCORRECT STROKE BOUNDARIES

If a stroke has been incorrectly grouped and translated as part of a multiCommand Reverse tran stroke outline (i.e., Speed Key Ctrl+F7 incorrect stroke Hyperkey Shift+U boundaries), you F10/Edit/Miscellaneous/ must revert the Menu Reverse tran translation to steno before performing a Toolbar Icon global. For example, the steno A/TABG/PHOERT might be translated attack meter instead of a tachometer. To convert a word to its original steno, place the cursor on the incorrect word and press Ctrl+F7. After reversing the incorrect translation, the untranslated strokes can be globaled.

DOCUMENT STATISTICS
You can also access information about your document through the Tools menu | Statistics.. option, which lists the number of pages, paragraphs, lines, words, and folios in your document. The Time spent editing feature shows the total amount of time you have spent editing the job, down to the second. Note that this covers the entire time the job has been open, so it will count time spent writing the job in realtime or time spent on a coffee break if you leave the job open on your screen.

DELIVERING YOUR TRANSCRIPT

In addition to printing, which is covered in detail below, you have several options for delivering your transcript to your customers. They include creating an ASCII file, an HTML index, a multi-page document, a printed concordance index and a Bridge file.

Editing 197

Creating an ASCII file

To create an ASCII file, select Output to ASCII (Shift+Alt+O). From the Create ASCII Output to ASCII dialog, you can use the Style presets to select among various ASCII Shift+Alt+O styles (including Lawbridge, Caseview, Livenote, Summation, F10/Production/ Menu Amicus, DiscoveryZX, CatLinks, Basis, Microtext). 1The ASCII Output to ASCII dialog also contains volume number and page range selectors. The Create ASCII dialog contains a button to open the Document tab in Toolbar Icon User Settings, so you can choose formatting options without exiting the function.
Command Speed Key

To create a style for a new system click the Add button, give the style a new name, and mark the checkboxes for style elements you want included. You can force the ASCII into all caps, independent of the print or display settings. Note, however, that if you have told the document to PRINT in all caps, this setting will do nothing. You can choose to force a particular left margin, and you can choose to force page numbers on all pages or all lines. If you force a left margin on your ASCII document, the page will move as much as the left margin is being moved; so if you force a left margin on your ASCII of 5 in a document format that normally has a left margin of 15 spaces, the page will move to the left 10 spaces. The line numbers can be forced on, forced off, or left as originally represented in the file. If you omit the header from your ASCII, it will start immediately with line one no matter how large your top margin. Use the Browse.. button to choose where to save copies of the file. Use the Output button to designate a different filename or location for the ASCII. If you change your output to a different folder, all ASCII files will be placed in that folder from then on. You won't actually see the folder in the dialog unless you press the Output button. If you do not specify an ASCII folder, it will go into the jobs folder. HTML index If you turn on the HTML Index checkbox, it will create not only an ASCII file but will create three HTML files with .htm extensions:

Editing 198

JobName.htm JobName_B.htm (The body of the transcript) JobName_I.htm (The Index) You can then deliver these files to the attorney in addition (or as an alternative) to the JobName.txt ASCII file. If you have the Make ASCII diskettes function turned on, it will copy these .htm files as well as the .txt file to the diskette. Be aware that these files are more than five times as large as the ASCII because of all of the hyperlinks and indexes. If you double-click on the JobName.htm file it will open up automatically in your default web browser, opening the transcript in one frame and a full concordance index (including all words in the file, but not numbers) in another.

The index contains volume and page numbers, but not line numbers. (If you create a concordance index where there are multiple volume numbers detected in the material, the index will contain volume numbers.) The format will be Volume:page/line. Example: Mr. Smith [2] 1:3/14 2:1/8. This means Mr. Smith appeared twice; the first time, it was in volume 1, page 3, line 14; the second time, it was in volume 2, page 1, line 8. You can click on any of the index locations and it will automatically jump to that point in the transcript. You can put hyperlinks into your document to refer to other documents. In order to do this, you must insert an HTML tag, such as
<a href="docname.htm">This is a link to the DocName job</a>

into your document. The hyperlink must be on a single line, such as a Style paragraph or a fixed line with a very large right margin. If you want it to appear in its own window, use
<a href="docname.htm" target="blank_">view DocName</a>

If you want to jump to a particular page and line number, use Editing 199

<a href="docname.htm#P321L23">go to DocName page 321, line 23</a>

Note that you can reference the current document and its page and line numbers internally, if you wish to create a special automatic index that would generate Hyperlinks that could be clicked on to jump to the appropriate pages. Creating RTF/CRE, RTF, Raw Text and Bridge files To create an RTF/CRE file (Rich Text Format with Court Reporter Extensions), use the File menu | Export. Type a name for the file in the File name field. If necessary, use the navigation controls in the file dialog window to select a location for the file, and then click Open. The system will remember the path you last used to export, and will go there the next time you export a file. If the filename already exists, the RTF conversion wizard asks if you wish to overwrite or append. Note that if you select the cancel option, it will cancel the conversion entirely. A paragraph name with an underscore will omit everything after it when exporting to RTF. Much like the feature for associating WAV files and CIC output files, if you create paragraph names with an underscore, the RTF file will only use everything up to but not including the underscore character. For example, you could have a paragraph called Body and another paragraph called Body_Speaker defined to behave as a Colloquy. When exporting to RTF (and then importing to Word, for example) both types of paragraphs will register as Body paragraphs. An all caps paragraph converts to all caps in RTF, simply changing the text to all caps. RTF export will export in all caps if printing is set to all caps. It will also pay attention to the literal case on/off commands when exporting. The literal case on/off hidden commands help make the all caps mode practical for CART users and captioners providing output files. It includes relative timecodes with the rtf file. Raw Text export will follow the same rules as rtf export, and will export in all caps if printing is set to all caps, and will respond to literal case on/off commands. Bridge export can be used to create audio and/or video CDs for attorneys using Bridge format. This will create a .brg file that Bridge can load directly. You can copy this file to a disk along with a copy of Bridge and a WAV audio or AVI audio/video file and give the disk to an attorney for research and/or presentation. This function will use whatever timecode type you have selected under User settings | Document | Timecodes setup, so you can create Bridge files that synchronize with WAV files without having to set timecode offsets. Also, a Bridge file created with relative timecodes will synchronize with a WAV file even if the recording was paused in the middle because the relative timecodes pause in the same place. Note: Because Bridge does not support dual timecodes, a Bridge file created with relative timecodes will not contain the absolute timecodes, so it will not be possible for the attorney to know what time of day something happened.

Editing 200

PRINTING
Command Speed Key Menu Toolbar Icon Print Alt+O F10/File/Print

You can print any of your Total Eclipse files: dictionaries, transcripts, notes. To print any of these files, open the file and make it the active window. Then give the print command Alt+O. This opens a Print dialog.

Dictionaries
You can print dictionary entries using the File | Print menu, or right-click in the dictionary and choose Print. This opens the dictionary Print dialog. You can search your dictionary using specific criteria and then print only those entries that fit your criteria. For details, see page 103.

Note files
See page 123 for details specific to printing note files.

Print Options
A drop-down list allows you to choose among full-sized, full-sized with index, multi-page, multi-page with index (with which you can print a full-sized transcript with an index attached in the same printout), and index only. Next to that selector is an Options.. button which brings up the Multi-page printout options dialog.

Transcripts
When you are in a transcript file, the Print command opens the Print dialog.

Output Options The Setup.. button allows you to specify the printer, and adjust the printer settings. For example, you would change to Landscape if you were going to choose a 2-page layout.

Editing 201

A drop-down list allows you to choose among Full sized, Full sized with index, Multi-page, Multi-page with index (which allows you to print a full-sized transcript with an index attached in the same printout), and Index only.

Next to that selector is an Options.. button which brings up the Multi-page printout options dialog. See below, page 204 for details on the Multi-page printout options. You can select a range of pages, specific volumes, or excerpts (if one or more excerpts have been defined). If you specify an invalid volume, page number range, or excerpt, an error message will appear telling you that the requested portion of the document was not found (Printing procedures could not find the portion of the document that was requested.). When you get this message, click OK and specify the correct options. Print to file When you have selected the Print to file option, clicking OK in the Print dialog opens a Print to File dialog box, where you will enter the name of the printer file (filename.prn) you wish to create. Draft You can print transcripts as Draft output, which does not print footers or the laser box. It will, however, print your comment lines, making it easy to double-check scopist/reporter notes during proofreading. To print a draft, mark the Draft checkbox in the Print dialog. When printing a draft, you will get a large watermark (DRAFT) across the page. You can control the watermark parameters to get the effect you want by clicking the Watermark settings button and changing the following options: Text - What text goes on the page, such as DRAFT or Rough copy or DO NOT DUPLICATE. Darkness percentage - How dark the watermark is, from 0 (none) to 100 (black). When set to zero, the watermark will not be printed. Font - The font name. Notice that you must type the font name. Width - The font width. Height - The font height. Editing 202

Boldness - The boldness (thickness) of the text. Note that this is different from the darkness. It makes thicker letters, not darker ones. Angle - The angle that the watermark is printed. 0 is horizontal, 90 is vertical, 180 is upsidedown. You can type any value you like. X Position - The horizontal position where the watermarks start printing Y Position - The vertical position where the watermarks start printing X offset - How far horizontally each copy of the watermark moves Y offset - How far vertically each copy of the watermark moves Repetitions - How many copies of the watermark to put on each page Printing a range You have several options for printing a selection of the document. If you want to print everything, enter all (the default) in the page and volume fields. You can also print just the page containing the cursor using the Current button. You can enter a range of pages, using a variety of formats the program correctly interprets most entries. For example, the entry 811, 15 and the entry 8 through 11 and 15 both instruct the printer to print all the pages 8, 9, 10, 11,and 15. The entries all, odd, even, end, and * are also interpreted in this field. For example, the entry 10 to 20 odd prints only the odd pages in the range. All, even prints all the even-numbered pages in the document. 10-*, and 10-end both print all the pages from 10 to the end of the document. Printing excerpts If you have set excerpt marks in your document, you can mark the Excerpts checkbox to print only the excerpts. To set excerpts, enter the Begin Excerpt and End Excerpt print commands.
Command Speed Key Menu Toolbar Icon Print command Alt+N F10/Edit/Insert/New Print Command

1. Position the cursor in the paragraph where you want to begin the excerpt. 2. Press Alt+N to get the Insert Print Command dialog. 3. Press B to jump to Begin excerpt. 4. Press Tab to jump to the Value field in the Additional info area.

5. Type the number of the page you want to assign as the beginning of the excerpt. 6. Press Enter. A Begin excerpt print command is inserted above the paragraph in which the cursor is located. 7. Move the cursor to the paragraph immediately following the end of the selection you want to excerpt. 8. Press Alt+N.

Editing 203

9. Press E to jump to End excerpt. 10. Press Enter. An End excerpt print command is inserted above the paragraph in which the cursor is located. Printing volumes If you have more than one volume in your document, you can choose which volume(s) to print in the Print (Alt+O) dialog box. To begin a new volume number in a document, insert a New Volume number print command. 1. Position the cursor in the paragraph where you want to begin the new volume number. 2. Press Alt+N to get the New Print Command dialog. 3. Press N three times to select the New volume number print command. 4. Press Tab to jump to the Value field. 5. Type the number you want to assign to the new volume. 6. Press Enter. A New volume number print command is inserted above the paragraph in which the cursor is currently located. Timecodesprinting or not printing When printing a transcript you have the option of including timecodes. By default, timecodes are printed (the Timecodes checkbox is marked in the Print dialog). To exclude the timecodes from your printout, remove the mark from the Timecodes checkbox. Note that you must first have timecodes set in User Settings | Document | Timecodes.. before this Timecodes checkbox can have any effect. If None is selected in the User Settings | Document | Timecodes | Time printing field, then selecting Timecodes in the Print dialog will have no effectno timecodes will be printed. Multi-page Printing If you select the Multi-page options in the Print dialog, your output will print two or four pages per sheet of paper. If you select the Setup.. button, the Multi-page printout options dialog opens, and you can change the font and index options.

Editing 204

The font selection drop-down list and Font.. button allow you to select fonts for the various parts of the multi-page printing, overriding all other font settings in the document, and allowing you to choose larger or smaller font sizes as needed. If you wish to remove any of the font selections for any of the items, select the item and press the Use default button, which will cancel out of a font selection. Note that if you select Use default for the default font selection itself, then the text in question will use its original fullsized print font style (reduced to half-size). It is standard for two different fonts to be used in different parts of a multi-page transcript. For the main body of the transcript, a proportional font is used. Proportional fonts are generally easier to read at the small sizes called for in compressed printing. However a monospaced font is used for pages like the title page, appearance page, etc. Monospaced fonts allow items on the title page to lineup correctly, whereas with a proportional font they would not: (using Courier, a monospaced font) Editing 205

CASE NUMBER: CASE NAME: JUDGE: DATE: CASE NUMBER: CASE NAME: JUDGE: DATE:

AB123456 Smith vs. Jones Hon. Collis D. Smizer Thursday, January 29, 2004 AB123456 Smith vs. Jones

(using Times New Roman, a proportional font)

Hon. Collis D. Smizer Thursday, January 29, 2004

Paragraph styles will use the fonts selected in Print | Options | Multi-page Printout Options. They can be any font you want, but the default is Times New Roman, a proportional font that works quite well. Thus a sample transcript would print like this in multi-page: This is a fixed paragraph. (This is a parenthetical.) This is a centered paragraph. Q A Is this a question? No, this is an answer. THE LAWYER: I object, this is actually colloquy.

Here are the font selections and the text they apply to:
Default font

Any text that does not fit any other category

Header/Footer font

Multi-page sheet headers and footers only, not the headers and footers displayed in the reduced pages
Single-spaced font

Any text set to single-spaced, no matter what the paragraph format. This allows selection of a font with a smaller height to avoid problems with lines overlapping
Fixed font

Any paragraph type set to behave as fixed (unless it's single-spaced, as above.)
Question/Answer label font

The Q or A symbol itself

Question/Answer font

The text of the question or answer

Speaker label font

Editing 206

The speaker name. Note that setting this to a narrower font is an excellent way to get around the problem of all-caps text taking up much more space than lower-case text when using proportional fonts.
Speaker font

The text of the speaker paragraph that appears after the name.
Parenthetical font

Paragraphs set to behave as parenthetical

Default label font

Paragraph labels that do not fit any other category

Index font

If no font is selected, the default for the concordance index will be Arial. The Width control option is individualized for each of the categories, allowing you to choose a font width that will ensure that your text is not clipped on the right. The default is zero (which is disabled); when modifying this setting, begin with values between 5 and 15. Once you find the optimal setting for the particular font you have chosen, you can modify the font size (height) and increase the size of the font without having it run off the right side of the printout. Using this option you can maximize the size of the text to make the multi-page printout more readable. You can also modify the page length in User Settings | Document | Document settings | Page Length to adjust the vertical distance between pages. This will give you more freedom to increase the line height, giving you more room to take advantage of the font size increase while leaving the width unchanged. Note that changing the page length will not affect your regular printout, but it will bring the rows of pages printed in the multi-page output closer together. The Index columns setting allows you to print in columns. Keep in mind that adjusting the number of columns doesn't change anything else, so if you select a 4- or 5-column index and it looks too cramped, you can decrease the index font size. Page order is controlled by a three-way listbox selection:

Left-to-right

Prints page 2 at the top-right, 3 at bottom-left

Top-to-bottom

Prints page 2 at the bottom-left, 3 at top-right

2-page

Prints two pages on left and right. Set the printer preferences to landscape mode for this item. Borders allows you to specify a different multi-page border from the one normally printed on the transcript:

Use original

Keeps the original boxes from the full-sized transcript

Editing 207

None

Turns off all boxes

Cross

Draws a cross in the middle of the four pages

Boxed

Draws box around the whole page divided into four equal segments Multi-page settings file In Multi-page printout options, there is a button for Settings file that allows you to choose a .set file that will be used to print ALL multi-page printouts. Note that the ONLY thing that will be used from that .set file are the DOCUMENT and PARAGRAPH settings. If you have experimented with a special user.ini file for multi-page printing, and you've gotten the laser box and the margins and the line and character spacing and everything JUST RIGHT, then go to User settings | User | Export and save those settings as a .set file. Then, if you select that .set file as your multi-page settings file, it will automatically apply those settings to the document ONLY when it prints a multi-page printout; it will have no bearing on the transcript otherwise. To remove the multi-page settings file, select the Settings button, hit Cancel to close the Settings file dialog, and OK to close the Multi-page printout options dialog. Multi-page index options After choosing whether to print the Index at the end of the document, or to print only the Index for a document, clicking the Options button will allow you to set the parameters for printing your multi-page index. You can specify a certain page threshold for the items on the index. For example, if you set the Word index Threshold to 3, then any index item that appears more than once every three pages will be omitted from the index. In this case, a word that appeared more than 100 times in a 300 page document would not be indexed. If you set this option to zero, the index will keep all of the words in the index, no matter how frequently they appear in the document. The multi-page index will not include one-letter words, as they are generally parts of spellings or administrative numbers. It will also exclude words in the User settings | Translate tab | Non-capping words list. Under User settings | Programming there is an item called Common words. You can enter a list of words here and they will be excluded from the multi-page concordance index. Numbers, separated by commas, periods (decimal points), colons, hyphens and slashes will be considered part of the same entry, allowing each of the following to be considered a single index entry: 52,836.73 Editing 208 9:15 2-12-98 3/4

 Locked-together words will be treated as phrases. For example, if you have Mr. Smith locked together (Mr.~Smith with lockspaces visible) then an index item of Mr. Smith will appear in the index. The same thing goes for all locked-together phrases like Exhibit~1 (all mentions of exhibits will be concordance indexed.) other examples include items like University~of~Wisconsin, Page~3, $52~million. Note that the individual words in these locked-together phrases will also appear in those locations, so if you have Mr.~Smith on page 3, line 7, you will also have entries for Mr. on 3/7 and Smith on 3/7. Hyphenated words will index together and separately. For example, if you have twobit in the transcript, the phrase two-bit will appear in the index as well as two and bit. If you print excerpts or a range of pages, your multi-page output will include an index for just those pages. The index will be numbered beginning with the next number after the printed excerpt. Headers and footers in multi-page printing If you turn on Omit headers/footers on reduced pages, you will only get multi-page headers and footers. With it off, you will get the multi-page sheet header and footer, but in addition, each individual reduced page will contain a reduced version of the header or footer that would have originally printed on the full-sized page. The header and footer setting allows you to configure the multi-page headers and footers exactly as you like. Header lines should be preceded by H: and footer lines by F: H:Left|Center|Right F:Left|Center|Right Each header and footer line may have a left-flush portion, a centered portion, and a right flush portion, separated by the pipe symbol. Note that any portion of a header or footer may be omitted. For example, a line reading H:John Smith||12/8/05 would have a left-flush segment, nothing in the center, and a right-flush segment. You can have multiple header and footer lines, so if the box contained the following: H:|Deposition of John Smith| F:|Jones reporting services| F:|Stuart, FL|7/24/03 There would be one header line with the text centered and two footer lines. The first footer line would have the text centered and the second would have Stuart, FL centered and the date flush right. There is a special syntax for inserting special information into the header or footer. You can use % designations to put any portion of the current time or date into the header or footer using the same syntax as the Insert time/date function. In addition, the following multi-page-specific items have been added:

Editing 209

%T1-%T9

%F1-%F9 %N %G %E

Original header lines (that would have appeared on the full-sized transcript) - If you have a two-line header, %T1 will be replaced with a copy of the first line of the header, %T2 will be replaced with a copy of the second line of the header, etc. Original footer lines Sheet number Starting reduced page number on the current sheet. Ending reduced page number on the current sheet.

Take note that if you ordinarily use a multi-line header or footer on your full-sized transcript, if you wish to have the same lines appear somewhere in the multi-page output you must create several multi-page header or footer lines to hold them. The following is an example that demonstrates each of the above header/footer syntaxes: H:Production date: %m/%d/%y|%T1 This will print a two-line header. The first line will contain the date, flush left and a copy of the header that would have appeared on the first page of the full-sized printout centered. The second line contains the text Multipage along with the original page number range right-flush (Pages 1-4, Pages 5-8, etc.) It will put a two-line footer at the bottom of the page. The first line combines the first and second line of the original full-sized footer, putting the first original line flush left and the second original line flush right on the same line. It will then put the third original line below that along with the multi-page sheet number flush right on the same line.

H:|Multi-page|Pages %G-%E

F:%F1||%F2

F:|%F3|Sheet %N

Headers and footers for the index You can use the multi-page header and footer feature to specify a header and footer specifically for the index using HI: and FI: for the header and footer lines rather than H: and F: which are the header and footer lines for the multi-page printout. These lines work exactly as they do for the multi-page printout, with the exception that you can use either %G to put the index page number, understanding that that will be considered the next page in the document. You can alternately use %N if you would prefer that the index be numbered as sheet numbers rather than page numbers. Examples: H:This is a header for the multi-page printout F:This is a footer for the multi-page printout HI:This header will print on the index Editing 210

FI:This footer will print on the index FI:Each of these can be repeated if you want multi-line items FI:This sample would have a three-line footer on the index. You can have dictionary/encyclopedia-style word references for index pages. The syntax for that is: %F represents the first word on the current index page %L represents the last word on the current index page So, for example, if you had HI:Page %G|John Smith|%F - %L as your header index, a sample page might read: Page 3 John Smith garage - illustration That would mean that garage is the first word on that index page and illustration is the last word on that page.

Editing 211

Editing 212

CHAPTER 9 FORMATTING TRANSCRIPTS

Formatting your transcripts is done by setting paragraph formats and various document settings in your User Settings (Alt+U).
Command Speed Key Menu Toolbar Icon User Settings Alt+U F10/Production /User settings

The User Settings | Document tab is where you set much of the overall format of your document: margins, fonts, footers and headers. The User Settings | Paragraph tab is where you set specific paragraph formats: speaker and answer paragraphs, fixed paragraphs, etc. As with the document settings, the paragraph settings are saved in the current User profile.

MASTER FORMAT AND CURRENT DOCUMENT

In both the User Settings | Paragraph tab and User Settings | Document tab, there are Master Format and Current Document radio buttons. Master formats - Master formats are those that are automatically applied to new documents. Changing the Master format will not affect existing documents but only new ones. You can also make changes in your paragraph or document settings and have them applied to only the Current Documentfuture documents will continue to be created with the Master format applied. You can change the format of a document without affecting the Master format. To change paragraph or document formats without affecting the Master format, be sure the Current Document radio button is marked. Before making any changes in the Paragraph or Document tab, choose the set of formats you want to change. (You can only choose the Current Document radio button if a text document is active when you access the Paragraph or Document tab.) It is usually a good idea to apply the settings to the current document before copying them to the Master format. That way you can make sure that you have all the settings the way you want them before applying them to the Master format. Note that when you click-and-drag the ruler controls on a text document, you are changing the current documents formats.

Copying Formats
For both paragraph and document settings, you can use the Copy button to copy the Master format to the existing document, or to copy the existing documents format to the Master format. Note that the arrow on the Copy button switches direction, depending on whether you have selected Master format or Current document. The arrow points toward the format that will receive the changes if you use the Copy function. Applying formats from the Master format to the Current document: The directions given are for the Paragraph tab. They apply equally to the Document tab.

Formatting Transcripts 213

1. Open the text document that you want to reformat with the Master formats. 2. Go to your User Settings | Paragraph tab (Alt+U or use the Production menu | User Settings command, and then select the Paragraph tab). 3. Make sure the Master format button is marked. The arrow on the Copy button should be pointing toward Current document.

4. Click the Copy button. A message will appear: Warning: The current document will be changed to reflect the master document settings. Any changes you have made to the settings in the current document will be lost. Continue? (Click Yes to continue.) Applying formats from the Current document to the Master format: The directions given are for the Paragraph tab. They apply equally to the Document tab. 1. Open the text document that contains the formatting you want to apply to the Master format. 2. Go to User Settings | Paragraph tab. 3. Make sure the Current document button is marked. The arrow on the Copy button should be pointing toward Master format. 4. Click the Copy button. A message will appear: Warning: Your master document format will be changed to the settings defined in the current document. All future documents will default to these settings. Continue? (Click Yes to continue.)

FORMATTING PARAGRAPHS
Setting up and Changing Paragraph formats
In Total Eclipse your document is made up of many paragraphs, each with its own characteristics (margins, type size, font, label, indentations and line placements). By defining the values and characteristics for the different paragraph types (e.g., Question, Answer, Speaker, Parenthetical) Total Eclipse gives your documents a consistent look. Paragraph formats are created and modified in your User Settings | Paragraphs tab. Total Eclipse comes with preset paragraph formats that you can adjust to meet your needs and for which you can create dictionary entries. You can also make changes directly in the document that will affect only specific paragraphs and not the entire paragraph format for the document. The paragraph formats that Total Eclipse has by default include the following: Fixed Question (paragraph & subparagraph) Answer (paragraph & subparagraph) Speaker (paragraph & subparagraph) Parenthetical Centered Right flush Certified Question Formatting Transcripts 214 By line (SQ) By line (QS) Header Footer Question (quoted) Answer (quoted) Speaker (quoted) Index blank

Index1 Caption box There are also nine generic styles available, and you can create an unlimited number of your own paragraph formats.

Creating a new paragraph

1. Select the paragraph setting you would like to modify to create a new paragraph. 2. Click the New button. A dialog box appears prompting you to type in a New paragraph name. Type in a name and click OK, and the new name will appear at the bottom of the list of paragraph types. 3. Choose the appropriate settings for the new format in the Paragraph format settings area. (It defaults to the settings for the Current paragraph.) 4. Clicking the Advanced button takes you to the Advanced paragraph data dialog window, where you can set specific options for each paragraph format.

Changing paragraph format settings

To change any of your paragraph format settings, go to the User Settings (Alt+U) | Paragraph tab. If you access this tab when a text document is active, two sets of paragraph formats are availablethe Master formats and the formats for this specific, Current document. (The difference between the Master format and Current Document formats is described above.) Mark either the Current Document or Master Format radio button to indicate which set of formats you want to view or edit.

Formatting Transcripts 215

The Paragraph format settings area contains the options for changing or creating paragraph formats. When you select a specific format in the Paragraph list box, the settings for that format appear in the other fields.

Margins
The numbers you enter to set margins correspond to space widths in characters. Left margins, Right margins, Indentation, and Text column margins are all absolute. Each is measured from the left edge of the transcript. Changing one does not affect the others. Right margins define the number of character columns that are allowed on the line. A Right margin of 60 means that no characters can go past column 60. Thus, the line width varies with the type and size of the fonts used on a line. Furthermore, if you use proportional fonts, in which different characters take up different amounts of horizontal space, line widths vary according to the characters on the line. (For example, a line of 60 ls would be shorter than a line of 60 ws) Be careful, therefore, if you use a high number for the right margin; the result could be text extending past printable margins (or even off the page). If you make drastic changes to a font, you may also have to adjust right margins. When setting margins, its best to think of your document as if it were a grid. Each column, or square, represents one character space, and each row is a line space. Margins are set by indicating in which column the text should start or end. Therefore, some trial-and-error might be necessary to find the correct placement. The Paragraph tab contains a small preview area that shows how the margins will look in relation to one another. As you change the numbers in the various margin fields you can see what will change and how. In the example below, you can see the effect of changing the Left margin from 0 to 8, and the Indentation from 5 to 2.

Formatting Transcripts 216

Left margin - aligned body text other than the first line of a paragraph. Right margin - maximum length of line (in characters). A right margin value of 60 and a left margin value of 10 means the line can contain as many as 50 characters (6010=50). Indentation - the left margin position for the paragraph label. Text column - the position of the first character of the body text after the paragraph label. Note that the body text will never start farther to the left than the end of the paragraph label (or the indentation.)

You can also change the margins of a document in the document window itself with the ruler bar. It runs across the top of the documents window and contains margin buttons and tab markers that you can click-and-drag. Changes you make affect all of the paragraphs with the same format as the paragraph in which the cursor is located.

For example, if you place the cursor in an Answer paragraph and move the left margin button, the left margin of every Answer paragraph moves accordingly. These changes are also reflected in your User Settings | Paragraph tab for the Current Document. (Changes do not affect your Master Format settings.)

Formatting Transcripts 217

ADVANCED PARAGRAPH SETTINGS

The Advanced button on the User settings | Paragraph tab allows you to set many options for each paragraph format.

Default label..
You can assign labels to any of your paragraph formats in your User Settings | Paragraph tab. 1. From the Paragraph list box, select the paragraph format to which you wish to apply or change a label. (Make sure you have selected the appropriate set of paragraph formats Master format or Current document.) 2. Click the Advanced button. The Advanced Paragraph Data dialog appears. 3. Click the Default label button. The Paragraph labels dialog appears, containing a list of available paragraph labels, and the selected paragraph format appears at the top of the dialog. If a label is currently assigned to the paragraph, the label appears in the Default Label field. 4. To use an existing label, select the label you want to use and click OK. 5. To create a new label, click the Add Label button, type the new label in the New label field, and click OK. The new label is added to the list of labels. 6. To change an existing label, select the label you want to change and click the Change Label button. Enter the changes in the New label field, and click OK. The new label replaces the selected label. Formatting Transcripts 218

7. To remove a label from the Master format, select it and click the Delete Label button. 8. Click OK to close the dialog after changing the paragraph labels.

Label font and Text font

To choose a typestyle for a paragraphs label, use User Settings | Paragraph tab. 1. From the Paragraph list box, select the paragraph format whose label font you want to change. (Make sure you have selected the appropriate set of paragraph formatsMaster format or Current Document.) 2. Click the Advanced button. The Advanced Paragraph Data dialog appears. 3. Click the Label Font.. button. A font dialog opens. 4. Select the desired font and size combination in this window, and then click OK. To choose a typestyle for a paragraphs text, use the same steps, clicking the Text font button in step 3. Note that the all caps display, print or ASCII settings, including the Text capitalized setting, will apply to paragraph labels only if that paragraphs type is set to all caps in the advanced paragraph format settings. For more on fonts, see page 237.

Behaves as:
Once a new paragraph type has been created, Total Eclipse has to determine what attributes, or behaviors, that paragraph type should be given during translation. The Behave As setting for that paragraph type determines each paragraphs behavior. The Behaves As setting impacts automatic capitalization, automatic punctuation, label color, Multi-page fonts and the behavior of spell check. Occasionally, the Behaves As setting will impact other paragraph attributes as well. There are nine different paragraph behaviors, and each paragraph type in Total Eclipse is set to behave as one of the nine different behaviors. The nine paragraph behaviors are Fixed, Normal, Question, Answer, Colloquy, Parenthetical, Header, Footer, and Case Caption. To set the Behaves As setting for each paragraph type, go to User Settings | Paragraphs, highlight the paragraph type you wish to work with and click Advanced. For details about the nine paragraph behaviors, see Reference Guide, page 448.

Default spacing
Command Speed Key Menu Toolbar Icon Double space Alt+= F10/Format/Double space Command Speed Key Menu Toolbar Icon Single space Alt+F10/Format/Single space

Formatting Transcripts 219

Line spacing is set in User Settings | Paragraph tab | Advanced. Select Double or Single line spacing for the paragraph. Note that this setting affects how the transcript will be printed, and will be applied to all paragraphs with that format created from that point on. Note: you can use the commands Alt+= to double-space and Alt+-(Hyphen) to single-space individual paragraphs or blocks of text while editing.

Alignment
You can set each paragraph type to be left or right aligned, centered, or justified. To set the paragraph alignment for a paragraph format, 1. Go to User Settings | Paragraph. 2. Select the format you want to change, and then click the Advanced button. 3. Select the Alignment you want the paragraph to have (Left, Center, Right or Justified). (Note that if you set a paragraph to be justified, it will display as left-justified, but on a printout or exported to ASCII it will insert a sufficient number of extra spaces to make all of the lines meet the right margin exactly. This feature only works with fixed fonts such as Courier new.) 4. Click OK to accept that change and return to the Paragraph tab. Then click OK again to save the format.

Continuation paragraphs
For some paragraph types, you may want to define a format for additional paragraphs within that type. For example, if an Answer paragraph contains more than one paragraph grammatically, the second and subsequent paragraphs would have the format of answer Paragraph. By setting up formats for continuation paragraphs, you avoid having to set the formatting manually. Continuation paragraphs are used when you hit Ctrl+P (new paragraph) or use {N} in translation. To select the continuation format for a paragraph type: 1. Go to User Settings | Paragraph. 2. Select the format for you want to select a continuation paragraph, and then click the Advanced button. 3. In the Continuation pgh field select the format that you want from the drop-down list. 4. Click OK to accept that change and return to the Paragraph tab. Then click OK again to save the format.

Tab Stops
You can assign default tab stops to any of your paragraph formats through User Settings | Paragraph tab. 1. Go to User Settings | Paragraph. 2. Select the format you want to change. 3. Click the Advanced button.

Formatting Transcripts 220

4. Click the Tab stops.. button. The Tabs dialog appears. The list box shows the current tab stops for the paragraph format you had selected. To add a tab stop, enter the position in the field to the right of the Add button, and then click Add. The new stop appears on the list. To remove a tab stop, highlight it in the list and click Delete. To remove all the tab stops, click the Clear all button. When you have finished setting tab stops for the paragraph, click Close. You can also adjust, add, or delete tab stops for a paragraph format using the ruler bar in the document window. Position the cursor in a paragraph with the format whose tab stops you want to change, and then click-and-drag A tab stop on the tab stops on the document ruler. Changes affect the tab stops for the paragraph the document format in the current document only. These changes are also reflected in your User ruler Settings | Paragraph tab for the current document. (Changes do not affect your Master Format settings.) To add or delete tab stops using the ruler bar, click anywhere on the ruler bar to add a tab stop at that spot. You can click-and-drag tab stops off the ruler bar to remove them. These changes apply to the paragraph format for the current paragraph. While it is possible to use tab stops at the beginning of a paragraph to indent the text, the better way to indent a paragraph is to create a special paragraph type or use one of the style paragraphs and change the indentation value.

Default Paragraph Type

If you want to designate a paragraph type other than Fixed as your default paragraph type, 1. Go to User Settings | Paragraph. 2. Select the format you want to set as the default, and then click the Advanced button. 3. Click in the box marked Default pgh, then click OK. Note that in order to set the default paragraph, the paragraph type must exist in the Master format.

Timecoded
If you want to print timecodes for only certain paragraph formats, 1. Go to User Settings | Paragraph. 2. Select the format you want to change, and then click the Advanced button. 3. Mark the Timecoded checkbox. 4. Click OK to accept that change and return to the Paragraph tab. Then click OK again to save the format. To set timecode starting time, offset value, and printing options, go to User Settings | Document tab. Formatting Transcripts 221

Numbered paragraphs
Some document formats number questions or other paragraph types. The paragraph numbering feature can be found under User settings | Document | Advanced, and reads Number selected paragraphs. Then, under the User settings | Paragraphs tab, you can select the paragraph types you want to be numbered and press the Advanced button. There is a Numbered checkbox right under the Timecoded checkbox. If you have told it to number selected paragraphs, each paragraph type that has its Numbered checkbox on will have a paragraph number displayed next to it on the screen, printout and ASCII. Note that if you want to number questions, all you have to do is have the paragraph numbering feature on and make sure that only the Question paragraph types are set to be numbered. For details on numbering paragraphs, see page 227.

Text Capitalized
If you want certain paragraph formats to be capitalized when printed (every character in the paragraph to be upper case), mark the Text capitalized checkbox in the User settings | Paragraph | Advanced dialog for that paragraph type. If you want the entire document to print in all upper case, use User Settings | Document | Advanced | All caps.

Auto-punctuate
If you want to allow automatic punctuation for particular paragraph types, go to User settings | Paragraph | Advanced and select the Auto-punctuate box. For example, you may want to continue to allow Q and A to punctuate as it normally would, but to have the program decide whether a Speaker paragraph should end in a question mark or period based on the context of the sentence. If this feature is on, in addition to the automated grammar analysis, you can put {>?} or {>.} in any dictionary entry to imply that the current paragraph should end in the punctuation specified.

DOCUMENT OPTIONS
The controls on the User settings | Document tab determine how Total Eclipse sets up all the non-text parts of your printed document (elements such as page number position and format, text boxes, line number printing, and timecode printing.)

Formatting Transcripts 222

Your User settings file stores these settings and applies them to any new document that you create. Once created, the document setup information is stored with the document itself. It is therefore possible to edit either the master document settings or the current document settings. To edit the document setup information that is stored in your User Settings, mark the Master format radio button. To edit the document setup information for the active text document, select the Current document radio button. The Document Settings area allows you to set the margins and other printing limits for the document. The drop-down menu contains the following items:

Page Length - length of the printed page (default: 11 inches) Page Width - width of the printed page (default: 8.5 inches) Top Margin - distance between top of page and header Header Margin - distance between header and first line of text Footer Margin - distance between last line of text and footer Line Height - vertical space between lines Character spacing - fixed-space fonts in a document will conform to the width (in twips) specified here Left Print Margin - distance between left edge of page and line number Line Number Margin - distance between line number and text Formatting Transcripts 223

Page Number Row - distance between left edge of page and page number Page Number Column - distance between top edge of page and page number Timecode Margin - distance between left edge of page and timecode Paragraph Number Margin - distance between left edge of page and paragraph number

Beneath the drop-down menu is a small graphic of a document and a ruler. As you select a document setting, the graphic will change to illustrate what aspect of the document you would be changing. In the illustration above, the line number margin ruler shows that the value indicates the distance between the left edge of the line number and the beginning of the text. Note that it is permissible to use negative numbers in the Document settings. For example, if you required line numbers on the RIGHT side of the page instead of the left, you can set your left margin to 7 inches and your line number margin (the distance between the line numbers and the beginning of the text) to -6.5 inches.

All Caps
If you want the entire document to print in all upper case, Go to User Settings | Document | Advanced. The Advanced document settings dialog will appear.

Mark the All caps checkbox. If you have the document set to print in all caps, then all of the exports, including Raw text, Bridge and HTML, will also be in all caps. Note that although the text will print in all caps, it will be displayed on your screen in mixed case. To have the text displayed in All caps, turn on the All caps option in User Settings | Display tab. (Remember that the Display settings dont affect the printout, and the print All caps option in Document doesnt affect the display.) Formatting Transcripts 224

BY FORMATS
By line colloquies are signaled by a speaker paragraph followed by a question paragraph, or a question paragraph followed by a speaker paragraph. You can set up paragraph formats specifically for By lines. During translation, Total Eclipse identifies the combinations that signal by lines and applies the appropriate formatting. To set by line formats, go to User Settings | Edit tab and click the By Formats button, which opens the By line formats dialog.

You can format two types of by line paragraphs: those indicated with a speaker followed by a question, and those indicated with a question followed by a speaker. When you stroke either of these combinations, Total Eclipse automatically formats the by line paragraph according to how you set them in the By Line Formats dialog. The Template field determines the appearance of the paragraph label. For the most part, text typed in this field is interpreted literally by Total Eclipse. The exceptions are the two formatting codes {C and {M. Use {C in the template field to convert speaker names to all capital letters. Use {M to yield speaker names as mixed case. Note that {C will not capitalize any letter that is already immediately followed by a capital letter, Mr. McTavish and MR. McTAVISH will both still become MR. McTAVISH when applying the {C template. The following table provides some examples of how by line templates affect translation:

Formatting Transcripts 225

stroked {S:MR. JONES} {Q} Yes or no?

by line template BY {C: By {M:

final output BY MR. JONES: Q. Yes or no? By Mr. Jones: Q. Yes or no? Q (By Mr. Jones) Yes or no?* Q (BY MR. JONES) Yes or no? *

{Q} {S:MR. JONES} Yes or no?

*

Q (By {M) Q (By {C)

with the Question text on same line checkbox marked

The Paragraph format field contains a list of formats. You can select any defined paragraph format for this field; however, Total Eclipse provides the pre-named formats By line (SQ) and By line (QS). Note that, because By line paragraph labels are set in the Template field, the selected paragraph formats preset label is irrelevant. (Settings for paragraph formats are accessed in User Settings | Paragraph tab.)

Answer By lines
Under the User settings | Edit | By formats function, there is also a checkbox for Answer by lines. If you turn this on, then the system will apply the By processing logic to answers just as it does with questions. This will automatically turn {S:MR. JONES}{A} into BY MR. JONES A. or {A}{S:MR. JONES} into A. (By Mr. Jones) Note that in the second example, even though your 2nd By template might be Q. ({M) it will change the Q. to A. by replacing every instance of the default question paragraph label with an instance of the default answer paragraph label. It does this before applying the speaker name to the template to avoid problems caused by a name containing Q. as initials.

Setting page breaks with speaker labels

In User settings | Edit | By formats, you can choose either the Question text on same line or Same page checkbox. If you want the text of the by line paragraph to begin on the same line as the by line, mark the Question text on same line checkbox. To keep the By line and text on the same page, mark the Same page checkbox.

Automatically resume by-line insertion

An option under User settings | Translate automatically inserts missing by lines. Here's how it works: Formatting Transcripts 226

As long as you write the first by-whom indication {S:MR. SMITH}{Q}, for example, from that point forward, any {Q} that is written that doesn't follow an answer or answer paragraph will automatically have a by format applied to it. Note that it will default to using the QS by format, typically defined as Q (By Mr. Smith) but if you would prefer that it use the SQ by format, simply remove the QS by format template from the settings under User settings | Edit | By formats. Automatic BY format always applies after a speaker or parenthetical is written no matter what other paragraphs intervene. For example, if you have: Q. Did you? MR. SMITH: Objection. THE COURT: Overruled. Go ahead and answer A. Yes, I did. Q. And when did you? there should be a BY format associated with the second question. A parenthetical always triggers BY lines and answer to witness features. For example, if you have a question, then an answer, and then a parenthetical paragraph, if you then write a question the system will automatically put a BY line before it (if you have the automatic by line feature turned on.) If you write a question, then an answer, then a parenthetical statement, if you then write an answer it will change to THE WITNESS or whatever you have entered into the setting under User settings | Translation.

PARAGRAPH NUMBERS
Numbering selected paragraphs
To sequentially number all paragraphs of a particular type, in User Settings | Document | Advanced, mark the Number selected paragraphs checkbox.

Formatting Transcripts 227

You determine which paragraph types to number by selecting Numbered in User settings | Paragraph | Advanced, which opens the Advanced paragraph data dialog. You can control the position of paragraph numbers by selecting Paragraph number margin under the Document Settings. Special formatting for paragraph numbers The page number format function includes two syntaxes for special formatting. The pipe sign | is used to separate the page number format and the paragraph number format, and the letter N is used to indicate the paragraph number, rather than the page or volume number. For example, your page format could be {P< #####}|{N< #####} This would give you right-aligned page numbers, padded to five characters, and right- aligned paragraph numbers, padded to five characters. A more demonstrative example might be this: Vol. {VR###}, Pg. {P###}| {Nr< ########} The volume number would appear with a text leader as non-padded capital roman numerals, followed by the non-padded page number in decimal digits ("Vol. IV, Pg. 123") and the paragraph number will appear as lower-case roman numerals padded to the left to eight characters (" xvii") If you do not have a paragraph number format specified, the paragraph numbers will show up as left-aligned numbers.

Resetting paragraph numbers

Command Speed Key Menu Toolbar Icon

If you want reset your paragraph numbers (begin with a number other than 1, for example), Print command use the New Paragraph Number print command.
Alt+N F10/Edit/Insert /New Print Command

1. Open the Print Command dialog (Alt+N). 2. Select New Paragraph Number from the list. 3. In the Value field enter the number with which you want the renumbering to begin.

4. Click OK. Your questions should now begin numbering with the number you entered in the Value field. Note that paragraph numbering must be set in User Settings | Document | Advanced before you will see paragraph numbers. This print command only resets the numbers; it doesnt turn paragraph numbering on. Formatting Transcripts 228

NUMBERED LINES PER PAGE

To set the number of lines to print per page, 1. Go to User Settings | Document tab. 2. In the Numbered lines field, enter the number of transcript lines that should appear on a printed page.

PRINTING LINE NUMBERS

You dont have to print every line number. Use User Settings | Document | Advanced document settings, Lines to print field to specify which line numbers should be printed. Leave this field blank to print all line numbers. Separate specific line numbers with commas and indicate line number ranges with hyphens. For example, entering 1,5,10-20 would print line numbers one and five, and all the line numbers between ten and twenty. If you want no line numbers, set it to zero (0). The Page num font and Line num font buttons allow you to set the line number font, as well as the page number font, independent of other elements when printing.

PARLIAMENTARY FORMATS
Parliamentary format uses single-spaced paragraphs that are separated with a double space. To apply the parliamentary transcript format, go to User Settings | Document | Advanced. and mark the Parliamentary format checkbox. Parliamentary format numbers single spaced lines instead of double-spaced lines. When using Parliamentary, in the User Settings | Document tab enter the actual number of lines per page (for example, 50 rather than the default 25) in the Numbered Lines field.

Note: If you turn a paragraph to single spaced, Eclipse removes the extra space before it.

Timecodes
To set timecode starting time, offset value, and printing options, go to User Settings | Document tab. Click the Timecodes button to open the Timecode Setup dialog. Make sure the Time printing option is set for Beginning of selected pgh types or Every line of selected pgh types.

Formatting Transcripts 229

Also in the Timecode setup dialog you can set the starting time, offset value, and timecode printing options. The Timecode offset is the amount of time added to or subtracted from each timecode in the document wherever the timecode is used. It is used globally to correct timecodes that are off for some reason. The Sync to cursor button is used when you have a WAV file recorded on an external source. In this case, the timecodes are usually self-consistent, but not aligned with the document's timecodes. If you can hit play and hear the audio and you can identify where the audio is playing, you can synchronize the file with this button. Move the cursor forward in the document past where it's playing and put it on spot you'll be able to recognize. Go to User settings | Document | Timecodes. As soon as you hear the word the cursor is on, hit the Sync to cursor button, and it calculates a new offset for you automatically. The audio will now be synchronized at the cursor position. The Timecode calculator.. button allows you to type in two timecodes and either add them together or subtract them. Occasionally it is necessary to make an adjustment to the timecode offset or the starting timecode based on some existing information in the document. For example, if you hit play in a document at timecode 1:46:15:23 and what you hear is actually the text that appears later in the document at 2:08:12:15, you can fix it by adjusting the timecode offset by the difference between those two timecodes. The timecode calculator can tell you that the difference is 00:21:56:22. Note that there's a Copy button in the calculator so that you can copy the result and paste it directly where you need it. The Time printing section of the dialog controls how the timecode is printed. The dropdown menu (by default None is selected) controls the frequency of the timecode printing. Options include, but aren't limited to, every line, every paragraph, and every page. Formatting Transcripts 230

Absolute timecodes show the time of day when the transcript was recorded. Relative timecodes, which are used primarily for audio and video synchronization, start at 0 and advance incrementally. If the recording is paused, the timer also stops. You can choose to use absolute or relative timecodes, or both. Select 12-hour or 24-hour mode. Timecodes set in 12-hour mode take more room than do those in the 24-hour mode because AM or PM must be added to the times. The Size option for timecodes is set according to the number of elements (not characters) that you want the time to use. For example, to show the hours and minutes, you would set the timecode size to 2 (hours + minutes) and to show hours, minutes, and seconds, you would set the timecode size to 3.

HEADERS AND FOOTERS

Headers
Command Speed Key Menu Toolbar Icon Print command Alt+N F10/Edit/Insert/New Print Command

To begin a header, insert a Header print command using New Print Command (Alt+N). Select Header from the list and click OK. A space will open up in your document, and an H, for Header, will appear as the paragraph format for the new paragraph. Type the header text.

If you are in WYSIWYG mode when you insert the print command, you will be taken out of it to enter the header text. Unless the Header print command is placed at the top of the page, the header will not begin printing until the next page. Numbering header lines You can control whether or not your header lines are numbered with the transcript lines by using User Settings | Document | Advanced | Numbered header lines. If you want the header lines numbered, in the Numbered header lines field indicate the number of header lines there are. Transcript line numbers will then begin with the number following the number you enter in this field. NOTE: If you specify more or fewer header lines than you actually have, the transcript text will still begin with the number following what is in the Numbered header lines field. For example if you indicated there would be two numbered header lines but have only one, the transcript text numbering will still begin with line number 3. Putting the current speaker name in the header You can use {C or {M in the header (just like BY formatting.) The last speaker name seen will be inserted in place of those characters. Note that these header commands are inserted as part of the printing/display routines, but the alignment calculations are based on there being only two characters there, so they may throw off centered headers by a few characters. You can adjust for this by padding the header on the right side with a few spaces to help even it out. Formatting Transcripts 231

Putting the current timecode in the header {T in the header (no closing brace) will insert the current timecode in the header in place of those two characters. Putting page, line and/or volume numbers in the header {P {L and {V in the header or footer (no closing brace) will insert the current page, line and/or volume number in place of those two characters. Note that the page number row and column in the user settings should be used in most circumstances, while this method is for those rare instances when you wish to have the page number in multiple locations on the page.

Footers
Footers are set in User Settings | Document in the default footer field. In that field you can type whatever you want to use as a standard footer. The default footer uses the Footer paragraph format, which can be changed in User Settings | Paragraph tab. The vertical position of the footer on the page can be adjusted by selecting Footer margin in the User Settings | Document | Document settings drop-down list. You can override the default footer by using the Footer print command. Insert a Footer print command using (Alt+N), select Footer from the list and click OK. A space will open up in your document, and an F, for Footer, will appear as the paragraph format for the new paragraph. Type the footer text. If you are in WYSIWYG mode when you insert the print command, you will be taken out of it to enter the Footer text.

SPEAKER SEPARATORS
In the User Settings | Document tab | Advanced | Speaker separator field, type the characters that should appear following a speaker name, normally a colon and two spaces.

BLANK LINES
In the User Settings | Document tab | Advanced | Blank print line field, type any text or characters that you want to appear on the numbered lines, created during conditional page breaks, without transcript text.

PAGE AND VOLUME NUMBER

Page number font
You control the font for the page number in User Settings | Document tab | Advanced | Page num font.

Line number font

You control the font for the page number in User Settings | Document tab | Advanced | Line num font.

Formatting Transcripts 232

Page number format

Set the format of page numbers in User Settings | Document tab | Advanced | Page format field, which uses a formatting code to control the appearance of page numbers. The field can contain a combination of text and formatting codes. Formatting codes appear within curly brackets {and}, and text that is to be printed as you enter it is outside the brackets. For example, the entry, Page.{P< ####} means print the text Page. then print the page number with up to three padding spaces to the left. This results in the following: Page. Page. 1 10

Page. 100 Page.1000 The following table shows the codes for the page format. code P R r V <X >X # Meaning Arabic numeral uppercase Roman numeral lowercase Roman numeral volume number (from New volume number print command) place number to right of padding (X is padding character) place number to left of padding (X is padding character) one padding space example 37 XVI vi 2 14 14

Replacing padding spaces with characters To print a repeating character in place of padding spaces, insert an angle bracket (< or >) and the desired character in the formatting code. For example, the code, Page.{P<-####} prints as, Page.---1 NOTE: You can position page numbers on a page by setting values for Page number row and Page number column in the Document settings drop-down box on the Document tab.

Formatting Transcripts 233

Changing page number format for selected pages To change the format of page numbers within a document, insert a Page Number Format print command.
Insert Print command Alt+N F10/Edit/Insert /New Print Command

Command Speed Key Menu

Go to Insert Print Command (Alt+N). Select Page number format. The print command Page number format: will be inserted in your document. After the colon enter the format, using the codes explained above.

Toolbar Icon

Controlling page numbering

To control the numbering of pages insert a Page Number print command. Go to Insert Print Command (Alt+N). Select New Page Number from the list. In the Value field, enter the number with which you want the numbering to begin. The page on which you enter the print command will be numbered with that number. All subsequent pages will be numbered sequentially from there.

Volume numbers
If the job is more than one volume, specify the start of a new volume with the New Volume Number print command. Go to Insert Print Command (Alt+N). Select Volume Number from the list. In the Value field, enter the number you want to assign the volume. Formatting Transcripts 234

Graphics
You can use this Print Command to add letterhead or other graphics to your transcript. Because there are no graphics authoring features in Eclipse, you will have to create or modify images outside of Eclipse before adding them to your transcripts. Place the cursor anywhere in the document and use the Edit | Insert | New Print command function. There is a function at the bottom of the list called Graphic. Once you select that, you will get a small dialog for selecting and formatting the graphic file.

This dialog contains several controls: 1. The Image filename box (and corresponding Browse button.) Use these to specify what graphic file you wish to add to the transcript. Any file Windows is capable of displaying is valid, including Jpegs, Bitmaps, GIF files, etc. Note that you will get a list of ALL files if you hit Browse in order to support future graphics formats that may not be available yet. You can also use file locations such as {JOB} or {BLOCK} inside graphics print commands. (For details on File Locations, see the Reference Guide section of this manual, page 472.) 2. The Left, Top, Size and Stretch selections. Use these radio buttons to select which measurement of the graphic to change. Use the Left and Top for positioning. The Size will affect both horizontal and vertical positioning. The Stretch will stretch or squash the image vertically (If you need the image wide and squat, increase the size first and then decrease the stretch value.) 3. The slider. This control affects whichever measurement you have selected with the buttons. This is the easiest way to adjust the position and size of the image. 4. The Measurement value box with spin buttons. Use this to either type in a known value or to make fine adjustments. Once you have positioned the graphic, press the OK button to place it or the cancel button if you change your mind. This will insert a print command into the document with the image name, left, right, size and stretch values separated by commas. You can edit these values after inserting the graphic, though if any change is needed it may be better to delete the command and reinsert it. Because it is a print command which can span many lines, the image will NOT be visible on the screen any time that print commands are visible, just as with a transcript box. Print command display is temporarily disabled when the graphics dialog is on the screen. Also, keep in mind that the image will be drawn exactly at the moment that the software draws the print command, which has two consequences: Formatting Transcripts 235

1. If you place the graphic command on the page BELOW where you are going to move the image (by moving the top edge up) the image will be drawn AFTER the text, and will therefore be drawn OVER the text. If you insert the print command in the document ABOVE where you are going to place the image, the image will be drawn BEFORE the text below it, and will therefore be drawn UNDER the text. 2. If you place one or more graphic commands at the END of a header or footer, it will appear on EVERY page when the header or footer is drawn. This will allow you to add fancy letterhead or transcript boxes. Note that if you want text and graphics on the same page to get out of each other's way, you are responsible for arranging them yourself. You can change the margins of the text any way that is necessary to move it out of the way of the graphic. There is no limit to the number of graphics commands you can add to a transcript. Note: the graphics do NOT get added to the document. These are graphic LINKS, and if you need to move the document with the graphics to another computer, you will need to move the graphics files, also. They will need to be in the same relative location as on the original computer in order to work.

Suppressing the printing of various document elements

Use the Omit Elements and Resume Elements print commands to suppress selectively the printing of headers, footers, boxes, page numbers, and line numbers. 1. Position the cursor in the paragraph where you want to start omitting the elements. 2. Press Alt+N. Press O to jump to Omit elements. 3. Mark the checkboxes of those elements you want to omit. Press Enter. An Omit print command is inserted in the document above the paragraph in which the cursor is currently located. 4. Move the cursor to the paragraph at which you want to resume the omitted elements. 5. Press Alt+N. Press R to jump to Resume elements. 6. Mark the checkboxes of those elements you want to resume. Press Enter. A Resume print command is inserted above the paragraph in which the cursor is currently located. If you dont want to resume the printing of the elements, you can skip steps 4-6. NOTE: You can display print commands in a document by marking the Print commands checkbox on the Display tab. (To access this tab, click the Display properties toolbar button or Alt+U | Display.) Because print commands are nonprinting page elements, this feature disables the display of text boxes. Print commands also become visible when you use the arrow keys to scroll through a document and the cursor moves into a print command field (when the cursor is moved off the field, the command is hidden).

Formatting Transcripts 236

PAGE BREAKS
Forced page break
To force a page break anywhere in your document insert a Page Break print command. The page will break immediately after the place in the document where you inserted the print command.

Conditional page break

If you want to be sure certain sections of text stay together on a page, insert a Conditional Page Break print command. When you insert this command, you will also need to enter in the Value field the number of lines that should fit on the page before the break. For example, if you have 3 lines that you need to keep together on the page, immediately before those lines you would insert a Conditional Page Break print command and enter 3 in the Value field.

FONTS
About fonts and font size
Command Speed Key Menu Toolbar Icon Font dialog Ctrl+Shift+F F10/Format/Font

You can change the font for the entire document, or for only a text selection. In both cases, you will use the Font dialog (Ctrl+Shift+F). Type size is the height of a font measured in points (72 points = one inch).

Because some letters, such as f, have parts that go above a midpoint (called ascenders) and others, such as g, have parts that go below the line (called descenders), height is measured from the bottom of a descender to the top of an ascender (in other words, the height is greater than the height of a capital letter). Text intended to be read on a printed page is typically 10 to 12 points.

Setting font, size, and style

Selecting a Font Size If you have selected a scalable font, such as TrueType or Adobe Type 1, you can enter a number for the size even if it does not appear on the type size list. If the font is not scalable, you must select one of the values on the type size list. To choose the font to use for documents, the best thing to do is to set the font in your User Settings | Document | Main font. This setting will cover 99.99% of your work. Subscripts and Superscripts In any of the font dialogs, sub- and superscripts are indicated by the vertical offset field in the bottom left corner of the dialog. You can either type a number in the field, or use the arrows to scroll the numbers up and down. Normal text will be set to 0; superscripts are indicated by positive numbers and subscripts by negative numbers. The measurement is in twips, which represents a twentieth of a point (72 points = 1 inch). For example, you can set a superscript of an 8 or 10 point font to 100 and a subscript to 80. (Note that small fonts dont need to move down as far as they need to move up to achieve a similar effect. For example, the 2 in Formatting Transcripts 237

H2O has no offset, but is already 80 twips shorter that the H & O; in H2O it has an offset of -80 twips; in H2O it has an offset of 100 twips.)

Setting the font for an entire document

To set the font for your document, 1. Use the keyboard shortcut, go to User Settings (Alt+U). 2. Click the Document tab. Select the Master Format or Current Document format according to where you want to apply the setting. 3. On the Document tab click the Main font button. The Font dialog will open. The current font for the document is in the font field. 4. Select the font you want from the scrollable list below the font field. (Courier New is commonly used.) Icons to the left of a font name indicate the font type. For example, TT indicates a TrueType font. To see what a specific font looks like, click on it. A sample of the font face will appear in the box labeled Sample. The sample field reflects the size and styles also selected with the font. 5. Select the font size that you want used throughout the document (Courier New 13 is common). Do not select any Font style other than Regular, unless you really do want all the text in your transcripts underlined, italic, etc. 6. Once you have selected the font and size, click the OK button. This will return you to the Document tab, where you can again click the OK button to return to your document.

Setting the character width

All fixed-space fonts in a document will conform to the width (in twips) specified by the character spacing setting in User Settings | Document. It defaults to 144 (1440 twips per inch / 144 = 10 characters per inch). To set the character spacing for a document, go to the User Settings | Document tab | Document settings drop-down menu (the menu usually shows Page width by default). After selecting Character settings, set the width that you want in the twips field on the right side of the dialog. Character spacing does not affect proportional fonts, so any stylistic proportional formatting in your documents will be unaffected. Important noteIf you use multiple fixed-space font sizes in your document, they will all now have the same pitch, regardless of their size. This will probably not be a problem. Every character in fixed-space fonts will adhere to these measurements exactly. This feature can actually compress letters closer together than the Windows default for that font, and can be used when increasing font size to keep letters equidistant.

Setting font for a paragraph format

To set the font and typestyle for paragraph formats:

Formatting Transcripts 238

1. Go to User Settings | Paragraph tab, select the format you want to change, and then click the Advanced button. 2. Click Text font button and choose a typestyle for the paragraph using the standard Font dialog. 3. Click OK to accept the options and return to the Paragraph tab. Then click OK again to save the format.

Setting font for selected text

To specify a font for only a section of the current document, you will use a Font dialog, as described above but you will not make the changes in the User Settings. 1. First block mark the text you want to format. (See page 169 for more on block marking text.)
Command Speed Key Menu Toolbar Icon Font dialog Ctrl+Shift+F F10/Format/Font

2. Open the Font dialog (Ctrl+Shift+F). The current font for the document will show in the font field. 3. Select the font or font characteristics. 4. Click OK to have your selections take effect. Click Cancel to disregard the selections and return to the document window.

If you put the cursor on the beginning of a word in a different font and start typing, what you type will be in the same font as the word. If you place the cursor immediately AFTER the word, it will be in the font that appears after the word.

Setting fonts for special parts of paragraphs

To set the font for paragraph labels, speaker names, etc., you will need to edit the paragraph format. The basic method for doing that is given below. When you edit the paragraph format, the change takes effect for all paragraphs using that format, not just the current paragraph. Note that if you are editing a document created with an earlier version of Eclipse, you might need to retranslate to have the change take effect on all paragraphs of that format.

Setting fonts for individual paragraph labels

To change one instance of a paragraph label (perhaps for a particular speaker), 1. Select the paragraph label either by moving the cursor to the first line of the paragraph and pressing Home twice, or by clicking the paragraph label. 2. Open the font dialog (Ctrl+Shift+F). 3. Select the font and/or font characteristics you want. Click OK. Note that the label will be changed for only the paragraph from which the command was issued.

Setting font for one paragraph

To change the font for a paragraph, place the cursor anywhere in the paragraph (without marking a block), and then press Ctrl+Shift+F for the Font dialog. Select the font you want, and then click OK. The change is applied to the entire paragraph, including the text that is before the cursor as well as what follows it. Formatting Transcripts 239

Striking out and underlining

To indicate text to be deleted, use the strikeout style. It put a line through the text, similar to what you would do if you were editing on paper and crossed something out. The underline places a single continuous line under the text. The line continues between words.

Setting text colors for printing

Keep in mind that the color of text on your monitor is not necessarily the color that it will print. To set the color for printed text, open the Font dialog and click on the Color drop down menu. Select a color from the list. The text on your screen will not reflect this color change.

Setting text for confidentiality

The program will omit text from the output for ascii, pdf files, and output to Bridge if the text type is set to redacted. For instructions on using this feature, see Redacted text, page 170.

Non-English language scripts

Scripts are the alphabets used by different language groups, and they vary by font. English uses the Western script, which is the default.

TEXT BOXES
Creating a default text box
You can set up a default text box for all of your documents; by doing so you wont have to create the text box for every transcript that you do. As is true of most document characteristics that you can set for your work, the default box is part of your User Settings. 1. Press Alt+U to open the User Settings dialog. 2. Click the Document tab. 3. Click the Text box.. button. 4. The Text box setup dialog appears.

Formatting Transcripts 240

The scrollable list contains the various kinds of boxes available. Click on a box title for a preview of the graphics in the left side of the dialog, When you select a box type from the list, the preview window displays the boxs general appearance, allowing you to see left and right margin borders, and horizontal borders above and below both headers and footers. Once selected, you can customize a standard design by selecting single, double, or no lines for each border. For example, you may want a text box that only surrounds text (a short box), but which has a double line along the bottom. The buttons that appear around the preview area allow you to make this selection. The buttons are adjacent to the border they control and are labeled L (left rule), R (right rule), T (top rule), H (header rule), F (footer rule), and B (bottom rule). Each time a button is selected, its corresponding border is switched among single, double and no line. After leaving the Text box setup, you will to be able to edit the box directly from the document window by clicking-and-dragging to change the boxs borders and using a rightclick menu to change the line thickness. When you have completed your selections for the default box, click OK. You will then return to the Document tab. Click the OK button to save the changes and return to your document (if you have one open). The selected graphics are applied to the active text file. The border graphics will also be applied to any new text documents you create, if you copy your selections to the master format.

Reformatting the text box in the document window

Total Eclipse allows you to alter text box characteristics directly on the page. When you change the text box on any single document page, the changes occur on every page with a text box. Editing controls for text boxes are accessed with the left and right mouse buttons. Repositioning a text box Place your mouse pointer on the border that you want to reposition, then click-and-drag to move the line to the desired location. By default, if you move one border the others will adjust accordinglymoving one border will affect other borders (e.g. if you shift a top border up and to the right, the right border will lengthen and move to the right). Adding and Deleting Lines to Boxes 1. Right-click on a text-box border A shortcut menu for boxes will appear. 2. Select Add Vertical to add a vertical line to the box. 3. Select Add Horizontal to add a horizontal line to the box. 4. Select Delete to remove the line on which you have clicked. (Border lines turn blue when clicked.) A new line can be created by right-clicking on another line and selecting Add Vertical or Add Horizontal. Line width To set the width, or thickness, of the text box lines,

Formatting Transcripts 241

1. Right-click on a text-box border. A shortcut menu for boxes will appear. 2. Select Properties. 3. The Line properties dialog box opens. 4. If the change is to apply only to the selected line, uncheck the Link values box. If the box is checked, the changes apply to all lines in the box. 5. Enter a number in the Thickness field for the width of the line. Measurement units are in twips to allow precise adjustment (1440 twips=72 points=1 inch). A typical hairline border is 15 twips. If you click and hold your mouse on the spin controls for this field, you can watch the border(s) shrink or expand in the WYSIWYG document display. You can also type the number that you want. The maximum value allowed in this field is 1440 twipsa one-inch line. Double line space To set the amount of space between a set of double lines, 1. Right-click on a text-box border A shortcut menu for boxes will appear. 2. Select Properties. 3. Enter a number in the Double line, separation field to indicate the amount of space between the set of lines. Measurement units are in twips to allow precise adjustment (1440 twips=72 points=1 inch). Because separation is measured from the center of each line, the separation value must be greater than the thickness value, or the two lines will merge. You can click-and-hold your mouse on a spin control for this field to watch the distance between the lines expand or contract in the WYSISWYG document display. You can also type a value in the field. The maximum separation for a double line is 255 twips. NOTE: If you change the text box for the document in the User Settings | Document tab | Text Box.. button, the border properties you have adjusted in the document window will not be retainedthe selected text box will be recreated with default values. To retain the settings, remember to Copy them from the Current document to the Master format Changing a line without affecting the other lines. You can change the thickness of one line without changing the others, or increase or decrease the space between a set of double lines without affecting all of the borders. 1. Right-click on a text-box border A shortcut menu for boxes will appear. 2. Select Properties. 3. Deselect Link Values if it is selected.

Formatting Transcripts 242

When Link Values is selected, any changes in the Thickness and Separation fields are applied to all borders of the box (Separation affects only double-line borders). When the Link Values checkbox is not marked, only the selected border is affected. Moving a line without affecting the rest of the box You can set the properties of the text box so that you can move a line without affecting other lines. To detach a line from the rest of the box (be able to move it anywhere without moving the other lines), 1. Right-click on a text-box border A shortcut menu for boxes will appear. 2. Select Properties. 3. Select Floating Line. Now, when you click-and-drag the border, the other borders of the box will not move.

Text box graphics and the WYSIWYG display

Command Speed Key Menu Toolbar Icon Display properties Ctrl+Shift+F11 F10/Window/ Display properties

These graphics are visible only when you are in WYSIWYG mode (What-You-See-Is-What-YouGet), which shows you what the document will look like when you print it. This also means that those elements that are not printed, such as print commands, are not visible.

To view a Total Eclipse text document in WYSIWYG mode, click the Display properties toolbar button. This opens the Display tab. Select the WYSIWYG button.

Formatting Transcripts 243

Formatting Transcripts 244

CHAPTER 10 BLOCK FILES

Block files (known in other CAT products sometimes as includes, Merge documents, Standard pages, etc.) are regular Total Eclipse text files (with the .ecl extension) that contain text or fill-in blank fields that you are likely to use repeatedly. Typical block files include your title page, appearance pages and certificate pages. Block files can be used for a wide variety of functions. For example, you can create a file with a list of related items, then use the list to fill blanks (form fields) in a document. Block files can be inserted in a document using the Read command. You can also define dictionary strokes as autoincludes that automatically read a block file into the job during translation.

CREATING BLOCK FILES

Create block files the same way you create a new, blank text file:
Command Speed Key Menu Toolbar Icon Open Alt+E F10/Production /Open text

1. Press Alt+E, and a file dialog opens, displaying the Total Eclipse text documents in your user folder . 2. Type a name for the new file in the File name field. Make sure that the name is not already assigned to another file in the folder. 3. Press Enter or click Open.

4. An alert box will appear, stating the file does not exist and asking if you want to create the file. Click Yes.
Creating a new file in the file dialog window
Make sure the directory (folder) you use for block files is open. All Total Eclipse text files in the selected folder appear in the file display area.

Type the name for the file you are creating in the File name field.

Block Files 245

5. The file is created and opened. You can create the files content using any of the available text editing methods.

FORMS (FORM FIELDS)

Blanks, or form fields, allow you to create documents that act as templates for pages and information that you use in most if not all documents, such as title and certificate pages. When you use forms, all you need to do is use the fill-in-the-blanks function to scan quickly to each blank and enter job-specific information when youre editing.

Creating blanks
Command Speed Key Hyperkey Menu Toolbar Icon Add blank Ctrl+A Shift+E F10/Edit/Insert /Add blank

To insert a form field in a document, Press Ctrl+A to open the Add blank dialog window, which allows you to specify the characteristics of a blank in your document.

Form field size In the Field size area enter the maximum number of characters you want the blank to be able to contain. You can either type the numbers directly in the field or use spin controls to adjust the value. If you want the field to adjust its size according to the text that is entered, mark the Adjustable checkbox. If you want the field to be the length that you entered as the field size, regardless of how much or how little text is entered, uncheck the Adjustable checkbox. Note that since the size is irrelevant for an adjustable field, if you change the field size it will assume that you want a non-adjustable field and will turn off the Adjustable checkbox. Variables If you will have several blanks that will use the same data that is entered in this blank, use the Variable in the Add Blank dialog (Ctrl+A). What you enter as the variable will not be used to fill in the blank, but only identifies those blanks that should be filled in identically. For example, if you will need to reuse a witness name, you might use Command Job variables the word witness as the variable. When you are later filling in Speed Key Shift+Alt+V blanks, the first time you come to this blank and enter the witnesss Menu F10/Tools name, that name will be filled into the other blanks that used /Job variables witness as a variable. Toolbar icon You can create, edit, and store variables for each job by using Job variables (Shift+Alt+V). This opens the Job variables dialog, in Block Files 246

which you can define job variables by typing the name of the variable, an equal sign (=), and the value of the variable.

Command Speed Key Hyperkey Menu Toolbar Icon

Fill in blanks Ctrl+E E F10/Production /Fill in blanks

When a job variable and a form field variable have the same name, the value of the job variable is automatically used during the Fill in blanks procedure (Ctrl+E). You can use any alphanumeric characters (A-Z, 0-9) for the variable name, but you must assign the same variable name to each blank field that will contain the same value.

If you use Block/Write or Separate, it will copy the job variables, along with the Speaker List, on the assumption that any further fields should contain the same values. Prompting for variables when filling in blanks The Prompt for contents checkbox allows you to re-use the same variable for a different value within the same document.. For example, a witness name might be used five times for block files within one witnesss testimony, but you might have three witnesses in the same document for one day of a trial. When a new witness is sworn Command Add blank in, you would prompt for the new value for the witness variable Speed Key Ctrl+A name.
Hyperkey Menu Toolbar Icon Shift+E F10/Edit/Insert /Add blank

To receive this prompt when filling in blanks, mark the Prompt for Contents checkbox in the Add Blank dialog (Ctrl+A). If you enter something other than what had previously been entered, all subsequent occurrences of the variable use the new information, but previous occurrences keep what had originally been entered.

The NUM variable When a form field contains a variable that ends in NUM, each time the system prompts you for a value for that variable name it will automatically add one to the value that was previously entered. Note that this only happens when the system prompts you for the value, giving you an opportunity to change the number. If several consecutive fields containing the variable are not set to prompt for the value, they will all get filled in with the same value,

Block Files 247

which is especially appropriate for block files where the value will be used both in the text and on one or more automatic index lines. Empty fields When creating lines with fill-in blanks you may want to create additional lines on the form to simplify the inclusion of more data if it needs to be there (multiple plaintiffs or defendants, for example). But if those fields are left blank you may want the line with them in it removed automatically. To do this, mark the Delete line if empty checkbox in the Add Blank dialog (Ctrl+A). Capitalizing form fields You can force the contents of a form field to be capitalized by marking the Capitalize contents checkbox in the Add Blank dialog (Ctrl+A). By doing this, you will not need to capitalize (using Shift) when filling in a blank. Marking the last form field When you are filling in blanks, Total Eclipse will continue looking for form fields until it reaches the end of the document. If you dont have form fields near the end of the document, or if you want Eclipse to stop looking for blanks at a particular spot, you can indicate which of the form fields is the last, and when Total Eclipse reaches that field it will stop looking. To indicate which is the last, mark the Last field checkbox in the Add Blank dialog (Ctrl+A). Formatting contents as right flush Contents of form fields use a left flush margin by default. If you want the contents of a field to be right flush, mark the Right flush contents checkbox in the Add Blank dialog (Ctrl+A). This will only work if the field is not adjustable. Mathematical formula You can enter a formula that will determine how a form field is filled in mathematically. You can also have a variable name for that field so that after the calculation is performed, the result is stored in a variable for later use. The following variable names are built-in, and will be filled in automatically with the appropriate value: PAGES - the total number of pages in the document PAGE - the current page number at the cursor position YEAR, MONTH, DAY, HOUR, MINUTE, SECOND -- elements of the current date and time The mathematical formula parser understands the following operators: + addition - subtraction * multiplication / division Block Files 248

( ) precedence. Example: (7 - 2) * 3 produces 15, but 7 - (2 * 3) produces 1 % modulus (remainder). NOT percentage! It also understands the following functions: Abs - absolute value Log - natural logarithm Sin - sine Tan - tangent ACos - arccosine ASin - arcsine ATan - arctangent Sqrt - square root Log10 - base-ten logarithm Cos - cosine

For example, Abs(4 - 10) produces 6 The formula parser can use variable names in place of numbers, which includes any variables you have created and filled in in the job. For example, if you have created a form field containing a variable PAGERATE and filled 2.75 into that field, you can use PAGERATE in a formula calculation. You can use the variables to calculate a bill for the total number of pages in a transcript minus the form pages. To do this, on the last page of your appearances, put a comment line containing a formfield with a variable FORMPAGES, and a formula containing only PAGE. This will calculate and store the page number of the last form page before the content starts. At the end of the file, you have a billing page with form field containing the variable PAGERATE which you filled in manually. In the invoice, you have a total bill form field containing the formula (PAGES - FORMPAGES) * PAGERATE Using list files If you want a list file to be used by a form field, open the Add Blank dialog (Ctrl+A). In the Use list file field click the Browse button to open a file dialog from which to choose a list file. If you know the path and filename of the list file you can type it in the field rather than clicking Browse.

LIST FILES
While filling in blanks, list files make it possible for you to select information from a list rather than having to type it. They are very useful for names and addresses that you use repeatedly. List files are specially formatted block files.
Command Speed Key Menu Toolbar Icon Open Alt+E F10/Production /Open text

To create a list file

Press Alt+E to open a new file. Be sure you are in the directory containing your block files. Enter a name for the new file and press Enter.

Block Files 249

Type each list item on a separate line. (By default, Total Eclipse creates Fixed format paragraphs. Pressing Enter creates a new Fixed paragraph).

List items that require more than one field

To create list items that take multiple fields, type each item as a single paragraph (as with single line list items), but insert a plus sign, +, to indicate where a new field should begin. For example you would enter the data in the list as: Branford Hickox+927 Spartacus Ave.+Cordele, GA That data would appear in the document as follows: Branford Hickox 927 Spartacus Ave. Cordele, GA 31015 When you use Ctrl+T to scan to the list, it will fill in all the pieces of information attached to the list item. Note that you must use Ctrl+A to create a separate field for each piece of information. So in the example above, you would need three fields: one for the list file and one for each address line. Note, however, that the data (and the fields) will not always be on separate lines. For example, a case in which the three fields would be on one line might appear like this in your document: Branford Hickox, 927 Spartacus Ave., Cordele, GA 31015 Note: if you want to use a plus sign in a list file entry, you can, but it must be preceded by the literal character ( _+). 31015

Creating shortcuts for the list items

You can create shortcut keys to be used when you select an item from the list. They allow you to select items quickly when filling in blanks. To designate shortcut keys as you create list items: type what you want to use as the shortcut, then the at symbol @, then type the list entry. For example, GA@Georgia CA@California Note that you can use the _ literal character command in the list processor, which will allow you to put in things like [email protected], and that it won't see the @ as a signal to make jthorne a shortcut string for the list. This also works with the plus sign.

Sorting your list file

If you put a comment line at the top containing the word SORT in all caps, the list will appear sorted as you fill in the blanks (but not when youre editing the list file).

Using a dictionary entry to create a form field on the fly

You can include {FL:FieldSyntax} in a dictionary entry. The field syntax is as follows: Symbol Result ^ Block Files 250 Variable-sized field

D C L R P <name |name label

Delete the line if empty Capitalize the results Last field Right-flush Prompt for variable contents Use a list file Use a variable name Use a label

You should always use the single-character flags in the field first, followed by any flags that contain additional data. For example, to insert an adjustable field that deletes the line if empty, labeled Plaintiff with a variable named PLF, you can use the following: {FL:^D"Plaintiff|PLF}

INSERTING BLOCK FILES

You have several options for inserting block files into your documents. You can insert them while editing, called reading in the file and you can also have them automatically inserted during translation, using dictionary entries, called autoincludes.

Reading in block files

1. In the document, position the cursor where you want to insert the block file.
Command Speed Key Menu Toolbar Icon Read Alt+R F10/Block/Read

2. Use the Read command (Alt+R) to open a file dialog displaying your Total Eclipse text files. 3. From the list of files, select the desired block file. You can double-click on the file or click once to select it and then click Open or press Enter. The file is inserted at the cursor position in the document.

FILLING IN BLANKS
When you are ready to fill in all the blanks in a document, use Fill in blanks (Ctrl+E). This command scans to each blank field in the document and provides Command Fill in blanks a dialog for entering the information that belongs in each of these Speed Key Ctrl+E fields. Menu F10/Production
/Fill in blanks Toolbar Icon

For simple blanks, the Fill in blank dialog appears.

Block Files 251

Type the text for the blank, then click OK or press Enter. The blank is filled with the entry, according to the specifications for the blank (e.g. capitalized, right-flush), and Total Eclipse scans to the next blank. The process continues for each blank field in the document. The Fill in blank dialog window will move out of the way, so that it never covers up the cursor. If the scan finds a blank that is already filled, the current information in the blank appears in the dialog window, and you can edit it or move to the next blank. Clicking Next or Back moves to the next or previous form field without adding or changing the contents of the current field. To cancel the Fill in blank process, press Esc. Inserting Special Characters, Time and Date To insert special characters while filling in the blanks, you use the Ctrl+W function just as you would during globaling or editing. To insert the date and/or time while filling in the blanks, hit Ctrl+D to bring up the insert time/date dialog box. You can choose any of the existing formats or create your own, and you can modify the date and time values that appear, as well.

The List file dialog box

If a list file is specified for a blank, the List File dialog appears displaying the list items.

If you are filling in fields and the system stops on a list file and gives you a list of choices, you can select any item on the list (by clicking with your mouse or highlight using arrow keys) and press Enter to insert it in your blank. The Edit button allows you to edit the list file before selecting an item. This button opens the list file document and escapes out of the fill-in-the-blanks process. Once you are done editing the list, close it and you will see that your cursor is still in the original document in the appropriate location to continue filling in blanks. Just hit Ctrl+E or whatever keystroke you normally use for filling in blanks to continue. The Sort button arranges the entries in the list file alphabetically. Block Files 252

The Details button will show you the details for the currently highlighted list item and will show them in a scrolling window so that they will be entirely visible no matter how many items there are or how long they are. If the list file includes shortcut keys, you can type the items shortcut to select it. You can create a new list entry by typing it in the editing field and clicking Add. You can then select the item and press Enter.

AUTOINCLUDING BLOCK FILES

An autoinclude is a dictionary entry that specifies a block file. You write an autoinclude stroke and, when your notes are translated, the specified block file is automatically read into the document. The syntax for an autoinclude dictionary entry is {<filename} Substitute the name of the block file you want to use for filename. For example, {<exhibit} If you're in a block file and you want to make a dictionary entry for it, you can use Ctrl+D, fill in the steno, Enter, Ctrl+E, A, A, Enter and Eclipse will fill in the current filename. (Note: An autoinclude cannot appear in a conflict; if you create a conflict with an autoinclude in it, it will simply translate as text. For example, if you create a conflict such as \mark\{<EXMARK} and the second selection is made, it will translate as EXMARK instead of attempting to read in the file.)

Block Files 253

Block Files 254

CHAPTER 11 HYPERKEYS, MACROS,

AND

KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS

Though they look similar, your computers keyboard is a far cry from the typewriter keyboard. While typewriter keys generate two different characters (e.g. an uppercase and lowercase letter), computer keys can be mapped so that they perform various functions or carry out long sequences of keystrokes. With Total Eclipse, both your keyboard and writer have this ability. Two of the major means by which Eclipse extends keyboard functionality are through Hyperkeys and macros. The Hyperkeys system is like having a second keyboard in which each key can have a function different from its function in non-Hyperkey mode. You can use Total Eclipses preset Hyperkeys, or create your own custom set. A macro is a set of stored keystrokes. For example, a simple macro that moves your cursor to the end of the current line of text and types Advantage Software consists of the keystrokes End Shift+A D V A N T A G E Space Shift+S O F T W A R E. You can assign macros to keyboard shortcuts, Hyperkeys, or even define them in a dictionary.

Assigning functions and macros to the keyboard

You can assign any function or macro to a keyboard shortcut. You can even overwrite existing shortcuts so that they access a different function or a macro. Press Alt+U for User Settings and select the Edit tab. Click the Keyboard button. The Keyboard definitions dialog appears, displaying keyboard assignments for all Hyperkeys (when the Hyperkeys radio button is marked) and all standard keys (when the Standard radio button is marked). When adding a new key assignment, it does not matter whether the Standard or Hyperkeys button is marked. Click Add. The Keyboard Command dialog appears. Click in the Command field to open the drop-down list of available functions and macros. Each function on the list has a short description, the functions label as it appears on its menu description:

Hyperkeys, Macros, and Keyboard Shortcuts 255

Select the item you want to assign to the keyboard. To assign the shortcut to the standard keyboard, click the Standard radio button. To assign it to your Hyperkeys, click the Hyperkeys radio button. In the Keystroke field type the key or key combination you want to assign to the item. You can assign any combination of the Ctrl, Alt, and Shift keys, plus one character key. To assign a combination, you must simultaneously hold down all keys in the combination. Note: The drop-down box next to the Keystroke box is for combinations of keys that cant be typed in the box because the tell the dialog to close or the box to erase, such as Escape, Enter, Delete, etc. WARNING: Use care when assigning keys. If you select a combination that is already assigned to another item, the new assignment overwrites the original. For example, if you assign the J key to the Play back recording function, the J key will no longer type the letter j. Total Eclipse will not warn you before overwriting a typing key. It will warn you before overwriting a standard key or Hyperkey already assigned, and will list the name of the command or macro being replaced, so that you can more easily decide whether you can afford to get rid of it or if you're going to have to come up with a different keystroke Click OK. The Keyboard definitions dialog again becomes active. The new key assignment will appear in the display area for the appropriate keyboard (Standard or Hyperkeys).

Changing Hyperkey and standard key assignments

The procedure for changing the key assignment for existing Hyperkey or Standard key functions is similar to the procedure for adding new key assignments. 1. In Alt+U | Edit | Keyboard find and click on the item whose key assignment you want to change. 2. Click the Modify button. The Keyboard command dialog appears, with the selected item shown in the Command field.

Hyperkeys, Macros, and Keyboard Shortcuts 256

3. In the Keystroke field, type the new key or key combination you want to assign to the item. 4. Click OK. The Keyboard Definitions dialog again becomes active. The modified key assignment will appear in the display area for the appropriate keyboard (Standard or Hyperkeys). To remove an item from the lists of standard keyboard or Hyperkey assignments: 1. In the display area of the Keyboard Definitions dialog, select the item you want to 2. Click Delete. The item is removed from the list and the key or key combinations no longer have the function that had been assigned to them.

Printing a list of Standard keyboard and Hyperkey assignments

To print a list of the Standard or Hyperkey keyboard assignments: 1. Click the User Settings (Alt+U) | Edit | Keyboard button. The Keyboard Definitions dialog appears. 2. Click the Print button. The Print dialog appears. Make any necessary selections in this window, then click OK. Both the standard keyboard assignments and the Hyperkeys are printed.

Creating and editing macros

Macros store a series of sequential keystrokes so that the keystrokes are automatically entered whenever you call the macro. Once you have created a macro, you can assign it to a keyboard shortcut on either the standard keyboard or to your Hyperkeys. You can also assign a macro to a stroke outline in a dictionary, so that you can run editing macros from your steno writer while you write in realtime. The Total Eclipse macro editor is accessed from the User settings (Alt+U) | Edit | Macros button. The Macros dialog appears.

This window displays a list of pre-defined and user-created macros. Each macro is identified by a descriptive name. Hyperkeys, Macros, and Keyboard Shortcuts 257

To create a new macro: 1. Select the New button. The Macro editor dialog appears.

2. If a macro is highlighted when you click New, you will get a window containing the contents of the selected macro. You can make small changes and provide a new name, which allows you to create a series of similar macros. 3. If you hit the New button without selecting a macro, then you get a brand new, empty macro. 4. Type the keystrokes in the macro as if you were typing the procedure manually on the keyboard. The display area on the right side of the window lists each keystroke in the macro on a separate line. Key combinations (such as those used to type capital letters or to call functions) are listed on a single line. Note: If you make a mistake typing the macro, you can easily remove and insert strokes. Click on keystrokes you wish to remove and select the Delete button. (Note that you cant use your arrow keys, or hit the delete or backspace keys to correct an entry, because they will be added to the macro.) Click on the keystroke below the place you want to insert strokes and type in the additional stroke(s). Note: The representation for a space in macros is [ ]. 3. When you are done entering keystrokes, click in the Macro name: field and type a descriptive name for the macro. (Note: You must use the mouse to get out of the keystroke entry field because the macro editor interprets every keystroke as part of the macro.) 4. You can assign the macro to a shortcut keystroke by selecting the Speed Key button. This opens the Keyboard command dialog. Assign the macro to the standard keyboard or Hyperkeys, type the shortcut key combination in the Keystroke field, and select OK. 5. You can create a dictionary entry for the macro by selecting the Dict Entry button. This opens the steno emulation window. (See Appendix K page 379 for details on using the Steno emulator.) After you enter the steno stroke(s) for the entry, select OK to open a globaling dialog with the macro entry already filled in. Then hit [enter] or Ctrl+J to place it in the job dictionary, etc. If you already have a dictionary entry for that item, when you hit the Dict Entry button, the steno emulator will appear pre-loaded with the steno used for the existing dictionary entry in your main dictionary for that macro as a reminder that you already have an entry. Note that changing this steno does not remove the existing entry. It allows you to create an Hyperkeys, Macros, and Keyboard Shortcuts 258

additional alternative way to execute the macro, just as adding a new keystroke doesn't remove the existing keystroke. 6. Select the OK button in the Macro editor dialog. The new macro appears on the list in the Macros dialog. You can create additional macros, or select the OK button to return to the User settings dialog. Edit a macro In the Macros dialog, select the macro you want to edit. Click the Edit button. The Macro Editor dialog appears. The macros keystroke sequence is listed in the display area. 1. To remove a keystroke from the macro, select it, then click the Delete button. 2. To insert keystrokes, select the keystroke that is below where you want to insert strokes and then type the additional strokes. 3. You can use the Speed Key or Dict Entry buttons to add a keyboard assignment or dictionary entry for the macro. NOTE: This process does not change previous keyboard assignments or dictionary entries for the macro. To change or remove a keyboard assignment, see page 256. Macro Import/Export The macro list dialog has Import and Export buttons. You can highlight multiple macros and export them to a file that will be given a .mac extension. The Import button allows you to import these macro files. A word about importing: If you import a macro file and a macro already exists with the same name as a macro that you are importing, you will get an exists/overwrite? message. If you answer yes, the macro that you are importing will overwrite the existing one. If you answer no, no change will be made and the import function will move on to the next macro in the file being imported. Note that you can select multiple files to import in the macro list. This allows multiple macros to be distributed as individual files and users can then pick and choose which macros to import. If you wish to copy the contents of a macro, you can export the macro, rename your original and then import the macro you just exported. You will then have two duplicate macros, one with the original name and one with the new name. Two words of warning: 1. Macros are often assigned to keystrokes in the keyboard layout. These assignments are NOT stored in the export file, so if you import someone's Change Answer to THE DEPONENT macro and it's assigned to Ctrl+Alt+F4 to execute it, you will have the macro, but you will NOT have the keystroke to execute it and you will need to program that yourself. Remember, if you wish to import someone's keyboard settings, just use the User settings import and import their entire keyboard layout. 2. Macros often rely on keystrokes for commands being defined a certain way. If you share macros with someone who has modified their keyboard layout, they may not work. To avoid this, use Sharable macros.

Hyperkeys, Macros, and Keyboard Shortcuts 259

Printing a list of macros

The Macros dialog Print button will print a three-column list of all of the macros in the list. If you first select a series of macros, the print function will print only the macros you have selected and will print the contents of those macros as well, so that you can read the steps of the macro.

Toolbar Icons and Menu Items for User-Defined Macros

Under the Edit menu | Macros menu there are 15 pre-defined menu items for executing macros. These menu items will execute macros named, specifically, Macro1 through Macro15. You may include a description in the macro name by substituting a variable label, for example: Macro1|ASCII and Print This takes up a label slot from Macro Variable 1 if you are using macro variables in the contents of the macro,so your next macro variable will start with variable 2. In addition to the menu items, there are toolbar buttons available in the customize toolbars function, so you can display toolbar buttons that will execute these macros. The buttons have distinctive raised backgrounds, with a variety of familiar symbols, allowing you to find a symbol for a particular macro that would make sense to you.

Sharable macros
A button on the macro editing dialog allows you to add a command instead of a macro. This will allow you to create macros that can be shared with other users regardless of their keyboard layout. For example, let's say you wanted to create a macro that searches for the next ^ symbol. In previous versions, the macro would look like this: F5 Shift+6 Enter The problem with this macro is that if you were to export this to another Eclipse user, it might not work if they used a different keystroke for Find. For example, they may have changed Find to Ctrl+F and are using F5 to make a Fixed line, for example. To create a sharable macro, you can click the Add command to macro button and select the Find function from the list. The macro will then look like this: Cmd: Find Shift+6 Enter So macros can now contain combinations of commands and keystrokes. You can still use Ctrl and Alt commands in your macros, and when your macro is operating the controls of a dialog box, that's fine because those don't change. But if you're designing a macro to be

Hyperkeys, Macros, and Keyboard Shortcuts 260

shared with other users, it is better to make sure that any keystroke that is supposed to execute a command on the menus is replaced by a command line instead of a keystroke.

Macros in Autoreplacements
It is possible to include a macro inside an autoreplacement. For example: st=Street{M:cap two back} (The cap two back macro could be defined as Left Left Shift+F6, or the equivalent commands.) So, if you had I live on main in town. you could place the cursor on the i in in and type st[space] and get I live on Main Street in town. You can put as many macros as you like in whatever order you like: original=word1{M:macro1}word2{M:macro2}{M:macro3}etc. There are two main things to be aware of: 1. It is possible to use autoreplacements both in editing a document AND while typing text in an edit box in a dialog. HOWEVER: these two behave very differently. For example, the previously mentioned st= autoreplacement for making Street works great in a document, but would not work at all if you tried to do it in a globaling window. 2. The keystroke that is pressed to execute the autoreplacement will vary, and will always be executed IMMEDIATELY after the FIRST TYPED WORD. In the st=Street example, where the user typed the keys S/T/[space], the very FIRST thing that happens is that st becomes Street and the VERY NEXT thing that happens is that the [space] key is executed, THEN the rest of the autoreplacement (the macro) executes. The second item is perhaps the one to be most careful about. For example, you might create a macro intended to be used in the global window, such as Left Backspace Ctrl+K Ctrl+K to put something in all caps, and assign it to an autoreplacement: k={M:allcaps} You could use this in the middle of a global. If you typed {s:the court k} you would get {S:THE COURT}. However, if you were to attempt to use this autoreplacement macro at the END of a global, the results would not work. Why? Because if you were to hit k[enter], it would erase the k, then it would immediately process the [enter] key, resulting in the global's being completed, and THEN it would process the macro. The macros will always come after the activation keystroke is processed; if it waited until after the macros were finished to process the activation keystroke, the first example would turn into I live on Main Streetin town because the [space] would be processed after the macro was finished and the cursor was sitting on the s in Street.

Macros using dialogs

One of the most common problems when creating macros is caused by a bug in the Windows operating system that affects the Alt key. In certain circumstances, Windows ignores the Alt

Hyperkeys, Macros, and Keyboard Shortcuts 261

key in a sequence of macro keystrokes, altering the desired outcome of the macro. You are likely to experience this problem if you create macros that perform actions within dialogs. The problem occurs only when a text-editing field in a dialog window has the focus (focus means that a control is active, such as when a blinking cursor appears in a field, or a dashed border appears around a button). Normally, if you press the Alt key and the underlined letter of another control in the dialog, the focus will shift to that control. Within a macro, however, Windows ignores the Alt key and types the selected letter into the editing field. Fortunately, it is easy to correct this problem. Just insert an extra key sequence into the macro that shifts the focus out of the editing field. An additional Tab key may be all that is necessary. For example, consider the logical keystrokes you would use to create a macro to global one stroke, capitalizes the word, and place in the Job dictionary:
Ctrl+G Alt+C Ctrl+J Global one stroke Capitalize the word Place in Job Dictionary

While these keystrokes work when they are executed from the keyboard, a macro with these keystrokes does not work: When the Global dialog opens, the focus is in the Global editing field (which contains the globaled text), so the Alt key is ignored and the macro just enters C in the global field. Inserting one Tab keys after the Global dialog opens would properly shift the focus:
Ctrl+G Tab Alt+C Ctrl+J Global one stroke (Move focus to Capitalize button) Capitalize the word Place in Job Dictionary

In this example, a Tab is necessary to move the focus onto the Capitalize button, and the macro properly interprets the Alt+C keystroke and capitalizes the word.

Macro Groups
Macro groups allow you to define a series of macros which are executed by hitting a single keystroke, then choosing from the group by hitting a secondary keystroke. Here's how it works: Define a series of macros using the following syntax: {Group name:Macro name}. Assign a keystroke for any one of those macros (usually the first one, just to make it easy to remember which.) For example, here is a series of macro names: {Backscan:Untranslate} {Backscan:Conflict} {Backscan:Question} {Backscan:Answer} {Backscan:R-Unresolved conflict} Note that the last conflict was given a title that started with R to avoid a conflict with Untranslate. When you hit the keystroke assigned to {Backscan:Untranslate} (or any other macros in this macro group) it will bring up a tool window containing the following list: Untranslate Hyperkeys, Macros, and Keyboard Shortcuts 262

Conflict Question Answer R-Unresolved conflict You can then pick the macro you wish to execute by using the arrow keys and [enter], or by clicking with the mouse, but by FAR the most popular way to select one will be to hit the first letter. Note that if you hit the first letter, you will NOT need to hit Enter to get it to accept the choice. It will execute immediately. So, for example, if you assigned {Backscan:Untranslate} to the hyperkey [r] you could then hit rq to scan backwards to the last question (provided you wrote your {Backscan:Question} macro properly.)

Macro Variables
Macro variables allow you to specify parts of the macro that can change from use to use. For example, lets say you wanted a macro that would open up a transcript, copy the title page out of it, then close the transcript. The keystrokes might be something like this: Cmd:Open Transcript JOBNAME [enter] Cmd:Top of document Cmd:Block Mark Cmd:Go to.. 2 [enter] Cmd:Block Copy Cmd:Close document The trouble is that JOBNAME will change each time you use the macro. You need a way to have the macro prompt for the job name BEFORE it executes. That's what a macro variable is for. Instead of typing in an actual job name, use the Add command to macro button and find the Macro variable command (there are five of them.) The resulting macro will look like: Cmd:Open Transcript Cmd:Macro variable 1 [enter] Cmd:Top of document etc... Hyperkeys, Macros, and Keyboard Shortcuts 263

Now, when this macro is executed, it will first ask Enter text: and you can type in a job name and hit [enter] and then it will run the macro with the job name in place of the macro variable 1. If you want something more specific than Enter text: add a pipe sign and a prompt to the macro name. For example, if the name of the macro was Copy title page|Enter job name then it would ask Enter job name when you ran the macro. Note that you can have up to five DIFFERENT variables in each macro. The variables are reusable, so you can use the same ones in as many macros as you want. You only need to use more than one if you have a need to enter several DIFFERENT pieces of information in the SAME macro. Naturally, if you wanted different prompts for each of them, you would use Macro name|Prompt 1|Prompt 2|etc.. as the macro name. Note also that if you have the SAME macro variable several times in the same macro, you will only need to enter the information once. Here, for example, is an abbreviated sample macro that takes the current marked block and replaces it with a new word and ALSO adds an autoreplacement to the autoreplacement table so that that correction will be made automatically in the future: Copy the marked block Delete the block Macro variable 1 (types in the replacement) Open the User settings Arrow to the Programming tab Select Autoreplacements Make a new line Paste the block containing the original text type = Macro variable 1 (types in the same replacement again) Exit the user settings Note: If you hit escape on a macro variable prompt, the system will abort the entire macro execution process, and no part of the macro will be executed.

Hyperkeys, Macros, and Keyboard Shortcuts 264

CHAPTER 12 AUTOMATIC INDEXING

Three components are necessary to automatically create an index page in Total Eclipse:

The information in the transcript to be indexed, such as a speaker name or exhibit description The Eclipse index line A header file, which helps define the format of your indexes

WHAT YOU NEED TO KNOW

You will need to be familiar with the following:

Basic editing in Total Eclipse Working with Print Commands Creating and inserting block files Creating and using scan fields, including pick lists and variable fields Setting margins and tabs for paragraph types Creating custom paragraph types The difference between working in the Master format and current document, and how to switch between the two

It is important that you be comfortable with all the above tasks before proceeding. Automatic indexing can use all of these features.

SETTING UP THE INDEX PARAGRAPH TYPE

Automatic indexing requires at least one custom paragraph type to be set up in User Settings beforehand. Later editions of Total Eclipse provide you a default paragraph type called Index1. It is intended for this purpose, however you will likely need to change some of the default settings for that paragraph type. You may use the Index1 paragraph type, or create your own. Before you can start, you need to know where you want the following items to appear in your index:

the Index Item page number where the Body Text starts and where you want it to wrap line number and volume number (if your index has them)

Define the locations of these items in terms of spaces from the left margin. For example, you might say that the Index Item is 5 spaces in, the Body Text appears between 20 and 40, and

Automatic indexing 265

the page number appears in column 45. With this information, we can now set up the index paragraph type.

Create And Name Your Custom Paragraph

1. Go to User Settings | Paragraphs tab. 2. Make sure you are in the Master Format. Click the Master Format option button if it is not already selected. 3. Click New. 4. A window will appear prompting you for a paragraph name. Type the name you want and press Enter. If you only need one format for your indexes, and thus do not need multiple paragraph types, give it a simple name like Index or Index1. There are three common methods of naming index paragraphs:

assigning each a number (Index1, Index2) putting the word Index followed by a brief description (IndexExb, IndexWit) putting the letter x followed by a longer description (xWitness, xDepo).

However, you can name them anything you want.

Set Tabs
1. Go to User Settings | Paragraphs tab if you are not there already. 2. Make sure you are in the Master Format. Click the Master Format option button if it is not already selected. 3. Select the index paragraph from the list of paragraph types. 4. Click the Advanced button. 5. Click the Tab Stops button. 6. Click the Clear All button to delete the default tab stops. 7. Assign a tab to the column you want the page number to land on. To assign a tab, type the number of the column in the text box at the top right, then click Add. Set the tabs to where you want the LAST digit of the page number to appear. For example, if you deal with three-digit page numbers and you want it to start on column 40, set the tab to column 42. 8. Assign additional tabs for line number and column number, if you use them. It is best to add the tabs from left to right so Tab #1 will be the first tab going from left to right, Tab #2 the second tab in, etc.

Set Margins
1. Go to User Settings | Paragraphs tab if you are not there already. 2. Make sure you are in the Master Format. Click the Master Format option button if it is not already selected. Automatic indexing 266

3. Set Indentation to where you want the Index Item to appear. For example if you want the Index Item to be 5 spaces in, set indentation to 5. 4. If you are using Body Text, set Text Column to where you want the Body Text to begin. Be sure to set this number high enough to allow sufficient room for the Index Item. 5. Set Left Margin to the same number as Text Column. Left Margin dictates where the second line of Body Text will appear if it is too long for one line. Stylistically, this will be the same as Text Column, because you dont want the first or subsequent lines to indent: Exhibit 5 A letter from John Doe to Jane Doe dated 5/16/99 27

6. Click OK to leave User Settings and save the paragraph type. Here is a graphical representation of the index components and the margins you need to set up to determine their placement:

Some tips on setting up your index paragraphs:

Make sure you are making the change in the Master Format and not the current document. You may have multiple index paragraph types. However, it is only necessary if you require more than one format for your indexes. Usually one is enough. The difference between Indentation and Left Margin/ Text Column is the amount of space allotted for the Index Item. So, as a practical matter, set Left Margin and Text Column to at least 10 higher than the Indentation to allow enough room. The Index Item does not wrap. As such, it is well suited for short items only. If you need something longer in your index, set it up as Body Text. Set Right Margin to at least 3 lower than the first tab stop. This is so the Body Text does not run over the page numbers. The paragraph name is case sensitive. If the paragraph is called IndexPar, then be sure to put IndexPar in your index lines. INDEXPAR or Indexpar will not work correctly. Index paragraphs containing long descriptions will be moved so that they appear entirely on the next page, and the continuation block file Automatic indexing 267

will be loaded before the entire paragraph instead of at the beginning of the next one.

CREATING INDIVIDUAL INDEX LINES

Now that the index paragraphs are set up, we can focus on placing and filling out the index lines. Each item that you want in your index needs to have its own index line.

Components Of An Index Line

An index line has five components which you can specify in the Automatic index item dialog. 1. Index name 2. Index Item 3. Paragraph Type (Format) 4. Body Text (Description) 5. Location Format (set in Location toolbox)

Inserting An Index Line

You can insert an index line in any of three ways: 1. Manually, using the Automatic index item function (Shift+Alt+X), found in the Edit menu | Insert submenu; or by pressing Alt+N, the letter I, and Enter. The index line will appear above the paragraph in which the cursor is currently located. 2. By creating an index line in an include file, so the index line is inserted whenever exhibit parentheticals, examination markers, etc are encountered. 3. Using Regular Expressions, which search for a pattern, and every time that pattern is encountered, it acts as of there is an index line above it. Using Regular Expressions allows you to generate an automatic index without any preparation prior to the translation and editing of the transcript. For details on using Regular Expressions to insert index lines, see page 273. Note: An index line is a print command. Like other print commands, index lines can be visible or not. For purposes of learning about index lines, you will probably find it easier to have them visible at all times. To do this, press Alt+U to bring up User Settings; click the Display; and make sure the Print Commands check box is checked. Inserting an index line using the wizard You can insert an index line using a wizard that provides guidance for entering the required information and placing it in the correct syntax and order. The wizard then inserts the information into an index print command. To use the wizard to insert an index line, press Shift+Alt+X. The Automatic index item window will appear. Automatic indexing 268

Enter an Index name, EXHIBITS for example. Once you have entered an index name, it will be available as a choice in the drop-down list.
Command Speed Key Menu Toolbar Icon Insert index item Shift+Alt+X F10/Edit/Insert /Index item

In the Item: field enter the Index item, in the example Exhibit 1. In the Description: field enter the Body Text. If you have none, leave it blank. The Format: is the paragraph type you are using. In the example, Index1 has been chosen from the list of paragraph types. In the Location toolbox you tell Eclipse whether you want page/line/volume numbers, and where you want them to appear.

After specifying your settings, click OK and the Index line will appear in your transcript. You can also insert an index line manually. To insert one, press Alt+N, and then press the letter I, and then press Enter. The index line will appear above the paragraph in which the cursor is currently located. For details on filling in the line manually, see below, page 270. The pipe symbol (Shift+\) is used to separate the components of the index line. The In: at the beginning appears automatically. In: EXHIBITS | Exhibit 1 | IndexExb | register forms | {TR:1}{P}

Index Name

Index Item

Index Name

Paragraph Type

Body Text

Location Format

The first part of the index line is called the Index Name. The Index Name tells Eclipse which index to put this item into. You might have multiple indexes in a document, such as an index for Exhibits and an index for Witnesses. Automatic indexing 269

There are four different methods you can use to input the Index Name: TYPE IT IN: Yes, you can just type it in when you insert the index lines. This is the most common method. BLANK FIELD: You can use a blank field like the ones you use on your title and certificate pages. Put the cursor in the index line at the point where the Index Item should appear, and then press (Ctrl+A) to insert the blank field.

In:

| Index Item | Paragraph | Body Text|{TR:1}{P} You would then use the (Ctrl+E) command to fill the field in. PICK LIST: You can also use a scan field that allows you to pick from a list. Create it as above, except that the scan field will use a list file. Then when you press (Ctrl+E) to scan to the field, you get a list of index names to pick from. This list contains selections for witnesses for the defendant and plaintiff, and exhibits for the defendant and plaintiff. Just select the one you want, as you would normally do when selecting from a pick list to fill in a scan field. CONFLICT: Similar to dictionary conflicts, it works like this: In: DEFWIT\PLWIT You do not select the conflict. Instead, the system selects it for you; it selects the last index name that was used. This method is not recommended, however, since you may not want the last one used.

Index Item This is what you want to be indexed. Commonly this is an attorneys name, a witnesss name, or an exhibit number. Important note about the index item: it is only suited for small pieces of information. It must fit on one line and still allow plenty of room for the page number and other components of the index. It will not wrap to the next line. So if you want to index something longer, use Body Text for this purpose instead. There are also a few different ways to fill in the index item: TYPE IT IN: This is the most straightforward way to do it, but it is not very automatic. BLANK FIELD: You can use a blank field as you would on your title page. Press Ctrl+E to scan to that field and fill it in. BLANK FIELD WITH VARIABLE: If you assign the same variable to multiple blank fields, filling in one field with the variable will fill

Automatic indexing 270

them all in. This is very useful for the direct examination where you want to index by the witness name.

Witness
1 2 3 , having been first duly sworn, testified as follows: EXAMINATION

In: xDepExams| Witness | xDepExam || {TR:1}{P} In the above example, both blank fields have the WITNESS variable. When you do Ctrl+E to fill in the witness name on Line 1, it will automatically fill out the Index Item in the index line. USE A WILDCARD: A wildcard is a function that will pull some text, commonly a speaker name or exhibit number, from the following line of the transcript. A later section covers wildcards in detail.

Paragraph Type In Total Eclipse, you have to create a custom paragraph type for use with automatic indexing. This paragraph type is used to set margins for the various items in the index, including the page and line numbers. If you put + before the paragraph name it means to add a blank line before the item automatically. This means if you have an Index line such as this: In:EXHIBITS|No. 2|+Index1|A letter|{TR:1}{P} you will end up with a blank, single-spaced Fixed line right before an Index1 paragraph containing the item No. 2 with A letter and the page number on it. And it adds this extra line AFTER sorting the items, so there is no further effort necessary to ensure the correct order or formatting. To enter the paragraph type you can: TYPE IT IN: You can just type it in each time. PICK LIST: You can also use a scan field that allows you to pick from a list. Create a list file with the names of your various paragraph types, and create a scan field in the index line to access that list. When you press (Ctrl+E) to scan to the field, you get a list of paragraph types, which you can quickly pick from.

This part of the index line does not lend itself to an ordinary blank field. It would work, but really doesnt save you any time over just typing it in. Single- and double-spacing Spacing is determined by the paragraph style. On the User settings | Paragraphs | Advanced button, where you set the tab stops, there is an option called Default spacing. Set as desired.

Automatic indexing 271

If you want some of your indexes single-spaced and others double-spaced, you will need two different paragraph styles. Body Text (Description) The body text is a description of the Index Item. For example, if the index item is merely the exhibit number, you could use the Body Text to enter a detailed description of each exhibit. The Body Text is optional; you can just leave it blank if you dont want to use it. Body Text can also be used instead of Index Item, or both may be used together. TYPE IT IN: This is the most straightforward way to do it, but it is not very automatic. BLANK FIELD: You can use a blank field as you would on your title page. Press Ctrl-E to scan to that field and fill it in. USE A WILDCARD: Again, a wildcard will pull some text, commonly a speaker name or exhibit number, from the following line of the transcript. We will learn more about wildcards later on.

Location Format This is the part of the index line where you tell Eclipse whether you want page/line/volume numbers, and where you want them to appear. Fill this part of the index line out by typing it in. This information is a special code that indicates what items to put in the index and where they appear. {P} Insert page number. {L} Insert line number. {V} Insert volume number. {TR:n} Position the following item at right-aligned tab stop n. {TL:n} Position the following item at left-aligned tab stop n. {TC:n} Position the following item at centered tab stop n. Taken together, {TR:1}{P} would insert a page number at Tab Stop 1. {TR:2}{L} would insert a line number at Tab Stop 2. {TR:1}{V} would insert a volume number at TabStop 1. {TR:1}{P}{TR:2}{L} would insert a page number at Tab Stop 1 and the line number at Tab Stop 2. You would almost always want TR, because you want your page numbers to right-align. If you right-align the page numbers, they will look like this: Exhibit 1 Exhibit 2 Exhibit 3 193 3 75

If you left-align the page numbers, they will look like this, which is usually not the preferred layout:

Automatic indexing 272

Exhibit 1 Exhibit 2 Exhibit 3

3 75 193

Put the tab stop first, then the item to insert, for example {TR:1}{P} If you want a page and line number, put them both in the last part of the index line, e.g. {TR:1}{P}{TR:2}{L}. Do not separate different items in this part of the index line with a pipe, space, or anything else. Just put them next to each other. Also, do not put any spaces anywhere in this line. If you do you may get unexpected results when you generate the index. You can put roman numerals in index page, line and volume numbers by putting in an upper or lower-case R in the command to insert the number. For example, {TR:3}{Pr} tells the system to put the page number in lower-case roman numerals right flush on tab stop three. {TR:4}{VR} tells the indexer to put the volume number in upper case roman numerals right flush on tab stop four.

Regular Expression index lines

Normally, an index line in the transcript takes the following form: INDEX|Item|Format|Body|Location Copies of index lines in this format are placed immediately above the paragraphs where the indexable content appears, so normally they will be placed in block files that are used for exhibit parentheticals, examination markers, etc. There is a sixth and final item that can optionally be added to an index line, and instead of placing many copies of this index line in the transcript, you only need one: INDEX|Item|Format|Body|Location|RegularExpression Index lines in this format should be placed near the beginning of the transcript, after where you place the sorting lines, such as EXAM|ALPHASORT A regular expression index line is identical in every way to a normal index line. It follows this simple rule: Any paragraph in the document that contains text that matches the regular expression search will behave AS IF it was preceded by the index line associated with the regular expression. Example regular expression index line: EXBT|\1|Index1||{TR:1}{P}|Exhibit (\d+) The regular expression is Exhibit (\d+), which means to match any pattern consisting of the word Exhibit, followed by a space, followed by a series of at least one digits (at least one.) This would match a paragraph containing Exhibit 3 or Exhibit 27, for example, but not exhibit 3 or Exhibit doesn't, etc. Automatic indexing 273

For EVERY paragraph in the document that contains that pattern, it would behave as though that paragraph was preceded by an index line containing EXBT|\1|Index1||{TR:1}{P}, which means that it would add an Index1 paragraph to the EXBT index, with the page number on tab stop 1. Note that the way this expression is written, it would work even in the body of a question or answer, for example. If you ONLY wanted it to index the exhibit where it appeared inside a parenthetical, you could use something like \(.*Exhibit (\d+) Special note: The index item in this example is \1, which is a backreference. Both the index item and the body can contain backreferences which will fill in the appropriate part of the matched pattern. Special syntax: There are some rare occasions where you need to search for a paragraph break as part of a pattern. If you must do this, use {N} to indicate ANY paragraph break. Also, do NOT include any spaces before or after it, because paragraph indentations do not count as spaces. Paragraph labels DO count in a regular expression search, so you can use them to search for and extract speaker names, etc. Here are a few more examples: EXBT|No. \1|Index1|-- \2|{TR:1}{P}|\(Thereupon, Exhibit (\d+), (.*), was .*\) This sample would take any parenthetical in the following format: (Thereupon, Exhibit 2, A contract between Mr. Smith and Mr. Jones, was marked.) and convert it into an index paragraph like so: No. 2 -- A contract between Mr. Smith and Mr. Jones 63

EXAM|\2 -- \1|Index1||{TR:1}{P}|(DIRECT|CROSS|RE-DIRECT|RECROSS) EXAMINATION{N}BY (.*): This sample would take the following sequence: DIRECT EXAMINATION BY MR. SMITH: and turn it into an index paragraph like so: MR. SMITH -- DIRECT and would ALSO take the following sequence: CROSS EXAMINATION BY MR. JONES Automatic indexing 274 12

and turn it into an index paragraph like so: MR. JONES -- CROSS 53

You can use as many different regular expression lines as you wish, because each one will be applied to ALL of the paragraphs in a document. That means you can use them to generate multiple indexes easily (such as one chronological and one alphabetical) or to easily subdivide indexes according to context. For example: PLEXBT|\1|Index1||{TR:1}{P}|Plaintiff's Exhibit (\d+) DFEXBT|\1|Index1||{TR:1}{P}|Defendant's Exhibit (\d+) These two lines would ensure that plaintiff's exhibits and defendant's exhibits were placed in two separate indexes, assuming that the parentheticals contained those strings, such as (Thereupon, Plaintiff's Exhibit 5 was marked.) With regular expressions, you can make the patterns as flexible as necessary. For example, the expression Plaintiff'?s'? Exhibits? ([A-Z0-9\-]+) would find Plaintiff's Exhibit 23 or Plaintiffs' Exhibit A or Plaintiff's Exhibits 24-27 Here is some further reference material for regular expressions: Single character commands . (period) Represents any single character. d.g returns both dig and dog. If need to search for an actual period, use \. \w \W \d \D \b [a-e] Represents any word character Represents any non-word character Represents any digit Represents any non-digit Represents a word boundary. for\b finds for/ for this/ for? but not forget. Represents one of the characters that are between the brackets. Represents any of the characters that are between a-e and h-x. Represents any of the characters that are between a and e. you

[abc123] [a-eh-x]

[^a-s] Represents any character that is not between a and s.

Number commands * + Finds zero or more of the item preceding the *. Ab*c finds Abc, Abbc, Abbbc, etc., but since the number can be zero, it will also find Ac. Finds one or more of the item preceding +. AX.+4 finds AXb4, not AX4. Automatic indexing 275

? Finds zero or one of the item preceding the ?. Texts? finds Text and Texts and x(ab|c)?y finds xy, xaby, or xcy. {2} Defines the exact number of times that the item preceding the opening bracket occurs. tre{2} finds tree.

{1,2} Defines a range of times that the item preceding the opening bracket can occur. tre{1,2}s finds parts of both trees and trespass. {1,} Defines the minimum number of times that a character can occur. tre{2,} finds tree, treee, and treeeee but not treated.

Every regular expression is a sequence of character commands optionally followed by number commands. If a character command appears without a number command following it, the assumption is that it should appear exactly once. So Exhibit [A-Z], will find Exhibit A, but not Exhibit AA. Since the + means one or more the expression Exhibit [A-Z]+, will find Exhibit AA, Exhibit BBB, Exhibit WXYZ, etc. Special commands () | Grouping. This defines the characters inside the parentheses as a reference or a group. For example, a(bc)?d finds ad or abcd Either/or. Finds the terms that occur before or after the |. For example, this| that finds either this or that. Note that you can have a pattern that contains a partial either/or option by using the parentheses. For example, Mr.|Mrs. Smith would not search for Mr. Smith or Mrs. Smith. Instead, it would search for Mr. or Mrs. Smith. The correct pattern would be (Mr.|Mrs.) Smith

Only finds the search pattern if the pattern is at the beginning of a paragraph. For example, ^Okay would find the word Okay only if it appeared at the beginning of a paragraph. $ Only finds the search pattern if the pattern appears at the end of a paragraph. Objection$ would find the word Objection only if it appeared at the end of a paragraph. The begin/end commands can work together. ^Okay$ would find any paragraph that contained nothing but the text Okay \ Search interprets the special character that follows the \ as a normal character not as a regular expression. yes\? specifically finds yes?, not yes or ye (which would happen if you searched for yes? because the ? means zero or one.) and

\1, \2, \3 Represents a backreference to previously matched sequences in parentheses. The expression b(o|e)\1t finds boot or beet Backreferences in regular expressions Backreferences allow you to take matched sequences of text and re-use them either in the search pattern or in the replacement. The number of the backreference indicates which sequence in parentheses you want to re-use. For example, if you search for (Plaintiff's|Defendant's) Exhibit ([A-Z]) Automatic indexing 276

It will find either Plaintiff's or Defendant's, then Exhibit, then any single letter from A Z. Once it finds that string, the backreference \1 will either contain Plaintiff's or Defendant's, and the backreference \2 will contain whatever Exhibit letter was found.

Header Files
If you want certain text to appear at the top of your index, such as an overall title such as E X H I B I T S or a header for the top of each column in the index, you can include that information in a header file. A header file is simply an .ECL file containing the information you want to appear at the top of an index. The header file might look something like this: INDEX OF EXHIBITS MARKED RECEIVED You would then have the Index Item or Body Text arranged to appear under Index of Exhibits, and page numbers to appear under the Marked and Received columns. When you generate the index it will look something like this: INDEX OF EXHIBITS Exhibit 1 Exhibit 2 MARKED 15 19 RECEIVED 24 30

A header file must have the same name as the Index Name, and must be stored in the users block file directory. When you generate the index, the header file is inserted at the top of the index with the same name as the header file. If you want the index to start on a new page, include a page break at the top of the header file.

Continuation Headers
If your index is several pages long, you may want an index header to appear at the top of each page. To accomplish this, create a second header file as above, but append a 2 to the filename. So if the Index Name is EXHIBITS, the continuation header file would be called EXHIBITS2.ECL. Your second block file could contain the continued parenthetical exactly as you want it to appear.

Automatic indexing 277

If you use a continuation header, it is recommended that you insert a page break at the beginning of the file. This ensures that the continuation header will always appear at the top of each page. Some index items are two or three lines long, so there is no guarantee that the continuation block will be inserted at exactly line one unless you have a page break at the beginning of it.

Putting Index Lines in Block Files

Remember, this is automatic indexing. To be sure, you can insert an index line anywhere you like into an existing transcript, and type in the information. But by placing them in our block files we can make the process automatic. Certain common occurrences require entries in your index. Some of these are sworn statements examination cross-examination re-direct examination re-cross examination the marking and identification of exhibits

These events each have their own block files. By adding index lines to the block files we can create all the index lines we need with little or no additional work. Lets look at a typical block file:

1 2 3

Witness

having been first duly sworn, testified as follows: EXAMINATION

This is a complete block file, for a sworn statement. Whenever someone is sworn in, youd read in this file, fill out the scan field with the deponents name, and continue writing. By Automatic indexing 278

adding the appropriate index line to the block file, we can automatically insert all the index lines we need into the transcript. This is the same block file with an index line added. (You may remember this graphic from before.) 1 2 3

Witness

having been first duly sworn, testified as follows: EXAMINATION In: xDepExams| Witness | xDepExam || {TR:1}{P}

Now, filling in the Witness name in the scan field on Line 1 will also add it to the index line. Zero additional keystrokes. When you generate the index this deponents name will appear in the DepExams index.

Creating Automatic Index Lines Using Variable Fields

When adding generic index lines to your block files, the trick is to create the index lines such that the content of the index lines will be generated for you. If you generally enter information into your autoincludes by filling out scan fields, then it makes sense to also use scan fields in your index lines. By using variable fields, filling out one field (which you are already doing) will also fill out the index line.

Making it Automatic
Certain common occurrences require entries in your index. Some of these are sworn statements; examination; cross-, re-direct and re-cross examinations; and the marking and identification of exhibits. Each of these events already has its own block file. By adding index lines to the block files, we can create all the individual index lines we need with little or no additional work. But, the information is going to change each time it is filled in. You can account for this by using wildcards in the index line.

WILDCARD INDEXING
You can use wildcard symbols in your index lines to automatically pull information from the following paragraph.

The asterisk is the basic wildcard unit; it means find anything. Use it in place of text that will change from item to item. For instance, if you use the string Exhibit * was marked, the automatic index procedures will search for a string starting with Exhibit, followed by anything, followed by was marked. It would be able to find, for example, Exhibit 1 was marked or Exhibit 4B was marked, et cetera. You can have as many asterisks in your search string as necessary to allow for variability.

Automatic indexing 279

Suppose your sworn block file is as follows:

You need the deponents name, which will be filled into the blank field on Line 2, added to the WITNESS index. While some people will put a scan into the index line, a better approach is to use a wildcard. The * character in an index line will pull everything from the following paragraph into that section of the index line. If you make an index line that looks like this:

Each time you read in this block file and fill in the field, the * will pull the name you filled into the Index Item section of the index line.

Filling in the scan field each time will also fill in the index line automatically, because the * in the index line copies in whatever you entered into the scan field. In the above, JOHN DOE would be the Index Item. Once the index line is correctly set up in the block file, generating the index requires no extra work. You have to read in the block file and fill in the field, which you have to do anyway, and the index lines fills itself in automatically. All you have to do is set up the Index Name, Paragraph Style, and Location Format for how you want entries of this sort to look in your index. Limiting Wildcards Suppose that in your sworn block file, a comma appears after the persons name:

Automatic indexing 280

If you use the * by itself, the comma will also appear in the index, as the * will copy in the entire contents of the following paragraph. To exclude something from being copied into your index line, put it in brackets [ ].

You put the [,] after the *, because you want the wildcard to copy in everything before the comma. If the text you want excluded from the index is at the beginning, you would put the bracketed material first. To get something from the middle, use bracketed text at both ends. This is typical, as you may need to exclude large sections of the text of the parenthetical:

The * will copy everything between [Whereupon ] and [ was]. The word Exhibit and the number would appear in the index. If you wanted just the number and not the word Exhibit, you would do:

Note that spaces are included inside the brackets. This will exclude the spaces from the result. A search between [Whereupon] and [was] would include the spaces, and youd get extra spaces in your index. < and > - The angle brackets (greater than and less than symbols) are used to surround text that should be inserted into the index. For instance, in the previous example, you might want the word Plaintiff's to appear before the word Exhibit, even though it does not

Automatic indexing 281

appear in the paragraph below the index command line. In that case, the index command line would have <Plaintiff's> *[ was]. Where to Use Wildcards The Index Item and Description sections of the index line lend themselves to using wildcards. You can place them in one or the other, or both:

The above index line has wildcards in both the Index Item and Description, and uses limiting techniques covered earlier.

Speaker Name Wildcard

The text M:* will pull the paragraph label, commonly the speaker name, from the next paragraph.

When examination begins, it is customary to write a by-line indicating who is doing the questioning immediately after reading in the above block file. The M:* will copy the speaker name from the by-line that follows into that section of the index line. C:* works the same as M:* does, but it inserts the label into your index in ALL CAPS. Example: If a speaker paragraph starting with MR. SMITH is preceded by an index item that reads Examination By M:* will read Examination By Mr. Smith: in the index. The _ character can be used to indicate a literal character in the automatic index wildcard commands. Some automatic indexes required the [, ], < and > characters, which are special command characters in the indexing. Now you can put a _ before them if you want them to be literal. For example, [Exhibit]* means look for Exhibit but don't insert it, but _[No. *_] means search for [No. *] in the text, with the asterisk representing any text.

Adding text
If you want the index to contain text that does not appear in the following paragraph, place it in angle brackets < >:

Automatic indexing 282

The index entry would read Plaintiffs Exhibit followed by the number, even though the word Plaintiffs does not appear in the autoinclude. Again notice that there is a space inside the angle brackets. Without it, the result would be PlaintiffsExhibit.

Separator Character
You may want a period or some other character between the index item and the page number, like this: Exhibit 1......................... 17 Exhibit 2. ....................... 61 To do this, include {S} in the Location Format, plus whatever character you want to use as the separator immediately after the S.

Some common separators and their effects: {S.} Exhibit 1......................... 17 {S-} Exhibit 1------------------------- 17 {S. }Exhibit 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Note that the separator may be more than one character.

Multiple Instances of an Item

If the same index entry appears on multiple pages, you may want an index entry that looks like this: BY MR. SMITH ....................... 61, 98 To accomplish this, the second instance of the index line will have a comma in the location format, in place of the tab stop:

When Eclipse encounters an index line with no location format, where all the other components match a previous entry exactly, it will copy that text into the existing entry. Note that if you plan to do this, when setting up tab stops you will need to allow more space for page numbers.

Multi-column Indexing
You may want a two- or four-column arrangement for an index:

Automatic indexing 283

To accomplish this, you will need to set up multiple tab stops in the paragraph style. Then, in the index line you set the tab stop to indicate which column you want this particular page number to appear in:

The first index line would put the page number at Tab Stop 1, under Direct. The second index line (which would be elsewhere in the document) would put the page number at Tab Stop 3, under Re-Direct. As with multiple-instance indexing, the other components of the index line must match exactly. If not, two separate index lines will result.

Generating an Index
To generate an index, go to the position where you want it to appear, and then press Ctrl+I to open the Make Automatic Index Wizard. You will be asked which volume numbers you want to index, and if this is an index of only this job or of multiple files. Most of the time you will just be indexing one document, so you can quickly press Enter twice to bypass these dialogs. The index is generated for the whole document, unless you use volumes to specify a portion of the document. Should you want to index multiple volumes or documents, answer yes and follow the prompts given. When indexing multiple files to create a multi-volume index, you can move the files around in the list by using the Ctrl+Up and Ctrl+Down arrows. It will search the text for a marker that indicates that an index was previously inserted. If it finds such a marker, it will ask you if you wish to remove the existing index before generating a new one. If you answer yes, the old index will be deleted before the new one is generated, and the page numbers on the newly created index will be accurate. (Note that indexes generated in older versions of Eclipse will not auto-delete since they were not created with the special marks.) Automatic indexing 284

You will then see a Preview of your index. If there are any problems with the formatting, you can click Reject or press Escape to cancel, without the index being generated. Clicking Accept, or pressing Enter, will accept the index. Notice that there is an option to indicate how many pages are added to your index. When you generate an index, the extra pages you are generating will change the pagination of the document. Eclipse needs to add page numbers to account for this; otherwise, your index will be inaccurate. When you accept the index, a certain number of pages will appear in the Preview dialog. This page numbers will be incremented by this amount. Eclipse suggests a number of pages; usually the default setting will be correct. If its not, you can increase or decrease it as needed. As mentioned earlier, it is good practice to include a page break in each index header file and in whatever block file follows your index. This prevents errors in the re-calculation of page numbers.

Sorting the Exams Index by Deponent

If you want to make an examinations index that looks like this: JANE DOE By Mr. By Mr. By Mr. By Mr. JOHN Q. By By By Mason Matlock Webster Smith 90 104 116 135 23 44 76 139 166

PUBLIC Mr. Mason Mr. Matlock Mr. Webster

RICHARD ROE By Mr. Matlock By Mr. Webster

You will have to set up the paragraph type and your index lines a certain way. You will also need at least one additional paragraph style. If the Indentation for an indexing paragraph style is set to 1, the Index Item will be invisible. (Note: the interface will not let you type a minus sign. Use the spin control or arrow keys to set this to 1.) This allows you to use the Index Item as sort criteria. To get the index to sort in this fashion, you would put the deponents name as the Index Item for all index lines that go into this index. You would then put the attorneys name in the Description. The index line for Jane Doe being examined by Mr. Mason would look like this: Automatic indexing 285

The Index Item is Doe (note trailing space) and the Description is BY MR. MASON. You would set the Indentation to 1, and set the Left Margin, Right Margin, Text Column, and tab stops to dictate where you want the attorneys name and the page number to appear, as normal. In the above graphic, Left Margin and Text Column for IndexPar would be 5; tab stop 1 would be 30; and Right Margin would be about 26. To insert the deponents name in the index, you would make a line like this:

You have to use a different paragraph style because the deponents name JANE DOE is not indented, where as BY MR. MASON is. The Left Margin/Body Text would be 0; all other settings would be the same as in IndexPar (though Right Margin and tab stops are not crucial, as there is no page number being inserted). The Location Format has been omitted, because we do not wish to insert a page, line or volume number. Note that the Index Item for the name does not have a trailing space, whereas it does for the attorneys that interview that name. This is so the deponents name will always sort first in the list. This approach can be used in conjunction with wildcard indexing, as well as any other technique covered in this document. A sworn statement that accomplishes this setup might look like this:

There is a field in the Index Item section of the index line. You will probably need to manually enter the sort criteria, as it is difficult to design a wildcard setup that will get it automatically. (A setting of [ ]*[,] in the Index Item would get the text between a space and the comma, isolating the last name in most cases. But you could get a person with a two-word name, or multiple deponents with the same last name, making it impractical to create a wildcard entry that merely isolates the last name.) And the line in the direct/cross/redirect/recross block file would look like this:

Automatic indexing 286

The M:* in the Description will copy in the speaker name that follows. There is a field in the Index Item, as above, for you to enter the sort criterion. The trailing space is included in the Index Item as well.

FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS

Do I have to use all five components of the index line?
Not every index line requires all five components. Some can be omitted, however there are some rules to follow when doing so. If you are creating your index line and come to the point where you want to omit something, simply move on to the next pipe. Dont even put a space. Just put nothing. For example, this is an index line that does not include Body Text: In: DEFEX|Exhibit 1|IndexPar||{TR:1}{P} Body Text (blank) You must include all the pipes, unless you are omitting items from the end. If you are dropping items from the end, such as when you create a short index line, the pipes at the end may be dropped. In other words, internal pipes must be included; trailing pipes can be dropped. If youre not sure, just include all four pipes (it wont hurt anything). Now, lets look at the effects of omitting each of the components: INDEX NAME: Index Name is required. It cannot be omitted. INDEX ITEM: Index Item can be left blank. However, in practice you will want to use either Index Name or Body Text. If you omit both, there will be nothing in your index describing what the thing is. For example, the following is a perfectly legitimate index line: In: DEFEX||IndexPar||{TR:1}{P} This will give you a line in the DEFEX index that contains only a page number. The produces a Table of Contents with page numbers and no corresponding items. This can be useful if you have unanswered, refused, and certified question indexes which only have the page number and line numbers. PARAGRAPH TYPE: You can omit this, but probably shouldnt. If Paragraph Type is omitted, it will set up your index based on your Fixed paragraph settings. You are better off creating a custom paragraph for indexes and including it in this part of the index line. BODY TEXT: If the Index Item is adequate to identify the item in the index, you can drop Body Text. This is the most commonly omitted item of the five. LOCATION FORMAT: This can be omitted if you want an item in your index with no page number, line number, or volume number.

How do I determine the placement and order of my indexes?

Indexes are always generated at the cursor position. To indicate the order in which you want your indexes to appear when generated, place a short index line in the title page. Automatic indexing 287

A short index line consists of only the Index Name:

Place the short index lines in the title page in the order you want them to appear:

In the above graphic the index would appear after the appearance page, and would be preceded by a page break, as long as that is where your cursor was when you generated the index. The WITNESS index would be first, followed by PEXHIBIT and DEXHIBIT (Plaintiffs and Defendants Exhibits) in that order. The WITNESS.ECL, PEXHIBIT.ECL and DEXHIBIT.ECL (if you created them) will also be inserted at the cursor location when the index is generated. If you do not include short index lines, the indexes will be generated at the cursor and will appear in whatever order they did in the document.

How do I change the way my index sorts?

By adding |ALPHASORT or |NUMSORT to the short index line. Like this:

This will sort the Defendants Witnesses index alphabetically. NUMSORT sorts numerically.

How do I insert a blank line into the index?

To have the items in your index separated by a blank line, add a + to the beginning of the Paragraph Style: Automatic indexing 288

IN: DEFEX|Exhibit 1|+IndexPar|A photograph|{TR:1}{P} Eclipse adds this extra line AFTER sorting the items, so there is no further effort necessary to ensure the correct order or formatting.

How do I get two different page numbers to appear in one index line?
Have two index lines in the transcript. The Index Items must match exactly; the placement of the page number must not be on the same tab stop. For example, you might have the following lines at two different spots in the transcript: In: EXB|EXHIBIT 1|INDEXPAR||{TR:1}{P} In: EXB|EXHIBIT 1|INDEXPAR||{TR:2}{P} This would give you: Exhibit 1 13 20 Of course, you would have to set up Tab 1 and Tab 2 in the INDEXPAR paragraph type to dictate where the page numbers appear. You will probably also want a header file to clarify which column is which. Like this: EXHIBITS INDEX MARKED Exhibit 1 13 RECEIVED 20

The text Exhibits Index as well as the column headings Marked and Received is in the header file, set up as per the above section on header files. This approach is useful if you want one index to indicate page numbers for Exhibit Marked/Exhibit Received, or Direct/Cross/Redirect/Recross Examinations. If the tab stops match, it will make two lines in the index. The following will overlap: IN: DEFEX|No.2|IPG4||{TR:1}{P} IN: DEFEX |No.2|IPG4||{TR:2}{P} IN: DEFEX |No.2|IPG4||{TR:1}{P} IN: DEFEX |No.2|IPG4||,{P}

The following will not overlap: IN: DEFEX |No.2|IPG4||{TR:1}{P} IN: DEFEX |No.2|IPG4||{TR:1}{P} Also, Automatic indexing will overlap an empty item on top of the last item in the index if and only if there is a location format with no item text. So, if you have: Automatic indexing 289

IX:EXAM|John Smith|Index1||{TR:1}{P} followed by IX:EXAM||Index1||{TR:2}{P} it will overlap the items just as if the second item had said John Smith.

How come my paragraph type, or {TR:1}{P} showed up in the text of my index?

Your individual index line is not set up correctly. You are likely missing a pipe. Review the index line in question.

How do I create a master index?

You can create an empty file, select the automatic index procedure, tell it to index multiple documents and then select the documents for which you want to create an index. If you want the index to appear in a separate file, set the number of pages in the Preview window to zero.

When I change the paragraph margins, it does not take effect in the preview.
Remember to make changes in both the Master Format and the Current Document. Easiest way; make changes in the Current and copy to Master.

Im getting strange characters in the index when I generate.

If its {TR:1}{P} or other indexing syntax, your index line is probably missing a pipe. Review the index line in question. Alternatively, if you are using scan fields in the index line (even though we recommend using wildcards), the fields need to be filled in before the index is generated. Unfilled fields may appear as odd characters.

Can I use scan fields in my index lines instead of wildcards?

Yes, but wildcards are more powerful and less work to fill in once they are set up correctly.

My paragraph style doesnt seem to be taking an effect.

Look at the paragraph bar to the left. Is it an F? If so, Eclipse is using a Fixed paragraph style instead of your indexing paragraph style. This usually means that Eclipse is not recognizing the Paragraph Type section of the index line. Check your spelling/capitalization/use of pipe symbols in the index line. Also, confirm that the paragraph style exists in both the Master and the Current. Copy it over if it does not.

My header file isnt being used.

The header file must be stored in the Blocks folder, as selected in User Settings | Advanced. Special warning: if you generate an index and there is no header file, Eclipse will create a blank one. Thus you may look in your Blocks folder and see a file called EXHIBIT.ECL, even though this is the blank file Eclipse created and your EXHIBIT.ECL is in the wrong folder. So dont just check that the file name exists, open it and confirm that the text is there.

Text is running over the page number.

You need to move the tab stop for the page number further to the right, or set the Right Margin lower so the text wraps sooner. This is all done on the Paragraphs tab.

Automatic indexing 290

How do I insert an index line at the bottom of a file (such as the Direct Examination blurb to use M:*)?
When you insert a print command, it will appear above the current paragraph. To get it at the end of a file, add some extra lines, insert the index line, and then yank the lines with Ctrl-Y.

I generated and accepted an index, and its not there.

The screen may not refresh right away. Ctrl-Page Down/Ctrl-Page Up should refresh it.

Can I edit an index after generating it?

Yes, if you really know how to work with paragraph labels, and its a very small problem. Youre best off deleting and regenerating.

Automatic indexing 291

Automatic indexing 292

CHAPTER 13 REALTIME
STARTING A REALTIME JOB
Command Speed Key Menu Toolbar Icon Translate Alt+T F10/Production /Translate

Press Alt+T to open the Translate notes dialog. Mark the Realtime radio button. When you are finished writing realtime, press Shift+Alt+T or use the Production menu | Stop translation command.

One-Button Realtime
Command Speed Key Menu Toolbar Icon Instant Realtime Num+ F10/Production /Instant Realtime

The main toolbar includes a one-button realtime button which will start realtime instantly without your having to supply any additional information or answer any additional prompts, using the settings from the translation dialog when you last translated.

It will create a file and will automatically assign a filename, which you can edit. It will also create a job dictionary with the same name and will add it to the list of job dictionaries for the current job that is displayed when the open dictionary command is executed with a job on the screen. When you close the document, if you have auto-rename realtime jobs turned on, you will be prompted to enter a new filename, and Eclipse will rename all the files associated with that job.

SETTING UP REALTIME
IMPORTANT NOTE RE POWER MANAGEMENT: To conserve battery life, notebook computers are typically delivered with power management options activated. Because active power management can cause problems with realtime, we strongly recommend that power management options be disabled on notebook computers used for realtime. Computers purchased from Advantage Software are preconfigured for maximum performance with court-reporting software before delivery, and will work correctly without any changes to their settings. If you purchased your computer elsewhere and require assistance, please contact your hardware vendor. Before a realtime session you will need to choose various settings, which you will find in the Realtime tab of User Settings (Alt+U), and in the Translate notes dialog. Realtime 293

User Settings Realtime setup

Flush delay - Setting delay for your writing speed In the Flush Delay field, enter the number of milliseconds (1000 milliseconds (ms) = 1 second) you want Total Eclipse to wait, when you stop writing, before translating a stroke. This delay prevents Total Eclipse from translating strokes too quickly, which would result in partial single strokes defining even when they may be part of a multiple-stroke word. The delay will hold the definition off until the full multi-stroke word has been written. Experiment to determine the delay that best fits your writing style. A good starting point is 1000 ms. Pending translation display To have your strokes displayed during the flush delay (before they are translated), mark the Pending translation display checkbox. The pending strokes will display in the steno window even if the pending translation display is off, so you can watch your steno window and see every stroke you write, regardless of how much of it the translator has processed so far. When writing long conflicts or numbers, the pending translation will word-wrap if necessary to be visible. Follow always When the Follow always checkbox is marked, the document cursor follows the translation. Do NOT mark this checkbox if a scopist intends to edit during the realtime translation. When the cursor is scrolling along with the realtime, the screen will stop scrolling when one line of blank space is on screen, if the lines below cursor setting is 15 or more. (Note: the Lines below cursor is set in User settings | display tab.) For example, if you normally have 20 lines of text visible below the cursor, when you're at the end of the document, instead of scrolling 20 lines of blank space onto the screen, it will only scroll until one line of blank space is visible. Stop follow on unresolved If you turn on Stop follow on unresolved, then when the cursor is following the translation, it will stop following if you write an untranslate, an unresolved conflict, or a blank form field. This will leave the cursor in a location where you can issue a macro to fix the problem without having to scan back for it. You can use this feature in conjunction with the edit word buffer (see below). Let's say you use an edit buffer of 5 words AND you have told the edit buffer to wait for the cursor. Now, you write an untranslate and the cursor stops, so the edit buffer continues to wait until you have a chance to fix the untran using one of your writer macros. If you don't have time, you can just hit your stroke to jump the cursor to the end of the document and continue following along. Hide cursor when following By default, the cursor is hidden to eliminate the distraction when doing CART. It will reappear when any keystroke is pressed. Turn off Hide cursor when following if you want the cursor always to be visible. Realtime 294

Auto-rename realtime jobs Whenever you go to close a text document, it will check to see if the filename starts with RT and a digit. If so, it will ask you to enter a new filename and will rename all of the files associated with that job. The default is on. Uncheck to turn the automatic renaming of RTnnnn-nnnn files off. You can change the default naming syntax using the Filename: field. The default setting will put the letters RT, followed by the month, day and year each as two-digit numbers, followed by a dash, followed by the hour (from 0-23) and minute. You can use any of the available time/date syntaxes for the automatic realtime file name. For example, you could include verbose month names, or include seconds, or remove the minutes, etc. Just be aware that if you want the auto-rename to work, the name must begin with RT followed by a number. Realtime job name formats Use the Edit/Insert/Time/date function as a guideline for building your realtime filename. Some examples of formats you could use: %y%m%d%H%M-RT = 0509201510-RT %b%d-%A-%I%M%p-Realtime = Sep20-Tuesday-0307PM-Realtime RT%y%m%d%H%M = RT0509201510 (This example is the only one of the three that would work with auto-name) Edit word buffer Under User settings | Realtime, there is a setting for an Edit word buffer that can be set to a specific number of words. Setting it to zero disables the function. During a realtime session, it will not immediately output the text that you're writing in realtime. Instead, the output to LiveNote/Bridge/ Closed Captioning/etc. will lag X words behind you. Note that you can set this as high as 200 words (or about a page.) On the editing screen, the text that has been translated but has not yet been transmitted to the output system will appear in a gray background (the same as print commands.) You can edit the text in the gray area BEFORE it gets transmitted. You can select conflicts, fix untranslates, use your stitching macro, the capitalize previous word function, delete words, insert words, or any other editing functions. Because you're editing the text before it goes out, it will work for any output method, including software like LiveNote and Summation that doesnt support applying editing changes like Bridge does. The edit buffer will not transmit anything on print commands, including comment lines. Wait for cursor The Wait for cursor option tells the Edit buffer to wait for the cursor. If a scopist is following along with you and they can't quite keep up, the buffer will wait for them. The buffer will always stay one or two words behind the cursor if you have this on. The Wait for cursor option will check for a marked block. If a block of text is marked, it will send the text up to a word or two before the beginning of the block, regardless of where the cursor itself appears. So if you are performing a block operation from beginning to end to capitalize words or stitch words or to global words, the edit buffer will not send the early part of the marked block. Realtime 295

Division Interval The Division Interval field is a job-sharing feature. The number in this field corresponds to a time interval in minutes. Each time this interval passes, Total Eclipse creates a file using the original job name and the time appended. The Division interval will use exact times (such as 9:17, 9:32, 9:47) at the intervals you choose. If you want the intervals to be at even fractions of an hour, such as 9:00, 9:15, 9:30 and 9:45, (even if you started the job at 9:08), set the Division interval to a negative number, such as -15. It will then use a division interval of 15 minutes, but will break the divisions on even fractions of an hour. If you want divisions at 9:08, 9:23, 9:38, etc., use 15 instead of -15. The job name needs to end with an underscore. For example, if the job is called Smith_.ecl, the blocks might be called Smith_0900, Smith_0915, Smith_0930, etc. (Note: The reporter should include an underscore in the file name to enable the incremental files to sync with the realtime .wav file.) The last file, however, will have the exact time the translation was stopped, for example, Smith_0952. The reporter will need to set the DIVISION= path in the File locations section of the Programming tab. The person scoping the incremental files will need to set the Jobs path to the Reporter's network path. For audio sync, the scopist will need to set the WAV= or WAVPLAY= path in the File locations section of the Programming tab. (For details on File Locations, see the Reference Guide section of this manual, page 472.) Scopists can then open and edit a divided file. Edited divisions can be recombined into a single file using the Read command. Note that this feature can extend filenames beyond eight characters, so make sure that your network can handle long filenames, or else use a main jobname with four letters or fewer. (Older Novell networks, for example, may not support long filenames.) Eclipse will make a copy of the WAV file to the DIVISION folder after the division interval expires. Subsequently, at each division, Eclipse will update that WAV file by appending the new data to the end of it. For details on using this feature in a reporter/scopist situation, see page 316. Audio You control options for Audio in the Audio section of the Realtime tab. (See Setting Up Realtime for Audio section, page 314 for details.)

Auto-brief Auto-brief basic features:

automatically suggests briefs for long words or phrases you write during Realtime, and displays them in a window or in your info-bar fully customizable choose how many suggestions and reminders of existing briefs you want to see, and other options in User settings | Realtime | Auto-brief | Settings (see page 299)

Realtime 296

you can highlight a word and request a brief (see page 299) saves briefs you actually use in your job dictionary (see page 299) temporarily saves briefs generated during your realtime job in AutoBrief.dix, so you can copy briefs you might want later into your job dictionary, before the AutoBrief.dix is cleared, which happens when you begin a new job. (see page 299)

Using Auto-brief If you select User settings | Realtime | Auto-brief before you begin writing in Realtime, the system will watch what you write and will create briefs for you on the fly. If it sees you write the same long word or phrase more than once, the second time you write it, Eclipse will suggest a brief.

One exception: if a single word takes five or more strokes, Eclipse will suggest a brief immediately. Note that this will apply for words that are simply long dictionary entries, words created by adding prefixes and suffixes to a root, or even words that are fingerspelled using glue symbols, as you may use in captioning and CART. Generally, Eclipse is looking for words or phrases that take at least three strokes to write and consist primarily of unusual words (it won't suggest a brief for in the event but it will suggest one for Department of Internal Affairs or hydrodynamics.). Auto-brief will create briefs based on first letters of phrases. For example, if you write Department of International Commerce it will try steno such as TKOEUBG. It will try up to three letters from each word before resorting to using only the first word. Note that it will only do this for phrases of at least three words. Eclipse displays the briefs in the top-left corner of the editing window in a suggestion window, which will remain visible as long as your cursor is following in realtime. If you move to the top of the page to edit, it will disappear, but it will reappear once you return to the bottom. You can also choose to have briefs displayed in the info-bar (see Auto-brief settings dialog, page 300, for details) and/or turn off the pop-up suggestion window. Briefs are usable as soon as they appear in the suggestion window. The brief suggestion window will default to display up to nine briefs (3 each of reminders, requests, and suggestions) at once. After that, the briefs will start to scroll off the window, unless you increase the number that appear in the window, using User settings | Realtime | Auto-brief | Settings. However, they will still be active and you can still write them if you remember what they were. If you forget and write something out the long way for an already-created brief, it will show you the brief again, adding it back to the brief window. Realtime 297

Auto-brief window size, position, and colors You can resize the auto-brief window by selecting more or fewer briefs, and/or adjusting the font in the Auto-brief settings dialog (see below). You can click on the suggestion window anywhere and drag it wherever you like to reposition it. The suggestion window remembers its position relative to the top-left corner of the job window, so if you move the job window, the auto-brief window will move as well. It will attempt to stay entirely visible, so if longer briefs appear, it may shift the window to the left to make sure that nothing goes off the right side of the screen. Auto-briefs in the pop-up window show in three colors, which are user-definable under the User settings | Display | Color selections setup: Normal briefs -- briefs suggested by the software automatically Requested briefs -- briefs that you specifically requested Reminder briefs -- briefs that you already have in an active dictionary The default colors are colored text on a white background. Also, either a white OR black background for these colors will be considered transparent, so it will simply show the color on whatever background is appropriate for the window that it's being displayed on. How Eclipse chooses the brief The brief Eclipse suggests will be generated automatically by attempting a large number of potential candidates based on your phonetics table and testing to make absolutely sure that it doesn't conflict with anything in any dictionary currently being used. If a stroke (or double stroke) is suggested by Eclipse, you can be assured it is not being used in any of the dictionaries currently being used by the translator. Before trying to guess the steno, the system will see if any of the dictionaries you have selected in the current translation have a definition for the word or phrase. If the word or phrase can be found in one of your current dictionaries, and if the steno for that entry is shorter, it will assume that is a brief and will display that on the auto-brief window as a reminder. Note that it will offer a shorter suggestion rather than longer reminder, if possible. For example, if you specifically request a brief for a three-stroke sequence, even if there's a two-stroke sequence in your dictionary, it will go ahead and suggest a one-stroke brief instead of giving you the reminder. Auto-brief will attempt to find a one-stroke brief if possible. If it cannot, it will suggest a double stroke, such as TPO TPO for photoelectric cells. Plurals Auto-briefs will detect plurals and suggest singulars. So, if you write a long word, such as hydrodynamics, the auto-brief feature might suggest a brief for it; however if it can detect that it is a pluralized form of a word (by determining that hydrodynamic is a legitimate word), then it will suggest a brief for the singular version instead of the plural version. If you have the User settings | Translate | Integral pre/suf feature turned on, then you will be able to write the integral prefix or suffix with the suggested brief. For example, if it suggests H*EU = hydrodynamic, you can write H*EUS to get hydrodynamics.

Realtime 298

Auto-brief Requests and Reminders If you're using the auto-brief feature and you wish to force the system to give you a brief without waiting for you to write something twice, just mark the text you want a brief for using F7 and use the Add dictionary entry function. If you mark a word or phrase and request a brief, the first thing it will do is see if that word or phrase already has a brief, and if so, it will remind you of it. (This is just one of several ways to trigger a reminder brief.) Auto-brief will display reminders of existing briefs immediately, once you write something the long way, no matter how few words you've written or whether any of those words are on the ineligible words list. For example, even if you write two separate strokes U = you and -R = are, you will get an immediate you are = UR reminder from your dictionary if you have that brief defined. The reminder feature will only show one reminder per word or phrase, even if it can find multiple briefs for it in the dictionaries. It will first narrow down the reminder possibilities by stroke and will show the shortest one. If there are multiple entries with the same number of strokes, it will pick the most used one, assuming that that is the correct entry and the rest are probably misstrokes. You can set the maximum number of Reminders, Requests, and Suggestions that display in the Auto-brief settings dialog (see below). Saving the briefs If you actually write one of the briefs during the course of a job, that brief will be saved in your current job dictionary so that you can re-use it in other translations, or if you need to retranslate a portion of the same file. The auto-brief entries are marked with an AB in the comment field. You can sort the dictionary by comment line, causing the auto-brief entries to cluster together so you can review them easily. You can look up all of the briefs during a break by hitting F9 and opening the AutoBrief.dix file that will appear at the end of the list of dictionaries (in or below dictionary #9) being used by the current translation. If you delete an entry from the autobrief.dix, that brief will also be removed from the auto-brief window if it's one of the entries still visible. You can keep AutoBrief.dix open while you do Realtime. Auto-brief settings In User settings | Realtime, next to the Auto-brief checkbox, there is a Settings button which opens the Auto-brief settings dialog.

Realtime 299

The options are described below. Suggest briefs automatically - This feature is on by default. Only turn it off if you never want Eclipse to suggest a brief that you haven't already used, or requested. Require accept stroke Turn on this feature if you want to use the brief-generating features of auto-brief, but you don't want to have the briefs be immediately active. If you have this option on, the briefs that appear automatically in the brief window will NOT be immediately available for use, so hitting the strokes indicated will behave normally. You can put an {ABACCEPT} entry in your dictionary to accept the last auto-brief. Hitting that entry will take the last brief in the list and copy it to your job dictionary, at which point, the brief will be active and will appear in the Brief requested color. If you wish to accept an entry that is NOT the last entry in the brief window, you will have to first remove any suggested entries below it in the window using the {ABREJECT} entry. (See page 302) Mark as untranslates - If you turn on this setting, all auto-briefs will appear in the transcript as untranslates, much like entries used by Translation Magic. Archive all suggested briefs - Normally, the auto-brief dictionary is cleared at the beginning of each realtime translation. Any briefs that you actually used during the previous session were copied to the job dictionary, but briefs that you didn't use would disappear. If you wish to be able to go back and review all of the suggested briefs from the previous translation in case any of them might be useful, you can turn on the Archive all suggested briefs function. At the end of each realtime translation, all suggested briefs will be copied to a jobname_AB.dix file for future review. Note that this dictionary will never be automatically included in any translation, nor should it be. Allow numbers - Normally, the auto-brief function will ignore anything containing digits, and will ensure that suggested strokes never contain digits. If you wish to be able to autobrief number sequences, turn on Allow numbers.

Realtime 300

Note that just turning on this option will not produce ideal results, since writing a long number such as 574,974.23 would result in a suggested steno brief of 57. This could cause big problems when writing a number. If you intend to use this feature, it is recommended that you supply additional keys to be added to number briefs. For details, see page 469 in the Reference Guide at the end of this manual. Minimum keys This setting allows you to define the minimum number of keys in a suggested brief. The auto-brief function will normally find the smallest possible sequence of steno keys that you are not already using for something else. For example, if you write teleological in five strokes, auto-brief is perfectly happy to suggest TE for that if you aren't already using the TE stroke by itself for anything else. If you don't want it to ever suggest very small briefs, you can specify a minimum number of steno keys that an automatically-generated brief should contain. If you set that value to 4, for example, then it might suggest T*EL instead. Note: This option will try to make a stroke out of the minimum value you have chosen, in terms of both phonetic elements (computer keystrokes) and steno keys. For example, if you have it set to 4 and you write goliath it will NOT simply accept TKPWO as a result, even though it has 5 keys, because it only has two phonetic elements (go). Instead, it will start by attempting to phoneticize goli, which will end up with TKPWHROEU, which will be accepted since it contains at least 4 keys. Likewise, if you have allocation it will start by attempting to phoneticize allo but since there are only three unique letters, it will end up with AOL, which is fewer than four keys, so it will keep extending. Note: This setting will apply to each stroke in a double-stroke suggestion, because very short double-stroke suggestions sometimes cause unexpected results if the individual strokes happen to match an entry in your dictionary that could conceivably be written twice in a row intentionally. Minimum reminder savings - This is the minimum number of strokes that must be saved by a brief in order for the feature to remind you when you've written something the long way. You can, however, ask for reminder briefs any word or phrase, regardless of whether it meets the minimum reminder savings. The default setting is 2. If you want it to remind you if there is any savings at all, set it to 1. You can, of course, set it larger. Optionally only show reminders for commented entries If you set the minimum stroke savings to 0 (zero), it doesn't disable the feature, but what it will do is only remind you of briefs if they are commented in some way. In other words, if a brief has AB in the comment field, or brief or anything else at all, it will be eligible to come up as a reminder.

Realtime 301

Note that with this setting, any number of stroke savings is valid. It is equivalent to a setting of 1 with the extra criterion of requiring the comment. Font - This option allows you to select the font and size specifically, which in turn controls the horizontal size of the Auto-brief pop-up window. When Auto-briefs are displayed in the Info bar, they will wrap, rather than re-sizing the Info bar. Show briefs phonetically - This setting is used to determine whether or not auto-brief steno is displayed phonetically. If you have this turned on, then the auto-brief suggestions will be shown in semi-phonetic format (upper case). In other words, if the system sees globalization and wants to suggest TKPWHRO, it will display GLO = globalization. Reminders, Requests, and Suggestions The 3 spin controls in this area allow you to select the number of briefs that appear in each category. Items in the auto-brief window will appear in that order, color-coded as defined in User settings | Display. Since each category has its own individual upper limit, a large number of reminders will not scroll the suggestions off the screen. Likewise, a large number of suggestions will not scroll very important requested briefs off the screen. Pop-up window and Info window These options let you choose to turn the pop-up window on or off, and to put the auto-briefs in the info bar. Since the info bar is so long, if you're using the info bar instead of the pop-up window, you can boost the maximum number of briefs shown in each category quite a bit more. The option to display Auto-briefs in the info bar can also be turned on or off under the Window menu | View Toggles. Reject.dix file Rejected auto-briefs will go into a temporary REJECT.DIX file, which resets itself every job. It prevents the auto-brief function from suggesting the same steno brief for a particular word or phrase after it has been rejected. It may still suggest another brief for that same word or phrase in the future, but it will not use the same steno. This is used both by the AbReject feature (see below) and when you manually delete an entry from the AutoBrief.dix file. Rejecting the last brief If you define a dictionary entry containing {ABREJECT}, it will reject the last brief that was offered, deleting it from the auto-brief dictionary and from the on-screen suggestions and placing it in the REJECT.DIX file to prevent it from being suggested again. It may still suggest another brief for that same word or phrase in the future, but it will not use the same steno. If you define a dictionary entry containing {ABNEW} it will reject the last brief that was offered, deleting it from the auto-brief dictionary and from the on-screen suggestions and placing it in the REJECT.DIX file. The three-letter metadictionary code to request new steno for the last brief offered is {ABNEW}={/?ABN}. Auto-brief ineligible words list and Auto-brief steno theory In the User Settings | Programming tab there are two features to help you further customize your auto-briefs: the Auto-brief ineligible words list and the Auto-brief steno theory Realtime 302

option. For details on how to use these controls, see page 469 in the Reference Guide at the end of this manual. Eclipse is top window If you turn on Eclipse is top window, any time a stroke translates in realtime, Eclipse will jump to the front of any other applications that are running and become the active program. This is useful if you use the Internet or check e-mail during downtime and forget to bring Eclipse to the front before starting to write again, because no macro can bring Eclipse to the front. This option is off by default, and it must be turned off if you are going to use the Keyboard macro output, which is designed to enter text into another program. Split Window Set the Split window to a percentage, and when you start a realtime job, the lower percentage of the screen will automatically be split to a second pane that will always show what you are currently writing in realtime. The upper pane will follow along also, but you can move around in the upper portion and edit while still being able to see your realtime in the lower portion.

Realtime Settings in the Translate notes dialog

1. If you need to disable the output formats for this particular translation but dont want to change your User Settings, unmark the Enable output checkbox. 2. If you want to create a digitally recorded audio file, make sure that there is a check in the Record audio option box. 3. To see the realtime translation statistics during the translation, mark the Show statistics checkbox. If you don't want to see the statistics, remove the mark from the checkbox. 4. Check the input settings, which are summarized to the left of the settings button (see arrow). 5. In the Dictionaries section, add the dictionaries you want to use for the translation.

Output formats
The Output formats area allows you to send realtime translation in a variety of formats. This output can be transmitted over cables attached to serial (COM) ports, or written into a file. In Total Eclipse, you can simultaneously send output to multiple formats (though you cannot

Realtime 303

send multiple formats over a single serial connection). Once you set up an output format, it appears in the display area. To create other output formats, click the Add button to open the Output format dialog window, in which you select an output format (e.g. LawBridge, LiveNote, ANSI), and a destination. Available formats include Bridge/LawBridge/Teleview, LegalAssistant, LiveNote, Summation/CaseView, Closed Captioning, Silent Radio, ANSI, Eclipse steno link, Keyboard macro, TransLux DataWall, Teletext, LED Captionvision display, Incremental ASCII, Chyron CODI character generator, and CART window. When setting up to output to a file, the software will default to the existing path and will show you the complete folder path to the current output folder previously selected.

Cart window One of the output types listed under Output format: (Bridge/Closed captioning/etc.) is called CART window. If you select CART window, when you start realtime you'll get a separate window that will open up below Eclipse. It will always stay on top. In the Windows taskbar, it will show up as a separate program to make it easier to select. The window can be moved by clicking and dragging it. It can be resized by clicking and dragging the lower-right corner. Right-clicking on the CART window will bring up a small dialog. From this dialog, you can maximize the window by checking the box. You can also turn the smooth scrolling off if it's too performance-intensive for your hardware. There is also a font button for selecting whatever font you want on the CART window. The Spacing button allows you to put in any number from 50% to 300%, so you can double or even triple-space your output. Realtime 304

The foreground and background colors can be selected by going to User settings | Display. The CART window colors will appear at the bottom of the list. The default colors are white on black. The CART window is independent from the Eclipse window and can be moved to a separate screen. If you have a laptop with an external monitor port, you're probably accustomed to displaying your Eclipse screen on projector or large monitor to do CART. In addition most laptops support dual-screen, which means that your Windows desktop can stretch across two screens. If you set up your external port as a dual-screen instead of a clone, then you can drag the CART window over to the external screen. That means that you will be able to use all of Eclipse on your laptop screen, including the steno, the auto-brief window, the toolbars, using macros to make globals from the machine, etc., and the CART audience will never see it. All they will see is the CART window. Comm. device The Comm device: drop-down box contains COM port, File sharing, TCP/IP, API, then modems. Each modem in your system will be listed. There is a single Setup button next to that drop-down list that sets up each device differently giving you control over the modem settings, COM port choices COM1-COM16, file locations for file sharing, and Internet address for TCP/IP. Note for Total Eclipse 3.0 users: The TCP/IP output had to be added to the list in a slot above the modems, so if you have modem output selected, you must go to the User settings | Realtime | Output formats and reselect your modem. If you select TCP/IP as your output type, it will allow you to output data directly to an address on the Internet or a network. The Setup button will ask you to enter an address and a port number. The address can be an IP or web address. The output header text will be sent at the beginning of each line when using TCP/IP output. Some Internet realtime distribution software looks for a particular prefix at the beginning of each line. The Header option can be customized for the TCP/IP output to serve this purpose. Please note that this is designed to work ONLY with server software specifically designed to distribute the text to another program or to a browser. This is not a stand-alone Internet realtime solution. You cannot write realtime to a group of people on the Internet simply by using this option.

Eclipse steno link output format This method can be used to send raw steno from one copy of Eclipse to another through a serial port or shared file, or through TCP-IP on a network or across the Internet. To setup steno link via TCP/IP, the Reporter goes to User Settings | Realtime and adds the Output format | Eclipse steno link, with TCP/IP for the Comm. device. Click Setup>> and enter the Scopist's IP address and Port number.

Realtime 305

On the Scopist's computer, in User Settings | Input select Realtime from... TCP/IP, and in Setup enter the same Port number. When the Realtime translation starts, steno is sent to the scopist's computer, so it can be translated independently. The steno link can work in situations where a scopist is working with a reporter translating on a second system, with another full translation system or with an edit station. The edit station can perform realtime translations using the steno link feature only. You should copy a full set of dictionaries, including at least the reporter's main dictionary, to both the reporter's and scopist's computers. When the scopist makes a global, it is communicated back to the reporter's system and is applied to the original job, including adding it to the appropriate dictionary. If the scopist makes a job global into their job dictionary, which is named SJ.dix and on the reporter's system the job dictionary is named SmithJones.dix, the global on the reporter's system will go into SmithJones.dix, just as if the reporter had done a job global. The steno link also communicates timecodes from the Reporter to the Scopists to keep the transmit and receive sides synchronized. If you combine this feature with a shared folder containing the WAV sound file, the scopist can also be listening to the audio as they edit. If you are using StenoLink inside the courtroom and wish for the StenoLink receiving computer to record its own audio, the timecodes on the StenoLink translation will be the timecodes that synchronize with the local audio rather than being the timecodes transmitted from the sending computer. WARNING: If you are going to transmit audio through StenoLink, it is highly recommended that you use a heavily compressed audio format such as GSM or Speex. PCM files are likely to be much too large to stream effectively. Instead of having the audio be on-demand through the IP connection, the reporter's computer sends ALL of the audio as it's recorded. The Scopist's computer then ends up with a complete WAV file being updated every few seconds as the reporter's computer records it. Since it's a local copy of the file, the scopist's WAV file is even available after the scopist disconnects. However, there's no handshaking or re-sending of lost data, so if the scopist computer misses something, it's missed, and you may need to get a complete copy of the WAV file from the reporter later. If the reporter starts recording for two minutes and then the scopist hooks up, they will have missed two minutes of audio (and steno strokes.) Realtime 306

Incremental Ascii output format This is a very specialized format that is used to create an output file called CC.txt in the specified shared file folder. It is designed to work with third-party software that wants updates containing exactly what should appear on the screen in its entirety (eg. the Daktronics display software). At any given moment, this file will contain a complete image of what should appear on the realtime display. For example, if you have your output set to 3 lines, the CC.txt file will never contain more than three lines of information. This format works with text output, backspaces and the {BLANK} command. Output format defaults Each output format has defaults and settings enabled or disabled, depending on which output type you select. Only the enabled controls apply to the current output type. In the screen example on page 304, Apply edits is one control that is disabled, as it does not apply to Closed Captioning output. The margin settings are inactive (grayed out), but would become active if the Force margins box were checked. You can create more than one output format. For example, you could set up one format to send LawBridge output through your COM3 serial port, and another to create an ANSI file in a shared folder on your network. See Sharing a Realtime job on page 321 for how to set up multiple reporters sharing a LawBridge job. To remove an output format from the list in the display area, highlight the format and select the Delete button. To edit an existing output format, highlight the format and select the Change button. This opens the Output format dialog window, in which you can alter the current settings for the format. Note that if you attempt to change output protocols in the middle of a realtime translation, the output will be disabled for the rest of the session. Changing the output filename Changing the output filename during a realtime session will close the old file and start a new file with the new name. This change will cause any software that is reading from the output file to stop working, so if you are working with ASI Bridge or CCBN Bridge or TeleView and reading the data directly from a file, do NOT use this procedure to change the output filename in realtime because you'll be jerking the rug out from under the other program.

Realtime 307

Changing options in Edit Toggles

Command Speed Key Menu Toolbar Icon Edit toggles Shift+Alt+E F10/Tools/Edit toggles

In Tools menu | Edit toggles you can toggle several options off and on. They include Realtime Output and COM port on or off, which functions to turn off the writer COM port during realtime in case you prefer to have the port turned off if you're going to unplug your writer for a bench conference.

With this feature turned off, when you plug the writer back in and turn the COM port back on, you will be given the same option that you get when you first connect the writer: Start with which stroke? First/Last/Other. If you answer First, it will start over from the beginning of what is in the writer's memory. If you answer Last, it will attempt to skip everything that happened while the writer was unplugged. If you answer Other, it will simply start from where it was when you unplugged it. Most of the time, you will answer Other. You may wish to answer First if you had to turn off the writer while it was unplugged, for example, if you disconnected for a bench conference and the battery went dead. This may eliminate the need to start a whole new realtime file. Answer Last if you do not wish the information you wrote during the disconnect to translate into the current file. The Deny saving button is used while connected to LawBridge or Bridge (version 1.0.0.6 or above), to deny the user of that CIC software the ability to save the file or copy portions of it to another program. The Clear stats button will reset all of the translation statistics in the realtime status window to zero. Clicking the + button next to RT Output during a Realtime session brings up a secondary menu of outputs with an ON / OFF indicator for each one. You can select one of the items from this menu to toggle the realtime output on or off for just that one output type. For example, if you were showing realtime captioning to the gallery in a court, you could temporarily suspend closed captioning while continuing to send data to Bridge for attorneys, for example, during a bench conference. You can execute the edit toggles from anywhere, not just from within the current document, allowing many macros to work more cleanly. For example, a macro for suspending the output can be edited so that it does not require returning to the translating document before executing the edit toggles command. Output through a modem Your chosen format may send output through a COM port to a modem. As soon as the system initializes the COM port that is associated with the modem, it will display your phone number list (see below) and will allow you to select a phone number and

Realtime 308

dial it. Note that you have an opportunity at this point to edit the phone list, or load a different one. Once the modem has dialed and connected, it will act as a regular serial port connection. When the system is ready to close the COM port, it will hang up the modem line first. If the connection is not successful, the dialing status window remains open and indicates what the modem is doing. You can scroll up and down in the window to see what might have gone wrong (no dial tone, or busy, etc.) Special Note: If you are having trouble getting the modem to connect, try a different baud rate, and/or try setting a maximum baud rate for the modem in the device driver. The dialing status window will disappear after it successfully dials the modem. Total Eclipse displays a connection status indicator on the status bar at the bottom of the main program menu to let you know you are connected. Unless you manually press the hangup button, the system will automatically redial the modem if your connection drops, The dialing window will appear, and it will auto-redial the last number called. You do not need to do anything, unless the redial fails. If you wish to start a realtime translation just to practice, you can cancel out of the dialing procedure and continue writing realtime. The system will not auto-redial if you have canceled the dialing process. You can, however, bring up the phone dialog and issue the dialing command by pressing the dial button at any time during the translation. You can also bring up the phone dialog and hang up and redial as often as you wish without having to stop and restart your translation. The Phone Number List You can set up one or more phone number lists, which will contain the phone numbers your modem will dial in to for you to transmit your realtime output. Correct configuration and reliable connections are critical to the process, so plan to allow sufficient time in advance to establish your connection and do a dry run, particularly if this is a new connection, or you have installed a new modem. To manage your phone books:
Command Speed Key Menu Toolbar Icon Phone numbers Ctrl+F12 F10/Tools /Phone numbers

Select the Tools menu | Phone numbers (Ctrl+F12). The Access numbers dialog box will open. If you have one or more phone numbers in the list, the first number in the list will be selected (highlighted).

Realtime 309

Use the Add button to add as many phone numbers as you like to one phone book. Use the format Description:number to type in the item. Everything after the colon will be sent directly to the modem during dialing, so you can use constructions like Stuart Sports Station:9,772-123-4567.

Use the Delete button to remove phone numbers and the Change button to edit them. The phone numbers can be re-ordered using Ctrl+up or down arrow keys. Ctrl+A will arrange the list alphabetically. Use the Clear button to clear out the existing numbers and start a new phone book from scratch. This does not erase the file until you hit the Save button. Once you have set up a phone book, use the Save button to save it.

If you have made changes, you will be reminded to save the changes. You can have as many different phone books as you like and use the Load button to retrieve them. The system remembers the last phone book you had open and will automatically retrieve it the next time you run the program.

Output characteristics
Apply edits If Apply edits is checked, realtime edits in Total Eclipse will be reflected in the realtime output. NOTE: Apply edits works only with the Bridge output, listed as Bridge/LawBridge/TeleView in the Output formats drop-down list.. Force margins If you are using multiple, different realtime display/output methods, this function can force each separate output format to use a specific set of margins, regardless of the current paragraph format. When this option is off (the default setting), the text on the display Realtime 310

conforms to the paragraph margins set in User Settings | Paragraph. When this option is on, the screen will not change, but the output format will change, so that each paragraph will follow the margins specified in the output setup. This allows you to write a normal 54column court reporting document, for example, while still outputting to a 32-column display. For more information on paragraph formatting and captioning, see the section on Formatting transcripts, page 213. All caps Sets the output to appear entirely in upper-case letters. Closed captions, for example, are nearly always in all caps. You will be able to set up dictionary entries for exceptions, like the lower-case c in names like McTAVISH. Auto-dial If the Auto-dial checkbox is on, the dialing dialog will appear automatically if you have a modem selected as your output device. If it is off, the realtime will start without dialing the modem and you will be required to dial manually using the Phone numbers dialog when you are ready to connect. Allow backspaces Some CIC programs and realtime devices do not support backspacing. Some devices are awkward-looking when backspaces are transmitted (closed captioning in particular), so you have the option of not allowing backspaces to be transmitted to the output. Note: If you turn this off, you will want to increase the Flush word delay (see below). Flush word delay The amount of time (in millisecondsfor example, 2000 milliseconds=2 seconds) the system will wait before transmitting the very last word written to the display. Each word will wait until the following space is transmitted before it is displayed. Setting this to zero turns the option off, and the system does not wait at all. You can set this delay so that you will have the opportunity to delete a word the viewer has not yet seen. Note: a space will force out the previous word, so this is only an issue for the very last word. This option allows you to delete the last word before it displays. This feature also allows you to add suffixes to a word before it displays so that it can wordwrap to the next line if it needs to. Timeout to Blank The amount of time the system will wait before blanking the display. If set to 0 (zero), it will never blank the display. Wait time to Blank The amount of time the system will wait after receiving a blank command from the writer, and blanking the display.

Realtime 311

Starting row The starting row number for the realtime display in closed captioning decoders and some LED output devices. Total rows The number of closed captioning or LED rows displayed Foreground and Background The default output text color. Mode and Hangup mode Special settings for closed captioning encoders. Maximum WPM This option sets a maximum speed that words are allowed to display on the screen during realtime output. If the written rate goes too high, this option will begin intentionally pausing slightly between each word displayed. When the written rate slows down, the display will continue and will catch up with the captioner. Header Whatever you type into this box will appear as an extra line at the beginning of each page. For example, you might wish to add Uncertified Rough Draft Only or something like that as a header. On realtime viewers that show line numbers, the header may show up as an extra line. Uniform boxes Adds blank characters to the end of each line, making each line of output appear the same size. Attribute Determines whether the output text is normal, underlined, italics, or bold text.

Text replacement dictionary entries

You can make a text global and dictionary entry such as ["discover corporation"=Discover Corporation], and have it apply to multiple entries. Eclipse is capable of going back and text replacing multiple entries as long as the text pattern matches. The one limitation is that it replaces these retroactively during the translation process in order to take advantage of the complete translation parser to produce the most accurate text possible. Because of this, the realtime output has one minor limitation. If you're outputting to a litigation support system, there's no problem. It will simply backspace over the incorrect text and output the correct text. If you're doing closed captioning or CART (using the CART window) and if you have the allow backspaces option turned off, then you are prohibiting the system from sending backspace characters.

Realtime 312

In this case, you can still have the flush word delay set to a non-zero value and it will at least be able to text-replace the last word, even if it's made up of multiple dictionary entries. You can then, for example, make spur-of-the-moment text entries such as "DDD=Discover Corporation" and simply write your glue alphabet letter for D three times to get the replacement.

Lines below cursor

The Lines below cursor setting in User settings | display tab will affect the realtime cursor position and will go ahead and scroll whitespace on to the screen in order to give you some control over where the bottom line of the realtime display comes up in case you do projected CART and wish to raise the bottom line without projecting higher on the wall. However, if it is set to 15 or more, there is no effect on the cursor position. For example, if you normally have 16 lines of text visible below the cursor, if you're at the end of the document, instead of scrolling 16 lines of blank space onto the screen, it will only scroll until one line of blank space is visible.

CLOSED CAPTIONING PREVIEW

A Closed Captioning Preview window is accessible even if you do not have the closed captioning software. This will allow you to experiment with and practice closed captioning.
Command Menu Toolbar Icon Closed Captioning Preview F10/Window/View /View CC preview

Open the Closed captioning preview window through the Window menu | view CC Preview. In it you will see a sample of what the closed captioning output would look like, with blue screen substituted for the actual video signal.

The preview window uses a special font which simulates exactly what closed captioning decoders look like, and supports changes in position, number of lines, underlining, bold, italics and color changes. It includes information on the Roll-up row, number of lines and starting column information, in that order. For example: Roll-Up:14,2,0 means start on the 14th row, show 2 lines of captions, and start on column 0. You can resize and reposition the preview window, and it will remember its size and position for the next session. There is a color setting in the User settings | Display | Color selections menu for the Captioning preview window. The background color, which defaults to blue, can be changed to any color, and the foreground color represents the color of the X that appears to indicate that the output is suspended.

Realtime 313

The preview window will appear and allow you to experiment with closed captioning functions even with the regular Total Eclipse software. The actual output to encoder hardware, however, will be disabled unless you have purchased the AccuCap key upgrade.

REALTIME STATUS WINDOW

The Realtime status display can be turned on by selecting Window menu | View | view Realtime status. In addition to displaying the number of entries, Untranslates, Conflicts, and A/I Selected items, it indicates the current words per minute for the last 25 words, a total WPM for the whole job, and the Audio levels. If you pause for a long time, it will not count the pause as part of your WPM speed, and will pick up after you write a few more strokes and calculate the total WPM based on more or less continuous writing. Normally, Audio 1 is the main channel and Audio 2 is the second channel when recording in stereo.

SETTING UP AUDIO FOR REALTIME

Setting Audio Compression
An audio-recording module is incorporated into Total Eclipse. Audio recordings synchronized with a realtime transcript 1. Make sure your microphone is properly connected to the computer. We recommend that you use an external mike (many different very small ones are available) rather than relying on the internal microphone if your computer is designed with one. Internal mikes are not designed to pick up voices on the other side of your screen, and should be used for audio recording only as a last resort. 2. In Total Eclipse, press Alt+U to open the User Settings. Select the Realtime tab. 3. In the Audio settings: field, click the Compression button. This opens the Select compression dialog. Select the audio source you are adjusting.

Realtime 314

5. Choose sound compression options and click OK. (See below for more information about sound compression.) 6. The Levels button opens the Recording Control dialog, where you can select your audio input device, which will be used to do the WAV file recording, rather than relying on the default input device selected in Windows. 7. Auto-restart is an option that will un-pause the recording automatically when you start writing. It is on by default, but if you need to be able to write realtime while the recording is paused, you will need to turn this off by unchecking the box. 8. Auto-pause is an option that can be set to a number of minutes; if there is no activity on the steno machine for that number of minutes, the audio recording will be paused. This button uses the same code as hitting the pause button, so the synchronization is adjusted accordingly. However, you must remember to hit the keystroke for un-pause (even if autorestart is enabled) or you will loose a few seconds of audio when you resume writing. 9. Complete your setup for the realtime job. When you open the Translate.. dialog (Alt+T), mark the Record audio checkbox (the Realtime translation mode checkbox must be marked for this option to be available).

The recording starts when you begin the translation and stops when you stop the realtime job. The audio file is given the same name as the realtime job but has the wav extension (in other words, the file is jobname.wav). The audio file is stored in your Total Eclipse jobs folder. Note: If you are using a Stenograph writer which creates a WAV file, Eclipse will copy the WAV file into your jobs folder when you read the notes, so you can read notes and translate the job and instantly have audio synchronization without having to copy and rename files. WAV files are truncated at the first underscore character in the filename, to allow multiple jobs to append to the same WAV file. In other words, if you start a realtime file called Smith_01 and then start a realtime file called Smith_02 the next day, you will have two separate .ecl files, but only one WAV file, called Smith.wav. WAV files are opened in a shared mode that will allow editors to access the WAV file as it is being recorded. So, a computer on the network can be taking down the realtime testimony on one computer and storing the document and WAV file on the

Realtime 315

network or the same or another computer. Other computers can play back the WAV file while it's being recorded.

Note that in combination with the previous functions, multiple editors can use the division interval to access a single synchronized audio record of the proceedings. For example, you are a realtime reporter recording a job to a network directory called H:\JOBS\SMITH_JT.ECL, and you have a network path set to H:\BLOCKS and a division interval of 20 minutes, there will be a series of files in the network paths such as: H:\BLOCKS\SMITH_JT1000.ECL, H:\BLOCKS\SMITH_JT1020.ECL, H:\BLOCKS\SMITH_JT1040.ECL, etc. A series of editors can then each take a different segment of the job to edit, and as long as their WAV or WAVPLAY path is set, for example, to H:\JOBS in the File locations list on the Programming tab, they will be able to hit the play button and hear synchronized segments of the H:\JOBS\SMITH.WAV file even as it is being recorded. (For details on File Locations, see the Reference Guide section of this manual, page 472.) Eclipse makes a copy of the WAV file to the DIVISION folder after the division interval expires. Subsequently, at each division, Eclipse will update that WAV file by appending the new data to the end of it. This allows the WAV file to be incrementally updated rather than having to send the entire file over and over again, and without having to break the WAV file into many separate parts. If you are using an Internetbased automated file repository system, such as DropBox or SugarSync, Eclipse will automatically synchronize the WAV files from a selected folder to the Internet, where other people can retrieve the files. Rather than create a separate option for this feature, what the translator will do is copy the WAV file to the DIVISION folder if you do NOT have a WAVREC line in your file locations. In other words, if you have already demonstrated that you have a system for storing the WAV file in a separate location, it will leave it alone. If not, it will perform the copy every time the division interval expires.

Select Audio Playback Device If you go into the User settings | Edit tab with no document open, you can use the Play button to select an audio playback device. This can be useful if you have an alternative audio device such as a USB audio device that supports playback. If you are transcribing something that is being played and recorded through your computer's primary sound system, such as a webcast or remote deposition through Internet telephony, for example, you cannot simply hit playback without disrupting the recording that is being made. But, if you select an alternative audio playback device, you can use headphones or auxiliary speakers plugged into an external device for playback, and that way you can play back and work with the realtime audio during the job without interrupting your audio feed, since the playback doesn't go through the primary audio device.

Audio files and sound quality

Audio quality and the space required to store audio files are two primary concerns when synchronizing sound with a realtime transcript. The settings you select within Total Eclipse

Realtime 316

can affect both of these properties; however, sound quality is also affected by your computers sound card and other audio hardware, such as your microphone. All computers with sound cards have one or more codecs, or compression/decompression software. Compression provides varying levels of sound quality and sound file size requirements. In general, the higher the sound quality, the larger the sound file. This becomes critical when recording long transcripts. For example, suppose you have a one-hour audio file and save it with a compression that uses 1 Kilobyte per second of sound (1 KB/sec) and another that uses 100 KB/sec. The file saved with the 1 KB/sec compression would be 3.6 MB file and the other would be 360 MB. The larger file would be higher quality but it might be too large to be useful. Working with audio files always comes down to finding a satisfactory compromise between file size and quality. You may want to try the different compression choices in the Select compression dialog window to find the option that best meets your sound quality and file size requirements.

Choosing audio compression options

To set compression options go to User Settings | Realtime. Click the Compression button in the Audio field to open the Select Compression dialog. This dialog allows you to select an audio compression method for each audio device. Your selections determine the quality of the sound recording and the amount of disk space required to store the audio (WAV) file.

Select the Compression Format The Format field contains a list of codecs (compression/ decompression drivers) available on your system (this list varies depending on the sound card installed in your computer). GSM 610 requires approximately 6 megabytes per hour (at 8 kHz, Mono). Sound quality generally decreases as compression increases. You may wish to experiment with different codecs. NOTE: Your scopist must have the same codecs on her computer to access the audio file. The selections available for the Attributes field vary with the chosen codec. Select an option at 8 kHz, Mono (8 kHz = 8,000 Hz) to produce the smallest possible audio files. A higher sampling rate (such as 11 kHz, Mono) will result in better sound quality but also a larger audio file. Each option lists the amount of disk space required to store one second of sound (Kilobytes per second, or KB/s). Lower values result in smaller audio files. Experiment with different options to find the best compromise between sound quality and file size for your needs.

Realtime 317

The audio level indicator on the Realtime status display will let you know the recording is working.

PLAYBACK
Playing the Synchronized Recording
You can play back the audio when you pause or stop recording, or as you are recording it.
Command Speed Key Menu Toolbar icon Play Alt+J F10/Tools/Multimedia/Play

To playback while in realtime, press (Alt+J) to play any previous portions of the audio. To resume recording, Stop the playback (Alt+H), recording will then resume. The stop button will stop the playback. If the system is not playing, the stop button will ask if you wish to stop the recording.

Command Speed Key Menu Toolbar icon

Stop Alt+H F10/Tools/Multimedia/Stop

Once youve finished the realtime session, to playback the audio, open the realtime transcript in Total Eclipse, place the cursor where you want to begin playback, press Alt+J for the Play command. You can then stop or pause the playback using the keyboard shortcuts.

Note that you can play a document even as it is being recorded, or you can play back other files. This feature is useful for scopists working on the reporter's computer as they write realtime. The pause button will default to pausing the recording. If the system is not recording, it will stop the playback.

Using the Multimedia Control Panel

Tools | Multimedia | Control panel (Ctrl+Shift+A) opens the Audio controls dialog, which allows you to adjust the playback speed and volume threshold interactively without going into the user settings.
Command Speed Key Menu Toolbar icon Audio control panel Ctrl+Shift+A F10/Tools/Multimedia/ Control Panel

Unlike the item in the user settings, you can use the play/stop buttons to play the audio and adjust the sliders while the audio is playing to see what the final results will sound like. Each setting has a horizontal slider and a box where the number can simply be typed in or changed using the up/down arrows. It may take a second

Realtime 318

for any change to take effect because of the time necessary to finish processing the audio data that has already been buffered and sent to the device before new, modified data is sent. The Clean play function plays the sound unfiltered, so you hear exactly what was recorded rather than the audio filtered through the speed and volume threshold controls. The Timecodes.. button goes directly to the same dialog that appears under User settings | Document | Timecodes, which allows you to adjust the offset in order to synchronize the timecodes properly. Note that if you are filling in gaps in translation from a retroactive realtime file, Eclipse will attempt to play audio from the previous good timecode rather than playing at zero. In order to tell the system NOT to attempt to extrapolate relative timecodes based on the absolute time and the starting time (which would be the normal behavior) you need to set the User settings | Document | Timecodes | Start time in the document to zero. There is also an option to Move cursor which will move the cursor in the document as the audio plays. There are a couple of things to keep in mind as you use this: 1. It will keep moving the cursor to reflect the current position in the audio whether you press keys or not, so you MUST stop the playback before you attempt to edit or the cursor will get moved out from under you. 2. The cursor position will not move word-by-word because audio synchronization is inherently not word-for-word accurate due to variations in the amount of time that elapses between when a word is spoken and when it translates, some of which are intentional lags by the reporter. Rather, it will jump through the text in small blocks in order to keep the cursor in the approximately correct location for where the audio is being played. The Record/Play levels functions go directly to the windows control panel for record and playback levels, eliminating the need to double-click on the audio icon or go into Control Panel in order to adjust your record/playback levels. (Note: Windows Vista users will need to use their system's tools to set these levels.)

Playing Specific Sections of the Audio

Total Eclipse doesnt have fast forward and rewind controls because you can jump to the specific sections of the transcript that you want to hear. The audio is essentially controlled by the cursor position. To hear a specific section, move the cursor to that section and give the Play command (Alt+J) and it will start playing at the new position. If, on the other hand, you hit play and then hit play again without moving the cursor, the system will assume that you want to stop the playback. Playing back audio in an excerpt If you have a document that is associated with a WAV file, you can block mark a section of that document and use block/write (or block/separate) to write it out to a new file. If you go into that new file to edit it, you can hit the Play function and it will play the appropriate audio at the appropriate location. It is not necessary to give the file a particular name, or to rename the wav file, or to make sure the wav file is in the same folder, or to redirect the auxiliary folder. Be aware, however, that this does NOT make an excerpt of the WAV file. What it does is use a job variable for the WAV file path. If you go into the excerpt and select Tools menu |

Realtime 319

Job variables, you will see a line that tells the excerpt exactly where the original WAV file is. For example:
WAV=C:\Program Files\Advantage Software\Eclipse\Users\John\OriginalJobName

Note that if you wish to be able to access WAV files from a subdirectory, you should move the job into the subdirectory first, then use the block/write to make an excerpt. You can then move the excerpt around at will and it will still know where to look to find the audio. You can also use this principle directly. If you manually go into any job's job variables and type in a WAV=etc. line, that will redirect the audio playback to the file path you provide instead of looking for a WAV file with the same name as the job.

Skipping over Silent (dead) Spots

To avoid silent gaps in the audio, you can set the volume threshold for playback. The program will then automatically skip over sections in which the volume of sound is beneath the threshold you set. The number you enter is a percentage, based on the signal-to-noise (how noisy is the room compared to how loud the voices are that you are recording). To get the setting right you will need to experiment with it, adjusting the threshold up and down. To set the volume threshold, go to User Settings (Alt+U) | Edit | Volume threshold. In the bottom right corner is the Volume threshold entry box. You can enter a number directly into the field or use the up and down arrows to scroll through numbers. Note that you cannot enter a negative number.

Playback Speed
You can adjust playback speed, reducing it to as little as 60% of the original speed or increasing the speed to as much as 300%. Adjusting this speed does not adjust the pitch, which means that voices wont be distorted to unusually high or low voices (as happens if you speed up a tape or record player). To change the speed, go to User Settings (Alt+U) | Edit | Speed. In the bottom right corner is a text entry box labeled Speed. Enter a number between 60 and 300. To test the playback speed, you must first be in the file that has audio. Then click the Play button (it will remain highlighted as if it were pressed in). The playback will begin at the cursor position in the file. To stop the play, click Play again (without moving the cursor).

Troubleshooting Audio
Volume control If you have problems with realtime audio, you may want to check the following audio settings in Windows (these are not Total Eclipse settings, and work differently in Windows Vista. Windows Vista users will need to use their system's settings.) Double-click the volume control icon near the clock, or open it from the Start menu: (press your Windows key, if you have one to open the Start menu or click the Start button on your taskbar), go to Programs | Accessories | Entertainment | Volume control. From there, you can adjust volume levels for your microphone, speakers, and other audio devices.

Realtime 320

Processing errors If a multimedia processing error occurs, Eclipse will display some error code numbers in parentheses to help tech support and development diagnose the problem.

Using FTR Gold

FTR Gold allows each speaker to be miked separately, so playback can be one channel at a time in order to isolate a single person's voice. If you have the FTR Gold software installed, and do not have a wave file associated with the current document, then when you issue the Play command in Eclipse, it will send the play function through to FTR along with the appropriate timecode (the current absolute time in the document + the timecode offset). Stop and Pause commands in Eclipse will also be sent to the FTR program. Note that you must load the file into the FTR program first, as Eclipse will not automatically load the correct FTR audio file for the current document.

SHARING A REALTIME JOB

How can I share a realtime job outputting to LawBridge or Bridge with another reporter? If you are working with another reporter on a shared job, and will both be outputting to LawBridge (Bridge) on the network, you can call the file something like JobName_variation1 and JobName_variation2. (Example: Sept15_JT and Sept15_DS). Eclipse will truncate the output file name at the first underscore character (_)in the file name, and the LawBridge file will then be called JobName.law (Sept15.law.) Using this naming convention allows one reporter to stop translation and the next reporter to start translation, and LawBridge (Bridge) will just pick up and keep going without having to stop and reconnect to the new reporter.

Realtime 321

Realtime 322

APPENDICES
Note that, in keeping with accepted Windows conventions, capital letters always denote keys, not case. So an Alt+E means that you just press the Alt key and the E key. You need not type the capital letter. File menu
Open Notes Open Text Open Dictionary Close Print Exit Shift+F7 Alt+E F9 Ctrl+Q Alt+O Alt+X
You can specify additional keyboard shortcuts in your user settings. Press Alt+U to open the User Settings dialog, select the Edit tab, then select the Keyboard button. In the Keyboard definitions window, click Add. To use multikey shortcuts, press and hold the designated command key (Ctrl, Alt, Shift, or Tab), then press the designated character key. Release all the keys at the same time.

APPENDIX A: KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS

Production menu
Open Notes Open Text Open Dictionary User settings Read notes Translate Instant Realtime Stop translation Fill in blanks Check spelling List errors Automatic index Output to Printer Output to ASCII Generate REDI Shift+F7 Alt+E F9 Alt+U Alt+I Alt+T Num + Shift+Alt+T Ctrl+E Shift+Alt+S Ctrl+Shift+E Ctrl+I Alt+O Shift+Alt+O Ctrl+Shift+I

Move menu
Multi-scan Find (replace) Locate Next Locate Previous Ctrl+Shift+M F5 Ctrl+L Ctrl+Shift+L
The move menu lists commands for moving the cursor. The shortcuts for these commands are among the most frequently used keystrokes, and the ones that most new users learn first.

Appendices 323

Basic submenu
Left (one character) Right (one character) Up Down Previous word Next word Back page Forward page Home (beginning of line) End (end of line) Return Ctrl+Left arrow Ctrl+Right arrow Up arrow Down arrow Left arrow Right arrow Page Up Page Down Home End Enter

Advanced submenu
Up paragraph Down paragraph Next Sentence Previous Sentence Right punctuation Left punctuation Top of page Top of screen Bottom of screen Go to Top of text Bottom of text Markers Last Edit Point Ctrl+Up arrow Ctrl+Down arrow Alt+Down arrow Alt+Up arrow Ctrl+. (period) Ctrl+, (comma) Alt+Home Ctrl+Home Ctrl+End Alt+G Ctrl+Page Up Ctrl+Page Down Ctrl+M Alt+Shift+L

Scan submenu
Non-resolved translation Untranslate Conflict Unresolved conflict Any Ctrl+T Ctrl+U Ctrl+O Ctrl+\ Ctrl+S

Reverse (scan) submenu

Non-resolved translation Untranslate Conflict Unresolved conflict Any Ctrl+Shift+T Ctrl+Shift+U Ctrl+Shift+O Ctrl+Shift+\ Ctrl+Shift+S

Appendices 324

Edit menu
Open text Hyperkeys Global Add dictionary entry 1 Unglobal Entry properties 1 Delete entry 1 Undo Escape Redo Alt+E Alt+Z Ctrl+G Ctrl+D Ctrl+Shift+G Enter Delete Ctrl+Z Esc Ctrl+Shift+Z
Available menus and commands change depending on the type of document that is open, however, shortcuts for similar commands in different environments do not change. For example, F5 is the shortcut for the Find command in text files, notes, and dictionaries, although the dialog is different for each file type.

1 - appears only when dictionary files are active.

Insert submenu
New Print command Prefix/Suffix Time/Date Add blank Index Item Special character Tab Lockspace Insert/overtype mode Type in text Literal case mode Alt+N Ctrl+K Shift+Alt+I Ctrl+A Shift+Alt+X Ctrl+W Tab ~ (Shift+`) Insert Ctrl+N Ctrl+Shift+C

Delete submenu
Back Character Word Line End of paragraph To end of line Backspace Delete Ctrl+Backspace Ctrl+Y Shift+Alt+Y Alt+Y

Appendices 325

Miscellaneous submenu
Join paragraph . at end ? at end -- at end Flip apostrophe Reverse tran Word flip Toggle case Upper case Lower case Check word Numbers Translate mode Edit timecodes Ctrl+J Alt+P Alt+Q Alt+D Alt+A Ctrl+F7 Ctrl+R F6 Shift+F6 Ctrl+F6 Alt+S Ctrl+Shift+3 Alt+M Alt+Shift+C
To learn more about a specific menu item, click on its menu, position your mouse pointer over the item, and press F1.

Block menu
Mark Cut Copy Paste Read Write Separate F7 Ctrl+X Ctrl+C Ctrl+V Alt+R Alt+W Ctrl+Shift+X

Move submenu
mark Left mark Right mark Word left mark Word right mark Up mark Down mark Home mark End mark Page up mark Page down mark Top mark Bottom Ctrl+Shift+Left arrow Ctrl+Shift+Right arrow Shift+Left arrow Shift+Right arrow Shift+Up arrow Shift+Down arrow Shift+Home Shift+End Shift+Page Up Shift+Page Down Ctrl+Shift+Page Up Ctrl+Shift+Page Down

Appendices 326

Format menu
Font Text Attributes Text type Insert/modify paragraph Fixed Question Answer Speaker New paragraph Parenthetical Centered Right flush Double space Single space View properties Ctrl+Shift+F Ctrl+- (hyphen) F8 Shift+F5 F3 F4 F2 Ctrl+P Shift+F4 Alt+C Shift+F3 Alt+= (equal sign) Alt+- (hyphen) Alt+L

Tools menu
Phone numbers File manager Edit toggles Timekeeper Job Variables Hidden text Ctrl+F12 Ctrl+F Shift+Alt+E Ctrl+Shift+K Shift+Alt+V Shift+Alt+F7

Realtime submenu
Control panel Send script line Retransmit text Direct output Force translation Shift+Alt+P F12 Shift+Alt+R Alt+Shift+D Shift+Alt+F

Multimedia submenu
Stop Play Pause Control Panel Alt+H Alt+J Alt+K Ctrl+Shift+A

Voice submenu
Apply Corrections Play Stop Microphone Ctrl+Shift+V Alt+Shift+J Alt+Shift+K Alt+Shift+M

Appendices 327

Window menu
Tile Full screen Switch Panes View toggles Customize toolbars Display properties Zoom in Zoom out Ctrl+Shift+F9 F11 Shift+Ctrl+Tab Ctrl+Shift+F3 Ctrl+Shift+F1 Ctrl+Shift+F11 Ctrl+Shift+F7 Ctrl+Shift+F8

View submenu (toggles)

view Notebar view Script list Ctrl+Shift+F5 Shift+F12

Help menu
Internet support Alt+Shift+U

System menu (for main program window)

Open system menu Close (Exit program) Alt+Spacebar Alt+F4

System menu (for active document window)

Open system menu Switch active document window Close (document window) Next Alt+Spacebar+Left arrow Ctrl+Tab Ctrl+F4 Ctrl+F6

Appendices 328

APPENDIX B: H Y PE R KE YS
CUSTOMIZING YOUR KEYBOARD
You can change the keyboard definitions for the Hyperkeys, but you should do so only if necessary. Keep in mind that customizing your keyboard makes it more difficult for technical support to help you unless they know what customizations you have made. To customize your keyboard, go first to your User settings Alt+U | Edit and click the Hyperkey status Keyboard button. If you were in Hyperkeys when you went to your User settings, you will To toggle Hyperkeys on and off, press see definitions. If you were not in Hyperkeys, you will see the standard Alt+Z. You can look at the your Hyperkey status bar or main toolbar to keyboard determine whether definitions.
Hyperkeys are on or off.

On

To find a specific command, use the Find button. Note that this will let you search for a command type. If you want to find a particular keystroke, you must scan the list, which is in alphabetical order. You can delete commands from the command list by selecting it and then click the Delete button. To select more than one command at a time, press Shift while clicking on the items. All items between the first and last items selected will be included in the selection. To select multiple items that are not contiguous, press the Ctrl key each time you click on an item.

Off

The following table lists the default set of Hyperkeys that is installed with Total Eclipse. Note again that, in keeping with accepted Windows conventions, capital letters always denote keys (A, Shift+A, B, Shift+B, etc.). They do not mean that you must type the capital letter. Earlier versions of Eclipse referred to Hyperkeys as lower-case and upper-case letters (A, a, B, b, etc.). That is not the case with Total Eclipse.

Globals
1-stroke global 2-stroke global 3-stroke global .4-stroke global 5-stroke global Untranslate word G 7 8 9 0 Shift+U
This Hyperkey allows you to select any type of scan from the Reverse scan menu by pressing the underlined letter of the desired scan (e.g. press C to perform a reverse scan to a conflict.)

Scans
Conflict Untranslate Unresolved conflict Open reverse scans menu Next non-resolved C U Shift+C R T

Appendices 329

Paragraph formatting
Insert Question Insert Answer Speaker 1 Speaker 2 Speaker 3 Speaker 4 Speaker 5 Speaker 6 Other speakers Witness Butting in Go to selected paragraph type Shift+Q Shift+P Ctrl+1 Ctrl+2 Ctrl+3 Ctrl+4 Ctrl+5 Ctrl+6 Ctrl+9 Ctrl+0 Shift+B V
The Speaker Hyperkeys change the speaker in the current paragraph to the corresponding speaker on your speaker list (F2). Witness creates a speaker paragraph using WITNESS as the speaker name. Butting in inserts dashes to indicate that the current paragraph follows an interruption. Go to selected paragraph opens the find dialog and activates the paragraph format searchpress the letter of the paragraph format you want to find, and then press Enter to execute the search.

Conflicts
Select choice 1 Select choice 2 Select choice 3 Select choice 4 Select choice 5 Select choice 6 Scan to conflict Scan to unresolved conflict 1 2 3 4 5 6 C Shift+C

Choose conflicts using the same keys as in standard keyboard mode.

Cursor movement
Left one word Right one word Up one line Down one line Left one character Right one character Up one sentence Down one sentence Two words to left Two words to right Up one paragraph Down one paragraph Page up Page down Left to punctuation J L I K Shift+J Shift+L Shift+I Shift+K Shift+O O Y H Shift+Y Shift+H Shift+, (comma)

Appendices 330

Right to punctuation Home (start of line) End (of line) Go to page/line no. Go to selected paragraph type Mark a spot Jump to marked spot Last edit point

Shift+. (period) [ ] Shift+G V Shift+X Shift+V Shift+Z

Audio/Video
Play Pause Stop Shift+[ Shift+] Shift+\ (pipe symbol)

Phrase insertions
Okay. All right. , you know, Uh-huh. Alt+1 Alt+2 Alt+3 Alt+4

Appendices 331

Editing
Type in text (temporarily N suspend Hyperkeys) Resume Hyperkeys mode Enter Resume Hyperkeys mode Enter+Enter and delete remainder of word End sentence with ? Q End sentence with period. P Add word part (prefix or W suffix) Place a dash at end of = sentence Reverse words (word flip) Shift+R Toggle case (capitalization) A All caps Shift+A Extend sentence X Delete word D Delete next character Shift+D Add or reverse apostrophe (apostrophe) s Undo Z Mark word (turn on block M marking) Open Block menu B Shave letter from previous S word Shave letter from current Shift+S word

Use Type in text to quickly revert to the standard keyboard for text entry. Standard keyboard shortcuts also apply while in this mode. Press Enter to resume Hyperkeys.

Extend sentence jumps to the end of a sentence, removes the terminal punctuation, and turns on Type in Text mode. Type the remainder of the sentence, then press Enter to return to Hyperkeys.

Open Block menu allows you to select any of the commands on the Block menu by pressing the underlined letter of the desired command (e.g. press C to copy the marked text to the clipboard. The Shave Hyperkeys remove the final letter of the designated word.

Tools
Check document spelling Create autoreplacement Find Reverse find Add blank (form field) Fill in blanks Untranslate word \ Alt+7 F Shift+F Shift+E E Shift+U

Create autoreplacement allows you to add an entry to your autoreplacements list. When you come across an item for which you want to create an autoreplacement, type the replacement text after that item, then press Alt-7. Total Eclipse creates the autoreplacement and deletes the original item.

Number conversions
Written out numbers Time Numerals Money Shift+W Shift+T Shift+N Shift+M

Appendices 332

APPENDIX C: TOOLBARS
DEFAULT TOOLBARS:

Appendices 333

ADDITIONAL TOOLBAR BUTTONS:

Appendices 334

APPENDIX D: TABLE

OF

STANDARD DICTIONARY COMMANDS

Example
Entry: {^ing}, {re^} Translation: running, replace If you write what {>} University you will get what university Mr.{~}Brown (&A}{&B}{&C} will translate as ABC
See Reference Guide page 414 for details on Glue entries and templates

Table of Standard Dictionary Commands

Note that opening and closing braces are necessary.

Command entry
{^} {|} or {-|} {|-} {>} {>-} {~} {&text}

Description
delete space, can be used with text (e.g. prefixes and suffixes) capitalize the next word capitalize the previous word lower case next word lower case previous word insert a lock-space (nonbreaking space) glue entry - Glue entries stick to each other and not anything else (except an option for not sticking to numbers see page 137) glue entry, using a hyphen as divider ({&A} would mean no divider) glue mode on glue mode off glue mode toggle question paragraph answer paragraph, use ? as terminal punctuation for previous paragraph. speaker with name label paragraph start a new paragraph using the continuation paragraph format that is defined for the previous paragraph centered paragraph parenthetical paragraph fixed line paragraph new paragraph with label named paragraph type templatable name user paragraph style x. Substitute a number for x. Styles 0-9 can be defined on the Paragraphs tab of the User settings window. insert the print command type indicated by name change to all caps translation turn off the ALLCAPS function switch all caps translation on and off turn on capitalize each word mode turn off capitalize each word mode switch capitalize each word mode on and off decimal point font number x verbose font name

{&-A} {GLUEON} {GLUEOFF} {SLOWDOWN} {Q} {A} {S:name} {N} {C} {P} {F} {N:label} {PGH:name} {s:name} {Ux} {PRT:name} {ALLCAPS} {ALLCAPSOFF} {ALLCAPSTOGGLE} {CAPON} {CAPOFF} {CAPTOGGLE} {DECIMAL} {FN:x} {F:name}

(&-A}{&-B}{&-C} will translate as A-B-C

{S:MR. BROWN}

{U3} {PRT:End excerpt}

{FN:0} (default font) {FN:14} (font number 14) {F:Times Roman} {F:Courier New/0/700/0/0} (numbers specify font

Appendices 335

Table of Standard Dictionary Commands

Note that opening and closing braces are necessary. characteristics) attribute begin bold {b}boldtext{n} begin underscore {u}underscoredtext{n} begin italics {i}italicizedtext{n} bold and underscore (or any other combination such {bu}boldandunderscoredtext{n} as {bi} for bold italics back to normal text attributes {n}normaltext plain attributes (same as normal but removes spaces) Tab {T:2}

{A:attribute} {b} {u} {i} {bu} {n} {p} {Tx:y}

x = L or nothing (left), C (centered), R (right), {TN:3} N (numeric) y = tab number (nothing for next tab) {TC} {#x} number conversion method x (See number {#R} conversion codes in the preceding section {C:Euros} {C:currency} currency {<filename} Include the file specified {<exhibit.ecl} For the following, DO NOT specify the spaces or capitalization as that is specified and adjustable through the metadictionary {.} period (no space to the left, two to the right, capitalize the following word) {?} question mark (no space to the left, two to the right, capitalize the following word) {,} comma (no space to the left, one to the right) {!} exclamation point (no space to the left, two to the right, cap the following word) {:} colon (no space to the left, two to the right) {-} hyphen (no spaces on either side) {--} dash (user-definable format. Usually a lock-space to the left) {} quote (alternates left and right) {(} parentheses (alternates left and right) {'s} apostrophe s (s) { "} initial quote -- leaves spacing/capitalization alone this{ "}that --> this "that {.}{ "} period/quote with spacing/capitalization this{.}{ "}that --> this. "That {" } final quote -- leaves spacing/capitalization alone this{" }that --> this" that {!"} exclamation point/quote {!} exclamation point {"!} quote/exclamation point {".} quote/period {"?} quote/question mark {, "} comma/openquote {,"} comma/close quote {."} period/quote {,?} soft comma {?"} questions mark/quote {.)} period/paren {).} paren/period {)!} paren/exclamation point {!)} exclamation point/paren {)?} paren/question mark {?)} question mark/paren {/} slash {;?} soft semicolon

Appendices 336

Table of Standard Dictionary Commands

{;} {"A} {"Q} {"S:speaker} {$:label} {$} {>.} {>?} {[} {^ ^} {TM:time/date} {U:text} {W:wavefile} {NULL} {DELETE} {BLANK} {FLUSH} {l1} {l0} {lT} {d1} {d0} {dt} {L} {H} {suboff} {subon} {superoff} {superon} {>>} {>>>} {CR:filename} {H:position} {POS:position} {L1} {L3} {R1} {R3} {GREEN} {YELLOW} {BLUE} {MAGENTA) {CYAN} {WHITE} {BLACK} Note that opening and closing braces are necessary. semicolon quoted answer quoted question quoted speaker non-punctuation paragraph with label non-punctuating paragraph enforce automatic period enforce automatic question mark toggle open/close bracket force space insert time/date Example: {TM:%H:%M} insert untranslate text play wave sound do nothing removes the previous stroke from the translation; can be hit multiple times to remove more than one stroke; blank display flush pending realtime data literal case on-- used to put literal-case text into an otherwise all-caps document literal case off literal case toggle Downcap mode on Downcap mode off Downcap toggle subscript superscript subscript off subscript on superscript off superscript on new speaker paragraph (for captioning) new story paragraph (for captioning) credit file (for captioning) horizontal position (for captioning) vertical position (for captioning) left 1 3 pgh (for captioning) right 1 3 pgh (for captioning) Changes the text printing color to green Changes the text printing color to yellow Changes the text printing color to blue Changes the text printing color to magenta Changes the text printing color to cyan Changes the text printing color to white Changes the text printing color to black

Appendices 337

Table of Standard Dictionary Commands

Note that opening and closing braces are necessary.

These commands trigger proper formatting of a string of numbers in translation. For these triggers to work, you must turn on automatic number conversion (User settings (Alt+U) | Numbers tab).
{#Q} {#M} {#G} {#R} {#r} {#O} {#P} {#S} {#Z} {#T} {#D} Quantity Money Generic Roman numerals Lowercase Roman numerals (i) Ordinal Phone number (###) ###-#### Social Security no. ###-##-#### Zip code #####-#### Time ##:## Date* Note that this can handle 4-digit years (5272000 can result in 5/27/2000) Date trigger for month/day User-defined formats Written out numbers Digits

NUMBER CONVERSION COMMAND CODES

(#DM) {#1}-{#9} {#W} {#N}

98 becomes 9/8

{#M?} Money type ({#MY}=Yen, for example)

Appendices 338

APPENDIX E: CURSOR MOVEMENT

Standard keys Left one word Right one word Up one line Down one line Left one character Right one character Up one paragraph Down one paragraph Page up/ Backward 1 page Page down/ Forward 1 page Home (start of line) End (of line) Go to page/line no. Beginning of previous sentence Beginning of next sentence Previous occurrence of punctuation Next occurrence of punctuation top of the visible screen bottom of the visible screen beginning of current transcript page beginning of the transcript end of the transcript Ctrl+ Ctrl+ Ctrl+ Ctrl+ Page Up Page Down Home End Alt+G Alt+B Alt+F Ctrl+, (comma) Ctrl+. (period) Ctrl+Home Ctrl+End Alt+Home Ctrl+Page Up Ctrl+Page Down Hyperkeys J L I K Shift+J Shift+L Y H Shift+Y Shift+H [ ] Shift+G

Appendices 339

Appendices 340

APPENDIX F: WINDOWS TIPS

Total Eclipse is completely integrated with the Windows operating system. If you are new to desktop computers or the Windows operating system, understanding this section will speed your learning of Total Eclipse. But even if you know how to point-and-click and close a window, dont neglect this section. You may find that a little time spent NOTE TO EXPERIENCED reviewing key terms and concepts will save hours on jobs. WINDOWS USERS: One key concept is that both Windows and Total Eclipse have redundant Eclipse differs slightly from the conventional Windows engineering. Often, the same function can be accessed in several different ways, method of using the Alt key using the mouse or keyboard shortcuts. Because people think and learn in to access menus. To access an Eclipse menu, press and different ways, this redundancy allows you to develop your own style of release the Alt key before working. It is not necessary to try to learn every shortcut for every function, you press the underlined letter of the menu. simply understand that the shortcuts are there.
Previous versions of Eclipse offered many functions that could be accessed by simultaneously pressing Alt and another key. For the benefit of Eclipse users who are upgrading from earlier versions of the software, this system has been retained.

As you begin learning Total Eclipse, your goal should be to access functions in the manner that is quickest for you. Eventually, as you gain experience, begin trying alternate methods of accessing the functions that you use frequently. In practice, we expect most people to use both the mouse and the keyboard to work in Total Eclipse. In theory, you could use only the keyboard or only the mouse (though text entry with a mouse is extremely tedious).

In this manual, we will explain how to use the various methods to access Total Eclipse functions, but in describing specific functions, we will refer to only one or two of those methods in order to avoid confusion. (If you were explaining how to find a television program on channel 21, you would say, Turn to channel 21. It wouldnt be necessary to say, Push the up or down arrows until you reach channel 21, or push two and one on your remote control.)

WHAT ARE WINDOWS?

Windows are the various-sized boxes that appear and disappear on your monitor as you carry out window different tasks on your computer. Because multiple programs, files and operations can all A Windows be open and available at the same time, windows help maintain your sanity. You could compare windows to the dozens of drawers on an antique sewing cabinetwhen a window is open, you can see and use whats inside it. When youre done with the window, you can close it to keep order. Windows are unlike cabinet drawers in that you may also move a window to a different place, change its width and height, or minimize it so that only its title is visible. These features allow you to customize your workspace and improve your efficiency.

THE MOUSE

click

The great benefit of a mouse is its simplicity. You move the mouse over a flat surface to control a pointer on your computer monitor. The mouse provides you with access to any visible area on the screen. Appendices 341

Mouse buttons
The buttons on the mouse activate appropriate functions at the location of the pointer. Total Eclipse uses four basic mouse operations: the click, the double-click, the click-and-drag, and the right-click. The upper-left mouse button is used for all of these operations except the right-click. If you have more than two buttons on your mouse, you may ignore all but the upper left and upper right buttons. (The top of the mouse is where the cable emerges position your right hand on the mouse so that your index finger rests on the upper left button.) Note: It is possible to configure your Windows operating system for a lefthanded mouse, which reverses the functions of the left and right mouse buttons.

TIP:

If your double-clicks arent fast enough, you can change your mouse settings to allow for a slower double-click speed. Reach the mouse settings from your Control panel, which is located under Settings on the Start menu on your main Windows desktop.

Note for laptop users: Your laptop may have a right/left mouse button configuration, or a top/bottom button layout. If the latter, the top button performs the primary Windows functions and is equivalent to the left button. Click: Press and release the left button on your mouse. When you are instructed to click on something, move your mouse so that you position the computer-screen pointer over the item, then click. Double-click: Press-and-release (click) the left mouse button two times in rapid succession. Click and drag: An operation in which the left mouse button is held down while you move (or drag) the mouse. Press the left mouse button and, without releasing the button, move the mouse. When the mouse is in the desired position, release the left mouse button. Right-click: Press and release the right button on your mouse. The primary use for right-clicking in Total Eclipse is to call up a short list of functions that are specific to the item on which you clicked. These right-click lists are called context-sensitive menus.

Right-click menu examples:

The shift-click is an additional mouse operation that you may find useful. The shift-click is actually a combination keyboard and mouse operation in which you hold down the Shift key immediately before and during a mouse click. It is a very effective way to mark large blocks of text because a shift-click highlights all the text between the location of the text insertion point and the point at which you shift-click. (In addition, text that was highlighted before the shift-click remains highlighted.) This use of the shift-click works even when you scroll to another area of the document because clicking the mouse on a windows scroll bars does not move the text insertion point.

Appendices 342

The pointer
The mouse pointer often appears as an arrow, but the pointer can change to different shapes, depending on context. Over text, the pointer becomes a narrow, I-shaped insertion bar, which helps you reposition the text cursor. On window edges the pointer becomes a smaller, twopointed arrow, indicating that you may click-and-drag toward either of the arrow directions to change the size of the window. Note: When the pointer changes to a two-pointed arrow that is split by two lines perpendicular to the arrow, the pointer is over a splitter bar. Windows users who are unaware of this feature may suffer extreme anxiety when they accidentally split a window in half, but it does not harm your document. Total Eclipse users may find this feature useful. It is detailed in the section below on window bars.

MENUS
A menu, like its restaurant analog, is a list of choices. Total Eclipse has a handful of menus, each of which groups various tasks in a logical order. The most visible menus are the main menus, which contain the commands you need to produce work in Total Eclipse. While Total Eclipse has many shortcuts that sidestep menus, learning the menus first improves your understanding of the programs structure. Not only does that knowledge boost your confidence, but also it may help you solve problems in your work, or prevent them altogether.

Main menus and submenus

The titles of Total Eclipses main menus are listed near the top of the main program window as a row of words, each with a single letter underlined. The menus that are listed, and the choices each offers, vary slightly with the type of Total Eclipse document on which you are working. You perform different operations on notes, dictionaries, and text, so Total Eclipse provides different tools for working on these documents. Either the Alt key or the F10 key activates the menu system. You can tell the menus are active because the first menu title in the menu row is highlighted (the File menu). Once the menu system is activated, you may open a menu by pressing the letter underlined in that menus name (e.g. to open the Production menu, you could press Alt and then press P). Select any of the options on an open menu by pressing the underlined letter of the option. Note that if you hit the F10 key, only the letter is needed and the Alt key along with the letter will not work. If you click on a menu title, you activate the menu system and open the menu at the same time. You may then select a menu option by positioning the pointer over the option and clicking. When the menus are active, you may switch to, and open, any other main menu by positioning the mouse pointer over the desired menu title, or by pressing the left or right arrow keys on your keyboard. To deactivate the menu system from the keyboard, you may press Alt, F10, or Esc. To deactivate menus using the mouse, click on a menu title, or anywhere outside of the menu. At first glance, menus seem to contain no more than a list of options, but the formatting and appearance of these items provide additional information: Grayed menu items are not available, typically because the item does not apply to your current environment. Appendices 343

 Items followed by three periods indicate that if you select the item, a dialog window will open. The dialog window allows you to input information or select options related to the menu item. A triangle to the right of an item indicates a submenu. Selecting the item will open an additional list of choices. Submenus work and look much like main menusthey may even have their own submenus. Select submenu items the same way you select main menu items. The keyboard shortcut for a menu item may be listed to the right of the item. Paying attention to shortcuts when you choose a menu item is an efficient way to learn the shortcutthe items you choose the most will probably be the items whose shortcuts you learn first. Shortcuts allow you to access functions without menus. Checkmarks appear to the left of some menu items and indicate that the item is on or active. If a checked item is selected, it will be turned off or deactivated, and the checkmark will disappear. Select the item again to turn it back on. (Turning items on and off is referred to as toggling because of the similarity to toggle switches used in electronics.) Two additional hints may help you when navigating Total Eclipses menus: If you use the keyboard to access menus, make sure you press the key corresponding to the underlined letter of the item. The underlined letter is not always the first letter of the item. If a submenu is indicated for an item, positioning the mouse over the item will automatically open the submenu. If youre still getting used to the mouse, take care to move the mouse pointer horizontally over to the submenu. Move the pointer down to the desired submenu item and click.. (Fast mousers do not have to be as careful.) Note: Some users prefer a slightly different way of navigating menus with a mouse. You may position the mouse pointer on a menu name, then click-and-drag, moving down the open menu (and any submenus) until the desired command is highlighted. Releasing the mouse button selects the highlighted command.

Special menus
System menus Program and document windows also have a system menu that provides options for altering the appearance of a window. It is especially helpful for users who prefer not to use the mouse. The system menu is not labeled, but is located at the icon in the upper left corner of a window. To view a windows system menu, you may click on this icon, right-click anywhere in a windows title bar, or press Alt+Spacebar. The system menu will also appear when the main menus are open and you are moving among them with the keyboard (using left arrow, right arrow, Tab, or Shift+Tab). The options available on the system menu are described in the section below on Working with Windows. Note: You may also access the system menu by rightclicking anywhere in the title bar of a window. Appendices 344

System menu

Click on the icon in the title bar of a window to view the system menu.

Context-sensitive menus

Context-sensitive menus

Context-sensitive menus are an excellent time saving feature. They are also a reason to click that mysterious right mouse button. These menus provide a list of options that are relevant to your position in a document or window. Context-sensitive menus appear at the point where you Instead of moving your mouse to a menu, you simply right-click and a menu appears beneath right-click. Menu items vary the pointer. The options on with thethe menu depend on the mouse pointer location. Right-clicking environment (context). This menu appears when you right-clicking somewhere on the structure within a document produces a different menu than right-click within a note file. of the window (e.g. the title bar).

You may also open context-sensitive menus from the keyboard by pressing Shift+F10. You select options on a context-sensitive menu in the same way you select options on other menus. To close a context-sensitive menu, click anywhere outside of the menu, or press the Esc key. As you learn Total Eclipse, try right-clicking just to see what menu options are available.

TYPES OF WINDOWS IN TOTAL ECLIPSE

Active and inactive windows

Inactive window

Active window

Notice the difference in the title bar colors of the active and inactive windows. You may choose these colors using the Display control panel (Appearance tab).

If you are new to the Windows operating system, a programs various windows may look complicated and confusing. It is helpful to know that all windows work the same way, though Appendices 345

each may have features that have been added or removed (much like the options available on a new car). Once you understand these features and how to manipulate them, learning Total Eclipse becomes much easier. (Many of the technical support calls we receive have nothing to do with Total Eclipse, but are basic Windows issues with quick answers.) Keep in mind that while several windows may be open, only one may be activemeaning that the functions, buttons, and fields are available to use. The active window is the one that receives any keyboard entries you make. When active, a windows title bar (the rectangular area at the very top of the window) has a characteristic color. The active window may also determine which main menus appear in the main program window
The effects of maximizing a window
Eclipse main program window

Normal view of a document window

When maximized, the document expands to the full dimensions of the main program window.

Title bars of the document window and main program window are merged.

Minimize, restore and close buttons of document window move to menu row.

Click the restore button to return the document window to its previous dimensions.

One way to make a window active is to click anywhere within its visible boundary. You may also make another window active by pressing Ctrl+Tab.

Appendices 346

The three major types of windows you will see in Total Eclipse are the main program window, document windows, and dialog windows. Each type of window has the same general appearancea rectangle with a title bar along the top. The title bar contains the windows icon and title, and it changes color to indicate whether it is active (the Windows default color for an active window is blue). Every windows title bar has a square-shaped close button that is marked with an X. Most windows also share additional features, discussed in the following section, that allow you to alter their appearance. The main program window is always open when Total Eclipse is running. It provides a surface on which you can organize and work on separate Total Eclipse files. It also contains the programs main menus, toolbars and status bars (each of which will be explained later). Document windows show individual Total Eclipse files, such as notes, transcripts, or Dialog window dictionaries. You may have several files open at the same time in Total Eclipse, each contained within its own window. Dialog windows cover a spectrum of complexity, but the description dialog indicates a common feature: interaction with the user. A dialog box may have just an OK button and ask you to confirm an operation you selected. On the other hand, the Total Eclipse User Settings dialog window is arranged like a stack of tabbed file folders, with each folder providing a different set of data-entry fields, checkboxes, and buttons. Some buttons even open new dialog windows. Certain types of dialog windows prevent you from performing any other tasks in the program until you finish working in that window, or close it. These windows are modal.

WORKING WITH WINDOWS

You can easily manipulate the size, shape and location of windows.
maximize button

Such alterations are not just cosmetic. Adjusting windows helps you organize and manage complex tasks. If you dont work with the physical characteristics of your windows, you may wind up with an inefficient pile of clutter on your monitor.

Maximize, minimize, restore and close

minimize button

Maximize, minimize, restore and close have specific meanings in the Windows environment. Understanding these terms can make you a lot more comfortable in Windows. When a window is maximized, it expands to the edges of its constraints. The constraints for a main program window are the edges of the monitor screen. The constraints for a document or dialog window are the main program windows current borders. Maximize a window when you need as much work space as possible or do not want to be distracted by other open programs or windows. Maximizing a document window also causes other subtle changes that allow the working area of the document to take up more space. The title bars of the document window and the main program window merge so that both the program name and document filename are in the same area. Other elements of the document windows title bar move to the same row as the menu titles for the document. Appendices 347

restore button

close button

It is also important to remember that when you maximize a document window, all other open documents in the program remain open, though they are hidden from view. When a document is maximized, all other open documents in the program are also maximized. To maximize a window, click on the maximize button in the windows title bar, or select Maximize from the system menu. When you minimize a window, it is reduced to a title-bar icona shortened version of the title-bar with no other visible elements of its window. When a document or dialog window is minimized, its title-bar icon is positioned along the bottom of its main program window. You may click-and-drag the title-bar icon to reposition it within the main program window. When a main program window is minimized, its title-bar-icon is positioned on the Windows taskbar the row of buttons along the bottom of the Windows desktop that contains the Start button. To minimize a window, click on the minimize button in the windows title bar, or select Minimize from the system menu. Restoring a window returns it to its previous size and position. You may restore a maximized window, or a title-bar-icon. Note: If you reduce the size of a main program window and then restore windows within the program, the restored windows will still return to their previous size. If that size is larger than the main program window, parts of the restored window may be obscured. If this happens, resize and move the window to an appropriate size and position with the mouse or keyboard. (Methods of resizing and moving windows are covered below.) Closing is another important concept in the Windows operating system. The most obvious way to close a window is to click on the close button in the upper right-hand corner of the window, on the title-bar. The close button is marked with an X. Closing a window removes it from your desktop, sealing it off in effect. Closing Total Eclipses main program window exits Total Eclipse. Closing a document window will close that documents file, but it will not exit Total Eclipse. Most dialog boxes close automatically when you select a button that accepts or rejects the entries you made (e.g. the OK button). If you click the close button on a dialog window, you do not necessarily implement any changes you entered in the window. In many programs, closing a document window causes a prompt to appear asking whether you wish to save changes made to that document before you close it. Total Eclipse saves documents as you work, so this prompt isnt necessary when closing transcript documents. Such a prompt may appear in Total Eclipse when you close certain dialog boxes without confirming changes you made or data you entered. To close a window, click on the close button, or select Close from the windows system menu. The keyboard shortcut Alt+F4 will also close windows in Total Eclipse.

Resizing windows with the mouse

You can easily change the width and height of most windows by using your mouse to clickand-drag the windows borders. You may drag a single side of a window, or you may drag two adjacent sides at the same time. To resize a border, position the mouse pointer over the selected border so that the pointer shape becomes a two-pointed arrow. If the arrow is horizontal, you may click-and-drag to Appendices 348

shift the chosen border to the left or the right. If the arrow is vertical, you may click-and-drag to shift the chosen border up or down. Release the mouse button when the border is at the desired location. If you position the arrow over the corner of a window, the resize arrow becomes a diagonal, two-pointed arrow. When you click-and-drag with a diagonal arrow, the two window borders that compose the corner will both move with the mouse. Note: You cannot resize the borders of a maximized window.

Moving windows with the mouse

To move a window to another location, position the mouse pointer over an empty area on the windows title bar. Click-and-drag the mouse to move the window. When the window is in the desired location, release the mouse button.

Resizing windows with the keyboard arrows

To resize a window using the keyboard, select the Size command from the windows system menu. The mouse pointer changes to a cross with four arrow points. Use the keyboard arrow keys to select a window border or corner for resizing: The first arrow key you press corresponds to a window border (e.g. the left arrow selects the left border), and the resize pointer will appear on the chosen border. To select a corner, press an arrow key perpendicular to the first key pressed. The corner in the direction of the key will be selected and the resize pointer moves to the corner (e.g. press the left arrow and then the up arrow to select the upper left hand corner).

Once a border Select Size to resize a windowor corner is selected, pressing the arrow from the keyboard. in the direction of the arrow. When the window border

keys will move the selected border(s) is in the desired location, press Enter to set the resize. (Pressing Esc will return the window to its previous size.) Note: If you wish to resize the window in smaller increments, press the Ctrl key while pressing the arrow keys.

Moving windows with the keyboard arrows

To move a window using the keyboard, select the Move command from the windows system menu. The mouse pointer changes to a cross with four arrow points. Press the keyboard arrow keys to move the window. If you wish to move the window in smaller increments, press the Ctrl key while pressing the arrow keys. When the window is in the desired location, press Enter to set the position. (Pressing Esc Move/Resize will pointer return the window to its previous location.)

BARS IN WINDOWS: TOOLBARS, STATUS BARS, TITLE BARS AND SPLITTER BARS
Several windows elements are described as bars because of their narrow rectangular shape. Bars keep controls and information handy. Appendices 349

The title bar and system menu

title bar
click this icon to view the system menu

close button maximize button

system menu

minimize button window title

Title bars
The title bar is an inconspicuous, but powerful windows element. Besides containing a title, the bars color immediately tells you whether the window is active. When your mouse pointer is positioned over the title bar, you may click-and-drag the window to reposition it on your monitor. The bar also offers several ways to maximize, restore, minimize, or close the window. Double-click a title bar to maximize its window. Double-click the title bar of a maximized window to restore it. Double-click a minimized title-bar to restore the window. KEYBOARD TIP:
To open a system menu for an active window, press Alt+Spacebar, then press the right arrow key.

You may also click on the icon for the window, which is located on the far left of the title-bar, to open a system menu. The commands available on this menu depend on the windows type and status, and include Restore, Minimize, Maximize, Close, Move, Size, and Next. When more than one window is open, the Next command activates the most recently active window in the stacking order. (The other commands have already been described in this chapter.)

One to three square-shaped buttons are positioned on the right side of the title bar. The close button is always present. The other two buttons will be a combination of the minimize, maximize and restore buttons. (e.g. A maximized window will have minimize and restore buttons, but not a maximize button because the window is already maximized.)
help pointer

Occasionally, a help button, marked with a question mark, will also be present on the title bar. When you click this button, a type of context-sensitive help is activated. Your mouse pointer will include a question mark and for any item you click within the window, informative text will appear. (The item itself will not be activated.) Normal program function returns when you click outside of the help text or press Esc.

Status bars
The status bar is the horizontal bar at the very bottom of your main program window. Some document windows, such as note files, also have status bars. The status bar is a valuable aid that can help you avoid baffling problems that have simple solutions (like accidentally turning Total Eclipse hyperkeys on). Yet, because of its location, it is often overlooked.

Appendices 350

scroll bar and splitter bar

splitter bar end button (scroll up)

The main program status bar indicates the page, line, column and volume of an active document (based on the position of the cursor in the document.). The outlined rectangles on the right side of the status bar work like indicator lights. Three or four-letter abbreviations appear in the rectangle show which modes are active: HYP Hyperkeys mode INS Insert mode CAPS Caps lock SCRL Scroll lock NUM Number lock MLT Multi-scan mode If your keyboard entries produce unexpected results, look at the status bar to make sure you have not inadvertently switched on one of these modes. You may hide or display the status bar by selecting View | view Statusbar from the Window menu. Selecting this option toggles the main programs status bar between display and hide. A checkmark appears to the left of the menu item when the bar is displayed.

position indicator button

end button (scroll down)

scroll bar track

SCROLL BARS
Scroll bars allow you to move rapidly to other parts of a document. Vertical scroll bars appear on the right side of a window and allow you to move up and down through the document. Horizontal scroll bars appear along the bottom of the window (above the status bar) and allow left and right movement. Buttons, marked with a triangle, are located at both ends of a scroll bar. The space between the end buttons works as a track. A rectangular position indicator button rides on top of this track. The position of this button on the track describes which part, and how much, of the document is visible. In other words, the scroll bar serves as a scale model for the document. An indicator button near the top of the vertical scroll bar indicates that you are looking near the beginning of the document. A button that is one-third the length of the track indicates that one-third of the document is visible in the window. To move long distances in a document, position the mouse on the indicator button, then click-and-drag the button along the track to the desired location. To move through the document one screen at a time, click in the track on the side of the button. With the vertical scroll bar, this works like the Page Up and Page Down keysclicking in the track above the indicator button moves up one screen, clicking in the track below the button moves down one screen.

Appendices 351

To move through the document in smaller increments, click on the buttons at either end of the scroll bar. If you hold the mouse button down on a scroll-bar button, the screen will scroll through the document until you release the button.

Toolbars
Toolbars may lock to a vertical or horizontal window border, or they may float within the window.

Toolbars provide another way to activate functions. Each button on a toolbar is a picture that represents a function. To use a toolbar button, position your mouse pointer over the button and click. Because not all functions can be used in all environments, buttons are grayed when their function cannot be accessed. Total Eclipse provides a convenient way to learn toolbar buttons. When you position the mouse pointer over a toolbar button, a label will appear underneath the button. The label describes the buttons associated function, and indicates the shortcut keys for the function. All toolbar functions are also available on the Total Eclipse menus, but you may find toolbars advantageous. If you are using a mouse, toolbars are quicker to access than menus. You may also reposition a toolbar on any side of the program window to make it more accessible. You may even drag a toolbar into the program window, where it becomes a floating toolbar with several windows properties. Conversely, if you prefer to use other methods to access functions, you may hide some or all of the Total Eclipse toolbars. Use the View | view Main toolbar, View | view Edit toolbar, and View | view A/V toolbar items on the Window menu to toggle between TIP: display and hide. A checkmark appears to the left of the menu item when its If you want to position a floating toolbar near the sides of a corresponding bar is displayed.
window, hold the Ctrl key down while moving the toolbar. This prevents the toolbar from locking to the border.

Note: If you click the close button on a floating toolbar window, its corresponding item on the Window menu will remain checked. To redisplay the toolbar, you must select it twice from the menuonce to uncheck the item and once again to recheck it.

Working with Total Eclipse toolbars

Total Eclipse has six customizable toolbars. (See Reference Guide page 514 for details on toolbar customization.) If you look carefully at the main program window, you can see the rectangular border that defines each bar. If you want to reposition a toolbar, position your mouse pointer within this border, but not over a button. Click-and-drag the toolbar. Appendices 352

The border of the toolbar stays with the mouse pointer as you drag it. If you release the mouse over one of the borders of the window, the toolbar will attach to that border. If you release the mouse over the workspace of the window, the toolbar will appear as a floating toolbar. Floating toolbars have a title bar with a close button. themenu close button to hide the TheClick Window toolbar. Double-click the title bar to return it to its default position. Right-click the title bar to select Move or Hide from a context-sensitive menu. You may also click-and-drag the borders of a floating toolbar. This allows you to reshape the bar from a single row or column of buttons into a grid with rows and columns of buttons.

Notice that the toolbar outline changes shape as it is dragged over different areas of the window. The shape indicates what kind of toolbar will be displayed if you release the mouse button at that point (i.e. attached to a vertical border, attached to a horizontal border, or floating).

Splitter bars
Location of the splitter bar when not in use.

scroll bar

Splitter bars, when not in use, are a tiny element on a window. They are available in many Windows programs, but are easily overlooked. A splitter bar allows you to divide one document window into two views of the same document. This allows you to compare two areas of the same document, or Check indicates refer to one area while editing another. You maythe independently scroll through active document either of the views in a split window.
Other open documents

Splitter bars are positioned just above vertical scroll bars and just left of horizontal scroll bars. The splitter bar over the vertical scroll bar allows you to split a window into top and bottom views. The splitter bar to the left of the horizontal scroll bar allows you to split a window into left and right views. When inactive, a splitter bar is the width of the scroll bar. To activate a splitter bar, position the mouse pointer over the bar so that the pointer becomes a two-pointed arrow bisected by two parallel lines. Click-and-drag the bar into the document. When you press the mouse button, the bar stretches across the window, allowing you to see where the window will be split when you release the mouse button. Notice that the splitter bar also splits the scroll bar so that you may independently scroll either view. Remember that each view is of the same documenta change you make in one view occurs in the other view as well, even if you cant see it. To unsplit a window, click and drag the splitter bar out of the window. The direction that you drag the bar determines which of the two views will remain. (e.g. Dragging the splitter bar off the left side of a window that has been split into left and right views will eliminate the left view and keep the right view.) Another way to split a document window is to select Split from the Window menu. The active windows splitter bar appears and the pointer is linked to the bar. Move the mouse, or Appendices 353

press the arrow keys, to position the splitter bar. When the bar is in the desired location, click or press Enter. A split transcript window

The top view and bottom view shows different parts of the same document.

Each view has its own vertical scroll bar.

splitter bar

Both views share a horizontal scroll bar.

WORKING WITH MULTIPLE DOCUMENTS

The number of documents you can keep open at the same time in Total Eclipse is limited only by your systems memory. It is possible, for example, to have two editing jobs, a dictionary, and a note file all open at the same time. This capability allows you to move rapidly among the documents with which you are working, refer to one document while working on another, or easily compare documents. While several documents may be open, only one document may by active at any time. The color of a windows title bar indicates whether it is. The active window will appear to lie on top of any other open documents and it will process any keystrokes you enter. If any part of an inactive window is visible, you may make it active by clicking on it. Total Eclipse provides several ways to organize and view multiple open documents through the options on the Window menu. One special feature of this menu is that it lists the filenames of every document open in the program. A checkmark appears to the left of the active document. To make another document active, you may select it from the menu. The menu also numbers the documents so that you may activate one by pressing Alt, then W, and then the number of the document. The Window menu is a useful way to switch active documents when your documents are maximized, or when a desired document is completely obscured by another. Four other options on the Window menu relate to working with multiple documents: 1. New Window creates a duplicate window for the active document. Any changes made to the document in one window are reflected in the other(s). This feature allows you to view one area of a document while you work on another area. You may make more than one duplicate of a document. Each new window may be sized independently of the others, and each possesses its own title bar and control buttons (close, maximize, restore, minimize). When new windows are created for a document, sequential numbers are added to the end

Appendices 354

of the document title, indicating the order in which each was created. This command does not create a duplicate file. 2. Cascade resizes each open window to the same dimensions, and then arranges the windows in an offset stack so that the title bar and a portion of each windows left side Cascaded windows remain visible. This option quickly organizes a cluttered desktop. To access any of the documents in the stack, simply click on any visible portion of the window. 3. Tile resizes all open windows to identical dimensions and arranges them top-tobottom (2 or 3 windows) and side-by-side (4 or more) to occupy the entire workspace in the program. This option is useful when you need to work actively in more than one document at the same time (e.g. copying information from one document to another). Tiled windows 4. Arrange Icons organizes the title-bar icons for all minimized windows. (When you minimize an open window, it becomes a title-bar icon.) The icons are lined up along the bottom of the Total Eclipse program window. One additional command for activating another open document is Next. The command is available on a windows system menu (click on the icon in the title bar), or by pressing Ctrl+Tab. The Next command activates the previously active window. If you have several open windows, repeatedly issuing the Next command will activate each window in succession, in the order in which they have been used.

WORKING WITH DIALOG WINDOWS

A broad definition of dialog is an exchange of information. Dialog windows provide a way to exchange information with Total Eclipse. Not only do these windows allow you to give specific instructions to the program, but also they are the mechanism by which Total Eclipse asks you to make necessary decisions. To carry out this exchange between user and program, dialog windows may feature data-entry fields, buttons, checkboxes, and other controls. Despite the variety, using these controls is usually straightforward and intuitive. Buttons look like raised rectangles and have a text label or a descriptive picture. When you select a button, you issue a command that tells Total Eclipse to perform an operation based on other information in the dialog window. For example, you might choose a filename from a list, then select the Open button to tell Total Eclipse to open the file. In most cases, selecting a button issues the command and closes the dialog window. Tip
In dialog windows, the Esc key also works like the Cancel button.

To select a button, position your mouse pointer over it and click. You may also press Alt and the underlined letter of the button label. If a button has a thicker border than the other buttons on the window, it is the default button. Pressing the Enter key selects this button.

Two buttons that are found on most dialog windows are the OK button and the Cancel button. The Cancel button allows you to change your mind about the information youve entered in a dialog window, no matter how many changes youve made. When you select Appendices 355

Cancel, the dialog window disappears and the program behaves as if the window had never been opened. When you select OK, you accept the entries in the dialog window and send them to Total Eclipse for processing. OK is often the default button on a dialog window. A button label that ends with three periods () indicates that another dialog window will open when that button is selected. Checkbox Checkboxes are small squares that work like an on/off switch. When a check appears in the box, the statement next to the box is read by Total Eclipse as on or true. An empty box is read as off or false. Mark or unmark checkboxes by clicking in them, or press Alt and the underlined letter of the checkbox label. Radio buttons work in a way similar to the programming buttons on old car radios, which allowed you to choose a preset station by pressing one, and only one, of the buttons. Likewise, the radio buttons on a dialog window allow you to choose one, and only one, setting.

Radio button

Radio buttons are circles that appear next to each item on a list of choices. A solid circle appears within the selected button. When you select an empty button, the solid circle disappears from the previous selection and appears in the new selection. Select a radio button by clicking in it, or press Alt and the underlined letter of the button label. Data-entry field Data-entry fields are white boxes that allow you to input information. Because input needs vary widely, fields have different features that help you avoid errors. A field for dates may require a MM/DD/YY format, Even when a field for example, while a file name field may provide a list of relevant files for appears full, you you to select. may continue to
enter information.

If a data-entry field allows keyboard entries, a blinking cursor will appear in the field when you click on it. In addition to accepting alphanumeric keystrokes, these fields also allow you to use many standard editing commands including cut, paste, and copy. You may select a blocks of text by clicking and dragging over the desired text. In Total Eclipse you can use the extended edit control that supports Ctrl+W for extended characters. Keyboard movement keys also work in these fields (e.g. Page Up, End, arrow keys). See Navigating with the keyboard for more information. A field may allow only one line of information (single-line edit fields), or it may allow multiple lines (multi-line edit fields). Note that the width of a field does not necessarily limit the amount of information that can be entered. If you continue to type after your entry fills the visible area, the beginning of your entry will move out of the visible area so that you can see what you are entering. Do not worry; the beginning has not been erased. Pressing Home will return the cursor to the beginning of the line. (Ctrl+Home will return the cursor to the beginning of the entry.) One important difference between multi-line and single line fields is that you may press the Enter key in multi-line fields to place a hard return and move to the next line of text. If you press the Enter key in a single line field, however, you leave the field and the default button is selectedtypically this default button is the OK button, and the result is that the dialog window closes and your entry or entries are processed.

Field with pull-down list

list of choices field label field list indicator button

Appendices 356

Some fields provide a pull-down list from which you may select an entry. This combination of field and list is called a combo box. An indicator button appears to the right of combo box fieldsclick on it to view the list. Lists may have scroll bars to help you browse and find the desired entry. To select an entry, click on it. Controls and features found in dialog windows

If you use the keyboard to navigate dialog windows, you may view a fields pull-down list by pressing Alt+down arrow when the field is active. Use the arrow keys to highlight an item on the list and press Tab to select the item. Occasionally, a field may have a selection list and also allow keyboard entries. Spin controls are another feature present with some data-entry fields. Spin controls are located adjacent to a field and look like small up and down pointer buttons. They are used for fields requiring a numerical value and allow you to make incremental changes without entering keystrokes. Click an up pointer to increase the current value by one unit; click the down pointer to decrease the value by one unit. Holding down the mouse button on a spin control will continue increasing or decreasing the fields value until you release the button. A list box looks like a data-entry field, but only allows you to highlight one or more items on the list. To select the highlighted entry, double-click or click the OK button.

Navigating dialog windows with the keyboard

Spin controls
increase value decrease value

If you prefer, you may use the keyboard to select and move among the items in a dialog window. When an item label has an underlined letter, you may press Alt and the letter to activate that item. Otherwise, use the Tab key or Shift+Tab key combination to activate items. Pressing Tab will move forward through the window items, activating each in sequence. Pressing Shift+Tab moves backward in sequence.

Appendices 357

When a button is active, its outside border is darkened and a dotted border appears around the button label. Press Enter to select (or press) an active button. When a checkbox is active, a dotted border appears around the checkbox label. To mark or unmark an active checkbox, press the spacebar. When a set of radio buttons is active, a dotted border appears around the currently selected button. To select another button, press any of the keyboard arrow keys until the desired button is marked, then press Tab or Shift+Tab to move to another dialog window item. If a dialog window contains tabs, you may move to and activate different tabs by pressing Ctrl+Tab (to move forward in sequence) or Ctrl+Shift+Tab (to move backward in sequence). Using keystrokes to navigate When a data-entry field is active, its contents are highlighted. If the field data-entry fields allows keyboard entry, any characters you enter will replace all of the
new cursor position (up arrow)* up one line (down arrow)* down one line (left arrow) left one character (right arrow) right one character beginning of Ctrl next word beginning of Ctrl previous word beginning of Home line end of line End beginning of Ctrl+Home entry end of entry Ctrl+End up the height Page Up* of visible field Page Down* down the height of visible field Holding the Shift key while pressing any of the above keystrokes will block text from the old cursor position to the new position. *only in multi-line fields keystroke(s)

highlighted information. To unhighlight the entry, press an arrow key or any of the other keyboard movement keys (e.g. Home). A blinking cursor will appear in the field. Enter and edit field information, as you desire. When you have completed the entry, press Tab or Shift+Tab to move to another item. To mark blocks of text in a data-entry field, hold the Shift key down while you press one of the movement keys. All text between the original cursor position and the new position will be highlighted (e.g. to mark all the text from the current cursor position to the beginning of the entry, press Ctrl+Shift+Home. If you press Backspace or Delete when a block is marked, the entire block will be erased. Note: If you accidentally type over or delete a highlighted selection, press Ctrl+Z to undo the error. If a field has spin controls, the up and down keyboard arrows will operate the controls when the field is active. When a field provides a list of choices, you may browse and highlight list items using the keyboard movement keys. If the list is a drop-down list, you may view the list by pressing Alt+down arrow when the field is active. Fields also allow you to choose a list item by pressing the first letter of the item name. If more than one list item begins with the same letter, pressing the letter again will move to the next choice.

Once you have found and chosen the desired entry, press Tab or Shift+Tab to move to another item. Warning: If you press Enter when you have completed a single-line field, you will select the dialog windows default button. Often, this is the OK button, which closes the dialog window and processes any changes that have been made. In multi-line fields, the Enter key inserts a return and the cursor moves to the next line in the field.

FILE DIALOG WINDOWS

You will encounter file dialog windows regularly in Total Eclipse as you open, save, load, or perform other file-related operations. Familiarity with this dialog window will help you work more efficiently. Appendices 358

How Windows organizes documents

You should first understand your computers storage system. The Windows operating system makes this easy because it uses the time-honored manila folder to symbolize file location and storage. The metaphor works very well. If you find computers a little frightening, go find several manila folders and a few sheets of paper, then turn off your computer and follow along with this description: A file is a single document. A letter, a company report, or a transcript could each be a file. Files are always stored in folders. Every file has a name and every folder has a name. Try putting a piece of paper inside a manila folder. See, its easy. Regardless of whether you are working with computer files or paper files, when you want to see a file, you open the folder in which its stored and look for the document. In either case, the more files you put in a folder, the more difficult it becomes to find what you want. When a single folder becomes overstuffed, you get more folders, label each with a different topic, and divide your files among them. Of course, if youre a diligent file maker, you soon discover that you need a way to keep track of your files. One solutionthe one Windows usesis nesting. Take a manila folder and place it inside another manila folder. You have nested one folder within the other. A single folder or multiple folders can be placed inside another folder. And because the folders stored in your computer cant break open from being overstuffed, a folder that contains other folders can be nested inside still another folder. Windows allows such nesting ad infinitum: a folder may contain ten folders, each of which contains ten more folders. Each of those folders contains another ten folders, inside each of which are ten files. In this example, the grand total is 10,000 files, organized so that each folder contains ten items. (Okay, so youve run out of manila folders, but you get the point.) As long as you label your folders in a manner that is logical (to you), nesting is an excellent sanity saver. The nesting of folders creates a system of folder levelswhen you have a folder for each month of the year nested within a folder labeled 1997, those twelve folders are on the same level. Likewise, if you place three folders inside the January folder (perhaps labeled Depositions, Trials, and Hearings), each of these is on the same level. File dialog windows display folders one level at a time. When a file dialog window opens, it guesses which folder you want to be in. This is convenient, but you should ALWAYS check to see where you are. You may have to dig down through a few levels before you get to the file you want. Sometimes, you have to back out a level or two. (If you dont pay attention, you might put the Slagle deposition into your daughters homework file, or you might find yourself browsing the March, 1997 folder for a transcription you made in February, 1998)

Appendices 359

Structure of the file dialog window

File dialog windows
Back button Look in field View menu button

File list field

Create New Folder button

File name field Files of type field

Open button Cancel button

The file dialog window has several features that enable you quickly to find the folder and file for which youre looking. Whenever you encounter a file dialog in your work, just remember that you are looking at files within folders within folders. The largest part of the file dialog is occupied by the File list field. This field shows a list of available folders and files. The fields contents and appearance are dependent on the other controls and fields in the box. Click the List button to view only file and folder names, plus an icon that represents file type (folders are represented by the manila-folder icon). Click the Details button to view a table that shows file information: name, size, file type, and the most recent date the file was accessed. In the details view, the title of each information column is actually a button. If you click a button, the list will sort according to that columns information. If you click the same button again, the sort order will reverse (e.g. ascending order becomes descending order). You may even click-and-drag the vertical borders of a button to resize the column width. Above the file list is the Look in field. The files and folders that are shown in the File list field are all inside the folder in the Look in field. (The icon for the folder in the Look in field is an open manila folder, indicating that its contents are displayed). The Look in field is at the top of the window because it tells you whether or not you are in the right place. If you click on the Look in field, a list drops down that displays the folders in which the current folder is nested, and other drives and devices where you might look for files. This list also shows how the current folder is nestedeach folder name is indented beneath the folder that contains it. At a glance, you can see how many levels deep a folder is located. To make any other item on the list appear in the Look in field, click on it. (If you navigate with the keyboard, highlight the item, then press Tab or Shift+Tab.) The Back button moves up one level. When you select it, the folder that appears in the Look in field is the one that contains the folder previously listed in that field. (The previous folder will now appear among the folders and files listed in the File list field.) Appendices 360

The Create New Folder button makes a new, empty folder and places it inside the current folder in the Look in field. The folder is assigned the name, Untitled folder and it appears in the File list field. The assigned name is highlighted and the text cursor is active so that you may immediately name it. Whenever you open a file dialog window, the File name field is your primary target. The window is open because you want to do something to a specific file. The File name field is where that files identification belongs. For a beginning user, the easiest method to enter the correct file name is to find the file in the File list field and highlight it. The highlighted item appears in the File name field. The field offers other options, however, which can be helpful. If youre looking in a folder with a lot of files and you are not sure of the exact filename, you may narrow your search by entering parts of the filename that you do know along with wildcard symbols (either * or ?). Press Enter after making such an entry and the File list field will display only the items that match your specifications. (See the sidebar for more information on using wildcards.) WILDCARDS
The asterisk and question mark are used as wildcards in many computer applications. The meaning of each wildcard is simple to remember: the asterisk (*) substitutes for any number and kind of characters; the question mark substitutes for any single character. Thus, b*oom, could include broom, bloom, or bedroom, while b?oom could include broom or bloom, but not bedroom.

You may also enter a pathname in the File name field. A pathname includes a drivename, all folder names in which the file is nested, and the desired filename, all separated by backslashes (\). For example, the pathname C:\Eclipse\Supreme Court cases\Quenn V. United States indicates a file named Quenn V. United States, located in the folder Supreme Court cases, which is nested in the folder Eclipse, which is located on the C: drive. Wildcards can also be used in pathnames.

The Files of Type field is another option for weeding out files displayed in the File List field. File type refers to the three-letter extension that is automatically added to a file when you create or save it. Total Eclipse text files have the extension .ecl. Total Eclipse note files have the extension .not. Click on the Files of Type field to access a list of file types. The File List will only display files of the type selected. (e.g. If you store Total Eclipse note files and Total Eclipse text files in the same folder, and you select Total Eclipse text files (*.ecl) for this field, only files with the extension .ecl will be shown.) The list of file types that are available varies. If you select the Open Notes command in Total Eclipse, for example, you may only select Notes (*.not) for the Files of Type field of the file dialog window. Select the Open button to open the item listed in the File Name field. If that item is a file, the document will open and display the contents of the file. If the item is a folder, the contents of the folder will be displayed in the File List field and the folder name will appear in the Look in field. Double-clicking a file or folder in the File Name field will also open the item. Some file dialog windows have other features, which are specific to their environment, but the features described above are universal to Total Eclipse file dialogs.

Shortcut menus in file dialogs

You can right-click within a file dialog window to choose options from context-sensitive menus. Menu items vary depending on the location of your pointer when you right-click (on a file name, on a folder name, over an empty area). The menu pictured below appears when you right-click on a file name. When you select an item from this menu, the action is Appendices 361

performed on the file. For example, choosing Add to Zip would open your file compression utility with the file selected and ready for compression. The Send To3 Floppy (A) command instantly copies the file to the disk in your floppy drive. To select an item on a context-sensitive menu, position your pointer over the desired item and click. To close a context-sensitive menu without selecting an item, press the Esc key or click outside of the menu.

Appendices 362

APPENDIX G: INTERNATIONAL OPTIONS

SETTING UP TOTAL ECLIPSE FOR USE WITH OTHER LANGUAGES
If you are setting up Total Eclipse to run in a language other than English, first set up a user by importing the settings files appropriate for your language. For each language, there is a LanguageName.set file that must be imported and a LanguageName.dat file that must be copied over the wordpart.dat file in order for the grammar rules to take effect. You may need to change settings in the ini file, finding the Language= line and changing it to Language=12 (French) or Language=16 (Italian) The setting for English is Language=9. The settings files are in the Eclipse folder, or are available on the Advantage Software website, or from ASI support.

Keyboards
The universal steno keyboards described in the Reference Guide on page 379 show the letters on the keys, and reflect different letter assignments for different languages. This dialog is capable of displaying the Treal, the Gemini, the Continental, Grandjean, the Italian Michela and the UK Palantype keyboards as well as Spanish, extended Spanish, and Hebrew. Some additional keyboard functions for specific languages are described in the individual language sections which follow. Note that if you select the Hebrew keyboard layout, the keyboard characters will not change to Hebrew characters unless you have the Hebrew version of Windows installed. If you have regular Windows installed you will see a series of accented western language letters.

Lockspaces and @ characters

If you are using UK or non-English language keyboards, and have had trouble with the @ sign or the tilde, you can remove the command in the keyboard settings for inserting a lockspace and replace it with your keystroke for the ~ character. You can then add both lockspaces and @ characters.

Selecting dictionaries to use for spell checking

To select the spelling dictionary appropriate for your language, go to User settings | Edit tab, Spell options, click on the Spellings button and select the dictionary you prefer.

RTF import
The RTF/CRE dictionary standard only supports English steno, so non-English language dictionaries will import the steno as English and convert it to the native language. Importing a document in RTF will recognize the codes for extended characters, so foreign language accent marks will convert to match the original document.

Appendices 363

Number conversion options

As noted on page 137 in the section on setting up your number processing, if you use something other than a comma as the delimiter character, click the Vocabulary setup button. In the Thousands symbol field, enter the character you want to use as the delimiter. (U.S. traditionally uses a comma whereas in Europe a period is often used.) Total Eclipse will allow hundred to mean one hundred and thousand to mean one thousand in French. For example, in French, deux cent trois would be 203. However, cent trois would be 103. French speakers typically do not say the one (or un) before the cent (hundred.). The number conversion takes that into account and assumes that if an order of magnitude word appears with no number before it, it will act as though a 1 was written before it. Note that numbers such as onzime and zro which include accented characters will be recognized by the number conversion procedures.

Integral prefix/suffix handler

The integral prefixes and suffixes will work for steno languages other than standard English, and will take advantage of Palantype keyboards, Grandjean, German, Italian, Michela, etc.

FRENCH
Continental (French) and Extended Continental Keyboard layout
The shape and layout of the keys on the Treal machine are set up so that it can mimic the Continental Grandjean keyboard. The extended French keyboard layout for the Treal is identical to the Grandjean layout, and includes a number of other keys including the number keys and special symbols inserted for the vowel keys (since the vowels on a Grandjean keyboard are on the main key rows for the right hand.)

French spelling and grammar

In order to activate the French grammar rules, you have to edit your .ini file manually since there is no user option in the software to change the language. You must find the Language= line in the .ini file and change it to Language=12. The rules that are applied are as follows: A plural determinant will pluralize the next noun and any adjectives that go with it. A plural pronoun will pluralize the next verb that appears in the sentence. If the verb ends in e or ait it will change to ent or aient. A verb or preposition will force the following verb in the sentence into its infinitive form if it ends in by changing it to er. A pronoun will force the following verb into an appropriate spelling if it ends in t, d, c, i or u. The software will add s or t as appropriate.

Appendices 364

For verbs ending in i, a, u or , the system can apply es s or e to turn it into a past participle. However, in order to do that, the phrases that trigger past participles have to be identified in the metadictionary and MUST be defined as phrases in the main dictionary. o text1={/%/?FRS} (indicates that text1 is a singular phrase indicating past participle.) o text2={/%/?FRP} (indicates that text2 is a plural phrase indicating past participle.) o text3={/%/?FRF} (indicates that text3 is a first person plural phrase indicating past participle.) Note: you should NOT include the pronoun in the phrase. For example, only include sont t and do NOT include elles sont t. A comprehensive list of these phrases and other French-related settings are available in a French.set file. Be aware that if the grammar checker goes back and makes a correction to a piece of text, that text will then be registered as typed-in text and cannot be globaled. Some French spelling variation rules are in effect in Total Eclipse. For example, it will do things like automatically turn pomme into pommes when preceded by les. Since there is no French definitions dictionary, the definition function shows grammar parts when French is the chosen language If you hit Alt+S and Alt+S on a French word and then select Alt+D for definitions, you will get a description of the grammar data for that word. The French wordpart.dat file allows the conflict resolution feature to work for the French language. It contains a very complete description of the grammar of the French language including almost 300,000 words and their parts of speech, gender and tense.

Abbreviation conflict handler

The French abbreviation conflict handler takes advantage of the English \a\an resolution engine. This engine simply selects the first choice if the following word starts with a consonant and selects the second choice if the following word starts with a vowel. This algorithm also applies to \au\aux, and any conflict where the first choice ends in a or e and the second choice ends in '^}. For examples, \la\{l'^}, \le\{l'^}, \de\{d'^}, etc. French abbreviations are ignored by the spelling checker, so constructions like l'avion will be checked against the spelling dictionary as just avion instead.

Prefix and suffix exceptions in French

Prefixes containing an apostrophe, such as {l'^} or {d'^} (used extensively in the French language) do not lower case the next word. Appendices 365

Total Eclipses suffix handler has been adjusted so that it will apply properly to words containing accented characters.

GERMAN
Treal keyboard
German users of the Treal writer will find an extended keyboard layout for German that supports the extra keys on the Treal keyboard. The layout is as follows: #1234 5 67890 ^SBGR ~ RMGSN |STDL * LB DTE AUYO I Here are the complete keyboard layouts in steno order as a string of data: German: #^|1S2BT3GD4RLAU5~*YOI6RL7MB8GD9ST0NE Note that the separate number keys are, in fact, not treated as a number bar. Each is a separate key and will generate a number by itself. The number bar shift mechanism is completely disabled when using this extended layout.

ITALIAN
Total Eclipse includes a MIDI interface for Michela writer conversions. Since the Michela machines are getting more and more difficult to obtain, it is possible to substitute an actual musical MIDI keyboard in its place. The option on the writer list is MIDI Michela. It works best with the Oxygen USB MIDI keyboard from Midiman, which can be self-powered from the USB port on a laptop.

Appendices 366

APPENDIX H: REGULAR EXPRESSION

TABLE

Character Result/Use Any Represents any single character unless otherwise specified. . (period) Represents any single character. "d.g" returns both "dig" and "dog". Remember that if you need to search for an actual period, use \. ^ Only finds the search term if the pattern is at the beginning of a paragraph. For example, ^Okay would find the word Okay only if it appeared at the beginning of a paragraph. $ Only finds the search term if the term appears at the end of a paragraph. Objection$ would find the word Objection only if it appeared at the end of a paragraph. The begin/end commands can work together. ^Okay$ would find any paragraph that contained nothing but the text Okay * Finds zero or more of the characters to the left of the "*". "Ab*c" finds "Ac", "Abc", "Abbc", "Abbbc", and so on, but since the number can also be zero, it will also find "Ac". + Finds one or more of the characters in front of the "+". "AX.+4" finds "AXb4", but not "AX4". ? Finds zero or one of the characters in front of the "?". "Texts?" finds "Text" and "Texts" and "x(ab|c)?y" finds "xy", "xaby", or "xcy". \ Search interprets the character that follows the "\" as a literal character and not as a regular expression. "tree\." finds "tree.", not "treed" or "trees." "yes\?" finds "yes?", not "yes" or "ye". If you need to search for a \, use \\. \w Represents any word character \W Represents any non-word character \d Represents any digit \D Represents any non-digit \b Represents a word boundary. for\b will find for for this and for? but not forget. () Defines the characters inside the parentheses as a reference or a group. For example, "a(bc)?d" finds "ad" or "abcd". [abc123] Represents one of the characters that are between the brackets. [a-e] Represents any of the characters that are between a and e. [a-eh-x] Represents any of the characters that are between a-e and h-x. [^a-s] Represents any character that is not between a and s. | Finds the terms that occur before or after the "|". For example, "this|that" finds either "this" or "that." Note that you can have a pattern that contains a partial either/or option by using the parentheses. For example, Mr.|Mrs. Smith would not search for Mr. Smith or Mrs. Smith. Instead, it would search for Mr. or Mrs. Smith. The correct pattern would be (Mr.|Mrs.) Smith {2} Defines the number of times that the character in front of the opening bracket occurs. "tre{2}" finds "tree". {1,2} Defines the number of times that the character in front of the opening bracket can Appendices 367

Character {2,} {} \1, \2, \3

Result/Use occur. "tre{1,2}" finds both "tree" and "treated". Defines the minimum number of times that a character can occur. "tre{2,}" finds "tree", "treee", and "treeeee" but not treated. Represent a piece of information for which you will be prompted separately Represents a backreference to previously matched sequences in parentheses. The expression b(o|e)\1t finds boot or beet. a(b|c)\1 finds abb or acc.

Appendices 368

APPENDIX I: VISUALIZER TOPICS

Visualizer names in blue are new or updated for Version 5.0 Visualizer title File name vA1_Visualizer_Welcome.exe 4thTutor_Show_Me.exe vL3_Lesson_Player.exe vL3a_Lesson_Player.exe vL1_Internet_Support.exe vL2_What's_New.exe vL1_Help.exe vL4_AccuCAP.exe vK_Convenience_Key.exe

Introductory Presentations
A - How to Control the Video Player B - How to Use the Efficient Editing Tutorial C - For Teachers: The Lesson Player D - For Students: The Lesson Player E - How to Get Support and Updates F - What's New in Total Eclipse 5.0 G - The Total Eclipse Help System H - AccuCAP: Total Eclipse Captioning I - The Convenience Key

Auto-Magic and Auto-Brief

A- The Info Bar B - Auto-Magic Overview C - Auto-Magic: Numbered Choices D - Auto-Magic: Numbers, Hotkeys, Pop-Ups, and Fonts E - Auto-Magic in a Notes File F - Auto-Magic in a Dictionary G - Auto-Magic: Beginning/End of Paragraph H - Auto-Magic: Untranslates and Globaling I - Auto-Magic: Conflicts and Typeovers J - Auto-Magic: Spellings K - Auto-Magic: Marked Blocks of Text L - Auto-Magic: Punctuation M - Auto-Magic: Numbers N - Auto-Magic: Form Fields O - Auto-Brief during Realtime Translation P - Auto-Brief Setup Dialogue Q - Auto-Brief Display R - Auto-Brief: Requesting/Rejecting Suggestions S - Auto-Brief Steno Theory vM1_Info_Bar.exe vM2_Auto-Magic_Overview.exe vM3a_AutoMagic_Numbered_Choices.exe vM3_Auto-Magic_Display.exe vM4_Auto-Magic_Notes_Files.exe vM5_Auto-Magic_Dictionary.exe vM6_Auto-Magic_Paragraphs.exe vM7_Auto-Magic_Globaling.exe vM8_Auto-Magic_Conflicts.exe vM9_Auto-Magic_Spelling.exe vM10_Auto-Magic_Blocks.exe vM11_Auto-Magic_Punctuation.exe vM12_Auto-Magic_Numbers.exe vM13_Auto-Magic_Fields.exe vE3a_Auto-Brief.exe vE3a_Auto-Brief_Settings.exe vE3a_Auto-Brief_Display.exe vE3a_Auto-Brief_Request_Reject.exe vE3a_Auto-Brief_Customization.exe

Appendices 369

1. Display and Command Options

A The Info Bar (and Auto-Magic) B - General Display Settings for MS Windows C - Dialogue Customization: Zoom/Resize D - Dialogue Customization: Less/More, Anchor E - Dialogue Customization: Transparency F - Dialogue Customization: Font G - Toolbars: On/Off H - Toolbars: Docked/Undocked I - Toolbar Customization J - Mouse vs. Key Commands K - Hyperkeys L - Keyboard Customization M - Editing Font vs. WYSIWYG N - View/Hide Print Commands O - Color Selections P - Notebar Display and Font Q - Notebar Options: Phonetics, Timecodes R - Notebar Options: Steno Width, Dictionary Review S - Multi-Document Display: Open All Dictionaries T - Organizing Windows: Cascade, Tile, New Window U - Splitting a Window into 2 Panes V The CART Window vM1_Info_Bar.exe vA1a_General_Display.exe vA1a1_Dialogue_Zoom.exe vA1a2_Dialogue_Less-More_Anchor.exe vA1a3_Dialogue_Transparency.exe vA1a4_Dialogue_Font.exe vA2_Toolbars.exe vA2b1_Toolbars_Dock-Undock.exe vA2b_Customize_Toolbars.exe vA2a_Mouse_v_Keys.exe vA7_Hyperkeys.exe vC1_Keyboard_Changes.exe vA3_WYSIWYG.exe vA3a_Print_Commands.exe vA5_Colors.exe vA4_Notebar.exe vA4a_Notebar_Options.exe vA4a_Notebar_Options_2.exe vA6_Multi-Document_Display.exe vA6a_Cascade_Tile_New.exe vA6b_Split_Window.exe vA8_CART_Window.exe

Appendices 370

2: Document & User Setup

A - The Document Setup Wizard B - Paragraph Setup via the Document Wizard C - Paragraph Adjustments via the Document Wizard D - Paragraph Adjustments via the Document Ruler E - Paragraph Labels: From Q to Q. F - "Fixed" Paragraphs G - Paragraph Behavior H - Footers: Creation I - Footers: Adjustments J - Timecodes & Text Box Setup via the Document Wizard K - Text Box Adjustments L - Current Document vs. Master Format M - Using a Block Files Folder N - Customizing your Phonetics Table O - The Metadictionary P - Loading and Switching Settings Q - Save Settings vs. Create New User Format R - How to Undo Changes to User Settings (if not yet saved) S - How to Delete a User Format T Vox Audio Setup U Vox Train (Create/Refine Voice Model) V Vox New (Train New Word) vB2_Document_Setup.exe vB2a_Paragraph_Setup.exe vB3a_Wizard_Adjusts_Paragraphs vB3_Ruler.exe vC3_Label_Changes.exe vB5_Fixed_Paragraphs.exe vC4_Paragraph_Behavior.exe vB6_Footers.exe vB6a_Footer_Adjustments.exe vB7_Text_Box.exe vB7a_Text_Box_Adjust.exe vB4_Current_v_Master.exe vC2_Blocks_Folder.exe vC1_Phonetics.exe vC2_Metadictionary.exe vB1_Load_Settings.exe vC5_Save_User_Format.exe vB1_Revert_Settings.exe vC6_Delete_User.exe vL5a_Vox_Audio.exe vL5e_Vox_Train.exe vL5c_Vox_New.exe

Appendices 371

3: Translation and Realtime Transcription

A - Read Notes B - Append or Extract Notes C - Preparing a Job Dictionary for Translation D - Translation Notes: General Options E - Translation: Add Initial and/or Final Block File F Translation Magic: (Phonetics & Dragged/Dropped Keys) G - Set up Writer, Follow Realtime Translation H - Pending Transplation Display, Auto-Split Window I - Adding a Serial Port J - Finding a Com Port (Using Device Manager) K - Alt T to Start Realtime Translation L - Instant Realtime M - Realtime Output N - Realtime Output Buffer O Wireless Realtime P Remote Scoping: Steno Link Q Remote Scoping: Steno Link Configuration R Remote Scoping: Steno Link vs. Division Intervals S Bridge T - TeleView vD1_Read_Notes.exe vD1a_Append_Extract_Notes.exe vD1b_Job_Dictionary.exe vD2_Translation_Options.exe vD2_Translation_Options_Blocks.exe vD2_Translation_Options_Untrans.exe vD3_Realtime_Setup.exe vD3_Pending_Tran_Split_Window.exe vD3_Add_Serial_Port.exe vD3_Device_Manager.exe vD2a_Alt-T_for_Realtime.exe vD2a_Instant_Realtime.exe vD3a_Realtime_Output.exe vD3a_Realtime_Output_Buffer.exe vD3a_Wireless.exe vD3a_StenoLink.exe vD3a_StenoLink_Setup.exe vD5_Remote_Scoping.exe vD3b_Bridge.exe vD3b_TeleView.exe

Audio Recording and Playback

A - Sound Recorder Test (Vista Version now available) B - Using Earphones for Microphone Monitoring C - Audio Playback D - Playback Options: Fast, Slow, Squelch E - Auto Stop/Play for Globaling/Typing F - Audio Compression: File Size & Sound Quality G - Synchronizing a Voice Recorder or Stenowriter WAV File H Remote Scoping, including Audio Synchronization vD4_Audio_Test.exe vD4_Audio_Test_Vista.exe vD4aa_Mic_Monitoring.exe vD4a_Audio_Playback.exe vD4b_Audio_Options.exe vD4b_Audio_Auto.exe vD4c_Audio_Adjust.exe vD4c_Audio_Offset.exe vD5_Remote_Scoping.exe

Appendices 372

4. General Editing
A - Auto-Magic Overview B - Insert/Overtype C - Typeover Tracking D - Add Lines and Paragraphs E - Oops and Delete F - Find Text, Steno, Paragraphs, Print Commands G - Using Find/Replace; Repeating Searches, Other Tips H - Scans & Multi-Scan I - Adding Speakers: The Speaker Table J Tracking Speakers: The Seating Chart K - Dictionary Entries for Speaker Identification L - Changing Paragraphs to Speaker Identifiers M - Correcting Speaker Names N - Pre-Translation Speaker Setup O - By-Lines P - Insert Missing By-Lines Q - Dashes & Hyphens & Automatic Punctuation R - Mark, Stitch, Surround S - Mark, Copy, Cut, Paste, Read, Write, Separate T - Bold, Italics, Underlined U Accents & Special Characters V - Page Breaks and Conditional Page Breaks W - Bookmarks and Comment Lines X - Graphic Links vM2_Auto-Magic_Overview.exe vE1_Insert_Overtype.exe vE1_Typeover_Tracking.exe vE1_Paragraphs.exe vE1_Oops_Delete.exe vE5_Find_Replace.exe vE5_Find_Replace_2.exe vE2_Scan_Multi-scan.exe vE4_Speakers.exe vE4_Speaker_Seating_Chart.exe vE4_Speaker_Globals vE4a_Speaker_Changes.exe vE4a_Speaker_Corrections.exe vE4aa_Speaker_Prep.exe vE4b_By-Lines.exe vE4bb_Insert_Missing_By-Lines.exe vE6_Dashes_Hyphens.exe vE1b_Block_Functions.exe vE1a_Copy_Cut_Paste.exe vE7_Bold_Italics_Underlined.exe vE7_Accents.exe vE8_Page_Breaks.exe vE3_Markers_Comments.exe vE7a_Graphic_Links.exe

Appendices 373

5: Mostly Globaling
A - Auto-Magic Overview B - Basic Global Replacements: Adding/Subracting Strokes C - Globaling Magic D - The "Special Entries" List and Globaling Shortcuts E - Composite Entries to Unscramble Stacked Steno F - Automatic Spelling, Detect Conflicts, Default Dictionaries G - Suggest Dictionary Entries: Misstrokes H - Suggest Entries: Normalize Strokes I - Suggest Entries: Integral Prefixes or Suffixes J Undo Global K - Text Globals L - Where are Text Globals Stored? M - Conflicts N - Conflicts Tips O - Slop Strokes P - Prefixes and Suffixes Q - The "Add Prefix/Suffix" Dialogue R - Autoincludes S - Splitting or Merging Files T - Quoted Testimony U - Speedkeys to Change Q&A to Quoted Q&A V Redacted Text W Vox: Apply Corrections vM2_Auto-Magic_Overview.exe vE3_Globaling_Intro.exe vE3a_Globaling_Wizard.exe vF1_Special_Globals.exe vF1a_Composite_Entries.exe vF2_Globaling_Options.exe vF2a_Suggest_Entries.exe vF2a_Normalize.exe vF2a_Integral_Pre-Suf.exe vE3b_Undo_Global.exe vF3_Text_Globals.exe vF3a_Text_Globals_Location.exe vF4_Conflicts.exe vF4a_Conflicts_Advice.exe vF5_Slop_Strokes.exe vF6_Prefixes_Suffixes.exe vF6_Prefixes_Suffixes_Dialogue.exe vF7_Autoincludes.exe vF8_Split_Merge.exe vF9_Quoted_Testimony.exe vF9_Quoted_Testimony_Speedkeys.exe vF9_Redacted_Text.exe vL5d_Vox_Apply_Corrections.exe

6: Autoreplacements, Macros, Numbers, Blanks & Indexing

A - Autoreplacements for Speed Typing and Error Prevention B - Creating Autoreplacements from the Globaling Dialogue C - Macro Commands D - Realtime Editing from the Steno Keyboard E - The "Filler" Macros (Retroactive Realtime Transcription) F - "Google Search" Macro G - Number Conversion: Overview H - Number Conversion: User Settings I - Form Fields (Fill-in-the-Blank Process): Overview J - Form Fields: Adding a Blank K - Automatic Indexing: Overview L - Automatic Indexing: Adding an Index Item vG4_Autoreplacements.exe vG4_Autoreplacements_while_Globaling.ex e vG5_Macros.exe vG5_RT_Kit.exe vG6_Filler_(Retroactive_Realtime).exe vG5a_Google_Search.exe vG1_Numbers_Overview.exe vG1a_Number_Settings.exe vG2_Blanks_Overview.exe vG2a_Add_Blank.exe vG3_Index_Overview.exe vG3a_Index_Item.exe

Appendices 374

Sample Format Files to Illustrate Blanks & Indexing

A - How to Install Sample Files B - Install Sample Files for Freelancers Now C - Install Sample Files for Court Officials Now D - Importing Settings, Finding Block Files E - The Overview Document F - Blanks that Store Personal Information G - Inserting Cover Pages H - Case Caption Behavior I - Blanks that Store Client Info for Appearance Pages J - Examinations and Exhibits K - Index Lines: Show or Hide? L - The Indexing Wizard (Ctrl I) M - Indexing Court Proceedings, An Overview N - Opening/Closing Statements O - Examinations in Court P - Court Exhibits Q - Jury Selection R - Jury Selection in Capital Cases S - Generating a Volume Index T - Generating a Master Index vS1_Install_Samples.exe Tx-Depo.exe Tx-Court.exe vS1_Sample_Setup.exe vS2_Samples_Overview.exe vS2a_Personal_Info.exe vS3_Cover_Pages.exe vs3a_Case_Caption_Behavior.exe vS3b_Appearances.exe vS4a_Exams_Exhibits.exe vS4b_Seeing_Index_Lines.exe vS4c_Generate_Index.exe vS5a_Court_Overview.exe vS5b_Statements.exe vS5c_Exams.exe vS5d_Exhibits.exe vS5e_Jurors.exe vS5f_Capital_Jurors.exe vS5g_Volume_Index.exe vS6_Master_Index.exe

Appendices 375

7: Dictionaries
A Auto-Magic: Dictionaries B Build Dictionary C - Selecting Dictionaries and Master Job Dictionaries D - Changing Dictionaries during Translation E - Dictionary Display: Columns, Fonts, Notebar F Using Text-Sorted Dictionaries to Find Steno Shortcuts G - Dictionary Columns: Size, Order, Date/Time Format H - Dictionary Additions and Spellchecking I - Dictionary Editing Windows; Undo & Redo J- Dictionary Properties Dialogue, Comments K - Basic Dictionary Searches L - Dictionary Searches: Go to Steno M - Contains, Starts with, Ends with, Exact Match N - Steno Keys vs. Steno Strokes O - Dictionary Searches: Find and Replace P - Custom Search Builder, "Regular Expressions" Q - Selecting Dictionary Entries to Copy or Move R - Moving Dictionary Entries S - Unmerge Dictionaries T - Exporting Dictionaries/Wordlists U - Scopist's Dictionaries V - Merging Entries from a Scopist's Dictionary W - Dictionary Statistics X - Dictionary Printing Y Creating and Installing a Passport Stenowriter Dictionary Z Vox New (Voice Theory Two-Step) vM5_Auto-Magic_Dictionary.exe vH1_Build_Dictionary.exe vH1_Dictionary_Selection.exe vH1a_Change_Translating_Dictionaries.exe vH6_Dictionary_Optimize.exe VH3_Text-Sorted_Dictionaries.exe vH6a_Arranging_Dictionary_Columns.exe vH3_Dictionary_Additions_Spellcheck.exe vH3_Dictionary_Edit.exe vH3_Dictionary_Properties_Comments.exe vH2_Dictionary_Searches.exe vH2_Go_to_Steno.exe vH2_Starts_Ends_Exact.exe vH2_Keys_v_Strokes.exe vH2_Dictionary_Find_Replace.exe vH2a_Dictionary_Advanced.exe vH2b_Selecting_Dictionary_Entries.exe vH2b_Move_Dictionary_Entries.exe vH2b_Unmerge_Dictionaries.exe vH4_Dictionary_Export.exe vH5_Scopist_Dictionary.exe vH5a_Merge_Scopist_Dictionary.exe vH7_Dictionary_Statistics.exe vH8_Dictionary_Printout.exe vH9_Passport_Dictionary.exe vL5c_Vox_New.exe

Appendices 376

8: Proofreading, Printing, ASCII & PDF Files

A - Spellcheck, Definitions B - List Errors C - WATCH Words D - Proofreading with a Kindle e-Book Reader E - Printing a Draft or a Final Copy F - Timestamps G - Edit Timecodes H - Multipage (4-per-page printing) I - A SET File for Multipage Settings J - Word Indexes K - Stop Printing L - ASCII Files M - ASCII Files and the File Manager N - ASCII Styles O - Indexed HTML File and Internet Explorer P - PDF Files Q CutePDF Professional R Obtainning a Verisign Certificate for Digital Signatures S Digital Signatures with CutePDF Professional vE9_Spellcheck.exe vE9a_List_Errors.exe vE9_Watchwords.exe vI6_e-Book_Proofreading.exe vI1_Printing.exe vI2_Timestamps.exe vI2_Edit_Timecodes.exe vI3_Multipage.exe vI3_Multipage_Settings.exe vI3a_Multipage_Index.exe vI4_Stop_Printing.exe vI5_ASCII.exe vI5_File_Manager_ASCII.exe vI5a_ASCII_Styles.exe vI5a_HTML_with_ASCII.exe vI6_PDF_Files.exe vI6a_CutePDF_Pro.exe vI7_Verisign.exe vI7a_CutePDF_Pro_Signatures.exe

9: File Management
A - The Eclipse File Manager B - Moving about in the Eclipse File Manager C - Windows Explorer: Sorted Display D - Right-Click for Shortcuts E - File Properties and the Job Info Pane F - Search for Job Variable Info in File Manager G - Copying or Moving Files H - E-mail I Burn to CD J - Auxiliary Folder Setup K - Prompt for Destionation (or not) L - Deleting Files M - Recovering Files from the Recycle Bin N - Zip or Unzip O - Backup/Restore Dictionaries, User Settings P - Backup of Work Files from the File Manager Q - SET Files (Import/Export Settings) R- BAK Files (Timed Auto-Backup) S Converting Files to/from Other Systems T - Sending Large Files U Digital Signatures: Setup (See also Section 8) V Digital Signatures: Verification vJ1_File_Manager.exe vJ1_File_Manager_Navigation.exe vJ5_Windows_Explorer.exe vJ5_Right-Click_for_Shortcuts.exe vJ1a_File_Info.exe vJ1a_File_Search.exe vJ1b_Copy-Move_File.exe vJ1b_E-mail.exe vJ1b_CD_Burn.exe vJ1b_Auxiliary_Folder.exe vJ1b_Destination_Prompt.exe vJ1c_Delete-Recover_File.exe vJ1c_Recycle_Bin.exe vJ2_WinZip.exe vJ3_Backup_Restore.exe vJ3_Backup_Work_Files.exe vJ3a_SET_Files.exe vJ3b_BAK_Files.exe vJ4_Convert_Files.exe vJ6_Send_Large_Files.exe vJ7_Digital_Signatures_Setup.exe vJ7_Digital_Signatures_Verification.exe Appendices 377

Appendices 378

APPENDIX J: STENO WRITER EMULATOR

The steno keyboard displayed for functions such as Add dictionary entry or Find steno uses a separate window to show the steno keyboard. This window is fully re-sizable and will remember the size you make it.

Steno emulator Keyboard layout options

The letters are shown on the keys, and the style of the keyboard will reflect the keyboard you selected in User settings | Input | Keyboard Layout. This dialog is capable of displaying the Stenograph keyboard, the Treal, the Gemini, the French Grandjean, the Italian Michela and the UK Palantype keyboards. It also supports the extended steno formats for the Treal and the Gemini which allow each individual key to be used independently with a couple of exceptions (the s keys are still tied together on the left, for example.) Eclipse will also remember the location of the dialog in which the strokes are being entered. Steno emulator English keyboard

Appendices 379

Examples of some of the additional options: Michela and Palantype Steno Emulators

There is a control group that reads Pre-defined strokes for the Automark stroke, the partition stroke (Division) and the Delete stroke. The ! key is used to indicate the stenomark flag on the steno keyboard. When using the emulator, use the mouse pointer to click on the steno keys to create the stroke outline. You can also use the computer keyboard. When using the keyboard, you can use the hyphen key to indicate keys on the right. For example, if the first key you type on the computer keyboard is an S, the S on the left of the writer keyboard will be selected. If the first keys you type on the computer keyboard are -S, the S on the right of the writer keyboard will be selected. [Note: If you type the letters out of order, it will behave like this: If you type a letter, it will go on the left. If there are already keys on the left after the point where that letter belongs, it will go on the right. If attempting to apply the letter on the right doesn't result in a change on the keyboard, it will attempt to apply the key on the left as if no other keys had been pressed. If that still results in no change, it will apply it on the right as if no other keys had been pressed.] Click OK after completing the steno entry. Searching for multistroke steno type the first stroke as described above, then click Next Stroke or the spacebar instead of OK. You can repeat this as often as is necessary. Each stroke appears on a separate line in the display area. Correcting strokes in the emulator If you enter a stroke in the emulator and then decide you dont want to search for it (or made a mistake in it), click on the stroke in the emulator window and then either click the Delete button or press the delete key on your keyboard. Using the delete key, you can remove as many strokes as you like, one stroke at a time. Backspace clears the entire stroke, but does not delete it. To delete (remove) just the last letter in the stroke, hit Ctrl+Backspace.

Appendices 380

Adding strokes in the emulator To add a stroke within the outline, select the stroke beneath the line where you want to insert a stroke, and then click the Insert button. A blank but highlighted space for the stroke is added to the display area. Enter the new stroke. Copy button for double stroke entries - Many dictionary entries are created by using double strokes. When creating or searching for an entry like this, you can hit just one stroke in the steno emulator and use Alt+C or hit the Copy button to duplicate the first stroke.

Appendices 381

Appendices 382

CHAPTER 14 REFERENCE GUIDE

Table of Contents
Chapter 14 Reference Guide..............................................................................................383
Audio Synchronization......................................................................................................................384 File Manager...................................................................................................................................404 Glue entries.....................................................................................................................................414 Hidden Text.....................................................................................................................................416 Hyperkey and standard key assignments...........................................................................................418 Lesson Player..................................................................................................................................420 Metadictionary Syntax and Codes.....................................................................................................424 Network Installation.........................................................................................................................439 Normalization Entries.......................................................................................................................443 Number Vocabulary.........................................................................................................................445 Paragraphs: Behaves as.. and Automated Punctuation.......................................................................448 Phonetics Table...............................................................................................................................453 Phonetics, Multi-layered...................................................................................................................455 Programming tab - User Settings......................................................................................................457 Realtime, advanced features.............................................................................................................478 Searches: Custom Searches: Creating Regular Expressions, and Backreferences .................................480 Suffixes and Prefixes........................................................................................................................498 Suffix Spelling Rules........................................................................................................................508 Template dictionary.........................................................................................................................511 Timekeeper.....................................................................................................................................513 Toolbar customization......................................................................................................................514 User settings transfer: Exporting and Importing Settings....................................................................516 Version 3 to Version 4 Changes in Dictionary Management.................................................................517 Version 4.3 to Version 5.0 Changes ..................................................................................................518 Writers............................................................................................................................................519

Reference Guide 383

AUDIO SYNCHRONIZATION
Overview
There will be several sections to this document. Initially we will introduce you to the basics of audio recording, some different audio formats and compression methods included in Microsoft Windows, and how these can affect your recorded audio files. We will then focus on the Windows Sound System, taking a look at the Windows Multimedia configuration, audio playback and recording levels and some hardware dependent options, followed by a test recording and playback session. (Note that Windows Vista may handle these issues differently. Call ASI support as needed.) The next section will focus on using Eclipse to record and playback real-time audio. We will include some tips on how to manage your audio files and how to use audio synchronization to do read backs in real-time, sharing audio files with a scopist and manually synchronizing audio files with document time codes. A glossary of terms will round out the document. Any words or text you see in Bold & Italics within this document will be further defined in the Glossary.

Audio Recording Introduced

Audio that is recorded by a computer is always in a digital file format. The PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) audio format is the standard format for uncompressed audio files, generally called WAVE files. This is the same data format used in file types such as .WAV files used in Microsoft Windows. Since PCM is an uncompressed format, audio files will tend to be very large, roughly 40 Megabytes per hour of recorded audio. Due to the size of these files they can be difficult to manage and transfer from computer to computer. We will take a look at using audio compression and codecs to create smaller audio files. Audio compression really consists of two parts. The first part, called encoding, transforms the digital audio data that resides, say, in a WAVE file, into a highly compressed form called bitstream (or coded audio data). To play the bitstream on your soundcard, you need the second part, called decoding. Decoding takes the bitstream and reconstructs it to waveform data suitable for output. Audio Compression can be one of two categories, lossless or lossy. Lossless compression algorithms produce audio data that is identical to the original audio information. Lossless compression sounds wonderful, however it does not yield an extremely high compression ratio. Typically, lossless routines give a ratio no higher than 2:1 for real-time playback for audio with a full dynamic range.

Reference Guide 384

Lossy Audio Compression can yield a variety of different rates of compression based on the ability of your hardware and software to decode and playback the audio data in real-time. There are various compression schemes to achieve different results; for example, many codecs remove portions of the audio signal that human hearing is less sensitive to. To some peoples' ears, the resulting audio has distinguishing artifacts or characteristics that change the listening experience. The final quality level is largely a matter of personal perception. Each different compressor/decompresser (codec) has different strengths and weaknesses. Typically, compression takes a good amount of processing power and decompressing must be real time or faster -- able to decode and play simultaneously -- to be useful for an on demand digital audio playback system. Below you will find a list of the common codecs and some general information on their use in the current Windows operating systems. However, the best method for finding a good codec to record audio is to try them yourself and determine what suits your listening needs.

Common Audio Codecs in Windows

PCM - the standard Windows format for non-compressed audio files. Results in rather large files due to the uncompressed file format. Microsoft ADPCM - Compressed WAV format. ADPCM (Adaptive Differential Pulse Code Modulation) is an audio compression scheme which compresses from 16-bit to 4- bit for a 4:1 compression ratio. GSM - Compressed WAV format. Good for recording human speech. (Used by many reporters) Microsoft G.723.1 - Used for computer telephony. Good for recording human speech. IMA ADPCM - This particular algorithm was suggested by the International Multimedia Association (IMA). IMA ADPCM compresses data recorded at various sampling rates. Sound is encoded as a succession of 4-bit or 3-bit data packets. Each data packet represents the difference between the current sampled signal value and the previous value. The compression ratio obtained is relatively modest. As an example: 16-bit data samples encoded as 4-bit differences result in 4:1 compression format. IMA ADPCM is directly supported on most Windows implementations as a native format. Although the quality of IMA ADPCM voice files is not great, the files are portable. There is a real advantage in having compact files that can be played on most Windows PCs. Windows supports IMA ADPCM .wav files in 4-bit format only and at sample rates between 8 and 41KHz. MP3 (MPEG I-audio layer 3 compression) -- In 1987, the Fraunhofer IIS-A started to work on perceptual audio coding. In a joint cooperation with the University of Erlangen, the Fraunhofer IIS-A finally devised a very powerful algorithm that is standardized as ISOMPEG Audio Layer-3. With the proper codecs, compression rates of up to 24 times can be achieved with near- (but not) CD-quality. The beauty of MP3 is it's size vs. perceived quality, also its ability to be downloaded and then loaded into the flash memory of MP3 players. It can also be streamed to MP3 client software and recognized by most Web browser audio helper applications. Files are encoded at certain bit-rates for target download speeds; for example, very good quality can be attained with 160 kbps encoding. While there is a version

Reference Guide 385

of the MP3 codec installed with Windows, it is only a trimmed down version of the full blown codec that was produced, patented and licensed by Fraunhofer IIS-A. Each codec or format has 3 defining attributes that affect the quality of audio that is recorded and played back. These attributes are the Sample Rate, Sample Size, and Channels, such as Mono (1) or Stereo (2) recording. The sample rate is how many times per second the source material is being sampled or recorded. Samples, like frequency, are measured in Hertz (Hz) or more precisely kilohertz (kHz). Sample rate affects the frequency response of the final recording. In general, the higher the sample rate, the better the sound quality. But, the best sample rate to use will depend on your audio hardware, your application, and the amount of storage available (the higher the sample rate, the more hard disk space required). CDs use a 44.1 kHz sample rate. This is considered CD Quality. Radio Quality is at 22 kHz and telephone quality is at 11 kHz. Generally, voice or conference recordings do not require such a high sampling rate, so using radio or telephone quality should be sufficient to produce good audio for transcription. The 44.1 kHz in a CD Quality recording means that you have 44.100 values per second coming in from your sound card (or input file). The sample size, or bit depth, is the amount of data, in bits, stored per sample. With the PCM format at telephone quality (11,025 kHz, 8-bit, Mono), each sample of data recorded is 8 bits (8 bits = 1 byte). The third attribute is the number of channels; either Mono (1) or Stereo (2). Mono recordings should be sufficient for conference style recordings. Choosing stereo will record both left and right channels in the resulting .wav file, effectively doubling your file size. This can be done using a microphone splitter for 2 microphone, 2-channel recordings. From these attributes we can determine how large an audio file will be in a fixed amount of time. Here is the formula: [ Sample Rate * Channels * Sample Size * 3600 / 8 = Bytes/Hour ] For instance, if we record for 1-hour of audio at telephone quality, we multiply the sample rate by the number of channels being recorded by the sample size then multiply the product by 3600 (number of seconds per hour) then divide by 8 (number of bits per byte). e.g. 11025 * 1 * 8 * 3600 / 8 = 39690000 bytes/hour or 39.7 Mb/Hr. Now that we have done the math, defined some audio formats and their attributes, we'll continue on to the Windows configuration and testing phases.

The Windows Sound and Multimedia System

In Windows XP's Control Panel there will be at least one option for adjusting your sound settings. Sounds and Audio Devices is the Windows Control Panel component for audio recording and playback adjustment. Reference Guide 386

Many computers with specialized audio hardware will also have a separate Control Panel component used to fine tune the settings of it's DSP (Digital Signal Processor), speaker layout, microphone levels and whatever other options they can pack into their applets. For instance, when I look in Device Manager, I can see under the Sound, Video and Game Controllers section that my computer has an Analog Device's SoundMAX Integrated Digital Audio device for its sound processor. When I look in the Control Panel there is an additional applet called SoundMAX that has many options that will affect audio recording and playback. Other sound processors from companies like Yamaha and Creative Labs, or others, may have similar options that you should discover and explore. Since we cannot write a document that covers all possible audio hardware and their accompanying applets, it's up to you to know your computer's hardware and to determine if there are additional settings accessible via Control Panel applet or a program to configure your particular sound device. In general, the options we are most concerned with will be available in the Sounds and Audio Devices applet. We will continue -- using the standard Windows Sounds and Audio Devices applet for our configuration, and since Windows XP's interface is so dynamic (making it difficult to write standardized documentation), I'm going to open the applet from the Run option that everyone should have available when they click their Start button. So click Start, then select run from your menu. When the Run box appears, type MMSYS.CPL in the field provided and press Enter or click Ok. The Sound and Audio Devices Properties will open on your screen. There should be 5 different pages available in your properties pages -- Volume, Sounds, Audio, Voice and Hardware. The Volume Page The Volume page will be displayed by default and should have 2 distinct sections for Device volume and Speaker settings, each with its own separate options. In the Device volume section there will be settings to adjust the Audio volume, Mute and an option to place the Volume icon in the taskbar's system tray. Enable the taskbar icon if it is not already, by clicking in the check box provided. There is also an Advanced button available that will open the Windows Volume Controls. These controls will be explained in greater detail later. For now, close the Volume Control window, if you clicked the Advanced button to open it. In the Speaker settings section of the Volume page, we have two buttons Speaker Volume and Advanced. Clicking the Speaker Volume button gives us the option of changing the volume of our left and right speakers individually, and to lock the Left and Right slide indicators together. You can also restore the default settings for the Speaker volume by clicking the Restore Defaults button. Generally you should not need to make any modifications here. Click the Cancel button to close the Speaker Volume settings. In the Speaker settings section of the Volume page, we also have an Advanced button which will display the Advanced Audio Properties. There are 2 pages available in the Advanced Audio Properties Speakers and Performance. The Speaker page will be displayed by default. Here you can define your speaker setup by clicking the available drop down list and selecting Reference Guide 387

the layout for your system. Generally you will not need to make modifications here, but feel free to choose a selection that suits your needs if necessary. If you are using headphones or external speakers they will still work if you make changes to your speaker setup. You do not need to change this setting every time you change your listening device, whether you have internal or external speakers or headphones. On the Performance page, we have a section for Audio playback where we can adjust the Hardware acceleration and Sample rate conversion quality. These settings should be set to the maximum allowed. Hardware acceleration should be set to Full and the Sample rate conversion quality should be set to Best. We can always restore the system defaults by clicking the Restore Defaults button as well. Once you have determined that your Audio playback options are set to their optimal settings, click Ok to close the Advanced Audio Properties window. The Sounds Page Click the Sounds tab in the Sounds and Audio Devices Properties window to focus on the Sounds properties. Here you can setup a sound scheme for windows. This does not concern us for doing audio recording or playback, so we will continue on to the Audio page. However, it should be noted that you can change the default sounds that Windows uses when program errors occur, on system startup and shutdown. Anytime Windows makes a system noise, it can be changed in the Program events section of the Sounds page. The Audio Page Click the Audio tab in the Sounds and Audio Devices Properties window to display the Audio properties. Here we have 3 sections Sound playback, Sound recording and MIDI music playback. The Sound playback section lists the Default device use to playback audio. This will generally coincide with the name or driver for the audio hardware that is installed on your computer. Clicking the drop down list of Default devices may display alternate devices, such as a modem. Make sure that this option is set to the main audio hardware for your computer. Most computers will only have one option available, the system audio hardware. The Volume button in the Sound playback section will open the Volume Controls, just like the Advanced button in the Device volume section of the Volume page, in the Sounds and Audio Device Properties does. No need to click it, so we'll continue. The Advanced button will open the Advanced Audio Properties pages, as it does in the Speaker settings section of the Volume page, in the Sounds and Audio Device Properties. Again we've already been here, so we'll move on to the Sound recording section. In the Sound recording section of the Audio page, we have a selection for the default recording device. This again should be set to the main audio hardware component for your system. Clicking the drop down list of Default devices may display alternate devices, such as a voice modem or other recording device. Most computers will only have one option available, the system audio hardware. If you use a specialized input device, such as a USB microphone, you may want to select that device instead of the main audio hardware. We also have a Volume button that will open the Recording Control Panel. Here will be a row of input devices that your audio hardware can use for recording. Generally you will have at least, CD Reference Guide 388

Player, Microphone and Line In, as available controls, possibly many others. This is where we will adjust our microphone recording level. For starters you should make sure that the Microphone level is at 50% or in the middle of the vertical slider. Also make sure that there is a check in the box labeled Select, on the microphone control section. Close the Recording Control Panel for now. We will revisit it in greater detail when we perform our initial recording and playback tests. There may or may not be an available advanced option button in the Sound recording section. If the Advanced button is not ghosted out, you can click it for additional options for your Sound recording device. The MIDI music playback section has no bearing on our type of audio recording, so we will skip it. The last option on the Audio page is the Use only default devices check box. This need not be selected. However, if you are only using your computer to record and playback audio through your main audio hardware that you have selected in the playback and recording sections, it is safe to check this box. If you use a voice modem or any other type of voice communication over your computer, leave this box unchecked. The Voice Page There are 2 sections on the Voice page of the Sounds and Audio Device Properties Voice playback and Voice recording. Both sections have the same default device options as the Audio page. You should have these options set to your main audio hardware device as we did previously on the Audio properties page. The Volume and Advanced buttons perform the same functions as their respective buttons on the Audio properties page as well. The Test Hardware button will allow you to test your audio recording and playback capabilities. This was intended to allow users to test their audio transmission capabilities for on-line gaming. You can try this if you'd like, but we will be performing our own tests later. The Hardware Page The last page in the Sound and Audio Device Properties is the Hardware page. Here will be a list of devices that control your multimedia playback and recordings. You should see any CDROM drives, your main audio hardware driver, Audio Codecs, Legacy Audio Drivers, Media Control Devices, Legacy Video Capture Devices and Video Codecs. There are also buttons for Troubleshooting and Properties available. Clicking on a device in the list, then clicking the Troubleshooting button will open the Windows Help and Support wizard to try and resolve issues with that particular device. Clicking on a device in the list, then clicking the Properties button will open that device's properties pages, just as if you were opening them from within Device Manager. One area of note here is with the Audio Codecs. If you select Audio Codecs and click the Properties button the Audio Codecs properties page will be displayed. Click the Properties tab to focus on that page. Here is a list of all the currently installed audio codecs on your computer. Each codec has it's own properties pages available by selecting the codec and Reference Guide 389

clicking the Properties button below it. Some codecs will have additional options that can be configured and you may also notice that the codecs are all ordered, meaning that each device is given a level of priority. We do not recommend making any changes to your audio codec properties, but knowing how to see the list of available codecs could be useful. Click Cancel to close the Audio Codecs Properties page, then click Ok to close the Windows Sounds and Audio Devices Properties.

The Volume and Recording Control Panels.

The Volume and Recording Control Panels will be where we setup our audio playback levels and recording levels and make adjustments to any advanced options these devices may allow. As you have seen, there are at least 2 different ways to open these Control Panels from within the Windows Sounds and Audio Devices Properties. Now, I'll show you 2 more. The Volume Control Panel The Volume Control Panel will be different from computer to computer depending on the audio hardware that is being used on the system. There may be only one control on the panel or several controls side by side, which is generally the case. The most notable way to open the Volume Control Panel is to use the Programs menu shortcut under; Start / Programs / Accessories / Entertainment / VolumeControl. When we originally reviewed the Volume page of the Audio and Devices Properties, we made sure to select the place the Volume icon in the taskbar's system tray option. If you look to the left of the Time on your taskbar, you should see a small icon that looks like a loud speaker. If you hover your mouse pointer over it, it should be labeled Volume. If you singleleft-click the Volume icon, a single volume control will be displayed. This is usually the main or master control for all audio playback settings. Increasing or decreasing it will increase or decrease the volume of the audio source to your other devices. Clicking away from the single volume control will close it automatically. Double-left-clicking on the Volume icon in the system tray, will open the complete Volume Control Panel that we are already familiar with. This is the second way to open the Volume Control Panel outside of the Sounds and Audio Devices Properties. The first control, on the left, is generally the master control for each device to the right of it. The other controls that should be listed are Wave, CD Player (if a CD drive is installed) and Line In. Others may exist as well, but we are really only concerned with the Wave and Master Volume controls. All of the playback controls have a Mute option that can be selected to mute the individual playback option. Make sure that Mute is not enabled on the Wave control. Also make sure that Mute All is not enabled on the master Volume control if available. If Line In is one of the controls you have listed in the Volume Control Panel, make sure that it IS muted. Microphones should not be listed in the Volume Control Panel. If it is, it must be muted or feedback may occur. The best option here would be to Mute the microphone then remove the control from the Volume Control Panel. You'll see how to do this in the Volume Control properties.

Reference Guide 390

There is an Options menu on the menu bar of the Volume Controls. There will be 3 options available in this menu Properties, Advanced Controls and Exit. Click the Options menu and see that Advanced Controls is selected, with a check mark next to it. If you do not see a check mark next to Advanced Controls, left-click it once to enable these controls. When the Advanced Controls are enabled, an Advanced button will appear on one or more of the playback controls. On my computer, with Advanced Controls enabled, I have an advanced button under my control labeled Volume Control, my Master Volume control. Clicking the Advanced button will display the Advanced Controls for Volume Control settings. There are 2 sections in my Advanced Volume control page Tone Controls and Other Controls. In the Tone Controls section I can adjust the bass and treble tones of my audio playback if necessary. generally a setting in the middle for both is sufficient. Some audio hardware may not allow you to make adjustments here, and normally you won't need to. The Other Controls section has options specifically for SPDIF audio connections with my computer and other SPDIF capable devices. This section may have totally different settings available to you, depending on your audio hardware. In general, you shouldn't need to make any changes here. Click the Close button to exit the Advanced Controls for Volume Control window. The Properties option in the Options menu will allow us to select the audio Mixer device, if this is a choice. There is a section called Adjust volume for with 2 or 3 options available. They are Playback, Recording and Other. We will focus on Playback and Recording only. By default, when opening the Volume Control properties, the Adjust volume for section has Playback selected. This selection will determine two things: the Control Panel we view and what controls are available in that Control Panel as selected in the Show the following volume controls section. By selecting or de-selecting any of the available controls from the Show the following volume controls list, you add or remove that item's controller to or from the Volume Control Panel. This is where you would de-select your muted microphone had it been listed on the Volume Control Panel. Making a change will not take affect until you click the Ok button. Click Ok to close the Volume Control properties now. The Recording Control Panel The Recording Control Panel is accessed from within the Volume Control properties page. Click the Options menu and select Properties. In the Adjust volume for section, click the Recording option. You'll notice that the Show the following volume controls section changed. Only input devices or devices that can be recorded from should be selected here. Generally you will see CD Player, Microphone, Line In and maybe a sound mixer if you audio hardware is equipped with this capability. We will focus mainly on the microphone, since this is the input device we intend to record audio with. Make sure that Microphone is enabled in the Show the following volume controls section, then click the Ok button. You'll see that our Volume Control Panel has magically turned into the Recording Control Panel we will use to adjust our microphone settings and level. The Microphone Control The Microphone volume level slider controls the volume of sound that your computer records through the microphone. The Select checkbox for the microphone should be enabled to tell the system that this is the device we want to use to record audio. Reference Guide 391

In the Options menu, you may be able to select the Advanced Controls. If so, make sure to enable the Advanced Control options. With Advanced Controls enabled, depending on your audio hardware, an Advanced button may appear on your Microphone control. Click on it to open the Advanced Controls for Microphone window. In the Advanced Controls for Microphone there are 2 sections Tone Controls and Other Controls. Tone Controls generally will be unavailable for microphones, so we will disregard this section. The Other Controls section usually has some interesting features for microphones. The most common is a microphone boost option or +db Gain option to amplify the audio input from the microphone. This can be enabled or disabled. As a general rule, if you are using an external amplified microphone, the boost or +db gain option should be disabled, since it already amplifies the sound it receives significantly. If you are using a nonamplified external microphone or a computer's internal microphone, you probably want the boost or +db gain enabled. Make the appropriate selection for your microphone type. We do not recommend the use of internal microphones for audio recording due to generally poor quality input and placement on the computer, which is usually toward the reporter looking at the computer screen. Some computers may have an Alternate Microphone option or Second Microphone option available in the Other Controls section. If you have these options, I recommend leaving them alone or getting more information on that particular option from the computer's manufacturer on how the options affect audio recording. While I have seen these options on some computers, I have no information on what they do or how they affect audio recording. Click the Close button to close the Advanced Recording Control properties and return to the Recording Control Panel. Set your Microphone Volume slider at 50%, half way up the scale before we begin testing our recording and playback. You can leave the Recording Control Panel open for now.

Testing your Audio Recording and Playback in Windows

When attempting to record audio, the first thing you need to be sure of is that you have a working microphone. It does not matter if its an external microphone plugged into the proper jack on the computer or an internal microphone, although for transcription purposes we highly recommend an external amplified microphone. If you are using an amplified microphone, be sure that the battery is relatively fresh. It also makes testing easier if you have both the Volume and Recording Control Panels open while testing your audio recording. You should open these 2 Control Panels now if they are not already open.

Using Windows Sound Recorder to test Recording Capability

The program we will use to record and playback our audio tests is called Sound Recorder. Sound Recorder can be launched from the Entertainment program group in Start / Programs / Accessories / Entertainment / Sound Recorder. Open the Sound Recorder program now if you haven't already.

Reference Guide 392

Make sure that your microphone is connected to the computer and switched On, if applicable. Click the Record button on the Sound Recorder window and read the following text aloud; This is a test. We are recording audio with the PCM format at 8,000 kilohertz, 8-bit, mono. End of test. Click the Stop button to the left of the Record button to stop the audio recording. You should have noticed the level graph in the center of the Sound Recorder window fluctuate while you were speaking, if your equipment is connected and working properly. Click the center Play button to playback your audio recording. (Vista users will need to save the file, browse to the folder it was saved in, and open it for Playback.) If you hear the audio playing, great! Your hardware and computer are capable of recording audio. You may want or need to adjust your playback and recording levels, but your hardware and computer are recording at this point. You should be ready to start testing the different audio codecs to see what will give you the best quality-to- compression ratio for your audio recordings. You can skip the next section, Audio Troubleshooting and start the Working with Audio Codecs section.

Audio troubleshooting
If you didn't hear any audio playback, here is a list of things to check:

Make sure the Wave control is not muted and is at at least 50% intensity. Make sure the Volume control is not muted and is at at least 50% intensity. Make sure your microphone is connected to the microphone input jack on your computer. (Not Line In or the Headphones audio jacks.) Make sure your microphone has a fresh battery, if applicable. Look for a manual volume control on your computer that needs adjustment. Increase the microphone recording level. Enable microphone boost or +db gain in Microphone / Advanced Options. Test the microphone on a different computer or audio system if possible, to be sure it works properly. Try a different microphone if possible.

We recommend only making one of these changes at a time, then replaying or re- recording and replaying the audio each time to get your desired audio recording and playback levels. To re-record your audio, click the File menu, choose New from the list and click No when prompted to save the current audio file. This will clear the current audio buffer and allow you to start a new recording.

Reference Guide 393

If you have tried all of the options listed above and still have no audio playback and there is no noticeable fluctuation in the center of the Sound Recorder window while you are recording audio, you should probably seek outside assistance from the computer's manufacturer or a trusted local computer shop to determine why the computer is not able to record and playback audio. Testing compression settings In User settings | Realtime tab, select Compression under WAV audio settings. Then, open a blank file. It is helpful to name the file the same as the compression selections being tested. Open the Realtime statistics window to see whether the volume levels are reflected. Select Record either with the toolbar icon, or in the Tools | Multimedia menu. Record for a minute and then stop the recording. Use Alt+J or Play to play the audio and evaluate the quality. Note that not all selections will reflect the volume levels in the Realtime statistics window. If the volume levels do not display, then you will also not be able to adjust the playback speed. The following SPEEX and GSM 6.10 selections do display the volume levels and allow playback speed adjustments: SPEEX 8.0kBit/s, 8.0 kHz, Mono, Q3 0kb/sec 8.0kBit/s, 8.0 kHz, Mono, Q4 0kb/sec 11.0kBit/s, 8.0 kHz, Mono, Q5 1kb/sec 11.0kBit/s, 8.0 kHz, Mono, Q6 1kb/sec 24.6kBit/s, 8.0 kHz, Mono, Q10 3kb/sec GSM compression settings: 8.000 kHz, Mono 1kb/sec 11.025 kHz, Mono 2kb/sec 22.050 kHz, Mono 4kb/sec

Working with different Audio Codecs

As you'll remember, audio codecs allow us to compress our audio files so they are smaller and easier to manage and transport. When using the Sound Recorder program to record and playback audio, the default format for the audio file is the PCM format at 8,000 kilohertz, 8bit, mono. Prior to recording audio with Sound Recorder, you can change the audio format for the wave file by clicking the File menu and choosing Properties from the list. On the Details page, in the Properties for Sound dialog, there is a section labeled Format Conversion. This is where we can select different codecs to test our audio recording. There is a Choose from drop down list that will allow you to select from recording or playback formats. The default All formats will be sufficient. You shouldn't need to make any changes there. We also have a Convert Now button that allows us to make a new audio format selection. Click the Convert Now button to open the Sound Selection window. In the Sound Selection window, we have 3 modifiable fields Name, Format and Attributes. You won't need to be too concerned with the Name field, just yet. Once you have determined Reference Guide 394

your optimal recording levels and audio file format you can save the format under a user defined name, by clicking the Save As button, that will be available to you in Eclipse. We do not recommend overwriting any of the pre-defined settings that are already available, such as Radio Quality, Telephone Quality, etc. The Format field allows you to choose from any of the audio codecs available on your computer to change the compression method. From our experiences, many reporters use the GSM 6.10 audio codec for transcription recording. You may want to start with this codec when testing your computer's recording and playback capabilities using a compressed audio format. Again, depending on your audio hardware, you may get excellent or poor results using any codec. Go ahead and select the GSM 6.10 format from the Format drop-down list now. The Attributes field allows us to fine tune our Format selection. Clicking the available drop down list reveals possible format attributes for the chosen Format. The default format that appears when GSM 6.10 is selected is 8,000 kHz, Mono which will produce a file of about 1 kb per second of recording. This is approximately 10 times smaller than the Telephone Quality PCM format and 7 times smaller than the default PCM format we used to test our first audio recording a few moments ago. But remember, compression rates like these will affect the quality of your audio recording and playback, so we will enter the testing phase again shortly. For the mean time, leave the default GSM 6.10 attributes alone. We will do our next audio recording with this format and the current attributes. Click the Ok button on the Sound Selection window to return to the Properties for Sound dialog. Click Ok on this page to return to the Sound recorder interface. Right away, you should notice that the black and green waveform viewer in the the center of the Sound Recorder window is completely grey. This waveform viewer is only available when you are using an uncompressed audio format such as PCM -- Sound Recorder's default. Since the codecs we will be testing are all compressed audio formats, this viewer will not be available for the rest of your tests, unless you switch back to the PCM format, or close Sound Recorder and re-open it.

Testing Audio Recording with a Compressed Format

Now that you have selected the GSM 6.10 audio format you'll need to record another wave file and play it back to determine if the quality of the compressed format will be acceptable. Click the File menu in Sound Recorder and choose New from the list. Click No to discard the current audio file and start a new one. Click the Record button to start your audio recording. Repeat the following text: This is a test. We are recording audio with the GSM 6.10 format at 8,000 kilohertz, mono. End of test. Click the Stop button to the left of the Record button to stop the audio recording. Click the center Play button to playback your audio recording. You may need to try other formats and attributes to get the desired level of quality from your audio recordings. For the sake of brevity, we cannot document each possible format and attribute combination. It will be up to you to use the information we have provided to test Reference Guide 395

your computer's audio recording capability and determine the best format and attributes for your hardware. We recommend that you make a note of each selection you try, and to mention the format and attributes you have selected, in the text that you read aloud when testing your audio recordings. If desired, you can save the test wave files, with descriptive names, so that you can refer to them later. For practical purposes, remember that it is best to test your audio recording in an actual working setting with people talking like they would if you were in a real-time session, deposition, or whatever situation that you plan to implement audio recording. Do not speak directly into the microphone when testing, unless that is how your speakers will be recorded during transcription. Walk a few feet away from the computer and try to simulate the environment you will be working in. Speaking in normal tones will give you the best results when selecting recording levels. Once you have completed these tests and selected the optimum levels for recording and playback, and have chosen a compression format which provides good quality audio and smaller file sizes, doing real-time transcription with audio sync in Eclipse will be a snap. You should save your Audio format settings under a user defined name that you can select within Eclipse. To save your audio format settings, open the Properties for Sound in the Sound Recorder File Menu, and click the Convert Now button. Make sure that your Format and Attribute settings conform to what you have tested and chosen to be acceptable, then click the Save As button on the Sound Selection window. Type in a descriptive name, such as Eclipse Transcription Settings, then click the Ok button to save the settings under this name. You will be able to access these settings, under this name, within Eclipse. We'll explain how, in the next section of this document. Click OK on the Sound Selection window then click OK to close the Properties for Sound dialog. You can close any open Control Panels and the Sound Recorder application when your testing is completed.

Setting up Eclipse to Record and Playback Real-time Audio

Now that you have your desired audio format selected and saved, you will need to make these settings active in Eclipse. Run Eclipse and open the user that you want to configure for audio recording. Anytime you intend to make changes to your User Settings in Eclipse is a good time to make a backup of your User Settings. Select the location you use for backup. On the Eclipse Menubar, click the Tools menu and choose Backup. Select User settings only, or include your main dictionary if desired, then click Next. Click each of the User Settings files that you want to backup. Selected settings files will be highlighted, click Next to continue. Choose your backup location and click the Finish button. Now, you can continue configuring Eclipse with your new audio compression settings. Open the User settings (Alt+U) and select the Realtime tab.

Reference Guide 396

In the lower right hand area of the Realtime tab are the WAV Audio settings. Click the Compression button. You will see a window that is basically identical to the Sound Selection window that you were working with during your Sound Recorder tests. Click the drop down list next to the Name field and choose the format settings that you had previously saved as My Transcription Settings or whatever you named it. Making this selection will apply the format and attribute settings that you had previously configured and tested in Sound Recorder. You should review the Format and Attributes fields after making your selection from the Name field to be sure they match what you had selected in Sound Recorder. Once you have confirmed your selection, click the OK button on the Select Compression window. In the Audio settings section of the Realtime tab, there are 2 more options to consider. Autorestart is an option that will un-pause the recording automatically when you start writing. It is on by default, but if you need to be able to write realtime while the recording is paused, you will need to turn this off by unchecking the box. Auto-pause is an option that can be set to a number of minutes; if there is no activity on the steno machine for that number of minutes, the audio recording will be paused. This button uses the same code as hitting the pause button, so the synchronization is adjusted accordingly. However, you must remember to hit the keystroke for un-pause (even if auto-restart is enabled) or you will loose a few seconds of audio when you resume writing. Once you have configured your audio settings in User settings, click the User tab to display that page of the User settings. Click the Save settings button and either overwrite your current settings with the new settings (Always make sure you have a current backup of your settings files before making modifications!!!) or save the current settings under a new name, which will become the new working settings file as indicated by the User file field on the User page of User settings. Close the User settings and make a new backup of your current settings. Now, you should have your new settings and be ready to test your audio synchronization in Eclipse. Unpack your steno machine and set it up, if it's not already, and connect the real-time cable to your computer and the steno machine. Power the machine up. In Eclipse, press Alt+T to start a real-time file, or from the Menubar choose Production then select Translate. In the Translate notes window click the Notes button and type in a name for the new translation you are about to perform. Click Open or press Enter in the dialog box to make the selection and return to the Translate notes window. In the translation mode section, make sure Realtime is selected. You will also need to make sure that the Record audio checkbox is enabled. Click in the box to enable or disable audio recording. A check in the Reference Guide 397

box means the option is enabled. The Record audio option is only available when the Realtime translation mode is selected. Once you have these options selected in the Translate notes window it's time to start writing and recording. We recommend sitting in front of your Television or a radio and transcribing for a few minutes or more. Once you feel you have written for a sufficient amount of time, stop your translation (Alt+Shift+T) and click Ok to close the translation statistics window that appears when translation is stopped. Now, press Ctrl+PgUp or go to the top of the document. Put the cursor on the first word of the transcribed text and press Alt+J to play the audio from your cursor's current position in the document. Note if the audio starts playing from the cursor position it should. Press Alt+H to stop your audio playback. Move your cursor to a new position a couple of pages into the document and press Alt+J to play from that position. Again, note if the audio starts playing from the cursor position as it should. It is important to remember that Eclipse starts playing audio from your cursor's current position in your document when you use the play audio function (Alt+J) which is a toggle for pause and play. You can pause (Alt+K) to temporarily stop your audio playback. If the Move cursor option has been selected in the Audio control panel (Tools/Multimedia/Control Panel) the cursor will move, more or less with the playback. Also, you may need to adjust your audio playback and recording levels from time-to- time, especially if you use other audio capable programs with your computer. Many audio programs, such as Windows Media Player will adjust the volume control and leave it at the last setting when you close it. Be sure to check these levels prior to making any recording. Playback volume can be adjusted at anytime, but if the recording level isn't high enough during recording, there is no way to increase the audible playback beyond the computer's maximum volume control, without using something like amplified speakers. Doing so would most likely generate quite a bit of background noise, so it is very important to check your audio recording and playback levels every time you intend to record audio. Adjust them as needed for the environment you will be working in. Test your audio recording and playback prior to starting any real-time translation when possible. Now that we have covered audio recording and setup in Eclipse, we'll discuss a few scenarios that may come up while using Eclipse for audio recording.

Doing Readbacks
Eclipse audio synchronization can be used to readback audio during a deposition. To do this: 1. Stop the audio recording with Alt+H or by selecting Stop from Realtime/Multimedia. Confirm that you want to stop the audio recording when the warning message appears. 2. Move the cursor to the part of the transcript you wish to read back. 3. Press Alt+J to play the audio. In other words, you would play audio for a readback just the same as you would when editing. The only difference is that you manually have to stop the recording first. (Eclipse cannot Reference Guide 398

record and play back at the same time.) If youre going to do readbacks, you must be sure to start recording again! Eclipse will automatically append the continuing audio recording to the current .WAV file. Although you should always manually re-start recording that has been stopped, you can use Auto- Restart on the Realtime tab of User settings as a safety measure. If checked, any sound recording will automatically resume when you start writing again. However, with the Auto-Restart feature, the first few seconds of spoken testimony may be lost in the time it takes for the reporter to write what has just been said. The recording does not restart until Eclipse knows that something has been written on the writer. There is also an Auto-Pause setting, which will automatically stop audio recording after a number of minutes if there is no activity on the steno machine. This feature exists only because some municipalities require their reporters be able to prove that audio recording is stopped when the deposition goes off the record. If you use both Auto-Pause and AutoRestart, there will be a brief delay and a few seconds of dropped audio before Auto-Restart kicks in. So only use Auto-Pause if you absolutely have to.

Sharing Audio Files With A Scopist

Audio files by their nature are very large. They cannot be emailed by conventional means. Reporters and scopists who have to email audio files to each other do so by using a specialty large-file email service, or by purchasing web space and uploading/downloading the file via the Internet. Also, audio files will not fit on a floppy disk. You will need to use a writable CD, thumb drive, or other high capacity specialty media such as DVDs. If you have received an audio (.WAV) file and a transcript (.ECL) file from a reporter, all you have to do is is put the .WAV file in a place where Eclipse can find it. The .WAV file must have the same name as the .ECL file. The File locations section of the Programming tab tells Eclipse where to look for the WAV file. By default, Eclipse will look in the same folder as the .ecl file. You can set other locations with the WAV=path in the File locations on the Programming tab to have Eclipse look in a different location. (For details on File Locations, see the Reference Guide section of this manual, page 472.) The audio path is also contained in the Job variables. You can play audio directly off a CD, or from wherever the file downloads to. For example, if you get a CD with the . WAV file on it, you can set your File location WAV path to D:\(or whatever letter your CD drive is) and the .WAV file will play from there. You don't have to copy it into the jobs folder. Since large files take a long time to copy, you may find this very convenient. And that's it. You don't have to do anything in Eclipse to get them to link. If the .WAV file is in any of the proper locations, you will be able to hear the audio. There is one other aspect of .WAV/.ECL synchronization that should be mentioned.

Reference Guide 399

The underscore _ character has a special meaning in remote live scoping. Basically, everything after the underscore will be ignored when Eclipse is looking for a .WAV file to associate with an .ECL file. For example, if you have a transcript file called SMITH_051104_DEPO.ECL, it will look for an audio file called SMITH.WAV, not SMITH_051104_DEPO.WAV. In other words, if you're not getting the audio from an .ECL/.WAV file where the filename contains an underscore, try removing the underscore from both filenames. You can replace the underscore with a space, hyphen, or any other character you like. (As long as you are consistent; again, both .ECL and .WAV files must have the same name.)

Synchronizing Audio
If the audio is ahead of or behind the transcript, there are some tools available to adjust the timecodes so the audio will synchronize again. NOTE: Manually synchronizing audio involves manipulating timecodes. If you need to produce a timecoded transcript, be sure to undo your changes before printing it and handing it in, or make the changes in a copy of the file. The tools you need to manually sync up your audio are on the Documents tab/Timecodes button. They are Offset and WAVe MS/Sec. You may need to use one or the other, or both, depending upon the nature of the problem. You may also want to use the Timecode Calculator (see p. 230 for details). The Timecode offset setting allows you to apply an offset to the entire transcript. For example, if your timecodes are ten seconds ahead of something you wish to synchronize to, you can apply an offset of minus ten seconds and they will match. An offset can be plus or minus. A positive number will add time; a negative number will subtract time. For example, an offset of +00:00:10:00 (plus ten seconds) would change a timecode from 10:30:00 AM to 10:30:10 AM; an offset of minus ten seconds would change it from 10:30:00 AM to 10:29:50 AM. The offset doesnt alter or otherwise change your authentic timecodes or job in any way. The offset is simply a mathematical alteration. If you want the original timecodes back you can simply reset the offset to zero. Here is how to synchronize your timecodes with an external source: 1. Select one particular word near the beginning of the transcript. 2. Determine that words timecode in your document. Put the cursor on the word, and look to the status bar at the bottom right for that strokes timecode. It will appear like this: TC: 12:30:16. Be aware that each steno stroke has its own timecode, even though only one Reference Guide 400

timecode will appear per line in the transcript. To see the timecode for a particular stroke, put the cursor on that stroke and look at the status bar. 3. Determine the timecode for the same word in the external source. For example if it were a videotaped deposition, you would play that part of the transcript and make a note of what the timecode was for the word being spoken at that time. 4. Subtract your timecode from the external timecode to get the offset. It is important to note that there is a natural delay between a word being spoken and it being translated into a transcript. If you set Timecode Offset to zero you will find that the transcript lags behind the sound slightly. The default Timecode Offset is -00:00:03:00 (minus three seconds) for this reason. Timecode Offset will address one type of synchronization problem. When working with Timecode Offset, you may discover that the discrepancy is not the same throughout the transcript. You may sync part of the transcript using the offset, only to find that it drifts off again later in the job. This is a symptom of a different problem: a discrepancy between your sound recording systems definition of a second and an actual second. Some audio recording systems consider a second to be slightly shorter or longer than a second of actual time. Over the course of a lengthy sound file, this small difference can cause tracking to drift further and further and further off. To solve this problem, we must adjust the WAV ms/sec, which is an abbreviation for .WAV file milliseconds per second. We are essentially redefining the length of a second such that the timecodes will match up with the sound file. To determine if you need to adjust WAV ms/sec, get the tracking accurate at a point early in the document. Use Timecode Offset if you need to. Then go to two or three points at various places later in the document, and track the disparity between the timecode you put the cursor on and the timecode for the sound that plays. Be sure to pick spots over the entire length of the transcript to do this. If the disparity gets greater and greater over the course of the job, you will need to adjust WAV ms/sec. If the sound file is behind the transcript, and gets further and further behind as you go along (e.g., you go to page 50 and page 46 plays), increase WAV ms/sec. If the sound file is ahead of the transcript, and gets further and further ahead as you go along (e.g., you go to page 50 and page 54 plays), decrease WAV ms/sec. When altering WAV ms/sec, make small changes. Try 999 or 1001 for your first change. After making a change, go to the end of the job and see how much closer the audio tracking is. When testing this, test it near the end of a job, as the disparity there is the greatest.

Reference Guide 401

External recording devices and timecode discrepancy If you use an external voice recording device, you may find that the recordings don't sync properly due to subtle time stretching or compressing on the devices. You can use the User settings | Document | Timecodes | ms/sec setting to correct this problem. With the document on the screen, if you go into the ms/sec setting and change it and exit the dialog, the system will assume that you want to use that setting in this document and will allow it to modify the playback timing.

Archiving WAV files

As mentioned earlier, WAV files can be very large. Not only are they impossible to email, they will quickly fill up your hard drive if left to pile up. At the default compression setting of 10 kilobytes/second, an hour of audio will require nearly 40 megabytes (MB) of hard drive space, or about 30 hours per gigabyte (GB). A typical computer hard drive size is 40 GB, so its possible to consume your entire hard drive in less than a year if you do not archive or delete audio files. Most reporters, if they need to archive an audio file, will copy it to a writable CD. This storage medium lends itself very well to storing large audio files, not to mention permanent archival of the transcript itself. Once the audio file is copied to a CD (or two or more CDs it never hurts to have backups) you may delete the .WAV file from the hard drive. Alternatively, you could simply delete the audio file once you were done using it to edit the transcript. Both the Eclipse File Manager and Windows Explorer allow you to delete the audio file without deleting the transcript or any other Eclipse files. The transcript, raw steno, and audio are stored in separate files; to delete the audio and keep the rest, be sure to delete only the file with the .WAV extension.

Glossary
Codec - Short for compressor/decompresser, a codec is any technology for compressing and decompressing data. Codecs can be implemented in software, hardware, or a combination of both. Some popular codecs for computer video include MPEG, Indeo and Cinepak. In telecommunications, (short for coder/decoder) a device that encodes or decodes a signal. For example, telephone companies use codecs to convert binary signals transmitted on their digital networks to analog signals converted on their analog networks. The translation of a binary value into a voltage that can be transmitted over a wire networks. Lossless - A compression protocol which does not sacrifice (lose) any detail in compression or decompression. Lossless compression formats are essential in applications like compressing program files or backing up data from a hard disk. In applications which don't require exact reproduction of the file being compressed, a lossy protocol may be used. The ZIP format developed by PKWare is a lossless file compression protocol. Lossy - If a process is lossy, it means that a little quality is lost when it is performed. If a format is lossy, it means that putting data into that format (or possibly even manipulating it in that format) will cause some slight loss. Lossy processes and formats are typically used for performance or resource utilization reasons. The opposite of lossy is lossless. Reference Guide 402

PCM - Pulse-Coded Modulation is a digital representation of audio in which a series of samples of the level of acoustic energy is represented by a series of (arithmetically scaled) numeric values. This representation is the basis of digital audio and is what people usually mean when they refer to uncompressed audio. Sample Rate - In a digital recorder or sampler, the sample rate is how many times per second the source material is being sampled or recorded. Sample rate affects the frequency response of the final recording or sample; the highest frequency that can accurately be sampled is 1/2 the sample rate. In general, the higher the sample rate, the better the sound quality. But, the best sample rate to use will depend on your application, your gear, and the amount of storage available (the higher the rate, the more storage required). CDs use a 44.1 kHz sample rate, while DAT recorders often default to 48 kHz. Multimedia applications may use rates of 22.05 kHz or even 11.025 kHz for maximum efficiency.

Reference Guide 403

FILE MANAGER
Total Eclipse utilizes a custom File manager that enables you to perform many functions including Copy/move, rename, delete, zip/unzip, backup/restore, translate, open, print, ascii, and revert. It includes an Info box that lists statistics and other information (such as speaker names, and the name of the last person who edited it) about each file. To open File Manager in Total Eclipse, press Ctrl+F.

The Job name list

The large window in the File manager contains the list of jobs. Each of your jobs will appear, along with other information to help you work with them. If you have a job open, when you go into the file manager it will highlight the file you currently have open. A job is simply any number of Eclipse-specific files that share the same name. A job may contain an .ECL file (transcript), .DIX (dictionary), .NOT (steno), .WAV (sound), . TXT (ASCII), .RTF (conversion), or any combination thereof. The name of the job appears under the Job name heading. This is the name you gave the job when you created it. Each job has a plus sign to the left of its name. Clicking the plus sign will allow you to view the individual components of that job:

Reference Guide 404

This job contains a note file, a text document, and a dictionary. The creation date, last edit date, and size of each file are visible. You can click the minus sign to take the details back out of view.

Job Info
At the bottom left of the Eclipse File Manager is a box that gives you information about the currently selected job. It will tell you the name, creation date, last edit date, size of the file, speaker list entries, and job variables. It lists translation statistics and the calculated statistics from the tools menu, as well as other information that is stored, including the name of the last person to edit the file, the name of the person who translated it, and the name of the scopist (the last person to open it on an edit station.) For text files, you will also get the number of pages and the names of any job dictionaries that were used. For dictionaries, you will be told the number of entries. The information in this box is included in any search you do using the Search function in the file manager. This allows you to search for any job in the current folder that contains the text you're searching for anywhere in the info that appears, so if you do a search for "Frank", for example, you will find any job that contains "Frank" as a reporter, scopist, speaker or name that appears among the job variables. Also note that you can include the label in the search, so if you search for "Scoped by: Bob" it will find any job where that specific text appears in the info pane, allowing you to narrow your searches considerably.

Selecting locations:
The current path is shown at the bottom of the file manager window. There are tabs at the top of the job list. Clicking on these tabs shows the contents of the selected location in the job list. Each of these is a location where Eclipse files can be stored. Clicking a tab will load the contents of that location into the Jobs Area. Reference Guide 405

Jobs is your jobs folder, also known as your User Files Area. This is where the bulk of your work, including your main dictionary and any extra dictionaries, are stored. Blocks is your blocks folder. This is where your block files (title pages, list files, etc.) are stored. By default this is the same as your Jobs folder; however, some reporters prefer to keep these in a separate folder. The location of your Jobs and Blocks folder is defined in User Settings. Go to the User tab, click the Advanced button, and you will have the opportunity to re-assign these. The default location for both of these is: C:\Program Files\Advantage Software\Eclipse\Users\Your Name Many reporters create a sub-folder for their block files. Its path is: C:\Program Files\Advantage Software\Eclipse\Users\Your Name\Blocks. The Aux (Auxiliary) and Network tabs are file paths that can be set up in User settings/User tab/Advanced button. Auxiliary is often used for an additional storage folder, such as a CDROM drive. Network is most often used if the reporters computer is on a network. If you are using these extra file locations, you can access them in the Eclipse File Manager by clicking their tabs. Backup will search the backup directory. This directory is created if you use the a Backup directory on the hard drive option when doing Tools/Backup, or if you copy files to it in Eclipse File Manager. (Note that the Backup tab does not apply to backups that are made using the Timed Auto Backup option on the Edit tab of User Settings. A later section will describe how to access those.) The Browse tab allows you to select any folder on your computer, and have its contents appear in the Jobs Area. This allows you to examine a folder that is not selected as Jobs, Blocks, Auxiliary, or Network. The gear button quickly takes you to the User tab of User Settings. Click on the Advanced button to open the Advanced User Settings dialog, where you can reassign the Jobs, Blocks, Auxiliary, or Network path. Note: The Users location tab and copy/move destination can be used to make backup copies, restore and delete .ini settings files.

Moving around in File Manager

You can advance through the tabs using Ctrl+right arrow and Ctrl+left arrow or jump to a particular tab using Ctrl+1 (or Alt+1 or Shift+1) through Ctrl+7. You can scroll using the keyboard, mouse buttons, or mouse wheel.

Reference Guide 406

You can type a letter to go to the first file that starts with a particular letter, or you can type multiple keys to search for a filename. Hitting a letter after a one-second pause will indicate the start of a new file name.

Summary
The file manager has a Summary button which generates a summary report for all of the marked jobs. If you have no jobs marked with a checkbox, it will generate a summary for all of the jobs in the current folder. If you have any jobs expanded with the plus sign, the report will contain additional details about the individual files in the job. When you click the Summary button, an Open file dialog opens, with the default file name JobSummary.txt. You can use this name, or type in a different file name. Click Open, and answer Yes when the dialog asks if you want to create this file. The file opens, and is automatically saved in the Jobs folder. It is in ASCII format, and once it is created, you can open it in any text editor, such as notepad, for printing or copying and pasting into any other application, including Eclipse. This report lists file names, file sizes, and most importantly, the number of billable pages in each file. At the end of the report, it will show a total number of pages for all of the files selected. (Note: The number of billable pages is a calculation that is only in Eclipse 4, so older jobs will show a zero in the report.)

Billable pages can be calculated automatically for any job that uses simple sequential page numbering (from 1 to the end page), taking the last page number in the job as the number of billable pages. However, if a job contains ANY new page number commands that start a whole new page number at any point in the file, the last page number cannot be used to calculate billable pages. In this case, you must manually issue a command to cause the number of billable pages to be recalculated. This command is Tools | Statistics. That feature actually counts the total number of pages in the file, which it stores permanently in the file. You can recalculate it at any time by executing the statistics command again. To make older jobs work for this summary, simply open the old job and use Ctrl+PgDn to jump to the end. Or, if the job contains new page number commands, use the Tools | Statistics function on these jobs before attempting to create the summary report.

Reference Guide 407

Settings
Next to the Summary button is a Settings.. button, which opens the Job manager options dialog. The options have to do with the zipping(compression), and deletion, of files.

The Excluded from whole job ZIP area allows you to exclude certain types of files from the zipped version of the job. For example, you may wish to exclude .WAV files because of their size. To exclude a type of file, enter its extension into the Excluded from whole job ZIP text box:

To exclude more than one type of file, separate them with commas. The period is not necessary. The Warning Level When Deleting option allows you to determine the level of protection you have when deleting files. Each File is the highest level of protection. With this option active, you will be asked to confirm each file you wish to delete. A job can contain multiple files, so if you try to delete a job that contains a .DIX, .ECL and .NOT file, you will be prompted three times, one for each component. Each Job will prompt you once for the entire job, no matter how many individual files it contains. Once At Beginning will only prompt you once when you being the deletion process, no matter how many jobs you are deleting at once. As the name implies, Never warn will not warn you at all when deleting.

Reference Guide 408

If you accidentally delete a file, it can be retrieved from the Recycle Bin in Windows. In brief, you will double-click the Recycle Bin on your desktop; right-click the file you wish to retrieve; and then select Restore File(s). See Windows Help for further explanation of this process.

Selecting files:
You can select files with the mouse or the keyboard. To select multiple files, click the box next to the file to check it, or hit the space bar. If you do not check any files, then when you execute a function it is assumed that you wish to execute the function on the currently highlighted file. It will only perform the function on the highlighted file if no files are checked. You can use Shift+Click on the checkboxes to select or de-select multiple files. If you wish to show the files in a different order, click on the Job name or Created or Edited headings above the columns. That will sort them in alphabetical order or by date. Clicking on the same button again will reverse the order of the items in the list. You can also use the hotkeys, F2, F3 and F4 keys to sort the files and jobs by Job name, Created, and Edited. When you first examine a folder, the software will list the job names. Each job may contain a number of different files. The different files will be indicated by icons to the right of the created and edited dates. If you click the plus sign next to the job name, all of the individual files will be listed. If you select an entire job, the system assumes that you wish to perform an operation (such as rename or copy) on ALL of the files within the job. If you expand the job with the plus sign and select individual files, the operation will be performed ONLY on the files you select. Note: If you use the mouse to click directly on the icons, you can select individual files without expanding the view. Note that only the selected files will be highlighted in that case. There is an information pane on the left side under the function buttons. This contains detailed information about the currently highlighted job, including the job variables from the transcript. If you wish to search for any information, from the file name to the job variables to the dates, just select the Search function and type in what you're searching for.

Available functions:
Note that each of the following functions can be accessed using either Alt+letter or Ctrl+letter or Shift+letter where letter is the underlined letter. Also, you can right-click the file name, which brings up a context-sensitive list of the functions. Copy/Move to destination. If you select the copy or move buttons, the selected files will be copied or moved to the selected destination. If you have Prompt for destination selected, you will be asked where you wish to send the files. You can also pre-select the location so that you can perform multiple copy/move operations without having to keep answering the prompt.

Reference Guide 409

If you Copy a file to the current folder, it will prompt you for a new jobname, which will apply to all of the job's files at once. This gives you an easy way to make a duplicate of a file or job. Note that if you select the backup folder, it will automatically create a folder named Eclipse backups if you do not already have one. If you select email, you can mark any number of files and use the copy or move function to send them. Note that it will always attach all of the files marked to a single e-mail, so if you need to send individual files to different recipients, you will need to send them separately. The subject line of the e-mail and the default body text of the e-mail are user-definable using the file manager Settings button which opens the Job manager options dialog. If you select Burn to CD, and you use Windows XP, you can burn files directly to a CD as you would to a floppy disk. Select the files you want to burn, click Copy to..,.select Burn to CD as your destination and the files will be burned. It can burn additional information on CDs that already have files on them, and it can also burn CDRW disks. If you burn on a CD-RW, it will ask if you wish to erase the contents of the disk first. Rename. This will rename all of the selected files. If several files are part of the same job, it will only ask you if you want to rename them once and will rename all of the files at once. Delete. This will display a warning message, Are you sure you wish to move selected parts of filename to the recycle bin? and will move all of the selected files to the recycle bin. The Settings button allows you to select how often the system will ask you if you're sure you wish to delete the selected files. Note that you will have to periodically empty your recycle bin to actually eliminate the files from your hard drive. Note that if you are deleting files from an external drive, the files will be permanently deleted, not sent to the recycle bin. The warning message will state Are you sure you wish to delete selected parts of filename permanently? Zip/Unzip. These functions will compress and decompress the files for more efficient storage and/or e-mailing. Zipping a job allows for easier emailing, and makes the files take less space on your hard drive or storage media. When you zip a job, the .ZIP file will appear as a file within the job:

Reference Guide 410

The .ZIP file can then be independently copied, emailed, etc. as described herein. The Settings button has a line where you can type in specific file extensions that should be excluded from zip files, such as WAV files which are generally too large to efficiently store and would take a very long time to ZIP (not to mention that they wouldn't compress at all if you're already using a compressed audio format.) Backup/Restore. You can select multiple files in the file manager and select the backup function, choosing the location in which the zip file will be saved.

When you select restore, it runs the restore wizard so that you can select the files from a backup. A Browse function is included, so you can choose any location from which to restore your backup files. When you use the file manager to backup and restore your files, the files are automatically zipped when backing up and unzipped when restoring. Translate/Open/Print/ASCII. These functions are the same as if you were executing the function from within Eclipse. One special note: The Open and Print functions assume that you wish to work with the transcript. If you expand the job with the plus sign and select a specific file (such as an ASCII or HTML file), or click on an icon to the right of the job name, it will open that file specifically. If you select a document that has no .ecl file, the open or print command will execute on that document. However, if you click on a job that does not contain an .ecl file, and you do not select a particular file by clicking on the icon, you must fan out the job to open or print the files. When you Open a file, the File manager window closes. Revert. The Revert button has to do with the Timed auto-backup feature on the Edit tab of User settings. If are using Timed auto-backup (by having it set to a number of minutes Reference Guide 411

greater than zero), Total Eclipse will create a series of backup files, as frequently as you specify, named jobname.bk0, jobname.bk1, jobname.bk2, etc. up to jobname.bk9. When you press the Revert button, it displays a list of all of the backup files for the current job. The one you select will be copied over the Jobname.ecl in the jobs folder. Note that this does NOT save the original Jobname.ecl file anywhere. You should NOT use Revert unless the current version of the file is unsalvageable. The files are saved in the backup folder, which by default is \Eclipse backups. You can change the location of the backup folder in User settings | Programming | File locations | BACKUP=. The .bk files are copies of the .ECL transcript file that can be reverted to in the event of a catastrophic error. This is what the Revert button does; it switches back to the previously saved version of the job, allowing you to switch to a version of the job that predates the error. The next time you open the .ECL file, it will be the older, reverted-to version. Having a series of backup files will allow you to go back to an even older version of the file if the most recent backup contains an error that you were trying to recover from (such as a disastrous block-delete or ill-advised text global.) If you have your backup interval set to 30 minutes, for example, it will keep the last five hours worth of backups. Properties. This runs the properties dialog from Windows Explorer. Note that if you select a whole job, the properties of all of the files will be opened at the same time. Search. Clicking the Search button allows you to search for a file, by any criteria you like.

You can search for a file by date, name, size, number of entries, number of pages any criteria that appears in the Job Stats box. Simply type the search criteria into the search box and press Enter. The first job that matches the criteria will be highlighted. You will also be able to see the Job Stats for that job.

If this isnt the job you want, repeat the search. It will stop on the next job that matches the search criteria. The fastest way to repeat a search is to press Alt+S and then Enter.

Reference Guide 412

When you perform a search, it will search from the currently selected file down. If you want to search the entire directory, you need to make sure the first file is selected before you begin the search. To do this, press Home before beginning a search. Home moves the selection to the first file in the list. Format disk. This button will format your currently selected floppy drive as indicated in your User settings | Input options. It will not allow you to format your C: drive.

File Destination
When copying or moving files, you need to select where you want them to go. Select the desired file destination in the drop-down list that appears to the right of the Copy To and Move To buttons.

Most of these choices are the same as the tabs: Jobs, Blocks, email, CD, Backup, Auxiliary, Network, and Browse. The E-Mail option will open your e-mail program and attach the selected job to a message. When you select a file destination, that destination will be remembered in your User Settings, and future file actions will default to that destination each time. If you are frequently moving files to the same location, it is useful to select that destination in the drop-down list. Alternatively, the Prompt For Destination option will ask you to Pick where you want to move or copy the job each time: Also there are several functions that do not appear anywhere on the file manager screen: Ctrl+W will open the user settings; and Ctrl+F will open explorer as will Ctrl+E (so, to get to Windows explorer from Eclipse directly, hit Ctrl+F twice). The F2, F3 and F4 keys are used to sort the files and jobs by Job name, date Created and date last modified (Edited).

Reference Guide 413

GLUE ENTRIES
Glue entries stick to each other and not anything else (except an option for not sticking to numbers see page 137). Glue entries are also known as Alphabets, Spelling Alphabets, Abbreviation Alphabets, or Stitching Alphabets. Some examples of their use are: the {&F} {&B} {&I} agent translates as the FBI agent {&-J {&-O} {&-N} translates as J-O-N {&U.} {&S.} translates as U.S. 27 {&(e)} {&(a) translates as 27(e)(a) Glue templates can be used to streamline the functioning of your glue entries, eliminating the need for multiple Alphabets.

Glue Templates
In your main dictionary, you define a single glue alphabet: {&A}, {&B}, {&C}, etc. Normally, those can be used for FBI, IBM, CIA, etc. Now, if you want to stitch a series of letters like J-O-H-N, it was previously necessary to create a second alphabet: {&-A}, {&-B}, {&-C}, etc. With glue templates, you can write a stroke on the writer which instantly applies a special template to all glue entries that follow, until you write a non-glue symbol. It uses the existing syntax and allows you to specify a wildcard character (*) to indicate where the previous glue text goes in the template. For example, if you write a dictionary entry like this: {&-*} that means change ALL glue entries from this point forward. So when you write {&A} it will change to {&-A} automatically. You can write a glue template entry before you write the glue symbols themselves, and the template will remain in effect until you write some glue entries. The glue template will only be deactivated when you write non-glue entries. Note that this allows you to attach a glue template to another dictionary entry such as "spell{&-*}" so that you would get Q. A. How do you spell your name? It's J-O-N with no H.

Glue templates last only as long as you continue to write glue symbols. As soon as you write something which is not a glue symbol, the glue template will turn off.

Reference Guide 414

Here are some examples of other glue templates you might use: {&*.} (for abbreviations with periods) {&* } (for putting a space between each letter) {&(*)} (for putting each letter in parens for things like Section 27(A)(G)) So as long as you use the template strokes, you only need one alphabet, and using a template feature like this instead of hard-coding a certain number of pre-defined types of glue alphabet formats means that the applications for this feature are limited only by your imagination.

Using glue templates to specify capitalization

If you put a pipe | character anywhere in the glue template, it will force the letters to capitalize. This will allow you to create a single alphabet in **lower-case** letters such as {&a} {&b} {&c} {&d} etc., and you can use templates to determine how they will capitalize as well as what other characters will appear around them. Examples: {&*} {&a} {&b} {&c} becomes abc {&-*} {&a} {&b} {&c} becomes a-b-c {&(*)} {&a} {&b} {&c} becomes (a)(b)(c) {&|*} {&a} {&b} {&c} becomes ABC {&|-*} {&a} {&b} {&c} becomes A-B-C {&|(*)} {&a} {&b} {&c} becomes (A)(B)(C) Trick: {&*}{|} {&a} {&b} {&c} becomes Abc The < symbol can be used to lower-case a glue alphabet. For example, if your glue alphabet is {&A} {&B} {&C} then {&*<}{&A}{&B}{&C} becomes abc. Below is a summary of the various glue templates: TEMPLATE MEANING RESULT OF FOLLOWING WITH {&A}{&B}{&C} {&*} No separation ABC {&-*} Stitch with dashes A-B-C {&*.} Stitch with periods A.B.C. {&(*)} Place in parentheses (A)(B)(C)

Reference Guide 415

TEMPLATE MEANING RESULT OF FOLLOWING WITH {&a}{&b}{&c} {&*} No separation, no capitalization abc {&|*} No separation, capitalized ABC {&*}{|} No separation, initial cap Abc {&-*} Stitch with dashes, no cap a-b-c {&|-*} Stitch with dashes, cap A-B-C {&-*}{|} Stitch with dashes, initial cap A-b-c {&|*.} Stitch with periods, cap A.B.C. {&|(*)} Place in parens, cap (A)(B)(C) {&}(*)} Place in parens, no cap (a)(b)(c)

HIDDEN TEXT
On the Tools menu the Hidden text option (Shift+Alt+F7) opens a dialog which shows all the hidden characters in the current paragraph. This is primarily a tool for software testing and technical support.

You can use the Find function (F5) to search for hidden text or hidden characters. The hidden characters are rather cryptic, and most times you don't need to look at them. However, there are times when it could be useful to be able to find a particular sequence of hidden characters. You can find hidden characters by using the same syntax that is used in the hidden text dialog, such as <2>. Here are the hidden character codes: <1> indicates a steno stroke for the purpose of steno tracking <2> indicates a font change <3> indicates a change of text type <16> lockspace <17> tab <21> literal-case on <22> literal-case off Reference Guide 416

The values 9-15 are reserved for storing values that follow the first three commands (steno/font/type). For steno, it indicates the number of strokes. For the font, it indicates the font number. For the text type, each number represents a different type of text. Here are what the values mean, with the text type given in parentheses. Note that you use these in conjunction with the other hidden characters. For example, searching for <3><11> would search for a user-selected conflict, and <2><14> would search for a font change to font number 6 (found in the User settings/Document/Advanced/Master font table.) <9> - 1 (untran) <10> - 2 (unselected conflict) <11> - 3 (user-selected conflict) <12> - 4 (computer-selected conflict) <13> - 5 (typed-in text) <14> - 6 (scopist text) <15> - 7 (automatic punctuation text) <8><9> - 8 (form field) <9><9> - 9 (redacted) <10><9> - 10 <11><9> - 11 <12><9> - 12 <13><9> - 13 <14><9> - 14 <15><9> - 15 <8><10> - 16 you can calculate larger values thusly: <8-15><10> - 16-23 <8-15><11> - 24-31 <8-15><12> - 32-39 etc. For example, if you had a long font list, and you wanted to search for a font change where the text was being changed to font number 29, that would be <2><13><11>

Reference Guide 417

HYPERKEY AND STANDARD KEY ASSIGNMENTS

You can modify the functions assigned to hyperkeys and standard keys. To access keyboard editing controls, go to User settings (Alt+U) and the Edit tab. From the Edit tab, click the Keyboard button. The Keyboard definitions window appears listing the keyboard assignments for the selected keyboard. Mark the Standard radio button if you want to alter a key assignment on the standard keyboard, or mark the Hyperkeys radio button if you want to alter a key assignment for your Hyperkeys. (By default, the list will show whichever keyboard setting you are using; if you were using Hyperkeys, the Hyperkey assignments will be in the list.)

To change the shortcut keys assigned to an item:

1. In the display area, find and click on the item whose key assignment you want to change. 2. Select the Modify button. The Keyboard command dialog appears, with the selected item shown in the Command field. 3. Click in the Keystroke field. Type the new key or key combination you want to assign to the item. You can assign any combination of the Ctrl, Alt, and Shift keys, plus one character key. To assign a combination, you must simultaneously hold down all keys in the combination. If you want to remove the key assignment for an item completely, do not type any keys in this field. WARNING: Use care when assigning keys. If you select a combination that is already assigned to another item, the new assignment overwrites the original. For example, if you assign the J key to the Play back recording function, the J key will no longer type the letter j, when pressed. 4. Select OK. The Keyboard definitions dialog again becomes active. The modified key assignment will appear in the display area for the appropriate keyboard (standard or Hyperkeys).

To remove an item from the lists of standard keyboard or Hyperkey assignments:

1. In the display area of the Keyboard definitions window, find and click on the item you want to remove. 2. Select the Delete button. The item is removed from the list and the key assignment no longer calls the function. (Note: some key assignments cannot be deleted since they are standard Windows assignments. Examples are Alt+X for exit, Ctrl+C for copy, Delete for delete. For example, if you delete the Delete key, and then close Eclipse, the Delete key will be back in the list the next time you open Eclipse. What you will Reference Guide 418

need to do is select that key and use the Modify button to assign a different command to it.)

Spacebar commands To turn the space bar (Space) into a Ctrl key:
Since most notebook computers come with only one Ctrl key that is not always positioned ideally, Eclipse allows you to turn the space bar (Space) into a Ctrl key, making editing easier. In User Settings | Edit mark the Spacebar commands checkbox. If space bar commands are activated, the space bar needs to be the first key pressed and the last key released. Note: You can re-define the spacebar using the drop-down list in the key redefinition dialog. For this to be effective, you must turn off the Spacebar commands option, which takes over the spacebar completely.

Reference Guide 419

LESSON PLAYER
Help menu | Lesson player is a function designed for teachers in schools to help teach steno theory to students, as well as being used for playing and practicing the tutorial lessons that are installed with Eclipse. The lesson player will ask you to select an .ecl file to be used as a lesson file. It will extract the text and steno from the job and use it as a lesson. When the Start button is pressed it will begin playing the lesson. A realtime connection is established with the steno machine. The upper windows will show the text and steno that the student must write. When the student writes on the steno machine, it will show the stroke the student wrote on the steno simulator window and will show the stroke in the lower-right corner of the lesson window. If the stroke is correct, the lower-left window will show the correct word that the student wrote. It will then advance to the next stroke. If the student makes a mistake, the steno machine will show the incorrect keys outlined in RED and the keys they were supposed to hit outlined in GREEN. They will be required to use the delete stroke to delete it before proceeding. At the end of the lesson, the student will be given a report of mistakes and words per minute. When you return to the Lesson Player, the steno window will preserve its size and position for the lesson player. For the lesson player dialog to remember its position, turn on the anchor button. This lesson player also has mechanisms for showing only one word at a time for beginners, and more advanced modes including hiding the steno and/or the emulator. There is also a paced mode that plays the lesson at a user-defined WPM and the student has to keep up. The Help menu | Install lesson function looks in a subfolder of the Eclipse folder called Lessons to see if there are any lessons installed on the computer generally. If so, it will look there. If not, the user will select one from the Eclipse folder. They are permitted to navigate to a CD, floppy, network, or wherever else they would like in order to find lessons to install. The user can select and install a whole group of lesson files at once. Once a lesson is selected for installation, Eclipse creates a Lessons folder as a subfolder of the users jobs folder. That way, that users individual lessons can be modified by the user and the results will be stored specifically for that user. Once a lesson is installed, the user can select the Lesson player function and it will play one of the lessons from their personal lessons folder. Remember that lesson files are simply JobName.ecl files containing the desired content. The easiest way to create content in a controlled way is to open an empty .not file and use Ctrl+D

Reference Guide 420

(add entry) to add strokes to it manually. Once the note file is complete, translate it and edit the resulting translation by globaling each stroke so that it is the correct word. The functionality of the lesson can be controlled by the instructor who created the lesson by inserting a script command line at the very beginning of the lesson file. You can include several different commands separated by the pipe sign (|) between the commands. These lines can support the extended path syntax such as {PROG}Lessons\userfilename so that they will work no matter where the program is installed. Here are the different commands that can be contained in that script line: TEXT -- This is a command stating that the lesson is a text content lesson and not a steno theory lesson. An example of a text lesson would be Keith Vincent's editing tutorial. U=UserName -- This command will switch to a different user file before playing the lesson. This may be necessary for special lessons that use special settings, macros, etc. S=Speed -- This determines the speed of the lesson. The appropriate choices are as follows: S=-1 -- Setting the speed to -1 creates a word drill lesson that simply displays one word at a time and asks the user to write it on the machine. When the user writes it successfully, that word is removed and a new word appears. S=0 -- Setting the speed to 0 creates a text drill lesson that also displays one word at a time and waits for the user to write it, but it keeps adding the text to the end of what has been written, more like a regular realtime translation. Note that for this and the previous lesson type, no mistakes are allowed. The user must use the delete stroke to correct any error and write the stroke correctly before continuing. S=120 -- (Sample) Setting the speed to ANY number greater than zero creates a speed drill lesson that displays the text at a constant number of words per minute. The student must keep up with the text or they may fall too far behind to see what has come up. In this type of lesson, the user is permitted to make mistakes and keep going without correcting them. NOM -- This specifies that no virtual steno machine will be shown during the lesson. The student will have to be familiar with the positions of the letters on the machine in order to complete the lesson successfully. NOS -- This specifies that no steno should be shown in the lesson. In other words, the word(s) will appear, but the student must remember how to write them. Note that the NOM and the NOS flags can be used at any speed, so the instructor can decide exactly what the progression should be from beginning to advanced and what resources should be available to the student at each stage. Since the behavior of the lesson is determined by these script commands, it is possible to create several versions of a lesson containing identical content, but with different commands

Reference Guide 421

in order to create a progression for the student, for example, from one speed to another. Here are some example lesson command lines:

S=-1 -- Show all steno and the machine and only show one word at a time so the user can concentrate on that one word. S=0|NOM -- Show all the text coming up as it would in realtime and don't show the steno machine; the student should know the keyboard by now. S=0|NOM|NOS -- Show all the text, but don't show the machine or the steno; the student should know how to write the words in the lesson by now. S=40|NOS -- Play back the text at 40 words per minute and see if the student can keep up. Show the steno as a reminder. One other note: After completing a lesson and after reporting the results of the lesson in a window, the lesson player will now record the results in a text file as well. The Lesson player results can be printed out, and each printout will have the student's name on it. In the user's Lessons folder, there will be a file called LessonNameResults.txt (Example, if the lesson is called QADrill160.ecl, the results will be called QADrill160Results.txt.) This results file will record the results each time a student completes the lesson, so it will have a complete record of this student's history for that lesson. You can view this text file in a word processor or text editor of your choice, or if desired you can import it into a spreadsheet and create progress charts and graphs (the information is stored in consistent columns that most spreadsheet programs can easily import.) Here's a sample results file and the meaning of the headings: Crect Incrt CWrds ToWrd Dletd Rpeat Skips JumpF JumpB usWPM toWPM Accrt 6 6 6 3 1 0 6 6 6 6 6 6 3 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 21 34 46 0 0 0 100.0% 100.0% 100.0%

Crect: The number of correct strokes by the user Incrt: The number of incorrect strokes by the user CWrds: The number of correct words by the user (complete dictionary entries, including multi-stroke words.)

Reference Guide 422

ToWrd: The total number of words in the lesson Dletd: The number of strokes that were deleted by the user Rpeat: The strokes repeated by the user (if they back up and re-write a portion without deleting.) Skips: The number of strokes skipped by the user (if they fall behind in a speed drill and have to jump ahead to keep up.) JumpF: The number of jumps forward (skips) JumpB: The number of jumps backward (repeats) usWPM: The words per minute the user wrote toWPM: The original words per minute of the lesson Accrt: The accuracy rate (on non-speed drills, this will always be 100% because the user is required to correct mistakes.) So in this sample file of a simple word drill, we can see that the student has improved from 3 errors to 1 to 0, and has sped up from 21 WPM to 34 WPM to 46 WPM in three tries at the same lesson.

Reference Guide 423

METADICTIONARY SYNTAX AND CODES

The Eclipse translator uses the metadictionary to interpret items in the dictionary, such as what {A} means, or {.}. The metadictionary tells the translator that two is a written number. The Eclipse translator only understands a limited set of commands with a particular syntax. What you are accustomed seeing are actually entirely arbitrary short forms which the metadictionary expands into a form that the translator can understand. For example, you could put -FRPBLGTS = {/"Answer/?PGH} directly into your main dictionary and the translator would know to insert a new Answer paragraph into the document. However, the {A} short form is much easier to work with for most users, and that's where the metadictionary comes in. Items in the metadictionary are essentially text replacement commands. For any dictionary entry, the translator breaks it up into text and commands, and then goes to the metadictionary to find out how to interpret those pieces of text and commands. For example, a dictionary entry that looks like this: TP-FRPBLGTS = {A}of course{,?} consists of three distinct parts. The metadictionary will be asked to interpret each one separately: {A} --> {/"Answer/?PGH} of course --> (no interpretation) {,?} --> {/</"[,][.][:][;][],/?CPC} Even though there's no interpretation for of course, sometimes simple words or phrases do have an interpretation in the metadictionary. For example, dollars is in the metadictionary as {/"%/?VMN} to indicate that it's a monetary value. The metadictionary will keep replacing items until there are no interpretations remaining. For example, a captioner might have a metadictionary containing
{Q}={N}>>{|}

So when that user writes {Q}, this is what the metadictionary does: Pass 1: {Q} --> {N}>>{|} Pass 2: {N} --> {/?PGD} >> --> (no change) {|} --> {/|>/?TPC} So that ultimately, {Q} expands all the way out to {/?PGD}>>{|>/?TPC} In addition to simply replacing one piece of text with another, the metadictionary can also do a simple wildcard search pattern. For example, the following metadictionary entry is used for speakers:

Reference Guide 424

{S:*}={/"Speaker:%/?PGH} The * is the wildcard, meaning that any entry containing {S:AnyText} will match. In the process of replacing the text, it will also find any % symbols that appear and will put the wildcard text in its place, so the replacement would be {/"Speaker:AnyText/?PGH}. So when {S:MR. SMITH} what the translator will ultimately be asked to translate is {/"Speaker:MR. SMITH/?PGH} If there is no wildcard symbol, the % symbol can still be used to indicate the entire text to the left of the = sign. For example, the metadictionary entry dollar={/"dollar/?VMN} dollars={/"dollars/?VMN} cent={/"cent/?VMN} cents={/"cents/?VMN} can be used to indicate monetary value words. However, it's much shorter just to put dollar={/"%/?VMN} dollars={/"%/?VMN} cent={/"%/?VMN} cents={/"%/?VMN} in the metadictionary. If you look at the metadictionary, you will find hundreds of entries like this containing different three-letter codes to identify some special property of the word without having to type the word into the metadictionary twice. The real key to understanding what's in the metadictionary is understanding the long forms of commands that the translator can use directly. Here is a breakdown of the syntax one piece at a time: First, a command is always indicate by braces {command} Each attribute of the command preceded by a slash {/subcmd/subcmd/subcmd/etc..} Each subcommand has a special syntax. Here is a list of the optional subcommands and what they do. Note that these subcommands can appear in any order, though they generally appear in the order shown to make it easier to read. /<text Prior text attribute. What appears after the < symbol is used to determine what text separates the previous entry from the current one. /"text Entry text attribute. What appears after the " symbol is inserted literally into the document. />text Following text attribute. What appears after the > symbol is used to determine what text separates the current entry from the next one. Reference Guide 425

/|cmd Capitalization attribute. This will be followed by one of several symbols to determine what to capitalize surrounding this entry /?cmd Entry type. This will be followed by a three-letter code indicating the specific behavior of the entry So here's a fully populated entry template, in the order specified above {/<text/"text/>text/|cmd/?cmd} Here's a complete breakdown of the special syntax for each subcommand

Prior text
/<text

If you omit this command, the default prior text will be the following text specified by the previous dictionary entry. If nothing has been specified, it will simply be one space. You may use a tilde (~) to indicate a lockspace. If there is no text at all after the < symbol, then that indicates to the translator that there should be no space at all between the current entry and the previous one. The prior text of any entry may be omitted entirely if the entry before it requires that it be followed by the next entry immediately. For example, if preceded by a prefix or a new paragraph command, the next entry will have its prior text omitted. For example, a simplified version of the dash metadictionary entry looks like this: {/<~/"--} which means that the prior text is a lockspace. When the dash appears at the beginning of a paragraph, the prior text (lockspace) is omitted. In addition to containing this optionally omitted text, the prior text command can contain instructions telling the translator to go back and delete translated text from the document. The command for this is the carat symbol (^) and the number of carats indicates how many characters it should delete. {/<^^^ /"test} -- This entry would first delete three characters and then add a space before adding the word "test." The carats are most commonly used conditionally. If the carats are followed by a set of characters in brackets, then the translator only has permission to delete characters that match any of the characters in brackets.

Reference Guide 426

{/<^^^^^[ ~-] /"test} -- This entry would first delete up to five prior characters, as long as they were either spaces, lockspaces or hyphens, then add a space before adding the word "test." This mechanism is normally used with punctuation entries so that one type of punctuation mark has permission to remove a punctuation mark that precedes it. For example, a simplified version of the period metadictionary would look like this: {/<^^^[,?:;~-]/".} -- This entry has permission to delete up to three prior characters, as long as they are each a comma, question mark, colon, semi-colon, lockspace or hyphen. Note that it does not have a space after the closing bracket, because after doing the deletion, there should be no prior text at all between the previous entry and the current entry, which is a period.

Entry text
/"text

The entry text is normally inserted literally into the document. The following entry {/"text} would simply insert the word "text" into the document. The one special command that is available universally in the entry text is conditional text, which is used to determine what the text of the entry should be based solely on the text that precedes it. The syntax is [condition1]text1[condition2]text2 [condition3]text3[]defaulttext Example: {/"[Mr.]Greene[Mrs.]Greene[]green} This entry would add "Greene" if preceded specifically by Mr. or Mrs., and would otherwise add the word "green" instead. Note that empty brackets [] are used to indicate the default text that is used if none of the other conditions are met. Just as the conditional search text is left blank on the last item, the entry text itself can be left blank if one of the conditions should result in no text being added at all. This ability of conditional text is most commonly used to omit punctuation when there is already a punctuation mark present: {/"[,][.][?][],} -- This entry would normally add a comma, but if there is already a comma there, or a period or a question mark, it will add nothing at all. This is the basic principle behind the {,?} "soft comma" dictionary entry.

Reference Guide 427

Finally, there are many specialized entry codes that require a specific syntax for the entry text that is unique to that entry code. These special syntaxes will be covered in the notes for those specific codes.

Following text
/>text

By default, the following text will be a single space. If the > symbol is followed by no text at all, that indicates to the translator that the current entry should be followed immediately by the next entry without any space between them. This is most commonly used by punctuation entries to indicate which entries should be followed by two spaces. For example, a simplified period entry would look like this: {/</"./> } -- This indicates no space before the period and two spaces after it.

The one specialized syntax that can be used in the following text is the < symbol, which is used to indicate that the following text should be a copy of the following text from the previous dictionary entry. This is used by certain types of punctuation and/or commands where the spacing from the previous entry should be carried forward. For example, if the closing quote is written like this {/""/><} Then it will work in both of the following situations: ...go away." Then he left... ...go away" very loudly... In each situation, the quote is followed by the number of spaces indicated by the previous entry. In the first case, the period indicates two spaces. In the second case, the default of one space is used.

Capitalization
/|cmd

The capitalization attribute only has three possible syntaxes: /|> -- this capitalizes the next word Example {/</"./> Reference Guide 428 /|>} -- A period should capitalize the next word

/|< -- this capitalizes the previous word {/"Street/|<} -- This would capitalize the word before "Street." /|- -- this capitalizes the word according to the capitalization rule for the previous entry. See the quote example above. The actual syntax for the ending quote entry should be {/""/></|-} -- This will capitalize the word after the quote only if the entry inside the quote was an item such as terminal punctuation that requests the next word to capitalize.

Entry type
/?CMD

The three-letter entry codes are the most important part of the syntax of the metadictionary. They indicate many special behaviors that the normal syntax cannot indicate. In some cases, they supersede the other commands, and in other cases they augment it in some way. It will be easiest to divide these codes into groups which have similar behaviors

Mode commands
Commands are the simplest types of metadictionary entries. They only ever appear in the form {/?AAA} because they don't add text. They just turn a particular mode on or off. There always three versions of each, with a last letter of O for "on", F for "off" and T for "toggle", which switches it both on and off. CPO, CPF, CPT -- Capitalization mode. This initial caps each word with the exception of words that appear on the non-capping words list. {/?CPO}department of internal affairs{?/CPF} would appear "Department of Internal Affairs." ACO, ACF, ACT -- All caps mode. This capitalizes every letter. {/?ACO}dare{/?ACF} would appear DARE. LCO, LCF, LCT -- Literal case mode. This is used when doing closed captioning or CART where the text is normally in all caps. It is often used for single characters such as CDs or McTAVISH but can also be used for longer words. When outputting in all caps, "{/?LCO}Mr. Jones:{/?LCF} Welcome back." would appear "Mr. Jones: WELCOME BACK." DCO, DCF, DCT -- Downcase mode. This forces every letter into lower case. It's most commonly used for websites and other situations where a normally capitalized word should be lower case. {/?DCO}WWW.SmithandJones.COM{/?DCF} would appear as www.smithandjones.com GLO, GLF, GLT -- Glue mode. In this mode, everything written behaves as a glue entry and sticks together. Primary uses for this are faking out attorneys by telling them that everything

Reference Guide 429

automatically runs together when they talk too quickly, and writing website addresses. {/?GLO}www. cars for sale.com{/?GLF} will appear as www.carsforsale.com

Simple commands
These commands don't have on/off versions because they perform a function immediately when executed which is always the same CCB -- Blanks the closed captioning screen (normally set up as {BLANK}={/?CCB} in the metadictionary) CCF -- Flushes the output to the closed captioning screen (or any other output type) {FLUSH}={/?CCF} ABD -- Deletes (rejects) the last auto-brief suggestion {ABREJECT}={/?ABD} ABN -- Offers a new auto-brief suggestion for the last item {ABNEW}={/?ABN}

File commands
Many codes use the entry text for something other than text to be inserted literally. With these commands, the entry text should be a filename, and Eclipse will perform a function with that file INC -- Include the filename indicated into the current transcript. {/"cover/?INC} would include the cover.ecl file from the block files folder into the transcript at the current location (normally {<*}={/"%/?INC} in the metadictionary.) SND -- Play the sound file indicated in its entirety as a sound effect. {/"slowdown/?INC} would play the slowdown.wav file from the Eclipse folder on your system. Might I suggest a recording of someone who sounds like James Earl Jones saying "Words-per-minute overload. Please speak slowly." CCC -- Closed captioning credit file. Sends the file indicated to the closed captioning output as a standalone credit file. Similar to the INC for doing includes, but instead does the equivalent of a "send script line" on the contents of the file so that it can send pop-on credits.

Paragraph formatting
PGH -- Inserts a paragraph into the document using the following syntax. Note that the entry text must be provided, by the prior text is optional. Using a space as the default terminal punctuation mark is equivalent to requesting no punctuation mark at all. {/<AutomaticPunctuation/"ParagraphName:ParagraphLabel/?PGH} Examples:

Reference Guide 430

{/<./"Answer/?PGH} -- Inserts an Answer paragraph using a period as the automatic punctuation mark instead of the default question mark. {/"Question:Q. ***/?PGH} -- Inserts a Question paragraph using "Q. ***" as the label instead of the default label for a Question paragraph. {PJ:*}={/"Speaker:PROSPECTIVE JUROR %/?PGH} -- Inserts a Speaker paragraph using "PROSPECTIVE JUROR SMITH" as the label when the original dictionary entry is {PJ:SMITH} PGD -- Inserts a default continuation paragraph according to the continuation paragraph setting of the current paragraph type in the document. This does not use the entry text for anything, though you can specify a different default terminal punctuation mark. PGA -- Automatically determines a paragraph type based on the left and right margins requested. If the requested paragraph type does not exist, it will create a new paragraph type in the current document based on the "Normal" paragraph type but forcing it to use the margins indicated. This is used primarily by closed captioners. The syntax of the entry text is "LeftMargin,RightMargin" For example, {/"8,32/?PGA} will find the first paragraph type with a left margin of 8 and a right margin of 32. This is normally implemented in the metadictionary as {H:*}={/"%/?PGA} so that captioners can use entries such as {H:4,28} to force a particular horizontal alignment for the captions. CCP -- Determines vertical position for closed captioning. Technically, this isn't a paragraph format, but it's very similar to the above entry for horizontal positioning. {POS:*}={/"%/? CCP} is the normal metadictionary entry. The entry text is in the form "StartingRow,TotalRows". Example, {/"1,2/?CCP} or {POS:1,2} would set the closed captioning display to start on row 1, with 2 total rows of captions. PRT -- Inserts a print command. The entry text is the exact print command name from the list of print commands. For example, {/"Page break/?PRT} will add a page break. The default entry in the metadictionary is {PRT:*}={/"%/?PRT} ATP -- Sets the default terminal punctuation for the end of the current paragraph in the document to the entry text of this entry. Note that this will be ignored if any terminal punctuation is written between this entry and the end of the paragraph. Example: {/"?/?ATP} will set the terminal punctuation mark at the end of the current paragraph to a question mark. {>?} and {>.} are default metadictionary entries (defined as {/"?/?ATP} and {/"./?ATP} respectively.) These can be used in situations where particular words or phrases make it virtually certain that the current paragraph will end with a punctuation mark other than the normal default punctuation. For example, if you define the strokes for "please state" as "please state{>.}" then the question will ultimately end in a period instead of a question mark, so you will get Q. Please state your name and address. Reference Guide 431

A. Joe Smith, etc... without having to remember to write the period at the end of the Question paragraph.

Fonts
These commands are used for changing the current font or font attribute FNT -- Change the font to the font defined by the current entry text. The entry text must be in the following form. Note that any part of this sequence can be omitted and the system will simply assign zeros to it: FontName,Size,Weight,VerticalOffset,attribute1,attribute2,attribute3,etc. (note that the attributes can be in any order, but every item before that must be filled in or set to zero) FontName is the name of the font as it appears in the windows font dialog, such as "Courier New" or "Arial" Size is the point size as it appears in the windows font dialog, such as "13" Weight is a number indicate normal, bold, light, etc. It can be set to any number along a range. Here is a table of the typical values as defined by Windows (not all fonts support all possible values.) Don't care Thin Extra light Light Normal Medium Semi-bold Bold Extra-bold Black 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900

Vertical offset is the distance that the font moves up and down on the page in twips. Negative numbers move up. This is typically used for superscripts and subscripts. Attributes can be any of the following: italic / underline / strikeout / CRRGGBB CRRGGBB is a color command, where RR, GG and BB represent the red/green/blue values of the color in hexadecimal notation from 00 to FF. If you really want font colors different from the default metadictionary entries for {BLUE}, {RED}, etc., where these values are already filled in for you, you can experiment with the color selector under User settings/Display/Colors. Once you find a color you like, you can convert the Red/Green/Blue values from that dialog to hexadecimal using the Windows/Accessories/Calculator. Reference Guide 432

Example: {/"Arial,13,700,-80,italic,C00FFFF/?FNT} would turn the current font to Arial 13-point, bold, superscripted, italicized and cyan. The font change command is normally defined as {F:*}={/"%/?FNT} so that you can type {F:Symbol,13} for example to get math symbols. FNN -- Select a particular font number from the User settings/Document/Advanced/Master font table. Normally, this is implemented as {FN:*}={/"%/?FNN}. This is usually only useful for changing to different fonts if you have a consistent font table that you use for all documents. The one exception to that is that font number zero is always the default font, so if you need to have a dictionary entry that needs to change to a particular font for a brief piece of text and then change right back again, it's much faster to put {FN:0} than it is to put {F:Courier New,13}, for example. FNA -- Change a font attribute without changing the font size or typeface. This is a shortcut to get underline, italics, bold, superscript and subscript. The entry text determines which attributes to select. The attributes can be any of the following: under / bold / italic / super / sub Example: {/"bold,italic/?FNA} would change the current font to bold and italic. The weight value used for bold, as well as the vertical offset values used for superscript and subscript, are in the Font attributes dialog that you can see if you block mark a piece of text and hit Ctrl+Hyphen. These attribute items are already present in the metadictionary using extreme shortcuts for every possible combination of the lower-case letters u / b / i with an n for normal: {u} is underscore on, {bi} or {ib} is bold and italics, {n} is normal, etc. Note that the superscript on and off commands are somewhat different due to the inclusion of commands to delete spaces. For example, a dictionary entry reading "the{I}Times{n}crossword" should appear "the Times crossword" but "H{subon}2{suboff}O" should appear H2O. Also note that by default, the sub/super metadictionary entries do not change the font size, but it is certainly possible to do so using the font change commands.

Special text
TTL -- The entry text is a title, such as Mr. or Mrs. For example, {/"Sgt./?TTL} would insert "Sgt." into the text and would cap the next word if it is not on the non-capping words list. TAB -- A tab character. {/?TAB} will insert a tab at the current position. Entry text currently does nothing, but may eventually specify the type of tab. PRE -- Entry text is a prefix. {/"text/?PRE} is equivalent to {text^}

Reference Guide 433

SUF -- Entry text is a suffix. {/"text/?SUF} is equivalent to {^suf} GLU -- Text indicates a glue entry. {/"A/?GLU} would be a glue A. The default metadictionary entry for this is {&*}={/"%/?GLU}. Glue entries will stick to each other, but nothing else, making them ideal for various alphabets. Special syntax used by the glue entry is as follows: If the text starts with a hyphen, it will be omitted from the first entry in a sequence of glue entries. If the entry text contains the asterisk (*) it will be considered a template for future glue entries. The glue template may also contain one of the following commands: | -- capitalizes all glue entries using this template < -- lower-cases all glue entries using this template Example: If you write {&<(*)} and then write {&A}{&B}{&C} you will get (a)(b)(c) instead. TIM -- Entry text is a time/date template. The current time/date will be added to the document using the template indicated. The default metadictionary entry for this is {TM:*}={/"%/?TIM} The time/date template values are the same as the ones used by the Edit/Insert/Time date function: Weekdays %a - Abbreviated weekday name (Wed) %A - Full weekday name (Wednesday) Days %d - day of the month (01-31) %#d - day of the month, no leading zero (1-31) %o - ordinal suffix for day of the month (st, nd, rd, th) Months %a - Abbreviated month name (Dec) %A - Full month name (December) %m - Month as a number (01-12) %m - Month as a number, no leading zero (1-12) Years %y - Year, two digits (0-99) %#y - Year, two digits, no leading zeroes (0-99 -- 2000 would appear as "0") %Y or %#Y - Year, four digits (1980-2030)

Reference Guide 434

Times %H - hour, military time (00-23) %#H - hour, military time, no leading zero (0-23) %I - hour, 12-hour format (01-12) %#I - hour, 12-hour format, no leading zero (01-12) %M - minute (00-59) %#M - minute, no leading zero (0-59) %S - second (00-59) %#S - second, no leading zero (0-59) %p - AM/PM indicator (per your Windows time settings) Combined Codes %c - Complete date and time, numeric version (01/25/06 16:17:49) %#c - Complete date and time, long version (Thursday, January 5, 2006 16:17:49) %x - Complete date, numeric version (01/25/06) %#x - Complete date, long version (Thursday, January 5, 2006) %X - Complete time (16:17:49) Other %j - Day of the year, number (001-366) %#j - Day of the year, number, no leading zeroes (001-366) %U - Week, number (00-51) NOTE: week starts on Sunday %#U - Week, number, no leading zero (0-51) %w - Weekday as number (Sunday=0, Monday=1, etc., through Saturday=6) %z or %Z - Time Zone name (Eastern Standard Time)

For example, {TM:%#I:%M:%S %p} or {/"%#I:%M:%S %p/?TIM} will show the current time as Hour:Minute:Second in 12-hour time with no leading zero, followed by a space, then the am/pm indicator according to the computer's current settings under Control panel/Regional and language options.

Text types
These entries all add text to the document. The different codes allow you to define what type of text is being inserted. Note that normal, translated text is indicated with TXT, and if a metadictionary entry contains no three-letter code, TXT is assumed. TXT TXU TXC TXP TXI TXY TXS TXA TXR ---------Normal translated text Untranslate Conflict User-selected conflict Computer-selected conflict Typed-in text Scopist text Automatic text (paragraph auto-punctuation) Redacted text Reference Guide 435

TXF-- Form field Example, {/"(CHECK)/?TXU} would insert (CHECK) into the document as an untranslate and scans for untranslate text would stop on it. When adding a form field, the syntax for the text is as follows:
Symbol

^ Variable-sized field D Delete the line if empty C Capitalize the results L Last field R Right-flush P Prompt for variable contents <filename Use a list file |name Use a variable name label Use a label You should always use the single-character flags in the field first, followed by any flags that contain additional data. For example, to insert an adjustable field that deletes the line if empty, labeled Plaintiff with a variable named PLF, you can use the following: {FL:^D"Plaintiff|PLF}

Result

Number flags
The following codes are all used by the number conversion procedures to identify which words are number-related words and should be processed in a certain way by the number conversion. Other than that, the entry text will be translated normally. Note that most of these will appear in the metadictionary with little or no embellishment, simply as something like foot={/"%/?SMT} VDG -- Digit (3) VOD -- Ordinal digit (3rd) VWO -- Written out number (three) VOR -- Written out ordinal number (third) VGP or VDV -- Grouping/dividing word (and) VMG -- Order of magnitude (thousand/million/billion/etc.) VMO -- Ordinal order of magnitude (thousandth/millionth/billionth/etc.) VDP -- Decimal point VMN -- Monetary unit (dollars/cents/yen) SMT -- Singular measurement (foot) PMT -- Plural measurement (feet) VOS -- Ordinal suffix (st/nd/rd/th) NUM -- Number trigger. The default metadictionary entry for this is {#*}={/"%/?NUM}. The entry text is the number trigger command, which must be one of the following: Reference Guide 436

Q -- Quantity (contains commas) M -- Money. This defaults to the first currency type on the currency list in the number vocabulary. To specify a different type of currency, add the currency shortcut letter as indicated on the currency list. For example, MY would be yen. G -- Generic digits (no commas) R -- Roman numerals r -- lower-case roman numerals O -- Ordinal numbers P -- Phone number S -- Social security number Z -- Zip code T -- Time D -- Date DM -- Date in month/day format (9/8 instead of '98) 1 through 9 -- User-defined template W -- Written-out number N - Digits

Grammar
The internal database automatically determines the parts of speech of each word that translates for the purpose of selecting conflicts and for other grammar analysis. If you find that certain words are not being recognized appropriately, you can add metadictionary entries to tell the software specifically what part of speech it is. For example, a metadictionary entry of texting={/"%/?GRV} tells the translator that "texting" is a verb (which is probably too modern to appear in the database.) Here are the codes: GRN GRV GRJ GRA GRP GRT GRC GRR GRO GRS ----------Noun Verb Adjective Adverb Preposition Article Conjunction Pronoun Contraction Possessive

There are also a few language-specific items for Italian: ITR -- Neutral ITE -- Feminine ITF -- Plural feminine Reference Guide 437

ITM -- Masculine ITP Plural and French: FRM FRS FRP FRF ----Plural noun Singular participle Participle First person participle

Punctuation
Punctuation metadictionary entries are the ones that rely most heavily on the prior text, entry text, following text and capitalization variants in order for the entries to behave as expected. The three-letter codes are used to supply a small amount of additional functionality and to trigger the grammar analysis procedures to recognize the different types of punctuation. TPC -- Terminal punctuation. This ensures that if the entry is told to capitalize the next word, it will always capitalize it even if the next word is on the non-capping words list. Use this for period, question mark and exclamation point, or any other composite punctuation entry that is going to end a sentence. CPC -- Comma punctuation. Use this for commas and semicolons or anywhere else where there is a division between two sentence fragments. DPC -- Dash punctuation. Use this for dashes and ellipses or anywhere else where an interruption can occur abruptly in the middle of a phrase. TGE -- Toggling punctuation. Any punctuation mark that toggles between opened and closed and/or which must have a different character or characters for each instance should use this code. For example, parentheses. For toggling entries, there is a different syntax used for the alternate text: /' instead of /" Example: {/"(/')/?TGE} is the toggling entry for parens. The first time this entry is written, it will translate as ( and be attached to the following word. The second time this entry is written, it will translate as ) and attach to the previous word.

Reference Guide 438

NETWORK INSTALLATION
The location of program and data files on Eclipse is dictated by the settings in the ECLIPSE.INI file which is found in the primary operating system directory. Note that this will usually be C:\WINDOWS, but on a network using thin clients, it will be dictated by the network settings. The installation program for Eclipse asks where you wish to install the program, and by default, that will be the program directory. The default MAIN directory will be a subfolder of that directory called Users. Note that the main directory can be changed arbitrarily, but if you change the program directory, the program files must be relocated to the new directory you choose. The settings appear in the ECLIPSE.INI file as follows. Note that their order and position in the file is not relevant. ProgramDirectory=C:\Program Files\Advantage Software\Eclipse MainDirectory=C:\Program Files\Advantage Software\Eclipse\Users Notes on the different methods: Method 1 is recommended for installations where each client is a full computer with its own hard drive. Method 2 is recommended for thin client installations where each user of the network may need to access other users files, particularly if reporters are going to be doing a lot of job sharing or if they edit each others material, or if scopists use the system frequently and need to have easy access to any reporters files. Method 3 is recommended for thin client installations where each user wishes to keep their own material secure and separate from other users, but it is still necessary to have the data on the server in order for each user to be able to use any of the available client computers on the network.

Reference Guide 439

In this example, each CLIENT machine is a fully independent computer with its own hard drive (C:) and which has access to the file server (For example, a G: drive.) The network administrator could set up a G:\Eclipse\Users directory, for example, and then the Main directory setting could be changed to: MainDirectory=G:\Eclipse\Users Given that setting, any time a new user was created on any one of the clients, it would create a UserName subdirectory in the MainDirectory and would put the UserName.ini file in the MainDirectory, as well. Note that this method also permits ANY client machine to have access to ANY of the user files, making it possible to have a pool of networked computers that any individual user can use and still have access to their own files. Eclipse does have a password feature for the user settings, though this measure is more for convenience than for airtight security. If thorough security is desired, that should be implemented by establishing user-level network directory access rights.

Reference Guide 440

In this example, the network is using thin clients with no hard drives. They use the server for all data storage. It is necessary for each client to have its own independent copy of the Eclipse program files directory. The reason for this is that a number of the program files can be modified by the user (such as the spelling dictionaries) so they cannot be opened by multiple computers simultaneously. In this example, each client computer logs in and has its own program directory. For example, ProgramDirectory=G:\EclProg1 ProgramDirectory=G:\EclProg2 ProgramDirectory=G:\EclProg3 However, for client computer to have access to any users files, it is still permissible to have a single main directory, as in the previous example: MainDirectory=G:\Eclipse\Users This method allows each client to have access to any user files, even though each client has its own copy of the program on the server.

Reference Guide 441

This is another example using thin clients with no hard drives. In this example, each client computer logs in and has its own program directory AND its own data directory. For example, ProgramDirectory=G:\EclProg1 MainDirectory=G:\EclProg1\Users

ProgramDirectory=G:\EclProg2 MainDirectory=G:\EclProg2\Users etc..

Its important to note that depending on the network architecture, these clients may share a single system directory where the ECLIPSE.INI is stored. If that is the case, then it will be impossible to have three different ECLIPSE.INI files. Instead, the desired effect will have to be accomplished by using user-level drive mapping. For example, John and Mary each have an I: drive, but its different for each user. Johns I: drive is mapped to G:\JOHN and Marys I: drive is mapped to G:\MARY. In that, case the ECLIPSE.INI file would read: ProgramDirectory=I:\Eclipse MainDirectory=I:\Eclipse\Users But the data would ACTUALLY be stored in G:\JOHN\Eclipse and G:\JOHN\Eclipse\Users for John and in G:\MARY\Eclipse and G:\MARY\Eclipse\Users for Mary.

Reference Guide 442

NORMALIZATION ENTRIES
Normalization entries are definable in the User Settings | Programming tab. A number of entries are included in the Eclipse.set file by default. When the globaling and dictionary entry adding routines suggest additional entries, it will suggest them according to your own personalized steno theory. Some reporters double consonants; others don't. Some will regularly move certain consonants across stroke boundaries but not others. Some will substitute -F for -S in some situations, some won't. Here is the syntax for a normalization entry: end/start,end/start,end/start,end/start... In other words, you put in the steno characters that can appear at the end of one stroke and the beginning of the next stroke, and you list all of the different variations that the system should consider equivalent. Example: /KR,BG/R,BG/KR This means that if you global PHABG/ROE = macro, it will also suggest PHA/KROE and PHABG/KROE. Here are the three possibilities with the normalized steno in capital letters, just to make it easier to compare against the normalization setting: phaBG/Roe phaBG/KRoe pha/KRoe Note that in order for normalization to work, you MUST specify which central stroke letters are to be used as boundaries. The vowels make the best boundary letters. In order to apply a normalization, BOTH sides of the normalized strokes must be immediately bounded by the boundary letters. Note in the above example how there is an A on the left of the normalized boundary and an O on the right. So the very first entry in the normalization table MUST be a list of the boundary letters, such as AO*EU Why boundaries? Consider the following: B/,/PW,B/PW That WILL be applied to RAB/EUT = rabbit, making RA/PWEUT and RAB/PWEUT. Reference Guide 443

It will NOT be applied to ARB/EPB = ashen, even though it has B/ in it; AR/PWEPB and ARB/PWEPB wouldn't make sense in this case. Using the vowels as boundaries prevents this from happening. It also explains why the normalization table has so many entries that seem duplicative; it's why you need both RS/,R/S,RS/S and LS/,L/S,LS/S even though S/,/S,S/S is already on the list. ALL of the consonant combinations need to be explicitly defined. The Normalize function will support double consonants. So, for example, if you make a global of HRAD/ER = ladder the normalize function used to suggest HRA/TKER = ladder as a different way you could write the same phonetic equivalent. It will ALSO suggest that the d sound could be doubled, which many reporters do, so it will suggest HRAD/TKER = ladder as well.

Reference Guide 444

NUMBER VOCABULARY
In User Settings | Numbers, you can click the Vocabulary setup button to open the Number vocabulary dialog and customize many settings for translation of numbers.

Changing the written word for a number

You can use the Value and Word fields to set the words used to represent numbers. The Value field contains a drop-down menu of numerals with a corresponding menu of words for numerals. When an item is selected from this list, its corresponding written form appears in the Word field. Edit the entry in the Word field to change the translation of the written form of the number.

Setting words and symbols for decimals

Decimal word Decimal word refers to the word typically used to indicate a decimal, such as point in ninety-eight point six. Point is by default used as the decimal word. To change it, go to User Settings | Numbers | Vocabulary setup and change the word used. Decimal symbol Decimal symbol refers to the symbol that is used in decimal numbers. The default symbol is a period, which is what is used in the U.S. To change the symbol, go to User Settings | Numbers | Vocabulary setup and change the symbol in the Decimal symbol field.

Reference Guide 445

Time symbol
The number vocabulary contains a symbol for the times so that you can get translations like 9.45 in places like the UK.

Grouping Word - Setting compound numbers

The Grouping word refers to the word used to join the numbers in a compound number. This is where you let Total Eclipse know what word is used to combine numbers, so you can control how such numbers are translated. For example, one hundred and forty eight can be translated as 148 rather than 100 and 48. If you dont want to have numbers combined in this fashion, uncheck the Process and as a number field in User Settings | Numbers.

Ordinal suffixes
To set the suffix used with ordinal numbers (st, rd, th) go to your User Settings | Numbers | Vocabulary setup and the Ordinal suffixes field. Edit any suffix in this field as needed. Note that the suffixes are presented in numerical order, and the first corresponds to ordinals ending in a zero (the zeroth place) such as tenth, 50th, and millionth). Subsequent suffixes are for ordinals ending in 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, and 9. A special exception stops constructions like one second and one fifth from translating as 12th and 15th, no matter what the settings. If Eclipse sees the word for (1)(one) immediately before an ordinal number word, it will keep them separate.

Automatic [Month(ordinal), year] format

The translator can use a format for the number conversion which handles a sequence of undifferentiated digits following a month name. Note that in order to use this, you will have to change your metadictionary entries for your month names to use /"DY or /"DO instead of /"N following the month name. If you use DY, it will use "day, year" format, such as "May 3, 2010." If you use DO, it will use "ordinal day, year" format, such as "May 3rd, 2010." Using this format, you can write a sequence of anywhere from 1 to 6 digits following a month name, and the system should determine what format you want based on the number of digits and the contents: X --> May X XX --> May XX XXX --> May X, 'XX XXXX --> if XXXX starts with 19 or 20,then May AABB, otherwise May AA, 'BB XXXXX --> May X, XXXX Reference Guide 446

XXXXXX --> May XX, XXXX

Currency setup
Total Eclipse is set to handle dollars and some additional currencies. If you need to work with other currencies, you can set them in the Currency setup field (User Settings | Numbers | Vocabulary setup). Currency formats are associated with a trigger that can be entered as a dictionary definition. To use triggers, write a number and add an additional stroke, the trigger, for the defined currency. An entry in the Currency setup field consists of a single line with six parts. Each part is separated by a forward slash. You can add a new currency format by typing on an empty line, or you can edit an existing format. The dollars and cents currency formats look like this: D/dollar/dollars/$^/1.0 C/cent/cents/^ cents/0.01/! Explanation of the first example: D / Capital letter that is added to the standard dictionary entry, {#M}, to indicate the specific currency format. Using the above example, a stroke defined in the dictionary as {#MD} would indicate the currency format for dollars. NOTE: If you define a dictionary entry as just {#M}, Total Eclipse will use the first template entry in the Currency setup field to translate the number. Singular form of the currency dollar / Plural form of the currency dollars / $^ 1.0 / Symbol for the Indicates if the currency is a particular primary unit and if currency. The secondary units are carat (^) displayed as decimal indicates values. For example, the where the U.S. dollar has a value of number is in 1.0 because it is the primary relation to the unit of currency and its currency secondary units (cents) are symbol. If the displayed as a decimal. To symbol indicate a cent, which is not follows the a primary unit and wouldnt number, place have secondary units the carat (^) presented as decimals, enter before the 0.01. A primary currency symbol. If the unit without (common) symbol secondary units, such as precedes the Japans Yen, is entered as 1 number, (as in (no decimal) $1.00) place the carat after the symbol Reference Guide 447

An exclamation at the end of the line (shown in the second example above) indicates that the specified currency is terminalno additional currency units can appear. For example the dollar is not terminal because it may be followed by a cents value. The cent is terminal because no numbers representing money would follow a cents value. Likewise, the Yen is terminal. Note: if you prefer turning "five cents" into $0.05 or $.05, you can accomplish this by setting the cents symbol to $0.^ or $.

PARAGRAPHS: BEHAVES AS.. AND AUTOMATED PUNCTUATION

Behaves as: Fixed:
The fixed paragraph behavior results in no attributes being automatically assigned to the paragraph. A paragraph set to the fixed paragraph behavior has the following characteristics.

The first word of the paragraph is not automatically capitalized. The paragraph does not receive automatic punctuation. All punctuation errors in the paragraph are ignored by spell check. The label color for the paragraph is determined by the color settings for Other Paragraph Types Multi-page fonts are not applied to fixed paragraphs.

Fixed paragraphs are often used in the creation of Title and Certificate pages. The following is an example of how fixed paragraphs can be used. Attorney for the Defendant David Jones Jones & Jones, Attorneys at Law

Normal:
This is a basic text paragraph. A paragraph set to behave as a normal paragraph will have these characteristics

The first word of the paragraph is automatically capitalized. A normal paragraph gives and receives a period as terminal punctuation. The label color for normal paragraphs is determined by the color settings for Other Paragraph Labels. Multi-page fonts are applied to normal paragraphs.

Reference Guide 448

Continuation paragraphs are often set to behave as the normal paragraph type.

The following paragraph is an example of a normal paragraph. We went down to the pier to smoke a cigarette. We were not there very long when we heard someone walking towards us. It was late, so we were scared.

Question:
A question paragraph is the beginning paragraph in a series of paragraphs, which form a question. A paragraph set to behave as a question will have these characteristics.

The first word of the paragraph is automatically capitalized. The paragraph receives automatic punctuation. The type of punctuation the paragraph receives is dependent upon the type of paragraph immediately following it. If it is followed by an Answer paragraph or Colloquy, it receives a question mark as terminal punctuation. In all other cases, the paragraph receives a period as terminal punctuation. Two paragraphs in a row that are set to behave as Questions, will cause a Double-Question error in spell check. The label color for the paragraph is determined by the color settings for Question Paragraph Labels. Multi-page fonts are applied to the paragraph.

The following paragraph is an example of a Question Paragraph: Q. Would you state your name for the record?

Answer:
An answer paragraph is the beginning paragraph in a series of paragraphs, which are an answer to a question. If a paragraph is set to behave as an answer paragraph, it will have the following characteristics. The first word of the paragraph is automatically capitalized. The paragraph gives and receives automatic punctuation. It adds a question mark to the previous paragraph, while receiving a period as terminal punctuation. If necessary, the paragraph will be changed to Colloquy according to the Change Answer to _________ feature rules.

Reference Guide 449

Two paragraphs in a row that are set to behave as answer paragraphs will result in a Double-Answer error in spell check. The label color for the paragraph is determined by the color settings for Answer Paragraph Labels. Multi-page fonts are applied to the paragraph.

The following paragraph is an example of an Answer paragraph: A. My name is Jerry Smith.

Colloquy:
Colloquy is the beginning paragraph in a series of paragraphs spoken by a single, named speaker. A paragraph set to behave as Colloquy will have the following attributes. The first word of the paragraph is automatically capitalized. The paragraph gives and receives automatic punctuation. If the paragraph immediately prior to colloquy is a question paragraph, then that paragraph receives a question mark as terminal punctuation. All other paragraphs immediately prior to colloquy receive a period. A colloquy paragraph followed by an answer will receive a question mark as terminal punctuation. Otherwise, paragraphs set to behave as colloquy automatically receive a period as terminal punctuation. All features in the program related to speaker names rely on the current paragraph being set to behave as colloquy. When adding or editing colloquy paragraphs using F2 or F8, a label dialog will automatically appear, allowing you to choose a speaker name. Colloquy also triggers the translator to require a By-line before the next paragraph. Two colloquy paragraphs in a row with the same label causes a Double Speaker error in spell check. The label color for a paragraph set to behave as colloquy is determined by the color settings for Speaker Paragraph Labels. The label is always followed by the speaker separator. The speaker separator is designated under User Settings | Document | Advanced. Multi-page fonts are applied to colloquy.

The following paragraph is an example of Colloquy. THE COURT: Reference Guide 450 We will recess for one hour.

Parenthetical:
A parenthetical paragraph is a parenthetical statement large enough to require its own paragraph. The first word of a parenthetical paragraph is automatically capitalized. Parenthetical paragraphs give and receive a period as automatic terminal punctuation. A parenthetical paragraph triggers the translator to require a By-line before the next paragraph. The label color for parenthetical paragraphs is determined by the color settings for Other Paragraph Labels. Multi-page fonts are applied to parenthetical paragraphs.

The following paragraph is an example of a Parenthetical paragraph. (Thereupon, Plaintiff's Exhibit 1 was marked for identification.)

Header:
A header is text at the beginning of each following page. The first word of a header is not automatically capitalized. A paragraph followed by a header receives a period as automatic terminal punctuation. A header does not automatically receive terminal punctuation. Punctuation errors in headers are ignored by spell check. The label color for headers is determined by the color settings for Other Paragraph Labels. Multi-page fonts are not applied to headers.

The following paragraph is an example of a header. This is a rough-draft copy

Footer:
A footer is text at the end of each following page. The first word of a footer is not automatically capitalized. Footer paragraphs do not receive automatic terminal punctuation. However, any paragraph followed by a footer will receive a period as automatic terminal punctuation. Reference Guide 451

Punctuation errors in footers are ignored by spell check. The label color for footers is determined by the color settings for Other Paragraph Labels. Multi-page fonts are not applied to footers.

The following paragraph is an example of a footer. Greater Dallas Reporting Services

Case Caption:
Text that is enclosed on the right side by a border character is a case caption paragraph. A caption box is an example of this. The first word of a case caption paragraph is not automatically capitalized. The case caption paragraph does not automatically receive punctuation, but it does add a period to other paragraph types. Punctuation errors in case caption paragraphs are ignored by spell check. The label color for case caption paragraphs is determined by the color settings for Other Paragraph Labels. Multi-page fonts are not applied to case caption paragraphs. Case Caption paragraphs are often used on Title pages.

The following is an example of how case caption paragraphs may be used. The State of New York vs. Jimmy Jones ) ) )

Reference Guide 452

PHONETICS TABLE
In the User Settings | Programing tab you can open the Phonetics table, which you can edit to customize for your preferences. See page 462 for more on editing the Phonetics table . The phonetics table sorts by steno, making it unnecessary for you to put phonetics in the table in the proper order. Eclipse sorts entries in such a way that they will apply properly no matter what. It sorts when you enter and leave the window, much as the metadictionary or the prefix/suffix table does. Note that if you wish to create right-side phonetics it is necessary to use the hyphen to dictate whether the keys indicated are on the right side of the keyboard.

The table lists the steno stroke, followed by the possible pronunciations, the pipe symbol (|), and the intelligent phonetics (all possible spellings, separated by commas). When you have selected Intelligent Phonetic type, and Phonetic untranslates, Eclipse will check all the possibilities in the phonetics table to translate the stroke.

The default phonetics table allows typing keys on the virtual steno machine dialog box to be customized from there. Note that there are duplicates that differentiate between the phonetic entry and the keyboard entry. Most of them are the same, but there are a few others, for example: -FPLT=fmt|fmt,fment -FPLT=.|. Reference Guide 453

-RBGS=rks|rks,rction -RBGS=,|,

Steno emulator shortcut letters

When using the steno machine dialog, you can hit shortcut letters such as d and the TK keys will be pressed down. Eclipse looks at the phonetic table under User settings | Programming | Phonetics to determine what the equivalencies are. For example, if you have TK=d|d in the phonetic table, the example given above will still work. This feature is available for non-English and non-stenographic keyboards, as well as being completely customizable. Note: If you get odd results, such as AOU for the 'u' key, it's because you have more than one basic phonetic that results in a 'u'. For example, you may have the following: AOU=u|iew,ew,yoo U=u|u,ou,uh If that is the case, you may not be able to predict which one it will choose. You must differentiate by putting a special marker on the one that you do NOT want it to use: AOU=u*|iew,ew,yoo U=u|u,ou,uh The *, in this case, will mark it as a special exception that should NOT be regarded as the general rule for the letter 'u'. A set of default phonetics with these marks already in place is in the Eclipsecat.set file.

Reference Guide 454

PHONETICS, MULTI-LAYERED
This feature exists so that pre-made theory phonetics tables can be created and distributed to users. It is possible to add additional layers to the phonetics table that pre-process untranslates before the basic phonetics are used. The method for doing so is to place any number before the table entry, followed by a colon. You can have several layers by using several different numbers. The numbers do not need to be consecutive. All of the numbered layers will be processed in order, with the non-numbered layer being the final one. Here's a short sample multi-layered phonetics table with just a few entries in it: 10:TPH-=kn|kn 10:OB=ob|ob 10:OT=ot|ot 20:TPH-=gn|gn 20:OEPL=ome|ome 20:AO=u|u TPH-=n|n PW=b|b AEU=ai|ai OB=ob|ob -L=l|l -S=s|s The numbers 10 and 20 were selected (rather than 1 and 2) so that if additional layers are required that either go before the first one or between the two, you can go back and add layer 5 or 15, still with room between, without having to renumber the existing layers. Here's how it works. In order for an untranslate to be converted into phonetics, ALL of the keys in the stroke must be accounted for in the phonetics table. Each layer will attempt to process the phonetic untranslate independently, and if it is possible for the ENTIRE stroke to be processed using ONLY the phonetics in the CURRENT LAYER, then the phonetics processor will use that particular phonetic.

Reference Guide 455

If an untranslate cannot ENTIRELY be converted to phonetics using the current layer only, it will drop down to the next layer and START OVER from the beginning of the untranslate. So, with the multi-layered phonetics table above, here are some results that you would get: TPHOB --> knob (layer 10) TPHOT --> knot (layer 10) TPHOEPL --> gnome (layer 20) TPHAO --> gnu (layer 20) TPHAEUL --> nail (default layer) PWOB --> bob (default layer) You will note that the same phonetic sequence (TPH-) can be interpreted several different ways depending on which layer is able to process the entire stroke. Note also, that some phonetics can and should appear in multiple layers even though they aren't any different (OB) For the purposes of illustration, here are some strokes that produce undesirable results using this small sample phonetics table: TPHOBS --> nobs (default layer. There's no -S in layer 10, so it can't use that layer to process this stroke.) TPHOES --> TPHOES (there's no OE in ANY layer, so it can't process this stroke at all. Again, that's why the default layer must have, at the very least, every individual key represented.) PWOT --> PWOT (Even though there's a PW in the default layer and an OT in layer 10, this stroke cannot be processed because a stroke MUST be able to be processed entirely using only the phonetics in a single layer.) These simple examples are not intended to be used as-is. If you were to attempt to resolve all possible n\kn\gn phonetic representations using multi-layered phonetics, you would probably find yourself making a phonetics table almost as large as a dictionary, because you would essentially be making specific words. Where this feature is most useful is with steno theories that are designed from the ground up to be dictionary-free or close to it, where the key combinations are intended to represent spellings rather than just sounds. Some of these theories use key combinations that are context-dependent, where certain combinations of keys represent one spelling when used with certain combinations of other keys, and other spellings when used with other combinations of other keys.

Reference Guide 456

PROGRAMMING TAB - USER SETTINGS

On the User settings | Programming tab you will find settings for advanced customization of Eclipse.

Note: All lists on the Programming tab open in windows that can be resized and zoomed to view more of the items on the list. You can search for text within the list using F5 or the Find button, and Ctrl+L to move to the next instance. With a list open, press the Add button to make a whole new item. Press the Modify button to edit the item the cursor is on. (Deleting is done by simply removing the text.) When you press Add or Modify, Eclipse opens a dialog appropriate to the type of information with which you are working. Note that some of the data types have no additional dialogs (for example, Normalization..., which really can't be simplified, and the list of Common words or valid punctuation and double-word strings).

Autoreplacements
This list consists of two text strings that are separated by an equal sign. When the string on the left is typed in a document, Total Eclipse automatically replaces it with the string on the right. For example, the entry, "adn=and" would automatically correct "adn" with "and". Another way to use autoreplacements is to create abbreviations that make typing more efficient (e.g. DOJ=Department of Justice).

Reference Guide 457

Typeover tracking
Using this feature, you can type over words during editing and have the system suggest what you might want to type over it based on your previous typeovers of the same word. If you press N, type over a word, and hit enter, the system will remember the word you typed over and new word you typed, and suggest it the next time you begin to type over that word in the future. If you start typing something different from the suggestion, the suggestion will immediately disappear. If you want to accept the suggestion, just hit enter and the suggestion will be accepted and the original word replaced. See page 148 for details. For a list of the words that have been stored, go to User settings | Programming and edit the Typeover tracking list. You can Edit the list; and in the Modify dialog, there is an option to Lock the entry permanently to prevent it from being automatically overridden by further typing.

Reference Guide 458

WARNING: If you are an inexperienced user, you should not attempt to edit the entries on the following lists without expert guidance.

Metadictionary
The metadictionary contains entries with complex dictionary formatting, which simplify the entries you make in standard dictionaries by specifying how special terms (e.g. months, measurements, numbers, and functions) are to be translated.

When you choose Modify, the Metadictionary entry dialog opens, which allows you to develop or edit metadictionary entries without worrying about the complicated syntax, which is handled for you. (For a detailed explanation of the Metadictionary syntax and codes, see Metadictionary Syntax and Codes, beginning on page 424 in the Reference Guide.) Original: This is where you type the original text that gets replaced with the metasyntax. Text/Command: Select whether the original text is a command or not. For example, the word "dollars" is simply a piece of text in the metadictionary that's defined as currency. The {Q} is a command that acts as a question paragraph. Note that for commands, you only need to type the contents, such as Q. The braces are added for you when it makes the final entry. Add wildcard: When preparing the original text, use this button to tell the system where some variation is allowed in what the actual dictionary entries look like. Pressing this button is the same as typing a * symbol. For example, in the speaker entry, S:* indicates that the

Reference Guide 459

speaker name can be anything and it still counts as match and will apply the appropriate metasyntax. Replacement listing of commands: The reality is that the original item can be replaced with a SEQUENCE of items, not just a single item. For example, May={/"May}{/"N/?NUM} means that the word May will be replaced with a command that simply adds the text May followed by a number trigger that changes the following number to numerals. That's two separate commands, so the replacement has to be a list. Move up/Move down: Use these buttons to reorder the items on the list. When translating, the items are applied from top to bottom (which will become left to right in the actual metadictionary.) Add/Delete: Use these buttons to add a new item or delete an item. Note that when adding, press the Add button FIRST, then change the parameters in the controls below. Current replacement command: This control group modifies the currently selected command in the list. Select the command you wish to change and then make modifications in these controls. Entry Type: This drop down list contains all the three- letter entry type codes. If you pick an item that requires a very specific syntax for the text of the meta-entry, an additional dialog will appear that's appropriate for that entry type. For example, if you pick PGH for paragraph type, it will immediately give you a list of paragraphs to choose from and will add the paragraph name as the text. It also works for font, attribute, number trigger, and a few others. Left Boundary: This list box asks what to do with the left boundary (there's another one for the right). Boundary text is the text that appears before or after an entry, but doesn't count as part of the entry itself. You can either leave it as the default (normally a space), delete the left boundary (for punctuation, etc.) or force a particular left boundary. If you wish to force a left boundary, type it in the box immediately to the right of the list. delete up to N characters: Sometimes, you want to actually remove some of the previous entry before applying the current one. For example, a period might be permitted to actually delete the comma that comes before it. If you have the left boundary set to delete, you can specify the maximum number of characters here, and in that case, the text box is the specific characters that are allowed to be deleted. Text: This is what actually translates, in most cases. For many special entry types, however, this is further code to say what translates. For example, with paragraph and font entries, this is the paragraph name or the font name, etc.

Reference Guide 460

Use WildCard: If you have used a wildcard in the Original box above, you can take a copy of what the original entry looked like and insert it as part of the final entry. Hitting this button is the same as typing the % character. Example: Original: S:* Text: Speaker:% uses whatever is typed in place of the * as the paragraph label. Note that if there is no wildcard specified and the original is a text entry, this can be used to represent the entire original text. Example: Original: dollars Text: % simply saves having to retype "dollars" in the text item when identifying the word dollars as a monetary value word. Lockspace: Types a lockspace in the text. It's the same as typing a tilde ~. Alternate text: Toggling entries alternate from text to alternate text each translation, allowing the same entry to be used for ( and ), etc. It's only used when selecting TGE from the entry type list. Add condition: The text box itself can contain conditions describing what text to translate based on the text that comes before it. If you wish to add a condition to the text, fill in the following boxes and THEN press the Add condition button. If preceded by: The condition must specify what text must precede the entry in order for the specific text to be translated. Leave this blank to indicate that the replacement text should always translate. translate as: The text that should translate only if the conditional text is present. Example: If you were creating a .) entry you might want it to check if there's already a period there, and if so, only translate ) but otherwise, translate .) entirely. To do that, put preceded by: . Translate as: ) and press Add condition then leave preceded by blank, put in Translate as: .) and press Add condition again. Right boundary: The right boundary is very much like the left. You can leave it as the default, delete it entirely, force a particular right boundary in the box provided (such as two spaces that might follow a terminal punctuation mark), and there's a fourth option: Use previous right boundary. That means to use whatever the right boundary of the previous entry was. For example, a quote entry should probably use whatever the appropriate right boundary for the previous entry was, so if the previous entry was a terminal period, the quote would be followed by two spaces. If the previous entry was a regular word, it will be followed by one space. Left case change: There's an option for Default case, Cap Previous, Uncap previous to determine if the capitalization of the previous word should be changed by this entry. Reference Guide 461

Right case change: A separate listbox determines whether to leave the default case, Cap Next, Uncap Next, or Cap through. Using Cap through is similar to the Use previous right boundary function: It takes the capitalization instructions from the previous entry and uses them to apply to the next entry without the current one interfering. Again, useful for quotes, parens and other items that should not interrupt the grammatical flow. One final note: There's an item on the Entry type list for Unknown which is used in cases where the replacement listing of commands contains items that are, themselves, words or commands that have to be processed through the metadictionary parser a second time in order to make sense. For example, a metadictionary entry {Q}={.}{N}>>{|} that a captioner might create doesn't contain ANY metadictionary syntax at all. It's simply a list of four unknown commands: {.} {N} >> {|} because each one of these (except >>, which is just straight text) will have to be processed through the metadictionary a second time to actually do anything. Whenever the Entry type is set to Unknown, the current item on the list will simply be a literal, direct copy of whatever appears in the Text box with no additional parsing or adding of any of the other items in the dialog. It's a perfectly valid way to create metadictionary entries by building on existing ones. It's just helpful to know that this dialog will only help with the process of ordering them. Even if you never intend to make your own programming table entries for any of the items in the programming tab, it's worthwhile to explore some of the items using these dialogs to see if they give you a clearer understanding of what some of these things are doing. For others, I hope these dialogs will help with the process of managing your own customizations of the Eclipse software.

Phonetics table
The entries on this list determine how the Intelligent phonetics feature attempts to spell untranslates. See page 453 for details on Intelligent phonetics. When you choose to Modify an entry in the Phonetics table, the Phonetics dialog opens for editing the steno phonetics for phonetic untranslates and the steno keyboard simulator.

Reference Guide 462

Here are the controls: Steno: You can enter the steno keys that make up a particular phonetic element by pressing the Steno button. Basic spelling: Enter the phonetic text equivalent for the keys in question. Use with keyboard: If the basic phonetic equivalent is a single letter, you have an opportunity to decide if that letter should be used as a keyboard equivalent for the steno keyboard simulator. For example, for the phonetic TPH=n, you would want "use with keyboard" checked. If you use the -Z key to add an "s" at the end of some strokes, you might have -Z=s, but if you press the "s" key on the computer keyboard, you probably don't want the Z to appear, so uncheck "Use with keyboard." Intelligent spellings: Enter the various ways that phonetic element can be spelled, separated by commas as described in the dialog. Example: For TPH, you might enter n,kn,gn Add silent 'e': Pressing this button will add a silent "e" to the intelligent spellings if you're providing the spellings for long vowel sounds. Note that this is the same as typing a capital "E" into the list itself.

Prefix and suffix definitions

This list is used by Total Eclipse to apply prefixes and suffixes during translation. The dialog organizes it and breaks it down into manageable steps. Unlike the suffix rules, these items are optional, and will only be finalized if the resulting word is seen as correctly spelled by the spelling checker.

Reference Guide 463

Prefix/Suffix: Select the appropriate item and type the text of the suffix or prefix in the adjacent box, such as ing or pre with no special symbols needed. Possible spelling variations: This control group manages all of the variations for a particular prefix or suffix. The list box will contain the list of each variation in the order they will be applied from top to bottom. Move Up/Move Down: Use these buttons to reorder the highlighted item on the list. Add/Delete: You can delete an item or add a new one. Note that you hit the add button first and THEN make the changes in the other controls: Double final letter of root: That will cause this spelling variation to double the last letter of the root word. Insert Text: Type the text that will actually be inserted, such as "ing" or "ally" Delete up to N letters: Some variations will delete part of the root word. Specify the number of letters to attempt to delete. of any kind: Select this if any letters can be deleted if any of: Select this if the letters must belong to a set of specified letters (example: if it can delete an s or d, just check this and enter sd as the text.)

Reference Guide 464

if equal to: Select this if the letters must exactly fit a pattern. (example: the s suffix should be able to delete fe and replace it with ves, but not ef or ee or ff, so it must be exactly equal to fe.) this text: Specify the set of letters or the pattern of letters that are permitted to be deleted.

Integral prefix and suffix steno definitions

Editing the integral prefixes and suffixes allows the globaling procedures to suggest additional entries containing extra keys that can represent prefixes and suffixes. The syntax is this: wordpart=NewStenoKeys,ExistingStenoCheck When you choose to Modify an entry in the Integral prefix and suffix steno definitions table, the Integral prefix/suffix dialog opens: Suggest this prefix/suffix: Select one of these items depending on whether or not you want it to suggest a prefix or suffix. Steno: Select the key or keys on the steno keyboard that are used to include this suffix in a stroke, such as -G for ing Keys: For a particular suffix, select which keys on the keyboard should or should not be present in order to make it a valid suggestion. None are present/at least one is present: Instruct the system whether or not the keys are required or prohibited. For example, the system should probably NOT suggest the -G for ing if the -S is already present, because -GS is usually a tion ending. Likewise, you may want to define that -Z can be used to represent {^s}, but only if the -D IS present. For details on the functioning of integral prefixes and suffixes, see page 504.

Normalization table for steno definitions

Normalization entries are definable in the User Settings | Programming tab. You can edit this table so that when the globaling and dictionary entry adding routines suggest additional entries, it will suggest them according to your own personalized steno theory. For details, see page 443.

Reference Guide 465

Steno filter regular expressions and Text filter regular expressions

If you have a regular expression you want to be able to use over and over again, and/or if you want to design your own customizable search, you can edit these lists. For example, if you frequently do searches for speakers, you could make an item that reads: Speaker=\{S:{}\} And then to search for {S:MR. SMITH} you could just select "Speaker" from the list and type MR. SMITH in the text box. The regular expression builder dialog opens, which is the same dialog that appears when you do a custom search. You can build your custom search here and it will be inserted into the table for future use. For details on Regular Expressions, see pages 367 and 480.

Suffix spelling rules

The suffix spelling rules are rules that will be applied to word+suffix combinations if no spelling variation specified in the prefix/suffix rules results in a correctly spelled word according to the current spelling dictionaries. The rules will be applied from beginning to end until a match is found, so the entries will not sort when you add them; you may wish for certain rules to appear in a particular order. When you choose to Modify an item on the list, the Suffix spelling rule dialog will open.

The controls are:

Reference Guide 466

ends with/is equal to: Select based on whether you're specifying an exact match or simply a word ending, then type the word or word ending in the box provided. and one of: This button will insert the set of characters that you type in the box, so type first and then press the button. For example, if you want the next part of the word ending to be any vowel, you could type "aeiou" and hit the "and one of" button to add [aeiou] to the root. and the suffix starts with: This is where you type the beginning of the suffix itself. Note that you cannot require an exact match, because virtually all suffixes can be augmented (ing: ingly, ings, inged. ment: mented, ments, etc.) and they'll still follow the same rules when augmented. delete N letters from the root word: Set this to the number of letters to delete. Note that unlike the prefix/suffix rules, which cross-check the spelling checker, this deletion is not conditional or optional. If the prior conditions are met, it will ALWAYS delete that number of letters and add suffix: This is where the suffix itself is added. MOST of the time, you will want to use the following button: Copy original suffix: This simply types a % in the "add suffix" box. That represents a copy of the original suffix, so if the original was "ing" this will be "ing" and if the original was "ingly" this will be "ingly" so that there's never a mismatch. Note that you can add additional letters on either side of the %, such as e% to turn "s" into "es" For details on the Suffix spelling rules, see page 508 in this Reference Guide.

Spelling exceptions
This lists all punctuation strings and all permissible double words (the double words will appear in all caps, such as THAT). If you edit these entries, be careful about spaces. For example, there might be an entry for dash that would have [space]--[space][space] and those spaces will appear in the editor as you move the cursor around, but they won't be immediately apparent just looking at the list.

Common words
The words you list here will be excluded from the multi-page concordance index.

Slop Strokes
The slop strokes feature in the programming tab allows you to define single stroke replacements such as: STKPWR=STKPWHR If the translator sees the original STKPWR stroke, it will change it immediately to the appropriate replacement STKPWHR before even passing it to the translator. The steno window in the document will show STKPWHR, the proper stroke, not what you actually wrote. Note Reference Guide 467

that this feature only works with individual, single strokes. It will not replace multiple strokes. If you have certain categories of slop strokes that might be used in multi-stroke dictionary entries, those entries will translate correctly. For example, if you have TRAPBLS=TRAPBS in the slop stroke table, and you have TRAPBS/HRAEUT = translate in your dictionary, if you write TRAPBLS/HRAEUT, you will still get "translate." The slop stroke dictionary feature won't do that. Not all slop strokes would go into this table. For example, slop stroke dictionary entries would be used in a case where a slop stroke is only recognizable in context with other strokes. For example, you might define STPHAO STPH as {=STPHAO STPHAO}, but you would not want to put STPH=STPHAO in the slop strokes programming table. The Slop strokes table can also work with partial matches. If you put in a slop stroke of STKPWR=STKPWHR, it will only replace that exact stroke, though it will work in dictionary entries containing multiple strokes. However, if you put in an entry of &STKPWR=STKPWHR, it will replace that key sequence anywhere it appears in any stroke, so even a single stroke STKPWROBG would be replaced with STKPWHROBG. Use this feature carefully. If you were to put in &RBS=RBGS to fix misstroked commas, you would never again be able to write word like "curbs" or "suburbs" because ALL strokes containing RBS would be changed to RBGS.

Quoted text paragraph map

Under User settings | Programming there is an item called Quoted text paragraph map. The format for the entries is to put the unquoted paragraph name on the left, =, and its quoted equivalent on the right. It is used to define paragraphs that are changed to their quoted or unquoted equivalent using Format | Quote and Unquote. If you want quoted paragraphs (particularly speaker names) to include a symbol or other sequence of text before the name when it is quoted, add the text as Symbol=" The default map contains the following entries: Symbol=" Answer=Answer (quoted) Reference Guide 468

Question=Question (quoted) Speaker=Speaker (quoted) answer Paragraph=answer Pgh (quoted) question Paragraph=question Pgh (quoted) speaker Paragraph=speaker Pgh (quoted) This feature makes it possible for you to come up with your own quoted paragraph mappings for any paragraphs that might become part of a quoted portion of a transcript.

Auto-brief ineligible words

In the User Settings | Programming tab there is an item called Auto-brief ineligible words. The default list contains many common words which will not be used when creating autobriefs.

One exception to this is that words on the User settings | Translate tab | Non-capping words list (that should not be capitalized when title case is used, e.g., in as in Alice in Wonderland) will be permitted in the midst of phrases, even if they appear on the ineligible words list. You can add additional words that you would like auto-brief to skip, or delete words from the list if you would like them to appear in your auto-briefs.

Auto-brief steno theory

In the User Settings | Programming tab there is an item called Auto-brief steno theory. If there are certain combinations of keys you never want to see in an auto-brief, or particular keys you want briefs always to contain, you can put that combination of keys on the list. Disallowing combinations of keys You can disallow as many combinations of keys as you like by placing a minus sign before them. For example, your list might contain the following:

Reference Guide 469

-* -TD -TSD -SZ -SDZ This list disallows ANY stroke containing an asterisk at all if you don't like the asterisk suggestions. For users without wide -DZ keys on the steno keyboard, this also disallows any stroke containing the D or Z and the key immediately to the left of it. Another use for this feature: If you put "- " (minus and space, without the quotes) then you are disallowing any steno sequence that contains a space. In other words, you are disallowing the double-stroke briefs that the auto-brief system sometimes has to use. Note that if you disallow too much, the system may want to give you a brief for something but may be unable to do so. You can remedy that situation by using the next two features of this option set. Auto-brief can insist on briefs containing particular keys If you ALWAYS want auto-briefs to contain a particular set of keys, you can put a line in this area with a + sign before it. The steno keys you enter will then be added to ALL auto-brief entries that the system creates. For example, if you ONLY wanted the suggestions with the asterisk, you could use: +* If you used a special suffix for briefs, such as -DZ, you could put in +-DZ So when the system was looking for a brief for Hofstadter, it would try H-DZ, then HO-DZ, etc. Note that these keys may not end up being consecutive in the final brief. For example, if you have +*Z Then you may get a brief like PWA*RZ for a word like "Bartholemew." The + line simply adds the keys indicated to any auto-brief stroke.

Reference Guide 470

Note that you can only have ONE line with a plus sign, because it will add those keys to ALL auto-briefs that it creates, so it wouldn't make sense to have multiples. If you want multiple keys, just include them all on that one line. Auto-brief can supply steno from a pre-defined list You can include as many lines as you like of pre-defined steno using the = sign. For example: =1-BL =2-BL =3-BL etc. If the system is unable to come up with a brief that fits the specified criteria and is not already being used in a dictionary, it will use the first available item from this list. If the - and + restrictions result in the system's being unable to find a brief stroke that it can use, it will look for the first = stroke that is available. If you only want it to use these pre-defined items for briefs and to never try to come up with its own, then there is a simple way to disallow all strokes: That's a line with a single minus sign and NOTHING after it. This command disallows all strokes by default, which means that all auto-briefs must be generated only from the predefined steno offered on the lines starting with = So a sample theory list might be: =1-BL =2-BL =3-BL Which means to disallow all automated stroke generation and use only the three strokes provided. Once those are used up, no more auto-briefs will be created, which is a good argument for offering quite a few default strokes ahead of time if you're going to use this technique.

Reference Guide 471

Auto-briefs and numbers You can optionally add a sequence of steno keys that will ONLY be added to auto-briefs containing numbers. This is indicated by including the number sign # after the + sign. For example, you might add +#SZ in the auto-brief steno theory. Then, when you write 574,974.23, the auto-brief procedure will be able to suggest 5SZ as a brief for that number. Note that the number additions and the regular additions are separate, independent settings and you can use only one or only the other or both simultaneously. Auto-briefs containing numbers such as dates: "May 12, 2007" If you have the numbers enabled in the auto-brief function, AND you remove the months from the list of auto-brief ineligible words found under User settings | Programming, then dates in this format will end up with a brief suggested for them. You may or may not find this useful, depending on the circumstances and the types of jobs you do, so experiment and decide what works for you.

File Locations
In the User Settings | Programming tab there is an item called File locations. All file and folder locations are centralized and hierarchical, and optional file and folder locations can be specified in order to create whatever organizational structure you prefer for your files. The syntax for these locations is as follows: TYPE={OptionalParent}path For example, a basic user setup might look like this: MAIN=C:\Users\Username\Documents\Eclipse JOB={MAIN}Joe BLOCK={JOB}Blocks The MAIN folder is where all user.ini files are stored, for the entire Eclipse installation. If you change this, it changes for everyone who uses Eclipse on this computer, because it tells Eclipse where to find the .ini files when the program first runs. The JOB folder reads {MAIN}Joe, so when Eclipse needs to access a file in the Jobs folder, that will expand to C:\Users\Username\Documents\Eclipse\Joe Likewise, the BLOCK folder first expands from {JOB}Blocks to {MAIN}Joe\Blocks, then to C:\Users\Username\Documents\Eclipse\Joe\Blocks

Reference Guide 472

Note that this hierarchical structure is only apparent to advanced users working in the User settings | Programming | File locations area. You can also view and modify these paths in the User settings | User | Advanced section where the path names appear and you can hit a button to browse through folders. Though this dialog shows the entire path name, it's actually accessing and modifying the file locations when you use it. Likewise, anywhere in the program where you're browsing for a folder (such as selecting the location where you read files from your writer) and/or selecting a file from a different location than the jobs folder, the system may automatically create an entry under the File locations in order to account for this new user preference. Now that all file names and locations are stored as part of this system. For example, the user spelling dictionary is stored as UserName.esp and is expected to appear in the jobs folder as specified by the JOB= line. If you have a need to set up a folder that is defined as a specific subfolder of the location where the program itself is stored, you can use {PROG} even though there's no PROG=etc. line in the list. The Eclipse program folder is determined during the installation routine and is stored in the Eclipse.ini file in the Windows folder. You can change things such as the location where your files are stored, or the name of your jobs folder, or even your entire main folder, in just one location, making it simple to move everything, for example, to My Documents\ Eclipse. If you were to edit the file locations and type in a folder that does not exist, such as BLOCK={JOB}court\blocks, the system will automatically create the folder or folders in question as soon as any part of the program needs to access that folder. Many optional file locations can be specified. For example, having a BLOCK folder is helpful, but you can subdivide even further by specifying a LIST folder (for list files used for form fields) and an INCLUDE folder (for autoinclude dictionary entries and the translator's initial and final block settings.) These categories are optional; the way that the system works is this: When it translates an autoinclude such as {cover}, Eclipse will first look to see if you have an INCLUDE folder specified. If not, it will see if you have a BLOCK folder specified. If not, it will finally look in your JOB folder for the cover.ecl file to include into the document. (Note that even the BLOCK folder is optional, and without it, Eclipse expects everything to be in the JOB folder.) For the purposes of notation in this documentation, this hierarchy of optional paths will be listed like so: INCLUDE ( -> BLOCK -> JOB ). Note that this existence hierarchy is not the same as a folder hierarchy. In other words, these folders don't need to be inside each other, such as (...Users\Joe\Block\Include). INCLUDE could be C:\Eclipse\Include, BLOCK could be {MAIN}Block, JOB could be {MAIN}Joe\Transcripts. Eclipse doesn't care. The point is that you do not need to have a BLOCK or INCLUDE folder if you don't want them. Technically even the JOB folder is optional. As a last resort, Eclipse will create and look for files in the MAIN folder if no other folders are specified, but you would probably not want every Eclipse file for every user in one folder. Reference Guide 473

You do not need to use every optional path. Some are only applicable to specific needs. For example, a scopist might want to play WAV files directly off CDs they get from reporters. A reporting firm might put all of their form lists for all reporters in a central repository on the network, etc. Although you can put your note files, transcript files and dictionaries in three different places, if you do, you lose the job file hierarchy integration provided by the Eclipse file manager. If you keep them all in the same folder, you can easily look at all your dictionaries at once by using Windows explorer in the detail view and sorting by file type. Here is a complete list of the different optional file locations supported by Eclipse: USER This is where UserName.ini files will be loaded and stored once you've entered your particular user setup. Normally these are found in MAIN and it's not a good idea to change this. The only application for this is a shared system in which you have, for example, 10 users, each with 20 different .ini files. Each user can have his or her own folder for their .ini file variations and just keep the main .ini file in the MAIN folder so that the initial Eclipse login doesn't end up with 200 .ini files to scroll through. JOB This is the default location for most files, and is the only location where Transcript.ecl files are found. PROG This is the location where the program itself is stored. DOC This allows you direct access to your documents folder. For example, if you wanted your Eclipse documents to go in a folder named "Eclipse" as a subfolder of your "My Documents" folder in XP (or your "Documents" folder in Windows 7) you would use: MAIN={DOC}Eclipse That way, if your jobs folder is JOB={MAIN}Bob then your job files would be in My Documents\Eclipse\Bob BLOCK ( -> JOB ) Block files are, broadly, any .ecl file that is used for some purpose other than being a complete transcript. Reference Guide 474

BLOCKREAD

( -> BLOCK -> JOB )

The location for the Block/Read (Alt+R) function if you have a need for that to be different from the BLOCK folder. INCLUDE ( -> BLOCKREAD -> BLOCK -> JOB )

Where Eclipse will find autoinclude files for {<filename} dictionary entries and the Translate/Initial and final block settings. LIST ( -> BLOCKREAD -> BLOCK -> LIST )

The location for list files used by form fields that provide lists of choices. BLOCKWRITE ( -> JOB )

The location for the Block/Write and Block/Separate functions for writing blocks out from the current file. Note that this does not default to the BLOCK folder if it doesn't exist, because generally block/writes are done to divide transcripts into smaller transcripts, so they'll usually be going into the jobs folder. BACKUP ( -> "\Eclipse Backups" )

The "Backup" folder for the file manager and backup/restore wizard. If not specified, it will default to the "\Eclipse Backups" location. AUX ( -> BACKUP )

An Auxiliary folder used by the file manager as an alternate storage location. NET ( -> BACKUP )

The "Network" folder used by the file manager and other features that need a generic network file location. DIVISION ( -> NET -> BACKUP )

The folder where divided segments of the transcript will be written automatically by the "Division interval" feature. WAV ( -> JOB )

The location where WAV files will be recorded and played back, rather than the jobs folder. WAVREC ( -> WAV -> JOB )

The location where WAV files will be recorded.

Reference Guide 475

WAVPLAY

( -> WAV -> JOB )

The location where Eclipse will look for WAV files to play back. Note that this is a good example of a distinction that demonstrates that the intermediate locations (in this case, WAV) are not necessary or even desirable. For example, if you wanted WAV files to record in the JOB folder, but to play them back from the network or a CD, you could simply have: JOB={MAIN}Joe WAVPLAY=F:\Audio You do not need a WAV setting just because you have a WAVPLAY setting. NOT ( -> JOB )

The default location for note files. DIX ( -> JOB )

The default location for dictionary files. DIXMAIN ( -> DIX -> JOB )

The location of your main dictionary. DIXJOB ( -> DIX -> JOB )

The location of the job dictionary for the current job. This is a rather subtle differentiator. If this is different from DIX, it ONLY specifies the location of the Job dictionary as listed just below the Main in the dictionary dialog. The numbered dictionaries 1-9, etc., will be stored in DIX. This division is intended to keep re-usable special dictionaries such as special terminology for captioners or particular cases in a separate folder from the job dictionaries that are associated with particular transcript files. WRITER ( -> "A:" )

The location where the "Read notes" function will look for note files from your steno machine. Historically, a floppy drive, but increasingly, SD card readers, etc. ASCII ( -> JOB )

Where ASCII files will be created by the Production/Output to ASCII function before they're copied to the location for transport to attorneys. Many users create transcript ASCIIs in a separate folder for use with SearchMaster, for example.

Reference Guide 476

ASCIIOUT

( -> WRITER -> "A:" )

The Output to ASCII function will make a copy of the ASCII file to this location once it's complete. FLOPPY ( -> WRITER -> "A:" )

The floppy disk drive location for the file manager IMPORT ( -> JOB )

Location used when performing the File/import or conversion wizard functions. EXPORT ( -> JOB )

Location used when performing the File/export or conversion wizard functions. KEY ( -> WRITER -> "A:" )

Location where the convenience key files will be created when asked. OLD ( -> {MAIN}Eclipse3 )

Where copies of Total Eclipse 3.X files will be placed if opened in 4.x+ and converted to the new format. You may have an existing setting for this if you converted from 3.x in the past. LESSON ( -> {JOB}Lesson )

When installing a lesson for the lesson player, each student's personal copies of each lesson will go here.

Reference Guide 477

REALTIME, ADVANCED FEATURES

Force Translation
Command Speed Key Menu Toolbar Icon Force translation Shift+Alt+F F10/Tools/Realtime/ Force translation

On the Tools | Realtime menu is a utility function that allows some creative macros for editing during realtime. The Force translation function pops up a message box and asks you to type in an entry manually on the computer keyboard. Whatever you type will be fed to the translator as though you had written in on the steno machine, but it will not add any steno.

For example, if you type {Q} and hit Enter you will get a new question paragraph. If you type hello the word hello will appear just as if you had written it on the steno machine. So if there are functions you know how to do during translation but you aren't sure how or if they can be accomplished from the computer keyboard, this is a direct way to accomplish them from the computer keyboard. For example, if you have an editor working behind the realtime reporter using an output buffer, it is possible to make a macro that would allow the editor to send a {FLUSH} entry to force the buffer to be transmitted immediately. Note that because the forced translation is a complete entry that appears immediately, if there is a stroke in the buffer waiting to translate, the forced translation may appear before it.

Direct Output
Sometimes it can be useful to send a command, made up of a string of data, DIRECTLY to the output system. Under Tools | Realtime, there is a function called Direct Output. If you select this command, it will display a window where you can type Command Direct output a string of data. You can specify which outputs to send it to. For Speed Key Shift+Alt+D example, you might have three outputs (captioning/ TeleView/ Menu F10/Tools/Realtime/ ANSI) and you only want to send it to the captioning output. You Direct output would just leave it at 1. If you wanted to send it to just the Toolbar Icon ANSI and TeleView, you could put 2,3 or you could put all if you wanted to output to all three. Note that the data input window allows you to hit control characters, so if you need to send a sequence like Ctrl+C, Ctrl+A, 3, [enter] you could type Ctrl+C Ctrl+A 3 Ctrl+M (the ANSI code for the [enter] key is Ctrl+M) and then hit [enter] to transmit the string. Note that it would LOOK like this in the data window: ^C^A3^M and that you could, in lieu of pressing the control keys, simply type the ^ character and the capital letter. (If you want a ^ character, just type ^^.)

Reference Guide 478

You can also put in hexadecimal codes directly, with the \x syntax. For example, \xC7\xF3 would send the bytes C7 and F3 directly to the output. Now, in the example above, the ^C^A3^M, that happens to be the code to put a typical closed captioning encoder into block mode. However, if you were to do this, the Eclipse software would not now reflect that you were in block mode because this command completely circumvents the entire output system of the software. You could also type please stand by and it would get transmitted to the output, but it would not be shown on the preview window because, again, the output system is circumvented by this command. This command can be executed in a macro. You could also have steno strokes execute such macros. This allows a user with sufficient technical knowledge (or with the help of a device technician) to write whole new functions for particular output devices even if the software does not overtly support those functions. For example, if an LED display manufacturer came out with an update to the display that allowed new font sizes or colors that Eclipse didn't know about, if you could find the hexadecimal codes or control keys to use to activate those features, you could use the Direct Data Output to implement them without having to wait for an update to the Eclipse software.

Reference Guide 479

SEARCHES: CUSTOM SEARCHES: CREATING REGULAR EXPRESSIONS, AND BACKREFERENCES

A regular expression is a way of expressing a variable search pattern using a series of special command characters and command character sequences. They follow several special rules:
The

backslash can be used to specify a literal character. For example, if you try to search for $5 it might fail because the $ sign is used to specify the termination of a paragraph. If you search for \$5 the \ tells the system to treat the next character as plain text, not as a command. If you need to search for a backslash, use \\
Every

expression consists of a sequence of characters to search for. Each character actually consists of two parts: The character to search for immediately followed by the number of times that character is permitted (or required) to appear to be considered a match. The number of times is optional, and if left out, then the number is considered to be exactly one. For example, a regular expression of dog is a pattern consisting of d exactly once, o exactly once and g exactly once. The ? Symbol means that the previous character is optional, so bo?at would find either boat or bat.
If

there is a need to group together several characters to be part of a repeating pattern (or to store a pattern of multiple characters for re-use later) the parentheses are used. For example, t(hr)?ough would find either through or tough because the ? symbol made the entire sequence in the parens optional, not just the previous character. There is a helper dialog that appears if you select Custom search on either one of the shortcut lists in the Find dictionary entries dialog. This helper dialog is a Custom search builder which makes the process of creating regular expressions much easier. Custom search builder

Reference Guide 480

The process of creating a custom search filter is a process of deciding what elements you are looking for in dictionary entries and how best to represent them. For some entries, its simple, but for others, it may be more complicated if youre looking for a broad range of entries of a particular type. For example, searching for a conflict is easy because all you have to do is look for a backslash. But what if you were looking for all of your speaker entries that contained additional text, such as {S:THE COURT}Overruled? The easiest part of the dialog is the entry must start/end with pattern checkboxes. Simply put, when you specify a pattern to search for, it can normally be found ANYWHERE in the entry and it will be considered a matching entry. You must check one or both of these boxes if you wish to limit the search. You can do this either before or after defining the rest of the pattern. This dialog creates the regular expression syntax for you, but here is the syntax so that you will know what youre looking at. Entry must start with pattern : Regular expression syntax: ^pattern Entry must end with pattern : Regular expression syntax: pattern$ Example: ^the Matches: the, theory, there Non-matches: lathe, other, dog. Example: the$ Matches: the, lathe Non-matches: theory, there, dog Example: ^the$ Matches: the Non-matches: everything else The start/end checkboxes are only selected once for the entire pattern. The 1-2-3 steps on the left side of the dialog can be selected as many times as you like to create the entire pattern. Here is a description of those steps:

1. Text to match
First, you must select how you intend to define the text. Do you want a specific piece of text, or are you looking for something more general? Here is a list of the different categories of text patterns that appear on the list in step one: This specific text

Reference Guide 481

This allows you to specify a particular piece of text, such as the text the in the previous example. You would select this item and then type the in the text box. (Regular expression syntax: None. Text is text. However, if any of the text you are going to search for contains characters that are used as commands in regular expressions you must precede them by a \ character. For example, searching for A+ means search for one or more instances of A and will find A or AA or AAA. If you actually want to search for A+ you have to search for A\+. This step is automated for you if you use the dialog to specify your search text.) Any of the following characters This allows you to specify several characters, any of which can be matched. For example, if you were looking for a punctuation mark, you might select this item and then type .,?;: in the text box. (Regular expression syntax: [characters]. For example, [abc] would find any of the characters a, b or c.) A character NOT of the following This is the reverse of the previous item. You can have the pattern match any character not belonging to a particular set of characters. For example, if you wanted to find entries that were not conflicts or commands, you could select this item and type \{ in the text box. (Regular expression syntax: [^characters]. For example, [^abc] would find any character that is not a, b or c.) A range of characters This is a helpful shortcut if youre looking for a bunch of characters that are all consecutive. Note that when you select this, a hyphen appears in the box. Thats a hint that you need to put a hyphen between characters in the range. For example, if you wanted to look for a capital letter, select this item and type A-Z in the text box. (Regular expression syntax: [start-end]. For example, [A-Z] would find a capital letter. Note that this is part of the set of characters syntax and the two can be combined together within the same brackets by a creative regular expression user. For example, [a-zA!] will match any of the letters a through z or the capital letter A or an exclamation point.) A character NOT in this range The reverse of the previous item. If you select this item and type a-z in the list it will match anything that is NOT a lower-case letter. (Regular expression syntax: [^start-end])

Reference Guide 482

The following selections do not require the user to enter any text manually in the text box, because they have very specific meanings and supply their own syntax. Any character This allows you to skip text you dont care about if you dont care what it looks like. For example, if you were looking for a number command, you might put in {#, then tell it any character, then } after that. (Regular expression syntax: . (the period.) Example: d.g matches dig or dog or even d! g or d=g.) Any word character For the purpose of regular expressions, a word character is any number or letter. (Regular expression syntax: \w Example: {\w would match {Q but not {#.) Any digit You could do this by doing a range of characters [0-9] but its such a common need that a regular expression shortcut was created for it. (Regular expression syntax: \d Example: \d- would match 5-day but not x-ray. Any non-word character This item matches any character that is not a letter or number.

Reference Guide 483

(Regular expression syntax: \W (capital w.)) Any non-digit This item matches any character that is not a digit. (Regular expression syntax: \D (capital d.)) A word boundary This matches the edge of a word, no matter whether its a non-word character or the beginning or end of an entry. For example, if you wanted to search for any entry CONTAINING the WORD the you could put a word boundary on either side of it so that it would only find the if it was surrounded by word boundaries in the entry. (Regular expression syntax: \b Examples: \bthe\b will find the or the dog or on-the-job but will NOT match bathe or other or there.)

2. Number of repetitions permitted

After selecting the text you wish to match, you may need to explain how many times that text can come up. Each of the syntaxes above is designed to match a single character if not modified, but you may wish to match more than that, or possibly even less if the text youre looking for may or may not be present. You MUST select how many repetitions are permitted for the text that youre looking for. Note that if you use anything other than exactly once on a this specific text sequence it will appear in parentheses so that the system knows that you are repeating the entire sequence a certain number of times, rather than simply the last letter in the sequence. In regular expression syntax, these number specifiers always go immediately after the text that has been specified. Here is a list of the choices on this menu along with some examples. Exactly once This specifies that it will attempt to match the pattern exactly once. Select this for situations where you are only looking for a single character or if you have specified a particular word or sequence of letters. (Regular expression syntax: none. This is the default behavior of any pattern.) Zero or more times This allows you to specify that the text can be matched any number of times, including not at all.

Reference Guide 484

(Regular expression syntax: * Example: d[a-z]*r would find d followed by any number of lower case letters followed by r, so it would match the following: door, dear, dar, dr. One of the most common uses of this is the match anything sequence, which is .* (period asterisk) which, literally, is any character any number of times. {.*} would find any Eclipse command, for example, including an empty one.) At least once This specifies that a pattern should have least one of something to differentiate it from other entries. (Regular expression syntax: + Example: Exhibit \d+ would find Exhibit followed by a space followed by at least one digit. It would match the following: Exhibit 1, Exhibit 236, Exhibit 27B. It would NOT match Exhibit A. However, if you specified Exhibit \d* it would match Exhibit A because the number of digits is zero, which is acceptable when using the zero or more times option.) Exactly this many times Sometimes, you need to find a pattern a specific number of times. If you select this choice, the Number box will be enabled and you will be able to type in a particular number of times. (Regular expression syntax: {number} Example: [a-z]{3} would find exactly three lower-case letters in a row somewhere in a dictionary entry. If you turned on the Must start/end boxes as well, you would end up with ^[a-z]{3}$ which would find all of the three-letter words in your dictionary.) At least this many times This is very similar to the previous item, but can have that many or more repetitions of a pattern. Once again, it enables the number box for you to supply the number. (Regular expression syntax: {number,} Example: \d{2,} would find any dictionary entry that contained a sequence of two or more digits anywhere in it.) A range of times On very rare occasions, you may need to find a specific range of times a particular pattern appears in entries. This item will enable the Maximum box for you to specify a maximum number of times a pattern can appear in an entry. (Regular expression syntax: {number,max} Example: [A-Z]{2,5} would match a sequence of at least two but no more than five capital letters in a row.)

Reference Guide 485

3. Add text to pattern

Once you have selected the text and the repetitions, you then press this button to add the text specified to the pattern. You can repeat steps 1 through 3 as many times as necessary to create the pattern you are looking for. Here is an example of the process of creating two regular expressions using this dialog. Lets say Im looking for any speaker entry that contains text after the speaker, such as {S:THE COURT}Overruled Using the menus on the dialog, I would select this: 1.This specific text: {S: 2. Exactly once 3. Add 1.Any character 2. Zero or more times 3. Add 1.This specific text: } 2. Exactly once 3. Add 1.Any word character 2. At least once 3. Add The regular expression would end up being: {S:.*}\w+ That would find any speaker followed by text in the same entry. HINT: Remember to use the Entry must start/end items appropriately. For example, if you did NOT want the previous search to match {--}{S:MR. JONES}No you would have to make it ^{S:.*}\w+ instead by checking the Entry must start with this pattern. The process of coming up with a complete regular expression that does EXACTLY what you want it to do may take several tries to get it right. For example, creating the All caps search on the list took several false starts. Let's go through an example of how you have to try building it up from a few elements until you get exactly what you want. [A-Z]+ (at least one upper case letter.) Matches: FBI, Ph.D., John No good. That search will match any dictionary entry that contains a sequence of at least one capital letter anywhere in it, but that's not All caps. ^[A-Z]+$ (at least one capital letter, and the entry must start and end with that sequence.) Matches: FBI, UNICEF, IEEE Non-matches: D.A.R.E., I.D., I-95, {Q}, {S:THE COURT} Reference Guide 486

Still no good. It only matches entries that contain ONLY upper-case letters. Im interested in any dictionary that simply has no lower-case letters in it. Maybe that approach will work: ^[^a-z]*$ (the entire entry must be a sequence of any number of characters that are not lower case letters.) Matches: FBI, D.A.R.E., I.D., I-95, {S:THE COURT}, {.}, {-}, {,}, {--}, etc. Still not right. Now its matching all of my punctuation entries, because they dont contain lower case letters, so they match the pattern perfectly. What I need to do is match a dictionary entry that contains a sequence that consists entirely of non-lower case letters, whether theyre at the beginning or end of the entry, but has at least one upper case letter in it somewhere. Now we have it: ^[^a-z]*[A-Z]+[^a-z]*$ The entry must contain only a sequence of zero or more non-lower-case letters, followed by at least one upper case letter, followed by a sequence of zero or more non-lower-case letters. Thats what you get when you select all caps from the shortcut list, and thats what I was looking for. Searching for This or that You can have an expression that looks for one piece of text or another specifically. The regular expression syntax is to use the pipe sign | as the or symbol. For example, dog|cat is an expression that will search for the words dog or cat in a dictionary entry (actually, it will search for any word that contains either dog or cat, so it would find dogged and catalog and concatenate.) The or | symbol is always the lowest priority when the system interprets the expression, so if you want to make only PART of the expression an either/or option, you must enclose the either/or option in parentheses. Bad example: {S:THE COURT|WITNESS} would search for any entry that contains {S:THE COURT or WITNESS} because the | separates the ENTIRE expression in to two either/or parts. Good example: {S:THE (COURT|WITNESS)} would find any entry containing {S:THE COURT} or {S:THE WITNESS} You can use the | in combination with all of the other syntaxes given above.

Reference Guide 487

User-definable search shortcuts

There are two additional categories in the User settings/Programming tab for steno and text regular expression filters. The syntax for an entry is description=regularexpression For example, you could add the following line to the steno filters: Number bar entries=[0-9#] This would find any steno that contained any digit from 0 to 9 or the # symbol, which will match any entry that contains the number bar. On the Find menu, only "Number bar entries" will appear. When selected, it will put [0-9#] in the filter box. If you have a filter that requires additional user input for each use, simply add {} to the filter in the location where you would like the input. This allows you to make generalized searches that are very specific to the particular way that you personally tend to format things in your dictionary. For example, you could add the following to the text filters: Attorney number={S:ATTY{}} This expression would ask you for additional input if you picked it during a search. You could type 3[enter] and then it would search for {S:ATTY3}

Replacing with regular expressions

The find/replace also follows regular expression rules, which means that if you wish to do anything other than a very basic replace-this-text-with-that-text you will have to create an expression that does what you really want. Here are some simple examples, followed by some more complex ones: Search: the Matches: the, there, bathe, other. Replace: www Replace results: www, wwwre, lawww, owwwr. This "the" example is given to show not only how many different things can match, but what gets replace in the even that a match is found. A basic find/replace will find the text anywhere in any entry and will replace ONLY the text that is searched for. Search: ^Smith$ Matches: Smith Replace: Smythe Replace results: Smythe

Reference Guide 488

Note that in this example, the ^ and $ boundary markers (created when you use "Exact match") mean that it will NOT replace the text "Smith" when it's part of a longer entry like "Smithson" Search: {.}{"} Matches: {.}{"} Replace {."} Replace results: {."} Ok{.}{"} Ok{."} Yes{.}{"} Yes{."}

This example illustrates that the partial search/replace can be very useful when re-arranging the way you have encoded certain special commands if you have used them in multiple dictionary entries. This specific example uses the more recent, concise form of period/endquote which avoids the use of the toggling quote for reporters who don't use it. Here are some search/replace strings that will cause problems, and the solution: Search: Exhibit \d Matches: Exhibit 1 Replace: Exhibit{~} Replace results: Exhibit{~} Exhibit{~}7 Exhibit{~}36B Exhibit 27 Exhibit 736B

Search: ^pre\w+ Matches: prevent Replace: preReplace results: preprepreprepreordained preemptive preColumbian

It's important to realize that if you're creating a regular expression pattern to be matched, the entire matching pattern will be replaced. In the first example, I'm trying to find any entry that contains Exhibit, a space, and followed by a digit. I then want to replace it with Exhibit and a lockspace instead. The trouble is, the digit is part of my pattern matching string, so the match it finds in "Exhibit 27" that matches the pattern is, precisely, "Exhibit 2" and that's exactly what it replaces with "Exhibit{~}" resulting in Exhibit{~}7. With the second example, it's even worse. I'm looking for every entry starting with "pre" so that I can selectively answer yes/no and replace a lot of them with the hyphenated prefix instead.

Reference Guide 489

Unfortunately, I've chosen to match the beginning of an entry ^ followed by "pre" followed by \w+ which means ONE OR MORE word-based characters (letters.) So what happens is that the search pattern does find the correct entries, but the match pattern matches the entire word, so when it goes to replace the pattern with "pre-" it will replace the entire pattern, not just the "pre" part. The solution? Something in the regular expression syntax called "backreferences."

Backreferences
If I want to include part of my search expression in my replace string, I can do that. Backreferences allow you to take matched sequences of text and re-use them either in the search pattern or in the replacement. The number of the backreference indicates which sequence in parentheses you want to re-use. If I insert \1 into the replace string, it will include the first backreference. \2 includes the second, \3 the third, etc. A "backreference" will copy part of the original string that matches a part of the pattern that I place in parentheses. For example, if you search for (Mr.|Mrs.) Smith, do you recognize Exhibit ([A-Z]) it will find either Mr. or Mrs., then the rest of the sentence with any Exhibit letter from A Z. Once it finds that string, the backreference \1 will either contain the Mr. or Mrs., and the backreference \2 will contain whatever Exhibit letter was found. Here's an example of a backreference being used in a replace string: Search for: real time (job|reporter) Replace with: realtime \1 That search and replace will turn the following sentence: When a real time reporter takes a real time job, viewers see the text very close to the real time when it was spoken. into the following result: When a realtime reporter takes a realtime job, viewers see the text very close to the real time when it was spoken.

Reference Guide 490

This example replaces the phrase real time with realtime only if it is followed by the word job or reporter. Since the search string actually includes the word job or reporter as part of the pattern to be matched, the replace function will have to replace it. Using the backreference will ensure that the replacement will include the word that was originally found. Here is another example, similar to one used above for Regular Expressions: ^pre(\w+) It's the same search pattern I used before, but this time I've included the \w+ in parens. It will still match the same patterns, but everything inside the parens is considered backreference 1. So if I use the following replace string: pre-\1 I will get the correct results: Search: ^pre(\w+) Matches: prevent Replace: pre-\1 Replace results: pre-vent pre-ordained pre-emptive preColumbian (note that I would not want to answer "yes" to all of these when given the choice.) Here's one more example of a search/replace that you could do with backreferences that would be impossible any other way. Let's say you wanted to replace all of your "Somethingorother University" entries with "Somethingorother{~}University" You could try replacing " University" with "{~}University" but that would also replace things like "the University of..." and "1234 University Ave." and even the word University by itself, so you would be stuck having to answer yes/no to all of them in order to catch the specific ones that should not have a lockspace before them. So what would be best is an expression which looks for the word "University" preceded by a space, preceded by a capitalized word, and replacing it with that same capitalized word, a lockspace, and the word "University" again. Here's a sample of how that could be done: Search: ([A-Z]\w+) University Reference Guide 491 preordained preemptive preColumbian

Replace: \1{~}University Regular expression give you ways to modify dictionary entries without having to do a dozen different search and replaces, and without having to answer yes/no to every one just to catch things that match your search because it wasn't specific enough.

Using backreferences in searches

One more thing about backreferences. You are not limited to using them as part of a replace string. You can use a backreference in a search string if some part of what you are searching for is something that repeats. For example, if you want to search for any two-stroke entries where both strokes are the same, such as -FPLT/-FPLT or PWOB/PWOB or STPHAO/STPHAO the steno search would be as follows: ^([^ ]+) \1$ Translation: A search consisting exactly of any number of non-spaces, followed by a space, followed by a copy of the sequence of non-spaces matched earlier (in the parentheses.) Or, let's say you wanted to search for all of your \yes\{,}yes \no\{,}no \okay\{,}okay conflicts and replace the whole entry with a more efficient soft comma entry instead: {,?}yes {,?}no {,?}okay The search/replace would look like this: Search: \\(\w+)\\{,}\1 (Translation: A backslash, followed by one or more word characters, followed by \{,} followed by an exact copy of the sequence of word characters matched earlier Replace: {,?}\1 You could even expand it to handle both entries containing {,}word and {;} word to change it to a soft semicolon {;?} Search: \\(\w+)\\{(,|;)}\1 Replace: {\2?}\1 The searches that you can pick from the list contain backreferences that you can use inside replacements without having to construct your own complex regular expressions. These backreferences are part of the default settings that will be used when you create a new user or when you import the Eclipse.set file (they're considered part of the "Edit" settings.)

Reference Guide 492

Here are the searches that contain backreferences, what those backreferences are and examples of how you might use them. Steno search backreferences Contains keys \1 = Everything before the keys \2 = Everything after the keys Search: *F Replace: AO\2 Results: *FPLT --> AOPLT, H*FPL --> AOPL Starts with keys \1 = Everything after the keys Search: TK Replace: \1DZ Results: TKAOEU --> AOEUDZ Starts with stroke(s) \1 = All of the remaining strokes Search: KW-GS Replace: \1 KW-GS Results: KW-GS HEL HROE --> HEL HROE KWGS Ends with keys \1 = Everything before the keys Ends with stroke(s) \1 = All of the prior strokes Double strokes \1 = The doubled stroke Replace: \1Z Results: TOP TOP --> TOPZ All searches referring to numbers of strokes \1 = Stroke 1 \2 = Stroke 2 \3 = Stroke 3, etc. Search: 3 strokes Replace: \1 RE PHRAEUS \3 Results: EBGS APL PEL --> EBGS RE PHRAEUS PEL Text search backreferences Contains \1 = Everything before the text \2 = Everything after the text Search: {A} Replace: \2{A} Results: {A}okay --> okay{A} Starts with \1 = Everything after the text Reference Guide 493

Capitalized \1 = Everything but the capital letter Phrases of a particular number of words \1 = first word \2 = second word \3 = third word, etc. Alphabets \1 = Everything before the letter \2 = The letter itself \3 = Everything after the letter Replace: \1--\2--\3 Results: {&B} --> {&--B--}, {^K^} --> {^--K--^} Alphabets (Glue symbols) \1 = the glue item Replace: {\1^} Results: {&(a)} --> {(a)^}, Exhibit{&B} --> Exhibit{B^} Numbers (written) \1 = the number word Prefixes \1 = the text of the prefix Replace: \1-{^} Results: {pre^} --> pre-{^} Suffixes \1 = the text of the suffix Speakers \1 = the speaker name Replace: {C}DIRECT BY \1 Results: {S:MR. SMITH} --> {C}DIRECT BY MR. SMITH Autoincludes \1 = the include file name Conflict searches (NOT containing extra data) \1 = choice 1 \2 = choice 2 \3 = choice 3, etc. Replace: \1 Results: \here\hear --> here Note that you can combine steno search/replace functions with text search replace functions. Let's say, for example, that you wanted to create a whole category of dictionary entries for all of your speakers for the start of direct examination. You might want to turn STPHAO = {S:MR. SMITH} into TKREBGS STPHAO = {C}DIRECT EXAMINATION BY MR. SMITH

Reference Guide 494

Since this is a search/replace function, keep in mind that the original entry would disappear, so you would first search for all of your speakers and COPY them to a separate dictionary, then run a search as follows: Steno search: One-stroke entries Steno replace: TKREBGS \1 Text search: Speakers Text replace: {C}DIRECT BY \1 Results: STPHAO = {S:MR. SMITH} --> TKREBGS STPHAO = {C}DIRECT BY MR. SMITH

Search/replace on steno and text, using Custom searches

In the find function in dictionaries, the steno and text each have separate replace fields in which you can type a replacement for the original text. Since this dialog has two searches and two replacements, there may be some question about what this feature does if one or more of them is blank. If only the text or only the steno has content typed into both the search and replace, the other part of the entry is ignored. For example, if you tell it to replace the text "{A:bold}" with "{b}" it will do so for all entries, regardless of their steno. If both search boxes contain text, then only entries that match both of the search criteria will be considered. In this case, if either of the replace boxes contain text, then that text will be used to replace the appropriate matching portion of the entry. If both replace boxes contain text, then that text will be replaced in both of the portions of the entry. Here are some examples (p.s. Do not use these examples as written. They all have limitations and should not be used literally.) Example 1: Steno search: (ends with) S Steno replace: Z

Text search: (ends with) s This search would find any entry that ends with -S in the steno and also ends with "s" in the text and replaces the -S with -Z in the steno but leaves the text alone. This is an example of how someone might change many entries in their dictionary to conform to a steno theory change. Example 2: Steno search: (custom)(\w+)FPLT Steno replace: \1RBGS

Reference Guide 495

Text search: (custom)\{&(\w)\} Text replace: {&-\1}

This search would find any entry where the steno is (something)FPLT = {&(oneletter)} and replace it with (something)RBGS = {&-(oneletter)} This could be used to create a stitching alphabet based on a spelling alphabet in one step (after copying the first so that it could be pasted back in.) (Again, don't actually use this example as written, because it won't catch every instance. It's only intended as a demonstration of the fact that the search must match both and can replace both.) Two further considerations: It is possible that when searching and replacing the steno, you could end up creating steno strokes that make no sense. Eclipse does NOT detect these, and will attempt to make the entry anyway, but the end result will always be sensible steno. Eclipse will always ask you if you wish to make the replacement, so you will have a chance to review the entry. If you specify a replacement that makes nonsense steno, Eclipse will be able to interpret the steno right up to the point where it makes no sense, and ALL remaining keys in the steno stroke will be removed from the stroke. For example, if you decided that you had a series of entries such as STPHAO, STPHAOEU, STPHA, STPHO and you wished to use them all with the right upper bank instead of the left, it would be quite INCORRECT to do it like this: Search: STPH Replace -FPLT The steno replace works just like a text replace on steno, so when you replace STPH with -FPLT in the string STPHAO you will get -FPLTAO which makes no sense. Eclipse will attempt to parse that stroke, get as far as -FPLT, and that's as far as it will go because the A that comes after is in the wrong place and cannot be interpreted. It will then attempt to store the entry with the steno -FPLT. The correct way to do this search/replace would be a custom search that was cognizant of the location of the part of the steno you wanted to keep and repositioned it accordingly: Reference Guide 496

Search (custom): ^STPH([AOEU]+)$ Replace: \1FPLT In the case of the previous bad example and often even in search/replace commands that are correct, you can still end up with a problem if the replacement process creates steno that already exists. Fortunately, if you have User settings | Edit | Detect conflicts turned on, that problem has been addressed. When the steno is replaced, it attempts to store the entry, and if it sees that the new steno happens to match an entry you already have it will show you that that steno is already used and will ask you if you wish to replace the old entry with the new one. If you had detect conflicts off, and you ignored the replace message (or you answered "all" to a suspect steno search/replace) you could, in fact, create problems in your dictionary. Fortunately, you can hit the Undo command if you discover the problem in time.

Reference Guide 497

SUFFIXES AND PREFIXES

Suffixes
Total Eclipse has an automatic spelling feature, which allows suffixes to spell correctly with a single dictionary entry.

To view the list that dictates how you format your suffix dictionary entries, go to User Settings (Alt+U) | Programming tab, and select Prefix and suffix definitions from the drop-down list. The list will appear in the text box. You will need to use the scroll bars to view the entire list. NOTE: We recommend that you not edit the default prefix and suffix rules until you fully understand how they work.

Reference Guide 498

Each entry in the list consists of a generic suffix, then an equals sign, and then the set of spelling rules that applies to that suffix. The generic suffix, to the left of the =, is what you want to have in your dictionary. Place that entire entry inside the braces. Do not include the equals sign in the dictionary entry. For example, a typical entry on the Prefixes and suffixes list is: ^ish=&ish,ish,^[e]ish You would define the dictionary entry {^ish} and it will account for each of the three possible spellings that exist for that suffix. To the right of the equals sign in the entry are the spelling rules that Eclipse uses when performing automatic spelling. All possible spellings of a suffix appear after the equals sign, and are separated by commas. The & symbol in a spelling rule means double the last letter. For example, &ed means double the last letter and add ed. That would correctly spell cram + ed as crammed. The ^ symbol in a spelling rule means drop one letter from the end of the word. For example, ^ing means drop the final letter and add ing. That would correctly spell bake + ing as baking. Some entries may have multiple ^ symbols, which means drop two or more letters. NOTE: The ^ symbol on the right of the equals sign means to drop letters from the root word. The ^ symbol on the left of the equals sign is just the syntax for a suffix dictionary entry. Some rules contain letters in brackets [ ]. If so, the rule will only be used on words that end in the letter(s) inside the brackets. For example, the rule ^[e]est means drop the final letter and add est, but only if the final letter is E. That would correctly spell ripe + est as ripest.

Reference Guide 499

The rules are in order of how they are applied. In other words the most common spelling is first in the list, followed by the second most common spelling, etc. The order is very important, because Eclipse will go through the list in that order and stop when it finds a correctly spelled word. For example, for the ^est suffix, the spelling rules are: ^est=&est,est,^[e]est,^[y]iest When you stroke the ^est suffix, defined as {^est} in your dictionary, it will take the word before and apply each of the spelling rules, in order, to create a correctly spelled word. It will try doubling the last letter and adding est first, then adding est, then adding st, then dropping a letter (in this case y) and adding iest. So if you wrote the word happy followed by ^est, it would go through the following steps to spell the word: happy + &est = happyyest. The & symbol doubles the final letter in the root word. This is not a correctly spelled word, so it will continue to the next rule: happy + est = happyest. Happyest is no good either, so on to the next spelling rule in the list: happy + ^[e]est This rule is not applied, because the root word does not end in e (the bracketed letter). happy + ^[y]iest = happiest. The word ends in Y, so the rule is applied. It yields a correctly spelled word, so this is what Eclipses automatic spelling will generate.

syntax for ing^' to make it in' after checking the spelling

If a suffix spelling variation has caret characters (^) near the END of the variation, these will be used to replace characters at the end of the suffix with new characters specified to the right of the carets, but only after the appropriate spelling of the word has been checked based on the original unmodified version of the suffix variation. For example, in the following sample: ^suf=suf,^[e]suf,&suf^b The first choice is unmodified, the second choice tries to delete a silent "e", and the third choice tries to double the final consonant. However, the third choice ALSO tells the suffix handler to delete the last letter of the suffix and substitute a "b" in its place. It will do this AFTER checking the spelling. The primary use for this is as follows: ^in'=&ing^',ing^',^[e]ing^',king^' Reference Guide 500

This is a special entry for the dictionary {^in'} that will check the spelling based on the suffix "ing" and then, once a valid spelling is found, each one of the variations has a command to replace the "g" with an apostrophe, so this would be capable of turning take into takin', etc. The table below defines the text in the suffix rules: TEXT [ ] ACTION EXAMPLE Used to grant ^^[eds] gives permission for the ^ to permission to delete 2 characters, but delete letters care + ^ing = caring bat + &ing = batting mark + ing = marking

only if each is an e, d, or s.

^ (caret)

Drop last letter of root word & (ampersand) Repeat last letter of root word Text Will be added to root word , (comma) Separates the different rules

NOTE: The caret is the text that signifies a suffix on the left of the equals sign, and in the dictionary. On the right of the equals sign it signifies dropping a letter in a spelling rule. Dont be confused by the two different uses of the caret in a suffix entry. Here is how the spelling logic works: ROOT can bear LOGIC can + &ing = canning (correct) bear + &ing = bearring (incorrect) bear + ing = bearing (correct) lure + &ing = lureeing (incorrect) lure + ing = lureing (incorrect) lure + ^ing = luring (correct) traffic + &ing = trafficcing (incorrect) traffic + ing = trafficing (incorrect) traffic + ^ing = traffiing (incorrect) traffic + king = trafficking (correct) RESULT canning bearing

lure

luring

traffic

trafficking

Reference Guide 501

If none of the rules given results in a properly spelled word, Total Eclipse will stick the prefix (whats left of the equal sign) onto the end of the root word. For example, if you made a mistake and wrote the noun money followed by the ^ing suffix, it would apply each of the above rules and fail to find a correctly spelled word (moneyying, moneying, moneing, moneyking). Total Eclipse would then stick the text to the left of the equals sign, ing, onto the end of the word to get moneying. Deleting an already translated suffix that modified the root word Deleting an already translated suffix that modified the root word will go back and retranslate the root word. For example, if you write tire/{^ing}/soon/{DELETE}/{DELETE}/out/so on, previous versions might translate that as "tir out soon", because the {^ing} would make tiring and the "e" would remain deleted. If possible, Eclipse will back up and retranslate the word before the suffix so that the modifications to the root word are undone.

Hyphenated suffixes
At the top of the suffix list, there is a group of suffixes that consists of only a hyphenated version of the suffix on the left of the equals sign, the only spelling rule being the same suffix without the hyphen:

In some cases these suffixes takes a hyphen; other times they do not. These entries will automatically resolve hyphenation issues for these suffixes. When analyzing what these entries do, remember how the spelling rules work. Total Eclipse will go through all the spelling rules (right of the equals sign); if none spells the word correctly, it will apply what is to the left of the equals sign. In this case it will try to apply the suffix without the hyphen; if that is not a proper word it will default to the hyphenated version. If this suffix attaches to a word, such as turn + ^off = turnoff, the spelling rule will apply and it will omit the hyphen: turnoff. If the root word is put, putoff is not a word so the spelling rule will fail and the hyphenated version will result: put-off. Reference Guide 502

Any such entry will automatically resolve the hyphenate-or-not question.

Prefixes
Prefixes work the same way suffixes do, although prefixes create far fewer spelling issues than suffixes. Among Total Eclipses default prefixes, there are a few entries that resolve spelling issues:

The first rule adds the letter a to the beginning of a word (a + float = afloat); the second doubles the first letter for those few words that need it. Some account for multiple spellings of the same prefix:

In the case of dis-^, the same entry would correctly spell both the words dysfunction and disallow when paired with root words. And there are also some prefixes that resolve hyphenation rules. These work just like the hyphenated suffix entries:

Like the suffixes, these will use the non-hyphenated version if it is a correct word, and add the hyphen if needed. If the prefix contains a hyphen, Eclipse will not lower-case the following word. For example, {pre-^} and Columbian will result in pre-Columbian instead of pre-columbian. If the prefix does not contain a hyphen, Eclipse will lower case the following word (for example, {a^} + Tom = atom). Prefixes check for some common suffixes before deciding if the prefix is a valid spelling. For example: You write the prefix TPH- = {en^} which is defined in the prefix/suffix table as en^=en,in so that it can make either en words or in words. It appears before exhaustible. If you have written exhaustible as exhaust and {^ble} then the {en^} prefix will have to pick based only on the word exhaust. Since inexhaust is not a word, it will just put the prefix on with no modification, which will result in enexhaustible. Dictionary entries have to resolve one at a time, so the prefix must resolve before the suffix Reference Guide 503

translates. Eclipse will attempt pre-validate a word if no prefix variant is found by applying a series of test suffixes to the word just to see if they're valid. In other words, in the previous example, it will check if inexhaust is a word. If not, it will see if inexhaustible is a word even if you have not written the ible suffix. Using this method, it may be able to determine which prefix spelling is the valid one even before it has translated the suffix.

Permission strings in prefixes

Permission strings are normally used in suffixes to determine what the suffix has permission to delete. For example, ^^[des]ing will remove the last two letters of the previous word only if they are d, e or s (walked to walking, taxes to taxing). ^^[=fe]ves can change "life" to "lives" etc. Prefixes can also use permission strings, either ordered [=letters] or unordered [letters]. Here is an example: con^=con,con[=re]^^ This can add "con" to the beginning of a word with no modification. If that fails, and if the word starts with "re" it will attempt to remove that and attach "con" instead, turning "retest" into "contest" for example.

Integral prefix/suffix
One-stroke endings allow prefixes, hence the name Integral prefix/suffix. For example, many reporters write STK- for the {dis^} prefix. Integral prefixes and suffixes are definable in the User Settings | Programming tab. The syntax is this: wordpart=NewStenoKeys,ExistingStenoCheck wordpart can be either a prefix or suffix just like the prefix/suffix table: ^ed or ^ing or dis^ etc. NewStenoKeys are the keys that get added to the stroke to make an integral prefix or suffix, such as -D for ^ed. ExistingStenoCheck has two possible syntaxes: ExclusiveSteno or +InclusiveSteno. This will require some explaining: Certain suffixes or prefixes should NOT be applied if certain letters are already in the stroke. For example, you should NOT apply a -G = ^ing if there is already an -S in the stroke. That's why the ^ing entry looks like this: ^ing=-G,-GTSDZ Reference Guide 504

That means as long as NONE of the letters -GTSDZ are in the stroke, it's OK to add the -G and ^ing to the end. That's the EXCLUSIVE steno. Certain other suffixes or prefixes should be applied ONLY if certain letters are already in the stroke. For example, in that tucked-in {^er} I talked about, users want to be able to specify that the ONLY tuck in an -R before the letters G, T, S or D That's why the ^er entry looks like this: ^er=-R,+-GTSD The + sign indicates that the presence of the letters specified is REQUIRED. The lack of a plus sign indicates that the presence of the letters specified is PROHIBITED. Here is an example integral prefix/suffix table (included in the eclipse.set default settings file). You may want to remove the ones you don't use. ^ed=-D,-DZ ^ing=-G,-GTSDZ ^s=-S,-SDZ ^s=-Z,+-D ^er=-R,+-GTSD dis^=STK-,STKEclipse will only apply integral prefixes or suffixes where the match for the steno with the integral prefixes or suffixes is longer than the match without it. Wherever there is already a dictionary entry for that steno which is the same length or longer, the existing dictionary entries will always take precedence. Always suggest For example, ^s=-Z,+-D indicates that the -Z should be suggested to add an {^s} ending to the stroke ONLY if there is already a -D in the stroke. That's because if there's not a -D, most users would tuck in an -S, not a -Z. If you ALWAYS want the system to suggest -Z as a possible {^s} ending, just change it to ^s=-Z,-Z (always suggest unless there's already a -Z in the stroke).

Enforcing a particular order

The prefix/suffix permission strings can be setup to enforce a particular order. In some cases (especially for some non-English languages like Italian) the permission strings in the prefix/suffix table are not quite specific enough. Reference Guide 505

For example, the ^^[eds]ing entry can turn walked into walking or taxes into taxing by virtue of the fact that the last two letters in the original word are either e, d or s. However, that rule would also turn scalds into scaling because again, the original word ends in two letters belonging to the set [eds]. If you would like to specify a particular sequence of specific letters, you can do so by using the following syntax: ^^[=sequence]suffix. For example, after adding ^^[=ed]ing,^^[=es]ing, Eclipse only has permission to modify words that specifically end in ed or es. In addition to fine-tuning anyones personal steno theory, this is also an accessible feature for non-English or non-stenographic keyboards and theories.

Suffixes can delete the previous word when applying variations

You might have a suffix with a long deletion command, such as ^able=able,&able,^able,^^^^able (in which the fourth entry is designed to be able to remove an existing suffix to turn, for example, "remarkably" to "remarkable") When you have a string of multiple deletes like this, you can remove the entire word, but no more than that. Since an empty string is considered a valid spelling, it is possible to create a dictionary entry like so: {^D} And a prefix/suffix table entry like so: ^D=^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ Note that the number of ^ characters is arbitrary. It's the length of the largest word you think you might want to delete. The first use of this entry is that, unlike {DELETE} which removes the previous stroke, {^D} removes the previous word, no matter how many strokes it is. Now, since it removes the word and not the space before it, you'll want to make the dictionary entry {^D}{^} so that it removes the extra space that would appear when you write the new word. Now, while it's possible to write a macro that goes back and removes the previous word by using the word left and delete word functions, it's not desirable, because it only removes it from the editing, so it would not affect closed captioning displays, CIC output, or any other realtime data transmission method. But the {^D} solution does apply to your outputs, making it a vastly superior technique for deleting a word as opposed to a stroke. This technique can also be used within macros using the Force translation function. For example, a typical macro to back up and capitalize the previous word has no effect on CIC screens, but if written as follows: Word left

Reference Guide 506

Block mark Copy Force translation Ctrl+V to paste Ctrl+K to capitalize Home {^D}{^} [enter] This macro will grab the previous word and force a new translation which removes the previous word and replaces it with a capitalized version of the same word. If you like macros, experiment with this technique and see if you can find other ways that editing commands in macros can be used to improve translation even when outputting to CIC or captioning.

Reference Guide 507

SUFFIX SPELLING RULES

In the User settings | Programming tab there is a category of items you can customize called Suffix spelling rules. This is different from the prefix/suffix rules. The standard prefix/suffix rules are lists of spelling alternates that the system will advance through one at a time until the resulting word is found in the spelling checker. Those rules take the highest priority. However, if the system is unable to come up with a correctly spelled word, it then resorts to making a guess based on some common sense rules of English spelling, such as deleting a silent 'e' at the end of a root word before applying a suffix that starts with a vowel. These guesses are based on rules which can be customizable. The suffix spelling rules are rules that will be applied to word+suffix combinations if no spelling variation specified in the prefix/suffix rules results in a correctly spelled word according to the current spelling dictionaries. The rules will be applied from beginning to end until a match is found, so the entries will not sort when you add them; you may wish for certain rules to appear in a particular order. The syntax for a suffix spelling rule is as follows: Root+SuffixBegins=NewSuffix The "Root" part supports the following special characters: - means ends with Example: -ic+ly=ally (if the word ends in "ic" and the suffix is "ly" the result should be that the complete suffix should be spelled "ally". i.e. basic{^ly}=basically) [] means set of characters to match Example: [lmprs]ay+ed=^id (if the word is "lay" or "may" or "pay" etc., and the suffix is "ed" then apply a ^id suffix instead [delete last letter of previous word and add "id".] i.e. pay{^ed}=paid) "SuffixBegins" is an indication that the suffix does not have to be an exact match. It will look for a suffix that starts with the letters you provide. So, for example, if you put "ing" the same rule will be applied for "ings" and "ingly" etc. The "NewSuffix" part supports the following special characters: ^ delete last letter(s) of root word Reference Guide 508

Example: -py+ly=^ily (if the word ends in "py" and suffix is "ly" delete the last letter and add "ily" instead. i.e. happy{^ly}=happily.) & double final letter of root word Example: -mat+ing=&ing (if the word ends in "mat" and the suffix is "ing" repeat the last letter of the root and add "ing." i.e. format{^ing}=formatting.) % copy of original suffix Example: -e+i=^% (if the root word ends in "e" and the suffix starts with "i" delete the last letter (e) of the root word and add the suffix as it was originally spelled.) This is going to be one of the most commonly used commands because the suffix rules can be applied to any suffix that starts with the selected text. So, for example, if you were going to make a specific "ing" rule, you would want to use % instead of "ing" on the right side so that it would apply correctly for the "ings" and "ingly" suffixes, also. If you had -e+ing=^ing you would get soothe{^ing}=soothing, but you would also get soothe{^ingly}=soothing. If you made the rule -e+ing=^%, however, you would get the correct result of soothe{^ingly}=soothingly. If you look at the default rules, you'll see that most of them are like the last example, where there are just a few letters designed to apply to as many situations as possible. These are the most flexible rules, but if you decide to add additional rules to supersede them, make sure that those rules go above the more general rules. For example, if you inserted a new "ing" rule in the following order: -e+i=^% -le+ing=^^ling it would never be used, because the previous item would apply to any situation where the word ends in "e" and the suffix starts with "i" which is already the situation if you have an "le" word and an "ing" suffix. You would have to put it in the following order: -le+ing=^^ling -e+i=^% Keep in mind that the "set" syntax [] can be used multiple times in the root, but is not available in the suffix. Because of that, it may be necessary to make several copies of a rule to support several different suffix possibilities. For example, the following five rules are necessary to double the final consonant whenever the root word ends in consonant/vowel/consonant and the suffix starts with a vowel:

Reference Guide 509

-[bcdfghjklmnprstvwz][aeiou][bcdfglmnprstz]+a=&% -[bcdfghjklmnprstvwz][aeiou][bcdfglmnprstz]+e=&% -[bcdfghjklmnprstvwz][aeiou][bcdfglmnprstz]+i=&% -[bcdfghjklmnprstvwz][aeiou][bcdfglmnprstz]+o=&% -[bcdfghjklmnprstvwz][aeiou][bcdfglmnprstz]+u=&%

Reference Guide 510

TEMPLATE DICTIONARY
You might want to use a template dictionary in a situation that the BY formatting would not handle. Let's say you would like to be able to make a centered paragraph that says CROSS EXAMINATION BY MR. SMITH and you want MR. SMITH in boldface. Now, if you had STPHAO = {S:ATTORNEY1} and KROS/KROS/STPHAO = CROSS EXAMINATION BY {b}ATTORNEY1{n} in your main dictionary and STPHAO = {S:MR. SMITH} in your job dictionary, that would work fine, because Eclipse automatically creates an ATTORNEY1=MR. SMITH text replacement for the duration of that job. However, what if you write your speakers as SPHEUT/SPHEUT for MR. SMITH and ROB/ROB for MR. ROBERTS? There's no good way to handle that. Even though the BY formatting will work, the text replacements won't. So, here's what you do: Create a dictionary called TEMPLATE.DIX in your jobs folder. This will contain templates for any entries that are going to use speakers or names in a variety of ways. In this dictionary, put in entries with a single number bar stroke (#) in the steno in the location where the steno for the speaker or name will appear. In the text, put in two number signs ## in the text where you want the speaker or name to appear. Here are a couple of things you might put in a TEMPLATE dictionary: KROS/KROS/# = {C}CROSS EXAMINATION BY {b}##{n} #/STKPWHR = {S:##}{Q}(Continuing){|} So, if you had the following entries in your JOB dictionary BEFORE you started translation... ROB/ROB = {S:MR. ROBERTS} SPHEUT/SPHEUT = {S:MR. SMITH} ...then the following temporary entries would be created automatically for use in the translation: KROS/KROS/ROB/ROB = {C}CROSS EXAMINATION BY {b}MR. ROBERTS{n} KROS/KROS/SPHEUT/SPHEUT = {C}CROSS EXAMINATION BY {b}MR. SMITH{n} ROB/ROB/STKPWHR = {S:MR. ROBERTS}{Q}(Continuing){|} SPHEUT/SPHEUT/STKPWHR = {S:MR. SMITH}{Q}(Continuing){|}

Reference Guide 511

Be aware that once you create a TEMPLATE.DIX file it will be applied automatically to every translation, much like the KEYMODE.DIX file is always used when you toggle into keymode. One additional note: If you wish to apply template dictionary entries to entries that are not speaker names, you can add the following metadictionary entry: {s:*}={/%} And it allows you to create entries in a job dictionary that will trigger template entries to be created even though they are not related to speaker names. For example, you could create SPHEUT = {s:Mr. Smith} and it would apply to a template entry such as #/TPHODZ = (## nods.) to make SPHEUT/TPHODZ = (Mr. Smith nods.)

Reference Guide 512

TIMEKEEPER
Command Speed Key Menu Toolbar icon Timekeeper Ctrl+Shift+K F10/Tools/Timekeeper

The Timekeeper command, found on the Tools menu, (Ctrl+Shift+K) creates a report that tracks total speaking time for individuals, including the time between paragraphs. It will also display and report a total amount of time used by all parties together.

This command runs the Timekeeper wizard which guides you through the setup for the report, then inserts the report at the current cursor position. You can customize the report to track multiple transcripts or volumes, and to track times for specific paragraph types (formats). The timekeeper will remember which paragraph types you want to include in the timekeeper report, and store that information in your user settings. The Timekeeper tracks whose question period it is based on BY paragraphs. For example, BY MR. SMITH indicates that it is Mr. Smith's time that is being tracked. This enables the reporter to keep track of the time for each attorney. You can generate a report for the Current document, or select multiple documents to include in the report. If you have a document format that does not use by lines, then the timekeeper will assume that you want a breakdown of how much time each individual speaker used. If the User settings | Edit | By formats | templates are blank, then the timekeeper will produce a report consisting of the amount of time each individual speaker name used. Tools/Timekeeper will also show a summary of the amount of time taken by each speaker group, as well as the time taken by each individual speaker and by all speakers in total. At the end of the timekeeper report, look for the lines that start with the group name, such as Plaintiff's: 02:34 to find out how much time was taken by all of the speakers in that group added together.

Reference Guide 513

TOOLBAR CUSTOMIZATION
All six of Total Eclipses toolbars can be completely customized using the Window menu | Customize toolbars command. The six default toolbars and the additional toolbar buttons are pictured in Appendix C: Toolbars, page 333. There are no automated toolbar changes in the system because the configurations will be updated to have entirely customized toolbars appropriate for the task at hand. Toolbar arrangements are stored in the user.ini files and the .set files under the Display settings (when importing and exporting settings.) That means that the AccuCAP.set file contains toolbar arrangements appropriate for those users. The customization dialog is fairly straightforward. After selecting a toolbar, select WHERE on the toolbar you wish to edit by clicking on the right-hand list. You can remove the current button, move it up or move it down. (For a horizontally docked toolbar, that corresponds to left and right.)

If you wish to add a new button, select a button from the left-hand list, which is a list of all of the commands in the system in the same order that they appear on the pull-down menus. Note that you MUST select where you are going to add the button; if you don't, the Add>> button will not be enabled. The toolbars allow separators between the items to help visually arrange buttons into logical groups. These separators can be added, removed and moved just as commands can. The currently selected toolbar can use all large or all small icons by checking or unchecking the Large icons checkbox.

Reference Guide 514

The currently selected toolbar can display text on the button or not by checking or unchecking the Show text checkbox. (Note that you can have small buttons with text beside them, though the alignment suffers.) The currently selected toolbar can be viewed or hidden by checking or unchecking the Visible checkbox. Customized toolbars will be saved in your current .ini file, so be aware that you can have different arrangements of toolbars for all of the different ways you work; for example, you could have one arrangement for realtime and one for editing. Using the Window menu | View Toggles command, you have the option of turning each individual toolbar on and off.

Reference Guide 515

USER SETTINGS TRANSFER: EXPORTING AND IMPORTING SETTINGS

When you select the User settings | User | Export settings.. button, the User settings transfer dialog box will open allowing you to choose all or some of ten elements of your settings to save in a .set file. The options are: Document format The settings on the Paragraphs and Document tabs. Keyboard setup The standard keyboard and hyperkeys designations, (accessible from the Keyboard button on the Edit tab) and macros (accessible from the Macros button on the Edit tab). Editing options The settings in the Editing and Globaling area of the Edit tab, and the By format settings. Also included here: the status of the various alert messages that have the don't show this message again checkbox; and the dictionaries set up under User 1 through User 8 in the User settings | User | Dictionaries.. settings. (Note that any dictionaries left blank will be ignored when the settings are imported into the other user, so any existing dictionaries in unused slots will be preserved.) Display settings The settings on the Display tab; and your customized toolbar settings. Translation setup Settings on the Translation, Realtime, and Input tabs. Number options The settings on the Numbers tab. Prefixes/suffixes The prefixes and suffixes list on the Programming tab; and any modifications to prefixes and suffixes that you make using the Edit menu | Insert feature for inserting a prefix or suffix to a word when editing. Phonetics The Phonetics list and the Normalization table on the Programming tab. Autoreplacements The autoreplacements list on the Programming tab. Metadictionary The metadictionary list on the Programming tab. The Merge settings where possible option will merge the settings you're importing, rather than simply replacing one with the other.

Reference Guide 516

VERSION 3 TO VERSION 4 CHANGES IN DICTIONARY MANAGEMENT

In Version 4, Total Eclipse's FileName.dix files use an entirely different data structure, file format, and editor. If you have upgraded from Version 3, when you run Version 4, any time you attempt to open a 3.X dictionary, it will ask if you wish to convert it. If you answer yes, the old dictionary will be placed in a backup folder and the new one will take its place. Attempting to open new V4 dictionaries in 3.X will result in a "This is not an Eclipse dictionary" error. If it's a main dictionary, the 3.X program will not let you into that user at all after that error appears. For that reason, this version attempts to establish a backup user the first time you enter the program. It looks in the settings to see if you have a setting for the backup user folder, and if you don't, it will create one for you automatically that has the same name as your original user, but with a "(v3)" attached. It makes a new .ini file with that name, and makes a jobs folder with that name as well. For example, if your user name was Bob, you will now have a Bob3 folder and a Bob(v3).ini file when you look at your list of users. Whenever 4.X opens a 3.X dictionary, it will copy the original dictionary to the appropriate backup folder for the current user. Remember, the program will always ask before converting any dictionary, so even if you accidentally go into the wrong user and it asks to convert your main dictionary, you can always answer "no" to get out of it. What this will accomplish is that if you need to go back and run 3.X for any reason, you can pick your User(v3).ini file and it will have all of the correct settings, the old main dictionary, and if you need to get into any jobs or into any dictionaries that have not yet been converted, you can navigate to the new jobs folder and either use the files directly or copy the files to the backup user. Once you are entirely comfortable with 4.0, you can delete the backup User(v3).ini file and it will no longer appear on the list, but the backup folder will still exist with the backed up 3.X dictionaries. As far as most of the program goes, the new dictionary works much like the old one. The dictionary syntax is the same, globals are still done the same way, selecting dictionaries for translation is still done the same way, etc. The main differences are in the file size (new dictionaries are half the size of old ones) and in the dictionary editor.

Reference Guide 517

VERSION 4.3 TO VERSION 5.0 CHANGES

If you are upgrading from Version 4.3 to 5.0, there are some changes you will need to be aware of in the text document file storage system. Because the new default location for users is under the documents folder, when you run this version of the program you will have no users listed. However, a new item has been added to the end of the users list to import an old user. When you select this item it will give you a list of all of your user.ini files. Note that you can select multiples by ctrl+clicking, clicking and dragging, or shift-clicking. When you import an old user, it will import all of the settings and will change your MAIN folder to {DOC}Eclipse, storing a new user.ini file in that location and creating a new jobs folder inside it. It will also copy over your main dictionary, spelling dictionary, block files folder, and any .ecl files the block files folder. It will NOT copy over all of your jobs. If you wish to have duplicates of all of your jobs, you are welcome to copy them, but since you can easily run the older version to access the older jobs, this isn't really necessary. You can easily copy over job files by using the File manager (Ctrl+F), hitting the Browse button, navigating to Program files\Advantage Software\EclipseNT\Users\username, selecting files and selecting Copy to the (new) Jobs folder. You will notice that many functions in the software have been sped up. Also, documents are considerably smaller than in previous versions; less than half the size for exactly the same data, and are much more reliable, eliminating the need for the Optimize document option. WARNING: The 4.4 and subsequent version document file format is incompatible with previous versions. The new version can load old files, but once they're modified, these files can no longer be opened by any previous versions, much like the transition from 3.X dictionaries to 4.X dictionaries. As with that transition, old-format .ecl files will first be backed up to the username(v3) folder in case of a dire emergency that requires you to go back to an older version. The auto-backup function will no longer make .bak files in the jobs folder. Instead, it will make a series of backup files named jobname.bk0, jobname.bk1, jobname.bk2, etc.,

Reference Guide 518

...up to jobname.bk9, representing the last 10 versions of the file in the backup folder. By default, this is \Eclipse backups, but remember that you can change that under User settings/Programming/File locations/BACKUP=etc.) If you have your backup interval set to 30 minutes, for example, it will keep the last five hours worth of backups. This will allow you to go back to an even older version of the file if the most recent backup contains an error that you were trying to recover from (such as a disastrous block-delete or ill-advised text global.) Eclipse now manages the documents entirely in memory, just like dictionaries. The Open function loads the whole document into memory, and closing the document saves the whole document back to disk. The current save/load functions can save or load a 300-page document in under a second, so this new mechanism is fast enough to use a full-document auto-save. The auto-save saves the entire document every ten minutes. Between full saves, every five seconds, the software does a quick-save in order to preserve document integrity in the event of a problem. So, you cannot lose any more than five seconds of work. The quick-save writes to a Jobname.elg file which contains a log of only those paragraphs in the document that have changed since the last full save. Much like the dictionary .MOD files, if the computer crashes or locks up, when you run the program again and re-open the document, all of the changes are automatically recovered from the .elg file. Once the file is able to do a successful full save, the .elg file is deleted. (Note: .elg files will only be used to recover changes if they match the last full save. If you make changes, crash the program, and then restore a backed-up version of the file before opening it, the .ecl will be ignored because it won't apply changes to the wrong version of the file.)

WRITERS
A few writers have characteristics requiring additional explanation:

ProCAT Stylus
ProCAT's Stylus writer creates note files in Stenograph format on their RAM card. You can read those files without having to change your writer selection. The Stylus also does audio recording and creates RTF notes and text files that can be imported into Eclipse. The audio synchronization will work with the note reading or with the RTF import. The ProCAT Stylus produces RTF text files based on the translator on the writer. These files contain both absolute and relative timecodes. Eclipse imports these relative timecodes. If a user has a Stylus and wishes to read the notes and retranslate in Eclipse, one option is to take the RTF from the Stylus, even though it's a job RTF, and import that RTF into a note file. The result will be a note file that has correct absolute and relative timecodes and will synchronize perfectly with the WAV file copied from the Stylus.

Reference Guide 519

None
The writer choice of None gives you the ability to start a realtime translation session with no writer attached at all. You can then start a realtime job in order to send script lines to an output device, for example, for the hearing impaired for open or closed captioning. This will also work on an edit station.

Michela MIDI and Michela MIDI 2

There are two MIDI Michela writers on the list. The second one uses the anti-stacking algorithm, and the original one still waits for all keys to be lifted before registering a stroke.

Diamante/Mira/Fusion
The Mira-style USB realtime interface to the Diamante is functional, but it only works in realtime. To read notes, it is necessary to plug the SD card into the computer or into an SD card reader. The new note file format is sufficiently different that the USB interface will require some as-yet-undetermined modifications in order to read the notes over the cable. You do not need to use the compatibility mode on the Mira or Fusion, or the conversion utility for the Diamante notes. Their native note file formats are interfaced with Eclipse. Eclipse can directly read the date/time style filenames from the Diamante, Mira and Fusion. This includes the time of day and relative timecodes. The Diamante/Mira/Fusion audio sync is adjusted to account for auto-pause, so the timecodes read from the new note files and the jobname.apr files are synchronized with the WAV files recorded on the Diamante, Mira and Fusion, even if you have the auto-pause feature turned on.

Reference Guide 520

CHAPTER 15 INDEX
A Add to Zip command adding Dictionary entries Advanced settings AI All caps dictionary command displaying Anchoring dialog boxes Answer paragraph Apply globals Arrange icons Arrange Icons command ASCII At Beginning search At End search Audio for realtime playback playing specific sections skipping \ troubleshooting Windows volume controls Auto-brief Auto-brief ineligible words Auto-brief steno theory auto-briefs in the info bar Autoinclude dictionary command AutoMagic AutoMagic and Globaling Automatic indexing Autoreplacements Autoreplacements globaling Auxiliary directory B Backreferences Backups restoring Behaves as billing pages Blank print lines Blanks 362 84 56 43, 129 112, 335 72 32 181 160 67 355 93 186 186 314 318 319 320 320 320 296 469 469 302 245, 253 113, 336 25, 26, 182 152 265 190, 457 163 62 490 107 219, 448 249 232 246 Block files 50 creating 51 creating blanks 246 described 245 inserting 251 Block menu 90, 91, 122, 166, 326, 332 Blocking text 164 Blocks directory 62 Bold 173 Boundaries resolving incorrect stroke 197 braces 109 Building dictionaries 82 buttons OK 355 radio 356 By lines 225 capitalization 225 examples 225 preventing page breaks 226 C Capitalization paragraph formats 222 Cart window 304 Cascade Window 67 Cascade command 355 Case changing 150 Center paragraph format, dictionary command 112, 335 Change button in spell-checker 192 Check spelling 115 checkboxes 356 close file 35 Closed captioning preview window 313 Color text, printing 240 COM port specifying 119 Common words 467 Conditional page break 237 Index 521

conflict 48, 56, 75, 90, 91, 101, 108, 129, 151, 152, 163, 253, 262, 263, 270, 294, 324, 329, 330 Conflicts 108 automatically create 155 creating when merging dictionaries 90 selecting 163 setting default choices 129 unmerged dictionaries 91 Continuation paragraphs 220 Continuation paragraphs inserting 181 convenience key 22 Copy command blocks 169 Copying dictionary entries 89 Cursor display width 69 moving 47 Custom Searches: 480 Customize menu 33 Windows Vista 33 Customizing dialog boxes 33 Cut command 49 blocks 169 D Date format 138 Dates inserting 174 Decimal point dictionary command 112, 335 Decimal symbol 445 Delete 169 Delete space dictionary command 112, 335 Descender 237 Detect conflicts 155 dialog windows 347 Dictionaries backing up 104 backing up with Backup command 104 backing up with Windows Explorer 105, 106 commands, table 112 converting 41 copy 89 copying entries 86 Index 522

creating new 81 cutting entries 89 editing definitions 102 editing entries 101 editing steno outlines 102 entries 77 exporting part of 93 finding and replacing entries 96 finding parts of steno 98 finding steno 98 font command 115 font command, examples 116 formats for importing/exporting 92 formatting codes 85 importing 90 job, described 95 main, described 95 making 81 marking entries 86 master job, described 95 overview 75 realtime, adding entries 85 redundant entries 91 restoring from backup 104, 105 search criteria 99 searching, overview XE 96 setting 60 suffix suggestions 158 too large for one diskette 106 unmerging 91 used for translation 142 user, described 95 viewing 77 words with alternate strokes 157 write 88, 167 Dictionaries, printing 201 Dictionary entries copying/writing 90 Dictionary files 35 Dictionary syntax 108 common commands 109 Directories setting 61 Display adjusting 68 colored text 71 font 70 line spacing 72

margins 72 maximum screen space 65 new window 67 print commands 72 steno window 73 Display options 56 Display properties 53 division interval 296, 316 Document formats 56 applying 214 lines per page 229 Military format 229 printing line numbers 229 Document setup wizard 43 Document tab 213 document windows 347 Double-dash 177 Dragged and dropped keys 127 Dragged keys 127 Dropped keys 127 Dumping notes 117 E ecl 34 Eclipse is top window 303 Edit menu 49, 81, 120, 325 Edit menu Print setup 52 Edit Station 144 Edit toggles 308 Editing during translation 144 Editing font button 53 Editing options 56 export 37 F F1 help key 21, 39 fields data-entry 356 file dialog windows 358 File Locations 472 File Manager 35, 104, 105, 106, 107, 404 File menu 35, 36, 37, 42, 81, 90, 93, 200, 323, 343 File menu Import 42 File types used in Total Eclipse 34 Files

text 34 Fill in blanks 247, 251, 323, 332 Fill in blanks list files 252 Filling in blanks 251 Find command marking dictionary entries 86 Fixed line paragraph dictionary command 112, 335 Flush delay 294 Fold size 121 Font 49, 53, 56, 65, 68, 69, 70, 72, 73, 112, 115, 116, 123, 173, 202, 204, 205, 207, 214, 216, 219, 229, 232, 237, 238, 239, 240, 313, 335, 479 Font character spacing 238 dictionary command 112, 335 dictionary entries 115 display 70 setting for entire document 238 setting for one paragraph 239 setting for paragrah format 238 setting for paragraph labels 239 setting for parts of paragraph 239 setting for selected text 239 size 237 subscript and superscript 237 underlining 240 Footers setting default 232 Form fields capitalizing contents 248 empty fields 247, 248 indicating the last blank 248 prompting for contents 247 right flush margin 248 size 246 variables 246 Format menu 50, 327 Formats copying 213 master and current document 213 Formatting overview 213 G Generic numbers setting 138 Global magic 155, 156 Index

523

Globaling 150 adding dictionary entries during 162 applying 161 applying to specific dictionaries 160 capitalization 156 changing default dictionary 159 correcting misstrokes 127 dictionaries 159 overview 152 scanning, combined with 154 selecting strokes 161 spell checking 154 trash global 152 Globals 49, 56, 81, 94, 156, 159, 160 Globals dictionary building 81 Glue entries 414 Glue entry dictionary command 112, 335 Glue numbers 137 Graphics (text boxes) 243 Grouping word 446 H HASP key 21 Headers inserting 231 line numbering 231 Help 39 Contents tab 39 Index tab 39 Search tab 39 Help button 21, 39 Help menu 21, 39 Hidden Text 416 Hyperkeys 23, 325 Hyperkeys printing a list of 257 Hyphenated suffixes 502 I icon bar 23 Ignore written numbers 136 import 37 Info bar 25 Info bar settings 28 Input settings settings 56 Insert mode 148 Index 524

Installing Total Eclipse 21 Instant Realtime 323 Integral prefix/suffix 504 Internationalizing a word 174 Internet support 40 Internet-based automated file repository system 316 Italics 173 J Job variables 246 Jobs directory 62 K Keyboard assigning shortcut keys 255 removing keyboard assignments 256 keyboard commands for marking text in data-entry fields 358 for navigating dialog windows 357 Keyboard shortcuts 35 L Labels changing 218 creating new 218 font styles 219 removing 219 speaker 187 Lesson player 40 Line number font 232 Line numbers display 72 Lines width 241 List files 249 creating 249 Locate Next command 122, 187, 323 Locate Previous command 122, 187, 323 Lock space dictionary command 112, 335 Lockspaces displaying 72 inserting 176 M Macros editing 259 with dialogs 261 main program window 347 Main program window 24 Margins 216

changing with the document ruler 217 Marking text 49 enclosing in punctuation 172 removing spaces 172 stitching 171 Master font list dictionary entries for font changes 115 Master formats 213 Maximum WPM 312 Menus main 36 Metadictionary 459 Metadictionary Syntax and Codes 424 Misstrokes 126 Move menu 47, 48, 122, 323 MSN audio 317 multi-line edit fields 356 Multi-scan 25, 38, 151, 152, 323, 351 multiple document interface (MDI) 354 N Network directory 62 New paragraph dictionary command 112, 335 New user 63 New user setup wizard 41 New Window 67 New Window command 354 Non-capping words 134 Non-resolved translation 151 Normalization Entries 443 Note files 34 combining 122 marking 122 moving the cursor 121 opening 120 previewing 45 repeating a search 122 searching in 122 translating 45 Notebar options Dictionary entries option 73 Phonetic strokes 74 Notebar Options 73 Notes reading 44 Number processing settings options 56 Number templates 139

Numbers beginning of sentences 140 changing written to numeral 140 creating and changing templates 138 delimiters 137 dictionary command 113, 336 dictionary commands 111 editing 189 large 140 setting formats 135 templates 137 writing out 136, 140 O online help 39 Open Dictionary 35, 404 Open Notes 34 Open Text 34 Ordinal numbers 138 Output to ASCII 323 Output to Printer 323 P page boundaries 74 Page break 237 page color, changing 71 Page number codes for 233 controlling page numbering 234 padding, leading characters 233 Page number font 232 Page number format 233 changing (print command) 234 changing within document 234 Paragraph data 50 Paragraph formats 49, 56, 179 Answer, dictionary command 112, 335 assigning to paragraph 179 changing 214, 215 margins 216 paragraph numbers 227 Parenthetic, dictionary command 112, 335 predefined 214 tab stops 220 text alignment 220 Paragraph tab 213 Paragraphs combining 182 creating new 215 inserting 180 Index

525

Password protecting user settings 62 Paste command blocks 169 pause audio 318 Period 177 dictionary command 113, 336 Permission strings in prefixes 504 Phone numbers 309 Add button 310 Clear button 310 Delete button 310 Save button 310 Phonetic untranslates 144 Phonetics table 462 play back audio 318 Possessives 178 Prefix and suffix definitions 463 Prefixes adding/deleting in list 174 inserting 174 print 201 Print commands dictionary syntax 112, 335 footer 232 inserting 51 resume element 228 viewing 236 volume number 234 Print setup 52 Printing 52, 201 draft 202 excerpts 203, 204 note files 123 range of pages 203 transcripts 204 Production menu52, 118, 195, 214, 293, 323, 343 Production menu Open Dictionary 81, 82, 323 Output to ASCII 52, 198 Stop translation 146 User settings 41, 55, 118 Programming tab - User Settings 457 Punctuation apostrophe, dictionary command 113, 336 at end of sentence, inserting 177 comma, dictionary command 113, 336 dash, dictionary command 113, 336 Index 526

hyphen, dictionary command 113, 336 parentheses, dictionary command 113, 336 quotation marks, dictionary command 113, 336 toggle 177 within quotation marks 177 Q Question mark 177 changing key assignment 179 dictionary command 113, 336 Question paragraph 181 Question paragraphs dictionary command 112, 335 Quoted text 189 Quoted text paragraph map 189, 468 R Read notes 23, 44, 45, 119, 323 Read notes previewing notes 119 Reading notes appending notes to other notes 120 setup 118 step-by-step instructions 119 Realtime 293 following the translation 294 macros 257 output formats 303 settings 56 Recent menu 37 Redacted text 170 Regex checkbox 185 Regular Expressions 480 Replacing text 184 Resizing dialog boxes 31 restore 105 Retran 157 Revert settings 58 Roman numerals converting to 189 RTF/CRE 93 Running Total Eclipse 23 S Save settings 41 saving files 35 Scanning 48, 151 types 151 Script selection in Font dialog 240

SDIF 93 Searches repeating 187 Searching dictionaries 96 Searching text limiting to paragraph format 186 limiting to within words 186 print commands 186 upper and lower case searching 186 Selecting text 164 keyboard shortcuts 165 marking <F7> 86, 166 paragraph with <Shift> 165 <Shift> 164 Send To command 362 Shortcuts table of 323 Simplifying dialog boxes 32 single-line edit fields in dialog windows 356 Slop Strokes 467 Social Security numbers 138 Spacebar commands Edit tab checkbox 147 Spacing paragraph setting 219 Speaker label selecting for new Speaker paragraph 181 Speaker labels inserting 187 separation character 232 Speaker List (aka Speaker Table) 129 Speaker separator 232 Spell checking adding words to the spell dictionary 194 dictionary entries 94 Ignore button 192 selecting dictionaries 194, 363 single word 193 Spelling exceptions 467 Split command 353 Split Window (Realtime) 303 Starting row 312 Statistics 145 Statusbar 25 steno emulator 83, 379 Steno filter regular expressions 466 Steno width 73

Stentura dictionary format 93 Stop translation 37, 321 Stop translation Production menu command 293 Subscript 173 Suffix spelling rules 466 Suffix Spelling Rules 508 Superscript 173 Symbols inserting 173 T Tab dictionary command 113, 336 Task bar 25 text click-and-drag 164 Text Attributes 172 Text boxes 243 Text boxes adding lines 241 changing in document window 241 changing line thickness 242 creating 240 editable in document window 241 moving 241 moving a line without affecting others 243 space between double lines 242 Text filter regular expressions 466 Tildes 72 Tile 67 Tile command 355 Time format for number conversions 137 Timecode calculator 230 Timecodes 221 setting up 221, 229 Timekeeper 513 toggle case 150 Toolbars 38, 333 Toolbars, customizable 38, 333 Toolbars, floating 352 Toolbars, moving 38, 352 Tools menu 36, 42, 81, 83, 104, 105, 160, 309, 327 Transfer command 89, 167 translate 35, 404 Translate command 141 Translate Mode command 120 Index

527

translate notes 45, 141, 145 Translating Answer paragraphs 128 including block files 144 keeping words together 128 overriding capitalization 129 overview of process 117 phonetic equivalents for untranslates 125 setting dictionaries 142 setup 125 Translation options 56 setting default dictionaries 95 Translation Magic 127 Translation magic weight setting 128 Transparency of dialog boxes 32 Tutorial 21 Typeover tracking 458 U Underscore 172 undo command in data-entry fields 358 Undo command 47 Unglobal 156 Unresolved conflict 151 Untran borders 126 Untranslates scanning for 151 Upper case dictionary command 112, 335 User file 55 User information files 24 User name 55 User Settings 41 automatically load last used 57 dialog 55 exporting 58 global settings 60 importing 59, 516 saving 58 switching among 57 User settings | Display 51, 53, 69, 70 Input 44 Paragraphs 49 User Settings | Display 70, 72, 74, 116, 127, 224 User settings transfer 516 Index 528

Users 55 Users setting up 41 V view A/V toolbar command 352 view Edit toolbar command 352 view Main toolbar command 352 View toggles 66 Visualizer movies 22 W Waveform display 31 Whitespace display 72 Whole word search 186 Window menu 24, 38, 65, 66, 67, 68, 145, 313, 314, 328, 351, 352, 353, 354 Window menu change Toolbar view 38 View toggles 38 Windows active window 354 arranging 66 Back button in file dialog windows 360 checkmarks in menus 344 click-and-drag 342 closing windows 348 combo box 357 context-sensitive menus 345 in file dialog windows 361 Create New Folder button in file dialog windows 361 Details button 360 dialog windows 355 double-click 342 file 359 File list field 360 File name field in file dialog windows 361 Files of Type field 361 folders 359 help button on window title bar 350 horizontal scroll bars 351 keyboard commands for viewing pull-down lists 357 keyboard commands for moving windows 349

keyboard commands for resizing windows 349 left-handed mouse 342 list boxes in dialog windows 357 List button 360 Look in field 360 maximizing windows 347 menus 343 minimizing windows 348 mouse 341 Mouse click, defined 342 Move command 349 moving 349 nesting of files and folders 359 Open button in file dialog windows 361 pointers 343 pull-down lists in dialog windows 357 resizing windows 348 restoring windows 348 right-click 342, 345 scroll bars 351 shift-click 342 Size command 349 spin controls in dialog windows 357 splitter bars 353

status bars submenus system menus title bar of a window toggle toolbars types in Eclipse underlined letters in menus wildcards in file dialog windows windows active defined Windows operating system Windows Vista WinZip Word flip Word list Write (extract) command Writer specifying WYSIWYG Z Zip Code Zoom Zoom in Zoom out Zoom dialog boxes

350 344 344 350 344 352 347 343 361 346 341 341 33 107 149 93 122 118 74 138 68 68 68 32

Index 529